Buddhist Boards
Discuss Anything and Everything about Buddhism
Downloaded from the Buddhist Boards information site. Please do not commercially redistribute this document nor take off the Buddhist Boards logo.

FOREWORD. It is somewhat hard to realize, seeing how important and valuable the work has been, that when
ROBERT CAESAR CHILDERS published, in 1872, the first volume of his Pali Dictionary, he only had at his command a few pages of the canonical Pali books. Since then, owing mainly to the persistent labours of the Pali Text Society, practically the whole of these books, amounting to between ten and twelve thousand pages, have been made available to scholars. These books had no authors. They are anthologies which gradually grew up in the community. Their composition, as to the Vinaya and the four Nikāyas (with the possible exception of the supplements) was complete within about a century of the Buddha's death; and the rest belong to the following century. When scholars have leisure to collect and study the data to be found in this preSanskrit literature, it will necessarily throw as much light on the history of ideas and language as the study of such names and places as are mentioned in it (quite incidentally) has already thrown upon the political divisions, social customs, and economic conditions of ancient India.
Some of these latter facts I have endeavoured to collect in my ʻBuddhist Indiaʼ; and perhaps the most salient discovery is the quite unexpected conclusion that, for about two centuries (both before the Buddha's birth and after his death), the paramount power in India was Kosala -- a kingdom stretching from Nepal on the North to the Ganges on the South, and from the Ganges on the West to the territories of the Vajjian confederacy on the East. In this, the most powerful kingdom in India; there had naturally arisen a standard vernacular differing from the local forms of speech just as standard English differs from the local (usually county) dialects. The Pali of the canonical books is based on that standard Kosala vernacular as spoken in the 6th and 7th centuries B. C. It cannot be called the ʻliteraryʼ form of that vernacular, for it was not written at all till long afterwards. That vernacular was the mother tongue of the Buddha. He was born in what is now Nepal, but was then a district under the suzerainty of Kosala and in one of the earliest Pali documents he is represented as calling himself a Kosalan.
When, about a thousand years afterwards, some pandits in Ceylon began to write in Pali, they wrote in a style strikingly different from that of the old texts. Part of that difference is no doubt due simply to a greater power of fluent expression unhampered by the necessity of constantly considering that the words composed had to be learnt by heart. When the Sinhalese used Pali, they were so familiar with the method of writing on palmleaves that the question of memorizing simply did not arise. It came up again later. But none of the works belonging to this period were intended to be learnt. They were intended to be read.
Page VI
On the other hand they were for the most part reproductions of older material that had, till then, been preserved in Sinhalese. Though the Sinhalese pandits were writing in Pali, to them, of course, a dead language, they probably did their thinking in their own mother tongue. Now they had had then, for many generations, so close and intimate an intercourse with their Dravidian neighbours that Dravidian habits of speech had crept into Sinhalese. It was inevitable that some of the peculiarities of their own tongue, and especially these Dravidanisms, should have influenced their style when they wrote in Pali. It will be for future scholars to ascertain exactly how far this influence can be traced in the idioms and in the order of the arrangement of the matter of these Ceylon Pali books of the fifth and sixth centuries A. D.
There is no evidence that the Sinhalese at that time knew Sanskrit. Some centuries afterwards a few of them learnt the elements of classical Sanskrit and very proud they were of it. They introduced the Sanskrit forms of Sinhalese words when writing ʻhighʼ Sinhalese. And the authors of such works as the Dāṭhāvaŋsa, the Saddhammopāyana, and the Mahābodhivaŋsa, make use of Pali words derived from Sanskrit <-> that is, they turned into Pali form certain Sanskrit words they found either in the Amara--koṣa, or in the course of their very limited reading, and used them as Pali. It would be very desirable to have a

list of such Pali words thus derived from Sanskrit. It would not be a long one.
Here we come once more to the question of memory. From the 11th cent. onwards it became a sort of fashion to write manuals in verse, or in prose and verse, on such subjects as it was deemed expedient for novices to know. Just as the first book written in Pali in Ceylon was a chain of memoriter verses strung together by very indifferent Pali verses, so at the end we have these scarcely intelligible memoriter verses meant to be learned by heart by the pupils.
According to the traditions handed down among the Sinhalese, Pali, that is, the language used in the texts, could also be called Māgadhī. What exactly did they mean by that? They could not be referring to the Māgadhī of the Prakrit grammarians, for the latter wrote some centuries afterwards. Could they have meant the dialect spoken in Magadha at the date when they used the phrase, say, the sixth century A. D.? That could only be if they had any exact knowledge of the different vernaculars of North India at the time. For that there is no evidence, and it is in itself very improbable. What they did mean is probably simply the language used by Asoka, the king of Magadha. For their traditions also stated that the texts had been brought to them officially by Asoka's son Mahinda; and not in writing, but in the memory of Mahinda and his companions. Now we know something of the language of Asoka. We have his edicts engraved in different parts of India, differing slightly in compliance with local varieties of speech. Disregarding these local differences, what is left may be considered the language of head--quarters where these edicts were certainly drafted. This ʻMāgadhīʼ contains none of the peculiar characteristics we associate with the Māgadhī dialect. It is in fact a younger form of that standard Kosalan lingua franca mentioned above.
Now it is very suggestive that we hear nothing of how the king of Magadha became also king of Kosala. Had this happened quietly, by succession, the event would have scarcely altered the relation of the languages of the two kingdoms. That of the older and larger would still have retained its supremacy. So when the Scottish dynasty succeeded to the English throne, the two languages remained distinct, but English became more and more the standard.
Page VII
However this may be, it has become of essential importance to have a Dictionary of a language the history of whose literature is bound up with so many delicate and interesting problems. The Pali Text Society, after long continued exertion and many cruel rebuffs and disappointments is now at last in a position to offer to scholars the first instalment of such a dictionary.
The merits and demerits of the work will be sufficiently plain even from the first fasciculus. But one or two remarks are necessary to make the position of my colleague and myself clear.
We have given throughout the Sanskrit roots corresponding to the Pali roots, and have omitted the latter. It may be objected that this is a strange method to use in a Pali dictionary, especially as the vernacular on which Pali is based had never passed through the stage of Sanskrit. That may be so; and it may not be possible, historically, that any Pali word in the canon could have been actually derived from the corresponding Sanskrit word. Nevertheless the Sanskrit form, though arisen quite independently, may throw light upon the Pali form; and as Pali roots have not yet been adequately studied in Europe, the plan adopted will probably, at least for the present, be more useful.
This work is essentially preliminary. There is a large number of words of which we do not know the derivation. There is a still larger number of which the derivation does not give the meaning, but rather the reverse. It is so in every living language. Who could guess, from the derivation, the complicated meaning of such words as ʻconscienceʼ, ʻemotionʼ, ʻdispositionʼ? The
derivation would be as likely to mislead as to guide. We have made much progress. No one needs now to use the one English
word ʻdesireʼ as a translation of sixteen distinct Pali words, no one of which means precisely desire. Yet this was done in Vol. X
of the Sacred Books of the East by MAX MüLLER and FAUSBöLL See Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS in J R A S., 1898, p. 58.. The same argument applies to as many concrete words as abstract ones. Here again we claim to have made much advance. But in either case, to wait for perfection would postpone the much needed dictionary to the Greek kalends. It has therefore been decided to proceed as rapidly as possible with the completion of this first edition, and to reserve the proceeds of the sale for the eventual issue of a second edition which shall come nearer to our ideals of what a Pali Dictionary should be.
We have to thank Mrs. STEDE for valuable help in copying out material noted in my interleaved copy of Childers, and in collating indexes published by the Society; Mrs. RHYS DAVIDS for revising certain articles on the technical terms of psychology and philosophy; and the following scholars for kindly placing at our disposal the material they had collected for the now abandoned scheme of an international Pali Dictionary:
Prof. STEN KONOW. Words beginning with S or H. (Published in J P T S. 1909 and 1907, revised by Prof. Dr. D. ANDERSEN). Dr. MABEL H. BODE. B, Bh and M.

Dr. W. H. D. ROUSE. C--Ñ.
In this connection I should wish to refer to the work of Dr. EDMOND HARDY. When he died he left a great deal of material; some of which has reached us in time to be made available. He was giving his whole time, and all his enthusiasm to the work, and had he lived the dictionary would probably have been finished before the war. His loss was really the beginning
of the end of the international undertaking.
Anybody familiar with this sort of work will know what care and patience, what scholarly knowledge and judgment are
involved in the collection of such material, in the sorting, the sifting and final arrangement of it, in the adding of cross
references, in the consideration of etymological puzzles, in the comparison and correction of various or faulty readings, and in
the verification of references given by others, or found in the indexes. For all this work the users of the Dictionary will have to
thank my colleague, Dr. WILLIAM STEDE. It may be interesting to notice here that the total number of references to appear in this first edition of the new dictionary is estimated to be between one hundred and fifty and one hundred and sixty thousand.
The Bavarian Academy has awarded to Dr. STEDE a personal grant of 3100 marks for his work on this Dictionary.
Chipstead, Surrey. July, 1921.
A. List of the Chiefs Books consulted for Vocabulary (with Abbreviations).
1a Canonical. Anguttara--Nikāya 5 vols. P T S. 1885<-> 1900 (A).
Buddha--Vaŋsa P T S. 1882 (Bu).
Cariyā--Piṭaka P T S. 1882 (Cp.).
Dhammapada P T S. 1914 (Dh).
Dhamma--Sangaṇi P T S. 1885 (Dhs). Dīgha--Nikāya 3 vols. P T S. (D).
Iti--vuttaka P T S. 1890 (It.).
Kathā--Vatthu 2 vols. P T S. 1894, 95 (Kvu). Khuddaka--Pāṭha P T S. 1915 (Kh). Majjhima--Nikāya 3 vols. P T S. 1887<-> 1902 (M). Niddesa I Mahā° 2 vols. P T S. 1916, 17 (Nd1). Niddesa II Culla° P T S. 1918 (Nd2). Paṭisambhidāmagga 2 vols. P T S. 1905, 1907 (Ps). Peta--Vatthu P T S. 1889 (Pv).
Puggala--Paññatti P T S. 1883 (Pug). Saŋyutta--Nikāya 5 vols. P T S. 1884<-> 1898 (S). Sutta--Nipāta P T S. 1913 (Sn).
Thera--therīgāthā P T S. 1883 (Th 1) & (Th 2). Udāna P T S. 1885 (Ud).
Vibhanga P T S. 1904 (Vbh).
Vimāna--Vatthu P T S. 1886 (Vv).
Vinaya--Piṭaka 5 vols. London 1879<-> 83 (Vin). Apadāna P.T.S. 1925 (Ap).
Dukapaṭṭhāna, P.T.S. 1906 (Dukp).
Tikapaṭṭhāna, 3 vols. P.T.S. 1921--23 (Tikp).
1b Post--Canonical.

Atthasālinī, P T S. 1897 (DhsA).
Buddhadatta's Manuals, P T S. 1915 (Bdhd).
Dāṭhāvaŋsa, J P T S. 1884 (Dāvs).
Dhammapada Commentary, 4 vols. P T S. 1906--14 (DhA).
Dīpavaŋsa, London 1879 (Dpvs).
Jātaka, 6 vols. London 1877--96 (J).
Khuddaka--Pāṭha Commentary, P T S. 1915 (KhA).
Khuddhasikkhā, J.T.P.S. 1883 (Khus).
Mahāvaŋsa, P T S. 1908 (Mhvs).
Mahā--Bodhi--Vaŋsa, P T S. 1891 (Mhbv).
Milindapañha, London 1880 (Miln).
Mūlasikkhā, J.P.T.S. 1883 (Mūls).
Netti--Pakaraṇa, P T S. 1902 (Nett).
Pañca--gati--dīpana, J P T S. 1884 (Pgdp).
Peta--Vatthu Commentary, P T S. 1894 (PvA).
Puggala--Paññatti Commentary, J P T S. 1914 (Pug A).
Saddhammopāyana, J P T S. 1887 (Sdhp).
Sumangala--Vilāsinī, vol. I, P T S. 1886 (DA I).
Manoratha--pūraṇī P.T.S. 1924 (AA); Samanta--pāsādikā P.T.S. 1924 (Sam. Pās. or Vin A). Papañca Sūdanī, pt. I, P.T.S. 1922 (MA).
Sammoha--Vinodanī, P.T.S. 1923 (VbhA).
Page X
Sutta--Nipāta Commentary, 2 vols. P T S. 1916--17 (SnA). Therīgāthā Commentary, P T S. 1891 (ThA). Vimāna--Vatthu Commentary, P T S. 1901 (VvA). Visuddhi--Magga, 2 vols. P T S. 1920<-> 21 (Vism). Yogāvacara's Manual, P.T.S. 1896 (Yog).
Note. The system adopted in quotations of passages from Pali text is that proposed in J P T S. 1909, pp. 385--87, with this modification that Peta--vatthu (Pv) is quoted by canto and verse, and Culla--Niddesa (Nd2) by number of word in "Explanatory Matter".
Avadāna--śataka, ed. J. S. Speyer (Bibl. Buddhica III), 2 vols., St. Pétersbourg 1906. (Av. Ś.).
Divyâvadāna, ed. Cowell & Neil, Cambridge 1886. (Divy).
Jātaka--mālā, ed. H. Kern (Harvard Or. Ser. I), Boston 1891. (Jtm).
Lalita--vistara, ed. S. Lefmann, I. Halle 1902. (Lal. V.).
Mahā--vastu, ed. É. Senart, 3 vols., Paris 1882--1897. (Mvst).
Śikṣā--samuccaya. Ed. C. Bendall, St. Petersburg, 1902 (Śikṣ).
The ed. of Lalitavistara which I have used, and from which I quote, is the Calcutta ed. (1877), by Rājendralāla Mitra (Bibl. Indica), and not Lefmann's.
Buddh. Manual of Psychological Ethics (trsl. of the Dhamma--sangaṇi) by Mrs. Rhys Davids (R. As. Soc. Trsl. Fund XII), London 1900. (Dhs trsl.).
Compendium of Philosophy (trsl. of the Abhidhamm'attha--sangaha) by S. Z. Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1910. (Cpd.).
Dialogues of the Buddha, trsl. by T. W. and C. A. F. Rhys Davids, London I. 1899; II. 1910; III. 1921. (Dial.).
Expositor (trsl. of the Attha--sālinī), by Maung Tin, P T S. Trsl. 1920, 21.

Kathāvatthu trsl. ("Points of Controversy), by Aung and Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1915. (Kvu trsl.). Kindred Sayings (Saŋyutta Nikāya I), by Mrs. Rhys Davids, P T S. Trsl. 1917. (K S.).
Mahāvaŋsa trsl. by W. Geiger, P T S. Trsl. 1912.
Manual of a Mystic (Yogâvacara), trs. by F. L. Woodward, P T S. Trsl. 1916. (Mystic).
Neumann, K. E., Lieder der Mönche und Nonnen, Berlin 1899.
Psalms of the Brethren (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1913.
Psalms of the Sisters (trsl. Mrs. Rhys Davids), P T S. Trsl. 1909.
Questions of Milinda (trsl. T. W. Rhys Davids), S B E. vols. 35, 36. (Miln).
Vinaya Texts (trsl. Rhys Davids & Oldenberg), S B E. vols. 13, 17, 20. (Vin T.). Neumann, Die Reden Gotamo Buddha's (Mittlere Sammlung), Vols. I to III2 1921. Human Types, P.T.S. trsl. 1924 (Pug trsl.) and insert accordingly on p. xi under B 1. Path of Purity, P.T.S. trsl. 1923, 1st pt. (Vism. Trsl.).
4. GRAMMATICAL & OTHER LITERATURE; PERIODICALS, ETC. Abhidhānappadīpikā, ed. W. Subhūti, Colombo1 1883. (Abhp.).
Andersen, D., A Pāli Reader, 2 pts; Copenhagen 1901, 1907.
Aufrecht, Th., Halāyudha's Abhidhāna--ratna--māḷā, London 1861.
Brugmann, K., Kurze vergleichende Grammatik der indogerm. Sprachen, Strassburg 1902. Childers, R. C., A Dictionary of the Pāli Language, London 1874.
Brāhmaṇa (Br.).
Dhātupāṭha & Dhātumañjūsā, ed. Andersen & Smith, Copenhagen 1921 (Dhtp, Dhtm). Śatapatha--Brāhmaṇa (trsl. J. Eggeling) (Śat. Br.) SBE vols.
Page XI
Geiger, W., Pāli Literatur und Sprache, Strassburg 1916. (Geiger, P. Gr.). Grassmann, W., Wörterbuch zum Rig Veda, Leipzig 1873.
Journal of the American Oriental Society (J A O S.).
Journal Asiatique, Paris (J. As.)
Journal of the Pāli Text Society (J P T S.).
Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, London (J R A S.).
Kaccāyana--ppakaraṇa, ed. & trsl. Senart (J. As. 1871) (Kacc).
Kern, H., Toevoegselen op 't Woordenboek van Childers; 2 pts (Verhandelingen Kon. Ak. van Wetenschappen te Amsterdam N. R. XVI, 5), Amsterdam 1916. (Toev.).
Kuhn's Zeitschrift für vergleichende Sprachforschung (K Z.).
Mahāvyutpatti, ed. Mironow (Bibl. Buddhica XIII) St. Pétersbourg 1910, 11. (Mvyut).
Müller, Ed., Simplified Grammar of the Pali Language, London 1884.
Trenckner, V., Notes on the Milindapañho, in J P T S. 1908, 102 sq.
Uhlenbeck, H., Kurzgefasstes Etym. Wörterbuch d. Altindischen Sprache, Amsterdam 1898.
Walde, A., Lateinisches Etymologisches Wörterbuch, Heidelberg2 1910.
Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft, Leipzig 1847 sq. (Z D M S.).
Kirfel, W. Kosmographie der Inder, Bonn & Leipzig 1920.
1. Titles of Books (the no. refers to section of A). A Anguttara......1a
Abhp Abhidhānappadīpikā. . . 4 Ap Apadāna.......1a
Av. Ś. Avadāna--śataka . . . . 2

Bdhd Buddhadatta . . . . . 1 Brethren: see Psalms. . . . . . 3 Bu Buddha--vaŋsa . . . . . 1a Cp Cariyā--piṭaka . . . . . 1a Cpd Compendium.....3 D Dīgha........1a
Dāvs Dāṭhā--vaŋsa . . . . . 1b Dh Dhammapada.....1a Dhs Dhammasangaṇi . . . . 1a Dhstrsl. Atthasālinī......3 Dial. Dialogues......3
Divy Divyâvadāna . . . . . 2 Dpvs Dīpavaŋsa......1b Halāyudha: see Aufrecht . . . . 4 It Itivuttaka......1a
J Jātaka.......1b
JAOS. JournalAmer.Or.Soc..4
J As. Journal Asiatique. . . . 4 JPTS. JournalPāliTextSoc..4
J R A S. Journal Royal Asiatic Soc. 4 Jtm Jātakamālā......2
Kacc Kaccāyana......4
Lal. V. Lalita Vistara. . . . . 2
M Majjhima......1a
Mhbv Mahābodhi--vaŋsa. . . . 1b Mhvs Mahāvaŋsa......1b Miln Milinda--pañha . . . . . 1b MVastu Mahā--vastu......2 Mvyut Mahāvyutpatti. . . . . 4 Mystic: see Manual . . . . . . 3
Khuddakapāṭha . . . . 1a Kindred Sayings. . . . 3 Kathāvatthu . . . . . 1a
Kuhn's Zeitschrift . . . 4
Ps Paṭisambhidā--magga. . . 1a Pug Puggala--paññatti . . . . 1a Pv Petavatthu......1a
Mahāniddesa . . . . . 1a Cullaniddesa . . . . . 1a Netti--pakaraṇa. . . . . 1b
Pañcagati--dīpana . . . . 1b
S Saŋyutta.......1a
Sisters: see Psalms . . . . . . 3 Sn Sutta--nipāta . . . . . 1a Th1 Theragāthā......1a Th2 Therīgāthā......1a Toev. Toevoegselen . . . . . 4
Sacred Books of the East. 3 Saddhammopāyana . . . 1b
Śikṣāsamuccaya . . . . 2

Dukp =Dukapaṭṭhāna . . . 1a.
Paṭṭh =Paṭṭhāna: see Duka° & Tika° . . . 1a. Tikp =Tikapaṭṭhāna . . . 1a.
VbhA =Sammoha--Vinodanī . . . 1b. Vism. Trsl. =Path of Purity . . . 3.
age XII
Ud Udāna.......1a
Vbh Vibhanga......1a
Vin Vinaya.......1a
Vism Visuddhi--magga . . . . 1b
Vv Vimānavatthu . . . . . 1a
Z D M G. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft. . . . . . . . 4
2. General & grammatical terms.
A in combn with a Titleletter (e.g. DhA)=Commentary (on Dh).
abl. ablative
abs. absolute(ly)
abstr. abstract
acc. accusative
act. active
add. addition
adj. adjective
adv. adverb
Ags. Anglo--Saxon
aor. aorist
appl. applied
art. article
attr. attribute
Av. Avesta
BB Burmese MSS
bef. before
BSk. Buddhist Sanskrit
C (& Cy) Commentary (when cited in expln of a Text passage). caus. causative
cert. certain
coll. collective
combd, combn combined, combination
comp. comparative, comparison, composition
cond. conditional
cons. consonant
corr. correct(ed)
correl. correlation, correlative
cp. compare
cpd. compound
dat. dative
Boehtlingk and Roth. Dhātumañjūsa . . . 4.
Dhātupāṭha . . . 4.

den. denominative
der. derived, derivation
des. desiderative
dial. dialect(ical)
diff. different
dist. distinct, distinguished
E. English
e. g. for instance
encl. enclitic
ep. epithet
esp. especially
etym. etymology
exc. except
excl. exclamation, exclusive expl. explanation, explained
f. feminine
fig. figurative(ly)
foll. following
form. formation
fr. from
freq. frequently, frequentative fut. future
Gall. Gallic
gen. genitive
ger. gerund
Ger. German
Goth. Gothic
Gr. Greek
gram. grammar, °atical
grd. gerundive
ibid. at the same passage
id. the same
id. p.
i. e.
i. g.
imper. imperative impers. impersonal impf. imperfect Ind. Index
identical passage that is
in general
ind. indicative indecl. indeclinable indef. indefinite
inf. infinitive
instr. instrumental interr. interrogative intrs. intransitive iter. iterative
Lat. Latin
l. c. loco citato
lit. literal(ly), literary

Lit. Lithuanian
loc. locative
m. masculine
med. medium (middle) N. Name
n. noun, note
nom. nominative
Np. Name of person Npl. Name of place
nt. neuter
num. numeral
Obulg. Old--bulgarian Ohg. Old--high--german Oicel. Old--icelandic Oir. Old--irish
onom. onomatopoetic opp. opposed, opposite ord. ordinal, ordinary orig. original(ly)
P. Pāli
part. particle
pass. passive
perf. perfect
pers. personal
pl. plural
pop. popular
poss. possessive
pot. potential
pp. past participle ppr. present participle prec. preceding
pred. predicative pref. prefix
prep. preposition pres. present pret. preterite
pt. part
P T S. Pāli Text Society q. v. quod vide
(which see)
ref. reference, referred refl. reflexive
rel. relation, relative sep. separate(ly)
Prākrit probably pronoun

sg. singular
Sk. Sanskrit
sq. and following
SS. Singhalese MSS.
ster. stereotype
suff. suffix
sup. superlative
s. v. sub voce (under the word mentioned) syn. synonym(ous)
T. Text
trans. transitive
trsl. translated, translation
t. t. technical term
t. t. g. technical term in grammar
v. verse
var. variant, various
var. lect. various reading
voc. vocative
Wtb. Wörterbuch
3. Typographical.
*(s)qṷel indicates a (reconstructed or conjectured) Indogermanic root.
*Sk means, that the Sanskrit word is constructed after the Pāli word; or as Sk. form is only found in lexicographical lists.
â: the cap over a vowel indicates that the ā is the result of a syncope a + a (e. g. khuddânukhudda), whereas ā represents the proper ā, either pure or contracted with a preceding a (khīṇāsava = khīṇa + āsava).
° represents the head--word either as first (°--) or second (--°) part of a compound; sometimes also an easily supplemented part of a word.
> indicates an etymological relation or line of development between the words mentioned.
∼ and ≈ means "at similar" or "at identical, parallel passages".
The meaning of all other abbreviations may easily be inferred from the context.
A A--1
A--1 the prep. ā shortened before double cons., as akkosati (ā + kruś), akkhāti (ā + khyā), abbahati (ā + bṛh). -- Best
to be classed here is the a-- we call expletive. It represents a reduction of ā-- (mostly before liquids and nasals and with single consonant instead of double). Thus anantaka (for ā--nantaka = nantaka) Vv.807; amajjapa (for ā--majjapa = majjapa)
J VI.328; amāpaya (for āmāpaya = māpaya) J VI.518; apassato (= passantassa) J VI.552.
A--2 (an-- before vowels) [Vedic a--, an--; Idg. *n̊, gradation form to *ne (see na2); Gr. a), a)n--; Lat. *en--, in--; Goth., Ohg. & Ags. un--; Oir. an--, in--] neg. part. prefixed to (1) nouns and adjectives; (2) verbal forms, used like (1), whether part., ger., grd. or inf.; (3) finite verbal forms. In compn. with words having originally two initial cons. the latter reappear in their assimilated form (e. g. appaṭicchavin). In meaning it equals na--, nir-- and vi--. Often we find it opp. to sa--. Verbal
negatives which occur in specific verb. function will be enumd. separately, while examples of neg. form. of (1) & (2) are given under their positive form unless the neg. involves a distinctly new concept, or if its form is likely to lead to confusion or misunderstanding. -- Concerning the combining & contrasting (orig. neg.) --a-- (â) in redupl. formations like bhavâ--bhava see ā4.

A--3 [Vedic a--; Idg. *e (loc. of pron. stem, cp. ayaŋ; orig. a deictic adv. with specific reference to the past, cp. Sk sma); Gr. e)--; also in Gr. e)kei_, Lat. equidem, enim] the augment (sign of action in the past), prefixed to the root in pret., aor. & cond. tenses; often omitted in ordinary prose. See forms under each verb; cp. also ajja. Identical with this a-- is the a-- which functions as base of some pron. forms like ato, attha, asu etc. (q. v.).
A--4 the sound a (a--kāra) J VI.328, 552; VvA 279, 307, 311. Aŋsa1
Aŋsa1 [Vedic aŋsa; cp. Gr. w)_mos, Lat. umerus, Goth ams, Arm. us] (a) the shoulder A v. 110; Sn 609. aŋse karoti to put on the shoulder, to shoulder J I.9. (b.) a part (lit. side) (cp. °āsa in koṭṭhāsa and expln of aŋsa as koṭṭhāsa at DA I.312, also v. l. mettāsa for mettaŋsa at It 22). -- atīt'aŋse in former times, formerly D II.224; Th 2, 314. mettaŋsa sharing friendship (with) A IV.151 = It 22 = J IV.71 (in which connection Miln 402 reads ahiŋsā). -- Disjunctive ekena aŋsena . . . ekena aŋsena on the one hand (side) . . . on the other, partly . . . partly A I.61. From this: ekaŋsa (adj.) on the one hand (only), i. e. incomplete (opp. ubhayaŋsa) or (as not admitting of a counterpart) definite, certain, without doubt (opp. dvidhā): see ekaŋsa. -- paccaŋsena according to each one's share A III.38. puṭaŋsena with a knapsack for provisions D I.117; A II 183; cp. DA I.288, with v. l. puṭosena at both passages.
--kūṭa "shoulder prominence", the shoulder Vin III.127; DhA III.214; IV.136; VvA 121. -- vaṭṭaka a shoulder strap (mostly combd with kāyabandhana; vv. ll. °vaddhaka, °bandhaka) Vin I.204 (T. °bandhaka); II.114 (ddh); IV.170 (ddh); Vv 3340 (T. °bandhana, C. v. l. °vaṭṭaka); DhA III.452.
Aŋsa2 [see next] point, corner, edge; freg. in combn with numerals, e. g. catur° four--cornered, chaḷ°, aṭṭh°, soḷas° etc. (q.
v.) all at Dhs 617 (cp. DhsA 317). In connection with a Vimāna: āyat° with wide or protruding capitals (of its pillars) Vv 8415; as part of a carriagepole Vv 642 (= kubbara--phale patiṭṭhitā heṭṭhima--aŋsā VvA 265).
Aŋsi (f.) [cp. Vedic aśri, aśra, aśani; Gr. a)/kros pointed, a)/kris, also o)cu/s sharp: Lat. ācer sharp. Further connections in Walde Lat. Wtb. under ācer] a corner, edge (= aŋsa2) Vv 782 (= aŋsa--bhāga VvA 303).
Aŋsu [cp. Sk. aŋśu (Halāyudha) a ray of light] a thread Vin III.224. --mālin, sun Sāsv 1.
Akaṭa (adj.) [a + kaṭa] not made, not artificial, natural; °yūsa natural juice Vin I.206.
Akampiyatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. akampiya, grd. of a + kampati] the condition of not being shaken, stableness Miln 354.
Akalu (cp. agalu) an ointment J IV.440 (akaluñ candanañ ca, v. l. BB aggaluŋ; C. expls as kālâkaluñ ca rattacandanañ ca, thus implying a blacking or dark ointment); VI.144 (°candana--vilitta; v. l. BB aggalu°); Miln 338 ( °tagara--tālīsaka--lohita--candana).
Akāca (adj.) [a + kāca] pure, flawless, clear D II.244; Sn 476; J V.203.
Akācin (adj.) = akāca Vv 601. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) proposes reading akkācin (= Sk. arka--arcin shining as the
sun), but VvA 253 expls by niddosa, and there is no v. l. to warrant a misreading.
Akāsiya (adj. --n.) [a + kāsika?] "not from the Kāsī--country" (?); official name of certain tax--gatherers in the king's service J VI.212 (akāsiya--sankhātā rāja--purisā C.).

Akiccakāra (adj.) [a + kicca + kāra] 1. not doing one's duty, doing what ought not to be done A II.67; Dh 292; Miln 66; DA I.296. -- 2. ineffective (of medicine) Miln 151.
Akiriya (adj.) [a + kiriya] not practical, unwise, foolish J III.530 (°rūpa = akattabba--rūpa C.); Miln 250. Akilāsu (adj.) [a + kilāsu] not lazy, diligent, active, untiring S I.47; V.162; J I.109; Miln 382.
Akissava at S I.149 is probably faulty reading for akiñcana.
Akutobhaya (adj.) see ku°.
Akuppa (adj.) [a + kuppa, grd. of kup, cp. BSk. akopya M Vastu III.200] not to be shaken, immovable; sure, steadfast,
safe Vin I.11 (akuppā me ceto--vimutti) = S II.239; Vin II.69; IV.214; D III.273; M I.205, 298; S II.171; A III.119, 198; Miln 361.
Akuppatā (f.) [abstr. fr. last] "state of not being shaken", surety, safety; Ep. of Nibbāna Th 1, 364.
Akka [cp. Sk. arka] N. of a plant: Calotropis Gigantea, swallow--wort M I.429 (°assa jiyā bowstrings made from that plant).
--nāla a kind of dress material Vin I.306 (vv. ll. agga° & akkha°). --vāṭa a kind of gate to a plantation, a movable fence made of the akka plant Vin II.154 (cp. akkha--vāṭa).
Akkanta [pp. of akkamati] stepped upon, mounted on A I.8; J I.71; Miln 152; DhA I.200.
Akkandati [ā + kandati, krand] to lament, wail, cry S IV.206.
Akkamana (nt.) [cp. BSk. ākramaṇa Jtm 3158] going near, approaching, stepping upon, walking to J I.62.
Akkamati [ā + kamati, kram] to tread upon, to approach, attack J I.7, 279; ThA 9; -- to rise Vin III. 38. -- ger. akkamma Cp. III.72. -- pp. akkanta (q. v.).
Akkuṭṭha (adj. n.) [pp. of akkosati] 1. (adj.) being reviled, scolded, railed at Sn 366 (= dasahi akkosavatthūhi abhisatto SnA 364); J VI.187. -- 2. (nt.) reviling, scolding, swearing at; in combn akkuṭṭha--vandita Sn 702 (= akkosa--vandana SnA 492) Th 2, 388 (expln ThA 256 as above).
Akkula (adj.) [= ākula] confused, perplexed, agitated, frightened Ud 5 (akkulopakkula and akkulapakkulika). See ākula.
Akkosa [ā + kruś = kruñc, see kuñca & koñca2; to sound, root kr̥, see note on gala] shouting at, abuse, insult, reproach, reviling Sn 623; Miln 8 (+ paribhāsa); SnA 492; ThA 256; PvA 243; DhA II.61.
--vatthu always as dasa a°--vatthūni 10 bases of abuse, 10 expressions of cursing J I.191; SnA 364, 467; DhA I.212; IV.2. Akkosaka (adj.) [from last] one who abuses, scolds or reviles, + paribhāsaka A II.58; III.252; IV.156; V.317; PvA 251.
Akkosati [to krus see akkosa] to scold, swear at, abuse, revile J I.191; II.416; III.27; DhA I.211; II.44. Often combd with paribhāsati, e. g. Vin II.296; DhA IV.2; PvA 10. -- aor. akkocchi Dh 3; J III.212 (= akkosi DhA I.43. Der. wrongly fr. krudh by Kacc. VI.417; cp. Franke, Einh. Pāli--gramm. 37, and Geiger, P. Gr. § 164). --pp. akkuṭṭha (q. v.).

Akkha1 [Vedic akṣa; Av. aša; Gr. a)/cwn a(/maca ohariot with one axle); Lat. axis; Ohg. etc. ahsa, E. axle, to root of Lat. ago, Sk. aj] the axle of a wheel D II.96; S V.6; A I.112; J I.109, 192; V.155 (akkhassa phalakaŋ yathā; C.: suvaṇṇaphalakaŋ
viya, i. e. shiny, like the polished surface of an axle); Miln 27 (+ īsā + cakka), 277 (atibhārena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati:
the axle of the cart breaks when the load is too heavy); PvA 277. --akkhaŋ abbhañjati to lubricate the axle S IV.177; Miln 367.
--chinna one whose axle is broken; with broken axle S I.57; Miln 67. --bhagga with a broken axle J V.433. --bhañjana the breaking of the axle DhA I.375; PvA 277.
Akkha2 [Vedic akṣa, prob. to akṣi & Lat. oculus, "that which has eyes" i. e. a die; cp. also Lat. ālea game at dice (fr.* asclea?)] a die D I.6 (but expld at DA I.86 as ball--game: guḷakīḷa); S I.149 = A V.171 = Sn 659 (appamatto ayaŋ kali yo akkhesu dhanaparājayo); J I.379 (kūṭ° a false player, sharper, cheat) anakkha one who is not a gambler J V.116 (C.: ajūtakara). Cp. also accha3.
--dassa (cp. Sk. akṣadarśaka) one who looks at (i. e. examines) the dice, an umpire, a judge Vin III.47; Miln 114, 327, 343 (dhamma--nagare). --dhutta one who has the vice of gambling D II.348; III.183; M III.170; Sn 106 (+ itthidhutta & surādhutta). --vāṭa fence round an arena for wrestling J IV.81. (? read akka--).
Akkha3 (adj.) (--°) [to akkhi] having eyes, with eyes PvA 39 (BB. rattakkha with eyes red from weeping, gloss on
assumukha). Prob. akkhaṇa is connected with akkha.
Akkhaka [akkha1 + ka] the collar--bone Vin IV.213 (adhakkhakaŋ); Y.216.
Akkhaṇa [a + khaṇa, BSk. akṣaṇa AvŚ I.291 = 332] wrong time, bad luck, misadventure, misfortune. There are 9 enumd at D III.263; the usual set consists of 8; thus D III.287; VvA 193; Sdhp 4 sq. See also khaṇa.
--vedhin (adj. n.) a skilled archer, one who shoots on the moment, i. e. without losing time, expld as one who shoots without missing (the target) or as quickly as lightning (akkhaṇa = vijju). In var. combns.; mostly as durepātin a. A I.284 (+
mahato kāyassa padāletā); II.170 sq. (id.), 202; IV.423, 425; J II.91 (expld as either "avirādhita<11>--vedhī" or
"akkhaṇaŋ vuccati vijju": one who takes and shoots his arrows as fast as lightning), III.322; IV.494 (C. explns aviraddha--vedhin vijju--ālokena vijjhana<11>--samattha p. 497). In other combn at J I.58 (akkhaṇavedhin +
vālavedhin); V.129 (the 4 kinds of archers: a., vālavedhin, saddavedhin & saravedhin).
In BSk. we find akṣuṇṇavedha (a Sanskritised Pāli form, cp. Mathurā kṣuṇa = Sk. kṣaṇa) at Divy 58, 100, 442 (always with
dūrevedha), where MSS. however read ak<-> ṣuṇa°; also at Lal. Vist. 178. See Divy Index, where trsln is given as "an act of throwing the spear so as to graze the mark" (Schiefner gives "Streifschuss"). -
Note. The explanations are not satisfactory. We should expect either an etym. bearing on the meaning "hitting the centre of the target" (i. e. its "eye") (cp. E. bull's eye), in which case a direct relation to akkha = akkhi eye would not seem improbable (cp. formation ikkhana) or an etym. like "hitting without mishap", in which case the expression would be derived directly from ak khaṇa (see prec.) with the omission of the neg. an--; akkhaṇa in the meaning of "lightning" (J II.91 C.) is not supported by literary evidence.
Akkhata (adj.) [pp. of a + kṣan, cp. parikkhata1] unhurt, without fault Mhvs 19, 56 (C. niddosa). -- acc. akkhataŋ (adv.) in safety, unhurt. Only in one phrase Vv 8452 (paccāgamuŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ) & Pv IV.111 (nessāmi taŋ Pāṭaliputtaŋ akkhataŋ); see VvA 351 & PvA 272.
Akkhaya (adj.) [a + khaya, kṣi] not decaying, in akkhayapaṭibhāna, of unfailing skill in exposition Miln 3, 21.
Akkhara (adj.) [Vedic akṣara] constant, durable, lasting D III.86. As tt. for one of 4 branches of Vedic learning (D I.88) it

is Phonetics which probably included Grammar, and is expld by sikkhā (DA I.247 = SnA 477) <-> pl. nt. akkharāni sounds, tones, words. citt'akkhara of a discourse (suttanta) having variety & beauty of words or sounds (opposed to beauty of thought) A I.72 = III.107 = S II.267. Akkharāni are the sauce, flavour (vyañjana) of poetry S I.38. To know the context of the a° the words of the texts, is characteristic of an Arahant Dh 352 (C. is ambiguous DhA IV.70). Later: akkharaŋ a syllable or sound PvA 280 (called sadda in next line); akkharāni an inscription J II.90; IV.7 (likhitāni written), 489; VI.390, 407. In Grammar: a letter Kacc. 1.
--cintaka a grammarian or versifier KhA 17; SnA 16, 23, 321. cp. 466; PvA 120. --pabheda in phrase sakkharappabheda phonology & etymology D I.88 (akkharappabhedo ti sikkhā ca nirutti ca SnA 447 = DA i.247) = A III.223 = Sn p. 105. --piṇd̤a "word--ball", i. e. sequence of words or sounds DhA IV.70 (= akkharānaŋ sannipāto Dh 352).
Akkharikā (f.) a game (recognising syllables written in the air or on one's back). D I.7; Vin II.10; III.180. So expld at DA I.86. It may be translated "letter game"; but all Indian letters of that date were syllables.
Akkhāta (adj.) [pp. of akkhāti] announced, proclaimed, told, shown A I.34 (dur°); II.195; IV.285, 322; V.265, 283; Sn 172, 276, 595, 718.
Akkhātar one who relates, a speaker, preacher, story--teller S I.11, 191; III.66; Sn 167.
Akkhāti [ā + khyā, Idg. *sequ; cp. Sk. ākhyāti, Lat. inquam, Gr. e)nne/pw, Goth. saihvan, Ger. sehen etc. See also akkhi
& cakkhu] to declare, announce, tell Sn 87, 172; imper. akkhāhi Sn 988, 1085; aor. akkhāsi Sn 251, 504, 1131 (= ācikkhi etc. Nd2 465); fut. akkhissati Pv IV.163; cond. akkhissaŋ Sn 997; J VI.523. -- Pass. akkhāyati to be proclaimed, in phrase aggaŋ a. to be deemed chief or superior, to be first, to excel Miln 118, 182 (also in BSk. agram ākhyāyate M Vastu III.390); ger. akkheyya to be pronounced S I.11; It 53. -- pp. akkhāta (q. v.). -- Intensive or Frequentative is ācikkhati.
Akkhāna (nt.) [Sk. ākhyāna] telling stories, recitation; tale, legend D I.6 (= DA I.84: Bhārata--Rāmāyanādi); III.183;
M I.503; III.167; Sdhp. 237. -- preaching, teaching Nd1 91 (dhamm°). The 5th Veda J V.450. (vedam akkhānapañcamaŋ; C: itihāsapañcamaŋ vedacatukkaŋ). -- The spelling ākhyāna also occurs (q. v.).
Akkhāyika (adj.) relating, narrating J III.535; lokakkhāyikā kathā talk about nature--lore D I.8; Miln 316. Akkhāyin (adj.) telling, relating, announcing S II.35; III.7; J III.105.
Akkhi (nt.) [to *oks, an enlarged form of *oqu, cp. Sk. īkṣate, kṣaṇa, pratīka, anīka; Gr. o)/sse, w)/y (*ku/klwy),
o)fqalmo/s, pro/swpon; Lat. oculus, Ags. ēowan (= E eye & wind--ow); Goth. augō. See also cakkhu & cp. akkha2 & ikkhaṇika] the eye M I.383 (ubbhatehi akkhīhi); Sn 197, 608; J I.223, 279; V.77; VI.336; Pv II.926 (akkhīni paggharanti: shed tears, cp. PvA 123); VvA 65 (°īni bhamanti, my eyes swim) cp. akkhīni me dhūmāyanti DhA I.475; DhA II.26; III.196 ( °īni ummīletvā opening the eyes); Sdhp 103, 380. -- In combn with sa-- as sacchi & sakkhi (q. v.). As adj. (--°) akkha3
--añjana eye ointment, collyrium DhA III.354. --kūpa the socket of the eye J IV.407. --gaṇd̤a eye--protuberance, i. e. eye--brow (?) J VI.504 (for pamukha T.). --gūtha secretion from the eye PvA 198. --gūthaka id. Sn 197 (= dvīhi akkhicchiddehi apanīta--ttaca--maŋsasadiso a°--gūthako SnA 248). --chidda the eye--hole SnA 248. --dala the eye--lid DA I.194; ThA 259; DhsA 378. --pāta "fall of the eye", i. e. a look, in mand° of soft looks (adj.) PvA 57. --pūra an eye--full, in akkhipūraŋ assuŋ (assu?) an eye full of tears J VI.191. --mala dirt from the eye Pv III.53 (= °gūtha C.). --roga eye disease DhA I.9.
Akkhika1 (--°) (adj.) having eyes, with eyes Th 1,960 (añjan° with eyes anointed); DhA IV.98 (ad̤d̤h° with half an eye, i. e. stealthily); Sdhp 286 (tamb° red--eyed). --an° having no eyes DhA I.11.

Akkhika2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. akṣa] the mesh of a net J I.208. --hāraka one who takes up a mesh (?) M I.383 (corresp. with
aṇd̤ahāraka). Akkhitta1
Akkhitta1 see khitta. Akkhitta2
Akkhitta2 (adj.) [BSk ākṣipta Divy 363, pp. of ā + kṣip] hit, struck, thrown J III.255 (= ākad̤d̤hita C.). Akkhin (adj.) = akkhika J III.190 (mand° softeyed); Vv 323 (tamb° red--eyed); DhA I.11. Akkhobbha (adj.) [a + kṣubh, see khobha] not to be shaken, imperturbable Miln 21.
Akkhobhana (adj) = akkhobbha J V.322 (= khobhetun na sakkhā C.).
Akkhohiṇī (f.) [= akkhobhiṇī] one of the highest numerals (1 followed by 42 ciphers, Childers) J V.319; VI.395.
Akhaṇd̤aphulla see khaṇd̤a.
Akhāta (adj.) not dug: see khāta.
Akhetta barren--soil: see khetta. -- In cpd. °ññu the neg. belongs to the whole: not knowing a good field (for alms) J IV.371.
Agati see gati. --°gamana practising a wrong course of life, evil practice, wrong doing D III.228 (4: chanda°, dosa° moha° bhaya°); A II.18 sq., J IV.402; V.98, 510; PvA 161.
Agada [Vedic agada; a + gada] medicine, drug, counterpoison J I.80 (°harīṭaka); Miln 121, 302, 319, 334; DA I.67; DhA I.215; PvA 198 (= osadhaŋ).
Agaru (adj.) [cp. Sk. aguru, a + garu] (a) not heavy, not troublesome, only in phrase: sace te agaru "if it does not inconvenience you, if you don't mind" (cp. BSk. yadi te aguru. Av. S I.94, 229; II.90) Vin. I.25; IV.17, D I.51; DhA I.39. -- (b) disrespectful, irreverent (against = gen.) D I.89; Sn p. 51.
Agalu [cp. Sk. aguru, which is believed to appear in Hebr. ahālīm (aloe), also in Gr. a)lo/h & a)ga/lloxon] fragrant aloe wood, Agallochum Vv 537 (aggalu = VvA 237 agalugandha); VvA 158 (+ candana). Cp. also Av. Ś I.24, and akalu.
Agāra (nt.) [cp. Sk. agāra, probably with the a-- of communion; Gr. a)gei(rw to collect, a)gora/ market. Cp. in meaning & etym. gaha1]. -- 1. house or hut, usually implying the comforts of living at home as opp. to anagāra homelessness or the state of a homeless wanderer (mendicant). See anagāriyā. -- Thus freq. in two phrases contrasting the state of a householder (or layman, cp. gihin), with that of a religious wanderer (pabbajita), viz. (a.) kesamassuŋ ohāretvā kāsāyāni vatthāni
acchādetvā agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajati "to shave off hair & beard, put on the yellow robes, and wander forth out of
the home into the homeless state" D I.60 etc.; cp. Nd2 172II. See also S I.185 (agārasmā anagāriyaŋ nikkhanta); M II.55 (agāraŋ ajjhāvasatā); Sn 274, 805 (°ŋ āvasati), and with pabbajita D I.89, 115, 202, 230; Pv II.1317. -- (b.) of a "rājā cakkavattin" compared with a "sambuddha": sace agāraŋ āvasati vijeyya paṭhaviŋ imaŋ adaṇd̤ena asatthena . . . sace
ca so pabbajati agārā anagāriyaŋ vivaṭacchado sambuddho arahā bhavissati "he will become the greatest king when he

stays at home, but the greatest saint when he takes up the homeless life", the prophesy made for the infant Gotama D II.16; Sn 1002, 1003. -- Further passages for agāra e. g. Vin I.15; D I.102 (BB. has v. l. agyâgāra, but DA I.270 expl. as dānâgāra); A I.156, 281; II.52 sq.; Dh 14, 140; J I.51, 56; III.392; Dpvs. I.36. -- 2. anagāra (adj.) houseless, homeless; a mendicant (opp. gahaṭṭha) Sn 628 = Dh 404; Sn 639, 640 (+ paribbaje); Pv II.25 (= anāvāsa PvA 80). -- (nt.) the homeless state (=
anagāriyā) Sn 376. See also agga2. -- 3. °āgāra: Owing to freq. occurrence of agāra at the end of cpds. of which the first
word ends in a, we have a dozen quite familiar words ending apparently in āgāra. This form has been considered therefore as a proper doublet of agāra. This however is wrong. The long ā is simply a contraction of the short a at the end of the first part of the cpd. with the short a at the beginning of agāra. Of the cpds. the most common are: -- āgantuk° reception hall for strangers or guests S IV.219; V.21. -- itth° lady's bower S I.58, 89. -- kūṭ° a house with a peaked roof, or with gables S II.103. 263; III.156; IV.186; V.43; A I.230; III.10, 364; IV.231; V.21. --koṭṭh° storehouse, granary D I.134 (cp. DA I.295); S I.89. --tiṇ° a house covered with grass S IV.185; A I.101. --bhus° threshing shed, barn A I.241. --santh° a council hall D I.91; II.147; S IV.182; V.453; A II.207; IV.179 sq. --suññ° an uninhabited shed; solitude S V.89, 157, 310 sq., 329 sq.; A I.241 (v. l. for bhusâgāra); III.353; IV.139, 392, 437; V.88, 109, 323 sq.
Agāraka (nt.) [fr. agāra] a small house, a cottage M I.450; J VI.81.
Agārika (adj.) 1. having a house, in eka°, dva° etc. D I.166 = A I.295 = II.206. -- 2. a householder, layman Vin I.17. f.
agārikā a housewife Vin I.272. See also āgārika.
Agārin (adj.) [fr. agāra] one who has or inhabits a house, a householder Sn 376, Th I,1009; J III.234. -- f. agārinī a
housewife Vv 527 (= gehassāmmī VvA 225); Pv III.43 (id. PvA 194).
a layman M I.504 (°bhūta). -- Usually in neg. anagāriyā (f.) the homeless state (= anagāraŋ) as opp. to agāra (q. v.) in formula agārasmā anagāriyaŋ pabbajita (gone out from the house into the homeless state) Vin I.15; M I.16; II.55, 75; A I.49; D III.30 sq., 145 sq.; Sn 274, 1003; Pv II.1316; DA I.112.
Agga1 (adj. n.) [Vedic agra; cp. Av. agrō first; Lith. agrs early] 1. (adj;) (a.) of time: the first, foremost Dpvs IV.13 (sangahaŋ first collection). See cpds. -- (b.) of space: the highest, topmost, J I.52 (°sākhā). -- (c.) of quality: illustricus, excellent, the best, highest, chief Vin IV.232 (agga--m--agga) most excellent, D II.4: S I.29 (a. sattassa Sambuddha); A II.17 = Pv IV.347
(lokassa Buddho aggo [A: aggaŋ] pavuccati); It 88, 89; Sn 875 (suddhi); PvA 5. Often combd. with seṭṭha (best), e. g. D II.15;
S III.83, 264. -- 2. (nt.) top, point. (a.) lit.: the top or tip (nearly always --°); as ār° point of an awl Sn 625, 631; Dh 401; kus° tip of a blade of grass Dh 70; Sdhp 349; tiṇ° id PvA 241; dum° top of a tree J II.155; dhaj° of a banner S I.219; pabbat° of a mountain Sdhp 352; sākh° of a branch PvA 157; etc. -- (b.) fig. the best part, the ideal, excellence, prominence, first place, often to be trsl. as adj. the highest, best of all etc. S II.29 (aggena aggassa patti hoti: only the best attain to the highest); Mhvs 7, 26. Usually as --°; e. g. dum° the best of trees, an excellent tree Vv 3541 (cp. VvA 161); dhan° plenty D III.164; madhur° S
I.41, 161, 237; bhav° the best existence S III.83; rūp° extraordinary beauty J I.291; lābh° highest gain J III.127; sambodhi--y--agga highest wisdom Sn 693 (= sabbaññuta--ñāṇan SnA 489; the best part or quality of anything, in enumn of the five "excellencies" of first--fruits (panca aggāni, after which the N. Pañcaggadāyaka), viz. khettaggan rās° koṭṭh° kumbhi° bhojan° SnA 270. sukh° perfect bliss Sdhp 243. Thus freq. in phrase aggaŋ akkhāyati to deserve or receive the highest
praise, to be the most excellent D I.124; S III.156, 264; A II.17 (Tathāgato); It 87 (id.); Nd2 517 D (appamādo); Miln 183. -- 3. Cases as adv.: aggena (instr.) in the beginning, beginning from, from (as prep.), by (id.) Vin II.167. (aggena gaṇhāti to take from, to subtract, to find the difference; Kern Toev. s. v. unnecessarily changes aggena into agghena), 257 (yadaggena at the moment when or from, foll. by tad eva "then"; cp. agge), 294 (bhikkh° from alms); Vbh 423 (vass° by the number of years). aggato (abl.) in the beginning Sn 217 (+ majjhato, sesato). aggato kata taken by its worth, valued, esteemed Th 2, 386, 394. agge (loc) 1. at the top A II.201 (opp. mūle at the root); J IV.156 (id.); Sn 233 (phusit° with flowers at the top: supupphitaggasākhā KhA 192); J II.153 (ukkh°); III.126 (kūp°). -- 2 (as prep.) from. After, since, usually in phrases yad° (foll. by tad°) from what time, since what date D I.152; II.206; & ajja--t--agge from this day, after today D I.85; M I.528; A V.300; Sn p. 25 (cp. BSk. adyāgrena Av. Ś II.13); at the end: bhattagge after a meal Vin II.212.

--angulī the main finger, i. e. index finger J VI.404. --āsana main seat DA I.267. --upaṭṭhāka chief personal attendant D
II.6. --kārikā first taste, sample Vin III.80. --kulika of an esteemed clan Pv III.55 (= seṭṭh° PvA 199). --ñña recognized as primitive primeval, D III.225 (porāṇa +), A II.27 sq.; IV.246, Kvu 341. --danta one who is most excellently self--restrained (of the Buddha) Th I.354. --dāna a splendid gift Vin III.39. --dvāra main door J I.114. --nakha tip of the nail Vin IV.221.
--nagara the first or most splendid of cities Vin I.229. --nikkhitta highly praised or famed Miln 343. --nikkhittaka an
original depository of the Faith Dpvs IV.5. --pakatimant of the highest character J V.351 (= aggasabhāva). --patta having attained perfection D III.48 sq. --pasāda the highest grace A II.34; It 87. --piṇd̤a the best oblation or alms I.141; M I. 28; II.204. --piṇd̤ika receiving the best oblations J VI.140. --puggala the best of men (of the Buddha) Sn 684; DhA II.39; Sdhp. 92, 558. --purohita chief or prime minister J VI.391. --phala the highest or supreme fruit (i. e. Arahantship) J I.148; Pv IV.188; PvA 230. --bīja having eggs from above (opp. mūla°), i. e. propagated by slips or cuttings D I.5; DA I.81. --magga (adj.) having reached the top of the path, i. e. Arahantship ThA 20. --mahesi the king's chief wife, queen--consort J I.262; III.187, 393; V.88; DhA I.199; PvA 76. --rājā the chief king J VI.391; Miln 27. --vara most meritorious, best Dpvs VI.68. --vāda the original doctrine (= theravāda) Dpvs IV.13. --vādin one who proclaims the highest good (of the Buddha) Th 1, 1142.
Agga2 (nt.) (only --°) [a contracted form of agāra] a (small) house, housing, accomodation; shelter, hut; hall. dān° a house of donation, i. e. a public or private house where alms are given J III.470; IV.379, 403; VI.487; PvA 121; Miln 2. salāk° a hut where food is distributed to the bhikkhus by tickets, a food office J I.123, VvA 75.
Aggatā (f.) [abstr. of agga] pre--eminence, prominence, superiority Kvu 556 (°ŋ gata); Dpvs IV.1 (guṇaggataŋ gatā). -- (adj.) mahaggata of great value or superiority D I.80; III.224.
Aggatta (nt.) [abstr. of agga = Sk. agratvan] the state or condition of being the first, pre--eminence PvA 9, 89. Aggavant (adj.) occupying the first place, of great eminence A I.70, 243.
Aggalu see agalu.
Aggaḷa & Aggaḷā (f.) (also occasionally with l.) [cp. Sk. argala & argalā to *areg to protect, ward off, secure etc., as in
Ags. reced house; *aleg in Sk. rakṣati to protect, Gr. a)le/cw id., Ags. ealh temple. Cp. also *areq in Gr. a)rke/w = Lat. arceo, Orcus, Ohg rigil bolt.] a contrivance to fasten anything for security or obstruction: 1. a bolt or cross--bar Vin I.290; D I.89 (°ŋ ākoteṭi to knock upon the cross--bar; a. = kavāṭa DA I.252); A IV.359 (id.); S. IV.290; A I.101 = 137 = IV.231. (phusit° with fastened bolts, securely shut Th 1,385 (id.); Vin IV.47; J. V.293 (°ŋ uppīḷeti to lift up the cross--bar. -- 2. a strip of cloth for strengthening a dress etc., a gusset Vin I.290 (+ tunna), 392 (Bdhgh on MV VIII.21, 1); J I.8 (+ tunna) VI.71 (°ŋ datvā); Vin IV.121.
--dāna putting in a gusset J I.8. --phalaka the post or board, in which the cross--bar is fixed (cp. °vaṭṭi) M III.95. --vaṭṭi = °phalaka Vin II.120, 148. --sūci bolting pin M I.126.
Aggi [Vedic agni = Lat. ignis. Besides the contracted form aggi we find the diaeretic forms gini (q. v.) and aggini (see
below)] fire. -- 1. fire, flames, sparks; conflagration, Vin II.120 (fire in bathroom); M I.487 (anāhāro nibbuto f. gone out for lack of fuel); S IV.185, 399 (sa--upādāno jalati provided with fuel blazes); Sn 62; Dh 70 (= asaniaggi DhA III.71); J I.216 (sparks), 294 (pyre); II.102; III.55; IV.139; VvA 20 (aggimhi tāpanaŋ + udake temanaŋ). -- The var. phases of lighting and extinguishing the fire are given at A IV.45: aggiŋ ujjāleti (kindle, make burn), ajjhupekkhati (look after, keep up), nibbāpeti (extinguish, put out), nikkhipati (put down, lay). Other phrases are e. g. aggiŋ jāleti (kindle) J II.44; gaṇhāti (make or take) J I.494 (cp. below b); deti (set light to) J I.294; nibbāpeti (put out) It 93; Sdhp 552. aggi nibbāyati the f. goes out S II.85; M I.487; J I.212 (udake through water); Miln 304. aggi nibbuto the f. is extinguished (cp. °nibbāna) J I.61; Miln 304. agginā dahati to burn by means of fire, to set fire to A I.136, 199; PvA 20. udar° the fire supposed to regulate digestion PvA 33; cp. Dial.
II.208, note 2; kapp°uṭṭhān° the universal conflagration J III.185; dāv° a wood or jungle fire J I.212; naḷ° the burning of a

reed J VI.100; padīp° fire of a lamp Miln 47. 2. the sacrificial fire: In one or two of the passages in the older texts this use of Aggi is ambiguous. It may possibly be intended to denote the personal Agni, the fire--god. But the commentators do not think so, and the Jātaka commentary, when it means Agni, has the phrase Aggi Bhagavā the Lord Agni, e. g. at J I.285, 494; II.44. The ancient ceremony of kindling a holy fire on the day the child is born and keeping it up throughout his life, is also referred to by that commentary e. g. J I.285; II.43. Aggiŋ paricarati (cp. °paricāriyā) to serve the sacred fire Vin I.31 (jaṭilā
aggī paricaritukāmā); A V.263, 266; Th 2, 143 (= aggihuttaŋ paric° ThA 136); Dh 107; J I.494; DhA II.232. aggiŋ juhati (cp. °homa, °hutta) to sacrifice (in)to the fire A II.207; often combd. with aggihuttaŋ paricarati, e. g. S I.166; Sn p. 79. aggiŋ namati & santappeti to worship the fire A V.235. aggissa (gen.) paricāriko J YI.207 (cp. below °paricārika); aggissa ādhānaŋ A IV.41. -- 3. (ethical, always --°) the fire of burning, consuming, feverish sensations. Freq. in standard set of 3 fires, viz. rāg°, dos°,
moh°, or the fires of lust, anger and bewilderment. The number three may possibly have been chosen with reference to the three sacrificial fires of Vedic ritual. At S IV.19; A IV.41 sq. there are 7 fires, the 4 last of which are āhuneyy°, gahapat°, dakkhiṇeyy°, kaṭṭh°. But this trinity of cardinal sins lies at the basis of Buddhist ethics, & the fire simile was more probably suggested by the number. D III.217; It 92, Vbh 368. In late books are found others: ind° the fire of the senses PvA 56; dukkh° the glow of suffering ib. 60; bhavadukkh° of the misery of becomings Sdhp. 552; vippaṭisār° burning remorse PvA 60; sok° burning grief ib. 41.
Note. The form aggini occurs only at Sn 668 & 670 in the meaning of "pyre", and in combn. with sama "like", viz. aggini--samaŋ jalitaŋ 668 (= samantato jali taŋ aggiŋ Sn A 480); aggini--samāsu 670 (= aggisamāsu Sn A 481). The form agginī in phrase niccagginī can either be referred to gini (q. v.) or has to be taken as nom. of aggini (in adj. function with ī metri causa; otherwise as adj. agginiŋ), meaning looking constantly after the fire, i. e. careful, observant, alert.
--agāra (agyâgāra) a heated room or hut with a fire Vin I.24; IV.109; D I.101, 102 (as v. l. BB for agāra); M I.501; A V.234,
250. --khandha a great mass of fire, a huge fire, fire--brand S II.85; A IV. 128; Th 2, 351 (°samākāmā); J IV.139; VI.330; Ps I.125; Dpvs VI.37; Miln 304. --gata having become (like) fire Miln 302. --ja fire--born J V.404 (C; text aggijāta). --ṭṭha fire--place J V.155. --ṭṭhāna fire--place Vin II.120 (jantāghare, in bathroom). --dad̤d̤ha consumed by fire Dh 136; Pv I.74. --dāha (mahā°) a holocaust A I.178. --nikāsin like fire J III.320 (suriya). --nibbāna the extinction of fire J I.212. --pajjota fire--light A II.140 (one of the 4 lights, viz. canda°, suriya°, a°, paññā°). --paricaraṇa (--ṭṭhāna) the place where the (sacrificial) fire is attended to DhA I.199. --paricariyā fire--worship DhA II.232; Sn A 291 (pāri°) 456. --paricārika one who worship the
fire a v.263 (brāhmaṇa). --sālā a heated hall or refectory Vin I.25, 49 = II.210; I.139; II.154. --sikhā the crest of the fire, the flame, in simile °ûpama, like a flaming fire Sn 703; Dh 308 = It 43, 90 (ayoguḷa). --hutta (nt.) the sacrificial fire (see above 2), Vin I.33, 36 = J I.83; Vin I.246 = Sn 568 (°mukha--yañña); S I.166; Dh 392; Sn 249, p. 79; J IV.211; VI.525; ThA 136 (=
aggi); DhA IV.151 (°ŋ brāhmaṇo namati). --huttaka (nt.) fire--offering J VI.522 (= aggi--jūhana C.). --hotta = °hutta SnA
456 (v. l. BB °hutta). --homa fire--oblation (or perhaps sacrificing to Agni) D I.9 (= aggi--jūhana DA I.93).
Aggika (adj.) [aggi + ka] one who worships the fire Vin I.71 (jaṭilaka); D II.339 sq. (jaṭila); S I.166 (brāhmaṇa).
Aggha [see agghati] 1. price, value, worth, Miln 244; Mhvs 26, 22; 30, 76; VvA 77. -- mahaggha (adj.) of great value J
IV.138; V.414; VI.209; Pv II.118. See also mahâraha. appaggha (adj.) of little value J. IV.139; V.414. -- anaggha (nt.) pricelessness, J V.484; cattari anagghāni the four priceless things, viz. setacchatta, nisīdanapallanka, ādhāraka, pādapīṭhikā DhA III.120, 186. (adj.) priceless, invaluable J V.414; Mhvs 26, 25; DhA IV.216. -- agghena (instr.) for the price of Vin II.52, cp. Bdhgh on p. 311, 312. -- 2. an oblation made to a guest D II.240; J IV.396 = 476.
--kāraka a valuator J I.124. --pada valuableness J V.473 (°lakkhaṇaŋ nāma mantaŋ).
Agghaka (adj.) = aggha; worth, having the value of (--°) Mhvs 30, 77. an° priceless Mhvs 30, 72.
Agghati (intr.) [Sk. arghati, argh = arh (see arhati), cp. Gr. a)lfh/ reward, a)lfa/nw to deserve] to be worth, to have the
value of (acc.), to deserve J I.112 (satasahassaŋ; ad̤d̤hamāsakaŋ); VI.174, 367 (padarajaŋ); DhA III.35 (maṇin nâgghāma); Mhvs 32, 28. Freq. in stock phrase kalaŋ nâgghati (nâgghanti) soḷasiŋ not to be worth the 16th part of (cp. kalā) Vin
II.156; S I.233; Dh 70; Vv 207 (= nânubhoti VvA 104), 437; J V.284. -- Caus. agghāpeti to value, to appraise, to have a price put on (acc.) J I.124; IV.137, 278; Miln 192; Mhvs 27, 23. Cp. agghāpanaka & agghāpaniya.
Agghanaka (adj.) (--°) [fr. *agghana, abstr. to agghati] having the value of, equal to, worth Vin IV.226; J I.61

(satasahass°), 112; DA I.80 (kahāpaṇ°); DhA III.120 (cuddasakoṭi°); Mhvs 26, 22; 34, 87. -- f. °ikā J I.178 (satasahass°).
Agghaniya (adj.) [in function & form grd. of agghati] priceless, invaluable, beyond the reach of money Miln 192.
Agghāpanaka [fr. agghāpana to agghāpeti, Caus. of agghati] a valuator, appraiser J I.124, 125; V.276 (°ika).
Agghāpaniya (adj.) [grd. of agghāpeti, see agghati] that which is to be valued, in °kamma the business of a valuator J IV.137.
Agghika (nt.) (--°) [= agghiya] an oblation, decoration or salutation in the form of garlands, flowers etc., therefore meaning "string, garland" (cp. Sinhalese ägä "festoon work") Mhvs 19, 38 (pupph°) 34, 73 (ratan°) 34, 76 (dhaj°); Dāvs I.39 (pupphamay°); V.51 (kusum°).
Agghiya (adj. --n.) [grd. form from agghati] 1. (adj.) valuable, precious, worth J VI.265 (maṇi); DhA II.41 (ratan° of jewel's worth); Mhvs 30, 92. -- 2. (nt.) a respectful oblation J V.324 = VI.516; Dpvs VI.65; VII.4.
Agha1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. agha, of uncertain etym.] evil, grief, pain, suffering, misfortune S I 22; M I.500 (roga gaṇd̤a salla agha); A II.128 (id.); J V.100; Th 2, 491; Sdhp 51. -- adj. painful, bringing pain J VI.507 (agha--m--miga = aghakara m. C.). --bhūta a source of pain S III.189 (+ agha & salla).
Agha2 (m. nt.) [the etym. suggested by Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 200 (with ref. to M I.500, which belongs under agha1) is untenable (to Sk. kha, as a--kha = agha, cp. Jain Prk. khaha). Neither does the pop. etym. of Bdhgh. offer any clue (= a + gha from ghan that which does not strike or aghaṭṭaniya is not strikeable DhsA 326, cp. Dhs. trsl. 194 & J IV.154 aghe ṭhitā = appaṭighe ākāse ṭhitā the air which does not offer any resistance). On the other hand the primary meaning is darkness, as seen from the phrase lokantarikā aghā asaŋvutā andhakārā D II.12; S V.454, and BSk. aghasaŋvṛta M Vastu I.240, adj. dark
M Vastu I.41; II.162; Lal Vist 552] the sky, orig. the dark sky, dark space, the abyss of space D II.12; S V.45; Vv 161 (aghasi gama, loc. = vehāsaŋ gama VvA 78); J IV.154; Dhs 638 (+ aghagata); Vbh 84 (id.).
--gata going through or being in the sky or atmosphere Dhs 638, 722; Vbh 84. --gāmin moving through the atmosphere or space i. e. a planet S I.67 = Miln 242 (ādicco seṭṭho aghagāminaŋ).
Aghata at Th 1, 321 may be read as agha--gata or (preferably) with v. l. as aggha--gataŋ, or (with Neumann) as agghaŋ agghatānaŋ. See also Mrs. Rh. D, Psalms of the Brethren, p. 191.
Aghammiga [to agha1?] a sort of wild animal J VI.247 (= aghāvaha miga) 507 (= aghakara). Cp. BSk. agharika Divy 475.
Aghavin (adj.) [to agha1] suffering pain, being in misery Sn 694 (= dukkhita SnA 489). Anka1
Anka1 = anga, sign, mark, brand Miln 79; °karana branding J IV.366, 375. See also anketi. Anka2
Anka2 [Vedic anka hook, bent etc., anc, cp. ankura & ankusa. Gr. a)gkw/n elbow, a)/gkura = anchor; Lat. uncus nail; Ohg. angul = E. angle] (a.) a hook J V.322 = VI.218 (v. l. BB anga). -- (b.) the lap (i. e. the bent position) or the hollow above the

hips where infants are carried by Hindoo mothers or nurses (ankena vahati) Vin II.114; D II.19 (anke pariharati to hold on one's lap or carry on one's hips), 20 (nisīdāpeti seat on one's lap); M II.97 (ankena vahitvā); Th 1, 299; J I.262 (anke nisinna); II.127, 236; VI.513; DhA I.170 (ankena vahitvā) PvA 17 (nisīdāpeti).
Ankita [pp. of anketi] marked, branded J I.231 (cakkankitā Satthu padā); II.185 (°kaṇṇaka with perforated ears). Ankura [cp. Sk. ankura, to anka a bend = a tendril etc.] a shoot, a sprout (lit. or fig.) J II.105; VI.331 (Buddh °a nascent
Buddha), 486; Dhs 617 (°vaṇṇa); Miln 50, 251 269; Sdhp 273; Mhvs 15, 43.
Ankusa [Vedic ankuśa; to anc, see anka2] a hook, a pole with a hook, used (1) for plucking fruit off trees, a crook J I.9 (°pacchi hook & basket); V.89 = VI.520 (pacchikhanitti°), 529 (= phalānaŋ gaṇhanatthaŋ ankusaŋ). <-> (2) to drive an elephant, a goad (cp patoda & tutta) Vin II.196 (+ kasā); J VI.489; ThA 173 (ovādaŋ ankusaŋ katvā, fig. guide); Sdhp 147 (daṇd̤°). -- (3) N. of a certain method of inference in Logic (naya), consisting in inferring certain mental states of a general character from respective traits where they are to be found Nett 2, 4, 127; Nett A 208; -- acc° beyond the reach of the goad D II.266 (nāga). See also ankusaka.
--gayha (the art) how to grasp and handle an eleph.<-> driver's hook M II.94 (sippa). --gaha an eleph.--driver Dh 326.
Ankusaka [see anka2, cp. ankusa] 1. a crook for plucking fruit J III.22. -- 2. an eleph.--driver's hook J III.431. --yattha a crooked stick, alpenstock, staff (of an ascetic) J II.68 (+ pacchi).
Anketi [Denom. fr. anka1] to mark out, brand J I.451 lakkhaṇena); II.399. -- pp. ankita, q. v. Ankola [dial. for ankura] a species of tree Alangium Hexapetalum J VI.535. Cp. next. Ankolaka = ankola J IV.440; V.420.
Anga (nt.) [Vedic anga, anc cp. Lat. angulus = angle, corner etc., ungulus finger--ring = Sk. angulīya. See also anka,
anguṭṭha & angula] (1) (lit.) a constituent part of the body, a limb, member; also of objects: part, member (see cpd. °sambhāra); uttam°anga the reproductive organ J V.197; also as "head" at ThA 209. Usually in cpds. (see below, esp. °paccanga), as sabbanga--kalyāṇī perfect in all limbs Pv III.35 (= sobhaṇa--sabbanga--paccangī PvA 189) and in redupln. anga--m--angāni limb by limb, with all limbs (see also below anga + paccanga) Vin III.119; Vv 382 (°ehi naccamāna); Pv II.1210, 13, 18 (sunakho te khādati). -- (2) (fig.) a constituent part of a whole or system or collection, e. g. uposath° the vows of the fast J I.50; bhavanga the constituents or the condition of becoming (see bhava & cp. Cpd. 265 sq.); bojjhanga (q. v.).
Esp. with numerals: cattāri angāni 4 constituents A II.79 (viz. sīla, samādhi, paññā. vimutti and rūpa, vedanā, saññā, bhava), aṭṭhangika (q. v.) magga the Path with its eight constituents or the eightfold Path (KhA 85: aṭṭhɔ angāni assā ti) navanga
Buddha--sāsana see nava. -- (3) a constituent part as characteristic, prominent or distinguishing, a mark, attribute, sign, quality D I.113 sq., 117 (iminā p° angena by this quality, or: in this respect, cp. below 4; DA I.281 expls tena kāra<-> ṇena). In a special sense striking (abnormal) sign or mark on the body D I.9, from which a prophesy is made (: hattha--pādādisu yena kenaci evarūpena angena samannāgato dīghāyu . . hotī ti . . angasatthan = chiromantics DA I.92). Thus in combn. with samannāgata & sampanna always meaning endowed with "good", superior, remarkable "qualities", e. g. J I.3 (sabbanga--sampanna nagaraŋ a city possessing all marks of perfection); II.207. <-> In enumn. with var. numerals: tīhi
angehi s. A I.115; cattāri sotapannassa a-- D III.227 = A IV.405 sq.; pañcanga--vippahīno (i. e. giving up the 5 hindrances, see nīvaraṇa) and pañcanga--samannāgato (i. e. endowed with the 5 good qualities, viz. the sīla--kkhandha, see kkhandha II.A d) S I.99 = A I.161; V.15, 29. Similarly the 5 attributes of a brahmin (viz. sujāta of pure birth, ajjhāyaka a student of the Vedas, abhirūpa handsome, sīlava of good conduct, paṇd̤ita clever) D I.119, 120. Eight qualities of a king D I.137. Ten qualities of an Arahant (cp. dasa1 B 2) S III.83; Kh IV.10 = KhA 88; cp. M I.446 (dasahɔ angehi samannāgato rañño assājāniyo). -- (4) (modally) part, share, interest, concern; ajjhattikaŋ angaŋ my own part or interest (opp. bāhiraŋ the interest in the outside world). A I.16 sq. = S V.101 sq.; It 9. rañño angaŋ an asset or profit for the king M I.446. Thus adv. tadanga (see also ta° I.a) as a matter of fact, in this respect, for sure, certainly and tadangena by these means, through this, therefore M I.492; A
IV.411; Sdhp 455, 456; iminā p° angena for that reason M II.168. -- In compn. with verbs angi° (angī°): angigata having limbs

or ports, divided DA I.313; cp. samangi (--bhūta).
--jāta "the distinguishing member", i. e. sign of male or female (see above 3); membrum virile and muliebre Vin I.191 (of
cows); III.20, 37, 205; J II.359; Miln 124. --paccanga one limb or the other, limbs great and small M I.81; J VI--20, used (a) collectively: the condition of perfect limbs, or adj. with perfect limbs, having all limbs Pv II.1212 (= paripuṇṇa--sabbanga--paccangavatī PvA 158); SnA 383; DhA I.390; ThA 288; Sdhp 83 fig. rathassa angapaccangan M I.395; sabbanga--paccangāni all limbs Miln 148. -- (b) distributively (cp. similar redupl. formations like chiddâvachidda, seṭṭhânu--seṭṭhi, khaṇd̤ākhaṇd̤a, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa) limb after limb, one limb after the other (like angamangāni above 1), piecemeal M I.133 (°e daseyya), 366; J I.20; IV.324 (chinditvā). --paccangatā the condition or state of perfect limbs, i. e. a perfect body VvA 134 (suvisuddh°). --paccangin having all limbs (perfect) D I.34 (sabbanga--peccangī); PvA 189. --rāga painting or rouging the body Vin II.107 (+ mukha°). --laṭṭhi sprout, offshoot ThA 226. --vāta gout Vin I.205. --vijjā the art
of prognosticating from marks on the body, chiromantics, palmistry etc. (cp. above 3) D I.9 (see expl. at DA I.93); J I.290 (°āya cheka clever in fortune--telling); °ânubhāva the power of knowing the art of signs on the body J II.200; V.284; °pāṭhaka one who in versed in palmistry etc. J II.21, 250; V.458. --vekalla bodily deformity DhA II.26. --sattha the science of
prognosticating from certain bodily marks DA I.92. --sambhāra the combination of parts Miln 28 = S I.135; Miln 41. --hetuka a species of wild birds, living in forests J VI.538.
Angaṇa1 (nt.) [cp. Sk. angaṇa & °na; to anga?] an open space, a clearing, Vin II.218; J I.109 (= manussānan sañcaraṇa--ṭṭhāne anāvaṭe bhūmibhāge C.); II.243, 290, 357; Dāvs I.27. -- cetiy° an open space before a Chaitya Miln 366, DA I.191, 197; VvA 254. rāj° the empty space before the king's palace, the royal square J I.124, 152; II.2; DhA II.45.
--ṭṭhāna a clearing (in a wood or park) J I.249, 421. --pariyanta the end or border of a clearing J II.200. Angaṇa2
Angaṇa2 [prob. to anj, thus a variant of añjana, q. v.]; a speck or freckle (on the face) A V.92, 94 sq. (+ raja). Usually in neg. anangana (adj.) free from fleck or blemish, clear, (of the mind) (opp. sângana Sn 279); D I.76; M I.24 sq.; 100 (+ raja); A
II.211; Sn 517 (+ vigata<-> raja = angaṇānan abhāvā malānañ ca vigamā . . . SnA 427), 622 = Dh 125 (= nikkilesa DhA III.34); Dh 236, 351; Pug 60;
Nett 87.
Angada [cp. Sk. angada; prob. anga + da that which is given to the limbs] a bracelet J V.9, 410 (citt°, adj. with manifold bracelets).
Angadin (adj.) [to angada] wearing a bracelet J V.9.
Angāra (m. nt.) [Vedic angāra] charcoal, burning coal, embers A III.97, 380, 407; J I.73; III.54, 55; V.488; Sn 668; Sdhp 32. kul° the charcoal of the family, a squanderer S IV.324 (see under kula).
--kaṭāha a pot for holding burning coal, a charcoal pan DA I.261. --kapalla an earthenware pan for ashes DhA I.260; Dhs A 333; VvA 142. --kammakara a charcoal burner J VI.209. --kāsu a charcoal pit M I.74, 365; Th 2, 491; J I.233; Sn 396; ThA 288; DhA I.442; Sdhp 208. --pacchi a basket for ashes DhA IV.191. --pabbata the mountain of live embers, the glowing mount (in Niraya) A I.141; Miln 303; PvA 221 (°āropaṇa); Sdhp 208. --maŋsa roast meat Mhvs 10, 16. --masi ashes DhA III.309. --rāsi a heap of burning coal J III.55.
Angāraka (adj.) [cp. Sk. angāraka] like charcoal, of red colour, N. of the planet Mars DA I.95; cp. J I.73.
Angārika a charcoal--burner J VI.206 (= angāra--kammakara p. 209).
Angārin (adj.) [to angāra] (burning) like coal, of brightred colour, crimson Th 1, 527 = J I.87 (dumā trees in full bloom).

Angika (--°) (adj.) [fr. anga] consisting of parts, -- fold; only in compn. with num. like aṭṭh°, duv° (see dve), catur°, pañc° etc., q. v.
Angin (adj.) limbed, having limbs or parts, -- fold, see catur° & pacc° (under anga--paccangin). -- f. anginī having sprouts or shoots (of a tree) Th 2, 297 (= ThA 226).
Anguṭṭha [cp. Sk. anguṣṭha, see etym. under anga] 1. the thumb Vin III.34; Miln 123; PvA 198. -- 2. the great toe J II.92; Mhvs 35, 43.
--pada thumb--mark A IV.127 = S III.154. --sineha love drawn from the thumb, i. e. extraordinary love Pv III.52, cp. PvA 198.
Anguṭṭhaka = anguṭṭha J IV.378; V.281; pād° the great toe S V.270.
Angula [Vedic angula, lit. "limblet" see anga for etym.] 1. a finger or toe M I.395 (vankɔ angulaṇ karoti to bend the fingers,
v. l. anguliṇ); A III.6 (id.); J V 70 (goṇ° adj. with ox toes, expld. by C. as with toes like an ox's tail; vv. ll. °anguṭṭha and °angulī). -- 2. a finger as measure, i. e. a finger--breadth, an inch Vin II.294, 306 (dvangula 2 inches wide); Mhvs 19, 11 (aṭṭh°); DhA
III.127 (ek°).
--aṭṭhi (? cp. anga--laṭṭhi) fingers (or toes) and bones DA I.93. --anguli fingers and toes DhA III.214. --antarikā the interstices between the fingers Vin III.39; Miln 180; DhA III.214.
Angulika (nt.) [= angulī] a finger J III.13 (pañc°); V.204 (vaṭṭ° = pavāḷ° ankurasadisā vaṭṭangulī p. 207). See also pañcangulika.
Angulī & Anguli (thus always in cpds.) (f.) [Vedic angulī & °i; see anga] a finger A IV.127; Sn 610; J III.416; IV.474; V.215 (vaṭṭ° with rounded fingers); Miln 395; DhA II.59; IV.210; SnA 229.
--patodaka nudging with the fingers Vin III.84 = IV.110; D I.91 = A IV.343. --pada finger--mark A IV.127 = S III.154. --poṭha snapping or cracking the fingers J V.67. --muddikā a signet ring Vin II.106; J IV.498; V.439, 467. --sanghaṭṭana° = poṭha DA I.256.
Anguleyyaka (nt.) [cp. Sk. angulīyaka that which belongs to the finger, Mhg. vingerlîn = ring; E. bracelet, Fr. bras; thimble thumb etc.] an ornament for the finger, a finger--ring J II.444 (= nikkha).
Acankama (avj.) [a + cankama] not fit for walking, not level or even Th 1, 1174 (magga).
Acittaka (adj.) [a + citta2 + ka] 1. without thought or intention, unconscious, unintentional DhA II.42. -- 2. without heart
or feeling, instr. acittakena (adv.) heartlessly J IV.58 (C. for acetasā).
Acittikata (adj.) [a + citta2 + kata; cp. cittikāra] not well thought of Miln 229.
Acira see cira & cp. nacira.
Acela (adj. --n.) [a + cela] one who is not clothed, esp. t. t. for an anti--Buddhist naked ascetic D I.161, 165; III.6, 12, 17 sq.; S I.78; J V.75.
Acelaka = acela D I.166; III.40; A I.295; II.206; III.384 (°sāvaka); J III.246; VI.229; Pug 55; DhA III.489.
Acc-- 1. a + c°, e. g. accuta = a + cuta. -- 2. Assimilation group of (a) ati + vowel; (b) c + cons. e. g. acci = arci.
Accagā [ati + agā] 3rd sg. pret. of ati--gacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he overcame, should or could overcome Sn 1040 (expld. wrongly as pp. = atikkanta at Nd2 10 and as atīta at DhA IV.494); Dh 414.

Accankusa (adj.) [ati + ankusa] beyond the reach of the goad D II.266 (nāga). Accatari see atitarati.
Accati [Vedic arcati, ṛc, orig. meaning to be clear & to sing i. e. to sound clear, cp. arci] to praise, honour, celebrate Dāvs V.66 (accayittha, pret.) -- pp accita, q. v.
Accanta (adj. -- & adv. °--) [ati + anta, lit. "up to the end"] 1. uninterrupted, continuous, perpetual J I.223; Miln 413; VvA 71; PvA 73, 125, 266; Sdhp 288. <-> 2. final, absolute, complete; adv. thoroughly S I.130 (°ŋ hataputtāɔ mhi); III.13 = A I.291 sq.; V.326 sq. (°niṭṭha, °yogakkhemin); Kvu 586 (°niyāmatā final assurance; cp. Kvu trsl. 340). -- 3. (°--) exceedingly, extremely, very much A I.145 (°sukhumāla, extremely delicate), Miln 26 (id.); Sn 794 (°suddhi = param ttha--accantasuddhi SnA 528); Th 1, 692 (°ruci); Dh 162 (°dussīlya = ekanta° DhA III.153).
Accaya [from acceti, ati + i, going on or beyond; cp. Sk. atyaya] (1) (temporal) lapse, passing; passing away, end, death.
Usually as instr. accayena after the lapse of, at the end or death of, after Vin I.25; D II.127 (rattiyā a.), 154 (mam° when I shall
be dead); M I.438 (temās° after 3 months); S I.69; Snp. 102 (catunnaŋ māsānaŋ), p. 110 (rattiyā); J I.253 (ekāha--dvīh°), 291
(katipāh° after a few days); PvA 47 (katipāh°), 82 (dasamās°), 145 (vassasatānaŋ). -- (2) (modal) passing or getting over,
overcoming, conquering, only in phrase dur--accaya difficult to overcome, of kāmapanka Sn 945 (= dur--atikkamanīya SnA
568), of sanga Sn 948: taṇhā Dh 336; sota It 95. -- (3) (fig.) going beyond (the norm), transgression, offence Vin I.133 (thull° a
grave offence), 167 (id.); II.110, 170; esp. in foll. phrases: accayo maŋ accagamā a fault has overcome me, i. e. has been
committed by me (in confession formula) D I.85 (= abhibhavitvā pavatto has overwhelmed me DA I.236); A I.54; M I.438
(id.); accayaŋ accayato passati to recognise a breach of the regulation as such Vin I.315; A I.103; II.146 sq.; °ŋ deseti to
confess the transgression S I.239; °ŋ accayato paṭigaṇhāti to accept (the confession of) the fault, i. e. to pardon the
transgression, in confessionformula at D I.85 = (Vin II.192; M I.438 etc.). In the same sense accaya--paṭiggahaṇa pardon, absolution J V.380; accayena desanaŋ paṭigaṇhāti J I.379; accayaŋ khamati to
forgive Miln 420.
Accasara (adj.) [a form. fr. aor. accasari (ati + sṛ), influenced in meaning by analogy of ati + a + sara (smṛ). Not with
Morris (J.P.T.S. 1889, 200) a corruption of accaya + sara (smṛ), thus meaning "mindful of a fault"] 1. going beyond the limits (of proper behaviour), too self--sure, overbearing, arrogant, proud S I.239 (v. l. accayasara caused by prolepsis of foll. accaya); J IV.6 (+ atisara); DhA IV.230 (= expecting too much). -- 2. going beyond the limits (of understanding), beyond grasp, transcendental (of pañha a question) M I.304; S V.218 (v. l. SS for BB reading ajjhapara). Cp. accasārin.
Accasarā (f.) [abstr. to accasara] overbearing, pride, selfsurity Vbh 358 (+ māyā). Note. In id. p. at Pug 23 we read acchādanā instead of accasarā.
Accasari [fr. ati + sṛ] aor 3. sg. of atisarati to go beyond the limit, to go astray J V.70.
Accasārin (adj.) = accasara 1., aspiring too high Sn 8 sq. (yo nâccasārī, opp. to na paccasārī; expld. at SnA 21 by yo
nâtidhāvi, opp. na ohiyyi).
Accahasi [fr. ati + hṛ] aor 3 sg. of atiharati to bring over, to bring, to take J III.484 (= ativiya āhari C.).
Accâbhikkhaṇa (°--) [ati + abhikkhaṇa] too often J V.233 (°saŋsagga; C. expls. ativiya abhiṇha).
Accāraddha (adj. adv.) [ati + āraddha] exerting oneself very or too much, with great exertion Vin I.182; Th 1, 638; SnA 21.
Accāyata (adj.) [ati + āyata] too long A III.375.

Accāyika (adj.) [fr. accaya] out of time, viz. 1. irregular, extraordinary J VI.549, 553. -- 2. urgent, pressing M I.149 (karaṇiyan business) II.112; J I.338; V.17 °ŋ (nt.) hurry DhA I.18. See also acceka.
Accāvadati [ati + āvadati; or is it = ajjhāvadati = adhi + āvadati?] to speak more or better, to surpass in talk or speech;
to talk somebody down, to persuade, entice Vin IV.224, 263; S II.204 sq.; J V.433 (v. l. BB ajjhārati), 434 (v. l. BB aghācarati for ajjhācarati = ajjhāvadati?).
Accāsanna (adj.) [ati + asanna] very near, too near PvA 42 (na a. n'âtidūra neither too near nor too far, at an easy distance).
Accâhita (adj.) [ati + ahita] very cruel, very unfriendly, terrible J IV.46 = V.146 (= ati ahita C.) = VI.306 (id.).
Acci & (in verse) accī (f.) [Vedic arci m. & arcis nt. & f. to ṛc, cp. accati] a ray of light, a beam, flame S IV.290 (spelt acchi),
399; A IV.103; V.9; Sn 1074 (vuccati jālasikhā Nd2 11); J V.213; Miln 40; ThA 154 (dīpɔ); Sdhp 250.
Accikā (f.) [fr. acci] a flame M I.74; S II.99.
Accita [pp. of accati] honoured, praised, esteemed J VI.180.
Accimant (adj.) [fr. acci, cp. Vedic arcimant & arciṣmant] flaming, glowing, fiery; brilliant Th 1, 527; J V.266; VI.248; Vv 388.
Acci--bandha (adj.) [= accibaddha?] at Vin I.287 is expld. by Bdhgh as caturassa--kedāra--baddha ("divided into short pieces" Vin Texts II.207), i. e. with squares of irrigated fields. The vv. ll. are acca° and acchi°, and we should prefer the conjecture acchi--baddha "in the shape of cubes or dice", i. e. with square fields.
Accuggacchati [ati + uggacchati] to rise out (of), ger. accuggamma D II.38; A V.152 (in simile of lotus).
Accuggata (adj.) [ati + uggata] 1. very high or lofty Miln 346 (giri); VvA 197; DhA II.65. -- 2. too high, i. e. too shrill or loud J VI.133 (sadda), 516 (fig. = atikuddha very angry C.).
Accuṇha (adj.) [ati + uṇha] very hot, too hot Sn 966; Nd1 487; DhA II.85, 87 (v. l. for abbhuṇha). See also ati--uṇha. Accuta (adj.) [a + cuta] immoveable; everlasting, eternal; nt. °ŋ Ep. of Nibbāna (see also cuta) A IV.295, 327; Sn 204,
1086 (= nicca etc. Nd2 12); Dh 225 (= sassata DhA III.321); Sdhp 47.
Accupaṭṭhapeti at J V.124 is to be read with v.l. as apaccupaṭṭhapeti (does not indulge in or care for).
Accupati at J IV.250 read accuppati, aor. 3rd sg. of accuppatati to fall in between (lit. on to), to interfere (with two people quarelling). C. expls. atigantvā uppati. There is no need for Kern's corr. acchupati (Toev. s. v.).
Accussanna (adj.) [ati + ussanna] too full, too thick Vin II.151.
Acceka = accāyika, special; °cīvara a spccial robe Vin III.261; cp. Vin Texts I.293.
Acceti [ati + eti fr. i] 1. to pass (of time), to go by, to elapse Th 1, 145 (accayanti ahorattā). -- 2. to overcome, to get over Miln 36 (dukkhaŋ). -- Caus. acceti to make go on (loc.), to put on J VI.17 (sūlasmiŋ; C. āvuṇeti), but at this passage prob. to be read appeti (q. v.).

Accogāḷha (adj.) [ati + ogāḷha] too abundant, too plentiful (of riches), lit. plunged into A IV.282, 287, 323 sq. Accodaka (nt.) [ati + udaka] too much water (opp. anodaka no water) DhA I.52.
Accodara (nt.) [ati + udara] too much eating, greediness, lit. too much of a belly J IV.279 (C. ati--udara). Accha1
Accha1 (adj.) [cp. Sk. accha, dial., to ṛc (see accati), thus "shining"; cp. Sk. ṛkṣa bald, bare and Vedic ṛkvan bright. Monier--Williams however takes it as a + cha fr. chad, thus "not covered, not shaded"] clear, transparent Vin I.206 (°kañjika); D I.76 (maṇi = tanucchavi DA I.221), 80 (udakapatta), 84 (udaka--rahada); M I.100; S II.281 (°patta); III.105 (id.); A I.9; J II.100 (udaka); Vv 7910 (vāri); DA I.113 (yāgu).
--odaka having clear water, with clear water (of lotus ponds) Vv 4411; 815; f. °odikā Vv 412 = 602. Accha2
Accha2 [Vedic ṛkṣa = Gr. a)/rktos, Lat. ursus, Cymr. arth] a bear Vin I.200; A III.101; J V.197, 406, 416; Miln 23, 149. At J VI.507 accha figures as N. of an animal, but is in expln. taken in the sense of accha4 (acchā nāma aghammigā C.). Note. Another peculiar form of accha is P. ikka (q. v.).
Accha3 = akkha2 (a die) see acci--bandha.
Accha4 (adj.) [Ved. ṛkṣa] hurtful, painful, bad DhA IV.163 (°ruja). Acchaka = accha2, a bear J V.71.
Acchati [Vedic āsyati & āste, ās; cp. Gr. h_(stai] 1. to sit, to sit still Vin I.289; A II.15; It 120 (in set carati tiṭṭhati a.
sayati, where otherwise nisinna stands for acchati); Vv 741 (= nisīdati VvA 298); PvA 4. -- 2. to stay, remain, to leave alone
Th 1, 936; J IV.306. -- 3. to be, behave, live Vin II.195; D I.102; S I.212; Vv 112; Pv III.31 (= nisīdati vasati PvA 188); Miln 88;
DhA I.424. In this sense often pleonastic for finite verb, thus aggiŋ karitvā a. (= aggiŋ karoti) D I.102; aggiŋ paricaranto a. (= aggiŋ paricarati) DA I.270; tantaŋ pasārento a. (= tantaŋ pasāreti)
DhA I.424. -- Pot. acche It 110; aor. acchi Vin IV.308; DhA I.424.
Acchanna (adj.) [pp. of acchādeti] covered with, clothed in, fig. steeped in (c. loe.) J JII.323 (lohite a. = nimugga C.). At D I.91 nacchanna is for na channa (see channa2) = not fair, not suitable or proper (paṭirūpa).
Acchambhin (adj.) [a + chambhin] not frightened, undismayed, fearless Sn 42 (reading achambhin; Nd2 13 expls. abhīru anutrāsi etc.); J VI.322 (= nikkampa C.). See chambhin.
Accharā1 (f.) [etym. uncertain, but certainly dialectical; Trenckner connects it with ācchurita (Notes 76); Childers compares Sk. akṣara (see akkhara); there may be a connection with akkhaṇa in akkhaṇa--vedhin (cp. BSk. acchaṭā Divy 555), or possibly a relation to ā + tsar, thus meaning "stealthily", although the primary meaning is "snapping, a quick sound"] the snapping of the fingers, the bringing together of the finger--tips: 1. (lit.) accharaŋ paharati to snap the fingers J II.447; III.191; IV.124, 126; V.314; VI.366; DhA I.38, 424. -- As measure: as much as one may hold with the finger--tips, a pinch J V.385; DhA II.273

(°gahaṇamattaŋ); cp. ekacchara--matta DhA II.274. -- 2. (fig.) a finger's snap, i. e. a short moment, in ek°acchara--kkhaṇe in one moment Miln 102, and in def. of acchariya (q. v.) at DA I.43; VvA 329.
--sanghāta the snapping of the fingers as signifying a short duration of time, a moment, °matta momentary, only for one moment (cp. BSk. acchaṭāsanghāta Divy 142) A I.10, 34, 38; IV.396; Th 1, 405; 2, 67 (expld. at ThA 76 as ghaṭikāmattam pi khaṇaŋ angulipoṭhanamattam pi kālaŋ). --sadda the sound of the snapping of a finger J III.127.
Accharā2 (f.) [Vedic apsaras = āpa, water + sarati, orig; water nymph] a celestial nymph M I.253 (pl. accharāyo) II.64; Th 2, 374 (= devaccharā ThA 252); J V.152 sq. (Alambusā a.) Vv 55 (= devakaññā VvA 37); Vv 172; 1811 etc.; DhA III.8, 19; PvA 46 (dev°); Miln 169; Sdhp 298.
Accharika (nt. or f.?) [fr. accharā2] in °ŋ vādeti to make heavenly music (lit. the sounds of an accharā or heavenly nymph) A IV.265.
Acchariya (adj.--nt.) [cp. Sk. āścarya since Upanishads of uncertain etym. -- The conventional etym. of Pāli grammarians connects it with accharā1 (which is prob. correct & thus reduces Sk. āścarya to a Sanskritisation of acchariya) viz. Dhammapāla: anabhiṇha--ppavattitāya accharāpaharaṇa--yoggaŋ that which happens without a moment's notice, at the snap of a finger; i. e. causally unconnected (cp. Goth. silda--leiks in similar meaning) VvA 329; and Buddhaghosa: accharā--yoggan ti acchariyaŋ accharaŋ paharituŋ yuttan ti attho DA I.43] wonderful, surprising, strange, marvellous D II.155; M I.79; III.118, 125, 144 (an°); S IV.371; A I.181; Miln 28, 253; DhA III.171; PvA 121; VvA 71 (an°). As nt. often in exclamations: how wonderful! what a marvel! J I.223, 279; IV.138; VI.94 (a. vata bho); DhA IV.51 (aho a.); VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyatthena nipāto). Thus freq. combd. with abbhutaŋ = how wonderful & strange, marvellous, beyond comprehension, e. g. D I.2, 60, 206, 210; II.8; and in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā strange & wonderful things, i. e. wonderful signs, portents
marvels, M III.118, 125; A IV.198; Miln 8; also as adj. in phrase acchariyaabbhuta--(citta--)jātā with their hearts full of wonder and surprise DhA IV.52; PvA 6, 50. -- See also acchera & accheraka.
Acchādana (nt.) [fr. acchādeti] covering, clothing Th 1, 698; Miln 279. -- fig. protection, sheltering J I.307. Acchādanā (f.) [= prec.] covering, hiding, concealment Pug 19, 23. -- Note. In id. p. at Vbh 358 we read accasarā for
acchādanā. Is the latter merely a gloss?
Acchādeti [ā + chādeti1, Caus. of chad, cp. BSk. ācchādayati jīvitena to keep alive Av. Ś, I.300; Divy 136, 137] to cover,
to clothe, to put on D I.63 = It 75; J I.254; III.189; IV.318; Pug 57; Pv I.105 (ger. acchādayitvāna); DA I.181 (= paridahitvā); PvA 49, 50. -- fig. to envelop, to fill J VI.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi dust filled the air). -- pp. acchanna (q. v.).
Acchi at S IV.290 is faulty spelling for acci (q. v.).
Acchijja (v. l. accheja) destroying (?) S I.127. Is the reading warranted? Cp. acchecchi. Acchidda see chidda.
Acchindati [ā + chindati, lit. to break for oneself] to remove forcibly, to take away, rob, plunder Vin IV.247 (sayaŋ a. to appropriate); J II.422; III.179; IV.343; Miln 20; Sdhp 122. -- ger. acchinditvā J II.422; DhA I.349; PvA 241 (sayaŋ); & acchetvā M I.434. Caus. II. acchindāpeti to induce a person to theft Vin IV.224, 247.
Acchinna (adj.) [ā + chinna, pp. of acchindati] removed, taken away, stolen, robbed Vin IV.278, 303; J II.78; IV.45; V.212.
Acchiva [*Sk. akṣiba and akṣība] a certain species of tree (Hypanthera Moringa) J VI.535.

Acchupeti [ā + chupeti, Caus. of chupati] to procure or provide a hold, to insert, to put on or in Vin I.290 (aggaḷaŋ) II.112.
Acchecchi [Sk. acchaitsīt] 3rd sg. aor. of chindati "he has cut out or broken, has destroyed" (see also chindati 3), in combn. with taṇhaŋ M I.122; S I.12, 23, 127 (so read for acchejja); IV.105, 207. It 47; A III.246, 445; DhA IV.70 (gloss acchindi, for acchidda pret. of Dh 351). The v. l. at all passages is acchejji, which is to be accounted for on graphological grounds, ch & j being substituted in MSS. Kern (Toevoegselen s. v.) mistakes the form & tries to explain acchejji as adj. = ati--ejin (ejā), acchecchi = ati--icchin (icchā). The syntactical construction however clearly points to an aor.
Acchejja = a + chejja not to be destroyed, indestructible, see chindati. Acchedana (nt.) [abstr. to acchindati] robbing, plundering J VI.544.
Acchera (adj.) = acchariya wonderful, marvellous S I.181; Vv 8413 (comp. accheratara); Pv III.51 (°rūpa = acchariyasabhāva PvA 197); Sdhp 244, 398.
Accheraka (adj.) = acchera (acchariya) J I.279; Bu I.9 (pāṭihīraŋ).
Aja [Vedic aja fr. aj (Lat. ago to drive), cp. ajina] a hegoat, a ram D I.6, 127; A II.207; J I.241; III.278 sq.; V.241; Pug 56; PvA 80.
--eḷaka [Sk. ajaid̤aka] goats & sheep D I.5, 141; A II.42 sq., 209; J I.166; VI.110; Pug 58. As pl. °ā S I.76; It 36; J IV.363. --pada goat--footed M I.134. --pāla goatherd, in °nigrodharukkha (Npl.) "goatherds'Nigrodha--tree" Vin I.2 sq. Dpvs I.29 (cp. M Vastu III.302). --pālikā a woman goatherd Vin III.38. --lakkhaṇa "goat--sign", i. e. prophesying from signs on a goat etc. D I.9 (expld. DA I.94 as "evarūpānaŋ ajānaŋ mansaŋ khāditabbaŋ evarūpānaŋ na khāditabban ti"). --laṇd̤ikā (pl.) goats'dung, in phrase nāḷimattā a. a cup full of goats'dung (which is put down a bad minister's throat as punishment) J I.419; DhA II.70; PvA 282. --vata "goats'habit", a practice of certain ascetics (to live after the fashion of goats) J IV.318.
aja--pada refers to a stick cloven like a goat's hoof; so also at Vism 161. Ajaka a goat, pl. goats Vin II.154. -- f. ajikā J III.278 & ajiyā J V.241.
Ajagara [aja + gara = gala fr. *gel to devour, thus "goateater"] a large snake (rock--snake?), Boa Constrictor J VI.507; Miln 23, 303, 364, 406; DhA III.60. Also as ajakara at J III.484 (cp. Trenckner, Notes p. 64).
Ajacca (adj.) [a + jacca] of low birth J III.19; VI.100. Ajajjara see jajjara.
Ajaddhuka & Ajaddhumāra see jaddhu.
Ajamoja [Sk. ajamoda, cp. Sk. ajājī] cummin--seed VvA 186. Ajā (f.) a she--goat J III.125; IV.251.
Ajānana (°--) (nt.) [a + jānana] not knowing, ignorance (of) J V.199 (°bhāva); VI.177 (°kāla).
Ajina (nt.) [Vedic ajina, to aja, orig. goats'skin] the hide of the black antelope, worn as a garment by ascetics D I.167; Sn 1027; J I.12, 53; IV.387; V.407. kharājina a rough skin (as garment) M I.343; S IV.118; A II.207; Sn 249 (= kharāni a°--cammāni SnA 291). dantājina? ivory (q. v.).
--khipa a cloak made of a network of strips of a black antelope's hide D I.167; S I.117; A I.240, 295; II.206; Vin I.306; III.34;

J VI.569. --paveṇi a cloth of the size of a couch made from pieces of ant. skin sewn together Vin I.192; D I.7 (= ajina--cammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇi DA I.87); A I.181. --sāṭī a garment of skins (= ajina--camma--sāṭī DhA IV.156) Dh 394 = J I.481 = III.85.
Ajini aor 3rd sg. jayati, q. v.
(see ajaka).
Ajira (nt.). [Vedic ajira to aj, cp. Gr. a)gro/s, Lat. ager, Goth. akrs = Ger. Acker, = E. acre] a court, a yard Mhvs 35, 3.
Ajīraka (nt.) [a + jīraka] indigestion J I.404; II.181, 291; III.213, 225.
Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya
Ajeyya1 & Ajjeyya (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jayati, q. v.] <-> (a) not to be taken by force Kh VIII.8 (cp. KhA 223). <-> (b) not to be overpowered, invincible Sn 288; J V.509.
Ajeyya2 (adj.) [a + jeyya, grd. of jīyati, q. v.] not decaying, not growing old, permanent J VI.323.
Ajja & Ajjā (adv.) [Vedic adya & adyā, a + dyā, a° being base of demonstr. pron. (see a3) and dyā an old loc. of dyaus (see diva), thus "on this day"] to--day, now Sn 75, 153, 158, 970, 998; Dh 326; J I.279; III.425 (read bahutaŋ ajjā; not with Kern, Toev. s. v. as "food"); Pv I.117 (= idāni PvA 59); PvA 6, 23; Mhvs 15, 64. <-> Freq. in phrase ajjatagge (= ajjato + agge(?) or ajja--tagge, see agga3) from this day onward, henceforth Vin I.18; D I.85; DA I.235.
--kālaŋ (adv.) this morning J VI.180; --divasa the present day Mhvs 32, 23.
Ajjatana (adj.) [cp. Sk. adyatana] referring to the day, today's, present, modern (opp. porāṇa) Th 1, 552; Dh 227; J
II.409. -- dat. ajjatanāya for today Vin I.17; PvA 171 & passim.
Ajjatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ajja] the present time, in ajjatañ ca this very day S I.83 (v. l. ajjeva).
Ajjati [Vedic arjati, ṛj, a variant of arh, see arahati] to get, procure, obtain J III.263 (?). pp. ajjita (q. v.).
Ajjava (adj.--n.) [cp. Sk. ārjava, to ṛju, see uju] straight, upright (usually combd. with maddava gentle, soft) D III.213; A I.94; II.113; III.248; Sn 250 (+ maddava), 292 (id.); J III.274; Dhs 1339; Vbh 359 (an°); SnA 292 (= ujubhāva), 317 (id.).
Ajjavatā (f.) [fr. prec.] straight forwardness, rectitude, uprightness Dhs 1339. (+ ajimhatā & avankatā). Ajjita [pp. of ajjati] obtained Sdhp 98.
Ajjuka [*Sk. arjaka] N. of a plant, Ocimum Gratissimum Vin IV.35; DA I.81 (all MSS. have ajjaka). Ajjukaṇṇa [*Sk. arjakarṇa] N. of a tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J VI.535 (nn).
Ajjuṇho (adv.) [haplology fr. ajja--juṇho; see juṇhā] this moonlight night Vin I.25; IV.80.
Ajjuna [Vedic arjuna, to raj; cp. Gr. a)rgo/s white, a)/rguros silver, Lat. argentum] the tree Pentaptera Arjuna J VI.535; DhA I.105 (°rukkha).

Ajjh-- Assimilation group of adhi + vowel.
Ajjhagā [adhi + agā 3rd sg. pret. of adhigacchati (q. v. for similar forms) he came to, got to, found, obtained,
experienced S I.12 (vimānaŋ); Sn 225 (expld. at KhA 180 by vindi paṭilabhi), 956 (ratiŋ; expld. at Nd1 457 by adhigacchi); It 69 (jātimaraṇaŋ); Dh 154 (taṇhānaŋ khayaŋ); Vv 327 (visesaŋ attained distinction; expld. at VvA 135 by adhigata); 5021 (amataŋ santiŋ; expld. VvA 215 by v. l. SS adhigañchi, T. adhigacchati).
Ajjhatta (adj. --n.) [cp. Sk. adhyātma, cp. attā], that which is personal, subjective, arises from within (in contrast to
anything outside, objective or impersonal); as adv. & °interior, personal, inwardly (opp. bahiddhā bāhira etc. outward, outwardly); Cp. ajjhattika & see Dhs. trsl. 272. <-> D I.37 (subjective, inward, of the peace of the 2nd jhāna), 70 = A II.210; V.206 (inward happiness. a. sukkhaŋ = niyakajjhattaŋ attano santāne ti attho DA I.183 cp. DhsA 169, 338, 361); S I.70, 169; II..27 (kathaŋ kathī hoti is in inward doubt), 40 (sukhaŋ dukkhaŋ); III.180 (id.); IV.1 sg. (āyatanāni), 139, 196; V.74 (ṭhitaŋ cittaŋ ajjhattaŋ susaṇṭhitaŋ suvimuttaŋ a mind firm, inwardly well planted, quite set free), 110, 143, 263, 297, 390; A I.40 (rūpasaññī), 272 (kāmacchanda etc.); II.158. (sukhadukkhaŋ), 211; III.86 (cetosamatha), 92 (vūpasantacitta); IV.32 (sankhittaŋ), 57 (itthindriyaŋ), 299 (cittaŋ), 305 (rūpasaññī), 360 (cetosamatha), 437 (vūpasantacitta); V 79 sq., 335 sq. (sati); It 39 (cetosamatha inward peace), 80, 82, 94; J I.045 (chātajjhatta with hungry insides); V.338 (id.); Ps I.76 (cakkhu etc.); Dhs 161 (= attano jātaŋ DhsA 169), 204, 1044; Pug 59; Vbh 1 sq. (khandhā), 228 (sati), 327 (paññā), 342 (arūˊpasaññī). -- adv.
°ŋ inwardly, personally (in contrast--pair ajjhattaŋ vā bahiddhā vā; see also cpd. °bahiddhā) A I.284; II.171; IV.305; V.61; Sn 917 (= upajjhayassa vā ā ācariyassa vā te guṇā assū ti Nd1 350).
--ārammaṇa a subjective object of thought Dhs 1047. --cintin thought occupied with internal things Sn 174, 388.
--bahiddhā inside & outside, personal--external, mutual, interacting S II.252 sq.; III.47; IV.382; Nd2 15; Dhs 1049 etc. (see also bahiddhā). --rata with inward joy D II.107 = S V.263 = Dh 362 = Ud 64 (+ samāhita); Th 1, 981; A IV.312; DhA IV.90 (= gocarɔ ajjhatta--sankhātāya kammaṭṭhāna--bhāvanāya rata). --rūpa one's own or inner form Vin III.113 (opp. bahiddhā--rūpa & ajjh°--bah° r.). --saññojana an inner fetter, inward bond A I.63 sq.; Pug 22; Vbh 361. --santi inner peace Sn 837 (= ajjhattānaŋ rāgādīnaŋ santibhāva SnA 545; cp. Nd1 185). --samuṭṭhāna originating from within J I.207 (of hiri; opp. bahiddhā°).
Ajjhattika (adj.) [ajjhatta + ika], personal, inward (cp. Dhs trsl. 207 & Nd1 346: ajjhattikaŋ vuccati cittaŋ); opp. bāhira outward (q. v.). See also āyatana. -- M I.62; S I.73 (°ā rakkhā na bāhirā); IV.7 sq. (āyatanāni); V.101 (anga); A I.16 (anga); II.164 (dhātuyo); III.400 (āyatanāni); V.52 (id.); It 114 (id.), 9 (anga); Kh IV. (= KhA 82); J IV.402 (bāhira--vatthuŋ ayācitvā ajjhattikassa nāmaŋ gaṇhati); Dhs 673, 751; Vbh 13, 67, 82 sq., 119, 131, 392 sq.
Ajjhapara S V.218: substitute v. l. accasara (q. v.).
[adhi + ā + *prāpta] 1. having reached, approached, coming near to J II.450; VI.566 (p; C. attano santikaŋ patta). -- 2. having fallen upon, attacked J II.59; V.198 (p; C. sampatta) -- 3. attained, found, got Sn 1134 (= adhigacchi Nd2); J III.296 (p. C. sampatta); V.158 (ajjhāpatta; C. sampatta).
Ajjhabhavi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati to conquer, overpower, overcome S I.240 (prohib. mā vo kodho ajjhabhavi); J II.336. Cp. ajjhabhu & ajjhobhavati.
Ajjhabhāsi 3rd sg. aor. of adhibhāseti to address S IV.117 (gāthāhi); Kh V. = Sn p. 46 (gāthāya); PvA 56, 90. Ajjhabhu (3rd sg. aor. of adhibhavati (q. v.) to overcome, conquer It 76 (dujjayaŋ a. he conquered him who is hard to
conquer; v. l. ajjhabhi for ajjhabhavi). Cp. ajjhabhavi.
Ajjhayana (nt.) [adhi + i] study (learning by heart) of the Vedas Miln 225. See also ajjhena.
Ajjhavodahi 3rd sg. aor. of ajjhodahati [Sk. adhyavadhāti] to put down J V.365 (= odahi, ṭhapesi C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. proposes reading ajjhavādahi (= Sk. avādhāt).

Ajjhāgāre (adv.) [adhi + agāre, loc. of agāra] at home, in one's own house A I.132 = It 109; A II.70.
Ajjhācarati [adhi (or ati?) + ā + car] 1. to conduct oneself according to Vin II.301; M I.523; Miln 266. -- 2. to flirt with
(perhaps to embrace) J IV.231 (aññam--aññaŋ). pp. ajjhāciṇṇa. See also accāvadati & aticarati.
Ajjhācāra [to adhi (ati?) + ā + car] 1. minor conduct (conduct of a bhikkhu as to those minor rules not included in the Pārājika's or Saŋghādisesa's) Vin I.63 (see note in Vin. Texts, I.184. -- 2. flirtation Vin III.128 (in the Old Cy as expln of avabhāsati). -- 3. sexual intercourse J I.396; V.327 (°cara v. l. for ajjhāvara); Miln 127 (an°).
Ajjhāciṇṇa [pp. of ajjhācarati] habitually done Vin II.80 sq., 301.
Ajjhājīva [adhi (ati?) + ā + jīv] too rigorous or strenuous a livelihood M II.245 (+ adhipāṭimokkha).
Ajjhāpajjati [adhi + ā + pad] to commit an offence, to incur, to become guilty of (acc.) Vin IV.237. pp. ajjhāpanna (q. v.).
Ajjhāpatti (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāpajjati] incurring guilt Dhs 299 (an°).
Ajjhāpana1 (nt.) [fr. Caus. II. of ajjheti] teaching of the sacred writ, instruction Miln 225.
Ajjhāpana2 (nt.) [ā + jhāpana fr. kṣā] burning, conflagration J VI.311.
Ajjhāpanna [pp. of adhi + āpajjati] become guilty of offence D I.245; III.43; S II.270; A IV.277, 280; V.178, 181. an°
guiltless, innocent Vin I.103; D III.46; S II.194, 269; A V.181; Miln 401. For all passages except A IV.277, 280, cp. ajjhopanna.
Ajjhāpīḷita [adhi + ā + pīḷita] harassed, overpowered, tormented PvA 180 (khuppipāsāya by hunger & thirst). Ajjhābhava [cp. Sk. adhyābhava] excessive power, predominance J II.357.
Ajjhābhavati [adhi + ā + bhū, in meaning of abhi + bhu] to predominate J II.357.
Ajjhāyaka [cp. Sk. adhyāyaka, cp. ajjhayana] (a brahmin) engaged in learning the Veda (mantajjhāyaka J VI.209; SnA
192), a scholar of the brahmanic texts, a studious, learned person D I.88, 120; III.94; A I.163; III.223; Sn 140 (°kula: thus for ajjhāyakula Fsb.); Th 1, 1171; J I.3; VI.201, 498; DA I.247.
Ajjhāruha (& °rūha) (adj.) [to adhi + ā + ruh] growing up over, overwhelming A III.63 sq. = S V.96; J III.399. Ajjhārūḷha (adj.) [pp. of adhi + ā + ruh] grown up or high over J III.399.
Ajjhārūhati [adhi + ārohati cp. atyārohati] to rise into the air, to climb over, spread over S I.221 = Nett 173 (= ajjhottharati SA; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred Sayings I.285).
Ajjhāvadati see accāvadati.
Ajjhāvara [fr. adhi + ā + var] surrounding; waiting on, service, retinue J V.322, 324, 326, 327 (expld at all passages by

parisā). Should we read ajjhācara? Cp. ajjhācāra.
Ajjhāvasatar [n. ag. to ajjhāvasati] one who inhabits D I.63 (agāraŋ).
Ajjhāvasati [adhi + ā + vas] to inhabit (agāraŋ a house; i. e. to be settled or live the settled life of a householder) D II.16; M I.353; Vin IV.224; J I.50; Pug 57; Miln 348. -- pp. ajjhāvuttha (q. v.).
Ajjhāvuttha [cp. Sk. adhyuṣita; pp. of ajjhāvasati] inhabited, occupied (of a house) Vin II.210; J I.145; II.333; PvA 24 (°ghara); fig. (not) occupied by SnA 566 (= anosita).
Ajjhāsaya [fr. adhi + ā + śri, orig. hanging on, leaning on, BSk. however adhyāśaya Divy 586] intention, desire, wish, disposition, bent D II.224 (adj.: intent on, practising); J I.88, 90; II.352; V.382; DhsA 314, 334; PvA 88, 116, 133 (adj. dān° intent on giving alms), 168; Sdhp 219, 518. Freq. in phrase ajjhāsayânurūpa according to his wish, as he wanted PvA 61, 106, 128.
Ajjhāsayatā (f.) [abstr. to ajjhāsaya] desire, longing PvA 127 (uḷār° great desire for c. loc.). Ajjhāsita [pp. of adhi + ā + śri] intent on, bent on Miln 361 (jhān°). Cp. ajjhosita & nissita.
Ajjhiṭṭha [pp. of ajjhesati] requested, asked, invited Vin I.113 (an° unbidden); D II.289 (Buddhaghosa and text read ajjhitta); Sn p. 218 (= ajjhesita Nd2 16); J VI.292 (= āṇatta C.); DhA IV.100 (v. l. abhijjhiṭṭha). See also an°.
Ajjhupagacchati [adhi + upa + gam] to come to, to reach, obtain; to consent to, agree, submit Th 2, 474 (= sampaṭicchati ThA 285); J II.403; Miln 300; pp. ajjhupagata (q. v.).
Ajjhupagata [pp. of ajjhupagacchati] come to, obtained, reached A V.87, cp. 210; V.187 sq.
Ajjhupagamana (nt.) [adhi + upa + gam] consent, agreement, justification Vin II.97, 104.
Ajjhupaharati [adhi + upa + hṛ; cp. upaharati] to take (food) to oneself J II.293 (aor. ajjhupāhari = ajjhohari C.).
Ajjhupekkhati [adhi + upa + ikṣ; cp. BSk. adhyupekṣati] 1. to look on A I.257; Miln 275. -- 2. to look on intently or with care, to oversee, to take care of A IV.45 (kaṭṭhɔaggi, has to be looked after); PvA 149 (sisaŋ colaŋ vā). -- 3.
to look on indifferently to be indifferent, to neglect Vin II.78 = III.162, cp. J I.147; M I.155; II.223; A III.194, 435; J V.229; DhA IV.125.
Ajjhupekkhana (nt.) & °ā (f.) [abstr. from ajjhupekkhati] care, diligence, attention Ps I.16; II.119; Vbh 230 sq.; DhA IV.3.
Ajjhupekkhitar [n. ag. to ajjhupekkhati] one who looks on (carefully), one who takes care or controls, an overseer, caretaker S V.69 (sādhukaŋ), 324 (id.), 331 sq.; Vbh 227.
Ajjhupeti [cp. Sk. abhyupeti; adhi + upa + i] to go to meet, to receive J IV.440.
Ajjheti [Sk. ādhyāyati, Denom. fr. adhyāya] to be anxious about, to fret, worry Sn 948 (socati +); expld at Nd1 433 by
nijjhāyati, at SnA 568 by abhijjhati (gloss BB gijjhati).
Ajjhena (nt.) [Sk. adhyayana, see also ajjhayana] study (esp. of the Vedas) M III.1; J II.327 (as v. l. to be preferred to ajjhesanā); III.114 (= japa); V.10 (pl. = vede); VI.201 = 207; Vbh 353; SnA 314 (mantɔ).
--kujja (°kūta v. l.?) a hypocrite, a pharisee Sn 242; cp. SnA 286.

Ajjhesati (adhi + iṣ; cp. BSk. adhyeṣate Divy 160] to request, ask, bid DhA IV.18; aor. ajjhesi Vin II.200; pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita (q. v.), with which cp. pariyiṭṭha & °esita.
Ajjhesanā (f.) [see ajjhesati] request, entreaty Vin I.6 = D II.38 = S I.138; J II.327 (better v. l. ajjhena). Ajjhesita [pp. of ajjhesati; cp. ajjhiṭṭha] requested, asked, bidden Nd2 16 (= ajjhiṭṭha).
Ajjhokāsa [adhi + okāsa] the open air, only in loc. ajjhokāse in the open Vin I.15; S I.212; DhA IV.100. Ajjhogāḷha [pp. of ajjhogāhati] plunged into, immersed; having entered M I.457; S I.201; Miln 348.
[Sk. *abhyavagāhate; adhi (= abhi) + ava + gāh] to plunge into, to enter, to go into D I.101 (vanaŋ), 222 (samuddaŋ); M I.359, 536; A III.75, 368; IV.356; V.133; Vin III.18; J I.7; Nd1 152 (ogāhati +); Miln 87 (samuddaŋ); 300 (vanaŋ). -- pp. ajjhogāḷha (q. v.). Cp. pariyogāhati.
Ajjhoṭhapeti [adhi + ava + ṭhapeti, Caus. of sthā] to bring to PvA 148 (gāmaŋ), where we should read °ṭṭhapeti. Ajjhotthata [pp. of ajjhottharati] spread over; covered, filled; overcome, crushed, overpowered J I.363 (ajjhottaṭa), 410;
V.91 (= adhipanna); DhA I.278; PvA 55; Dāvs V.5.
Ajjhottharati [adhi + ava + stṛ] to cover over, spread out, spread over, cover; to submerge, flood Vin I.111; J I.61, 72,
73; Miln 296, 336; Dh I.264; Pass. °tthariyati to be overrun with (instr.), to be smothered, to be flooded A III.92 = Pug 67; aor. ajjhotthari VvA 48 (gāmapadeso: was flooded). pp. ajjhotthata (q. v.).
Ajjhopanna (?) only found in one stock phrase, viz. gathita (q. v.) mucchita ajjhopanna with ref. to selfishness, greed,
bonds of craving. The reading ajjhopanna is the lectio difficilior, but the accredited reading ajjhosāna seems to be clearer
and to harmonize better with the cognate ajjhosita & ajjhosāna (n.) in the same context. The confusion between the two is old--standing and hard to be accounted for. Trenckner under v. l. to M I.162 on p. 543 gives ajjhopanna as BB (= adhi--opanna). The MSS. of Nd2 clearly show ajjhopanna as inferior reading, which may well be attributable to the very frequent SS sub<-> stitution of p for s (see Nd2 Introd. XIX.). Besides this mixture of vv. ll. with s and p there is another confusion between the vv. ll. ajjhāpanna and ajjhopanna which adds to the complication of the case. However since the evidence of a better reading between these two preponderates for ajjhopanna we may consider the o as established, and, with a little more clearness to be desired, may in the end decide for ajjhosāna (q. v.), which in this case would have been liable to change through analogy with ajjhāpanna, from which it took the ā and p. Cp. also ajjhosita. The foll. is a synopsis of readings as preferred or confused by the Ed. of the var. texts. -- 1. ajjhopanna as T. reading: M I.162, 173, 369; A I.74; II.28; III.68, 242; Md 75, 76; DA I.59; as v. l.: D I.245. <-> 2. ajjhosāna as v. l.: A I.74 (C. expls. ajjhosāya gilitvā ṭhita); Nd2 under nissita & passim; Ud 75, 76 (ajjhosanna); DA I.59 (id.). -- 3. ajjhāpanna as T. reading: D I.245; III.43, 46; S. II.194, 270: IV.332 (ajjhapaṇṇa); A V.178, 181; Nd2 under nissita; Miln 401; as v. l.: M I.162; A III.242; Ud 75, 76.
Ajjhobhavati [adhi + ava + bhu, Sk. abhi°] to overcome, overpower, destroy J II.80 (aor. ajjhobhavi = adhibhavi C.). Ajjhomaddati [adhi + ava + mṛd] to crush down A IV.191, 193.
Ajjhomucchita [pp. adhi + ava + mūrch, cp. adhimuccita] stiffened out (in a swoon), lying in a faint (?) A III.57 sq. (v. l. ajjhomuñcïta or °muccita better: sarīre attached to her body, clinging to her b.).
Ajjholambati [adhi + ava + lamb] to hang or hold on to (acc.), to cling to S III 137; M III.164 = Nett 179, cp. Sdhp 284 & 296.

Ajjhosa = ajjhosāya, in verse only as ajjhosa tiṭṭhati to cleave or cling to S IV.73; Th 1, 98, 794.
Ajjhosati [adhi + ava + sayati, sā, to bind, pp. sita: see ajjhosita] to be bound to, to be attached, bent on; to desire, cleave to, indulge in. Fut. ajjhosissati (does it belong here?) M I.328 (c. acc. paṭhaviŋ, better as ajjhesati). grd. ajjhositabha M I.109 (+ abhinanditabba, v. l. °etabba); DhsA 5 (id.); ger. ajjhosāya (q. v.) pp. ajjhosita (q. v.).
Ajjhosāna (nt.) cleaving to (earthly joys), attachment, D II.58 sq.; III.289; M I.498 (+ abhinandana); S III.187; A I.66;
II.11 (diṭṭhi°, kāma° + taṇhā). In combn. with (icchā) and mucchā at Nd2 under chanda & nissita and taṇhā (see also ajjhopanna), and at Dhs 1059 of lābha, (the expln. at DhsA 363, 370, from as to eat, is popular etym.) Nett 23 sq. (of taṇhā).
Ajjhosāya [ger. of ajjhosati, cp. BSk. adhyavasāya tiṣṭhati Divy 37, 534] being tied to, hanging on, attached to, only in phrase a. tiṭṭhati (+ abhinandati, same in Divy) M I.266; S. IV.36 sq.; 60, 71 sq.; Miln 69. See also ajjhosa.
Ajjhosita [cp. Sk. adhyavasita, from adhi + ava + sā; but sita is liable to confusion with sita = Sk. śrita, also through
likeness of meaning with esita; see ajjhāsita & ajjhesita] hanging on, cleaving to, being bent on, (c. loc.) S II.94 (+ mamāyita); A II.25 (diṭṭha suta muta +); Nd1 75, 106, 163 = Nd2 under nissita; Th 2, 470 (asāre = taṇhāvasena abhiniviṭṭha ThA 284); Pv IV.84 (mayhaŋ ghare = taṇhābhinivisena abhiniviṭṭha PvA 267; v. l. BB ajjhesita, SS ajjhāsita). --an° S IV.213; V.319; Nd1 411; Miln 74 (pabbajita).
Ajjhohata [pp. of ajjhoharati] having swallowed Sdhp 610 (balisaŋ maccho viya: like a fish the fishhook).
Ajjhoharaṇa (nt.) = ajjhohāra 1. A V.324; J VI.213.
Ajjhoharaṇiya (adj.) [grd. of ajjhoharati] something fit to eat, eatable, for eating J VI.258; DhA I.284.
Ajjhoharati [Sk. abhyavaharati; adhi (= abhi) + ava + hṛ] to swallow, eat, take as food M I.245; J I.460; II.293; VI.205, 213; Miln 366; PvA 283 (aor.) --pp. ajjhohaṭa (q.v.).
Ajjhohāra [Sk. abhyavahāra] 1. taking food, swallowing, eating & drinking Vin IV.233; Miln 176, 366. -- 2. N. of a fabulous fish (swallower"; cp. timingala) J V.462.
Añcati J I.417, read añchati (see next).
Añchati [in meaning = ākad̤d̤hati, which latter is also the Sk. gloss (ākārṣayati) to the Jain Prk. aŋchāvei = añQhati: see Morris, J. P. T. S. 1893, 60] to pull, drag, pull along, to turn on a lathe D II.291 (bhamakāro dīghaŋ a., where K has note: añjanto ti pi acchanto ti pi pātho) = M I.56 (vv. ll. p. 532 acch° & añj°); Th 1, 750 (añcāmi T., v.l. aññāmi). Añchati should also be read at J I 417 for udakaŋ añcanti (in expln. of udañcanī pulling the water up from a well, q. v.), where it corresponds to udakaŋ ākkad̤d̤hati in the same sentence.
Añja (adv.) [orig. imper. of añjati1; cp. Sk. anjasā (instr.) quickly, Goth. anaks suddenly, lit. with a pull or jerk] pull on! go on! gee up! J I.192.
Añjati1 [= Sk. ṛñjati, ṛjyati to stretch, pull along, draw out, erect; cp. Sk. ṛju straight, caus. irajyati; Gr. o)re/gw; Lat. rego,
rectus = erect. See also P. uju, añchati, ajjita, ānañja--ānejja]. See añja, añjaya, añjali, añjasa.
Añjati2 & Añjeti
Añjati2 & Añjeti [= Sk. añjayati, Caus. of anakti to smear etc.; cp. Sk. añji ointment, ājya butter; Lat. unguo to anoint,

unguentum ointment; Ohg. ancho = Ger. Anke butter] to smear, anoint, paint S II.281; J IV.219 (akkhīni añjetvā, v. l. BB añcitvā). Caus. II. añjāpeti DhA I.21. <-> pp. añjita (q. v.).
Añjana (nt.) [from añjati2] ointment, esp. a collyrium for the eyes, made of antimony, adj. anointed, smeary; glossy, black
(cp. kaṇha II. and kāla1 note). -- 1. Vin I.203 (five kinds viz. kāḷ°, ras°, sot°, geruka, kapalla); D I.7, 12; DA I.98 (khār°); 284; DhA III.354 (akkhi° eye--salve). -- 2. glossy, jet--black J I.194; II.369; V.416. The reading añjana at A IV.468 is wrong, it should be corrected into thanamajjanamattaŋ. See also pacc°. In meaning collyrium box at Th 2, 413 (= añjana--nāḷi ThA 267); DhA II.25.
--akkhiha with anointed eyes Th 1, 960. --upapisana perfume to mix with ointment Vin I.203; II.112. --cuṇṇa aromatic powder DhsA 13. --nāḷi an ointment tube, collyrium box ThA 267. --rukkha N. of a tree ("black" tree) J I.331. --vaṇṇa of the colour of collyrium, i. e. shiny, glossy, dark, black D II.18 (lomāni); J I.138 (kesā), 194; II.369; PvA 258 (vana).
Añjanī (f.) [fr. añjana] a box for ointment, a collyrium pot Vin I.203, 204; II.135; IV.168; M II.65 = Th 1, 773. Añjanisalākā (f.) a stick to put the ointment on with Vin I.203; II.135; J III.419.
Añjaya (adj.) [from añjati1] straight J III.12 (vv. ll. ajjava & and ājjava better?) expld by C. as ujuka, akuṭila. See also ajjava. Should we assume misreading for añjasa?
Añjali [cp. Sk. añjali, fr. añjati1] extending, stretching forth, gesture of lifting up the hands as a token of reverence (cp. E. to "tender" one's respect), putting the ten fingers together and raising them to the head (VvA 7: dasanakha--samodhāna--samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ paggayha). Only in stock phrases (a.) añjaliŋ paṇāmeti to bend forth the outstretched hands Vin II.188; D I.118; Sn 352; Sn p. 79. (b.) °ŋ paggaṇhāti to perform the a. salutation J I.54; DhA IV.212; VvA 7, 312 (sirasmiŋ on one's head); PvA 93. (c.) °ŋ karoti id. PvA 178; cp. katañjali (adj.) with raised hands Sn 1023; J I.17; PvA 50, and añjalikata id. Pv II.1220. Cp. pañjali
--kamma respectful salutation, as above A I.123; II.180; IV.130; Vv 788, 8316; DhA I.32. --karaṇīya (adj.) that is worthy of being thus honoured D III.5; A II.34; III.36; IV.13 sq.; It 88.
Añjalikā (f.) [= añjali] the raising of the hands as a sign of respectful salutation Vv 15 (expld at VvA 24 as dasanakha--samodhāna samujjalaŋ añjaliŋ sirasi paggaṇhantī guṇa--visiṭṭhānaŋ apacayānaŋ akāsiŋ).
Añjasa [Sk. āñjasa (?). Cp. ārjava = P. ajjava, see añjati1 & añjaya] straight, straightforward (of a road) D I.235; J I.5; Th 2, 99; Vv 5020 (cp. VvA 215); VvA 84 (= akuṭila); Mhvs 25, 5; Miln 217; Sdhp 328, 595. Cp. pañjasa.
Añjita [Sk. ankta & añjayita, pp. of añjeti] smeared, anointed J I.77 (su--añjitāni akkhīni); IV.421 (añjitɔakkha).
Añña (pron.) [Vedic anya, with compar. suff. ya; Goth. anpar; Ohg. andar; formation with n analagous to those with l in Gr. a)/llos (a)/ljos), Lat. alius (cp. alter), Goth. aljis Ags. elles = E. else. From demonstr. base *eno, see na1 and cp. a3] another etc. -- A. By itself: 1. other, not the same, different, another, somebody else (opp. oneself) Vin III.144 (aññena, scil. maggena, gacchati to take a different route); Sn 459, 789, 904; Dh 158 (opp. attānaŋ), 165; J I.151 (opp. attano); II.333 (aññaŋ vyākaroti give a diff. answer). -- 2. another one, a second; nt. else, further Sn 1052 (= uttariŋ nt. Nd2 17); else J I.294. aññaŋ kiñci (indef.) anything else J I.151. yo añño every other, whoever else J I.256. -- 3. aññe (pl.) (the) others, the rest Sn 189, 663, 911; Dh 43, 252, 355; J I.254. -- B. del. in correlation: 1. copulative. añña . . añña the one . . the other (. . the third etc.); this, that & the other; some . . some Vin I.15; Miln 40; etc. <-> 2. reciprocative añño aññaŋ, aññamaññaŋ, aññoññaŋ one another,
each other, mutually, reciprocally (in ordinary construction & declension of a noun or adj. in sg.; cp. Gr. a)llh/lwn, allh/lous in pl.). (a.) añño aññaŋ Dh 165. (b.) aññamañña (cp. BSk. añyamañya M Vastu II.436), as pron.: n'ālaŋ aññamaññassa
sukhāya vā dukkhāya vā D I.56 = S III 211. n'aññamaññassa dukkhaŋ iccheyya do not wish evil to each other Sn 148. daṇd̤ehi aññamaññaŋ upakkamanti (approach each other) M I.86 = Nd2 199. °ŋ agāravo viharati A III.247. dve janā °ŋ ghātayiŋsu (slew each other) J I.254. aññamaññaŋ hasanti J V.111; °ŋ musale hantvā J V.267. °ŋ daṇd̤âbhigāṭena PvA 58; or adj.: aññamaññaŋ veraŋ bandhiŋsu (established mutual enmity) J II.353; °ŋ piyasaŋvāsaŋ vasiŋsu J II.153; aññamaññaŋ accayaŋ

desetvā (their mutual mistake) DhA I.57; or adv. dve pi aññamaññaŋ paṭibaddha citta ahesuŋ (in love with each other) J III.188; or °--: aññamañña--paccaya mutually dependent, interrelated Ps II.49, 58. <-> (c.) aññoñña (°--) J V.251 (°nissita); Dāvs V.45 (°bhinna). -- 3. disjunctive añña . . añña one . . the other, this one . . . that one, different, different from aññaŋ jīvaŋ . . aññaŋ sarīraŋ one is the soul . . the other is the body, i. e. the soul is different from the body D I.157; M I.430; A V.193; aññā va saññā bhavissati añño attā D I.187. Thus also in phrase aññena aññaŋ opposite, the contrary, differently, contradictory (lit. other from that which is other) Vin II.85 (paṭicarati make counter--charges); D I.57 (vyākāsi gave the opposite or contradictory reply); Miln 171 (aññaŋ kayiramānaŋ aññena sambharati). <-> anañña (1) not another, i. e. the same, self--same, identical
M I.256 (= ayaŋ). -- (2) not anotber, i. e. alone, by oneself, oneself only Sn 65 (°posin; opp. paraŋ) = Nd 4, cp. Nd2 36. -- (3) not another, i. e. no more, only, alone Sn p. 106 (dve va gatiyo bhavanti anaññā: and no other or no more, only two). See also under cpds.
--ādisa different J VI.212, °tā difference PvA 243. --khantika acquiescing in diff. views, following another faith (see khantika) D I.187; M I.487. --titthiya an adherent of another sect, a non--Buddhist.; D III.115; M I.494, 512; P
II.21, 32 sq., 119; III.116 sq.; IV.51, 228; V.6, 27 sq.; A I.65, 240; II.176; IV.35 sq.; Vin I.60; J I.93; II.415. --diṭṭhika having
diff. views (combd. with añña--khantika) D I.187; M I.487. --neyya (an°) not to be guided by somebody else, i. e. independent
in one's views, having attained the right knowledge by oneself (opp. para°) Sn 55, 213, 364. --mano (an°) (adj.) not setting one's heart upon others Vv 115 (see VvA 58). --vāda holding other views, an° (adj.) Dpvs IV.24. --vādaka one who gives a diff. account of things, one who distorts a matter, a prevaricator Vin IV.36. --vihita being occupied with something else, distracted, absent--minded Vin IV.269; DhA III.352, 381; °tā distraction, absentmindedness DhA I.181. --saraṇa (an°) not betaking oneself to others for refuge, i. e. of independent, sure knowledge S III.42 = V.154. --sita dependent or relying on others Sn 825.
Aññatama (pron. adj.) [añña + superl. suff. tama; see also aññatara] one out of many, the one or the other of, a certain, any Mhvs 38, 14.
Aññatara (pron. adj.) [Sk. anyatara, añña + compar. suff. tara, cp. Lat. alter, Goth. anpar etc.] one of a certain number, a certain, somebody, some; often used (like eka) as indef. article "a". Very frequent, e. g. Sn 35, 210; It 103; Dh 137, 157; J I.221, 253; II.132 etc. devaññatara a certain god, i. e. any kind of god S IV.180 = A IV.461.
Aññattha (adv.) [from añña = aññatra, adv. of place, cp. kattha, ettha] somewhere or anywhere else, elsewhere (either place where or whereto) J I.291; II.154; DhsA 163; DhA I.212; III.351; PvA 45; Mhvs 4, 37; 22, 14.
Aññatra (adv.) [anya + tra, see also aññattha] elsewhere, somewhere else J V.252; Pv IV.162. In compn. also = añña°, e. g. aññatra--yoga (adj.) following another discipline D I.187; M I.487. -- As prep. c. abl. (and instr.) but, besides, except, e. g. a. iminā tapo-- pakkamena D I.168; kiŋ karaṇīyaŋ a. dhammacariyāya S I.101; ko nu aññatram--ariyehi who else but the Nobles Sn 886 (= ṭhapetvā saññā--mattena SnA 555). --kiŋ aññatra what but, i. e. what else is the cause but, or: this is due to; but for D I.90 (vusitavā--mānī k. a. avusitattā); S I.29 (k. k. a. adassanā except from blindness); Sn 206 (id.).
Aññathatta (nt.) [aññathā + tta] 1. change, alteration S III.37; IV.40; A I.153; III.66; Kvu 227 (= jarā C, cp. Kvu trsl. 55 n. 2); Miln 209. -- 2. difference J I.147; It 11. -- 3. erroneous supposition, mistake Vin II.2; S III.91; IV.329. -- 4. fickleness, change of mind, doubt, wavering, M I.448, 457 (+ domanassa); J I.33 (cittaŋ); PvA 195 (cittassa).
Aññathā (adv.) [añña + thā] in a different manner, otherwise, differently S I.24; Sn 588, 757; DhsA 163; PvA 125, 133. anaññathā without mistake Vv 4418; anaññatha (nt.) certainty, truth Ps II.104 (= tatha).
--bhāva (1) a different existence A II.10; It 9 = 94; Sn 729, 740, 752; (2) a state of difference; i. e. change, alteration, unstableness D I.36; S II.274; III.8, 16, 42; Vbh 379. --bhāvin based on difference S III.225 sq.; IV.23 sq., 66 sq.; an° free from difference Vin I.36.
Aññadatthu (adv.) [lit. aññad atthu let there be anything else, i. e. be it what it will, there is nothing else, all, everything, surely] part. of affirmation = surely, all--round, absolutely (ekaŋsa--vacane nipāto DA I.111) only, at any rate D I.91; II.284; Sn 828 (na hɔ aññadatthɔ atthi pasaŋsa--lābhā, expld. SnA 541 as na hi ettha pasaŋsa--lābhato añño attho atthi, cp. also Nd1

168); Miln 133; VvA 58; PvA 97, 114.
--dasa sure--seeing, seeing everything, all pervading D I.18; III.135, 185; A II.24; III.202; IV.89, 105; It 15.
Aññadā (adv.) [añña + dā, cp. kadā, tadā, yadā] at another time, else, once S IV.285; J V.12; DhA IV.125.
Aññā (f.) [Sk. ājñā, = ā + jñā, cp. ājānāti] knowledge, recognition, perfect knowledge, philosophic insight, knowledge par excellence, viz. Arahantship, saving knowledge, gnosis (cp. on term Compend. 176 n. 3 and Psalms of Brethren introd. XXXIII.) M I.445; S I.4 (sammad°), 24 (aññāya nibbuta); II.221; V.69, 129 (diṭṭhɔeva dhamme), 133, 237; A III.82, 143, 192; V.108; It 39 sq., 53, 104; Dh 75, 96; Kh VII.11; Miln 334. -- aññaŋ vyākaroti to manifest ones Arahantship (by a discourse or by mere exclamation) Vin I.183; S II.51 sq., 120; IV.139; V.222; J I.140; II.333. See also arahatta.
--atthika desirous of higher knowledge Pv IV.114. --ārādhana the attainment of full insight M I.479. --indriya the faculty of perfect knowledge or of knowledge made perfect D III.219; S V.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 362, 505, 552; Nett 15, 54, 60. --citta the thought of gnosis, the intention of gaining Arahantship S II.267; A III.437. --paṭivedha comprehension of insight Vin II.238. --vimokkha deliverance by the highest insight Sn 1105, 1107 (Nd2 19: vuccati arahatta--vimokkho).
Aññāṇa (nt.) [a + ñāṇa] ignorance; see ñāṇa 3 e.
Aññāṇaka (nt.) [Demin. of aññāṇa] ignorance Vin IV.144. Aññāṇin (adj.) [a + ñāṇin] ignorant, not knowing DhA III.106. Aññāta1
Aññāta1 [pp. of ājānāti, q. v.] known, recognised Sn 699. an° what is not known, in phrase anaññāta--ññassāmīɔ tɔ indriya the faculty of him (who believes): "I shall know what is not known (yet)" D III.219; S V.204; It 53; Pug 2; Dhs 296 (cp. Dhs trsl. 86); Nett 15, 54, 60, 191.
--mānin one who prides himself in having perfect knowledge, one who imagines to be in possession of right insight A III.175 sq.; Th 1, 953.
Aññāta2 [a + ñāta] unknown, see ñāta.
Aññātaka1 [a + ñātaka, cp. Sk. ajñāti] he who is not a kinsman DhA I.222.
Aññātaka2 (adj.) [Demin. of aññāta2] unknown, unrecognisable, only in phrase °vesena in unknown form, in disguise J I.14; III.116; V.102.
Aññātar [n. ag. to ājānāti] one who knows, a knower of D II.286; M I.169; S I.106 (dhammassa); Kvu 561.
Aññātāvin (adj. --n.) [from ājānāti] one who has complete insight DhsA 291.
--indriya (°tāvɔ indr.) the faculty of one whose knowledge is made perfect Dhs 555 (cp. Dhs trsl. 150) and same loci as under
aññindriya (see aññā).
Aññātukāma (adj.) [ā + jñātuŋ + kāma] desirous of gaining right knowledge A III.192. See ājānāti.

Aññāya [ger. of ājānāti, q. v. for detail] reeognising, knowing, in the conviction of S I.24; A III.41; Dh 275, 411. Aññoñña see añña B 2 c.
Añhamāna [Sk. aśnāna, ppr. med. of aśnāti, aś to eat] eating, taking food; enjoying: only SS at Sn 240; all MSS at 239 have asamāna. SnA 284 expls. by āhārayamāna.
Aṭaṭa [BSk. aṭaṭa (e. g. Divy 67), prob. to aṭ roam about. On this notion cp. description of roaming about in Niraya at Nd1 405 bottom] N. of a certain purgatory or Niraya A V.173 = Sn p. 126.
Aṭaṇaka (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭana, to aṭ] roaming about, wild J V.105 (°gāvī).
Aṭanī (f.) a support a stand inserted under the leg of a bedstead Vin IV.168; Sām. Pās. on Pāc. 14 (quoted Min. Pāt. 86 and Vin IV.357); DhA I.234; J II.387, 425, 484 supports of a seat. Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69 compares Marāthi ad̤aṇī
a three--legged stand. See also Vin Texts II.53.
Aṭala (adj.) [cp. Sk. aṭṭa & aṭṭālaka stronghold] solid, firm, strong, only in phrase aṭaliyo upāhanā strong sandals M II.155 (vv. ll. paṭaliye & agaliyo) = S I.226 (vv. ll. āṭaliyo & āṭaliko). At the latter passage Bdhgh. expls. gaṇangaṇ--ûpāhanā, Mrs. Rh. D. (Kindred Sayings I.291) trsls. "buskined shoes".
Aṭavī (f.) [Sk. aṭavī: Non--Aryan, prob. Dravidian] 1. forest, woods J I.306; II.117; III.220; DhA I.13; PvA 277. <-> 2. inhabitant of the forest, man of the woods, wild tribe J VI.55 (= aṭavicorā C.).
--rakkhika guardian of the forest J II.335. --sankhepa at A I.178 = III.66 is prob. faulty reading for v. l. °sankopa "inroad of savage tribes".
Aṭṭa1 [cp. see aṭṭaka] a platform to be used as a watchtower Vin I.140; DA I.209.
Aṭṭa2 [cp. Sk. artha, see also attha 5 b] lawsuit, case, cause Vin IV.224; J II.2, 75; IV.129 (°ŋ vinicchināti to judge a cause), 150 (°ŋ tīreti to see a suit through); VI.336.
Aṭṭa3 [Sk. ārta, pp. of ardati, ṛd to dissolve, afflict etc.; cp. Sk. ārdra (= P. adda and alla); Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)/rda dirt. See also aṭṭīyati & aṭṭita] distressed, tormented, afflicted; molested, plagued, hurt Sn 694 (+ vyasanagata; SnA 489 ātura); Th 2, 439 (= aṭṭita ThA 270), 441 (= pīḷita ThA 271); J IV.293 (= ātura C.); Vv 809 (= attita upadduta VvA 311). Often --°: iṇaṭṭa oppressed by debt M I.463; Miln 32; chāt° tormented by hunger VvA 76; vedan° afflicted by pain Vin II.61; III.100; J I.293; sūcik° (read for sūcikaṭṭha) pained by stitch Pv III.23.
--ssara cry of distress Vin III.105; S II.255; J I.265; II.117; Miln 357; PvA 285.
Aṭṭaka [Demin. of aṭṭa1] a platform to be used as a watchhouse on piles, or in a tree Vin I.173; II.416; III.322, 372; DA I.209.
Aṭṭāna at Vin II.106 is obscure, should it not rather be read with Bdhgh as aṭṭhāna? (cp. Bdhgh on p. 315).
Aṭṭāla [from aṭṭa] a watch--tower, a room at the top of a house, or above a gate (koṭṭhaka) Th 1, 863; J III.160; V.373; Miln 1, 330; DhA III.488.

Aṭṭālaka [Sk. aṭṭālaka] = aṭṭāla; J II.94, 220, 224; VI.390, 433; Miln 66, 81.
Aṭṭita (& occasionally addita, e. g. Pv II.62; Th 2, 77, 89; Th 1, 406) [Sk. ardita, pp. of ardayati, Caus. of ardati, see aṭṭa3] pained, distressed, grieved, terrified Th 1, 157; J II.436; IV.85 (v. l. addhita); V.84; VvA 311; ThA 270; Mhvs 1, 25; 6, 21; Dpvs I.66; II.23; XIII.9; Sdhp 205. <-> See remarks of Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 104, & 1887. 47.
Aṭṭiyati & Aṭṭiyati [Denom. fr. aṭṭa3, q. v.] to be in trouble or anxiety, to be worried, to be incommodated, usually combd. with harāyati, e. g. D I.213 (+ jigucchati); S I.131; M I.423; Pv I.102 (= aṭṭā dukkhitā PvA 48), freq. in ppr. aṭṭiyamāna harayāmāna (+ jigucchamāna) Vin II.292; J I.66, 292; It 43; Nd2 566; Ps I.159. <-> Spelling sometimes addiyāmi, e. g. Th 2, 140. -- pp. aṭṭita & addita.
Aṭṭiyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. ardana, to aṭṭiyati] fright, terror, amazement DhA II.179. Aṭṭha1
Aṭṭha1 [Vedic aṣṭau, old dual, Idg. *octou, pointing to a system of counting by tetrads (see also nava); Av. ašta, Gr. o)ktw/, Lat. octo, Goth. ahtau = Ohg. ahto, Ger. acht, E. eight] num. card, eight, decl. like pl. of adj. in--a. A. The number in objective significance, based on natural phenomena: see cpds. °angula, °nakha, °pada, °pāda. B. The number in subjective significance. -- (1) As mark of respectability and honour, based on the idea of the double square: (a) in meaning "a couple" aṭṭha matakukkuṭe aṭṭha jīva--k. gahetvā (with 8 dead & 8 live cocks; eight instead of 2 because gift intended for a king) DhA I.213. sanghassa a salākabhattaŋ dāpesi VvA 75 = DhA III.104. a. piṇd̤apātāni adadaŋ Vv 348. a. vattha--yugāni (a double pair as offering) PvA 232, a therā PvA 32. -- The highest respectability is expressed by 8 X 8 = 64, and in this sense is freq. applied to gifts, where the giver gives a higher potency of a pair (23). Thus a "royal" gift goes under the name of sabb--aṭṭhakaŋ dānaŋ (8 elephants, 8 horses, 8 slaves etc.) where each of 8 constituents is presented in 8 exemplars DhA II.45, 46, 71. In the same sense aṭṭhɔ aṭṭha kahāpaṇā (as gift) DhA II.41; aṭṭh--aṭṭhakā dibbākaññā Vv 673 (= catusaṭṭhi VvA 290); aṭṭhaṭṭhaka Dpvs VI.56. Quite conspicuous is the meaning of a "couple" in the phrase satt--aṭṭha 7 or 8 = a couple, e. g. sattaṭṭha divasā, a weck or so J I.86; J II.101; VvA 264 (saŋvaccharā years). -- (b.) used as definite measure of quantity & distance, where it also implies the respectability of the gift, 8 being the lowest unit of items that may be given decently. Thus freq. as aṭṭha kahāpaṇā J I.483; IV.138; VvA 76; Miln 291. -- In distances: a. karīsā DhA II.80; IV.217; PvA 258; a. usabhā J IV.142. <-> (c.) in combn. with 100 and 1000 it assumes the meaning of "a great many", hundreds, thousands. Thus aṭṭha sataŋ 800, Sn 227. As denotation of wealt (cp. below under 18 and 80): a--°sata--sahassa--vibhava DhA IV.7. But aṭṭhasata at S IV.232 means 108 (3 X 36), probably also at J V.377. -- aṭṭha sahassaŋ 8000 J V.39 (nāgā). The same meaning applies to 80 as well as to its use as unit in combn. with any other decimal (18, 28, 38 etc.): (a) 80 (asīti) a great many. Here belong the 80 smaller signs of a Mahāpurisa (see anuvyañjana), besides the 32 main signs (see dvattiŋsa) VvA 213 etc. Freq. as measure of riches, e. g. 80 waggon loads Pv II.75; asīti--koṭivibhava DhA III.129; PvA 196; asīti hatthɔ ubbedho rāsi (of gold) VvA 66, etc. See further references under asīti. -- (b) The foll. are examples of 8 with other decimals: 18 aṭṭhādasa (only M III.239: manopavicārā) & aṭṭhārasa (this the later form) VvA 213 (avenika--buddhadhammā: Bhagavant's qualities); as measure J VI.432 (18 hands high, of a fence); of a great mass or multitue: aṭṭhārasa koṭiyo or °koṭi, 18 koṭis J I.92 (of gold), 227; IV.378 (°dhana, riches); DhA II.43 (of people); Miln 20 (id.); a. akkhohini--sankhāsenā J VI.395. a. vatthū Vin II.204. -- 28 aṭṭhavīsati nakkhattāni Nd1 382; paṭisallāṇaguṇā Miln 140. -- 38 aṭṭhatiŋsā Miln 359 (rājaparisā). -- 48 aṭṭhacattārīsaŋ vassāni Sn 289. -- 68 aṭṭhasaṭṭhi Th 1, 1217 °sitā savitakkā, where id. p. at S I.187 however reads atha saṭṭhi--tasitā vitakkā);
J I.64 (turiya--satasahassāni) <-> 98 aṭṭhanavuti (cp. 98 the age of Eli, 1 Sam. IV.15) Sn 311 (rogā, a higher set than the original 3 diseases, cp. navuti). -- (2) As number of symmetry or of an intrinsic, harmonious, symmetrical set, aṭṭha denotes, like dasa (q. v.) a comprehensive unity. See esp. the cpds. for this application. °aŋsa and °angika. Closely related to nos. 2 and 4 aṭṭha is in the geometrical progression of 2. 4. 8. 16. 32. where each subsequent number shows a higher symmetry or involves a greater importance (cp. 8 X 8 under 1 a) -- J V.409 (a. mangalena samannāgata, of Indra's chariot: with the 8 lucky signs); VvA 193 (aṭṭhahi akkhaṇehi vajjitaŋ manussabhāvaŋ: the 8 unlucky signs). In progression: J IV.3 (aṭṭha petiyo, following after 4, then foll. by 8, 16, 32); PvA 75 (a. kapparukkhā at each point of the compass, 32 in all). Further: 8 expressions of bad language DhA IV.3.

--aŋsa with eight edges, octagonal, octahedral, implying perfect or divine symmetry (see above B. 2), of a diamond D I.76 =
M III.121 (maṇi veḷuriyo a.); Miln 282 (maṇiratanaŋ subhaŋ jātimantaŋ a.) of the pillars of a heavenly palace (Vimāna) J VI.127 = 173 = Vv 782 (a. sukatā thambhā); Vv 8415 (āyataŋsa = āyatā hutvā aṭṭha--soḷasadvattiŋsādi--aŋsavanto VvA 339). Of a ball of string Pv IV.328 (gulaparimaṇd̤ala, cp. PvA 254). Of geometrical figures in general Dhs 617. --anga (of) eight parts, eightfold,
consisting of eight ingredients or constituents (see also next and above B 2 on significance of aṭṭha in this connection), in compn. with °upeta characterised by the eight parts (i. e. the observance of the first eight of the commandments or vows, see sīla & cp. anga 2), of uposatha, the fast--day A I.215; Sn 402 (Sn A 378 expls. ekam pi divasaŋ apariccajanto aṭṭhangupetaŋ uposathaŋ upavassa); cp. aṭṭhanguposathin (adj.) Mhvs 36, 84. In BSk. always in phrase aṣṭānga--samanvāgata upavāsa, e. g. Divy 398; Sp. Av. Ś I.338, 399; also vrata Av. Ś I.170. In the same sense aṭṭhangupeta pāṭihāriyapakkha (q. v.) Sn 402,
where Vv 156 has °susamāgata (expld. at VvA 72 by pānāṭipātā veramaṇī--ādīhi aṭṭhahɔ angehi samannāgata). °samannāgata endowed with the eight qualities (see anga 3), of rājā, a king D I.137 sq., of brahmassara, the supreme or most excellent voice (of the Buddha) D II.211; J I.95; VvA 217. Also in Buddh. Sk. aṣṭāngopeta svara of the voice of the Buddha, e. g. Sp. Av. Ś I.149. --angika having eight constituents, being made up of eight (intrinsic) parts, embracing eight items (see above B 2); of the uposatha (as in prec. aṭṭhangɔ uposatha) Sn 401; of the "Eightfold Noble Path" (ariyo a. maggo). (Also in BSk. as
aṣṭāngika mārga, e. g. Lal. Vist. 540, cp. aṣṭāngamārgadeśika of the Buddha, Divy 124, 265); D I.156, 157, 165; M I.118; It 18; Sn 1130 (magga uttama); Dh 191, 273; Th 2, 158, 171; Kh IV.; Vin I.10; Nd2 485; DA I.313; DhA III.402. --angula eight finger--breadths thick, eight inches thick, i. e. very thick, of double thickness J II.91 (in contrast to caturangula); Mhvs 29, 11 (with sattangula). --ad̤d̤ha (v. l. ad̤d̤haṭṭha) half of eight, i. e. four (°pāda) J VI.354, see also ad̤d̤ha1. --nakha having eight
nails or claws J VI.354 (: ekekasmiŋ pāde dvinnaŋ dvinnaŋ khurānaŋ vasena C.). --nava eight or nine DhA III.179. --pada 1. a chequered board for gambling or playing drafts etc., lit. having eight squares, i. e. on each side (DA I.85: ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assā ti), cp. dasapada D I.6. -- 2. eightfold, folded or plaited in eight, cross--plaited (of hair) Th 1, 772 (aṭṭhāpada--katā kesā); J II.5 (°ṭṭhapana = cross--plaiting). --padaka a small square (1/8), i. e. a patch Vin I.297; II.150.
--pāda an octopod, a kind of (fabulous) spider (or deer?) J V.377; VI.538; cp. Sk. aṣṭapāda = śarabha a fabulous eight--legged animal. --mangala having eight anspicious signs J V.409 (expld. here to mean a horse with white hair on the face, tail, mane, and breast, and above each of the four hoofs). --vanka with eight facets, lit. eight--crooked, i. e. polished on eight sides, of a jewel J VI.388. --vidha eightfold Dhs 219.
Aṭṭha2 see attha.
Aṭṭhaka (adj.) [Sk. aṣṭaka] -- 1. eightfold Vin I.196 = Ud 59 (°vaggikāni); VvA 75 = DhA III.104 (°bhatta). -- 2. °ā (f.) the eight day of the lunar month (cp. aṭṭhamī), in phrase rattīsu antarɔaṭṭhakāsu in the nights between the eighths, i. e. the 8th day before and after the full moon Vin I.31, 288 (see Vin Texst I.130n); M I.79; A I.136; Miln 396; J I.390. -- 3. °ŋ (nt.) an octad Vv 672 (aṭṭh° eight octads = 64); VvA 289, 290. On sabbaṭṭhaka see aṭṭha B 1 a. See also antara.
Aṭṭhama (num. ord.) [Sk. aṣṭama, see aṭṭha1] the eighth Sn 107, 230 (cp. KhA 187), 437. -- f. °ī the eighth day of the lunar half month (cp. aṭṭhakā) A I.144; Sn 402; Vv 166 (in all three pass. as pakkhassa cātuddasī pañcadasī ca aṭṭhamī); A I.142; Sn 570 (ito atthami, scil. divase, loc.).
Aṭṭhamaka = aṭṭhama the eighth. -- 1. lit. Miln 291 (att° self--eighth). -- 2. as tt. the eighth of eight persons who strive
after the highest perfection, reckoned from the first or Arahant. Hence the eighth is he who stands on the lowest step of the Path and is called a sotāpanna (q. v.) Kvu 243--251 (cp. Kvu trsl. 146 sq.); Nett 19, 49, 50; Ps II.193 (+ sotāpanna).
Aṭṭhāna (nt.) [ā + ṭṭhāna] stand, post; name of the rubbing--post which, well cut & with incised rows of squares, was let into the ground of a bathing--place, serving as a rubber to people bathing Vin II.105, 106 (read aṭṭhāne with BB; cp. Vin II.315).

Aṭṭhi°1 [= attha (aṭṭha) in compn. with kar & bhū, as freq. in Sk. and P. with i for a, like citti--kata (for citta°), angi--bhūta
(for anga°); cp. the freq. combn. (with similar meaning) manasi--kata (besides manasā--k.), also upadhikaroti and others. This combn. is restricted to the pp and der. (°kata & °katvā). Other explns. by Morris J. P. T. S. 1886, 107; Windisch, M. & B. 100], in combn. with katvā: to make something one's attha, i. e. object, to find out the essence or profitableness or value of anything, to recognise the nature of, to realise, understand, know. Nearly always in stock phrase aṭṭhikatvā manasikatvā D II.204; M I.325, 445; S I.112 sq. = 189, 220; V.76; A II.116; III.163; J I.189; V.151 (: attano atthikabhāvaŋ katvā atthiko hutvā sakkaccaŋ suṇeyya C.); Ud 80 (: adhikicca, ayaŋ no attho adhigantabbo evaŋ sallakkhetvā tāya desanāya atthikā hutvā C.); Sdhp 220 (°katvāna).
Aṭṭhi2 (nt.) [Sk. asthi = Av. asti, Gr. o)/steon, o)/strakon, a)stra/galos; Lat. os (*oss); also Gr. o)/zos branch Goth. asts] <-> 1. a bone A I.50; IV.129; Sn 194 (°nahāru bones & tendons); Dh 149, 150; J I.70; III.26, 184; VI.448 (°vedhin); DhA III.109 (300 bones of the human body, as also at Suśruta III.5); KhA 49; PvA 68 (°camma--nahāru), 215 (gosīs°); Sdhp 46, 103. -- 2. the stone of a fruit J II.104.
--kankala [Sk. °kankāla] a skeleton M I.364; cp. °sankhalika. --kadali a special kind of the plantain tree (Musa Sapientum) J V.406. --kalyāṇa beauty of bones DhA I.387. --camma bones and skin J II.339; DhA III.43; PvA 68 --taca id. J II.295.
--maya made of bone Vin II.115. --miñjā marrow A IV.129; DhA I.181; III.361; KhA 52. --yaka (T. aṭṭhīyaka) bones & liver S I.206. --sankhalikā [B. Sk. °śakalā Sp. Av. Ś I.274 sq., see also aṭṭhika°] a chain of bones, i. e. a skeleton DhA III.479; PvA 152. --sanghāṭa conjunction of bones, i. e. skeleton Vism 21; DhA II.28; PvA 206. --sañcaya a heap of bones It 17 = Bdhd 87. --saññā the idea of bones (cp. aṭṭhika°) Th 1, 18. --saṇṭhāna a skeleton Sdhp 101.
Aṭṭhika1 (nt.) [fr. aṭṭhi] 1. = aṭṭhi 1 a bone M III.92; J I.265, 428; VI.404; PvA 41. -- 2 = aṭṭhi 2 kernel, stone DhA II.53 (tāl°); Mhvs 15, 42.
--sankhalikā a chain of bones, a skeleton A III.324 see also under kaṭaṭṭhika. --saññā the idea of a skeleton S V.129 sq.; A II.17; Dhs 264.
Aṭṭhika2 at PvA 180 (sūcik°) to be read aṭṭita (q. v.) for aṭṭika.
Aṭṭhita1 see ṭhita.
Aṭṭhita2 [ā + ṭhita] undertaken, arrived at, looked after, considered J II.247 (= adhiṭṭhita C.).
Aṭṭhita3 see atthika.
Aṭṭhilla at Vin II.266 is expld. by Bdhgh on p. 327 by gojanghaṭṭika, perhaps more likely = Sk. aṣṭhīlā a round pebble or stone.
Ad̤d̤ha1 (& addha) [etym. uncertain, Sk. ardha] one half, half; usually in compn. (see below), like diyad̤d̤ha 1 1/2 (°sata 150)

PvA 155 (see as to meaning Stede, Peta Vatthu p. 107). Note. ad̤d̤ha is never used by itself, for "half" in absolute position upad̤d̤ha (q. v.) is always used.
--akkhika with furtive glance ("half an eye") DhA IV.98. --aṭṭha half of eight, i. e. four (cp. aṭṭhad̤d̤ha) S II.222 (°ratana); J
VI.354 (°pāda quadruped; v. l. for aṭṭhad̤d̤ha). --aḷhaka 1/2 an aḷhaka (measure) DhA III.367. --ud̤d̤ha [cp. Mahārāṣṭrī form cauṭṭha = Sk. caturtha] three and a half J I.82; IV.180; V.417, 420; DhA I.87; Mhvs 12, 53. --ocitaka half
plucked off J I.120. --karīsa (--matta) half a k. in extent VvA 64 (cp. aṭṭha--karīsa). --kahāpaṇa 1/2 kahāpaṇa A V.83.
--kāsika (or °ya) worth half a thousand kāsiyas (i. e. of Benares monetary standard) Vin I.281 (kambala, a woollen garment of
that value; cp. Vin Texts II.195); II.150 (bimbohanāni, pillows; so read for ad̤d̤hakāyikāni in T.); J V.447 (a°--kāsigaṇikā for a--°kāsiya° a courtezan who charges that price, in phrase a°--k°--gaṇikā viya na bahunnaŋ piyā manāpā). --kumbha a half
(--filled) pitcher Sn 721. --kusi (tt. of tailoring) a short intermediate cross--seam Vin I.287. --kosa half a room, a small room
J VI.81 (= a° kosantara C.). --gāvuta half a league J VI 55. --cūḷa (°vāhā vīhi) 1/2 a measure (of rice) Miln 102, perhaps
misread for ad̤d̤hāḷha (āḷha = āḷhaka, cp. A III.52), a half āḷha of rice. --tiya the third (unit) less half, i. e. two and a half VvA
66 (māsā); J I.49, 206, 255 (°sata 250). Cp. next. --teyya = °tiya 2 1/2 Vin IV.117; J II.129 (°sata); DA I.173 (v. l. BB for °tiya);
DhA I.95 (°sata), 279; PvA 20 (°sahassa). --telasa [cp. BSk. ardhatrayodaśa] twelve and a half Vin I 243, 247; D II.6
(°bhikkhusatāni, cp. tayo B 1 b); DhA III.369. --daṇd̤aka a short stick M I.87 = A I.47; II.122 = Nd2 604 = Miln 197. --duka
see °ruka. --nāḷika (--matta) half a nāḷi--measure full J VI.366. --pallanka half a divan Vin II.280. --bhāga half a share, one
half Vv 136 (= upad̤d̤habhāga VvA 61); Pv I.115. --maṇd̤ala semi--circle, semi circular sewing Vin I.287. --māna half a
māna measure J I.468 (m. = aṭṭhannaŋ nāḷinaŋ nāmaŋ C.). --māsa half a month, a half month, a fortnight Vin III.254 (ūnak°);
A V.85; J III.218; VvA 66. Freq. in acc. as adv. for a fortnight, e. g. Vin IV.117; VvA 67; PvA 55. --māsaka half a bean (as
weight or measure of value, see māsaka) J I.111. --māsika halfmonthly Pug 55. --muṇd̤aka shaven over half the head (sign
of loss of freedom) Mhvs 6, 42. --yoga a certain kind of house (usually with pāsāda) Vin I.58 = 96, 107, 139, 239, 284; II.146.
Acc. to Vin T. I.174 "a gold coloured Bengal house" (Bdhgh), an interpretation which is not correct: we have to read supaṇṇa vankageha "like a Garuḷa bird's crooked wing", i. e. where the roof is bent on one side. --yojana half a yojana (in distance) J
V.410; DA I.35 (in expln. of addhāna--magga); DhA I.147; II.74. --rattā midnight A III.40Q (°aŋ adv. at m.); Vv 8116
(°rattāyaŋ adv. = ad̤d̤harattiyaŋ VvA 315); J I.264 (samaye); IV.159 (id.). --ratti = °rattā VvA 255, 315 (=
majjhimayāma--samaya); PvA 155. --ruka (v. l. °duka) a certain fashion of wearing the hair Vin II.134; Bdhgh expln. on p.
319: ad̤hadukan ti udare lomarāji--ṭhapanaŋ "leaving a stripe of hair on the stomach". --vivata (dvāra) half open J V.293.
Ad̤d̤ha2 (adj.) [Sk. ād̤hya fr. ṛddha pp. of ṛdh, ṛdhnote & ṛdhyate (see ijjhati) to thrive cp. Gr. a)/lqomai thrive, Lat. alo to nourish. Cp. also Vedic id̤ā refreshment & P. iddhi power. See also āḷhiya] rich, opulent, wealthy, well--to--do; usually in combn. with mahaddhana & mahābhoga of great wealth & resources (foll. by pahūta--jātarūparajata pahūta vittūpakaraṇa etc.). Thus at D I.115, 134, 137; III.163; Pug 52; DhA I.3; VvA 322; PvA 3, 78 etc. In other combn. Vv 314 (°kula); Nd2 615 (Sakka = ad̤d̤ho mahaddhano dhanavā); DA I.281 (= issara); DhA II.37 (°kula); Sdhp 270 (satasākh°), 312 (guṇ°), 540 sq. (id.), 561.
Ad̤d̤haka (adj.) wealthy, rich, influential J IV.495; Pv II.82 (= mahāvibhava PvA 107). Ad̤d̤hatā (f.) [abstr. to ad̤d̤ha] riches, wealth, opulence Sdhp 316.
Aṇa [Sk. ṛṇa; see etym. under iṇa, of which aṇa is a doublet. See also āṇaṇya] debt, only in neg. anaṇa (adj.) free from debt Vin I.6 = S I.137, 234 = D II.39; Th 2, 364 (i. e. without a new birth); A II.69; J V.481; ThA 245.
Aṇu (adj.) [Sk. aṇu; as to etym. see Walde Lat. Wtb. under ulna. See also āṇi] small, minute, atomic, subtle (opp. thūla, q. v.) D I.223; S I.136; V.96 (°bīja); Sn 299 (anuto aṇuŋ gradually); J III.12 (= appamattaka); IV.203; Dhs 230, 617 (= kisa); ThA 173; Miln 361. Note aṇu is freq. spelt anu, thus usually in cpd. °matta.
--thūla (aṇuŋthūla) fine and coarse, small & large Dh 31 (= mahantañ ca khuddakañ ca DhA I.282), 409 = Sn 633; J IV.192; DhA IV.184. --matta of small size, atomic, least Sn 431; Vbh 244, 247 (cp. M III.134; A II.22); Dpvs IV.20. The spelling is anumatta at D I.63 = It 118; Dh 284; DA I.181; Sdhp 347. --sahagata accompanied by a minimum of, i. e.

residuum Kvu 81, cp. Kvu trsl. 66 n. 3. Aṇuka (adj.) = aṇu Sn 146, KhA 246.
Aṇd̤a (nt.) [Etym. unknown. Cp. Sk. aṇd̤a] 1. an egg Vin III.3; S II.258; M I.104; A IV.125 sq. -- 2. (pl.) the testicles Vin III.106. -- 3. (in camm°) a water--bag J I.249 (see Morris J. P. T. S. 1884, 69).
--kosa shell of eggs Vin III.3 = M I.104; A IV.126, 176. --cheda(ka) one who castrates, a gelder J IV.364, 366. --ja 1. born from eggs S III.241 (of snakes); M I.73; J II.53 = V.85; Miln 267. -- 2. a bird J. V.189. --bhārin bearing his testicles S II.258 = Vin III.100. --sambhava the product of an egg, i. e. a bird Th 1, 599. --hāraka one who takes or exstirpates the testicles M I.383.
Aṇd̤aka1 (nt.) = aṇd̤a, egg DhA I.60; III.137 (sakuṇ°). Aṇd̤aka2
Aṇd̤aka2 (adj.) [Sk.? prob. an inorganic form; the diaeresis of caṇd̤aka into c° aṇd̤aka seems very plausible. As to meaning cp. DhsA 396 and see Dhs trsl. 349, also Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 6, who, not satisfactorily, tries to establish a relation to ard, as in aṭṭaQ] only used of vācā, speech: harsh, rough, insolent M I.286; A V.265, 283, 293 (gloss kaṇṭakā); J III.260; Dhs 1343, cp. DhsA 396.
Aṇṇa (food, cereal). See passages under aparaṇṇa & pubbaṇṇa.
Aṇṇava (nt.) [Sk. arṇa & arṇava to ṛ, ṛṇoti to move, Idg. *er to be in quick motion, cp. Gr. o)/rnumi; Lat. orior; Goth. rinnan = E. run; Ohg. runs, river, flow.] 1. a great flood (= ogha), the sea or ocean (often as mah°, cp. BSk. mahārṇava, e. g. Jtm 3175) M I.134; S I.214; IV.157 (mahā udak°); Sn 173 (fig. for saŋsāra see SnA 214), 183, 184; J I.119 (°kucchi), 227 (id.); V.159 (mah°); Mhvs 5, 60; 19, 16 (mah°). -- 2. a stream, river J III. 521; V.255.
Aṇha [Sk. ahna, day, see ahan] day, only as --° in apar°, pubb°, majjh°, sāy°, q. v. Atakkaka (adj.) [a + takka2] not mixed with buttermilk J YI.21.
Ataccha (nt.) [a + taccha2] falsehood, untruth D I.3; J VI.207.
Ati (indecl.) [sk. ati = Gr. e)/ti moreover, yet, and; Lat. et and, Goth. ip; also connected with Gr. ata/r but, Lat. at but (= over, outside) Goth. appan] adv. and prep. of direction (forward motion), in primary meaning "on, and further", then "up to and beyond". I. in abstr. position adverbially (only as ttg.): in excess, extremely, very (cp. II.3) J VI.133 (ati uggata C. = accuggata T.), 307 (ati ahitaŋ C. = accāhitaŋ T.).
II. as prefix, meaning. -- 1. on to, up to, towards, until); as far as: accanta up to the end; aticchati to go further, pass on; atipāta "falling on to"; attack slaying; atimāpeti to put damage on to, i. e. to destroy. -- 2. over, beyond, past, by, trans--; with verbs: (a.) trs. atikkamati to pass beyond, surpass; atimaññati to put one's "manas" over, to despise; atirocati to surpass in splendour. (b.) intr. atikkanta passed by; atikkama traversing; aticca transgressing; atīta past, gone beyond. -- Also with verbal derivations: accaya lapse, also sin, transgression ("going over"); atireka remainder, left over; atisaya overflow,
abundance; atisāra stepping over, sin. -- 3. exceedingly, in a high or excessive degree either very (much) or too (much); in nominal compn. (a), rarely also in verbal compn. see (b). -- (a) with nouns & adj.: °āsanna too near; °uttama the very highest; °udaka too much water; °khippa too soon; °dāna excessive alms giving; °dāruṇa very cruel; °dīgha extremely long; °dūra too near; deva a super--god °pago too early; °bālha too much; °bhāra a too heavy load; °manāpa very lovely; °manohara very charming; °mahant too great; °vikāla very inconvenient; °vela a very long time; °sambādha too tight, etc. etc. <-> (b.) with verb: atibhuñjati to eat excessively.

III. A peculiar use of ati is its'function in reduplication--compounds, expressing "and, adding further, and so on, even more, etc." like that of the other comparing or contrasting prefixes a (ā), anu, ava, paṭi, vi (e. g. khaṇd̤âkhaṇd̤a, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi, chiddâvacchidda, angapaccanga, cuṇṇavicuṇṇa). In this function it is however restricted to comparatively few expressions and has not by far the wide range of ā (q. v.), the only phrases being the foll. viz. cakkâticakkaŋ mañcâtimañcaŋ bandhati to
heap carts upon carts, couches upon couches (in order to see a procession) Vin IV.360 (Bdhgh); J II.331; IV.81; DhA IV.61. --devâtideva god upon god, god and more than a god (see atideva); mānâtimāna all kinds of conceit; vankâtivanka
crooked all over J I.160. -- IV. Semantically ati is closely related to abhi, so that in consequence of dialectical variation we frequently find ati in Pāli, where the corresp. expression in later Sk. shows abhi. See e. g. the foll. cases for comparison: accuṇha ati--jāta, °pīḷita °brūheti, °vassati, °vāyati, °veṭheti.
Note The contracted (assimilation--) form of ati before vowels is acc-- (q. v.). See also for adv. use atiriva, ativiya, atīva. Ati--ambila (adj.) [ati + ambila] too sour DhA II.85.
Ati--arahant [ati + arahant] a super--Arahant, one who surpasses even other Arahants Miln 277.
Ati--issara (adj.) very powerful(?) J V.441 (°bhesajja, medicin).
Ati--uṇha (adj.) too hot PvA 37 (°ātapa glow). See also accuṇha (which is the usual form).
Ati--uttama (adj.) by far the best or highest VvA 80.
Ati--udaka too much water, excess of water DhA I.52.
Ati--ussura (adj.) only in loc. °Q (adv.) too soon after sunrise, too early VvA 65 (laddhabhattatā eating too early). Ati--eti [ati + i] to go past or beyond, see ger. aticca and pp. atīta.
Atikata (pp.) more than done to, i. e. retaliated; paid back in an excessive degree A I.62.
Atikaddhati [ati + kad̤d̤hati] to pull too hard, to labour, trouble, drudge Vin III.17.
Atikaṇha (adj.) [ati + kaṇha] too black Vin IV.7.
Atikaruṇa (adj.) [ati + karuṇa] very pitiful, extremely miserable J I.202; IV.142; VI.53.
Atikassa (ger.) [fr. atikassati ati + kṛṣ; Sk. atikṛṣya] pulling (right) through J V.173 (rajjuŋ, a rope, through the nostrils; v. l. BB. anti°).
Atikāla [ati + kāla] in instr. atikālena adv. in very good time very early Vin I.70 (+ atidivā).
Atikkanta [pp. of atikamati] passed beyond, passed by, gone by, elapsed; passed over, passing beyond, surpassing J II.128 (tīṇi saŋvaccharāni); DhA III.133 (tayo vaye pas<-> sed beyond the 3 ages of life); PvA 55 (māse °e after the lapse of a month), 74 (kati divasā °ā how many days have passed).
--mānusaka superhuman It 100; Pug 60; cp. BSk. atikrānta--mānuṣyaka M Vastu III.321.
Atikkantikā (f.) [Der. abstr. fr. prec.] transgressing, overstepping the bounds (of good behaviour), lawlessness Miln 122.
Atikkama [Sk. atikrama] going over or further, passing beyond, traversing; fig. overcoming of, overstepping, failing against, transgression Dh 191; Dhs 299; PvA 154 (katipayayojan°), 159 (°caraṇa sinful mode of life); Miln 158 (dur° hard to overcome); Sdhp 64.

Atikkamaṇaka (adj.) [atikkamaṇa + ka] exceeding J I.153.
Atikkamati [ati + kamati] (1) to go beyond, to pass over, to cross, to pass by. (2) to overcome, to conquer, to surpass, to
be superior to. -- J IV.141; Dh 221 (Pot. °eyya, overcome); PvA 67 (maggena: passes by). grd. atikkamanīya to be overcome D II.13 (an°); SnA 568 (dur°). ger. atikkamma D II.12 (surpassing); It 51 (māradheyyaŋ, passing over), cp. vv. ll. under adhigayha; and atikkamitva going beyond, overcoming, transcending (J IV.139 (samuddaŋ); Pug 17; J I.162 (raṭṭhaŋ having left). Often to be trsl. as adv. "beyond", e. g. pare beyond others PvA 15; Vasabhagāmaŋ beyond the village of V. PvA 168. -- pp. atikkanta (q. v.).
Atikkameti [Caus. of atikkamati] to make pass, to cause to pass over J I.151. Atikkhippaŋ (adv.) [ati + khippa] too soon Vin II.284.
Atikhaṇa (nt.) [ati + khaṇa(na)] too much digging J II.296.
Atikhāta (nt.) = prec. J II.296.
Atikhiṇa (adj.) [ati + khīṇa] in cāpâtikhīṇa broken bow (?) Dh 156 (expld. at DhA III.132 as cāpāto atikhīṇā cāpā vinimmuttā).
Atiga (--°) (adj.) [ati + ga] going over, overcoming, surmounting, getting over Sn 250 (sanga°); Dh 370 (id.); Sn 795 (sīma°, cp. Nd1 99), 1096 (ogha°); Nd1 100 (= atikkanta); Nd2 180 (id.).
Atigacchati [ati + gacchati] to go over, i. e. to overcome, surmount, conquer, get the better of, only in pret. (aor.) 3rd sg. accagā (q. v. and see gacchati 3) Sn 1040; Dh 414 and accagamā (see gacchati 2) Vin II.192; D I.85; S II.205; DA I.236 (= abhibhavitvā pavatta). Also 3rd pl. accaguŋ It 93, 95.
Atigāḷeti [ati + gāḷeti, Caus. of galati, cp. Sk. vi--gālayati] to destroy, make perish, waste away J VI.211 (= atigālayati vināseti C. p. 215). Perhaps reading should be atigāḷheti (see atigāḷhita.
Atigāḷha (adj.) [ati + gāḷha 1] very tight or close, intensive J I.62. Cp. atigāḷhita.
Atigāḷhita [pp. of atigāḷheti, Denom. fr. atigāḷha; cp. Sk. atigāhate to overcome] oppressed, harmed, overcome, defeated,
destroyed J V.401 (= atipīḷita C.).
Atighora (adj.) [ati + ghora] very terrible or fierce Sdhp 285.
Aticaraṇa (nt.) [fr. aticarati] transgression PvA 159.
Aticarati [ati + carati] 1. to go about, to roam about Pv II.1215; PvA 57. -- 2. to transgress, to commit adultery J I.496. Cp. next.
Aticaritar [n. ag. of. aticarati] one who transgresses, esp. a woman who commits adultery A II.61 (all MSS. read aticaritvā); IV.66 (T. aticarittā).
Aticariyā (f.) [ati + cariyā] transgression, sin, adultery D III.190. Aticāra [from aticarati] transgression Vv 158 (= aticca cāra VvA 72).

Aticārin (adj. n.) [from aticarati] transgressing, sinning, esp. as f. aticārinī an adulteress S II.259; IV.242; D III.190; A III.261; Pv II.1214; PvA 151 (v. l. BB), 152; VvA 110.
Aticitra (adj.) [ati + citra] very splendid, brilliant, quite exceptional Miln 28.
Aticca (grd.) [ger. of ati + eti, ati + i] 1. passing beyond, traversing, overcoming, surmounting Sn 519, 529, 531. Used adverbially = beyond, in access, more than usual, exceedingly Sn 373, 804 (= vassasataŋ atikkamitvā Nd1 120). -- 2. failing, transgressing, sinning, esp. committing adultery J V,424; VvA 72,
Aticchati [*Sk. ati--ṛcchati, ati + ṛ, cp. aṇṇava] to go on, only occurring in imper. aticchatha (bhante) "please go on, Sir", asking a bhikkhu to seek alms elsewhere, thus refusing a gift in a civil way. [The interpretation given by Trenckner, as quoted by Childers, is from ati + 'iṣ "go and beg further on". (Tr. Notes 65) but this would entail a meaning like "desire in excess", since iṣ does not convey the notion of movement] J III.462; DhA IV.98 (T. aticcha, vv. ll. °atha); VvA 101; Miln 8. -- Caus. aticchāpeti to make go on, to ask to go further J III.462. <-> Cp. icchatā.
Aticchatta [ati + chatta] a "super"--sunshade, a sunshade of extraordinary size & colours DhsA 2.
Atitāta (adj.) [ati + jāta, perhaps ati in sense of abhi, cp. abhijāta] well--born, well behaved, gentlemanly It 14 (opp.
Atitarati [ati + tarati] to pass over, cross, go beyond aor. accatari S IV.157 = It 57 (°āri).
Atituccha (adj.) [ati + tuccha] very, or quite empty Sdhp 430.
Atituṭṭhi (f.) [ati + tuṭṭhi] extreme joy J I.207.
Atitula (adj.) [ati + tula] beyond compare, incomparable Th 1, 831 = Sn 561 (= tulaŋ atīto nirupamo ti attho SnA 455).
Atitta (adj.) [a + titta] dissatisfied, unsatisfied J I.440; Dh 48.
Atittha (nt.) [a + tittha] "that which is not a fordingplace". i. e. not the right way, manner or time; as °wrongly in the wrong way J I.343; IV.379; VI.241; DhA III.347; DA I.38.
Atithi [Sk. atithi of at = at, see aṭati; orig. the wanderer, cp. Vedic atithin wandering] a guest, stranger, newcomer D I.117 (= āgantuka--navaka pāhuṇaka DA I.288); A II.68; III.45, 260; J IV.31, 274; V.388; Kh VIII.7 (= nɔ atthi assa ṭhiti yamhi vā tamhi vā divase āgacchatī ti atithi KhA 222); VvA 24 (= āgantuka).
Atidāna (nt.) [ati + dāna] too generous giving, an excessive gift of alms Miln 277; PvA 129, 130.
Atidāruṇa (adj.) [Sk. atidāruṇa, ati + dāruṇa] very cruel, extremely fierce Pv III.73.
Atiditthi (f.) [ati + diṭṭhi] higher doctrine, super knowledge (?) Vin I.63 = II.4 (+ adhisīla; should we read adhi--diṭṭhi?) Atidivā (adv.) [ati + divā] late in the day, in the afternoon Vin I.70 (+ atikālena); S I.200; A III.117.
Atidisati [ati + disati] to give further explanation, to explain in detail Miln 304.
Atidīgha (adj.) [ati + dīgha] too long, extremely long J IV. 165; Pv II.102; VvA 103 (opp. atirassa).
Atidukkha [ati + dukkha] great evil, exceedingly painful excessive suffering PvA 65; Sdhp 95. In atidukkhavāca PvA

15 ati belongs to the whole cpd., i. e. of very hurtful speech.
Atidūra (adj.) [ati + dūra] very or too far Vin I.46; J II.154; Pv II.965 = DhA III.220 (vv. ll. suvidūre); PvA 42 (opp.
Atideva [ati + deva] a super god, god above gods, usually Ep. of the Buddha S I.141; Th 1, 489; Nd2 307 (cp. adhi°); Miln
277. atidevadeva id. Miln 203, 209. devâtideva god over the gods (of the Buddha) Nd2 307 a.
Atidhamati [ati + dhamati] to beat a drum too hard J I.283; pp. atidhanta ibid.
Atidhātatā [ati + dhāta + ta] oversatiation J II.193.
Atidhāvati [ati + dhāvati 1] to run past, to outstrip or get ahead of S III.103; IV.230; M III.19; It 43; Miln 136; SnA 21.
Atidhonacārin [ati + dhonacārin] indulging too much in the use of the "dhonas", i. e. the four requisites of the
bhikkhu, or transgressing the proper use or normal application of the requisites (expln. at DhA III.344, cp. dhona) Dh 240 = Nett 129.
Atināmeti [BSk. atināmayati, e. g. Divy 82, 443; ati + nāmeti] to pass time A I.206; Miln 345. Atiniggaṇhāti [ati + niggaṇhāti] to rebuke too much J VI.417.
Atinicaka (adj.) [ati + nīcaka] too low, only in phrase cakkavāḷaŋ atisambādhaŋ Brahmaloko atinīcako the World
is too narrow and Heaven too low (to comprehend the merit of a person, as sign of exceeding merit) DhA I.310; III.310 = VvA 68.
Atineti [ati + neti] to bring up to, to fetch, to provide with Vin II.180 (udakaŋ). Atipaṇd̤ita (adj. [ati + paṇd̤ita] too clever DhA IV.38.
Atipaṇd̤itatā (f.) [abstr. of atipaṇd̤ita] too much cleverness DhA II.29.
Atipadāna (nt.) [ati + pa + dāna] too much alms--giving Pv II.943 (= atidāna PvA 130). Atipapañca [ati + p.] too great a delay, excessive tarrying J I.64; II.93.
Atipariccāga [ati + pariccāga] excess in liberality DhA III.11.
Atipassati [ati + passati; cp. Sk. anupaśyati] to look for, catch sight of, discover M III.132 (nāgaŋ).
Atipāta [ati + pat] attack, only in phrase pāṇâtipāta destruction of life, slaying, killing, murder D I.4 (pāṇātipātā
veramaṇī, refraining from killing, the first of the dasasīla or decalogue); DA I.69 (= pāṇavadha, pāṇaghāta); Sn 242; Kh II. cp. KhA 26; PvA 28, 33 etc.
Atipātin (adj. --n.) one who attacks or destroys Sn 248; J VI.449 (in war nāgakkhandh° = hatthikkhande khaggena chinditvā C.); PvA 27 (pāṇ°).
Atipāteti [Denom. fr. atipāta] to destroy S V.453; Dh 246 (v. l. for atimāpeti, q. v.). Cp. paripāteti. Atipīṇita (adj.) [ati + pīṇita] too much beloved, too dear, too lovely DhA V.70.

Atipīḷita [ati + pīḷita, cp. Sk. abhipīd̤ita] pressed against, oppressed, harassed, vexed J V.401 (= atigāḷhita).
Atippago (adv.) [cp. Sk. atiprage] too early, usually elliptical = it is too early (with inf. carituŋ etc.) D I.178; M I.84; A
Atibaddha [pp. of atibandhati; cp. Sk. anubaddha] tied to, coupled J I.192 = Vin IV.5.
Atibandhati [ati + bandhati; cp. Sk. anubandhati] to tie close to, to harness on, to couple J I.191 sq. -- pp. atibaddha q. v.
Atibahala (adj.) [ati + bahala] very thick J VI.365.
Atibāḷha (adj.) [ati + bāḷha] very great or strong PvA 178; nt. adv. °ŋ too much D I.93, 95; M I.253.
Atibāheti [ati + bāheti, Caus. to bṛh1; cp. Sk. ābṛhati] to drive away, to pull out J IV.366 (= abbāheti).
Atibrahmā [ati + brahmā] a greater Brahma, a super--god Miln 277; DhA II.60 (Brahmuṇā a. greater than B.).
Atibrūheti [ati + brūheti, bṛh2, but by C. taken incorrectly to brū; cp. Sk. abhi--bṛṇhayati] to shout out, roar, cry J V.361 (= mahāsaddaŋ nicchāreti).
Atibhagini--putta [ati + bh.--p.] a very dear nephew J I.223.
Atibhāra [ati + bhāra] too heavy a load Miln 277 (°ena sakaṭassa akkho bhijjati).
Atibhārita (adj.) [ati + bhārita] too heavily weighed, overloaded Vtn IV.47.
Atibhāriya (adj.) too serious DhA I.70.
Atibhuñjati [ati + bhuñjati] to eat too much, to overeat Miln 153.
Atibhutta (nt.) [ati + bhutta] overeating Miln 135.
Atibhoti [ati + bhavati, cp. Sk. atibhavati & abhibhavati] to excel, overcome, to get the better of, to deceive J I.163 (= ajjhottharati vañceti C.).
Atimaññati [Sk. atimanyate; ati + man] to despise, slighten, neglect Sn 148 (= KhA 247 atikkamitvā maññati); Dh 365, 366; J II.347; Pv I.76 (°issaŋ, v. l. °asiŋ = atikkamitvā avamaññiŋ PvA 37); PvA 36; Sdhp 609.
Atimaññanā (f.) [abstr. to prec., cp. atimāna] arrogance, contempt, neglect Miln 122. Atimanāpa (adj.) [ati + manāpa] very lovely PvA 77 (+ abhirūpa).
Atimanorama (adj.) [ati + manorama] very charming J I.60.
Atimanohara (adj.) [ati + manohara] very charming PvA 46.
(adj.) [ati + manda] too slow, too weak Sdhp 204, 273, 488.

Atimamāyati [ati + mamāyati, cp. Sk. atīmamāyate in diff. meaning = envy] to favour too much, to spoil or fondle J II.316.
Atimahant (adj.) [ati + mahant] very or too great J I.221; PvA 75.
Atimāna [Sk. atimāna, ati + māna] high opinion (of oneself), pride, arrogance, conceit, M I.363; Sn 853 (see expln. at Nd1
233), 942, 968; J VI.235; Nd1 490; Miln 289. Cp. atimaññanā.
Atimānin (adj.) [fr. atimāna] D II.45 (thaddha +); Sn 143 (an°) 244; KhA 236.
Atimāpeti [ati + māpeti, Caus. of mī, mināte, orig. meaning "to do damage to"] to injure, destroy, kill; only in the stock phrase pāṇaŋ atimāpeti (with v. l. atipāteti) to destroy life, to kill D I.52 (v. l. °pāteti) = DA I.159 (: pāṇaŋ hanati pi parehi hanāpeti either to kill or incite others to murder); M I.404, 516; S IV.343; A III.205 (correct T. reading atimāteti; v. l. pāteti); Dh 246 (v. l. °pāteti) = DhA III.356 (: parassa jīvitindriyaŋ upacchindati).
Atimukhara (adj.) [ati + mukhara] very talkative, a chatterbox J I.418; DhA II.70. atimukharatā (f. abstr.) ibid. Atimuttaka [Sk. atimuktaka] N. of a plant, Gaertnera Racemosa Vin II.256 = M I.32; Miln 338.
Atimuduka (adj.) [ati + muduka] very soft, mild or feeble J I.262.
Atiyakkha (ati + yakkha] a sorcerer, wizard, fortuneteller J VI.502 (C.: bhūtavijjā ikkhaṇīka).
Atiyācaka (adj.) [ati + yācaka] one who asks too much Vin III.147.
Atiyācanā (f.) [ati + yācanā] asking or begging too much Vin III.147.
Atirattiŋ (adv.) [ati + ratti; cp. atidivā] late in the night, at midnight J I.436 (opp. atipabhāte).
Atirassa (adj.) [ati + rassa] too short (opp. atidīgha) Vin IV.7; J VI.457; VvA 103.
Atirājā [ati + rājā] a higher king, the greatest king, more than a king DhA II.60; Miln 277.
Atiriccati [ati + riccati, see ritta] to be left over, to remain Sdhp 23, 126.
Atiritta (adj.) [pp. of ati + rlc, see ritta] left over, only as neg. an° applied to food, i. e. food which is not the leavings of a meal, fresh food Vin I.213 sq, 238; II.301; IV.82 sq., 85.
Atiriva (ati--r--iva) see ativiya.
Atireka (adj.) [Sk. atireka, ati + ric, rinakti; see ritta] surplus, too much; exceeding, excessive, in a high degree; extra Vin I.255; J I.72 (°padasata), 109; 441 (in higher positions); Miln 216; DhsA 2; DhA II.98.
--cīvara an extra robe Vin I.289. --pāda exceeding the worth of a pāda, more than a pāda, Vin III.47. Atirekatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] excessiveness, surplus, excess Kvu 607.
Atirocati [ati + ruc] to shine magnificently (trs.) to outshine, to surpass in splendour D II.208; Dh 59; Pv II.958; Miln 336 (+ virocati); DhA I.446 (= atikkamitvā virocati); III.219; PvA 139 (= ativiya virocati).
Ativankin (adj.) [ati + vankin] very crooked J I.160 (vankâtivankin crooked all over; cp. ati III.).

Ativaṇṇati [ati + vaṇṇati] to surpass, excel D II.267.
Ativatta [pp. of ativattati: Sk. ativṛtta] passed beyond, surpassed, overcome (act. & pass.), conquered Sn 1133 (bhava°);
Nd2 21 (= atikkanta, vītivatta); J V.84 (bhaya°); Miln 146, 154.
Ativattati [ati + vṛt, Sk. ativartate] to pass, pass over, go beyond; to overcome, get over; conquer Vin II.237 (samuddo velaŋ nɔ); S II.92 (saŋsāraŋ); IV.158 (id.) It 9 (saŋsāraŋ) = A II.10 = Nd2 172a; Th 1, 412; J I.58, 280; IV.134; VI.113, 114; PvA 276. -- pp. ativatta (q. v.).
Ativattar1 [Sk. *ativaktṛ, n. ag. to ati--vacati; cp. ativākya] one who insults or offends J V.266 (isīnaŋ ativattāro =
dharusavācāhi atikkamitvā vattāro C.). Ativattar2
Ativattar2 [Sk. *ativartṛ, n. ag. to ati--vattati] one who overcomes or is to be overcome Sn 785 (svātivattā = durativattā duttarā duppatarā Nd1 76).
Ativasa (adj.) [ati + vasa fr. vas] being under somebody's rule, dependent upon (c. gen.) Dh 74 (= vase vattati DhA II.79).
Ativassati [ati + vassati, cp. Sk. abhivarṣati] to rain down on, upon or into Th 1, 447 = Vin II.240. Ativākya (nt.) [ati + vac, cp. Sk. ativāda, fr. ati + vad] abuse, blame, reproach Dh 320, 321 (=
aṭṭha--anariyavohāra--vasena pavattaŋ vītikkama--vacanaŋ DhA IV.3); J VI.508. Ativāta [ati + vāta] too much wind, a wind which is too strong, a gale, storm Miln 277.
Ativāyati [ati + vāyati] to fill (excessively) with an odour or perfume, to satiate, permeate, pervade Miln 333 (+ vāyati; cp. abhivāyati ibid 385).
Ativāha [fr. ati + vah, cp. Sk. ativahati & abhivāha] carrying, carrying over; a conveyance; one who conveys, i. e. a conductor, guide Th 1, 616 (said of sīla, good character); J V.433. -- Cp. ativāhika.
Ativāhika [fr. ativāha] one who belongs to a conveyance, one who conveys or guides, a conductor (of a caravan) J V.471, 472 (°purisa).
Ativikāla (adj.) [ati + vikāla] at a very inconvenient time, much too late D I 108 (= suṭṭhu vikāla DA I.277). Ativijjhati [Sk. atividhyati, ati + vyadh] to pierce, to enter into (fig.), to see through, only in phrase paññāya ativijjha
(ger.) passati to recognise in all details M I.480; S V.226; A II.178.
Ativiya (adv.) [Sk. atīva] = ati + iva, orig. "much--like" like an excess = excessive--ly. There are three forms of this expression, viz. (1) ati + iva in contraction atīva (q. v.); -- (2) ati + iva with epenthetic r: atiriva D II.264 (v. l. SS. atīva); Sn 679, 680, 683; SnA 486; <-> (3) ati + viya (the doublet of iva) = ativiya J I.61, 263; DhA II.71 (a. upakāra of great service); PvA 22, 56, 139.
Ativisā (f.) [Sk. ativiṣā] N. of a plant Vin I.201; IV.35.

Ativissaṭṭha (adj.) [ati + vissaṭṭha] too abundant, in °vākya one who talks too much, a chatterbox J V.204.
Ativissāsika (adj.) [ati + vissāsika] very, or too confidential J I.86.
Ativissuta (adj.) [ati + vissuta] very famous, renowned Sdhp 473.
Ativeṭheti [ati + veṣṭ, cp. Sk. abhiveṣṭate] to wrap over, to cover, to enclose; to press, oppress, stifle Vin II.101; J V.452 (--ativiya veṭheti piḷeti C.).
Ativela (adj.) [ati + vela] excessive (of time); nt. adv. °ŋ a very long time; excessively D I.19 (= atikālaŋ aticiran ti attho DA I.113); M I.122; Sn 973 (see expln. at Nd1 504); J III.103 = Nd1 504.
Atilīna (adj.) [ati + līna] too much attached to worldly matters S V.263.
Atilūkha (adj.) [ati + lūkha] too wretched, very miserable Sdhp 409.
Atiloma (adj.) [ati + loma] too hairy, having too much hair J VI.457 (opp. aloma).
Atisañcara (°cāra?) [ati + sañcāra] wandering about too much Miln 277.
Atisaṇha (adj.) [ati + saṇha] too subtle DhA III.326.
Atisanta (adj.) [ati + santa1] extremely peaceful Sdhp 496.
Atisambādha (adj.) [ati + sambādha] too tight, crowded or narrow DhA I.310; III.310 = VvA 68; cp. atinīcaka. <-> f. abstr. atisambādhatā the state of being too narrow J I.7.
Atisaya [cp. Sk. atiśaya, fr. ati + śī] superiority, distinction, excellence, abundance VvA 135 (= visesa); PvA 86; Dāvs II.62.
Atisayati [ati + śī] to surpass, excel; ger. atisayitvā Miln 336 (+ atikkamitvā). Atisara (adj.) [fr. atisarati; cp. accasara] transgressing, sinning J IV.6; cp. atisāra.
Atisarati [ati + sṛ] to go too far, to go beyond the limit, to overstep, transgress, aor. accasari (q. v.) Sn 8 sq. (opp.
paccasari; C. atidhāvi); J V.70 and atisari J IV.6. <-> ger. atisitvā (for *atisaritvā) D I.222; S IV.94; A I.145; V.226, 256; Sn 908 (= Nd1 324 atikkamitvā etc.).
Atisāyaŋ (adv.) [ati + sāyaŋ] very late, late in the evening J V.94.
Atisāra [fr. ati + sṛ, see atisarati. Cp. Sk. atisāra in diff. meaning but BSk. atisāra (sâtisāra) in the same meaning) going too far, overstepping the limit, trespassing, false step, slip, danger Vin I.55 (sâtisāra), 326 (id.); S I.74; M III.237; Sn 889 (atisāraŋ diṭṭhiyo = diṭṭhigatāni Nd1 297; going beyond the proper limits of the right faith), J V.221 (dhamm°), 379; DhA I.182; DhsA 28. See also atisara.
Atisithila (adj.) [ati + sithila] very loose, shaky or weak A III.375. Atisīta (adj.) [ati + sīta] too cold DhA II.85.

Atisītala (adj.) [ati + sītala] very cold J III.55.
Atihaṭṭha (adj.) [ati + haṭṭha] very pleased Sdhp 323.
Atiharati [ati + hṛ] to carry over, to bring over, bring, draw over Vin II.209; IV.264; S I.89; J I.292; V.347. <-> Caus. atiharāpeti to cause to bring over, bring in, reap, collect, harvest Vin II.181; III.18; Miln 66; DhA IV.77. <-> See also atihita.
Atihita [ati + hṛ, pp. of atiharati, hita unusual for hata, perhaps through analogy with Sk. abhi + dhā] brought over (from the field into the house), harvested, borne home Th 1, 381 (vīhi).
Atihīna (adj.) [ati + hīna] very poor or destitute A IV.282, 287; 323 (opp. accogāḷha). Atihīḷeti [ati + hīd̤] to despise J IV.331 (= atimaññati C.).
Atīta (adj.--n.) [Sk. atīta, ati + ita, pp. of i. Cp. accaya & ati eti] 1. (temporal) past, gone by (cp. accaya 1) (a) adj. atītaŋ addhānaŋ in the time which is past S III.86; A IV.219; V.32. -- Pv II.1212 (atītānaŋ, scil. attabhāvāuaŋ, pariyanto na dissati); khaṇâtīta with the right moment past Dh 315 = Sn 333; atītayobbana he who is past youth or whose youth is past Sn 110. -- (b) nt. the past: atīte (loc.) once upon a time J I.98 etc. atītaŋ āhari he told (a tale of) the past, i. e. a Jātaka J I.213, 218, 221 etc.
-- S I.5 (atītaŋ nânusocati); A III.400 (a. eko anto); Sn 851, 1112. In this sense very frequently combd. with or opposed to
anāgata the future & paccuppanna the present, e. g. atītânāgate in past & future S II.58; Sn 373; J VI.364. Or all three in
ster. combn. atītɔ--anāgata--paccuppanna (this the usual order) D III.100, 135; S II.26, 110, 252; III.19, 47, 187; IV.4 sq.; 151
sq.; A I.264 sq., 284; II.171, 202; III.151; V.33; It 53; Nd2 22; but also occasionally atīta paccuppanna anāgata, e. g. PvA 100. -- 2. (modal) passed out of, having overcome or surmounted, gone over, free from (cp. accaya 2) S I.97
(maraṇaŋ an° not free from death), 121 (sabbavera--bhaya°); A II.21; III.346 (sabbasaŋyojana°); Sn 373 (kappa°), 598 (khaya°,
of the moon = ūnabhāvaŋ atīta Sn A 463); Th 1, 413 (c. abl.) -- 3. (id.) overstepping, having transgressed or neglected (cp. accaya 3) Dh 176 (dhammaŋ).
--aŋsa the past (= atīta koṭṭhāse, atikkantabhavesū ti attho ThA 233) D II.222; III.275; Th 2, 314. --ārammaṇa state of mind arising out of the past Dhs 1041.
Atīradassin (adj.--n.) [a + tīra + dassin] not seeing the shore J I.46; VI.440; also as atīradassanī (f.) J V.75 (nāvā). Cp. D I 222.
Atīva (indecl.) [ati + iva, see also ativiya] very much, exceedingly J II.413; Mhvs 33, 2 etc. Ato (adv.) [Sk. ataḥ] hence, now, therefore S I.15; M I.498; Miln 87; J V.398 (= tato C.). Atoṇa [etym.?) a class of jugglers or acrobats(?) Miln 191.
Atta1 [ā + d + ta; that is, pp. of ādadāti with the base form reduced to d. Idg *d--to; cp. Sk. ātta] that which has been taken up, assumed. atta--daṇd̤a, he who has taken a stick in hand, a violent person, S I.236; IV.117; Sn 630, 935; Dh 406. Attañjaha, rejecting what had been assumed, Sn 790. Attaŋ pahāya Sn 800. The opp. is niratta, that which has not been assumed, has been thrown off, rejected. The Arahant has neither atta nor niratta (Sn 787, 858, 919), neither assumption nor rejection, he keeps an open mind on all speculative theories. See Nd I.82, 90, 107, 352; II.271; SnA 523; DhA IV.180 for the traditional exegesis. As legal t. t. attādānaŋ ādīyati is to take upon oneself the conduct, before the Chapter, of a legal point already raised. Vin II.247 (quoted V.91).

Atta2 see attan.
Atta3 [Sk. akta, pp. of añjati] see upatta.
Attan (m.) & atta (the latter is the form used in compn.) [Vedic ātman, not to Gr. a)\nemos = Lat. animus, but to Gr. a)tmo/s steam, Ohg. ātum breath, Ags. aepm]. -- I. Inflection. (1) of attan-- (n. stem); the foll. cases are the most freq.: acc. attānaŋ D I.13, 185; S I.24; Sn 132, 451. -- gen. dat. attano Sn 334, 592 etc., also as abl. A III.337 (attano ca parato ca as regards himself and others). -- instr. abl. attanā S I.24; Sn 132, 451; DhA II.75; PvA 15, 214 etc. On use of attanā see below III.1 C. -- loc. attani S V.177; A I.149 (attanī metri causa); II.52 (anattani); III.181; M I.138; Sn 666, 756, 784; Vbh 376 (an°). -- (2) of atta-- (a--stem) we find the foll. cases: acc. attaŋ Dh 379. -- instr. attena S IV.54. -- abl. attato S I.188; Ps I.143; II.48; Vbh 336.
Meanings. 1. The soul as postulated in the animistic theories held in N India in the 6th and 7th cent. B. C. It is described in the Upanishads as a small creature, in shape like a man, dwelling in ordinary times in the heart. It escapes from the body in sleep or trance; when it returns to the body life and motion reappear. It escapes from the body at death, then continues to carry on an everlasting life of its own. For numerous other details see Rh. D. Theory of Soul in the Upanishads J R A S 1899. Bt. India 251--255. Buddhism repudiated all such theories, thus differing from other religions. Sixteen such theories about the soul D I.31. Seven other theories D I.34. Three others D I.186/7. A ʻsoulʼ according to general belief was some thing permanent, unchangeable, not affected by sorrow S IV.54 = Kvu 67; Vin I.14; M I.138. See also M I.233; III.265, 271; S II.17, 109; III.135; A I.284; II.164, 171; V.188; S IV.400. Cp. ātuman, tuma, puggala, jīva, satta, pāṇa and nāma--rūpa.
2. Oneself, himself, yourself. Nom. attā, very rare. S I.71, 169; III.120; A I.57, 149 (you yourself know whether that is true or false. Cp. Manu VIII.84. Here attā comes very near to the European idea of conscience. But conscience as a unity or entity is not accepted by Buddhism) Sn 284; Dh 166, 380; Miln 54 (the image, outward appearance, of oneself). Acc. attānaŋ S I.44 (would not give for himself, as a slave) A I.89; Sn 709. Acc. attaŋ Dh 379. Abl. attato as oneself S I.188; Ps I.143; II.48; Vbh 336. Loc. attani A I.149; III.181; Sn 666, 784. Instr. attanā S I.57 = Dh 66; S I.75; II.68; A I.53; III.211; IV.405; Dh 165. On one's own account, spontaneously S IV.307; V.354; A I.297; II.99, 218; III.81; J I.156; PvA 15, 20. In composition with numerals attadutiya himself and one other D II.147; °catuttha with himself as fourth M I.393; A III.36; °pañcama Dpvs VIII.2; °sattama J I.233; °aṭṭhama VvA 149 (as atta--naṭṭhama Vv 3413), & °aṭṭhamaka Miln 291.
anattā (n. and predicative adj.) not a soul, without a soul. Most freq. in combn. with dukkha & anicca -- (1) as noun: S III.141 (°anupassin); IV.49; V.345 (°saññin); A II.52 = Ps II.80 (anattani anattā; opp. to anattani attā, the opinion of the micchādiṭṭhigatā sattā); Dh 279; Ps II.37, 45 sq. (°anupassanā), 106 (yaŋ aniccañ ca dukkhañ ca taŋ anattā); DhA III. 406 (°lakkhaṇa). -- (2) as adj. (pred.): S IV.152 sq.; S IV.166; S IV.130 sq., 148 sq.; Vin I.13 = S III.66 = Nd2 680 Q 1; S III.20 sq.; 178 sq., 196 sq.; sabbe dhammā anattā Vin V.86; S III.133; IV.28, 401.
--attha one's own profit or interest Sn 75; Nd2 23; J IV.56, 96; otherwise as atta--d--attha, e. g. Sn 284. --atthiya looking after one's own needs Th 1, 1097. --âdhipaka master of oneself, self--mastered A I.150. --adhipateyya selfdependence, self--reliance, independence A I.147. --âdhīna independent D I.72. --ânudiṭṭhi speculation about souls S III.185; IV.148; A III.447; Sn 1119; Ps I.143; Vbh 368; MilnQ 146. --ânuyogin one who concentrates his attention on himself Dh 209; DhA III.275. --ânuvāda blaming oneself A II.121; Vbh 376. --uññā self--humiliation Vbh 353 (+ att--avaññā). --uddesa relation to oneself Vin III.149 (= attano atthāya), also °ika ibid. 144. --kata self--made S I.134 (opp. para°). --kāma love of self A II.21; adj. a lover of "soul", one who cares for his own soul S I.75. --kāra individual self, fixed individuality, oneself (cp. ahaŋkāra) D I.53 (opp. para°); A III 337 (id.) DA I.160; as nt. at J V.401 in the sense of service (self--doing", slavery) (attakārāni karonti bhattusu). --kilamatha self--mortification D III.113; S IV.330; V.421; M III.230. --garahin self--censuring Sn 778. --gutta selfguarded Dh 379. --gutti watchfulness as regards one's self, self--care A II.72. --ghañña self--destruction Dh 164. --ja proceeding from oneself Dh 161 (pāpa). --ñū knowing oneself A IV.113, cp. D III.252. --(n)tapa self--mortifying, self--vexing D III.232 = A II.205 (opp. paran°); M I.341, 411; II.159; Pug 55, 56. --daṇd̤a see atta1. --danta selfrestrained, self--controlled Dh 104, 322. --diṭṭhi speculation concerning the nature of the soul Nd1 107; SnA 523, 527. --dīpa relying on oneself, independent, founded on oneself (+ attasaraṇa, opp. añña°) D II.100 = III.42; S V.154; Sn 501 (= attano guṇe eva attano dīpaŋ katvā SnA 416). --paccakkha only in instr. °ena by or with his own presence, i. e. himself J

V.119. --paccakkhika eye--witness J V.119. --paccatthika hostile to oneself Vin II.94, 96. --paṭilābha acquisition of a
personality D I.195 (tayo: oḷārika, manomaya, arūpa). --paritāpana self--chastisement, mortification D III.232 = A II.205; M I.341; PvA 18, 30. --parittā charm (protection) for oneself Vin II.110. --paribhava disrespect for one's own person Vbh 353.
--bhāva one's own nature (1) person, personality, individuality, living creature; form, appearance [cp. Dhs trsl. LXXI and
BSk. ātmabhāva body Divy 70, 73 (°pratilambha), 230; Sp. Av. Ś I.162 (pratilambha), 167, 171] Vin II.238 (living beings,
forms); S V.442 (bodily appearance); A I.279 (oḷārika a substantial creature); II.17 (creature); DhA II.64, 69 (appearance);
SnA 132 (personality). -- (2) life, rebirth A I.134 sq.; III.412; DhA II.68; PvA 8, 15, 166 (atītā °ā former lives). °ŋ pavatteti to lead a life, to live PvA 29, 181. Thus in cpd. paṭilābha
assumption of an existence, becoming reborn as an individual Vin II.185; III.105; D III.231; M III.46; S II.255, 272, 283;
III.144; A II.159, 188; III.122 sq. -- (3) character, quality of heart Sn 388 (= citta SnA 374); J I.61. --rūpa "of the form of self", self--like only in instr. °ena as adv. by oneself, on one's own account, for the sake of oneself S IV.97; A II.120. --vadha self--destruction S II.241; A II.73. --vāda theory of (a persistent) soul D III.230; M I.66; D II.58; S II.3, 245 sq.; III.103, 165,
203; IV.1 sq., 43 sq., 153 sq.; Ps I.156 sq.; Vbh 136, 375. For var. points of an "attavādic" doctrine see Index to Saŋyutta
Nikāya. --vyābādha personal harm or distress self--suffering, one's own disaster (opp. para°) M I 369; S IV.339 = A I.157; A
II.179. --vetana supporting oneself, earning one's own living Sn 24. --sañcetanā self--perception, self--consciousness (opp.
para°) D III.231; A II.159. --sambhava originating from one's self S I.70; A IV.312; Dh 161 (pāpa); Th 1, 260. --sambhūta
arisen from oneself Sn 272. --sammāpaṇidhi thorough pursuit or development of one's personality A II.32; Sn 260, cp. KhA
132. --saraṇa see °dipa. --sukha happiness of oneself, self--success Dpvs I.66, cp. II.11. --hita personal welfare one's own
good (opp. para°) D III.233; A II.95 sq. --hetu for one's own sake, out of self--consideration Sn 122; Dh 328.
Attaniya (adj.) [from attā] belonging to the soul, having a soul, of the nature of soul, soul--like; usually nt. anything of the nature of soul M I.138 = Kvu 67; M I.297; II.263; S III.78 (yaŋ kho anattaniyaŋ whatever has no soul), 127; IV.54 = Nd2 680 F; S IV.82 = III.33 = Nd2 680 Q 3; S IV.168; V.6; Nd2 680 D. Cp. Dhs trsl. XXXV ff.
Attamana [atta1 + mano, having an up raised mind. Bdhgh's expln. is saka--mano DA I.255 = attā + mano. He applies
the same expln. to attamanatā (at Dhs 9, see Dhs trsl. 12) = attano manatā mentality of one's self] delighted, pleased, enraptured D I.3, 90 (an°); II.14; A III.337, 343; IV.344; Sn 45 = Dh 328 (= upaṭṭhita--satt DhA IV.29); Sn 995; Nd2 24 (= tuṭṭha--mano haṭṭha--mano etc.); Vv 14; Pug 33 (an°); Miln 18; DA I.52; DhA I.89 (an°--dhātuka displeased); PvA 23, 132; VvA 21 (where Dhpāla gives two explns, either tuṭṭhamano or sakamano).
Attamanatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] satisfaction, joy, pleasure, transport of mind M I.114; A I.276; IV.62; Pug 18 (an°); Dhs 9, 86, 418 (an°); PvA 132; VvA 67 (an°).
Attāṇa (adj.) [a + tāṇa] without shelter or protection J I.229; Miln 148, 325; ThA 285. Attha1
Attha1 (also aṭṭha, esp. in combns mentioned under 3) (m. & nt.) [Vedic artha from ṛ, arti & ṛṇoti to reach, attain or to proceed (to or from), thus originally result (or cause), profit, attainment. Cp. semantically Fr. chose, Lat. causa] 1. interest, advantage, gain; (moral) good, blessing, welfare; profit, prosperity, well--being M I.111 (atthassa ninnetar, of the Buddha, bringer of good); S IV.94 (id.); S I.34 (attano a. one's own welfare), 55 (id.) 86, 102, 126 = A II.46 (atthassa patti); S I.162 (attano ca parassa ca); II.222 (id.); IV.347 (°ŋ bhañjati destroy the good or welfare, always with musāvādena by lying, cp. attha--bhañjanaka); A I.61 (°ŋ anubhoti to fare well, to have a (good) result); III.364 (samparāyika a. profit in the future life); A V.223 sq. (anattho ca attho ca detriment & profit); It 44 (v. l. attā better); Sn 37, 58 (= Nd2 26, where the six kinds of advantages are enumd. as att° par° ubhay°, i. e. advantage, resulting for oneself, for others, for both; diṭṭhadhammik° samparāyik° param° gain for this life, for a future life, and highest gain of all, i. e. Arahantship); Sn 331 (ko attho supitena what good is it to sleep = na hiQ sakkā supantena koci attho papuṇituŋ SnA 338; cp. ko attho supinena te Pv II.61); PvA 30 (atthaŋ sādheti does good, results in good, 69 (samparāyikena atthena). -- dat. atthāya for the good, for the benefit of (gen.); to advantage, often eombd. with hitāya sukhāya, e. g. D III.211 sq.; It 79. -- Kh VIII.1 (to my benefit); Pv I.43 (= upakārāya PvA 18), II.129 (to great advantage). See also below 6.

Sometimes in a more concrete meaning = riches, wealth, e. g. J I.256 (= vad̤d̤hiŋ C.); III.394 (id.); Pv IV.14 (= dhanaŋ PvA
219). -- Often as --°: att°, one's own wellfare, usually combd. with par° and ubhay° (see above) S II.29; V.121; A I.158, 216;
III.63 sq.; IV.134; Sn 75 (att-aṭṭha, v. l. attha Nd2), 284 (atta--d--attha); uttam° the highest gain, the very best thing Dh 386 (= arahatta DhA IV.142); Sn 324 (= arahatta SnA 332); param° id. Nd2 26; sad° one's own weal D II.141; M I.4; S II.29; V.145;
A I.144; sāttha (adj.) connected with advantage, beneficial, profitable (of the Dhamma; or should we take it as "with the
meaning, in spirit"? see sāttha) D I.62; S V.352; A II.147; III.152; Nd2 316. -- 2. need, want (c. instr.), use (for = instr.) S I.37
(°jāta when need has arisen, in need); J I.254; III.126, 281; IV.1; DhA I.398 (nɔ atthi etehɔ attho I have no use for them); VvA
250; PvA 24 (yāvadattha, adj. as much as is needed, sufficient = anappaka). -- 3. sense, meaning, import (of a word),
denotation, signification. In this application attha is always spelt aṭṭha in cpds. aṭṭh--uppatti and aṭṭha--kathā (see below). On
term see also Cpd. 4. -- S III.93 (atthaŋ vibhajati explain the sense); A I.23 (id.), 60 (nīt° primary meaning, literal meaning;
neyy° secondary or inferred meaning); II.189 (°ŋ ācikkhati to interpret); Sn 126 (°ŋ pucchita asked the (correct) sense, the lit. meaning), 251 (°ŋ akkhāti); Th 1, 374; attho paramo the highest sense, the ultimate sense or intrinsic meaning It 98, cp. Cpd.
6, 81, 223; Miln 28 (paramatthato in the absolute sense); Miln 18 (atthato according to its meaning, opp. vyañjanato by letter, orthographically); DhA II.82; III.175; KhA 81 (pad° meaning of a word); SnA 91 (id.); PvA 15 (°ŋ vadati to explain, interpret),
16, 19 (hitatthadhammatā "fitness of the best sense", i. e. practical application), 71. Very frequent in Commentary style at the conclusion of an explained passage as ti attho "this is the meaning", thus it is meant, this is the sense, e. g. DA I.65; DhA
IV.140, 141; PvA 33, etc. --4.Contrasted with dhamma in the combn. attho ca dhammo ca it (attha) refers to the (primary,
natural) meaning of the word, while dhamma relates to the (interpreted) meaning of the text, to its bearing on the norm and conduct; or one might say they represent the theoretical and practical side of the text (pāḷi) to be discussed, the "letter" and the "spirit". Thus at A I.69; V.222, 254; Sn 326 (= bhāsitatthañ ca pāḷidhammañ ca SnA 333); It 84 (duṭṭho atthaŋ na jānāti
dhammaŋ na passati: he realises neither the meaning nor the importance); Dh 363 (= bhāsitatthañ cɔ eva desanādhammañ
ca); J II.353; VI.368; Nd2 386 (meaning & proper nature); Pv III.96 (but expld. by PvA 211 as hita = benefit, good, thus
referring it to above 1). For the same use see cpds. °dhamma, °paṭisambhidā, esp. in adv. use (see under 6) Sn 430 (yenɔ
atthena for which purpose), 508 (kena atthena v. l. BB for T attanā), J I.411 (atthaŋ vā kāraṇaŋ vā reason and cause); DhA
II.95 (+ kāraṇa(; PvA 11 (ayaŋ hɔ ettha attho this is the reason why). -- 5. (in very wide application, covering the same ground
as Lat. res & Fr. chose): (a) matter, affair, thing, often untranslatable and simply to be given as "this" or "that" S II.36 (ekena--padena sabbo attho vutto the whole matter is said with one word); J I.151 (taŋ atthaŋ the matter); II.160 (imaŋ a.
this); VI.289 (taŋ atthaŋ pakāsento); PvA 6 (taŋ atthaŋ pucchi asked it), 11 (visajjeti explains it), 29 (vuttaŋ atthaŋ what had
been said), 82 (id.). -- (b) affair, cause, case (cp. aṭṭa2 and Lat. causa) Dh 256, 331; Miln 47 (kassa atthaŋ dhāresi whose cause
do you support, with whom do you agree?). See also alamattha. -- 6. Adv. use of oblique cases in the sense of a prep.: (a) dat.
atthāya for the sake of, in order to, for J I.254 dhanɔ atthāya for wealth, kim° what for, why?), 279; II.133; III.54; DhA II.82; PvA 55, 75, 78. --
(b) acc. atthaŋ on account of, in order to, often instead of an infinitive or with another inf. substitute J I.279 (kim°); III.53 (id.); I.253; II.128; Dpvs VI.79; DhA I.397; PvA 32 (dassan° in order to see), 78, 167, etc. -- (c) abl. atthā J III.518 (pitu atthā = atthāya C.). -- (d) loc. atthe instead of, for VvA 10; PvA 33; etc.
anattha (m. & nt.) 1. unprofitable situation or condition, mischief, harm, misery, misfortune S I.103; II.196 (anatthāya saŋvattati); A IV.96 (°ŋ adhipajjati) It 84 (°janano doso ill--will brings discomfort); J I.63, 196; Pug 37; Dhs 1060, 1231; Sdhp 87; DA I.52 (anatthajanano kodho, cp. It 83 and Nd2 420 Q2); DhA II.73; PvA 13, 61, 114, 199. -- 2. (= attha 3) incorrect sense, false meaning, as adj. senseless (and therefore unprofitable, no good, irrelevant) A V.222, 254 (adhammo ca); Dh 100 (= aniyyānad°īpaka DhA II.208); Sn 126 (expld. at SnA 180 as ahitaŋ).
--akkhāyin showing what is profitable D III.187. --attha riches J VI.290 (= atthabhūtaŋ atthaŋ C.). --antara difference between the (two) meanings Miln 158. At Th 1, 374, Oldenberg's reading, but the v. l. (also C. reading) atthandhara is much better = he who knows the (correct) meaning, esp. as it corresponds with dhamma--dhara (q. v.). --abhisamaya grasp of the proficient S I.87 (see abhisamaya). --uddhāra synopsis or abstract of contents ("matter") of the Vinaya Dpvs V.37. --upaparikkhā investigation of meaning, (+ dhamma--savanna) M III.175; A III.381 sq.; IV.221; V.126. --uppatti (aṭṭh°) sense, meaning, explanation, interpretation J I.89; DA I.242; KhA 216; VvA 197, 203 (cp. pāḷito) PvA 2, 6, 78; etc. --kāma (adj.) (a) well--wishing, a well--wisher, friend, one who is interested in the welfare of others (cp. Sk. arthakāma, e. g. Bhagavadgīta II.5: gurūn arthakāman) S I.140, 197, 201 sq.; A III.143; D III.164 (bahuno janassa a., + hitakāmo); J I.241; Pv IV.351; Pv A 25; SnA 287 (an°). <-> (b) one who is interested in his own gain or good, either in good or bad sense (= greedy) S I.44; PvA 112. <-> --kathā (aṭṭha°) exposition of the sense, explanation, commentary J V.38, 170; PvA 1, 71, etc. freq. in

N. of Com. --kara beneficial, useful Vin III.149; Miln 321. --karaṇa the business of trying a case, holding court, giving judgment (v. l. aṭṭa°) D II.20; S I.74 (judgment hall?). --kavi a didactic poet (see kavi) A II.230. --kāmin = °kāma, well--wishing Sn 986 (devatā atthakāminī). --kāraṇā (abl.) for the sake of gain D III.186. --kusala clever in finding out what
is good or profitable Sn 143 (= atthacheka KhA 236). --cara doing good, busy in the interest of others, obliging S I.23 (narānaŋ = "working out man's salvation"). --caraka (adj.) one who devotes himself to being useful to others, doing good, one who renders service to others, e. g. an attendant, messenger, agent etc. D I.107 (= hitakāraka DA I.276); J II.87; III.326; IV.230; VI.369. --cariyā useful conduct or behaviour D III.152, 190, 232; A II.32, 248; IV.219, 364. --ñu one who knows what is useful or who knows the (plain or correct) meaning of something (+ dhammaññū) D III.252; A III.148; IV.113 sq. --dassin intent upon the (moral) good Sn 385 (= hitânupassin SnA 373). --dassimant one who examines a cause (cp. Sk.
arthadarśika) J VI.286 (but expld. by C. as "saṇha--sukhuma--pañña" of deep insight, one who has a fine and minute knowledge). --desanā interpretation, exegesis Miln 21 (dhamm°). --dhamma "reason and morality", see above n0. 3. °anusāsaka one who advises regarding the meaning and application of the Law, a professor of moral philosophy J II.105; DhA II.71. --pada a profitable saying, a word of good sense, text, motto A II.189; III.356; Dh 100. --paṭisambhidā knowledge of
the meaning (of words) combd. with dhamma° of the text or spirit (see above n0. 3) Ps I.132; II.150; Vbh 293 sq. --paṭisaŋvedin experiencing good D III.241 (+ dhamma°); A I.151; III.21. --baddha expecting some good from (c. loc.) Sn 382. --bhañjanaka breaking the welfare of, hurting DhA III.356 (paresaŋ of others, by means of telling lies, musāvādena). --majjha of beautiful waist J V.170 (= sumajjhā C.; reading must be faulty, there is hardly any connection with attha; v. l. atta). --rasa sweetness (or substance, essence) of meaning (+ dhamma°, vimutti°) Nd2 466; Ps II.88, 89. --vasa "dependence on the sense", reasonableness, reason, consequence, cause D II.285; M I.464; II.120; III.150; S II.202; III.93; IV.303; V.224; A I.61, 77, 98; II.240; III.72, 169, 237; Dh 289 (= kāraṇa DhA III.435); It 89; Sn 297; Ud 14. --vasika sensible It 89; Miln 406. --vasin bent on (one's) aim or purpose Th 1, 539. --vādin one who speaks good, i. e. whose words are doing good or who speaks only useful speech, always in combn. with kāla° bhūta° dhamma° D I.4; III.175; A I.204; II.22, 209; Pug 58; DA I.76 (expld. as "one who speaks for the sake of reaping blessings here and hereafter"). --saŋvaṇṇanā explanation, exegesis PvA 1. --saŋhita connected with good, bringing good, profitable, useful, salutary D I.189; S II.223; IV.330; V.417; A III.196 sq., 244; Sn 722 (= hitena saŋhitaŋ SnA 500); Pug 58. --sandassana determination of meaning, definition Ps I.105. --siddhi profit, advantage, benefit J I.402; PvA 63.
Attha2 (nt.) [Vedic asta, of uncertain etym.] home, primarily as place of rest & shelter, but in P. phraseology abstracted from the "going home", i. e. setting of the sun, as disappearance, going out of existence, annihilation, extinction. Only in acc. and as °-- in foll phrases: atthangacchati to disappear, to go out of existence, to vanish Dh 226 (= vināsaŋ natthibhāvaŋ gacchati DhA III.324), 384 (= parikkhayaŋ gacchati); pp. atthangata gone home, gone to rest, gone, disappeared; of the sun (= set): J I.175 (atthangate suriye at sunset); PvA 55 (id.) 216 (anatthangate s. before sunset) fig. Sn 472 (atthagata). 475 (id.); 1075 (= niruddha ucchinṇa vinaṭṭha anupādi--sesāya nibbāna--dhātuyā nibbuta); It 58; Dhs 1038; Vbh 195. --atthagatatta (nt. abstr.) disappearance SnA 409. --atthangama (atthagama passim) annihilation, disappearance; opposed to samudaya (coming into existence) and synonymous with nirodha (destruction) D I.34, 37, 183; S IV.327; A III.326; Ps II.4, 6, 39; Pug 52; Dhs 165, 265, 501, 579; Vbh 105. --atthagamana (nt.) setting (of the sun) J I.101 (suriyass'atthagamanā at sunset) DA I.95 (= ogamana). -- attha--gāmin, in phrase udayɔ atthagāmin leading to birth and death (of paññā): see udaya. --atthaŋ paleti = atthangacchati (fig.) Sn 1074 (= atthangameti nirujjhati Nd2 28). -- Also atthamita (pp. of i) set (of the sun) in phrase anatthamite suriye before sunset (with anatthangamite as v. l. at both pass.) DhA I.86; III.127. -- Cp. also abbhattha.
Attha3 pres. 2nd pl. of atthi (q. v.).
Atthata [pp. of attharati] spread, covered, spread over with (--°) Vin I.265; IV.287; V.172 (also °an); A III.50; PvA 141.
Atthatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. attha1] reason, cause; only in abl. atthattā according to the sense, by reason of, on account of PvA 189 (--°).

Atthara [fr. attharati] a rug (for horses, elephants etc.) D I.7.
Attharaka [= atthara] a covering J I.9; DA I.87. -- f. °ikā a layer J I.9; V.280.
Attharaṇa (nt.) [fr. attharati] a covering, carpet, cover, rug Vin II.291; A II.56; III.53; Mhvs 3, 20; 15, 40; 25, 102; ThA 22.
Attharati [ā + stṛ] to spread, to cover, to spread out; stretch, lay out Vin I.254; V.172; J I.199; V.113; VI.428; Dh I.272. -- pp. atthata (q. v.). -- Caus. attharāpeti to caused to be spread J V.110; Mhvs 3, 20; 29, 7; 34, 69.
Atthavant (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthavant] full of benefit S I.30; Th 1, 740; Miln 172.
Atthāra [cp. Sk. āstāra, fr. attharati] spreading out Vin V.172 (see kaṭhina). atthāraka same ibid.; Vin II.87 (covering).
Atthi [Sk. asti, 1st sg. asmi; Gr. ei)mi/--e)sti/; Lat. sum--est; Goth. im--ist; Ags. eom--is E. am--is] to be, to exist. <-> Pres. Ind. 1st sg. asmi Sn 1120, 1143; J I.151; III.55, and amhi M I.429; Sn 694; J II.153; Pv I.102; II.82. <-> 2nd sg. asi Sn 420; J II.160 (ɔsi); III.278; Vv 324; PvA 4. -- 3rd sg. atthi Sn 377, 672, 884; J I.278. Often used for 3rd pl. (= santi), e. g. J I.280; II.2; III.55. -- 1st pl. asma [Sk. smaḥ] Sn 594, 595; asmase Sn 595, and amha Sn 570; J II.128. 2nd pl. attha J II.128; PvA 39, 74 (āgatɔ attha you have come). <-> 3rd pl. santi Sn 1077; Nd2 637 (= saŋvijjanti atthi upalabbhanti); J II.353; PvA 7, 22 -- Imper. atthu Sn 340; J I.59; III.26. -- Pot. 1st sg. siyā [Sk. syām] Pv II.88, and assaŋ [Cond. used as Pot.] Sn 1120; Pv I.125 (= bhaveyyaŋ PvA 64). -- 2nd sg. siyā [Sk. syāḥ] Pv II.87. -- 3rd sg. siyā [Sk. syāt] D II.154; Sn 325, 1092; Nd2 105 (= jāneyya, nibbatteyya); J I.262; PvA 13, and assa D I.135, 196; II.154; A V.194; Sn 49, 143; Dh 124, 260; Pv II.324; 924. -- 1st pl. assu PvA 27. <-> 3rd pl. assu [cp. Sk. syuḥ] Sn 532; Dh 74; Pv IV.136 (= bhaveyyuŋ PvA 231). -- Aor. 1st sg. āsiŋ [Sk. āsaŋ] Sn 284; Pv I.21 (= ahosiŋ PvA 10); II.34 (= ahosiŋ PvA 83). -- 3rd sg. āsi [Sk. āsīt] Sn 994. -- 3rd āsuŋ [cp. Sk. Perf. āsuḥ] Pv II.321, 133 (ti pi pāṭho for su). <-> Ppr. *sat only in loc. sati (as loc. abs.) Dh 146; J I.150, 263, santa Sn 105; Nd2 635; J I.150 (loc. evaŋ sante in this case); III.26, and samāna (q. v.) J I.266; IV.138.
--bhāva state of being, existence, being J I.222, 290; II.415; DhA II.5; IV.217 (atthibhāva vā natthibhāva vā whether there is or not).
Atthika (adj.) [cp. Sk. arthika] 1. (to attha1) profitable, good, proper. In this meaning the MSS show a variance of spelling either atthika or aṭṭhika or aṭṭhita; in all cases atthika should be preferred D I.55 (°vāda); M II.212 (aṭṭhita); A III.219 sq. (idaŋ atthikaŋ this is suitable, of good avail; T aṭṭhitaŋ, vv. ll. as above); Sn 1058 (aṭṭhita; Nd2 20 also aṭṭhita, which at this pass. shows a confusion between aṭṭha and a--ṭhita); J V.151 (in def. of aṭṭhikatvā q. v.); Pug 69, 70 (T aṭṭhika, aṭṭhita SS; expld. by Pug A V.4 by kalyāṇāya). -- 2. (to attha1 2) desirous of (--°), wanting, seeking for, in need of (c. instr.) A II.199 (uday° desirous of increase); Sn 333, 460, 487 (puññ°), 987 (dhan° greedy for wealth); J I.263 (rajj° coveting a kingdom); V.19; Pv II.228 (bhojan° in need of food); IV.11 (kāraṇ°), 121 (khid̤d̤° for play), 163 (puññ°); PvA 95 (sasena a. wanting a rabbit), 120; DA I.70 (atthikā those who like to). --anatthika one who does not care for, or is not satisfied with (c. instr.) J V.460; PvA 20; of no good Th 1, 956 ("of little zeal" Mrs. Rh. D.).
--bhāva (a) usefulness, profitableness Pug A V.4. (b) state of need, distress PvA 120.
Atthikavant (adj.) [atthika + vant] one who wants something, one who is on a certain errand D I.90 (atthikaŋ assa atthī
ti DA I.255).
Atthitā (f.) [f. abstr. fr. atthi cp. atthibhāva] state of being, existence, being, reality M I.486; S II.17 (°añ c° eva natthitañ ca
to be and not to be); III.135; J V.110 (kassaci atthitaŋ vā natthitaŋ vā jānāhi see if there is anybody or not); DhsA 394. -- Often in abl. atthitāya by reason of, on account of, this being so DhA III.344 (idamatthitāya under this condition) PvA 94, 97, 143.
Atthin (adj.) (--°) [Vedic arthin] desirous, wanting anything; see mant°, vād°.

Atthiya (adj.) (--°) [= atthika] having a purpose or end S III.189 (kim° for what purpose?); A V.1 sq. (id.), 311 sq.; Th 1, 1097 (att° having one's purpose in oneself), 1274; Sn 354 (yad atthiyaŋ on account of what).
Atra (adv.) [Sk. atra] here; atra atra here & there J I.414 = IV.5 (in expln. of atriccha).
Atraja (adj.) [Sk. *ātma--ja, corrupted form for attaja (see attā) through analogy with Sk. atra "here". This form occurs only
in J and similar sources, i. e. popular lore] born from oneself, one's own, appl. to sons, of which there are 4 kinds enumd., viz. atraja khettaja, dinnaka, antevāsika p. Nd2 448. -- J I.135; III.103 = Nd1 504; J III.181; V.465; VI.20; Mhvs 4, 12; 13, 4; 36, 57.
Atriccha (adj.) [the popular etym. suggested at JA IV.4 is atra atra icchamāna desiring here & there; but see atricchā] very covetous, greedy, wanting too much J I.414 = IV.4; III.206.
Atricchā (f.) [Sk. *atṛptyā, a + tṛpt + yā, influenced by Desid. titṛpsati, so that atricchā phonetically rather corresponds to
a form *a.--tṛpsyā (cch = psy, cp. P. chāta Sk. psāta). For the simple Sk. tṛpti see titti (from tappati2). According to Kern, but phonetically hardly justifiable it is Sk. atīccha = ati + icchā "too much desire", with r in dissolution of geminated tt, like atraja for attaja. See also atriccha adj. and cp. J.P.T.S. 1884, 69] great desire, greed, excessive longing, insatiability J IV.5, 327.
Atricchatā (f.) [see atricchā] excessive lust J. III.222.
Atha (indecl.) [Sk. atha, cp. atho] copulative & adversative part. 1. after positive clauses, in enumerations, in the beginning & continuation of a story: and, and also, or; and then, now D II.2; III.152, 199 (athâparaŋ etad avoca); M I.435; Sn 1006, 1007, 1017; Sn p. 126 (athâparaŋ etad avoca: and further, something else); Dh 69, 119, 377; J II.158; Pv II.64; PvA 3, 8 (atha na and not), 70. -- 2. after negative clauses: but M I.430; Sn 990, 1047; Dh 85, 136, 387; PvA 68. Often combd. with other part., e. g. atha kho (pos. & neg.) now, and then; but, rather, moreover Vin I.1; D I.141, 167, 174; A V.195; PvA 79, 221, 251. na--atha kho na neither--nor PvA 28. atha kho pana and yet D I.139. atha ca pana on the other hand J I.279. atha vā
or (after prec. ca), nor (after prec. na) Sn 134; Dh 140, 271; Pv I.41; II.14. athā vā pi Sn 917, 921.
Athabbaṇa [Vedic atharvan; as regards etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under ater] (1) the Atharva Veda DA I.247 = SnA
447 (°veda). -- (2) one who is familiar with the (magic formulas of the) Atharvaveda J VI.490 (sâthabbaṇa=sahatthivejja, with the elephant--healer or doctor). See also āthabbaṇa.
Atho (indecl.) [Sk. atho, atha + u] copulative and adversative part.: and, also, and further, likewise, nay S I.106; Sn 43, 155, 647; Dh 151, 234, 423; J I.83; II.185; IV.495; It 106; Kh VIII.7; Pv IV.315; PvA 251 (atho ti nipātamattaŋ avadhāraṇ--atthe vā). Also combd. with other part., like atho pi Sn 222, 537, 985; Pv II.320; KhA 166.
Ada (adj.) (--°) [to ad, see adeti, cp. °ga, °ṭha, °da etc.] eating S IV.195 (kiṭṭhâda eating corn); J II.439 (vantâda = vantakhādaka C.).
Adaka (adj.) = ada J V.91 (purisâdaka man--eater).
Adana (nt.) [from adeti] eating, food J V.374 (v.l. modana).
Adasaka (adj.) see dasā.
Adāsa [prob. = adaŋsa, from d̤asati to bite, cp. dāṭhā tooth; lit meaning "toothless" or "not biting"] a kind of bird J IV.466. Adiṭṭhā [a + diṭṭhā, ger. of *dassati] not seeing, without seeing J IV.192 (T. adaṭṭhā, v. l. BB na diṭṭhā, C. adisvā); V.219.
Adinna (pp.) [a + dinna] that which is not given, freq. in phrase adinn'ādāna (BSk. adattādāna Divy 302) seizing or
grasping that whieh is not given to one, i. e. stealing, is the 2nd of the ten qualifications of bad character or sīla (dasa--sīla see

sīla II.). Vin I.83 (°ā veramaṇī); D I.4 (= parassa haraṇaŋ theyyaŋ corikā ti vuttaŋ hoti DA I.71); III.68 sq., 82, 92, 181 sq.; M I.361; It 63; Kh II., cp. KhA 26. -- adinnādāyin he who takes what is not given, a thief; stealing, thieving (cp. BSK. adattādāyika Divy 301, 418) Vin I.85; D I.138; Sdhp 78.
Adu (or ādu) (indecl.) [perhaps identical with aduŋ, nt. of pron. asu] part. of affirmation: even, yea, nay; always in emphatic exclamations Vv 622 (= udāhu VvA 258; v. l. SS. ādu) = Pv IV.317 (ādu) = DhA I.31 (T. ādu, v. l. adu); Vv 631 (v. l. ādu); J V.330 (T. ādu, C. adu; expld. on p. 331 fantastically as aduñ ca aduñ ca kammaŋ karohī ti). See also ādu.
Aduŋ nt. of pron. asu.
Adūsaka (adj.) [a + dūsaka] innocent J V.143 (= nirapa<-> rādha C.); VI.84, 552. f. adūsikā Sn 312.
Adūsiya = adūsaka J V.220 (= anaparādha C.).
Adeti [Sk. ādayati, Caus. of atti, ad to eat, 1st sg. admi = Gr. e)/dw, Lat. edo; Goth. itan = Ohg. ezzan = E. eat] to eat. Pres. ind. ademi etc. J V.31, 92, 197, 496; VI.106. pot. adeyya J V.107, 392, 493.
Adda1 [cp. Sk. ārdraka] ginger J I.244 (°singivera).
Adda2 & Addā
Adda2 & Addā 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2. a. Adda3
Adda3 (adj.) [Sk. ārdra, from ṛdati or ardati to melt, cp. Gr. a)/rdw to moisten, a)\rda dirt; see also alla] wet, moist, slippery J IV.353; VI.309; Miln 346.
--âvalepana "smeared with moisture", i. e. shiny, glittering S IV.187 (kūṭāgāra); M I.86=Nd2 1996 (upakāriyo). See also addha2.
The reading allâvalepana occurs at Nd2 40 (=S iv. 187), and is perhaps to be preferred. The meaning is better to be given as "newly plastered."
Addakkhi 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 1 b. Addasā 3rd sg. aor. of *dassati; see *dassati 2 a.
Addā & Addāyanā at Vbh 371 in def. of anādariya is either faulty writing, or dial. form or pop. etym. for ādā and ādāyana; see ādariya.
Addāyate [v. denom. fr. adda] to be or get wet, fig. to be attached to J IV.351. See also allīyati. Addi [Sk. ardri] a mountain Dāvs II.13.
Addita (pp.) [see aṭṭita which is the more correct spelling] afflicted, smarted, oppressed J I.21; II.407; III.261; IV.295; V.53, 268; Th 1, 406; Mhvs 1, 25; PvA 260; Sdhp 37, 281.

Addha1 (num.) [= ad̤d̤ha, q. v.] one half, half (°--) D I.166 (°māsika); A II.160 (°māsa); J I.59 (°yojana); III. 189 (°māsa). Addha2
Addha2 (adj.) [= adda3, Sk. ārdra] soiled, wet; fig. attached to, intoxicated with (cp. sineha) M II.223 (na anaddhabhūtaŋ attānaŋ dukkhena addhabhāveti he dirties the impure self with ill); S III.1 (addhabhūto kāyo impure body); J VI.548 (°nakha with dirty nails, C. pūtinakha).
Addhan (in cpds. addha°) [Vedic adhvan, orig. meaning "stretch, length", both of space & time. -- Cases: nom. addhā,
gen. dat. addhuno, instr. addhunā, acc. addhānaŋ, loc. addhani; pl. addhā. See also addhāna] 1. (of space) a path, road, also journey (see cpds. & derivations); only in one ster. phrase J IV.384 = V.137 (pathaddhuno paṇṇarase va cando, gen. for loc. °addhani, on his course, in his orbit; expld. at IV.384 by ākāsa--patha--sankhātassa addhuno majjhe ṭhito and at V.137 by pathaddhagato addha--pathe gaganamajjhe ṭhito); Pv III.31 (pathaddhani paṇṇarase va cando; loc. same meaning as prec., expld. at PvA 188 by attano pathabhūte addhani gaganatala--magge). This phrase (pathaddhan) however is expld. by Kern (Toev. s. v. pathaddu) as "gone half--way", i. e. on full--moon--day. He rejects the expln. of C. -- 2. (of time) a stretch of time, an interval of time, a period, also a lifetime (see cpds.); only in two standard applications viz. (a) as mode of time (past, present & future) in tayo addhā three divisions of time (atita, anāgata, paccuppanna) D III.216; It 53, 70. (b) in phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ (acc.) a very long time A II.1, 10 (dighaŋ addhānaŋ saŋsāraŋ); Sn 740 (dīghaŋ addhāna saŋsāra); Dh 207 (dīghaŋ addhāna socati); J I.137. gen. dīghassa addhuno PvA 148 (gatattā because a long time has elapsed), instr. dīghena addhunā S I.78; A II.118; PvA 28.
--āyu duration of life A II.66 (dīghaŋ °ŋ a long lifetime. --gata one who has gone the road or traversed the space or span of life, an old man [cp. BSk. adhvagata M Vastu II.150], always combd. with vayo anuppatto, sometimes in ster. formula with jiṇṇa & mahallaka Vin II.188; D I.48 (cp. DA I.143); M I.82; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149. --gū [Vedic adhvaga] a wayfarer, traveller, journeyman Th 255 = S I.212 (but the latter has panthagu, v. l. addhagū); J III.95 (v. l. patthagu = panthagu); Dh 302.
Addhā (adv.) [Vedic addhā, cp. Av. azdā certainty] part. of affirmation and emphasis: certainly, for sure, really, truly D I.143; J I.19 (a. ahaŋ Buddho bhavissāmi) 66 (a. tvaŋ Buddho bhavissasi), 203, 279; III.340; V.307, 410 (C. expln. differs) Sn 47, 1057; Nd2 30 = Ps II.21 (ekaŋsa--vacanaŋ nissaŋsaya--vacanaŋ etc.) addhā hi J IV. 399; Pv IV.15 2.
Addhaneyya (adj.) = adhaniya 2, lasting J V.507 (an°).
Addhaniya (adj.) [fr. addhan] 1. belonging to the road, fit for travelling (of the travelling season) Th 1, 529. <-> 2.
belonging to a (long) time, lasting a long period, lasting, enduring D III.211; J I.393 (an°) VI.71. See also addhaneyya.
Addhariya [Vedic adhvaryu fr. adhvara sacrifice] a sacrificing priest, N. of a class of Brahmins D I.237 (brāhmaṇa).
Addhāna (nt.) [orig. the acc. of addhan, taken as nt. from phrase dīghaŋ addhānaŋ. It occurs only in acc. which may
always be taken as acc. of addhan; thus the assumption of a special form addhāna would be superfluous, were it not for later forms like addhāne (loc.) Miln 126; PvA 75 v. l. BB, and for cpds.] same meaning as addhan, but as simplex only used with reference to time (i. e. a long time, cp. VvA 117 addhānaŋ = ciraŋ). Usually in phrase atītaŋ (anāgataŋ etc.) addhānaŋ in the past (future etc.), e. g. D I.200; S I.140; A V.32; Miln 126 (anāgatamaddhāne for °aŋ); PvA 75 (v. l. addhāne). dīghaŋ addhānaŋ Pv I.105. Also in phrase addhānaŋ āpādeti to make out the length of time or period, i. e. to live out one's lifetime S IV.110; J II.293 (= jīvitaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C).
--daratha exhaustion from travelling DA I.287. --magga a (proper) road for journeying, a long road between two towns, high road D I.1, 73, 79; M I.276 (kantār°); DA I.35 (interpreted as "addhayojanaŋ gacchissāmī ti bhuñjitabban ti ādi vacanato addha--yojanam pi addhāna maggo hoti", thus taken to addha "half", from counting by 1/2 miles); VvA 40, 292. Cp. also antarāmagga. --parissama "fatigue of the road", i. e. fatigue from travelling VvA 305. --vemattatā difference of time or period Miln 285 (+ āyuvemattatā).

Addhika [fr. addhan] a wanderer, wayfarer, traveller DA I.298 (= pathāvin), 270; PvA 78, 127 (°jana people travelling). Often combd. with kapaṇa beggar, tramp, as kapaṇaddhikā (pl.) tramps and travellers (in which connection also as °iddhika, q. v.), e. g. J I.6 (v. l. °iddhika 262; DhA II.26.
Addhita at Pv II.62 is to be corrected to aṭṭita (sic v. l. BB).
Addhin (adj.) (--°) [fr. addhan] belonging to the road or travelling, one who is on the road, a traveller, in gataddhin one
who has performed his journey (= addhagata) Dh 90. Addhuva see dhuva.
Adrūbhaka see dubbha.
Advejjhatā see dvejjhatā.
Adha° in cpds. like adhagga see under adho.
Adhamma see dhamma.
Adhama (adj.) [Vedic adhama = Lat. infimus, superl. of adho, q. v.] the lowest (lit. & fig.), the vilest, worst Sn 246 (narâdhama), 135 (vasalâdhama); Dh 78 (purisa°); J III.151 (miga°); V.394 (uttamâdhama), 437 (id.), 397; Sdhp 387.
Adhara (adj.) [Vedic adhara, compar. of adho] the lower J III.26 (adharoṭṭha the l. lip).
Adhi [Vedic adhi; base of demonstr. pron. a° + suffix--dhi, corresponding in form to Gr. e)/n--qa "on this" = here, cp. o(/qi where, in meaning equal to adv. of direction Gr. de/ (toward) = Ohg. zuo, E. to].
A. Prep. and pref. of direction & place: (a) as direction denoting a movement towards a definite end or goal = up to, over, toward, to, on (see C 1 a). -- (b) as place where (prep. c. loc. or abs.) = on top of, above, over, in; in addition to. Often simply deictic "here" (e. g.) ajjhatta = adhi + ātman "this self here" (see C 1 b).
B. adhi is freq. as modification pref., i. e. in loose compn. with n. or v. and as first part of a double prefixcpd. , like ajjhā° (adhi + ā), adhippa° (adhi + pra), but never occurs as a fixed base, i. e. as 2nd part of a pref.<-> cpd., like ā in paccā° (prati + ā), paryā° (pari + ā) or ava in paryava° (pari + ava) or ud in abhyud° (abhi + ud), samud° (sam + ud). As such (i. e. modification) it is usually intensifying, meaning "over above, in addition, quite, par excellence, super"--(adhideva a super--god, cp. ati--deva), but very often has lost this power & become meaningless (like E. up in "shut up, fill up, join up etc), esp. in double pref.--cpds. (ajjhāvasati "to dwell here--in" = āvasati "to dwell in, to inhabit") (see C 2). -- In the explns of P. Commentators adhi is often (sometimes far--fetchedly) interpreted by abhibhū "overpowering" see e. g. C. on adhiṭṭhāti & adhiṭṭhita; and by virtue of this intens. meaning we find a close relationship between the prefixes ati, adhi and abhi, all interchanging dialectically so that P. adhi often represents Sk. ati or abhi; thus adhi > ati in adhikusala, °kodhita, °jeguccha, °brahmā; adhi > abhi in adhippatthita, °pātcti, °ppāya, °ppeta, °bādheti, °bhū, °vāha. Cp. also ati IV.
C. The main applications of adhi are the foll.: 1. primary meaning (in verbs & verb derivations): either direction in which or place where, depending on the meaning of the verb determinate, either lit. or fig. -- (a) where to: adhiyita (adhi + ita) "gone on to or into" = studied; ajjhesita (adhi + esita) "wished for"; °kata "put to" i. e. commissioned; °kāra commission; °gacchati "to go on to & reach it" = obtain; °gama attainment; °gaṇhāti to overtake = surpass, °peta (adhi + pra + ita) "gone in to" = meant, understood; °pāya sense meaning, intention; °bhāsati to speak to = address; °mutta intent upon; °vacana "saying in addition" = attribute, metaphor, cp. Fr. sur--nom; °vāsāna assent, °vāseti to dwell in, give in = consent. -- (b) where: °tiṭṭhati (°ṭṭhāti) to stand by = look after, perform; °ṭṭhāna place where; °vasati to inhabit; °sayana "lying in", inhabiting. -- 2. secondary meaning (as emphatic modification): (a) with nouns or adjectives: adhi--jeguccha very detestable; °matta "in an extreme measure", °pa supreme lord; °pacca lordship; °paññā higher, additional wisdom; °vara the very best; °sīla thorough character or morality. -- (b) with verbs (in double pref.--cpds.); adhi + ava: ajjhogāheti plunge into; ajjhoṭhapeti to bring down to (its destination);
°otthata covered completely; °oharati to swallow right down. adhi + ā: ajjhappatta having reached (the end); ajjhapīḷita quite

overwhelmed; °āvuttha inhabited; °ārūhati grown up over; °āsaya desire, wish (cp. Ger. n. Anliegen & v. daranliegen). adhi + upa: ajjhupagacchati to reach, obtain; °upeti to receive; °upekkhati "to look all along over" = to superintend adhi + pra: adhippattheti to long for, to desire.
Note. The contracted (assimilation--)form of adhi before vowels is ajjh-- (q. v.).
Adhika (adj.) [fr. adhi; cp. Sk. adhika] exceeding, extraordinary, superior, Pug 35; VvA 80 (= anadhivara, visiṭṭha); DA I.141, 222; Dpvs V.32 (an°); DhA III.238; KhA 193 (= anuttara); Sdhp 337, 447. -- compar. adhikatara DhA II.7; III.176; nt. °ŋ as adv. extraordinarily PvA 86 (= adhimattaŋ). In combn. with numerals adhika has the meaning of "in addition, with an additional, plus" (cp. ādi + ādika, with which it is evidently confounded, adhika being constructed in the same way as ādika, i. e. preceding the noun--determination), e. g. catunahutâdhikāni dve yojana--sahassāni 2000 + 94 (= 294 000) J I.25; sattamāsâdhikāni sattavassāni 7 years and 7 months J V.319; paññāsâdhikāni pañca vassa--satani 500 + 50 (= 550) PvA 152. See also sâdhika.
Adhikata (adj.) [adhi + kata; cp. Sk. adhikṛta] 1. commissioned with, an overseer, Pv II.927 (dāne adhikata = ṭhapita PvA 124). -- 2. caused by Miln 67 (kamma°). <-> 3. affected by something, i. e. confused, puzzled, in doubt Miln 144 (+ vimātijāta).
Adhikaraṇa (nt.) [adhi + karaṇa] 1. attendance, supervision, management of affairs, administration PvA 209. <-> 2. relation, reference, reason, cause, consequence D II.59 (--°: in consequence of); S II.41; V.19. Esp. acc. °ŋ as adv. (--°) in consequence of, for the sake of, because of, from M I.410 (rūpâdhikaraṇaŋ); S IV.339 (rāga°); Miln 281 (mudda° for the sake of the royal seal, orig. in attendance on the r. s.). Kimâdhikaraṇaŋ why, on account of what J IV.4 (= kiŋkāraṇaŋ) yatvâdhikaraṇaŋ (yato + adhi°) by reason of what, since, because (used as conj.) D I.70 = A I.113 = II.16 = D III.225. -- 3. case, question, cause, subject of discussion, dispute. There are 4 sorts of a. enumd. at var. passages, viz. vivāda° anuvāda° āpatta° kicca° "questions of dispute, of censure, of misconduct, of duties" Vin II.88; III.164; IV.126, 238; M II.247. <-> Often ref.: Vin II.74; S IV.63 = V.346 (dhamma° a question of the Dh.); A I.53 (case), 79; II.239 (vūpasanta); V.71, 72; Pug 20, 55; DhA IV.2 (°ssa uppamassa vūpasama), adhikaraṇaŋ karoti to raise a dispute M I.122 °ŋ vūpasameti to settle a question or difficulty Vin II.261.
--kāraka one who causes dispute discussions or dissent Vin IV.230 (f. °ikā); A III.252. --samatha the settlings of questions that have arisen. There are seven rules for settling cases enumd. at D III.254; M II.247; A I.99; IV.144.
Adhikaraṇika [fr. adhikaraṇa] one who has to do with the settling of disputes or questions, a judge A V.164, 167. Adhikaraṇī (f.) [to adhikaraṇa 1, orig. meaning "serving, that which serves, i. e. instrument"] a smith's anvil J III.285;
Dāvs III.16 sq.; DhsA 263.
Adhikāra [cp. Sk. adhikāra] attendance, service, administration, supervision, management, help Vin I.55; J I.56; VI.251; Miln 60, 115,
165; PvA 124 (dāna°; cp. Pv II.927); DhA II.41.
Adhikārika (adj.) (--°) [to adhikāra] serving as, referring to Vin III.274 (Bdhgh).
Adhikuṭṭanā (f.) [adhi + koṭṭanā or koṭṭana] an executioner's block Th 2, 58; cp. ThA 65 (v. l. kud̤d̤anā, should prob. be read koṭṭana); ThA 287.
Adhikusala (adj.) [adhi + kusala] in °ā dhammā "items of higher righteousness" D III.145.
Adhikodhita (adj.) [adhi + kodhita] very angry J V.117.
Adhigacchati [adhi + gacchati] to get to, to come into possession of, to acquire, attain, find; fig. to understand D I.229 (vivesaŋ) M I.140 (anvesaŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find); S I.22 (Nibbānaŋ); II.278 (id.); A I.162 (id.); Dh 187, 365; It 82 (santiŋ); Th 2, 51; Pug 30, 31; Pv I.74 (nibbutiŋ = labhati PvA 37); III.710 (amataŋ padaŋ). opt. adhigaccheyya D I.224

(kusalaŋ dhammaŋ); M I.114 (madhu--piṇd̤ikaŋ); Dh 61 and adhigacche Dh 368. ger. °gantvā D I.224; J I.45 (ānisaŋse); and °gamma Pv I.119 (= vinditvā paṭilabhitvā PvA 60). grd. °gantabba It 104 (nibbāna). cond. °gacchissaŋ Sn 446. 1st aor. 3 sg. ajjhagā Sn 225 (= vindi paṭilabhi KhA 180); Dh 154; Vv 327; 3 pl. ajjhagū J I.256 (vyasanaŋ) & ajjhāgamuŋ S I.12. 2nd aor. 3 sg. adhigacchi Nd1 457. <-> pp. adhigata (q. v.).
Adhigaṇhāti [adhi + gaṇhāti] to surpass, excel S I.87 = DA I.32; D III.146; S IV.275; A III.33; It 19. Ger. adhigayha Pv II.962 = DhA III.219 (v. l. BB at both pass. atikkamma); & adhiggahetvā It 20. -- pp. adhiggahīta (q. v.).
Adhigata [pp. of adhigacchati] got into possession of, conquered, attained, found J I.374; VvA 135. Adhigatavant (adj.--n.) [fr. adhigata] one who has found or obtained VvA 296 (Nibbānaŋ).
Adhigama [fr. adhigacchati] attainment, acquisition; also fig. knowledge, information, study (the latter mainly in Miln) D III.255; S II.139; A II.148; IV.22, 332; V.194; J I.406; Nett 91; Miln 133, 215, 358, 362, 388; PvA 207.
Adhigameti [adhi + gameti, Caus. of gacchati] to make obtain, to procure PvA 30.
Adhiggahīta [pp. of adhigaṇhāti] excelled, surpassed; overpowered, taken by (instr.), possessed J III.427 (= anuggahīta C.); V.102; VI.525 = 574; It 103; Miln 188, 189; Sdhp 98.
Adhiciṇṇa only at S III.12, where v. l. is aviciṇṇa, which is to be preferred. See viciṇṇa.
Adhicitta (nt.) [adhi + citta] "higher thought", meditation, contemplation, nsually in combn. with adhisīla and adhipaññā Vin I.70; D III.219; M I.451; A I.254, 256; Nd1 39 = Nd2 689 (°sikkhā); Dh 185 (= aṭṭha--samāpattisankhāta adhika--citta DhA III.238).
Adhiceto (adj.) [adhi + ceto] lofty--minded, entranced Th 1, 68 = Ud 43 = Vin IV.54 = DhA III.384. Adhicca1
Adhicca1 [ger. of adhi + eti, see adhīyati] learning, studying, learning by heart J III.218, 327 = IV.301; IV.184 (vede = adhīyitvā C.), 477 (sajjhāyitvā C.); VI.213; Miln 164.
Adhicca2 (°--) [Sk. *adhṛtya, a + *dhicca, ger. of dhṛ, cp. dhāra, dhāraṇa 3, dhāreti 4] unsupported, uncaused, fortuitous, without cause or reason; in foll. phrases: °āpattika guilty without intention M I.443; °uppatti spontaneous origin DhsA 238; °laddha obtained without being asked for, unexpectedly Vv 8422 = J V.171 = VI.315 (expld. at J V.171 by ahetunā, at VI.316 by akā<-> raṇena) °samuppanna arisen without a cause, spontaneous, unconditioned D I.28 = Ud 69; D III.33, 138; S II.22--23 (sukhadukkhaŋ); A III.440 (id.); Ps I.155; DA I.118 (= akāraṇa°).
Adhicca3 (adj.) [= adhicca 2 in adj. function, influenced by, homonym abhabba] without a cause (for assumption), unreasonable, unlikely S V.457.
Adhijeguccha (nt.) [adhi + jeguccha] intense scrupulous regard (for others) D I.174, 176. Adhiṭṭhaka (adj.) (--°) [fr. adhiṭṭhāti] bent on, given to, addicted to J V.427 (surā°).

[Sk. adhitiṣṭhati, adhi + sthā] 1. to stand on J III.278 (ger. °āya); DhA IV.183 (ger. °hitvā); fig. to insist on Th 1, 1131 (aor. °āhi). -- 2. to concentrate or fix one's attention on (c. acc.), to direct one's thoughts to, to make up one's mind, to wish Vin I.115 (inf. °ṭhātuŋ), 297 (id.), 125 (grd. °ṭhātabba) J I.80 (aor. °ahi); III.278; IV.134 (v. l. ati° C. expls. abhibhavitvā tiṭṭhati); DhA I.34; IV.201 (ger. °hitvā); PvA 23 (aor. °ṭhāsi) 171 (id.), 75 (ger. °hitvā). On adhiṭṭheyya see Cpd. 209, n. 2; 219, n. 1. -- 3. to undertake, practice, perform, look after, to celebrate S II.17; A I.115 sq.; J I.50; PvA 209 (ger. °ṭhāya). -- pp. adhiṭṭhita (q.
Adhiṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. adhi + sthā] 1. decision, resolution, self--determination, will (cp. on this meaning Cpd. 62) D
III.229 (where 4 are enumd., viz. paññā°, sacca° cāga° upasama°); J I.23; V.174; Ps I.108; II.171 sq., 207; DhsA 166 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 44). -- 2. mentioned in bad sense with abhinivesa and anusaya, obstinacy, prejudice and bias M I.136; III.31, 240; S II.17; III.10, 135, 194. -- As adj. (--°) applying oneself to, bent on A III.363. -- 3. looking after, management, direction, power Miln 309 (devānaŋ); PvA 141 (so read for adhitaṭṭhāna). [adiṭṭhāna as PvA 89, used as explanatory for āvāsa, should perhaps be read adhiṭṭhāna in the sense of fixed, permanent, abode].
Adhiṭṭhāyaka (adj.) (--°) superintending, watching, looking after, in kamma° Mhvs 5, 175; 30, 98; kammanta° DhA I.393.
Adhiṭṭhita (adj.) [pp. of adhiṭṭhāti] 1. standing on (c. loc.), esp. with the idea of standing above, towering over Vv 6330 (hemarathe a. = sakalaŋ ṭhānaŋ abhibhavitvā ṭhita VvA 269). -- (a) looked after, managed, undertaken, governed Vin I.57; S V.278 (svɔâdhiṭṭhita); PvA 141 (kammanta). -- (b) undertaking, bent on (c. acc.) Sn 820 (ekacariyaŋ).
Adhideva [adhi + deva] a superior or supreme god, above the gods M II.132; A IV.304; Sn 1148; Nd2 307b, 422 a. Cp. atideva.
Adhipa [Sk. adhipa, abbrev. of adhipati] ruler, lord, master J II.369; III.324; V.393; Pv II.86 (jan° king); Dāvs III.52; VvA 314.
Adhipaka (adj.) (--°) [fr. prec.] mastering, ruling or governed, influenced by (cp. adhipati) A I.150 (atta° loka° dhamma°). Adhipajjati [adhi + pajjati] to come to, reach, attain A IV.96 (anatthaŋ); pp. adhipanna.
Adhipaññā (f.) [adhi + paññā] higher wisdom or knowledge, insight (cp. jhāna & paññā); usually in combn. with
adhicitta & adhisīla Vin I.70; D I.174; III.219 (°sikkhā); A I.240; II.92 sq., 239; III.106 sq., 327; IV.360; Nd1 39 (id.); Ps I.20, 25 sq., 45 sq., 169; II.11, 244; Pug 61.
Adhipatati [adhi + patati] to fly past, vanish J IV.111 (= ativiya patati sīghaŋ atikkamati C.). -- Caus. adhipāteti (q. v.) in diff. meaning. Cp. also adhipāta.
Adhipatana (nt.) [fr. adhipatati] attack, pressing ThA 271.
Adhipati (n.--adj.) [adhi + pati, cp. adhipa] 1. ruler, master J IV.223; Vv 811; Miln 388; DhA I.36 (= seṭṭha). <-> 2.
ruling over, governing, predominant; ruled or governed by Vbh 216 sq. (chandaŋ adhipatiŋ katvā making energy predominant); DhsA 125, 126 (atta° autonomous, loka° heteronomous, influenced by society). See alṣo Dhs. trsl. 20 & Cpd. 60.
Adhipateyya (nt.) A I.147; III 33 = S IV.275 is probably misreading for ādhipateyya.
Adhipatthita [pp. adhi + pattheti, cp. Sk. abhi + arthayati] desired, wished, begged for D I.120.
Adhipanna [cp. Sk. abhipanna, adhi + pad] gone into, affected with, seized by (--°), a victim of (c. loc.) S I.72, Th 2, 345

(kāmesu); Sn 1123 (taṇhā° = taṇhânugata Nd2 32); Dh 288; J III.38, 369; IV.396; V.91, 379 (= dosena ajjhotthaṭa); VI.27. Adhipāṭimokkha (nt.) [adhi + pāṭimokkha] the higher, moral, code Vin V.1 (pāṭim° +); M II.245 (+ ajjhājīva).
Adhipāta1 [adhipāteti] splitting, breaking, only in phrase muddhā° head--splitting Sn 988 sq., 1004, 1025 (v. l. Nd2 °vipāta). Adhipāta2
Adhipāta2 [from adhipatati = Sk. atipatati, to fly past, flit] a moth Sn 964. Expld. at Nd1 484 as "adhipātikā ti tā uppatitvā khādanti taŋkāraṇā a. vuccanti"; Ud 72 (expld. by C. as salabhā).
Adhipatikā (f.) [fr. adhipāta2] a moth, a mosquito Nd1 484 (see adhipāta2).
Adhipāteti [Caus. fr. adhipatati, cp. Sk. abhipātayati & P. atipāteti] to break, split J IV.337 (= chindati). At Ud 8 prob.
to be read adhibādheti (v. l. avibādeti. T. adhipāteti). Adhippagharati [adhi + ppa + gharati] to flow, to trickle ThA 284. Adhippāgā 3 sg. aor. of adhippagacchati to go to J V.59.
Adhippāya [adhi + ppa + i; Sk. abhiprāya] 1. intention, wish desire S I.124; V.108; A II.81; III.363 (bhoga°); V.65; J
I.79, 83; Sdhp 62. As adj. (--°) desiring PvA 226 (hass° in play = khid̤d̤atthika). -- 2. sense, meaning, conclusion, inference (cp. adhigama) Miln 148; PvA 8, 16, 48, 131 (the moral of a story). --adhippāyena (instr.) in the way of, like PvA 215 (kīḷ for
Adhippāyosa [adhi + pāyosa] distinction, difference, peculiarity, special meaning M I 46; S III.66; IV.208; A I.267; IV.158; V.48 sq.
Adhippeta [Sk. abhipreta, adhi + ppa + i, lit. gone into, gone for; cp. adhippāya] 1. desired, approved of, agreeable D I.120; II.236; VvA 312, 315. -- 2. meant, understood, intended as J III.263; PvA 9, 80, 120, 164.
Adhippetatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. adhippeta] the fact of being meant or understood as, in abl. °ā with reference to, as is to be understood of VvA 13; PvA 52.
Adhibādheti [adhi + bādheti, cp. Sk. abhibādhayati] to vex, oppress, gore (to death) Ud 8 (T. adhipāteti, v. l. avibādeti).
Adhibrahmā [adhi + Brahmā, cp. atibrahmā] a superior Brahmā, higher than Brahmā M II.132.
Adhibhavati [adhi + bhavati, cp. Sk. & P. abhibhavati] to overcome, overpower, surpass S IV.185 sq. (cp. adhibhū); A V.248, 282 (°bhoti); J II.336; V.30. -- aor. adhibhavi J II.80. 3. pl. adhibhaŋsu S IV.185. See also ajjhabhavi & ajjhabhū pp. adhibhūta (q. v.).
Adhibhāsati [adhi + bhāsati] to address, to speak to; aor. ajjhabhāsi Vin II.195; S I.103; IV.117; Sn p. 87; PvA 56, 90.
Adhibhū (adj.) (--°) [fr. adhi + bhū, cp. adhibhavati & Sk. adhibhū] overpowering, having power over; master, conqueror, lord S IV.186 (anadhibhū not mastering. For adhibhūta the v. l. abhi° is to be preferred as more usual in this connection, see abhibhū); Sn 684 (miga°; v. l. abhi°).

Adhibhūta [cp. adhibhū & adhibhūta] overpowered S IV.186.
Adhimatta (adj.) [adhi + matta of mā] extreme, exceeding, extraordinary; nt. adv. °ŋ extremely M I.152, 243; S IV. 160;
A II.150; IV.241; J I.92; Pug 15; Miln 146, 189, 274, 290; Pv II.36 (= adhikataraŋ PvA 86); DhA II.85; cp. PvA 281. Adhimattata (nt.) [abstr. fr. prec.] preponderance A II.150; DhsA 334 (cp. Dhs. trsl. 200).
Adhimana (n.--adj.) [adhi + mano] (n.) attention, direction of mind, concentration Sn 692 (adhimanasā bhavātha). <-> (adj.) directing one's mind upon, intent (on) J IV.433 (= pasannacitta); V.29 (an°; v. l. °māna).
Adhimāna [adhi + māna] undue estimate of oneself M II.252; A V.162 sq.
Adhimānika (adj.) [fr. adhimāna] having undue confidence in oneself, conceited A V.162, 169, 317; DhA III.111.
Adhimuccati [Pass. of adhi + muc] 1. to be drawn to, feel attached to or inclined towards, to indulge in (c. loc.) S
III.225; IV.185; A IV.24, 145 sq., 460; V.17; Pug 63. <-> 2. to become settled, to make up one's mind as to (with loc.), to become clear about Vin I.209 (aor. °mucci); D I.106; S I.116 (pot. °mucceyya); It 43; DA I.275. <-> 3. to take courage, to have faith Sn 559; Miln 234; DA I.214, 316; J IV.272; V.103; DhA I.196; III.258; IV.170. <-> 4. of a spirit, to possess, to enter into a body, with loc. of the body. A late idiom for the older anvāvisati. J IV.172; V.103, 429; DhA I.196; III.258; IV.170. <-> pp. adhimuccita and adhimutta. -- Caus. adhimoceti to incline to (trs.); to direct upon (with loc.) S V.409 (cittaŋ devesu
Adhimuccana (nt.) [fr. adhi + muc] making up one's mind, confidence DhsA 133, 190.
Adhimuccita & Adhimucchita (pp.) [either adhi + muc or mūrch; it would seem more probable to connect
it with the former (cp. adhimuccati) and consider all vv. ll. °mucchita as spurious; but in view of the credit of several passages we have to assume a regular analogy--form °mucchita, cp. mucchati and see also J.P.T.S. 1886, 109] drawn towards, attached to, infatuated, indulging in (with loc.) M II.223 (an°); S I.113; Th 1, 732 (v. l. °muccita), 923 (cch), 1175; J II.437 (cch); III.242; V.255 (kāmesu °mucchita, v. l. °muccita). Cp. ajjhomucchita.
Adhimuccitar [n. ag. of adhimuccati] one who determines for something, easily trusting, giving credence A III.165 (v. l. °mucchitā).
Adhimutta (adj.) [pp. of adhimuccati, cp. BSk. adhimukta. Av. Ś I.8, 112; Divy 49, 302 etc.] intent upon (--° or with loc.
or acc.), applying oneself to, keen on, inclined to, given to Vin I.183; A V.34, 38; Dh 226; Sn 1071, 1149 (°citta); Nd2 33; J I.370 (dān°) Pug 26; PvA 134 (dān°).
Adhimutti (f.) [adhi + mutti] resolve, intention, disposition D I.174; A V.36; Ps I.124; Miln 161, 169; Vbh 340, 341; DA I.44, 103; Sdhp 378.
Adhimuttika (adj.) [= adhimutta] inclined to, attached to, bent on S II.154, 158; It 70; Vbh 339 sq. + tā (f.) inclination D I.2.
Adhimokkha [fr. adhi + muc] firm resolve, determination, decision M III.25 sq.; Vbh 165 sq., 425; DhsA 145, 264. See Dhs. trsl. 5; Cpd. 17, 40, 95.
Adhiyita see adhīyati.
Adhiroha [fr. adhi + ruh] ascent, ascending; in dur° hard to ascend Miln 322.

Adhivacana (nt.) [adhi + vacana] designation, term, attrîbute, metaphor, metaphorical expression D II.62; M I.113,
144, 460; A II.70, 124; III.310; IV.89, 285, 340; It 15, 114; Sn p. 218; J I.117; Nd2 34 = Dhs 1306 (= nāma sankhā paññatti etc.); Vbh 6; PvA 63. See on term Dhs. trsl. 340.
--patha "process of synonymous nomenclature" (Mrs. Rh. D.) D II.68; S III.71; Dhs 1306; DhsA 51. Adhivattati [adhi + vattati] to come on, proceed, issue, result S I.101; A II.32.
Adhivattha (adj.) [pp. of adhivasati] inhabiting, living in (c. loc.) Vin I.28; S I.197; J I.223; II.385; III.327; PvA 17. The form adhivuttha occurs at J VI.370.
Adhivara (adj.) [adhi + vara] superb, excellent, surpassing Vv 163 (an° unsurpassed, unrivalled; VvA 80 = adhika, visiṭṭha).
Adhivāsa [fr. adhi + vas] endurance, forbearance, holding out; only as adj. in dur° difficult to hold out Th 1, 111.
(adj.) [fr. adhivāsa] willing, agreeable, enduring, patient Vin IV.130; M I.10, 526; A II.118; III.163; V.132; J III.369 (an°);
IV.11, 77.
Adhivāsana (nṭ.) [fr. adhi + vas] 1 assent A III.31; DhA I.33. -- 2. forbearance, endurance M I.10; J II.237; III.263; IV.307; V.174.
Adhivāsanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. adhivāsana] patience, endurance, Dhs 1342; Vbh 360 (an°).
Adhivāseti [Caus. of adhivasati, cp. BSk. adhivāsayati in meaning of 3] 1. to wait for (c. acc.) J I.254; II.352; III.277. -- 2.
to have patience, bear, endure (c. acc.) D II.128, 157; J I.46; III.281 (pahāre); IV.279, 407; V.51, 200; VvA 336, 337. -- 3. to consent, agree, give in Vin I.17; D I.109 (cp. DA I.277); S IV.76; DhA I.33; PvA 17, 20, 75 and freq. passim. -- Caus. adhivāsāpeti to cause to wait J I.254.
Adhivāha [fr. adhi + vah; cp. Sk. abhivahati] a carrier, bearer, adj. bringing S IV.70 (dukkha°); A I.6; Th 1, 494. Adhivāhana (nt.--adj.) [fr. adhi + vah] carrying, bringing, bearing Sn 79; f. °ī Th 1, 519.
Adhivimuttatta (nt.) = adhivimokkhatta & adhimutti, i. e. propensity, the fact of being inclined or given to J V.254 (T. kāmādhivimuttitā, v. l. °muttata).
Adhivimokkhatta (nt.) = adhimokkha; being inclined to DhsA 261.
Adhivutti (f.) [adhi + vutti, fr. adhi + vac, cp. Sk. abhivadati] expression, saying, opinion; only in tt. adhivuttipada (v. l. adhimutti--p. at all passages) D I.13 (expld. by adhivacana--pada DA I.103); M II.228; A V.36.
Adhivuttha see adhivattha.
Adhisayana (nt.--adj.) [fr. adhiseti] lying on or in, inhabiting PvA 80 (mañcaŋ). Adhisayita [pp. of adhiseti] sat on, addled (of eggs) Vin III.3; S III.153.
Adhisīla (nt.) [adhi + sīla] higher morality, usually in threefold set of adhicitta--sikkha, adhipaññā° adhisïla° Vin I.70; D I.174; III.219; A III.133; IV.25; DhA I.334; PvA 207. See also adhicitta, sikkhā & sīla.

Adhiseti [adhi + seti] to lie on, sit on, live in, to follow, pursue Dh 41; Sn 671 (= gacchati C.) -- pp. adhisayita.
Adhīna (adj.) (--°) [cp. Sk. adhīna] subject, dependent D I.72 (atta° & para°); J IV.112; DA I.217; also written ādhīna J V.350. See also under para.
Adhīyati & adhiyati [Med. of adhi + i, 1st sg. adhīye taken as base in Pāli] to study, lit. to approach (cp. adhigacchati); to
learn by heart (the Vedas & other Sacred Books) Vin I.270; S I.202 (dhammapadāni); J IV.184 (adhīyitvā), 496 (adhīyamāna); VI.458; DhA III.446 (adhīyassu). -- ger. adhīyitvā J IV.75; adhiyānaŋ J V.450 (= sajjhāyitvā C.) & adhicca: see adhicca 2;
pp. adhiyita D I.96.
Adhunā (adv.) [Vedic adhunā] just now, quite recently D II.208; Vin II.185 (kālakata); Miln 155; Dāvs II.94.
--āgata a new comer M I.457; J II.105. --âbhisitta newly or just anointed D II.227. --uppanna just arisen D II.208, 221.
Adhura (nt.) [a + dhura, see dhura 2] irresponsibility, indifference to oblihations J IV.241.
Adho (adv.) [Vedic adhaḥ; compar. adharaḥ = Lat. inferus, Goth. undar, E. under, Ind. *n̊dher--; superl. adhamaḥ = Lat. infimus] below, usually combd. or contrasted with uddhaŋ "above" and tiriyaŋ "across", describing the 3 dimensions. --
uddhaŋ and adho above and below, marking zenith & nadir. Thus with uddhaŋ and the 4 bearings (disā) and intermediate points (anudisā) at S I.122; III.124; A IV.167; with uddhaŋ & tiriyaŋ at Sn 150, 537, 1055, 1068. Expld. at KhA 248 by heṭṭhā and in detail (dogmatically & speculatively) at Nd2 155. For further ref. see uddhaŋ. The compn. form of adho before vowels is adh°.
--akkhaka beneath the collar--bone Vin IV.213. --agga with the points downward (of the upper row of teeth) J v.156 (+ uddh° expld. by uparima--danta C.). --kata turned down, or upside down J I.20; VI.298. --gata gone by, past. Adv. °ŋ since (cp. uddhaŋ adv. later or after) J VI.187 (ito māsaŋ adhogataŋ since one month ago). --gala (so read for T. udho°) down the throat PvA 104. --mukha head forward, face downward, bent over, upturned Vin II.78; M I.132, 234: Vv 161 (= heṭṭhā mukha
VvA 78). --bhāga the lower part (of the body) M I.473; DhA I.148. --virecana action of a purgative (opp. uddha° of an emetic) D I.12; DA I.98 (= adho dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ); DhsA 404. --sākhaŋ (+ uddhamūlaŋ) branches down (& roots up, i. e. uprooted) DhA I.75. --sira (adj.) head downward J IV.194. --siraŋ (adv.) with bowed head (cp. avaŋsiraŋ) J VI.298 (= siraŋ adhokatvā heṭṭhāmukho C.). --sīsa (adj.) head first, headlong J I.233; v.472 (°ka).
An-- form of the neg. prefix a--before vowels. For negatives beginning with an° see the positive.
Ana-- negative prefix, contained in anappameyya, (Th 1, 1089), anamatagga & anabhava. See Vinaya Texts II.113.
Anajjhiṭṭha (adj.) [an + ajjhiṭṭha] uncalled, unbidden, unasked Vin I.113; Pv I.123 (T. anabbhita, v. l. anijjhiṭṭha; J III.165 has anavhāta; Th 2, 129 ayācita; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta).
Vedic aniti & anati] to breathe KhA I.124 (in def. of bāla); DA I.244 (read ananti for aṇanti). Cp. pāṇa.
Anabhāva [ana + bhāva] the utter cessation of becoming. In the oldest Pali only in adj. form anabhāvaŋ kata or gata.
This again found only in a string of four adjectives together expressing the most utter destruction. They are used at Vin III.3 of bad qualities, at S II.63 of certain wrong opinions, at M I.487; S IV.62 = v.527 of the khandas, at M I.331 of the Mental Intoxications (Āsavas), at A IV.73 of certain tastes, of a bad kamma A I.135, of evil passions A I.137, 184, 218; II.214 of pride
A II.41, of craving A II.249, of the bonds A IV.8. In the supplement to the Dīgha (D III.326) and in the Iti--vuttaka (p. 115) a later idiom, anabhāvaŋ gameti, cause to perish, is used of evil thoughts. Bdhgh (quoted Vin III.267) reports as v. l. anubhāva. Cp.
Nd I.90; and Nd2 under pahīna.
Anabbhita (adj.) [an + abbhita] not restored, not to be restored Vin IV.242; Pv I.123 (where reading prob. faulty & due to a gloss; the id. p. at Th 2, 129 has ayācita & at J III.165 anavhāta; PvA 64 expls. by anavhāta, v. l. anabbhita).

Anabhuṇṇatatā (f.) [an + abbhuṇṇata + tā] the state of not being erect, i. e. hanging down J v.156. Anabhijjhā (f.) [an + abhijjhā] absence of covetousness or desire D III.229, 269; Dhs 32, 35, 277. Anabhijjhālū (adj.) [an + abhijjhālū] not greedy or covetous D III.82; Pug 40.
Anabhijjhita (adj.) [an + abhijjhita] not desired Sn 40 (cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201). Anabhinandati etc. see abhi° etc.
Anabhirata (adj.) [an + abhirata] not taking delight in J I.61 (naccâdisu).
Anabhirati (f.) [an + abhirati] not delighting in, dissatisfaction, discontent D I.17 (+ paritassanā); III.289; J III. 395; DA
Anabhiraddha (adj.) [an + abhiraddha] in anger Vin IV.236.
Anabhiraddhi (f.) [an + abhiraddhi] anger, wrath D I.3 (= kopassɔetaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA I.52).
Anabhisambhuṇamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of an + abhisambhuṇāti] not obtaining, unable to get or keep up D I.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA I.268).
Anamatagga (adj.) [ana (= a neg.) + mata (fr. man) + aggā (pl.). So Dhammapāla (avidit--agga ThA 289); Nāṇakitti
in Ṭīkā on DhsA 11; Trenckner, Notes 64; Oldenberg, Vin. Texts II.114. Childers takes it as an + amata + agga, and Jacobi (Erzähl. 33 and 89) and Pischel (Gram. § 251) as a + namat (fr. nam) + agga. It is Sanskritized at Divy 197 by anavarāgra, doubtless by some mistake. Weber, Ind. Str. III.150 suggests an + āmrta, which does not suit the context at all]. Ep. of Saṃsāra "whose beginning and end are alike unthinkable", i. e., without beginning or end. Found in two passages of the Canon: S II.178, 187 sq. = III.149, 151 = v.226, 441 (quoted Kvu 29, called Anamatagga--pariyāya at DhA II.268) and Th 2, 495, 6. Later references are Nd2 664; PvA 166; DhA I.11; II.13, 32; Sdhp 505. [Cp. anāmata and amatagga, and cp. the English idiom
"world without end". The meaning can best be seen, not from the derivation (which is uncertain), but from the examples quoted above from the Saṃyutta. According to the Yoga, on the contrary (see e. g., Woods, Yoga--system of Patañjali, 119), it is a possible, and indeed a necessary quality of the Yogī, to understand the beginning and end of Saṃsāra].
Anamha (adj.) [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 70 = ana--mha "unlaughing" with ana = an (cp. anabhāva & anamatagga) and mha from smi, cp. vimhayati = Sk. vismayati] being in consternation or distress, crying J III. 223 (°kāle = ārodana--kāle C.).
Anaya [a + naya] misfortune, distress Miln 277, usually combd. with vyasana (as also in BSk, e. g. Jtm 215) Vin II.199; S IV.159; A v.156; Miln 292; VvA 327; Sdhp 362.
Anariya (adj.) [an + ariya, see also anāriya] not Aiyan, ignoble, low Vin I.10; D III.232 (°vohāra, 3 sets of 4; the same at Vin v.125); Sn 664, 782 (°dhamma); Pug 13. -- See ariya.
Anala (adj.) [an + ala] 1. not sufficient, not enough; unable, impossible, unmanageable M I.455; J II.326 = IV. 471. -- 2. dissatisfied, insatiate J v.63 (= atitta C.). <-> 3. °ŋ kata dissatisfied, satiated, S I.15 (kāmesu).
Anavaya (adj.) [derivation doubtful. See Trenckner Pali Misc. 65] not lacking, complete in (loc.), fulfilling D I.88 (= anūna paripūra--kārin DA I.248); A III.152 (= samatta paripuṇṇa AA quoted by Tr. on Miln 10).
Anavosita (adj.) [an + avosita; or ana + avosita = avusita?] unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.

Anasana (nt.) [an + asana, cp. Sk. an--aśana] not eating, fasting, hunger D III.75 & in same context at Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324).
Anasitvāna [ger. of an + aśati] without eating, fasting J IV.371.
Anasuyyaŋ [Sk. anasūyan, ppr. of an + asūyati] not grumbling J III.27 (v. l. for anusuyyaŋ T.).
Anasuropa [an + asuropa] absence of abruptness Dhs 1341.
Anasūyaka (adj.) [Sk. anasūyaka, cp. usūya] not grumbling, not envious J II.192.
Anassaka (adj.) either an--assaka or a--nassaka (q. v.).
Anassana (nt.) [a + nassana, naś; cp. Sk. naśana] imperishableness, freedom from waste J IV.168.
Anassāvin (adj.) [an + assāvin; cp. assāva + āsava] not intoxicated, not enjoying or finding pleasure in Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sātavatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhasanthavavirahita SnA 549).
Anassāsika (adj.) [an + assāsa + ika; cp. Sk. āśvāsana & BSk. anāśvāsika Divy 207] not consoling, discouraging, not comforting M I.514; S II.191.
Anassuŋ 1st sq, pret. of anusūyati (= Sk. anvaśruvaŋ) I have heard M I.393.
Anāgata (adj.) [an + āgata] not come yet, i. e. future. On usual combn. with atīta: see this. D III.100 sq., 134 sq., 220,
275; M III.188 sq.; S I.5; II.283; A III.100 sq., 400; Sn 318, 373, 851; It 53; J IV.159; VI.364; Dhs 1039, 1416. Anāgamana (nt.) [an + āgamana] not coming, not returning J I 203, 264.
Anāgāmitā (f.) [anāgāmin + tā] the state or condition of an Anāgāmin S v.129, 181, 285; A III.82; v.108, 300 sq.; Sn p. 140 = A III.143; It 1 sq., 39, 40.
Anāgāmin (adj.--n.) [an + āgāmin] one who does not return, a Never--Returner, as tt. designating one who has attained
the 3rd stage out of four in the breaking of the bonds (Saŋyojanas) which keep a man back from Arahantship. So near is the Anāgāmin to the goal, that after death he will be reborn in one of the highest heaven and there obtain Arahantship, never returning to rebirth as a man. But in the oldest passages referring to these 4 stages, the description of the third does not use the word anāgāmin (D I.156; II.92; III.107; M II.146) and anāgāmin does not mean the breaking of bonds, but the cultivation of certain specified good mental habits (S III.168, the anatta doctrine; S v.200--2, the five Indriyas; A I.64, 120, cultivation of good qualities, II 160; v.86, 171 = S 149). We have only two cases in the canon of any living persons being called anāgāmin. Those are at S v.177 and 178. The word there means one who has broken the lower five of the ten bonds, & the individuals named are laymen. At D II.92 nine others, of
whom eight are laymen, are declared after their death to have reached the third stage (as above) during life, but they are not called anāgāmins. At It 96 there are only 3 stages, the worldling, the Anāgāmin, and the Arahant; and the Saŋyojanas are not referred to. It is probable that already in the Nikāya period the older, wider meaning was falling into disuse. The Abhidhamma books seem to refer only to the Saŋyojana explanation; the commentaries, so far as we know them, ignore any other. See Ps II.194; Kv. Tr. 74; Dhs. Tr. 302 n; Cp. 69.
--phala fruition of the state of an Anāgāmin; always in combn. sotāpatti° sakadāgāmi° anāgāmi° arahatta° Vin I.293; II.240; IV.29; D I.229; II.227, 255; S III.168; v.411; A I.23, 44; III.272 sq.; IV.204, 276, 372 sq. --magga the path of one who does not return (in rebirths) Nd2 569b.

Anāgāra & Anāgāriyā see agāra & agāriyā.
Anāghāta [an + āghāta] freedom from anger or ill--will Vin II.249.
Anācāra [an + ācāra] misconduct, immorality J II.133; III. 276; adj. anācārin Pug 57.
Anājāniya (adj.) [an + ājāniya] of inferior race, not of good blood M I.367.
Anādara [an + ādara] (a) (m) disrespect PvA 257. -- (b.) (adj.) disrespectful Sn 247 (= ādaravirahita SnA 290).
Anādaratā (f.) [abstr. fr. anādara] want of consideration, in expln. of dovacassatā at Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 = Pug 30 (where reading is anādariyatā).
Anādariya (nt.) [fr. anādara] disregard, disrespect Vin I.176; IV.113 (where expld. in extenso); Dhs 1325 = dug 20 = Vbh 359.
Anādā [ger. of an + ādiyati] without taking up or on to oneself Vin IV.120 (= anādiyitvā C.).
Anādāna (adj.) [an + ādāna] free from attachment (opp. sādāna) A II.10 = It 9 = 109 = Nd2 172a; Sn 620, 741, 1094;
Nd2 41 (where as nt. = taṇha); Dh 352 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇa DhA IV.70), 396, 406, 421. Anāditvā [ger. of an + ādiyati] not taking up, not heeding J IV.352 (v. l. for T. anādiyitvā).
Anādiyitvā [ger. of an + ādiyati, Sk. anādāya] without assuming or taking up, not heeding Vin IV.120; J IV.352; DhA I.41. See also ādiyati.
Anānu-- represents the metrically lengthened from of ananu<-> (an + anu), as found e. g. in the foll. cpds.: °tappaŋ
(ppr.) not regretting J v.492; °puṭṭha questioned Sn 782 (= apucchita SnA 521); °yāyin not following or not defiled by evil Sn 1071 (expld. at Nd2 42 by both avedhamāna (?) avigacchamāna & by arajjamāna adussamāna); °loma not fit or suitable D II.273 (v. l. anu°).
Anāpāthagata (adj.) [an + āpātha + gata] not fallen into the way of (the hunter), escaped him M I.174.
Anāpāda (adj.) [an + āpāda] unmarried (of a woman) J IV.178 (āpāda = apādāna C.; aññehi akata--pariggahā).
Anāpucchā see āpucchati.
Anābādha (adj.) [an + ābādha] safe and sound VvA 351.
Anāmata (adj.) [an + amata the ā being due to metrical lengthening] not affected by death, immortal J II.56 (= asusāna--ṭṭhāna C.); DhA II.99.
Anāmanta (°--) [an + āmanta] without asking or being asked; in °kata unasked, unpermitted, uninvited J VI.226; °cāra living uninvited Vin v.132; A III.259.
Anāmaya (adj.) [an + āmaya] free from illness, not decaying, healthy Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74), 177. Anāmasita (adj.) [an + āmasita, pp. of āmassati] not touched, virgin-- VvA 113 (°khetta).
Anāmassa (adj.) [grd. of an + āmassati, Sk. āmaśya] not to be touched J II 360 (C. anāmāsitabba).

Anāyatana (nt.) [an + āyatana] nonexertion, not exerting oneself, sluggishness, indolence J v.121 (°sīla = dussīla C.). Anāyasa (adj.) [an + āya + sa, or should we read anāyāsa?] void of means, unlucky, unfortunate Vv 845 (= natthi ettha
āyo sukhan ti anāyasaŋ VvA 335).
Anāyāsa (adj.) [an + āyāsa] free from trouble or sorrow, peaceful Th 1, 1008.
Anārambha [an + ārambha] that which is without moil and toil Sn 745 (= nibbāna SnA 507).
Anārādhaka (adj.) [an + ārādhaka] one who fails, unsuccessful Vin I.70.
Anāriya (adj.) [doublet of anariya] not Aryan, ignoble, Sn 815 (v. l. SS. anariya).
Anālamba (adj.) [an + ālamba] without support (from above), unsuspended, not held Sn 173 (+ appatiṭṭha; expld. at SnA 214 by heṭṭhā patiṭṭhâbhāvena upari ālambhāvena ca gambhīra).
Anālaya [an + ālaya] aversion, doing away with Vin I.10 (taṇhāya).
Anāḷhiya & Anāḷhika (adj.) [an + ālhiya, Sk. ād̤hya, see also addhaQ] not rich, poor, miserable, destitute, usually
combd. with daḷidda M I.450; II.178 (v. l. BB. anāḷiya); A III.352 sq. (vv. ll. BB. anāḷhika), 384; J v.96.
Anāvaṭa (°--) [an + āvaṭa] not shut; in °dvāratā (f.) not closing the door againṡt another, accessibility, openhand edness D
Anāvattin (adj.--n.) [an + āvattin] one who does not return, almost syn. with anāgāmin in phrase anāvatti--dhamma, one who is not destined to shift or return from one birth to another, D I.156 (cp. DA I.313); III.132; Pug 16 sq., 62.
Anāvasūraŋ (adv.) [an + ava + sūra = suriya, with ava lengthened to āva in verse] as long as the sun does not set, before sun--down J v.56 (= anatthangata--suriyaŋ C.) cp. Sk. utsūra.
Anāvāsa (adj.--n.) [an + āvāsa] uninhabited, an uninhabited place Vin II.22, 33; J II.77. Anāvikata etc. see āvikata.
Anāvila (adj.) [an + āvila] undisturbed, unstained, clean, pure D I.84 (= nikkaddama DA I.226); III.269, 270; Sn 637 (= nikkilesa SnA 469 = DhA IV.192); Th 2, 369 (āvilacitta +); Dh 82, 413; ThA 251; Sdhp 479.
Anāvuttha (adj.) [an + āvuttha, pp. of āvasati] not dwelt in D .II50.
Anāsaka (adj.) [an + āsaka] fasting, not taking food S IV.118. f. °ā [cp. Sk. anāśaka nt.] fasting, abstaining from food Dh
141 (= bhatta--paṭikkhepa DhA III.77).
Anāsakatta (nt.) [abstr. of anāsaka] fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292).
Anāsava (adj.) [an + āsava] free from the 4 intoxications (see āsava) Vin II.148 = 164; D III.112; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Nd2 44; It 75; Pug 27, Dhs 1101, 1451; Vbh 426; Th 1, 100; Pv II.615; VvA 9. See āsava and cp. nirāsava.
Anāsasāna (adj.) [an + āsasāna] not longing after anything Sn 369 (SnA 365 however reads anāsayāna & has anāsasāna as v. l. Cp. also vv. ll. to āsasāna. Expld by kañci rūpâdi--dhammaŋ nâsiŋsati SnA 365.

Anāhāra (adj.) [an + āhāra] being without food M I.487; Sn 985. Anikkad̤d̤hanā (f.) [a + nikkad̤d̤hanā] not throwing out or expelling J III.22.
Anikkasāva (adj.) [a + nikkasāva, cp. nikasāva] not free from impurity, impure, stained Dh 9 = Th 1, 969 = J II.198 = v.50; DhA I.82 (= rāgâdīhi kasāvehi sakasāva).
Anikhāta (adj.) [a + nikhāta, pp. of nikhanati] not dug into, not dug down, not deep J VI.109 (°kūla; C. agambhīrā). Anigha see nigha1 see nigha1 and īgha.
Anicchā (f.) [an + icchā] dispassion S v.6; adj. °a without desires, not desiring Sn 707.
Aniñjana (nt.) [an + iñjana] immobility, steadfastness Ps I.15.
Aniñjita (adj.) [an + iñjita] immoveable, undisturbed, unshaken Th 1, 386.
Aniṭṭhangata see niṭṭhā2.
Aniṭṭhita see niṭṭhita.
Anitthi (f.) [an + itthi] a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, a woman ceasing to be a woman, "nonwoman" J II.126 (compd with anadī a river without water; interpreted by ucchiṭṭh--itthi).
Anindi-- [the compn. form of nindā] in °ḷocana (with) faultless eyes J VI.265.
Anindita (adj.) [a + nindita] blameless, faultless J IV.106 (°angin of blameless body or limbs).
Anibbisaŋ [ppr. of nibbisati, q. v.] not finding Th 1, 78 = Dh 153 (= taŋ ñāṇaŋ avindanto DhA III.128).
Animisa (adj.) [Ved. animeṣa, cp. nimisati] not winking, waking, watchful Dāvs v.26 (nayana).
Aniyata (adj.) [a + niyata] not settled, uncertain, doubtful Vin I.112; II.287; D III.217.
Aniyamita (adj.) [pp. of a + niyameti] indefinite (as tt. g.) VvA 231.
Anila [from an, cp. Sk. aniti to breathe, cp. Gr. a)/nemos wind; Lat. animus breath, soul, mind] wind J IV.119 (°patha air, sky); Miln 181; VvA 237; Sdhp 594.
Anirākata (adj.) [a + nirākata] see nirankaroti.
Anissara (adj.) [an + issara] without a personal ereator Th 1, 713.
Anissukin (adj.) [an + issukin, see also an--ussukin] not hard, not greedy, generous D III.47 (+ amaccharin; v. l. anussukin); SnA 569 (see under niṭṭhurin).
Anīka (nt.) [Ved. anīka face, front, army to Idg. *ogṷ (see), cp. Gr. o)/mma eye, Lat. oculus, see also Sk. pratīka and P. akkhi] army, array, troops (orig. "front", i. e. of the battle--array) Vin IV.107 (where expld. in detail); Sn 623 (bala° strong in arms, with strong array i. e. of khanti, which precedes; cp. SnA 467).

--agga a splendid army Sn 421 (= balakāya senāmukha SnA 384). --ṭṭha a sentinel, royal guard D III.64, 148; J v.100; VI.15 ("men on horseback", horseguard); Miln 234, 264. --dassana troop--inspection D I.6 (aṇīka° at DA I.85, q. v. interpretation); Vin IV.107 (senābyūha +).
Anīgha see nigha1 see nigha1 and cp. īgha.
Anīti (f.) [an + īti] safety, soundness, sound condition, health A IV.238; Miln 323 (abl. °ito).
Anītika (adj.) [fr. anīti] free from injury or harm, healthy, secure Vin II.79 = 124 (+ anupaddava); III.162; S IV.371; Sn 1137 (ītī vuccanti kilesā etc. Nd2 48); Miln 304.
Anītiha (adj.) [an + ītīha, the latter a cpd. der. fr. iti + ha = saying so and so, cp. itihāsa & itihītihaŋ] not such and such,
not based on hearsay (itiha), not guesswork or (mere) talk A II.26; Th 1, 331 (cp. M I.520); Sn 1053 (= Nd2 49, 151); J I.456; Nett 166 (cp. It 28).
Anu1 (indecl.) [Vedic anu, Av. anu; Gr. a)/nw to a)/na along, up; Av. ana, Goth. ana, Ohg. ana, Ags. on, Ger. an, Lat. an (in anhelare etc.)] prep. & pref. -- A. As prep. anu is only found occasionally, and here its old (vedic) function with acc. is superseded by the loc. <-> Traces of use w. acc. may be seen in expressions of time like anu pañcāhaŋ by 5 days, i. e. after (every) 5 days (cp. ved. anu dyūn day by day); a. vassaŋ for one year or yearly; a. saŋvaccharaŋ id. -- (b) More freq. w. loc. (= alongside, with, by) a. tīre by the bank S IV.177; pathe by the way J v.302; pariveṇiyaŋ in every cell Vin I.80; magge along the road J v.201; vāte with the wind J II.382.
B. As pref.: (a) General character. anu is freq. as modifying (directional) element with well--defined meaning ("along"), as
such also as 1st component of pref.--cpds., e. g. anu + ā (anvā°), anu + pra (anuppa°), + pari, + vi, + saŋ. -- As base, i. e. 2nd
part of a pref.--cpd. it is rare and only found in combn sam--anu°. The prefix saŋ is its nearest relation as modifying pref. The
opp. of anu is paṭi and both are often found in one cpd. (cp. °loma, °vāta). (b) Meanings. I. With verbs of motion: "along
towards". -- (a) the motion viewed from the front backward = after, behind; esp. with verbs denoting to go, follow etc. E. g.
°aya going after, connexion; °āgacch° follow, °kkamati follow, °dhāvati run after, °patta received, °parivattati move about after, °bandhati run after, °bala rear--guard, °bhāsati speak after, repeat, °vāda speaking after, blame, °vicarati roam about °viloketi
look round after (survey), °saŋcarati proceed around etc. -- (b) the motion viewed from the back forward = for, towards an
aim, on to, over to, forward. Esp. in double pref.--cpds. (esp. with °ppa°), e. g. anu--ādisati design for, dedicate °kankhin
longing for, °cintana care for, °tiṭṭhati look after, °padinna given over to, °pavecchati hand over, °paviṭṭha entered into,
°pasaŋkamati go up to, °rodati cry for, °socati mourn for. -- II. Witb verbs denoting a state or condition: (a) literal: along, at, to, combined with. Often resembling E. be-- or Ger. be--, also Lat. ad-- and con--. Thus often transitiving or simply emphatic. E.
g. °kampā com--passion, °kiṇṇa be--set, °gaṇhāti take pity on, °gāyati be--singen, °jagghati laugh at, belaugh, °ddaya pity with, °masati touch at, °yuñjati order along, °yoga devotion to, °rakkhati be--guard, °litta be--smeared or an--ointed, °vitakheti reflect over, °sara con--sequential; etc. -- (b) applied: according to, in conformity with. E. g. °kūla being to will, °chavika befitting,
°ñāta permitted, al--lowed, °mati con- sent, a--greement, °madati ap--preciate, °rūpa = con--form, °vattin acting according to, °ssavana by hearsay, °sāsati ad--vise, com--mand etc. -- III. (a) (fig.) following after = second to, secondary, supplementary,
inferior, minor, after, smaller; e. g. °dhamma lesser morality, °pabbajā discipleship, °pavattaka ruling after, °bhāga
after--share, °majjha mediocre, °yāgin assisting in sacrifice, °vyañjana smaller marks, etc.; cp. paṭi in same sense. -- (b)
distributive (cp. A. a.) each, every, one by one, (one after one): °disā in each direction, °pañcāhaŋ every 5 days, °pubba one
after the other. -- IV. As one of the contrasting (--comparative) prefixes (see remarks on ati & cp. ā3) anu often occurs in reduplicative cpds. after the style of khuddânukhuddaka "small and still smaller", i. e. all sorts of small items or whatever is small or insignificant. More freq. combns. are the foll.: (q. v. under each heading) padânupadaŋ,
pubbânupubbaka, ponkhânuponkhaŋ, buddhânubuddha, vādânuvāda, seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi. -- V. As regards dialectical differences
in meanings of prefixes, anu is freq. found in Pāli where the Sk. variant presents apa (for ava), abhi or ava. For P. anu = Sk.
(Ved.) apa see anuddhasta; = Sk. abhi see anu--gijjhati, °brūheti, °sandahati; = Sk. ava see anu--kantati, °kassati2, °kiṇṇa,
°gāhati, °bujjhati °bodha, °lokin, °vajja.

Note (a) anu in compn. is always contracted to °ânu°, never elided like adhi = °dhi or abhi = °bhi. The rigid character of this rule accounts for forms isolated out of this sort of epds. (like mahânubhāva), like ānupubbikathā (fr. *pubbānupubba°), ānubhāva etc. We find ānu also in combn. with an-- under the influence of metre. -- (b) the assimilation (contracted) form of anu before vowels is anv°.
Anu2 (adj.) subtile; freq. spelling for aṇu, e. g. D I.223 Sdhp 271, 346 (anuŋ thūlaŋ). See aṇu. Anukankhin (adj.) [fr. anu + kānkṣ] striving after, longing for J v.499 (piya°).
Anukantati [anu + kantati2] to cut Dh 311 (hatthaŋ = phāleti DhA III.484).
Anukampaka & °ika (adj.) [fr. anukampati] kind of heart, merciful, compassionate, full of pity (--° or c. loc.) D III.187;
S I.105 (loka°), 197; v.157; A IV.265 sq.; It 66 (sabba--bhūta°); Pv I.33 (= kārunika PvA 16), 53 (= atthakāma, hitesin PvA 25), 88; II.14 (= anuggaṇhataka PvA 69), 27; ThA 174; PvA 196 (satthā sattesu a.).
Anukampati [anu + kampati] to have pity on, to commiserate, to pity, to sympathise with (c. acc.) S I.82, 206; v.189. Imper. anukampa Pv II.16 (= anuddayaŋ karohi PvA 70) & anukampassu Pv III.28 (= anuggaṇha PvA 181). Med. ppr. anukampamāna Sn 37 (= anupekkhamāna anugayhamāna Nd2 50); PvA 35 (taŋ), 62 (pitaraŋ), 104. -- pp. anukampita (q. v.).
Anukampana (nt.) [fr. last] compassion, pity PvA 16, 88.
Anukampā (f.) [abstr. fr. anukampati] compassion, pity, mercy D I.204; M I.161; II.113; S I.206; II.274 (loka°); IV.323; v.259 sq.; A I.64, 92; II.159; III.49; IV.139; Pug 35. -- Often in abl. anukampāya out of pity, for the sake of D III.211 (loka° out of compassion for all mankind, + atthaya hitāya); J III.280; PvA 47, 147.
Anukampita (adj.) [pp. of anukampati] compassioned, gratified, remembered, having done a good deed (of mercy) Pv III.230.
Anukampin (adj.) [cp. anukampaka] compassionate, anxious for, commiserating. Only in foll. phrases: hita° full of solicitude for the welfare of S v.86; Sn 693; Pv III.76. sabbapāṇa--bhūta--hita° id. S IV.314; A II.210; III.92; IV.249; Pug 57, 68. sabba--bhūta° S I.25, 110; A II.9; It 102.
Anukaroti [anu + kṛ] to imitate, "to do after" A I.212; J I.491; II.162; DhA IV.197. -- ppr. anukabbaŋ Vin II.201 (mamâ°). -- Med. anukubbati S I.19 = J IV.65. <-> See also anukubba. On anvakāsi see anukassati 2.
Anukassati [anu + kassati, kṛṣ] 1. [Sk. anukaṛṣati] to draw after, to repeat, recite, quote D II.255 (silokaŋ). -- 2. [Sk. ava--kaṛṣati] to draw or take of, to remove, throw down, Th 1, 869 (aor. anvakāsi = khipi, chad̤d̤esi C.).
Anukāma (adj.) [anu + kāma] responding to love, loving in return J II.157.
Anukāra [cp. anukaroti] imitation Dpvs v.39.
Anukārin (adj.) imitating Dāvs v.32.
Anukiṇṇa [pp. of anu + kirati] strewn with, beset with, dotted all over Pv IV.121 (bhamara--gaṇa°).
Anukubba (adj.) (--°) [= Sk. anukurvat, ppr. of anukaroti] "doing correspondingly" giving back, retaliating J II.205

Anukubbati see anukaroti.
Anukula freq. spelling for anukūla.
Anukulaka (adj.) = anukula Sdhp 242 (iccha° according to wish).
Anukūla (adj.) [anu + kūla, opp. paṭikūla] favourable, agreeable, suitable, pleasant VvA 280; spelt anukula at Sdhp 297, 312.
--bhava complaisance, willingness VvA 71. --yañña a propitiative sacrifice D I.144 (expld. at DA I.302 as anukula° = sacrifice for the propagation of the clan).
Anukkaṇṭhati [an + ukkaṇṭhati] not to be sorry or not to lack anything, in ppr. °anto J v.10; and pp. °ita without regret or in plenty PvA 13.
Anukkaṇṭhana (nt.) [an + ukkaṇṭhana] having no lack anything, being contented or happy J VI.4.
Anukkama [to anukkamati] 1. order, turn, succession, going along; only in instr. anukkamena gradually, in due course
or succession J I.157, 262, 290; VvA 157; PvA 5, 14, 35 etc. -- 2. that which keeps an animal in (regular) step, i. e. a bridle M I.446; Sn 622 (sandānaŋ saha°).
Anukkamati [anu + kram] 1. to follow, go along (a path = acc.) A v.195; It 80 (maggaŋ). -- 2. to advance (not with Morris J P T S. 1886, 111 as "abandon") S I.24, Th 1, 194.
Anukkhipati [anu + khipati] to throw out Cp. XI.6 (vaṭṭaŋ).
Anukkhepa [anu + khepa, see anukkhipati] compensation Vin I.285.
Anukhaṇati [anu + khaṇati] to dig after or further J v.233.
Anukhuddaka (adj.) [anu + khuddaka] in cpd. khudda° whatever there is of minor things, all less important items Vin II.287 = D II.154 = Miln 142; Miln 144.
Anuga (--°) (adj.--suff.) [fr. anu + gam] following or followed by, going after, undergoing, being in or under, standing under the influence of Sn 332 (vasa° in the power of), 791 (ejā° = abhibhūta Sn 527), 1095 (Māra<-> vasa° = abhibhuyya viharanti Nd2 507); It 91 (ejā°); J III.224 (vasa° = vasavattin C.); Mhvs 7, 3.
Anugacchati [anu + gacchati] to go after, to follow, to go or fall into (w. acc.) KhA 223; PvA 141 (°gacchanto); aor. °gamāsi Vin I.16, & anvagā Mhvs 7, 10; 3rd pl. anvagū Sn 586 (vasaŋ = vasaŋ gata SnA 461). Pass. anugammati, ppr. anugammamāna accompanied or followed by, surrounded, adorned with J I.53; v.370. <-> pp. anugata (q. v.).
Anugata (adj.) [pp. of anugacchati] gone after, accompanied by, come to; following; fig. fallen or gone into, affected with
(--°), being a victim of, suffering M I.16; D III.85, 173 (parisā); A II.185 (sota°, v. l. anudhata); J II.292 (samudda°); v.369; Nd2 32 (taṇhā°); PvA 102 (nāmaŋ mayhaŋ a. has been given to me), 133 (kammaphala°).
Anugati (f.) (--°) [fr. anu + gam] following, being in the train of, falling under, adherence to, dependence on S I.104 (vas° being in the power). Usually in cpd. diṭṭhânugati a sign (lit. belonging to) of speculation Vin II.108; S II.203; Pug 33; DhA IV.39.

Anugama [fr. anu + gam] following after, only as adj. in dur° difficult to be followed J IV.65.
Anugāmika (adj.) going along with, following, accompanying; resulting from, consequential on Kh VIII.8 (nidhi, a
treasure acc. a man to the next world); J IV.280 (°nidhi); Miln 159 (parisā); PvA 132, 253 (dānaŋ nāma °aŋ nidānan ti). Anugāmin (adj.) [fr. anugacchati] following, attending on; an attendant, follower SnA 453 (= anuyutta).
Anugāyati [anu + gāyati] to sing after or to, recite (a magic formula or hymn) praise, celebrate D I.104, 238; Sn 1131 (anugāyissaŋ); Miln 120.
Anugāhati [anu + gāhati] to plunge into, to enter (acc.) Sdhp 611.
Anugijjhati [anu + gijjhati] to be greedy after, to covet Sn 769 (cp. Nd1 12); J III.207; IV.4 (= giddhā gathitā hutvā
allīyanti C.). pp. °giddhā (q. v.). Cp. abhigijjhati.
Anugiddha [pp. of anugijjhati] greedy after, hankering after, desiring, coveting Sn 86 (anânu°), 144, 952; Th 1, 580. Anuggaṇha (adj.) [cp. anuggaha] compassionate, ready to help PvA 42 °sīla.
Anuggaṇhataka (adj.) [= anugganha] compassionate, commiserating, helping PvA 69 (= anukampaka). Anuggaṇhana (nt.) anuggaha1 DhsA 403.
[anu + gaṇhāti] to have pity on, to feel sorry for, to help, give protection D I.53 (vācaŋ; cp. DA I.160: sārato agaṇhaṇto); J II.74; Nd2 50 (ppr. med. °gayhamāna = anukampamāna); Pug 36; PvA 181 (imper. anuggaṇha = anukampassu). pp. anuggahīta (q. v.).
Anuggaha1 [anu + grah] "taking up", compassion, love for, kindness, assistance, help, favour, benefit S II.11; III.109; IV.104; v.162; A I.92, 114; II.145; IV.167; v.70; It 12, 98; J I.151; v.150; Pug 25; PvA 145; ThA 104.
Anuggaha2 (adj.) [an + uggaha] not taking up Sn 912 (= na gaṇhāti Nd1 330).
Anuggahīta (& °ita) [pp. of anuggaṇhāti] commiserated, made happy, satisfied M I.457; S II.274; III.91; IV.263; A III.172; J III.428.
Anuggāhaka (adj.) [fr. anuggaha] helping, assisting S III.5; V.162; Miln 354 (nt. = help). Anugghāṭeti [an + ugghāṭeti] not to unfasten or open (a door) Miln 371 (kavāṭaŋ). Anugghāta [an + ugghāta] not shaking, a steady walk J VI.253.
Anugghātin (adj.) [fr. last] not shaking, not jerking, J VI.252; Vv 53 (read °ī for i); VvA 36. Anughāyati [anu + ghāyati1] to smell, snuff, sniff up Miln 343 (gandhaŋ).
Anucankamati [anu + cankamati] to follow (along) after, to go after D I.235; M I.227; Th 1, 481, 1044; Caus. °āpeti

M I.253, cp. Lal. Vist. 147, 3; M Vastu I.350.
Anucankamana (nt.) [fr. anucankamati] sidewalk J I.7.
Anucarati [anu + cariti] to move along, to follow; to practice; pp. anuciṇṇa & anucarita (q. v.)
Anucarita (--°) [pp. of anucarati] connected with, accompanied by, pervaded with D I.16, 21 (vīmaŋsa° = anuvicarita DA I.106); M I.68 (id.); Miln 226.
Anuciṇṇa (pp.) [pp. of anucarati] 1. pursuing, following out, practising, doing; having attained or practised Vin II.203 = It 86 (pamādaŋ); J I 20 (v.126); Th 1, 236; 2, 206; Dpvs IV.9. -- 2. adorned with, accompanied by, connected with J IV.286.
Anucintana (nt.) [fr. anucinteti] thinking, upon, intention, care for PvA 164.
Anucinteti [anu + cinteti] to think upon, to meditate, consider S I.203 (v. l. for anuvicinteti). Anuccangin see anujjangin.
(adj.) [anu + chavi + ka] "according to one's skin", befitting, suitable, proper, pleasing, fit for, J I.58, 62, 126, 218; II.5; IV.137, 138; Miln 358; DhA I.203, 390; II.55, 56; VvA 68, 78; PvA 13, 26 (= kappiya), 66, 81, 286. anucchaviya at Vin II.7 (an°); III.120 (id. + ananulomika); Miln 13.
Anucchiṭṭha (adj.) [see ucchiṭṭha] (food) that is not thrown away or left over; untouched, clean (food) J III.257; DhA II.3 (vv. ll. anucciṭṭha).
Anujagghati [anu + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock D I.91; DA I.258 (cp. sañjagghati ibid 256).
Anujavati [anu + javati] to run after, to hasten after, to follow J VI.452 (= anubandhati).
Anujāta (adj.) [anu + jāta] "born after" i. e. after the image of, resembling, taking after; esp. said of a son (putta), resembling his father, a worthy son It 64 (atijāta +, opp. avajāta); Th 1, 827 (fig. following the example of), 1279; J VI.380;
DhA I.129; Dāvs II.66.
Anujānāti [anu + jānāti] 1. to give permission, grant, allow Vin IV.225; A II.197; Pv IV.167; PvA 55, 79, 142. -- 2. to advise, prescribe Vin I.83; II.301: Sn 982. <-> grd. anuññeyya that which is allowed A II.197; pp. anuññāta (q. v.) Caus. anujānāpeti J I.156.
Anujīvati [anu + jīvati] to live after, i. e. like (acc.), to live for or on, subsist by J IV.271 (= upajīvati, tassânubhāvena jīvitaŋ laddhaŋ (C.). -- pp. anujīvata (q. v.).
Anujīvita (nt.) [pp. of anujīvati] living (after), living, livelihood, subsistence, life Sn 836 (= jīvitaŋ SnA 545).
Anujīvin (adj.--n.) [fr. anujīvati] living upon, another, dependent; a follower, a dependant A I.152; III.44; J III.485; Dāvs
Anujju (adj.) [an + ujju] not straight, crooked, bent, in cpds. °angin (anujjangin) with (evenly) bent limbs, i. e. with perfect limbs, graceful f. °ī Ep. of a beautiful woman J v.40 (= kañcana--sannibha--sarīrā C.); VI.500 (T. anuccangī, C.
aninditā agarahitangī); °gāmin going crooked i. e. snake J IV.330; °bhūta not upright (fig. of citta) J v.293. Anujjuka = anujju J III.318.

Anujjhāna (nt.) [anu + jhāna] meditation, reflection, introspection Miln 352 (°bahula).
Anuññāta (adj.) [pp. of anujānāti] permitted, allowed; sanctioned, given leave, ordained D I.88; J I.92; II.353, 416; Pv
I.123 (na a. = ananuññāta at id. p. Th 2, 129; expld. at PvA 64 by ananumata); Pug 28; DA I.247, 248, 267; PvA 12, 81.
Anuññātatta (nt.) [abstr. to anuññāta] being permitted, permission J II.353.
Anuṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. an + uṭṭhahati] not rising, not rousing oneself, inactive, lazy Th 1, 1033.
Anuṭṭhahati [anu + ṭhahati = °thāti, see °tiṭṭhati] to carry out, look after, practise do J v.121. -- pp. anuṭṭhita (q. v.).
Anuṭṭhahāna (adj.) [ppr. of an + uṭṭhahati] one who does not rouse himself, not getting up, inactive Dh 280 (= anuṭṭhahanto avāyāmanto DhA III.409).
Anuṭṭhātar [n. ag. to an + uṭṭhahati] one without energy or zeal Sn 96 (niddāsīlin sabhāsīlin +) SnA 169 (= viriya--tejavirahita).
Anuṭṭhāna (nt.) [an + uṭṭhāna] "the not getting up", inactivity, want of energy Dh 241 (sarīra--paṭijagganaŋ akaronto DhA III.347).
Anuṭṭhita [pp. of anuṭṭhati = anutiṭṭhati] practising, effecting or effected, come to, experienced, done D II.103; S IV. 200; A III.290 sq.; IV.300; J II.61; Miln 198; PvA 132 (cp. anugata).
Anuṭṭhubhati [formally Sk. anuṣṭobhati, but in meaning = *anuṣṭīvati; anu + ṭṭhubhati, the etym. of which see under niṭṭhubhati] to lick up with one's saliva DA I.138.
Anuṭṭhurin v. l. at SnA 569, see niṭṭhurin. Anud̤asati [anu + d̤asati] to bite J VI.192.
Anud̤ahati [anu + d̤ahati] to burn over again, burn thoroughly, fig. to destroy, consume J II.330; VI.423. Pass. °d̤ayhati J v.426. -- Also spelt °dahati, e. g. at S IV. 190 = v.53; Th 2, 488.
Anud̤ahana (nt.) [fr. anud̤ahati] conflagration, burning up, consumption J v.271; ThA 287 (d).
Anuṇṇata (adj.) [uṇṇata] not raised, not elated, not haughty, humble Sn 702 (care = uddhaccaŋ nâpajjeyya SnA 492).
Anutappati [anu + tappati1; Sk. anutapyate, Pass. of anutapati] to be sorry for, to regret, repent, feel remorse J I.113; IV.358; v.492 (ppr. an--anutappaŋ); Dh 67, 314; Pv II.942; DhA II.40. grd. anutappa to be regretted A I.22, 77; III.294, and anutāpiya A III.46 (an°).
Anutāpa [fr. anu + tāpa] anguish, remorse, conscience Vv 405 (= vippaṭisāra VvA 180); DhsA 384. Anutāpin (adj.) [fr. anutāpa] repenting, regretting Th 2, 57, 190; Vv 21; VvA 115.
Anutāpiya grd. of anutappati, q. v.
Anutāḷeti [anu + taḷeti] to beat J II.280.

Anutiṭṭhati [anu + tiṭṭhati see also anuṭṭhahati] to look after, to manage, carry on J v.113 (= anugacchati); PvA 78. Anutīre (adv.) [anu + tīre, loc. of tīra] along side or near the bank (of a river) Sn 18 (= tīra--samīpe SnA 28). Cp. anu A
Anuttara (adj.) [an + uttara] "nothing higher", without a superior, incomparable, second to none, unsurpassed, excellent, preeminent Sn 234 (= adhikassa kassaci abhāvato KhA 193), 1003; Dh 23, 55 (= asadisa appaṭibhāga DhA I.423); Pv IV.35 2 (dhamma); Dhs 1294; DA I.129; PvA 1, 5, 6, 18, etc.
Anuttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuttara] preeminence, superiority, excellency; highest ideal, greatest good. They are mentioned as sets of 3 (viz. dassana°, paṭipadā°, vimutti°) at D III.219, or of 6 (viz. dassana°, savana°, lābha°, sikkhā°, pāricariyā°, anussata°) at D III.250, 281; A I.22; III.284, 325 sq., 452; Ps I.5. Cp. M I.235; A v.37. See also ānuttariya.
Anuttāna (adj.) [an + uttāna] not (lying) open, not exposed; fig. unexplained, unclear J VI.247. Anutthunā (f.) [fr. anutthunāti] wailing, crying, lamenting Nd1 167 (= vācāpalāpa vippalāpa etc.).
Anutthunāti [anu + thunati (thunāti); anu + stan] to wail, moan, deplore, lament, bewail D III.86; Sn 827 (cp. Nd1 167); Dh 156; J III.115; v.346, 479; DhA III.133; PvA 60 (wrongly applied for ghāyati, of the fire of conscience).
Anutrāsin (adj.) [an + utrāsin] not terrified, at ease Th 1, 864.
Anuthera [anu + thera] an inferior Thera, one who comes next to the elder Vin II.212 (therânutherā Th. & next in
Anudadāti [anu + dadāti] to concede, grant, admit, fut. anudassati Miln 276, 375.
Anudayati (to sympathise with) see under anuddā.
Anudassita [pp. of anudasseti] manifested Miln 119.
Anudahati see anud̤ahati.
Anudiṭṭha [pp. of anudisati] pointed out, appointed, dedicated, nt. consecration, dedication J v.393 (anudiṭṭha = asukassa nāma dassatī ti C.); Pv I.107 (= uddiṭṭha PvA 50).
Anudiṭṭhi (f.) [anu + diṭṭhi] an "after--view", sceptical view, speculation, heresy D I.12; M II.228; S III.45 sq.; Th 1, 754; Miln 325; DA I.103. attânudiṭṭhi (q. v.) a soul--speculation.
Anudisati [anu + disati] to point out, direct, bid, address PvA 99 (aor. anudesi + anvesi). -- pp. anudiṭṭha (q. v.). Anudisā (f.) [anu + disā] an intermediate point of ihe compass, often collectively for the usual 4 intermediate points D
I.222; S I.122; III.124.
Anudīpeti [anu + dīpeti] to explain Miln 227 (dhammâdhammaŋ).
Anudūta [anu + dūta] a person sent with another, a travelling companion Vin II.19, 295; DhA II.76, 78. Anudeva see anvadeva.

Anuddayatā (f.) [abstr. to anuddayā] sympathy with (--°) compassion, kindness, favour, usually as par° kindness to or sympathy with other people S II.218; v.169 (T. anudayatā); A III.184; It 72; Vbh 356.
Anuddayā (& anudayā) (f.) [anu + dayā] compassion, pity, mercy, care Vin II.196; S I.204; II.199; IV.323; A II.176; III.189; Pug 35 (anukampā); J I.147, 186, 214; PvA 70, 88, 181 (= anukampā). In compn anudaya° e. g. °sampanna full of mercy J I.151, 262; PvA 66.
Anuddā (f.) [contracted form of anuddayā] = anuddayā Dhs 1056, where also the other abstr. formations anuddāyanā & anuddāyitattaŋ "care, forbearance & consideration"; DhsA 362 (anudayatī ti anud̤dā).
Anuddhaŋseti [anu + dhaŋseti] to spoil, corrupt, degrade Vin IV.148 (expln. here in slightly diff. meaning = codeti vā codāpeti vā to reprove, scold, bring down); It 42. Usually in ster. phrase rāgo cittaŋ a. lust degrades the heart Vin III.111; M I.26; S I.186; A I.266; II.126; III. 393 sq. -- pp. anuddhasta (q. v.).
Anuddhata (adj.) [an + uddhata] not puffed up, not proud, unconceited calm, subdued Sn 850 (= uddhacca--virahita SnA 549, cp. anuṇṇata); It 30; Dh 363 (= nibbutacitta DhA IV.93); Vv 648; Pug 59.
Anuddharin (adj.) [an + uddharin] not proud Sn 952 (= anussukin SnA 569) see niṭṭhurin.
Anuddhasta (adj.) [anu + dhasta, pp. of anuddhaŋseti, cp. Sk. apadhvasta] spoilt, corrupt, degraded M I.462 (citta);
A II.126 (id.).
Anudhamma [anu + dhamma] 1. in compn. with dhamma as dhammânudhamma to be judged as a redupl. cpd. after
the manner of cpds. mentioned under anu IV. & meaning "the Law in all its parts, the dhamma and what belongs to it, the Law in its fullness". For instances see dhamma C. IV. Freq. in phrase dh°--ânudh°--paṭipanna "one who masters the completeness
of the Dh.", e. g. S II.18; III.163; It 81; Ps II.189. -- 2. conformity or accordance with the Law, lawfulness, relation, essence, consistency, truth; in phrase dhammassa (c°) anudhammaŋ vyākaroti to explain the truth of the Dh. Vin I.234; D I.161; M I.368, 482; S II.33; III.6; IV.51; V.7. See further M III.30; Sn 963 (cp. Nd1 481 for exegesis). Also in cpd. °cārin living according to the Dhamma, living in truth S II.81, 108; A II.8; Dh 20 (cp. DhA I.158); Vv 317; Sn 69 (see Nd2 51).
Anudhammatā (f.) [abstr. to anudhamma) lawfulness, conformity to the Dhamma A II.46; Ps I.35, 36. Anudhāreti [anu + dhāreti] to hold up DA I.61 (chattaŋ), cp. J 1.53, dhariyamāna.
Anudhāvati [anu + dhāvati] to run after, to chase, follow, persecute, pursue M I.474; S I.9; Dh 85; Th 1, 1174; Miln 253, 372.
Anudhāvin (adj.--n.) [fr. anudhāvati] one who runs after S I.9, 117.
Anunadī (--tire) along the bank of the river S IV.177 should be read anu nadītīre (= anu prep. c. loc.; see under anu A).
Anunamati [anu + namati] to incline, bend (intrs.), give way Miln 372 (of a bow).
Anunaya [fr. anuneti] "leading along", friendliness, courtesy, falling in with, fawning D III.254 (°saŋyojana); A IV.7 sq. (id.) M I.191; Dhs 1059; Vbh 145; Nett 79; combd. w. opp. paṭigha (repugnance) at Miln 44, 122, 322.
Anunayana (nt.) [fr. anuneti] fawning DhsA 362.
Anunāsika (adj.) [anu + nāsā + ika] nasal; as tt. g. the sound ŋ; in °lopa apocope of the nasal ŋ VvA 114, 253, 275, 333.

Anunīta (adj.) [pp. of anuneti] led, induced S IV.71; Sn 781.
Anunetar [n. ag. fr. anuneti] one who reconciles or conciliates Ps II.194 (netā vinetā anunetā).
Anuneti [anu + neti] to conciliate, appease, win over, flatter S I.232 (ppr. anunayamāna); pp. anunīta (q. v.). Anupa see anūpa.
Anupakampati [anu + pakampati] to shake, move, to be unsteady Th 1, 191 = Ud 41.
Anupakkama [an + upakkama] not attacking, instr. °ena not by attack (from external enemies) Vin II.195. Anupakkuṭṭha (adj.) [an + upak°] blameless, irreproachahle D I.113; Vin IV.160; Sn p. 115; DA I.281.
Anupakkhandati [anu + pa + khandati] to push oneself forward, to encroach on D I.122 (= anupavisati DA I.290);
ger. anupakhajja pushing oneself in, intruding Vin II.88 (= antopavisati), 213; IV.43 (= anupavisati); M I.151, 469; S III.113; Vism 18.
Anupakhajjati [den. fr. anupakhajja, ger. of anupakkhandati] to encroach, intrude Vin V.163. Anupagacchati [anu + pa + gacchati] to go or return into (c. acc.) D I.55 (anupeti +).
Anupaghāta [an + upaghāta] not hurting Dh 185 (anūpa° metri causa; expld. by anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA III.238).
Anupacita (adj.) [anu + pa + cita, pp. of anupacināti] heaped up, accumulated ThA 56.
Anupacināti [an + upacināti] not to observe or notice J V.339 (= anoloketi C.; v. l. anapaviṇāti).
Anupajagghati [anu + pa + jagghati] to laugh at, to deride, mock over A I.198 (v. l. anusaŋ°).
Anupajjati [anu + pad] to follow, accompany J IV.304. <-> pp. anupanna (q. v.).
Anupañcāhaŋ (adv.) [anu + pañcā + ahaŋ] every five days PvA 139 (+ anudasāhaŋ).
Anupaññatti (f.) [anu + paññatti] a supplementary regulation or order Vin II.286; V.2 sq.
Anupaṭipāti (f.) [anu + paṭipāti] succession; as adv. in order, successively DA I.277 (kathā = anupubbikathā); DhA III.340 (anupaṭipāṭiyā = anupubbena); Vism 244.
Anupaṭṭhita (adj.) [anu + pa + ṭhita] setting out after, following, attacking J V.452.
Anupatati [anu + patati] 1. to follow, go after, J VI.555 anupatiyāsi Subj.). -- 2. to fall upon, to befall, attack Vin III.106 = M I.364; S I.23 (read °patanti for °patatanti) = Dh 221 (dukkhā); Th 1, 41 = 1167 (of lightning). <-> pp. anupatita (q. v.). Cp. also anupāta & anupātin.
Anupatita [pp. of anupatati] "befallen", affected with, oppressed by (--°) S II.173 (dukkha°); III.69 (id.); Sn 334 (pamāda°).
Anupatitatta (nt.) [abstr. of anupatita] the fact of being attacked by, being a victim of (--°) SnA 339.

Anupatta (anuppatta) [pp. of anupāpuṇāti; cp. Sk. anuprāpta] (having) attained, received, got to (c. acc), reached D I.87--111; II 2; It 38; Sn 027, 635; Dh 386, 403; Pv IV.166; PvA 59 (dukkhaŋ), 242. In phrase addhagata vayo--anuppatta having reached old age, e. g. Vin II.188; D I.48; Sn pp. 50, 92; PvA 149.
Anupatti (anuppatti) (f.) [anu + patti] attainment, accomplishment, wish, desire (fulfilled), ideal S I.46, 52.
Anupathe at J V.302 should be read as anu pathe by the way at the wayside; anu to be taken as prep. c. loc. (see anu A).
C. explns. as janghamagga--mahāmaggānaŋ antare.
Anupada [cp. Sk. anupadaŋ adv., anu + pada] 1. the "afterfoot", i. e. second foot a verse, also a mode of reciting, where
the second foot is recited without the first one Vin IV.15 (cp. 355); Miln 340 (anupadena anupadaŋ katheti). -- 2. (adj.) (following) on foot, at every, step, continuous, repeated, in °dhamma--vipassanā uninterrupted contemplation M III.25; °vaṇṇanā word--by--word explanation DhsA 168. As nt. adv. °ŋ close behind, immediately after (c. gen.) J II.230 (tassânupadaŋ agamāsi); VI.422. Esp. freq. in combn. padânupadaŋ (adv.) foot after foot, i. e. in the footsteps, immediately behind J III. 504; VI.555; DhA I.69; II.38.
Anupadātar (anuppadātar) [n. ag. of anupadeti] one who gives, or one who sets forth, effects, designs D I.4 (cp. DA I.74); A II.209.
Anupadāna (anuppadāna) (nt.) [anu + pa + dāna, cp. anupadeti] giving, administering, furnishing, the giving of (--°) D I.12 (cp. DA I.98; both read anuppādāna); J III.205; Miln 315.
Anupadinna (anuppadinna) [pp. of anupadeti] given, handed over, furnished, dedicated Pv I.512.
Anupadeti (anuppadeti) [anu + pa + dadāti] to give out, give as a present, hand over; to design, set forth, undertake S III.131 (Pot. anuppadajjuŋ); M I.416 (Pot. anupadajjeyya. see dadāti I.3); Miln 210 (°deti). fut. °dassati (see dadāti I.1); D III.92; S IV.303 (v. l. SS for T. anusarissati); A III.43; Sn 983. ger. °datvā SnA 35. inf. °dātuŋ A I.117. pp. °dinna (q. v.).
Anupaddava (adj.) [an + upaddava] free from danger, uninjured, safe Vin II.79 = 124 (+ anītika); III.162; Dh 338; DhA IV.48; PvA 250 (expln. for siva).
Anupadhāreti [an + upadhār°] to disregard, to heed not, to neglect DhA IV.197; VvA 260.
Anupadhika (adj.) [an + upadhi + ka] free from attachment (see upadhi) Vin I 36 (anupadhīka); D. III 112
(anupadhika opp. to sa--upadhika); Sn 1057 (anūpadhīka T., but Nd2 anūpadhika. with ū for u metri causa). [pp. of anupajjati] gone into, reached, attained Sn 764 (māradheyya°).
Anupabandhati (anuppa°) [anu + pa + bandhati] to follow immediately, to be incessant, to keep on (without stopping), to continue Miln 132. -- Caus. °āpeti ibid.
Anupabandhanatā (anuppa°) (f.) [abstr. to prec.] nonstopping, not ceasing Miln 132.
Anupabandhanā (anuppa°) (f.) [abstr. fr. anupabandhati] continuance, incessance, Pug 18 = Vbh 357 (in exegesis of
Anupabbajjā (f.) [anu + pabbajjā, cp. BSk. anupravrajati Divy 61] giving up worldly life in imitation of another S V.67 = It 107.

Anupaya (adj.) [an + upaya] unattached, "aloof" S I.181 (akankha apiha +).
Anuparigacchati [anu + pari + gacchati] to walk round and round, to go round about (c. acc.) Vin III.119; S I.75
(ger. °gamma); Sn 447 (aor. °pariyagā = parito parito agamāsi Sn A 393); J IV.267.
Anuparidhāvati [anu + pari + dhāvati] to run up & down or to move round & round (cp. anuparivattati) S. III.150
Anupariyāti [auu + pari + yāti] to go round about, to go about, to wander or travel all over (c. acc.) Vin II.111; S I.102,
124; Th 1, 1235 (°pariyeti), 1250 (id. to search); Pv III.34 (= anuvicarati); Miln 38; PvA 92 (°yāyitvā, ger.) 217. Anupariyāya (adj) [adjectivised ger. of anupariyāti] going round, encircling, in °patha the path leading or going round
the city D II.83 = S IV 194 = A V.195; A IV.107.
Anuparivattati [anu + pari + vṛt] to go or move round, viz. 1. to deal with, be engaged in, perform, worship Vin
III.307 (ādiccaŋ); D I.240; PvA 97. -- 2. to meet Miln 204 (Devadatto ca Bodhisatto ca ekato anuparivattanti). -- 3. to move round & round, move on and on, keep on rolling (c. acc.), evolve S. III.150 (anuparidhāvati +) Miln 253 (anudhāvati + kāyan).
Anuparivatti (f.) (--°) [anu + parivatti] dealing with, occupation, connection with S III.16.
Anuparivāreti [anu + pari + vāreti] to surround, stand by, attend on (c. acc.) Vin I.338; M I.153; DhA 1.55.
Anupariveṇiyaŋ [anu + pariveṇiyaŋ = loc. of pariveṇi] should be written anu pariveṇiyaŋ ("in every cell, cell by cell"), anu here functioning as prep. c. loc. (see anu A) Vin I.80, 106.
Anuparisakkati [anu + pari + sakkati] to move round, to be occupied with, take an interest in (c. acc.) S IV.312 (v.l. °vattati).
Anuparisakkana (nt.) [fr. anuparisakkati] dealing with, interest in S IV.312 (v.l. °vattana). Anupariharati [anu + pari + harati] to surround, enfold, embrace M I.306.
Anupalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta] unsmeared, unstained, free from taint M I.319, 386 (in verse); as °ūpalitta in verse of Sn & Dh: Sn 211 (= lepānaŋ abhāvā SnA 261), 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353.
Anupavajja (adj.) [grd. of an + upavadati] blameless, without fault, Miln 391.
Anupavattaka (anuppa°) (adj.) to anupavatteti] one who succeeds (another) King or Ruler in the ruling of an empire
(cakkaŋ) Miln 342, 362; SnA 454. See also anuvattaka.
Anupavatteti (anuppa°) [anu + pa + vatteti, fr. vṛt] to keep moving on after, to continue rolling, with cakkaŋ to wield
supreme power after, i.e. in succession or imitation of a predecessor S I.191; Miln 362. See also anuvatteti.
Anupavāda [an + upavāda] not blaming or finding fault, abstaining from grumbling or abuse Dh 185 (anūpa° in metre;
expld at DhA III.238 as anupavādanañ c'eva anupavādāpanañ ca "not scolding as well as not inciting others to grumbling"); adj. °vādaka Pug 60, & °vādin M I.360.
Anupaviṭṭha (anuppa°) [pp. of anupavisati] entered, gone or got into, fallen into (c. acc.) Miln 270, 318 sq., 409 (coming for shelter); PvA 97, 152 (Gangānadiŋ a. nadī: flowing into the G.).

Anupaviṭṭhatā (f.) [abstr. to anupaviṭṭha] the fact of having entered Miln 257.
Anupavisati [anu + pa + visati] to go into, to enter Dh I.290; VvA 42 (= ogāhati). -- pp. °paviṭṭha (q.v.) <-> Caus.
°paveseti (q.v.).
Anupavecchati (anuppa°) [see under pavecchati] to give, give over to, offer up, present, supply Vin I.221
(°pavacchati); D I.74 (= pavesati DA I.218); II.78; M I.446; III.133; A II.64; III.26 (v.l. °vacch°); J V.394; Sn 208 (v.l. °vacch°); SnA 256 (= anupavesati); PvA 28.
Anupaveseti [anu + pa + vis, cp. BSk. anupraveśayati Divy 238] to make enter, to give over, to supply SnA 256 (= °pavecchati).
Anupasankamati1 [anu + pa + saŋkamati] to go along up to (c. acc.) PvA 179.
Anupasankamati2 [an + upasank°] not to go to. not to approach DhA II.30 (+ apayirupāsati).
Anupasaṇṭhapanā (f.) [an + upasaṇṭhapanā] not stopping, incessance, continuance Pug 18 (but id. p. at Vbh 357 has anusansandanā instead); cp. anupabandhanā.
Anupassaka (adj.) [fr. anupassati] observing, viewing, contemplating Th 1, 420. Anupassati [anu + passati] to look at, contemplate, observe Sn 477; Ps I.57, 187; Sn A 505.
Anupassanā (f.) [abstr. of anupassati, cf. Sk. anudarśana] looking at, viewing, contemplating, consideration, realisation S V.178 sq., Sn p. 140; Ps I.10, 20, 96; II.37, 41 sq., 67 sq.; Vbh 194. See anicca°, anatta°, dukkha°.
Anupassin (--°) (adj.) [fr. anupassati] viewing, observing, realising S II.84 sq., V.294 sq., 311 sq., 345, Dh 7, 253; Sn 255, 728; Ps I.191 sq.; Vbh 193 sq., 236; Sdhp 411.
Anupahata1 [anu + pa + hata, pp. of anu + pa + han] thrown up, blown up Miln 274.
Anupahata2 (adj.) [an + upahata] not destroyed, not spoilt DhA II.33 (°jivhapasāda).
Anupāta [of anupatati] attack in speech, contest, reproach A I.161 (vāda°).
Anupātin (adj.) [fr. anupāta] 1. following, indulging in J III.523 (khaṇa°). -- 2. attacking, hurting J V.399. Anupādaŋ (adv.) [anu + pāda] at the foot Vism 182 (opp. anusīsaŋ at the head).
Anupādā [ger. of an + upādiyati = anupādāya] anupādāniya, anupādāya, anupādiyāna, anupādiyiṭvā see upādiyati.

Anupādāna & Anupādi see upādāna & upādi.
Anupāpita [pp. of anupāpeti] having been lead to or made to reach, attained, found Miln 252.
Anupāpuṇāti (anuppā°) [anu + pāpuṇāti] to reach, attain, get to, find S I.105; ger. anuppatvāna Pv II.924 (= °pāpuṇitvā PvA 123). -- pp. anupatta (q. v.). -- Caus. anupāpeti (q. v.).
Anupāpeti [Caus. of anupāpuṇāti] to make reach or attain, to lead to, to give or make find J VI.88; Cp. XI. 4 (aor. anupāpayi); Miln 276. -- pp. anupāpita (q. v.).
Anupāya [an + upāya] wrong means J I.256; Sdhp 405.
Anupāyāsa see upāyāsa.
Anupālaka (adj.) [anu + pālaka] guarding, preserving Sdhp 474.
Anupālana (nt.) [fr. anupāleti] maintenance, guarding, keeping Dpvs III.2. Anupāleti [anu + pāleti] to safeguard, warrant, maintain Miln 160 (santatiŋ). Anupāhana (adj.) [an + upāhana] without shoes J VI.552.
Anupiya (anuppiya) (adj) [anu + piya] flattering, plessant, nt. pleasantness, flattery, in °bhāṇin one who flatters I) III.185; J II.390; V.360; and °bhāṇitar id. Vbh 352.
Anupīḷaŋ at PvA 161 is to be read anuppīḷan at PvA 161 is to be read anuppīḷan (q. v.). Anupucchati [anu + pucchati] to ask or inquire after (c. acc.) Sn 432, 1113. -- pp. anupuṭṭha (q. v.). Anupuṭṭha [pp. of anupucchati] asked Sn 782 (= pucchita SnA 521).
Anupubba (adj.) [anu + pubba] following in one's turn, successive, gradual, by and by, regular Vin II.237
(mahāsamuddo a°--ninno etc.); D I.184; Sn 511; J V.155 (regularly formed, of ūrū). Cases adverbially: anupubbena (instr.) by and by, in course of time, later, gradually Vin I.83; Dh 239 (= anupaṭipāṭiyā DhA III.340); Pug 41, 64; J II.2, 105; III.127; Miln 22; PvA 19. anupubbaso (abl. cp. Sk. anupūrvaśaḥ) in regular order Sn 1000. <-> In compn. both anupubba° & anupubbi°
(q. v.).
--kāraṇa gradual performance, graded practice M I.446. --nirodha successive passing away, fading away in regular
succession, i. e. in due course. The nine stages of this process are the same as those mentioned under °vihāra, & are enumd. as
such at D III.266, 290; A IV.409, 456; Ps I.35. --vihāra a state of gradually ascending stages, by means of which the highest aim of meditation & trance is attained, viz. complete cessation of all consciousness. These are 9 stages, consisting of the 4 jhānas, the 4 āyatanāni & as the crowning phrase "saññā--vedayitanirodha" (see jhāna1). Enumd. as such in var. places, esp. at the foll.: D II.156; III.265, 290; A IV.410; Nd2 under jhāna; Ps I.5; Miln 176. --sikkhā regular instruction or study (dhammavinaye) M I.479; III.1 (+ °kiriyā °paṭipadā).
Anupubbaka (adj.) = anupubba, in cpd. pubbânupubbaka all in succession or in turn, one by one (on nature of this kind of cpd. see anu B IV.) Vin I.20 (°ānaŋ kulānaŋ puttā the sons of each clan, one by one).
Anupubbata (nt.) [fr. anupubba] acting in turn, gradation, succession Vv 6414 (= anukūla kiriyā i. e. as it pleases VvA 280) cp. ānupubbatā.

Anupubbi--kathā (f.) [anupubba + kathā, formation like dhammi--kathā] a gradual instruction, graduated sermon,
regulated exposition of the ever higher values of four subjects (dāna--kathā, sīla°, sagga°, magga°) i. e. charity, righteousness, the heavens, and the Path. Bdhgh. explains the term as anupubbikathā nāma dānânantaraŋ sīlaŋ sīlânantaro saggo saggânantaro maggo ti etesaŋ dīpana--kathā" (DA I.277). Vin I.15, 18; II.156, 192; D I.110; II.41; M I.379; J I.8; VvA 66, 197, 208; DA I.308; DhA I.6; Miln 228. -- The spelling is frequently ānupubbikathā (as to lengthening of anu see anu Note (a)), e. g. at D I.110; II.41; M I.379; J I.8; Miln 228.
Anupekkhati [anu + pekkhati] 1. to concentrate oneself on, to look carefully A III.23. -- 2. to consider, to show consideration for, Nd2 50 (ppr. °amāna = anukampamāna). -- Caus. anupekkheti to cause some one to consider carefully Vin II.73.
Anupekkhanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anupekkhana, see anupekkhatī] concentration (of thought) Dhs 8, 85, 284, 372. Anupeti [anu + pa + i] to go into D I.55 (+ anupagacchati) S III.207; DA I.165.
Anupeseti [anu + pa + iṣ] to send forth after Miln 36.
Anuposathikaŋ see anvad̤d̤hamāsaŋ.
Anuposiya (adj.) [grd. of anu + puṣ] to be nourished or fostered Sdhp 318. Anuppa° in all combns. of anu + ppa see under headings anupa°. Anuppadajjuŋ (S III.131) see anupadeti.
Anuppanna (°uppāda, °uppādeti) see uppanna etc.
Anuppīḷa (adj.) [an + uppīḷa] not molested, not oppressed (by robbers etc.) not ruined, free from harm J III.443; V.378; VvA 351; PvA 161.
Anupharaṇa (nt.) [anu + pharaṇa] flashing through, pervading Miln 148.
Anuphusīyati [anu + phusīyati, cp. Sk. pruṣāyati, Caus. of pruṣ] to sprinkle, moisten, make wet J V.242 (himaŋ; C.
Anubajjhati at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati at PvA 56 is faulty reading for anubandhati (q. v.). Anubaddha [pp. of anubandhati] following, standing behind (piṭṭhito) D I.1, 226.
Anubandha [anu + bandh] bondage M III.170; It 91.
Anubandhati [anu + bandhati] to follow, run after, pursue J I.195; II.230; VI.452 (= anujavati); PvA 56 (substitute for anubajjhanti!), 103, 155. aor. °bandhi J II.154, 353; III.504; PvA 260 (= anvāgacchi). ger. °bandhitvā J I.254. grd.
°bandhitabba M I.106. -- pp. anubaddha (q. v.).
Anubandhana (nt.) [fr. anubandhati] that which connects or follows, connection, consequence J VI.526 (°dukkha). Anubala (nt.) [anu + bala] rear--guard, retinue, suite, in °ŋ bhavati to accompany or follow somebody Miln 125.

Anubujjhati [anu + bujjhati, Med. of budh, cp. Sk. avabudhyate] to remember, recollect J III.387 (with avabujjhati in prec. verse).
Anubujjhana (nt.) [fr. anubujjhati] awakening, recognition Ps I.18 (bujjhana +).
Anubuddha [pp. of anu + bodhati] 1. awakened (act. & pass.), recognised, conceived, seen, known D II.123 (°ā ime dhammā); S I.137 (dhammo vimalenɔ ânubuddho) II.203; IV.188; A II.1; III.14; IV.105; SnA 431. In phrase buddhânubuddha (as to nature of cpd. see anu B IV.) either "fully awakened (enlightened)" or "wakened by the wake" (Mrs. Rh. D.) Th 1, 679 = 1246. -- 2. a lesser Buddha, inferior than the Buddha DA I.40. Cp. buddhânubuddha.
Anubodha [anu + budh] awakening; perception, recognition, understanding S I.126 (?) = A V.46 (anubodhiŋ as aor. of anubodhati?); Pug 21; Miln 233. Freq. in compn. ananubodha (adj.) not understanding, not knowing the truth S II.92; III.261; V.431; A II.1; IV.105; Dhs 390, 1061; VvA 321 (= anavabodha) and duranubodha (adj.) hard to understand, difficult to know D I.12, 22; S I.136.
Anubodhati [anu + budh] to wake up, to realise, perceive, understand; aor. anubodhiŋ A V.46 (?) = S I.126 (anubodhaŋ). -- Caus. °bodheti to awaken, fig. to make see to instruct J VI.139 (°ayamāna) -- pp. anubuddha (q. v.).
Anubodhana (nt.) [fr. anubodhati] awakening, understanding, recognition Ps I.18 (bodhana +).
Anubbajati [anu + vraj] to go along, wander, follow, tread (a path) J IV.399 (maggaŋ = pabbajati C.).
Anubbata (adj.) [Vedic anuvrata, anu + vata] subject to the will of another, obedient, faithful, devoted J III.521; VI.557. Anubbillāvitatta see ubbill°.
Anubyañjana see anuvyañjana.
Anubrūhita [pp. of anubrūheti] strengthened with (--°), full of Ps I.167.
Anubrūheti [brūheti] to do very much or often, to practice, frequent, to be fond of (c. acc.), foster S I.178 (anubrūhaye);
M III.187 (id., so read for manu°), Th 2, 163 (°ehi); Cp. III.12 (saŋvegaŋ anubrūhayiŋ aor.); J III.191 (suññāgāraŋ). Often in phrase vivekaŋ anubrūheti to devote oneself to detachment or solitude, e.g. J I.9 (inf. °brūhetuŋ); III.31 (°brūhessāmi), Dh 75 (°brūhaye = °brūheyya vad̤d̤heyya DhA II.103). -- pp. anubrūhita (q.v.) Cp. also brūhana.
Anubhaṇanā (f.) [anu + bhaṇana] talking to, admonition, scolding Vin II.88 (anuvadanā +).
Anubhavati & Anubhoti [anu + bhavati] to come to or by, to undergo, suffer (feel), get, undertake, partake in,
experience D I.129; II.12 (°bhonti); M II.204; A I.61 (atthaŋ °bhoti to have a good result); J VI.97 (°bhoma); Pv I.1011 (°bhomi vipākaŋ); PvA 52 (°issati = vedissati); Sdhf 290. Esp. freq. with dukkhaŋ to suffer pain, e.g. PvA I.1110 (°bhonti); PvA 43,
68, 79 etc. (cp. anubhavana). -- ppr. med. °bhavamāna J I.50; aor. °bhavi PvA 75 (sampattiŋ); ger. °bhavitvā J IV.1; PvA 4 (sam<-> pattiŋ), 67 (dukkhaŋ), 73 (sampattiŋ); grd. °bhaviyāna (in order to receive) Pv II.85 (= anubhavitvā PvA 109).
<-> Pass. anubhūyati & °bhavīyati to be undergone or being experienced; ppr. °bhūyamāna PvA 8, 159 (mayā a. =
anubhūta), 214 (attanā by him) & °bhavīyamāna PvA 33 (dukkhaŋ). -- pp. anubhūta (q.v.).
Anubhavana (nt.) [fr. anubhavati] experiencing, suffering; sensation or physical sensibility (cf. Cpd. 229, 2321) Nett 28 (iṭṭhâniṭṭh--ânubhavana--lakkhanā vedanā "feeling is characterised by the experiencing of what is pleasant and unpleasant"); Miln 60 (vedayita--lakkhaṇā vedanā anubhavana--lakkhaṇā ca); PvA 152 (kamma--vipāka°). Esp. in combn. with dukkha° suffering painful sensations, e.g. at J IV.3; Miln 181; DhA IV.75; PvA 52.

Anubhāga [anu + bhāga] a secondary or inferior part, (after--)share, what is left over Vin II.167. Anubhāyati [anu + bhāyati] to be afraid of J VI.302 (kissa nvɔ ânubhāyissaŋ, so read for kissânu°).
Anubhāva [fr. anubhavati] orig. meaning "experience, concomitance" and found only in cpds. as --°, in meaning "experiencing the sensation of or belonging to, experience of, accordance with", e.g. maha° sensation of greatness, rājâ° s. belonging to a king, what is in accordance with kingship, i. e. majesty. Through preponderance of expressions of distinction there arises the meaning of anubhāva as "power, majesty, greatness, splendour etc." & as such it was separated from the 1st component and taken as ānubhāva with ā instead of a, since the compositional character had obliterated the character of the a. As such (ānubhāva abs.) found only in later language. -- (1) anubhāva (--°): mahānubhāva (of) great majesty, eminence, power S I.146 sq.; II.274; IV.323; Sn p. 93; Pv II.112; PvA 76. deva° of divine power or majesty D II.12; devatā° id. J I.168; dibba° id. PvA 71, 110. rājā° kingly splendour, pomp D I.49; J IV 247; PvA 279 etc. --anubhāvena (instr. --°) in accordance with, by means of J II.200 (angavijjā°); PvA 53 (iddh°), 77 (kamma°), 148 (id.), 162 (rāja°), 184 (dāna°), 186 (puñña°). yathânubhāvaŋ (adv.) in accordance with (me), as much as (1 can); after ability, according to power S I.31; Vv 15 (= yathābalaŋ VvA 25). -- (2) ānubhāva majesty power, magnificence, glory, splendour J V.10, 456; Pv II.811; VvA 14; PvA 43, 122, 272. See also ānu°.
Anubhāvatā (f.) [= anubhāva + tā] majesty, power S I.156 (mahâ°).
Anubhāsati [anu + bhāsati] to speak after, to repeat D I.104; Miln 345; DA I.273.
Anubhūta [pp. of anubhavati] (having or being) experienced, suffered, enjoyed PvA II.1218. nt. suffering, experience J I.254; Miln 78, 80.
Anubhūyamānatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. ppr. Pass. of anubhavati] the fact of having to undergo, experiencing PvA 103.
Anuma (--dassika) see anoma°.
Anumagge at J V.201 should be read anu magge along the road, by the way; anu here used as prep. c. loc. (see anu A b).
Anumajjati [anu + majjati] 1. to strike along, to stroke, to touch DA I.276 (= anumasati). -- 2. to beat, thresh, fig. to thresh ont J VI.548; Miln 90. -- Pass. anumajjīyati Miln 275 (cp. p. 428).
Anumajjana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anumajjati] threshing out, pounding up (Dhs. trsl. 11), always used with ref. to the term vicāra (q.v.) Miln 62; DhsA 114; DA I.63, 122.
Anumajjha (adj.) [anu + majjha] mediocre, without going to extremes J IV.192; V.387. Anumaññati [anu + maññati] to assent, approve, give leave Th 1, 72. -- pp. anumata (q.v.).
Anumata [pp. of anumaññati] approved of, given consent to, finding approval, given leave D I.99 (= anuññāta DA I.267); J V.399 (= muta); Miln 185, 212, 231, 275; PvA 64 (= annuññāta).
Anumati (f.) [from anumaññati] consent, permission, agreement, assent, approval Vin II.294, 301, 306; D. I.137, 143; Dpvs IV.47, Cf. V.18; DA I.297; VvA 17, PvA 114.
Anumatta see aṇu°.
Anumasati [anu + masati] to touch D I.106 (= anumajjati DA I.276).

Anumāna [fr. anu + man] inference Miln 330 (naya +), 372, 413; Sdhp 74. Anumitta [anu + mitta] a secondary friend, a follower. acquaintance J V.77.
Anumināti [cf. Sk. anumāti, anu + mināti from mi, Sk. minoti, with confusion of roots mā & mi] to observe, draw an inference M I.97; PvA 227 (°anto + nayaŋ nento). See also anumīyati.
Anumīyati [Sk. anumīyate, Pass. of anu + mā, measure, in sense of Med.] to observe, conclude or infer from S III.36. Cp. anumināti.
Anumodaka (adj.) [fr. anumodati] one who enjoys, one who is glad of or thankful for (c. acc.) Vin V.172; PvA 122; Sdhf 512.
Anumodati [anu + modati] to find satisfaction in (acc.), to rejoice in, be thankful for (c. acc.), appreciate, benefit from,
to be pleased, to enjoy Vin II.212 (bhattagge a. to say grace after a meal); S II.54; A III.50 (°modanīya); IV.411; Dh 177 (ppr. °modamāna); It 78; Pv II.919 (dānaŋ °modamāna = enjoying, gladly receiving); 1,54 (anumodare = are pleased; pitisomanassajātā honti PvA 27); J II.112; PvA 19, 46, 81, 201) imper. modāhi); Sdhp. 501 sq. -- pp. anumodita (q.v.).
Anumodana (nt.) [fr. anumodati] "according to taste", i.e. satisfaction, thanks, esp. after a meal or after receiving gifts
= to say grace or benediction, blessing, thanksgiving. In latter sense with dadāti (give thanks for = loc.), karoti (= Lat. gratias agere) or vacati (say or tell thanks): °ŋ datvā PvA 89; °ŋ katvā J I.91; DhA III.170, 172; VvA 118; PvA 17, 47; °ŋ vatvā
VvA 40 (pānīyadāne for the gift of water), 295, 306 etc. °ŋ karoti also "to do a favour" PvA 275. Cp. further DhA I.198
(°gāthā verses expressing thanks, benediction); II.97 (Satthāraŋ °ŋ yāciŋsu asked his blessing); PvA 23 (°atthaŋ in order to thank), 26 (id.), 121, 141 (katabhatta°), 142; Sdhp 213, 218, 516.
Anumodita [pp. of anumodati] enjoyed, rejoiced in PvA 77.
Anummatta (adj.) [an + ummatta] not out of mind, sane, of sound mind Miln 122; Sdhp 205.
Anuyanta at A V.22 is doubtful reading (v.l. anuyutta). The meaning is either "inferior to, dependent on, a subject of, a vassal" or "attending on". The explanation may compare Sk. anuyātaŋ attendance [anu + yā, cp. anuyāyin] or Sk. yantṛ ruler [yam], in which latter case anu--yantṛ would be "an inferior ruler" and P. yanta would represent the n. a.g. yantā as a--stem. The v. l. is perhaps preferable as long as other passages with anuyanta are not found (see anuyutta 2).
Anuyāgin (adj) [fr. anu + yaj] offering after the example of another D I.142.
Anuyāta [pp. of anuyāti] gone through or after, followed, pursued S II.105 (magga); A V.236; It 29; Miln 217.
[anu + yā] 1. to go after, to follow J VI.49 (fut. °yissati), 499 (yāyantaŋ anuyāyati = anugacchati C). -- 2. to go along by, to go over, to visit Miln 391 (°yāyati). -- pp. anuyāta (q. v.). See also anusaŋyāyati.
Anuyāyin (adj.) [cp. Sk. anuyāyin, anu + yā] going after, following, subject to (gen.) Sn 1017 (anânuyāyin); J VI.309; Miln 284.
Anuyuñjanā (f.) (& °yuñjana nt.) [abstr. fr. anuyuñjati] application or devotion to (--°) Miln 178; VvA 346 (anuyujjanaŋ wrong spelling?)
Anuyuñjati [anu + yuñjati] 1. to practice, give oneself up to (acc.), attend, pursue S I.25, 122 (°yuñjan "in loving self--devotion" Mrs. Rh. D.); III.154; IV.104, 175; Dh 26 (pamādaŋ = pavatteti DhA I.257), 247 (surāmeraya--pānaŋ = sevati bahulīkaroti DhA III.356); PvA 61 (kammaṭṭhāQaŋ). -- 2. to ask a question, to call to account, take to task Vin II.79;

Vv 335; ppr. Pass. °yuñjiyamāna PvA 192. -- pp. anuyutta (q. v.). -- Caus. anuyojeti "to put to", to address, admonish, exhort DhA IV.20.
Anuyutta [pp. of anuyuñjati] 1. applying oneself to, dealing with, practising, given to, intent upon D I.166, 167; III. 232 =
A II.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); S III.153; IV.104; Sn 663 (lobhaguṇe), 814 (methunaŋ = samāyutta SnA 536), 972 (jhān°); Pug 55; PvA 163 (jāgariya°), 206. -- 2. following, attending on; an attendant, inferior, vassal, in expression khattiya or rājā anuyutta a prince royal or a smaller king (see khattiya 3 b) A V.22 (v l. for T. anuyanta, q. v.); Sn 553 (= anugāmin, sevaka SnA 453).
Anuyoga [Sk. anuyoga, fr. anu + yuj] 1. application, devotion to (--°), execution, practice of (--°); often combd. with
anuyutta in phrase °anuyogaŋ anuyutta = practising, e. g. Vin I.190 (maṇd̤anɔ ânuyogaŋ anuyutta); D III.113 (attakilamath
ɔ ânuyogaŋ a.); A II.205 (attaparitāpanɔ ânuyogaŋ a.). -- As adj. (--°) doing, given to, practising (cp. anuyutta). D I.5; III.107; M I.385; S I.182; III.239; IV.330; V.320; A I.14; III.249; IV.460 sq.; V. 17 sq., 205; J I.90 (padhānɔ ânuyogakiccaŋ); Vv 8438 (dhamma°); Miln 348; DA I. 78, 104. -- 2. invitation, appeal, question (cp. anuyuñjati 2) Miln 10 (ācariyassa °ŋ datvā).
Anuyogavant (adj.) [anuyoga + vant] applying oneself to, full of application or zeal, devoted PvA 207.
Anuyogin (adj.) [fr. anuyoga] applying oneself to, devoted to (--°) Dh 209 (atta° given to oneself, self--concentrated).
Anurakkhaka (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati, cp. °rakkhin] preserving, keeping up J IV.192 (vaŋsa°); VI.1 (id.).
Anurakkhaṇa (nt.) & °ā (f.) [abstr. fr. anurakkhati] guarding, protection, preservation D III.225 sq.; A II.16 sq.; J I.133; Pug 12; Dpvs IV.24 (adj.); VvA 32 (citta°); Sdhp 449.
Anurakkhati [anu + rakkhati] to guard, watch over (acc.), preserve, protect, shield Sn 149; Dh 327; J I.46; Pug 12. -- ppr. med.° rakkhamāna(ka) as adj. Sdhp 621.
Anurakkhā (f.) [= anurakkhaṇā] guarding, protection, preservation S IV.323 (anuddayā a. anukampā).
Anurakkhin (adj.) [fr. anurakkhati] guarding, preserving, keeping J V.24.
Anurakkhiya (adj.) [f. anurakkhati] in dur° difficult to guard Vin III.149.
Anurañjita [pp. of anu + rañjeti, Caus. of rañj] illumined, brighterted, beautified Bu I.45 (byāmapabhā° by the shine of the halo); VvA 4 (sañjhātapa° for sañjhāpabhā°).
Anuratta (adj.) pp. of anu + rañj] attached or devoted to, fond of, faithful Th 2, 446 (bhattāraŋ); J I.297; Miln 146. Anuravati [anu + ravati] to resound, to sound after, linger (of sound) Miln 63.
Anuravanā (f.) [abstr. fr. anuravati] lingering of the sound, resounding Miln 63.
Anuraho (adv.) [anu + raho] in secret, face to face, private M I.27.
Anurujjhati [Sk. anurudhyate, Pass. of anu + rudh] to conform oneself to, have a regard for, approve, to be pleased A IV.158; Dhs A 362. -- pp. anuruddha (q. v.).
Anuruddha [pp. of anurujjhati] enggaged in, devoted to; compliant or complied with, pleased S IV.71, (anānuruddha). Anurūpa (adj.) [anu + rūpa] suitable, adequate, seeming, fit, worthy; adapted to, corresponding, conform with (--°) J

I.91; VI.366 (tad°); PvA 61 (ajjhāsaya° according to his wish), 128 (id.) 78, 122, 130, 155; etc. Cp. also paṭirūpa in same meaning.
Anurodati [anu + rodati] to cry after, cry for J III.166 = Pv I.127 (dārako candaŋ a.).
Anurodha [fr. anu + rudh] compliance, consideration satisfaction (opp. virodha) S I.111; IV.210; Sn 362; Dhs 1059;
Vbh 145; DhsA 362.
Anulapanā (f.) [anu + lapanā, lap] scolding, blame, accusation Vin II.88 (spelt anullapanā; combd. with anuvadana &
Anulitta (adj.) [cp. Sk. anulipta, pp. of anulimpati] anointed, besmeared J I.266; PvA 211.
Anulimpati [anu + limpati] to anoint, besmear, Miln 394 (°limpitabba). Caus. °limpeti in same meaning Miln 169, and °lepeti Milm 169 (grd. °lepanīya to be treated with ointment). -- pp. anulitta (q. v.).
Anulimpana (nt.) [fr. anulimpati] anointing Miln 353, 394.
Anulepa [fr. anu + lip] anointing Miln 152.
Anulokin (adj.) [fr. anu + loketi, cp. Sk. & P. avalokin & anuviloketi] looking (up) at, seeing (--°) M I.147 (sīsa°).
Anuloma (adj.) [Sk. anu + loma] "with the hair or grain", i. e. in natural order, suitable, fit, adapted to, adaptable, straight forward D II.273 (anānuloma, q. v.) S IV.401; Ps II.67, 70; DhA II.208. -- nt. direct order, state of fitting in, adaptation Miln 148.
--ñāṇa insight of adaptation (cp. Cpd. 66, 68) DhA II.208. --paṭiloma in regular order & reversed, forward & backward (Ep. of paṭiccasamuppāda, also in BSk.) Vin I.1; A IV.448.
Anulomika (& °ya) (adj.) [fr. anuloma] suitable, fit, agreeable; in proper order, adapted to (--°) Vin II.7 (an°); III.120
(an° = ananucchaviya); IV.239; A I.106; III.116 sq.; It 103 (sāmaññassa°); Sn 385 (pabbajita°); KhA 243 (ananulomiya); DhsA 25; Sdhp 65.
Anulometi [v. denom. fr. anuloma] to conform to, to be in accordance with Miln 372. Anuḷāratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. an + uḷāra] smallness, littleness, insignificance VvA 24.
Anuvajja (adj.) [grd. of anu + vadati, cp. anuvāda & Sk. avavadya] to be blamed, censurable, worthy of reproach Sn p. 78 (an° = anuvādavimutta SnA 396).
Anuvattaka (adj.) [fr. anuvatteti] 1. = anupavattaka (q. v.) Th 1, 1014 (cakka°). -- 2. following, siding with (--°) Vin IV.218 (ukkhittânuvattikā f.).
Anuvattati [Sk. anuvartati, anu + vattati] 1. to follow, imitate, follow one's example (c. acc.), to be obedient D II.244; Vin II.309 (Bdhgh.); IV.218; J I.125, 300; DA I.288; PvA 19. -- 2. to practice, execute Pv IV. 712. -- Caus. °vatteti (q. v.).
Anuvattana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anuvattati] complying with, conformity with (--°), compliance, observance, obedience J I.367 (dhamma°); V.78.
Anuvattin (adj.) [fr. anuvattati] following, acting according to or in conformity with (--°), obedient J II.348 (f. °inī); III.319 (id.); Dh 86 (dhamma°); Vv 155 (vasa° = anukūlabhāvena vattana sīla VvA 71); DhA II.161.

Anuvatteti [anu + vatteti] = anupavatteti (q. v.) Th 1, 826 (dhammacakkaŋ: "after his example turn the wheel" Mrs. Rh. D.).
Anuvadati [Sk. ava°; anu + vadati] to blame, censure, reproach Vin II.80, 88. -- grd. anuvajja (q. v.). Anuvadanā (f.) [fr. anuvadati] blaming, blame, censure Vin II.88 (anuvāda +).
Anuvasati [anu + vasati] to live with somebody, to dwell, inhabit J II.421. Caus. °vāseti to pass, spend (time) J VI.296. -- pp. °vuttha (q. v.).
Anuvassaŋ (adv.) [anu + vassa] for one rainy season; every rainy season or year, i. e. annually C. on Th 1, 24. Anuvassika (adj.) [fr. anuvassaŋ] one who has (just) passed one rainy season Th 1, 24 ("scarce have the rains gone by"
Mrs. Rh. D.; see trsl. p. 29 n. 2).
Anuvāceti [anu + Caus. of vac] to say after, to repeat (words), to recite or make recite after or again D I.104 (= tehi
aññesaŋ vācitaŋ anuvācenti DA I.273); Miln 345. Cp. anubhāseti. Anuvāta1
Anuvāta1 [anu + vā to blow] a forward wind, the wind that blows from behind, a favourable wind; °ŋ adv. with the wind, in
the direction of the wind (opp. paṭivātaŋ). A I.226 (°paṭivātaŋ); Sdhp 425 (paṭivāta°). In anuvāte (anu + vāte) at J II.382
"with the wind, facing the w., in front of the wind" anu is to be taken as prep. c. loc. & to be separated from vāte (see anu A b.).
Anuvāta2 [anu + vā to weave (?) in analogy to vāta from vā to blow] only in connection with the making of the bhikkhus'garments (cīvara) "weaving on, supplementary weaving, or along the seam", i. e. hem, seam, binding Vin I.254, 297; II.177; IV.121 (aggala +); PvA 73 (anuvāte appabhonte since the binding was insufficient).
Anuvāda [fr. anuvadatī, cp. Sk. anuvāda in meaning of "repetition"] 1. blaming, censure, admonition Vin II.5, 32; A II.121 (atta°, para°); Vbh 376. -- 2. in combn. vādânuvāda: talk and lesser or additional talk, i. e. "small talk" (see anu B IV.) D I.161; M I.368.
--adhikaraṇa a question or case of censure Vin II.88 sq.; III.164 (one of the 4 adhikaraṇāni, q. v.). Anuvāsana (nt.) [fr. anuvāseti] an oily enema, an injection Miln 353.
Anuvāseti [anu + vāseti, Caus. of vāsa3 odour, perfume] to treat with fragrant oil, i. e. to make an injection or give an enema of salubrious oil Miln 169; grd. °vāsanīya ibid.; pp. °vāsita Miln 214.
Anuvikkhitta (adj.) [anu + vi + khitta, pp. of anu + vikkhipati] dispersed over S V.277 sq. (+ anuvisaṭa). Anuvigaṇeti [anu + vi + gaṇeti] to take care of, regard, heed, consider Th 1, 109.
Anuvicarati [anu + vi + carati] to wander about, stroll roam through, explore D I.235; J II.128; III.188; PvA 189 (= anupariyāti). -- Caus. °vicāreti to think over (lit. to make one's mind wander over), to meditate, ponder (cp. anuvicinteti); always combd. with anuvitakketi (q. v.) A I.264 (cetasā), III.178 (dhammaŋ cetasā a.). -- pp. anuvicarita (q. v.).
Anuvicarita [pp. of anuvicāreti] reflected, pondered over, thought out S III.203 (manasā); DA I.106 (= anucarita).

Anuvicāra [anu + vicāra, cf. anuvicāreti] meditation, reflexion, thought Dhs 85 (= vicāra). Anuvicinaka [fr. anu + vicināti] one who examines, an examiner Miln 365.
Anuvicinteti [anu + vi + cinteti] to think or ponder over, to meditate D II.203; S I 203 (yoniso °cintaya, imper.
"marshall thy thoughts in ordered governance" Mrs. Rh. D.; v. l. anucintaya); Th 1, 747; Dh 364; It 82 (dhammaŋ °ayaŋ); J III.396; IV.227; V.223 (dhammaŋ °cintayanto).
Anuvicca [ger. of anuvijjati, for the regular from anuvijja prob. through influence of anu + i (anu--v--icca for anvicca),
cf. anveti & adhicca; & see anuvijjati] having known or found out, knowing well or thoroughly, testing, finding out M I.301, 361 (v. l. °vijja); A II.3, 84; V.88; Dh 229 (= jānitvā DhA III.329); Sn 530 (= anuviditvā SnA 431); J I.459 (= jānitvā C.); III.426; Pug. 49.
--kāra a thorough investigation, examination, test Vin I.236 (here spelt anuvijja) = M I.379 (= °viditvā C.) = A IV.185.
Anuvijjaka [fr. anuvijja, ger. of anuvijjati] one who finds out, an examiner Vin V.161.
Anuvijjati [anu + vid, with fusion of Vedic vetti to know, and Pass. of vindati to find (= vidyate)] to know thoroughly, to find out, to trace, to come to know; inf. °vijjitiŋ J III.506; ger. °viditvā Sn A 431, also °vijja & vicca (see both under anuvicca); grd. ananuvejja not to be known, unfathomable, unknowable M I.140 (Tathāgato ananuvejjo). -- Caus. anuvijjāpeti to make some one find out J V.162. -- pp. anuvidita (q. v.).
Anuvijjhati [anu + vyadh] 1. to pierce or be pierced, to be struck or hurt with (instr.) J VI.439 -- 2. to be affected with, to fall into, to incur DhA III.380 (aparādhaŋ). -- pp. anuviddha (q. v.).
Anuvitakketi [anu + vi + takketi] to reflect, think, ponder over, usually combd with anuvicāreti D I.119; III.242; S V.67 = It 107 (anussarati +); A III.383.
Anuvidita [pp. of anuvijjati] found out, recognised; one who has found out or knows well Sn 528, 530 (= anubuddha Sn A 431). Same in B.Sk., e.g. M Vastu III.398.
Anuviddha (adj.) [pp. of anuvijjhati] pierced, intertwined or set with (--°) VvA 278.
Anuvidhīyati [cf. Sk. anuvidhīyate & adj. anuvidhāyin; Pass. of anu + vi + dhā, cf. vidahati] to act in conformity with,
to follow (instruction) M II.105 = Th 1, 875; S IV.199; J II.98; III.357.
Anuvidhīyanā (f.) [abstr. fr. anuvidhīyati] acting according to, conformity with M I.43.
Anuviloketi [anu + vi + loketi; B.Sk. anuvilokayati] to look round at, look over, survey, muster M I.339; Sn p. 140; J I.53; Miln 7 (lakaŋ), 21 (parisaŋ), 230.
Anuvivaṭṭa [anu + vivaṭṭa] an "after--evolution", devolution; as part of a bhikkhuɔs dress: a sub--vivaṭṭa (q. v.) Vin I.287 (vivaṭṭa +).
Anuvisaṭa (anu + visaṭa, pp. of anu + vi + sṛ] spread over S V.277 sq.; J IV.102.
Anuvuttha [pp. of anuvasati, cf. Sk. anūṣita] living with, staying, dwelling J II.42 (cira°); V.445 (id.). Anuvejja (adj.) in an° see anuvijjati.

Anuvyañjana & anubyañjana (e. g. Vin IV.15; J I.12) (nt.) [anu + vyañjana] accompanying (i. e. secondary)
attribute, minor or inferior characteristic, supplementary or additional sign or mark (cf. mahāpurisa--lakkhaṇa) Vin I.65 (abl. anuvyañjanaso "in detail"); M III.126; S IV.168; A IV.279 (abl.); V.73 sq.; Pug 24, 58; Miln 339; VvA 315; DhsA 400.
--gāhin taking up or occupying oneself with details, taken up with lesser or inferior marks D I.70 (cf. MVastu III.52); III.225; S IV.104; A I.113; II.16, 152 sq.; Dhs 1345 (cf. Dhs trsl. 351).
Anusaŋyāyati [anu + saŋ + yāyati] to traverse; to go up to, surround, visit (acc.) M I.209 (Bhagavantaŋ °itvā), J IV.214 (v.l. anuyāyitvā). See also anuyāti and anusaññāti.
Anusaŋvacchara (adj.) [anu + saŋv°] yearly DhA I.388 (nakkhattaŋ). Usually nt. °ŋ as adv. yearly, every year J I.68; V.99. On use of anu in this combn. see anu A a.
Anusañcarati [anu + saŋ + carati] to walk along, to go round about, to visit M I.279; S V.53, 301; J I.202; III.502; PvA 279 (nagaraŋ). -- pp. anusañcarita (q. v.).
Anusañcarita [pp. of anusañcarati] frequented, visited, resorted to Miln 387.
Anusañceteti [anu + saŋ + ceteti] to set ones mind on, concentrate, think over, meditate Pug 12.
Anusaññāti [either anu + saŋ + jñā (jānāti) or (preferably) = anusaŋyāti as short form of anusaŋyāyati, like anuyāti > anuyāyati of anu + saŋ + yā, cf. Sk. anusaŋyāti in same meaning] to go to, to visit, inspect, control; ppr. med. °saññāyamāna Vin III.43 (kammante); inf. °saññātuŋ A I.68. (janapade).
Anusaṭa [Sk. anusṛta, pp. of anu + sṛ] sprinkled with (--°), bestrewn, scattered Vv 53 (paduma° magga = vippakiṇṇa VvA 36).
Anusatthar [n. ag. to anu + sās, cf. Sk. anuśāsitṛ & P. satthar] instructor, adviser J IV.178 (ācariya +). Cp. anusāsaka. Anusatthi (f.) [Sk. anuśāsti, anu + śās, cp. anusāsana] admonition, rule, instruction J I.241; Miln 98, 172, 186
(dhamma°), 225, 227, 347.
Anusandati [Vedic anusyandati, anu + syad] to stream along after, to follow, to be connected with. Thus to be read at
Miln 63 for anusandahati (anuravati +; of sound), while at A IV.47 the reading is to be corrected to anusandahati. Anusandahati [anu + saŋ + dhā, cf. Vedic abhi + saŋ + dhā] to direct upon, to apply to A IV.47 sq. (cittaŋ
samāpattiyā; so to be read with v. l. for anusandati); Miln 63 (but here prob. to be read as anusandati, q.v.). Anusandhanatā (f.) [= anusandhi] application, adjusting Dhs 8 (cittassa).
Anusandhi (f.) [fr. anu + saŋ + dhā] connection, (logical) conclusion, application DA I.122 (where 3 kinds are enumd., viz. pucchā°, ajjhāsayā°, yathā°); Nett 14 (pucchato; Hard., in Index "complete cessation"?!). Esp. freq. in (Jātaka) phrase anusandhiŋ ghaṭeti "to form the connection", to draw the conclusion, to show the application of the story or point out its maxim J I.106; 308; DhA II.40, 47; etc.
Anusampavankatā (f.) [anu + saŋ + pavankatā; is reading correct?] disputing, quarrelling(?) Vin II.88 (under anuvādâdhikaraṇa).
Anusaya [anu + śī, seti Sk. anuśaya has a diff. meaning] (see Kvu trsl. 234 n. 2 and Cpd. 172 n. 2). Bent, bias, proclivity,
the persistance of a dormant or latent disposition, predisposition, tendency. Always in bad sense. In the oldest texts the word usually occurs absolutely, without mention of the cause or direction of the bias. So Sn. 14 = 369, 545; M. III.31; S. III.130,

IV.33, V.28 236; A. I.44; II.157; III.74, 246, 443. Or in the triplet obstinacy, prejudice and bias (adhiṭṭhānâbhinivesânusayā) S. II.17; III.10, 135, 161; A. V.III. Occasionally a source of the bias is mentioned. Thus pride at S. I.188; II.252 ff., 275; III.80, 103, 169, 253; IV.41, 197; A I.132, IV.70 doubt at M. I.486 -- ignorance lust and hatred at S IV.205, M III.285. At D III.254, 282; S V.60; and A IV.9. we have a list of seven anusaya's, the above five and delusion and craving for rebirth. Hence--forward these lists govern the connotation of the word; but it would be wrong to put that connotation back into the earlier passages. Later references are Ps I.26, 70 ff., 123, 130, 195; II.36, 84, 94, 158; Pug 21; Vbh 340, 383, 356; Kvu 405 ff. Dpvs I.42.
Anusayita [pp. of anuseti, anu + śī] dormant, only in combn. dīgharatta° latent so long Th 1, 768; Sn 355, 649. Cp. anusaya & anusayin.
Anusayin (adj.) [fr. anusaya] D II.283 (me dīgharatta°), "for me, so long obsessed (with doubts)". The reading is uncertain.
Anusarati [anu + sṛ] to follow, conform oneself to S IV. 303 (phalaŋ anusarissati BB, but balaŋ anupadassati SS perhaps to be preferred). -- Caus. anusāreti to bring together with, to send up to or against Miln 36 (aññamaññaŋ a. anupeseti).
Anusavati at S II.54 (āsavā na a.; v. l. anusayanti) & IV. 188 (akusalā dhammā na a.; v. l. anusenti) should preferably be read anusayati: see anuseti 2.
Anusahagata (adj.) having a residuum, accompanied by a minimum of . . S III.130; Kvu 81, see aṇu°.
Anusāyika (adj.) [fr. anusaya] attached to one, i. e. inherent, chronic (of disease) M II.70 (ābādha, v. l. BB anussāyika);
DhA I.431 (roga).
Anusāra [fr. anu + sṛ] "going along with", following, conformity. Only in obl. eases (--°) anusārena (instr.) in
consequence of, in accordance with, according to J I.8; PvA 187 (tad), 227; and anusārato (abl.) id. Sdhp 91.
Anusārin (--°) (adj.) [fr. anu + sarati] following, striving after, acting in accordance with, living up to or after. Freq. in
formula dhammânusārin saddhânusārin living in conformity with the Norm & the Faith D III.254; M I.142, 479; S III.225; V.200 sq.; A I.74; IV.10; Pug 15. -- Cp. also S I.15 (bhavasota°); IV.128 (id.); J VI.444 (paṇd̤itassa° = veyyāvaccakara C.); Sdhp 528 (attha°).
Anusāreti see anusarati.
Anusāsaka [fr. anusāsati] adviser, instructor, counsellor J II.105; Miln 186, 217, 264. Cp. anusatthar.
Anusāsati [Vedic anuśāsati, anu + sās] 1. to advise, admonish, instruct in or give advice upon (c. acc.) to exhort to Vin
I.83; D I.135; II.154; Dh 77, 159 (aññaŋ); J VI.368; cp. I.103; Pv II.68; PvA 148. -- grd. anusāsiya Vin I.59; and °sāsitabba DhA III.99. -- Pass °sāsiyati Vin II.200; Miln 186. -- 2. to rule, govern (acc.) ādminister to (dat.) S I.236 = Sn 1002 (paṭhaviŋ dhammenam--anusāsati, of a Cakkavattin); J II.2; VI.517 (rajjassa = rajjaŋ C., i. e. take care of) DA I.246 (read °sāsantena); PvA 161 (rajjaŋ). -- pp. anusiṭṭha (q. v.); cp. anusatthar, anusatthi & ovadati.
Anusāsana (nt.) [Vedic anuśāsana, fr. anu + śās] advice, instruction, admonition D III.107; A I.292 (°pāṭihāriya, cp. anusāsanī); Miln 359.
Anusāsanī (f.) [fr. anusāsati, cp. anusāsana] instruction, teaching, commandment, order S V.108; A II.147; III.87; V.24 sq., 49, 338; J V.113; Th 2, 172, 180; Pv III.76; ThA 162; VvA 19, 80, 81.
--pāṭihāriya (anusāsani°) the miracle of teaching, the wonder worked by the commandments (of the Buddha) Vin II.200; D I.212, 214; III.220; A I.170; V.327; J III.323; Ps II.227 sq.

Anusikkhati [Vedic anuśikṣati; anu + Desid. of śak] to learn of somebody (gen.); to follow one's example, to imitate
Vin II.201 (ppr. med. °amāna); S I.235; A IV. 282, 286, 323; Sn 294 (vattaŋ, cp. RV III.59, 2: vratena śikṣati), 934; J I.89; II.98; III.315; V.334; VI.62; Th 1, 963; Miln 61. -- Caus anusikkhāpeti to teach [= Sk. anuśikṣayati] Miln 352.
Anusikkhin (adj.) [fr. anusikhati] studying, learning M I. 100; Dh 226 (ahoratta° = divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA III.324).
Anusiṭṭha (Vedic anuśiṣṭa, pp. of anusāsati] instructed, admonished, advised; ordered, commanded M II.96; J I.226; Pv II.811; Miln 284, 349.
Anusibbati [anu + sibbati, siv to sew] to interweave Vin III.336 (introd. to Sam. Pās.).
Anusuṇāti [anu + śru] to hear; pret. anassuŋ [Sk. anvaśruvaŋ] I heard M I.333.
Anusumbhati [anu + sumbhati (sobhati); śubh or (Vedic) śumbh] to adorn, embellish, prepare J VI.76.
Anusuyyaŋ [cp. Sk. anasūyaŋ] reading at J III.27, see anasuyyaŋ.
Anusuyyaka (adj.) [an + usuyyaka] not envious, not jealous Sn 325 (= usuyyāvigamena a. SnA 332); J II.192 (v. l. anussuyyaka); V.112.
Anuseṭṭhi [anu + seṭṭhi] 1. an under--seṭṭhi (banker, merchant) J V.384 (see anu B III. a.). -- 2. in redupl. cpd. seṭṭhânuseṭṭhi (see anu B IV) "bankers & lesser bankers", i. e. all kinds of well--to--do families J VI.331.
Anuseti [anu + seti. cp. Sk. anuśayate or° śete, from śī] to "lie down with", i. e. (1) trs. to dwell on, harp on (an idea) S
II.65; III.36; IV.208. -- 2. (of the idea) to obsess, to fill the mind persistently, to lie dormant & be continually cropping up. M I.40, 108, 433; S II.54 (so read with SS for anusavanti) IV.188; A I.283; III.246; Pug 32, 48. -- pp. anusayita (q. v.).
Anusocati [anu + socati] to mourn for, to bewail Sn 851 (atītaŋ na a.; cp. Nd1 222); Pv I.127; II.68; PvA 95. Anusocana (nt.) [abstr. fr. anusocati] bewailing, mourning PvA 65.
Anusota° [anu + sota, in °ŋ as adv. or acc. to expln. under anu A a.] in anusotaŋ (adv.) along the stream or current, down--stream A II.12; J I.70 (opp. paṭisotaŋ against the stream); PvA 169 (Gangāya a. āgacchanto).
--gāmin "one who follows the stream", i. e. giving way to ones inclinations, following ones will A II.5, 6 (opp. paṭi°); Sn. 319 (= sotaŋ anugacchanto Sn A 330); Pug 62.
Anussati (f.) [Sk. anusmṛti, fr. anu + smṛ, cp. sati] remembrance, recollection, thinking of, mindfulness. A late list of subjects to be kept in mind comprises six anussati--ṭṭhānāni, viz. Buddha°, Dhamma°, Sangha°, sīla°, cāga°, devatā°, i.
e. proper attention to the Buddha, the Doctrines, the Church, to morality, charity, the gods. Thus at D III.250, 280 (cp. A I.211); A III.284, 312 sq., 452; V.329 sq.; Ps I.28. Expanded to 10 subjects (the above plus ānāpāna--sati, maraṇa--sati, kāyagatā--sati, upasamânussati) at A I.30, 42 (cp. Lal. Vist 34). For other references see D I.81; S V.67 = It 107 (anussaraṇa at latter pass.); A III.284, 325, 452. Ps I.48, 95, 186; Pug 25, 60; Dhs 14, 23, 1350 (anussati here to be corr. to asati, see Dhs. trsl. 351); Sdhp. 225, 231, 482. See also anuttariya (anussat--ânuttariya).
Anussada (adj.) [an + ussada without haughtiness Sn 624 (vv. ll. anusaddha & anussuda; Sn A 467 expln. by taṇhā ussadâbhāva) = Dh 400 (which pass. has anussuta; v.l. K.B. anussada; DhA IV.165 expls. with taṇhā--ussāvâbhāva, vv. ll. °ussada°); It 97 (vv. ll. anussata & anussara).
Anussaraṇa (nt.) [abstr. to anussarati] remembrance, memory, recollection It 107 (= anussati at id. p. S V.67); PvA 25,

Anussarati [Vedic anusmarati, anu + smṛ] to remember, recollect, have memory of (acc.), bear in mind; be aware of D
II.8, 53, 54 (jātito etc.); S III.86 sq. (pubbenivāsaŋ); V.67 (dhammaŋ a. anuvitakketi), 303 (kappasahassaŋ); A I.25, 164 (pubbenivāsaŋ), 207 (Tathāgataŋ, Dhammaŋ etc.); III.285 (id.), 323 (nivāsaŋ), 418; V.34, 38, 132, 199, 336 (kalyāṇamitte); It 82 (dhammaŋ), 98 (pubbenivāsaŋ); J I.167; II.111; Dh 364; Pv I.59; Pug 60; Sdhp 580, 587; DA I.257; KhA 213; DhA II.84; IV.95; PvA 29, 53, 69, 79, 107. -- pp. anussarita (see anussaritar). -- Caus anussarāpeti to remind someone, to call to mind J II.147.
Anussaritar [n. ag. to anussarita, pp. of anussarati] one who recollects or remembers S V.197, 225 (saritar +); A V.25, 28.
Anussava [anu + sava fr. śru, cp. Vedic śravas nt.] hearsay, report, tradition M I.520; II.211; S II.115; IV.138; A I.26; J
I.158 (with ref. to part. kira = annussav'atthe nipāto; so also at VvA 322, cf. anussavana); II.396, 430 (id.); IV.441; instr. °ena from hearsay, by report A II.191 (cf. itihītihaŋ).
Anussavana (nt.) [anu + savana fr. śru] = anussava PvA 103 (kira--saddo anussavane, from hearsay).
Anussavika (adj.) [fr. anussava] "belonging to hearsay", traditional; one who is familiar with tradition or who learns from
hearsay M I.520; II.211. Cp. anussutika.
Anussāvaka [fr. anussāveti] one who proclaims or announces, a speaker (of a kammavācā) Vin I.74. Anussāvana (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. anussāveti] a proclamation Vin I.317, 340; V.170, 186, 202 sq. Anussāvita [pp. of anussāveti] proclaimed, announced Vin I.103.
Anussāveti [anu + sāveti, Caus. of śru, cp. B.Sk. anuśrāvayati "to proclaim aloud the guilt of a criminal" AvŚ. I.102;
II.182] to cause to be heard or sound; to proclaim, utter, speak out Vin I.103 (°ssāviyamāna ppr. Pass.); II.48 (saddaŋ a.). -- pp. anussāvita.
Anussuka (adj.) [an + ussuka] free from greed Dh 199; cf. anussukin v. l. D III.47, also anissukin and apalāsin. Anussukita [an + ussuk°] VvA 74 & anussukin Pug 23 = anussuka.
Anussuta1 (adj.) [an + ussuta, ud + sṛ] free from lust Dh 400 (= ussāvâvena anussuta C.). See also anussada. Anussuta2
Anussuta2 [anu + suta, pp. of śru] heard of; only in cpd. ananussuta unheard of S II.9; Pug 14.
Anussutika (adj.) [fr. anu + śru, cp. anussavika] according to tradition or report, one who goes by or learns from
hearsay DA I.106, 107.
Anussuyyaka see anusuyyaka.
Anuhasati [anu + hasati] to laugh at, to ridicule DA I.256.

Anuhīrati [for °hariyati, anu + hṛ] to be held up over, ppr. anuhīramāna D II.15 (vv. ll. v. l. anubhiram°; glosses B. K. anudhāriyam°, cp. Trenckner, Notes 79).
Anūna (adj.) [Vedic anūna, an + ūna] not lacking, entire, complete, without deficiency J VI 273; Dpvs V.52; Miln 226; DA I.248 (+ paripūra, expld by anavaya).
Dpvs IV.34.
Anūnatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anūna] completeness Cp. III.611.
Anūpa (adj.) [Vedic anūpa, anu + ap: see āpa, orig. alongside of water] watery, moist; watery land, lowland J. IV.358 (anopa T; anupa C. p. 359), 381 (°khetta); Miln 129 (°khetta).
Anūpaghāta [metrically for anupa°] not killing, not murdering. Dh 185 (= anupahananañ cɔeva anupaghātanañ ca DhA III.238).
Anūpadhika for anu° in metre Sn 1057, see upadhi.
Anūpanāhin (adj.) [an + upanāhin, with ū metri causa] not bearing ill--will, not angry with J IV.463.
Anūpama at It 122 is metric reading for anupama at It 122 is metric reading for anupama (see upama).
Anūpalitta (adj.) [an + upalitta, with ū in metre] free from taint, unstained, unsmeared Sn 211, 392, 468, 790, 845; Dh 353; cf. Nd1 90 and DhA IV.72.
Anūpavāda [an + upavāda, with metrically lengthened u] not grumbling, not finding fault Dh 185 (= anupavādanañ cɔ eva anupavadāpanañ ca DhA III.238).
Anūhata (adj.) [pp. of an + ūhaññati, ud + han] not rooted out, not removed or destroyed Th 1, 223 = Nd2 974; Dh 338 (= asamucchinna DhA IV.48).
Aneka (adj.) (usually °--) [an + eka] not one, i. e. many, various; countlcss, numberless It 99 (saŋvaṭṭakappā countless aeons); Sn 688 (°sākhā); Dh 153 (°jātisāra); J IV.2; VI.366.
--pariyāyena (instr.) in many ways Vin I.16; Sn p. 15. --rūpa various, manifold Sn 1049, 1079, 1082; Nd2 54 (= anekavidha). --vidha manifold Nd2 54; DA I.103. --vihita various, manifold D I.12, 13, 178; It 98; Pug 55; DA I.103 (= anekavidha).
Anekaŋsā (f.) [an + ekaŋsā] doubt Nd2 1.
Anekaŋsikatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anekaŋsa + kata] uncertainty, doubtfulness Miln 93.
AneQa (adj.) [an + ejā] free from desires or lust D II.157; Sn 920, 1043, 1101, 1112; It 91 (opp. ejânuga Nd1 353 = Nd2 55; Dh 414 (= taṇhāya abhāvena DhA IV. 194), 422; Pv IV.135 (nittaṇha PvA 230).
Anedha (adj.) [an + edha] without fuel J IV.26 (=anindhana).
Aneḷa (adj.) [an + eḷa = ena, see neḷa & cp. BSk. ed̤a (mūka); Vedic anena] faultless, pure; only in foll. cpds.: °gala free
from the dripping or oozing of impurity (thus expld. at DA I.282, viz. elagalana--virahita), but more likely in lit. meaning "having a pure or clear throat" or, of vācā speech:
"clearly enunciated" (thus Mrs. Rh. D. at Kindred Sayings I.241) Vin I.197 = D I.114 = S I.189; A II.51, 97; III.114, 195. Cp.

also M Vastu III. 322. -- °mūga same as prec. "having a clear throat", i. e. not dumb, fig. clever, skilled D III.265; Sn 70 (= alālāmukha SnA 124), cp. Nd2 259.
Aneḷaka (adj.) [cp. BSk. aned̤aka, e. g. Av. Ś. I.187, 243; M Vastu I.339; III.322] = aneḷa, pure, clear M II.5; J VI.529. Anesanā (f.) [an + esanā] impropriety S II.194; J II.86; IV.381; Miln 343, 401; DA I.169; DhA IV.34; Sdhp 392, 427. Ano-- is a frequent form of compn. an--ava, see ava.
Anoka (nt.) [an + oka] houselessness, a houseless state, fig freedom from worldliness or attachment to life, singleness S V.24 = A V.232 = Dh 87 (okā anokaŋ āgamma). <-> adj. homeless, free from attachment S I.176; Dh 87 (= anālaya DhA II.162); Sn 966 (adj.; expld at Nd1 487 by abhisankhāra--sahagatassa viññāṇassa okāsaŋ na karoti, & at SnA 573 by abhisankhāra--viññānɔ ādīnaŋ anokāsabhūta).
sārin living in a houseless state, fig. being free from worldly attachment S III.10 = Nd1 197; Sn 628 (= anālaya--cārin SnA 468); Ud 32; Dh 404 (v. l. anokka°); DhA IV.174 (= anālaya--cārin); Miln 386.
Anogha in anogha--tiṇṇa see ogha.
Vv 354 (= VvA 161, where classed with yodhikā bandhujīvakā).
Anojagghati at D I.91 is v. l. for anujagghati.
Anojā (f.) [*Sk. anujā] a kind of shrub or tree with red flowers J VI.536 (korandaka +); usually in cpd. anojapuppha the a. flower, used for wreaths etc. J I.9 (°dāma, a garland of a flowers); VI.227 (id.); DhA II.116 (°cangoṭaka).
Anottappa (nt.) [an + ottappa] recklessness, hardness D III.212; It 34 (ahirika +); Pug 20; Dhs 365. Cp. anottāpin. Anottāpin & Anottappin (adj.) [fr. anottappa] not afraid of sin, bold, reckless, shameless D III.252, 282 (pp;
ahirika); Sn 133 (p; ahirika +); It 27, 115 (anatāpin anottappin, vv. ll. anottāpin); Pug 20, 24. Anodaka (adj.) [an + udaka] without water, dry J I.307; DhA I.52; Sdhp 443.
Anodissaka (adj.) [an + odissa + ka] unrestricted, without exception, general, universal; only in cpd. °vasena
universally, thoroughly (with ref. to mettā) J I.81; II 146; VvA 97 (in general; opp. odissaka--vasena). See also Mrs. Rh. D. Psalms of the Brethren p. 5 n. 1.
Anonamati [an + onamati] not to bend, to be inflexible, in foll. expressions: anonamaka (nt.) not stooping DhA II.136; auonamanto (ppr.) not bending D II.17 = III. 143; anonami--daṇd̤a (for anonamiya°) an inflexible stick Miln 238 (anoṇami° T, but anonami° vv. ll., see Miln 427).
Anopa see anūpa.
Anoma (adj.) (only °--) [an + oma] not inferior, superior, perfect, supreme, in foll. cpds.
--guṇa supreme virtue DA I.288. --dassika of superior beauty Vv 207, VvA 103 (both as v. l.; T. anuma°); Vv 437. --dassin
one who has supreme knowledge; of unexcelled wisdom (Name of a Buddha) J I.228. --nāma of perfect name S I.33 ("by name the Peerless" Mrs. Rh. D.), 235; Sn 153, 177 (cp. SnA 200). --nikkama of perfect energy Vv 6427 (= paripuṇṇa--viriyatāya a. VvA 284). --pañña of lofty or supreme wisdom (Ep. of the Buddha) Sn 343, 352 (= mahāpañña SnA 347); Th 2, 522 (= paripuṇṇa--pañña ThA 296), DhA I.31. --vaṇṇa of excellent colour Sn 686 J VI.202. --viriya of supreme exertion or energy Sn 353.

Anomajjati [anu + ava + majjati, mṛj] to rub along over, to stroke, only in phrase gattāni pāṇinā a. to rub over one's limbs with the hand M I.80, 509; S V.216.
Anorapāra (adj.) [an + ora + pāra] having (a shore) neither on this side nor beyond Miln 319.
Anoramati [an + ava + ram] not to stop, to continue J III.487; DhA III.9 (ger. °itvā continually).
Anovassa (nt.) [an + ovassa; cp. Sk. anavavarṣana] absence of rain, drought J V.317 (v. l. BB for anvāvassa T.; q. v.).
Anovassaka (adj.) [an + ovassaka] sheltered from the rain, dry Vin II.211; IV.272; J I.172; II.50; III.73; DhA II. 263; ThA 188.
Anosita (adj.) [an + ava + sita, pp. of sā] not inhabited (by), not accessible (to) Sn 937 (= anajjhositaŋ Nd1 441; jarādīhi anajjhāvutthaŋ ṭhānaŋ SnA 566).
Anta1 [Vedic anta; Goth. andeis = Ohg. anti = E. end; cp. also Lat. antiae forehead (: E. antler), and the prep. anti opposite, antika near = Lat. ante; Gr. a)nti/ & a)/nta opposite; Goth., Ags. and; Ger. ant--; orig. the opposite (i. e. what stands against or faces the starting--point)]. 1. end, finish, goal S IV.368 (of Nibbāna); Sn 467; J II.159. antaŋ karoti to make an end (of) Sn
283, 512; Dh 275, cp. antakara, °kiriyā. -- loc. ante at the end of, immediately after J I.203 (vijay°). -- 2. limit, border, edge
Vin I.47; Dh 305 (van°); J III.188. -- 3. side: see ekamantaŋ (on one side, aside). -- 4. opposite side, opposite, counterpart; pl. parts, contrasts, extremes; thus also used as "constituent, principle" (in tayo & cattāro antā; or does it belong to anta2 2. in this meaning? Cp. ekantaŋ extremely, under anta2): dve antā (two extremes) Vin I.10; S II.17; III.135. ubho antā (both sides) Vin I.10; S II.17; J I.8; Nd1 109. eko, dutiyo anto (contrasts) Nd1 52. As tayo antā or principles(?), viz. sakkāya, s.--samudaya, s.--nirodha D III.216, cp. A III. 401; as cattāro, viz. the 3 mentioned plus s.--nirodhagāmini--paṭipadā at S III.157. Interpreted by Morris as "goal" (J P T S. 1894, 70). -- Often pleonastically, to be expld as a "pars pro toto" figure, like kammanta (q. v.) the end of the work, i. e. the whole work (cp. E. sea--side, country--side); vananta the border of the wood = the woods Dh 305; Pv II.310 (expld by vana PvA 86; same use in BSk., vanânta e. g. at Jtm VI.21; cp. also grāmânta Av. Ś. I.210); suttanta (q. v.), etc. Cp. ākāsanta J VI.89 & the pleonastic use of patha. --ananta (n.) no end, infinitude; (adj.) endless, corresponds either to Sk. anta or antya, see anta2.
--ânanta end & no end, or finite and endless, D I.22; DA I.115. --ânantika (holding views of, or talking about) finiteness
and infinitude D I.22 (see expln. at DA I.115); S III.214, 258 sq.; Ps I.155. --kara putting an end to, (n.) a deliverer, saviour; usually in phrase dukkhassɔa. (of the Buddha) M I.48, 531; A II.2; III.400 sq.; Th 1, 195; It 18; Sn 32, 337, 539; Pug 71. In other combn. A II.163 (vijjāyɔ); Sn 1148 (pañhānɔ). -- --kiriyā putting an end to, ending, relief, extirpation; always used with ref. to dukkha S IV.93; lt 89; Sn 454, 725; DhA IV.45. --gata = antagū Nd2 436 (+ koṭigata). --gāhikā (f.), viz. diṭṭhi, is an attribute of micchādiṭṭhi, i. e. heretical doctrine. The meaning of anta in this combn. is not quite clear: either "holding (wrong) principles (goals, Morris)", viz. the 3 as specified above 4 under tayo antā (thus Morris J P T S. 1884, 70), or "taking extreme sides, i. e. extremist", or "wrong, opposite (= antya, see anta2)" (thus Kern, Toev. s. v.) Vin I.172; D III.45, 48 (an°); S I.154; A I.154; II.240; III.130; Ps I.151 sq. --gū one
who has gone to the end, one who has gone through or overcome (dukkha) A IV.254, 258, 262; Sn 401 (= vaṭṭadukkhassa antagata); 539. --ruddhi at J VI.8 is doubtful reading (antaruci?). --vaṭṭi rimmed circumference J III.159. --saññin being conscious of an end (of the world) D I.22, cp. DA I 115.
Anta2 (adj.) [Vedic antya] 1. having an end, belonging to the end; only in neg. ananta endless, infinite, boundless (opp. antavant); which may be taken as equal to anta1 (corresp. with Sk. anta (adj.) or antya; also in doublet anañca, see ākāsɔ ânañca and viññāṇɔânañca); D I.23, 34 = D III.224, 262 sq.; Sn 468 (°pañña); Dh 179, 180 (°gocara having an unlimited range of mental vision, cp. DhA III.197); J I.178. -- 2. extreme, last, worst J II.440 (C. hīna, lāmaka); see also anta1 4. -- acc. as adv. in

ekantaŋ extremely, very much, "utterly" Dh 228 etc. See eka. Anta3
Anta3 (nt.) [Vedic āntra, contr. fr. antara inner = Lat. interus, Gr. e)/ntera intestines] the lower intestine, bowels, mesentery It 89; J I.66, 260 (°vaddhi--maŋsa etc.); Vism 258; DhA I.80.
--gaṇṭhi twisting of the bowels, lit. "a knot in the intestines" Vin I.275 (°ābādha). --guṇa [see guṇa2 = gula1] the intestinal tract, the bowels S II.270; A IV.132; Kh III. = Miln 26; Vism 42; KhA 57. --mukha the anus J IV.402. --vaṭṭi = °guṇa Vism 258.
Antaka [Vedic antaka] being at the end, or making an end, Ep. of Death or Māra Vin I.21; S I.72; Th 2, 59 (expld by ThA 65 as lāmaka va Māra, thus taken = anta2); Dh 48 (= maraṇa--sankhāto antako DhA II.366), 288 (= maraṇa DhA III.434).
Antamaso (adv.) [orig. abl. of antama, *Sk. antamaśah; cp. BSk. antaśah as same formation fr. anta, in same meaning ("even") Av. Ś. I.314; Divy 161] even Vin III. 260; IV.123; D I.168; M III.127; A V.195; J II.129; DA I.170; SnA 35; VvA 155.
Antara (adj.) [Vedic antara, cp. Gr. e)/ntera = Sk. antra (see anta3), Lat. interus fr. prep. inter. See also ante & anto]. Primary meanings are "inside" and "in between"; as adj. "inner"; in prep. use & in cpds. "inside, in between". Further development of meaning is with a view of contrasting the (two) sides of the inside relation, i. e. having a space between, different from; thus nt. antaraŋ difference.
I. (Adj.--n) 1. (a) inner, having or being inside It 83 (tayo antarā malā three inward stains); esp. as --° in cpds. āmis° with
greed inside, greedy, selfish Vin I.303; dos° with anger inside, i. e. angry Vin II.249; D III.237; M I.123; PvA 78 (so read for des°). Abl. antarato from within It 83. (b) in between, distant; dvādasa yojan° antaraŋ ṭhānaŋ PvA 139 139. -- 2. In noun--function (nt.): (a). spatial: the inside (of) Vv 361 (pītantara a yellow cloak or inside garment = pītavaṇṇa uttariya VvA 116); Dāvs I.10 (dīpɔ antara--vāsin living on the island); DhA I.358 (kaṇṇa--chidd° the inside of the ear; VvA 50 (kacch° inner room or apartment). Therefore also "space in between", break J V.352 (= chidda C.), & obstacle, hindrance, i. g. what stands in between: see cpds. and antara--dhāyati (for antaraŋ dhāyati). -- (b). temporal: an interval of time, hence time in general, & also a specified time, i. e. occasion. As interval in Buddhantaraŋ the time between the death of one Buddha and the appearance of another, PvA 10, 14, 21, 47, 191 etc. As time: It 121 (etasmiŋ antare in that time or at this occasion); Pv I.1011 (dīghaŋ antaraŋ = dīghaŋ kālaŋ PvA 52); PvA 5 (etasmiŋ antare at this time, just then). As occasion: J V.287; Pug 55 (eḷaka--m--antaraŋ occasion of getting rain). S I.20, quoted DA I.34, (mañ ca tañ ca kiŋ antaraŋ what is there between me and you?) C. expls. kiŋ kāraṇā. Mrs. Rh. D. in trsln. p. 256 "of me it is and thee (this talk) -- now why is this"; J VI.8 (assa antaraŋ na passiŋsu they did not see a diff. in him). -- 3. Phrases: antaraŋ karoti (a) to keep away from or at a distance (trs. and intrs.), to hold aloof, lit. "to make a space in between" M III.14; J. IV.2 (°katvā leaving behind); Pug A 231 (ummāraŋ a. katvā staying away from a threshold); also adverbially: dasa yojanāni a. katvā at a distance of 10 y. PvA 139. -- (b.) to remove, destroy J
VI.56 (v. l. BB. antarāyaŋ karoti).
II. In prep. use (°--) with acc. (direction) or loc. (rest): inside (of), in the midst of, between, during (cp. III. use of cases). (a.) w. acc.: antaragharaŋ paviṭṭha gone into the house Miln 11. -- (b.) w. loc.: antaraghare nisīdanti (inside the house) Vin II.213; °dīpake in the centre of the island J I.240; °dvāre in the door J V.231; °magge on the road (cp. antarāmagge) PvA 109; °bhatte in phrase ekasmiŋ yeva a. during one meal J I 19 = DhA I.249; °bhattasmiŋ id. DhA IV.12; °vīthiyan in the middle of the road PvA 96. °satthīsu between the thighs Vin II.161 (has antarā satthīnaŋ) = J I.218.
III. Adverbial use of cases, instr. antarena in between D I.56; S IV.59, 73; J I.393; PvA 13 (kāl° in a little while, na kālantarena ib. 19). Often in combn. antarantarena (c. gen.) right in between (lit. in between the space of) DhA I.63, 358. -- loc. antare in, inside of, in between (--° or c. gen. KhA 81 (sutt° in the Sutta); DhA III.416 (mama a.); PvA 56, 63 (rukkh°). Also as antarantare right inside, right in the middle of (c. gen.) KhA 57; DhA I.59 (vanasaṇd̤assa a.). -- abl. antarā (see also sep. article of antarā) in combn. antarantarā from time to time, occasionally; successively time after time Sn p. 107; DhA II.86; IV.191; PvA 272.
IV. anantara (adj.) having or leaving nothing in between i. e. immediately following, incessant, next, adjoining J IV.139; Miln 382 (solQ; DhA I.397; PvA 63 (tadantaraŋ immediately hereafter), 92 (immed. preceding), 97 (next in caste). See also abbhantara.

--atīta gone past in the meantime J II.243. --kappa an intermediary kappa (q. v.) D I 54. --kāraṇa a cause of impediment, hindrance, obstacle Pug A 231 --cakka "the intermediate round", i. e. in astrology all that belongs to the intermediate points of the compass Miln 178. --cara one who goes in between or inside, i. e. a robber S IV.173. --bāhira (adj.) inside & outside J I.125. --bhogika one who has power (wealth, influence) inside the kings dominion or under the king, a subordinate chieftain (cp. antara--raṭṭha) Vin III.47 --raṭṭha an intermediate kingdom, rulership of a subordinate prince J V.135. --vāsa an interregnum Dpvs V.80. --vāsaka "inner or intermediate garment", one of the 3 robes of a Buddhist bhikkhu (viz. the sanghāṭī, uttarāsanga & a.) Vin I.94, 289; II.272. Cf. next. --sāṭaka an inner or lower garment [cp. Sk. antarīya id.], under garment, i. e. the one between the outer one & the body VvA 166 (q. v.).
Antaraŋsa [B.Sk. antarâŋsa; antara + aŋsa] "in between the shoulders", i. e. the chest J V.173 = VI.171 (phrase lohitakkho vihatɔ antaraŋso).
Antaraṭṭhaka (adj.) [antara + aṭṭhaka] only in phrases rattisu antaraṭṭhakāsu and antaraṭṭhake
hima--pātasamaye (in which antara functions as prep. c. loc., according to antara II. b.) i. e. in the nights (& in the time of the falling of snow) between the eighths (i. e. the eighth day before & after the full moon: see aṭṭhaka2). First phrase at Vin I.31, 288; III 31; second at M I.79 (cp. p. 536 where Trenckner divides anta--raṭṭhaka); A I.136 (in nom.); J I.390; Miln 396.
Antaradhāna (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance A I.58 (saddhammassa); II.147; III.176 sq.; Miln 133; Dhs 645, 738, 871. Cp. °dhāyana.
Antaradhāyati [antara + dhāyati] to disappear Sn 449 (°dhāyatha 3rd sg. med.); Vv 8128 (id.); J I.119 = DhA I.248; DhA IV.191 (ppr. °dhāyamāna & aor. dhāyi) PvA 152, 217, (°dhāyi), 245; VvA 48. -- ppr. antarahita (q. v.). -- Caus. antaradhāpeti to cause to disappear, to destroy J I.147; II.415; PvA 123.
Antaradhāyana (nt.) [fr. antaradhāyati] disappearance DhA IV.191. (v. l. °adhāna).
Antarayati [cp. denom. fr. antara] to go or step in between, ger. antaritvā (= antarayitvā) J I.218.
Antarahita (adj.) [pp. of antaradhāyati] 1. disappeared, gone, left D I.222. M I.487. Miln 18. PvA 245. -- 2 in phrase anantarahitāya bhūmiyā (loc) on the bare soil (lit. on the ground with nothing put in between it & the person lying down, i. e. on an uncovered or unobstructed ground) Vin I.47; II.209; M II.57.
Antarā (adv.) [abl. or adv. formation fr. antara; Vedic antarā.] prep. (c. gen. acc. or loc.), pref. (°--) and adv. "in between"
(of space & time), midway, inside; during, meanwhile, between. On interpretation of term see DA I.34 sq. -- (1). (prep.) c. acc. (of the two points compared as termini; cp. B.Sk. antarā ca Divy 94 etc.) D I.1 (antarā ca Rājagahaŋ antarā ca Nāḷandaŋ between R. and N.). -- c. gen. & loc. Vin II.161 (satthīnaŋ between the thighs, where id. p. at J I.218 has antara--satthīsu); A II.245 (satthīnaŋ. but v. l. satthimhi). -- (2) (adv.) meanwhile Sn 291, 694; It 85; Dh 237. -- occasionally Miln 251. -- (3).
(pref.) see cpds.
--kathā "in between talk, talk for pastime, chance conversation, D II.1, 8, 9; S I.79; IV.281; A III.167; Sn p. 115; DA I.49 and freq. passim. --gacchati to come in between, to prevent J VI.295. --parinibbāyin an Anāgāmin who passes away in the
middle of his term of life in some particular heaven D III.237; A I.233; Pug 16. --magge (loc.) on the road, on the way J I.253; Miln 16; DhA II.21; III.337; PvA 151, 258, 269, 273 (cp. antara°). --maraṇa premature death DhA I.409; PvA 136.
--muttaka one who is released in the meantime Vin II.167.
Antarāpaṇa (nt.) [antarā + paṇa "in between the shopping or trading"] place where the trading goes on, bazaar J I.55; VI.52; Miln 1, 330; DhA I.181.
Antarāya1 [antara + aya from i, lit. "coming in between"] obstacle, hindrance, impediment to (--°); prevention, bar; danger,

accident to (--). There are 10 dangers (to or from) enumd. at Vin I.112, 169 etc., viz. rāja°, cora°, aggi°, udaka°, manussa°, amanussa°, vāḷa°, siriŋsapa°, jīvita°, brahmacariya°. In B.Sk. 7 at Divy 544, viz. rājā--caura--manuṣy--amanuṣya--vyād̤--agny--udakaŋ. -- D I.3, 25, 26; A III.243, 306; IV.320; Sn 691, 692; Dh 286 (= jīvit° DhA III.431); J I.62, 128; KhA 181; DhA II 52; VvA 1 = PvA 1 (hat° removing the obstacles) --antarāyaŋ karoti to keep away from, hinder, hold back, prevent, destroy Vin I.15; J VI.171; Vism 120; PvA 20.
--kara one who causes impediments or bars the way, an obstructor D I.227; S I.34; A I.161; Pv IV.322. Antarāya2
Antarāya2 (adv.) [dat. of antara or formation fr. antara + ger. of i?) in the meantime Sn 1120 (cp Nd2 58) = antarā Sn A 603.
Antarāyika (adj.) [fr. antarāya] causing an obstacle, forming an impediment Vin I.94 = II.272; M I.130; S II.226; ThA 288.
Antarāyikin (adj.--n.) [cp. antarāyika] one who meets with an obstacle, finding difficulties Vin IV.280 (an° = asati antarāye).
Antarāḷa (nt.) [Sk antarāla] interior, interval Dāvs I.52; III.53 (nabh°).
Antarika (adj.) [fr. antara] "being in between", i. e. <-> 1. intermediate, next, following: see an°. -- 2. distant, lying in between PvA 173 (aneka--yojan° ṭhāna). See also f. antarikā. -- 3. inside: see antarikā. --anantarika with no interval, succeeding, immediately following, next Vin II.165, 212 (ān°); IV.234.
Antarikā (f.) [abstr. fr. antarika] "what lies in between or near", i. e. -- 1. the inside of Vin IV.272 (bhājan°). <-> 2. the neighbourhood, region of (--°), sphere, compass Vin III.39 (ur°, angul°); J I.265 (yakkhassa sīm° inside the yṡ sphere of influence). -- 3. interval, interstice Vin II.116 (sutt° in lace); A I.124 (vijj° the interval of lightning).
Antalikkha (nt.) [Vedic antarikṣa = antari--kṣa (kṣi), lit. situated in between sky and earth] the atmosphere or air D II.15; A III.239; IV.199; Sn 222, 688; Dh 127 = Miln 150 = PvA 104; Pv I.31 (= vehāyasa--saññita a. PvA 14); KhA 166.
--ga going through the air A I.215. --cara walking through the air Vin I.21; D I.17; S I.111; J V.267; DA I.110.
Antavant (ādj.) [anta1 + °vant] having an end, finite D I.22, 31, 187; Ps I.151 sq.; 157; Dhs 1099, 1117, 1175; Miln 145. --anantavant endless, infinite A V.193 (loka). See also loka.
Anti (indecl.) [Vedic anti = Lat ante, Gr. a)nti/, Goth. and; Ags. and--, Ger. ant--, ent--] adv. & prep. c. gen.: opposite, near J V.399 (tavɔ antiŋ āgatā, read as tavɔ anti--m--āgatā; C. santikaŋ), 400, 404; VI.565 (sāmikassɔ anti = antike C.). -- Cp. antika.
Antika (adj.--n.) --1. [der fr. anti] near KhA 217; nt. neighbourhood Kh VIII.1. (odak°); J VI.565 (antike loc. = anti near).
-- 2. [der fr. anta = Sk. antya] being at the end, final, finished, over S I.130 (purisā etad--antikā, v. l. SS antiyā: men are (to me) at the end for that, i. e. men do not exist any more for me, for the purpose of begetting sons.
Antima (adj.) [Cp. superl. of anta] last, final (used almost exclusively with ref. to the last & final reincarnation; thus in combn. with deha & sarīra, the last body) D II.15; Dh 351; It 50 (antimaŋ dehaŋ dhāreti), 53 (id.); Vv 512; Sn 478 (sarīraŋ antimaŋ dhāreti) 502; Miln 122, 148; VvA 106 (sarīrɔ antima--dhārin); Sdhp 278.
--dehadhara one who wears his last body It 101 (dhāra T, °dhara v. l.); VvA 163. --dhārin = prec. S I.14, 53 (+ khīṇāsava); II.278; It 32, 40; Sn 471. --vatthu "the last thing", i. e. the extreme, final or worst (sin) Vin I. 121, 135, 167, 320. --sarīra the last body; (adj.) having ones last rebirth S I.210 (Buddho a°--sarīro); A II.37; Sn 624; Dh 352, 400; DhA IV.166 (= koṭiyaŋ ṭhito attabhāvo).

Ante° (pref.) [Sk. antaḥ, with change of --aḥ to --e, instead of the usual --o, prob. through interpreting it as loc. of anta] near, inside, within; only in foll. cpds.: °pura (nt.) "inner town", the king's palace, esp. its inner apartments, i. e. harem [Sk. antaḥpura, cp. also P. antopura] Vin I.75, 269; A V.81; J II.125; IV.472; Miln 1; PvA 23, 81, 280; °purikā harem woman DhsA 403; °vāsika one who lives in, i. e. lodges or lives with his master or teacher, a pupil Vin I.60; III.25; S I.180; IV.136; J I. 166; II.278; III.83, 463; PvA 12; VvA 138; °vāsin = °vāsika Vin III.66; D I.1, 45, 74, 78, 88, 108, 157; M III.116; DA I.36.
Anto (indecl.) [Sk. antaḥ; Av antarə Lat. inter, Oir. etar between, Ohg. untar; Idg. *entar, compar. of *en (in) = inner,
inside] prep. inside, either c. acc. denoting direction = into, or c. loc. denoting place where = in. As prefix (°--) in, within,
inside, inner (see cpds.) (1.) prep. c. acc. anto nivesanaŋ gata gone into the house J I.158; anto jālaŋ pavisati go into the net
DhA III.175; anto gāmaŋ pavisati to go into the village DhA II.273; anto nagaraŋ pavisati DhA II.89; PvA 47. -- (2) c. loc. anto gabbhe J II.182; gāme DhA II.52; gehe DhA II.84; nadiyaŋ J VI.278; nivesane J II.323; vasse in the rainy season J IV.242; vimānasmiŋ Pv I.101; sattāhe inside of a week PvA 55. --koṭisanthāra "house of the Golden Pavement" J IV.113. --gadha (°gata? Kern Toev.) in phrase °hetu, by inner reason or
by reason of its intensity PvA 10; VvA 12. --jana "the inside people", i. e. people belonging to the house, the family (= Lat. familia) D III.61 (opp. to servants); A I.152; J VI.301; DA I.300. --jāla the inside of the net, the net DhA IV.41. --jālikata "in--netted", gone into the net D I.45; DA I.127. --nijjhāna inner conflagration PvA 18. --nimugga altogether immersed D I.75; A III.26. --parisoka inner grief Ps I.38. --pura = antepura J I.262. --mano "turning ones mind inside", thoughtful, melancholy Vin III.19. --bhavika being inside Miln 95. --rukkhatā being among trees J I.7. --vasati to inhabit, live within S IV.136. --vaḷañjanaka (parijana) indoorpeople J V.118. --vassa the rainy season (lit. the interval of the r. s.) VvA 66. --vihāra the inside of the V. DhA I.50 (°âbhimukhī turning towards etc.), --samorodha barricading within Dhs 1157 (so read for anta°, cp. Dhs. trsl. 311). --soka inner grief Ps I.38.
Andu [cp. Sk. andu, andū & anduka] a chain, fetter Vin I.108 = III.249 (tiṇ°); D I.245; J I.21 (°ghara prisonhouse); DhA IV.54 (°bandhana).
Andha (adj.) [Vedic andha, Lat. andabata (see Walde, Lat. Wtb. s. v.), other etym. doubtful] 1. (lit.) blind, blinded, blindfolded J I.216 (dhūm°); Pv IV.148; PvA 3. -- dark, dull, blinding M III.151 (°andhaŋ adv. dulled); Sn 669 (Ep. of timisa, like Vedic andhaŋ tamaḥ); DhA II.49 (°vana dark forest). -- 2. (fig.) mentally blinded, dull of mind, foolish, not seeing D I.191 (+ acakkhuka), 239 (°veṇi, reading & meaning uncertain); A I.128; Th 2, 394 (= bāla ThA 258). See cpds. °karaṇa, °kāra, °bāla, °bhūta.
--ākula blinded, foolish Vv 849 (= paññācakkhuno abhāvena VvA 337). --karaṇa blinding, making blind, causing bewilderment (fig.), confusing It 82 (+ acakkhukaraṇa); Miln 113 (pañha, + gambhīra). --kāra blindness (lit. & fig), darkness, dullness, bewilderment Vin I.16; D II.12; A I.56; II.54; III.233; J III.188; Th 1, 1034; Dh 146; Sn 763; Vv 214 (= avijj° VvA 106); Pug 30; Dhs 617; DA I.228; VvA 51, 53, 116, 161; PvA 6; Sdhp 14, 280. --tamo deep darkness (lit. & fig.) S V.443; It 84 (v. l.; T. andhaŋ tamaŋ); J VI.247. --bāla blinded by folly, foolish, dull of mind, silly J I.246, 262; VI.337; DhA II.43, 89; III.179; VvA 67; PvA 4, 264. --bhūta blinded (fig.), mentally blind, not knowing, ignorant S IV.21; A II.72; J VI.139 (spelled °būta); Dh 59, 174 (= paññā--cakkhuno abhāvena DhA III.175). --vesa "blind form", disguise J III.418.
Andhaka [fr. andha] "blind fly", i. e. dark or yellow fly or gad--fly Sn 20 (= kāṇa--makkhikānaŋ adhivacanaŋ SnA 33).
Anna (nt.) [Vedic anna, orig. pp. of adati to eat] "eating", food, esp. boiled rice, but includes all that is eaten as food, viz. odana, kummāsa, sattu, maccha, maŋsa (rice, gruel, flour, fish, meat) Nd1 372 = 495. Anna is spelt aṇṇa in combns aparɔ aṇṇa and pubbɔ aṇṇa. Under dhañña (Nd2 314) are distinguished 2 kinds, viz. raw, natural cereals (pubbɔ aṇṇaŋ: sāli, vīhi, yava, godhūma, kangu, varaka, kudrūsaka) and boiled, prepared food (aparɔ aṇṇaŋ: sūpeyya curry). SnA 378 (on Sn 403) expls. anna by yāgubhattâdi. -- D I.7; A I.107, 132; II.70, 85, 203; Sn 82, 240, 403, 924; J III.190; Pug 51; Sdhp 106, 214.
--āpa food & water Sdhp 100. --da giving food Sn 297. --pāna food & water, eating & drinking, to eat & to drink Sn 485, 487; Pv I.52, 82; KhA 207, 209; PvA 7, 8, 30, 31, 43.
Annaya in dur° see anvaya.

Anvakāsi 3rd sg. aor. of anukassati 2: drew out, removed, threw down Th 1, 869 (= khipi, chad̤d̤esi C.).
Anvakkhara (adj.) [anu + akkhara] "according to the syltable", syll. after syll., also a mode of reciting by syllables Vin
IV.15, cp. 355. Cp. anupadaŋ.
Anvagā 3rd sg. aor. of anugacchati Mhvs 7, 10. Also in assim. form annagā J V.258.
Anvagū 3rd pl. aor. of anugacchati S I.39; Sn 586.
Anvad̤d̤hamāsaŋ (adv.) [anu + ad̤d̤ha + māsa] every fortnight, twice a month M II.8; Vin IV.315 (= anuposathikaŋ); DhA I.162; II.25.
Anvattha (adj.) [anu + attha] according to the sense, answering to the matter, having scnse ThA 6 (°saññābhāva). Anvadeva (adv.) [anva--d--eva with euphonic d.; like sammad--eva corresponding to Sk. anvag--eva] behind, after, later
D I.172; M III.172; S V.1 (spelt anudeva); A I.11; V. 214; It 34.
Anvaya (n.--adj.) [Vedic anvaya in diff. meaning; fr. anu + i, see anveti & anvāya] 1. (n.) conformity, accordance D II. 83
= III.100; M I.69 (dhamm° logical conclusion of); S II.58; D III.226 (anvaye ñāṇaŋ); Pv II.113 (tassa kammassa anvāya, v. l. BB anvaya & anvāya; accordingly, according to = paccayā PvA 147); PvA 228 (anvayato, adv. in accordance). -- 2. (adj.)
following, having the same course, behaving according to, consequential, in conformity with (--°) D I.46 (tad°); M I.238 (kāyo citt° acting in conformity to the mind, obeying the mind); Sn 254 (an° inconsistent); It 79 (tass°). -- dur° spelt durannaya conforming with difficulty, hard to manage or to find out Dh 92 (gati = na sakkā paññāpetuŋ DhA II.173); Sn 243, 251 (= duviññāpaya SnA 287 dunneyya ibid. 293).
Anvayatā (f.) [abstr. to anvaya] conformity, accordance M I.500 (kāy° giving in to the body). Anvahaŋ (adv.) [anu + aha] every day, daily Dāvs IV.8.
Anvāgacchati [anu + ā + gacchati] 1. to go along after, to follow, run after, pursue; aor. anvāgacchi Pv. IV.56 (= anubandhi PvA 260). -- 2. to come back again J I.454 (ger. °gantvāna). -- pp. anvāgata (q. v.).
Anvāgata [pp. of anvāgacchati] having pursued, attained; endowed with Th 1, 63; J IV.385; V.4.
Anvādisati [anu + ā + disati] to advise, dedicate, assign; imper. °disāhi Pv II.26 (= uddissa dehi PvA 80); III.28 (= ādisa
PvA 181).
Anvādhika (adj.) [derivation uncertain] a tailoring term. Only at Vin I.297. Rendered (Vinaya Texts II.232) by ʻhalf and halfʼ; that is a patchwork, half of new material, half of old. Bdhgh's note (see the text, p. 392) adds that the new material must be cut up.
Anvāmaddati [anu + ā + maddati] to squeeze, wring J III. 481 (galakaŋ anvāmaddi wrung his neck; vv. ll. anvānumaṭṭi & anvāvamaddi; C. gīvaŋ maddi).
Anvāya [ger. of anveti; cp. anvaya] undergoing, experiencing, attaining; as prep. (c. acc.) in consequence of, through, after D I.13 (ātappaŋ by means of self--sacrifice), 97 (saŋvāsaŋ as a result of their cohabitation); J I.56 (buddhiŋ), 127 (piyasaŋvāsaŋ), 148 (gabbhaparipākaŋ). Often in phrase vuddhiŋ anvāya growing up, e. g. J I.278; III. 126; DhA II.87.
Anvāyika (adj.--n.) [fr. anvāya] following; one who follows, a companion D III.169; Nd2 59; J III.348.

Anvārohati [anu + ā + rohati] to go up to, visit, ascend J IV.465 (aor. anvāruhi).
Anvāvassa at J V.317 should be read with v. l. BB as anovassa absence of rain.
Anvāviṭṭha [pp. of anvāvisati] possessed (by evil spirits) S I.114.
Anvāvisati [anu + ā + visati] to go into, to take possession of, to visit M I.326; S I.67; Miln 156. -- pp. anvāviṭṭha (q. v.). Cp. adhimuccati.
Anvāsatta [pp. of anu + ā + sañj, cp. anusatta = Sk. anusakta] clung on to, befallen by (instr.), attached to A IV.356 (v. l. anvāhata), cp. Ud 35 (anvāsanna q. v.). See also foll.
Anvāsattatā (f.) [abstr. fr. anvāsatta] being attacked by, falling a prey to (instr.), attachment to DhA I.287 (in same context as anvāsatta A IV.356 & anvāsanna Ud 35).
Anvāsanna [pp. of anu + ā + sad] endowed with, possessed of, attacked by, Ud 35 (doubtfull; v. l. ajjhāpanna), = A IV.356 which has anvāsatta.
Anvāssavati [anu + ā + savati, sru] to stream into, to attack, befall D I.70; A III.99; Pug 20, 58. Anvāhata [pp. of anu + ā + han] struck, beaten; perplexed Dh 39 (°cetasa).
Anvāhiṇd̤ati [anu + ā + hiṇd̤ati] to wander to (acc.) A IV.374, 376 [BSk. same, e. g. Divy 68 etc.].
Anveti [cp. anu + eti, from i] to follow, approach, go with Sn 1103 (= anugacchati anvāyiko hoti Nd2 59); Dh 1 (=
kāyikaŋ . . . dukkhaŋ anugacchati DhA I.24), 2, 71, 124; perhaps at Pv II.620 (with v. l. BB at PvA 99) for anvesi (see anvesati; expld. by anudesi = was anxious for, helped, instructed).
Anvesa [from next] seeking, searching, investigation, M I.140 (°ŋ nɔ âdhigacchanti do not find).
Anvesati [anu + esati] to look, for search, seek S I.112 (ppr. anvesaŋ = pariyesamāna C.); Cp III.117 (ppr. anvesanto). --
aor. anvesi [Sk. anveṣi fr. icchati] Pv II.620 (? perhaps better with v. l. PvA 99 as anventi of anveti). Anvesin [anu--esin] (adj.) striving after, seeking, wishing for Sn 965 (kusala°).
Anha [Vedic ahan] see pubbanha, majjhanha, sāyanha. Cp. aha.
Apa° [Vedic apa; Idg. *apo = Gr. a)po/, Av. apa, Lat. ab from *ap (cp. aperio); Goth. af, Ger. Qb, Ags. E. of. <-> A
compar. form fr. apa is apara "fQther away"] Welldefined directional prefix, meaning "away from, off". Usually as base--prefix (except with ā), & very seldom in compn. with other modifying prefixes (like sam, abhi etc.). <-> 1. apa = Vedic apa (Idg. *apo): apeti to go away = Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. afiddja; apeta gone away, rid; °kad̤d̤hati to draw away, remove; °kamati walk away; °gacchati go away; °nidhāti put away (= a)potiqhmi, abdo); °nudati push away; °neti lead away; °vattati turn away (= āverto); °sakkati step aside; °harati take away. <-> 2. apa = Vedic ava (Idg. *aue; see ava for details). There exists a widespread confusion between the two preps. apa & ava, favoured both by semantic (apa = away, ava = down, cp. E. off) & phonetic affinity (p softened to b, esp. in BB Mss., & then to v, as b > v is frequent, e. g. bya° > vya° etc.). Thus we find in Pāli apa where Vedic and later literary Sk. have ava in the foll. instances: apakanti, °kassati, °kirati, °gata, °cāra, °jhāyati, °thaṭa, °dāna, °dhāreti, °nata, °nāmeti, °nīta, °lekhana, °loketi, °vadati.
Apakad̤d̤hati [apa + kad̤d̤hati, cp. Sk. apa--karṣati] to draw away, take off, remove D I.180; III.127; DhA II.86. <->

Caus. apakad̤d̤hāpeti J I.342; IV.415; Miln 34. -- Cp. apakassati; & see pakattheti.
Apakata [pp. of apakaroti] put off, done away, in ājīvik âpakata being without a living M I.463 (the usual phrase being
°apagata); Miln 279 (id.). At It 89 the reading of same phrase is ājīvikā pakatā (v. l. ā° vakatā). Apakataññu (adj.) [a + pa + kataññu] ungrateful Vin II.199.
Apakantati [apa + kantati, Sk. ava + kṛntati] to cut off Th 2, 217 (gale = gīvaŋ chindati ThA 178; Kern, Toev. corrects to kabale a.).
Apakaroti [apa + karoti, cp. Sk. apakaroti & apakṛta in same meaning] to throw away, put off; hurt, offend, slight; possibly in reading T. apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 (q. v.). -- pp. apakata (q. v.). Cp. apakāra.
Apakassati [Sk. apa-- & ava--kaṛṣati, cp. apakad̤d̤hati] to throw away, remove Sn 281 (v.l. BB & SnA ava°; expld. by niddhamati & nikkad̤d̤hati SnA 311). --ger. apakassa Sn II.198 = Miln 389. See also apakāsati.
Apakāra & °ka [cf. Sk. apakāra & apakaroti] injury, mischief; one who injures or offends DhA III.63; Sdhp 283.
Apakāsati at Vin II.204 is to be read as apakassati and interpreted as "draw away, distract, bring about a split or dissension (of the Sangha)". The v. l. on p. 325 justifies the correction (apakassati) as well as Bdhgh's expln. "parisaŋ
ākad̤d̤hanti". -- Cp. A III.145 & see avapakāsati. The reading at the id. p. at A V.74 is avakassati (combd. w. vavakassati, where Vin II.204 has avapakāsati), which is much to be preferred (see vavakassati).
Apakiritūna at Th 2, 447 T (reading of C. is abhi°) is explained ThA 271 to mean apakiritvā chad̤d̤etvā throwing away, slighting, offending. The correct etym = Sk. avakirati (ava + kṛ2 to strew, cast out) in sense "to cast off, reject", to which also belongs kirāta in meaning "cast off" i. e. man of a so--called low tribe. See also avakirati 2.
Apakkamati [cp. Sk. apakramati, apa + kram] to go away, depart, go to one side J III.27; Sdhp 294. -- aor. apakkami Pv IV.75; ger. apakkamitvā PvA 43, 124, & apakkamma Pv II.928.
Apagacchati [apa + gam] to go away, turn aside DhA I.401 (°gantvā). -- pp. apagata (q. v.).
Apagata [pp. of apagacchati] 1. gone, gone away from (c. abl.), removed; deceased, departed It 112; PvA 39, 63 (= peta), 64 (= gata). -- 2. (°--) freq. as prefix, meaning without, lit. having lost, removed from; free from Vin II.129 (°gabbhā having lost her foetus, having a miscarriage); J I.61 (°vattha without clothes); PvA 38 (°soka free from grief), 47 (°lajja not shy), 219 (°viññāṇa without feeling). -- Cp. apakata.
Apagabbha (adj.) [a + pa + gabbha] not entering another womb, i. e. not destined to another rebirth Vin III.3. Apagama [Sk. apagama] going away, disappearance Sdhp 508.
Apanga (apānga) [Sk. apānga] the outer corner of the eye J III.419 (asitâpangin black--eyed); IV.219 (bahi°). Spelt avanga
at Vin II.267, where the phrase avangaŋ karoti, i. e. expld. by Bdhgh. ibid p. 327 as "avangadese adhomukhaŋ lekhaŋ karonti". According to Kern, Toev. 20, Bdhgh's expln is not quite correct, since avanga stands here in the meaning of "a coloured mark upon the body" (cp. PW. apānga).
Apacaya [fr. apa + ci] falling off, diminution (opp. ācaya gathering, heaping up), unmaking, esp. loss (of wordliness),
decrease (of possibility of rebirth Vin II.2 = III.21 = IV.213; cp. J III.342; S II.95 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A IV.280 = Vin II.259 (opp. ācaya); J III.342 (sekho °ena na tappati); Vbh 106, 319, 326, 330. --gāmin going towards decrease, "making for the undoing of rebirth" (Dhs trsl. 82) A V.243, 277; Dhs 277, 339, 505, 1014;

Vbh 12, 16 sq.; Nett 87 (cp. Kvu 156).
Apacāyati [fr. apa--ci, cp. cināti & cayati, with diff. meaning in Sk.; better expld. perhaps as denom. fr. *apacāya in meaning of apacāyana, cp. apacita] to honour, respect, pay reverence D I.91 (pūjeti +); J III.82. <-> Pot. apace (for apaceyya, may be taken to apacināti 2) A IV.245; ThA 72 (here to apacināti 1). -- pp. apacita (q. v.).
Apacāyana (nt.) [abstr. fr. apa + cāy, which is itself a der. fr. ci, cināti] honouring, honour, worship, reverence J I.220; V.326; DA I.256 (°kamma); VvA 24 (°ŋ karoti = añjalikaŋ karoti); PvA 104 (°kara, adj.), 128 (+ paricariya).
Apacāyika (adj.) [fr. *apacāya, cp. B.Sk. apacāyaka MVastu I.198; Divy 293] honouring, respecting J IV.94 (vaddha°, cp. vaddhâpacāyin); Pv II.7 8 (jeṭṭha°); IV.324 (id.). In B.Sk. the corresp. phrase is jyeṣṭhâpacayaka.
Apacāyin (adj.) [fr. *apacāya; cp. apacāyika] honouring, paying homage, revering Sn 325 (vaddha° = vaddhānaŋ apaciti karaṇena SnA 332) = Dh 109; J I.47, 132, 201; II.299; V.325; Miln 206; Sdhp 549.
Apacāra [fr. apa + car, cp. Sk. apa & abhi--carati] falling off, fault, wrong doing J VI.375.
Apacita [pp. of apacayati or apacināti] honoured, worshipped, esteemed Th 1, 186; J II.169; IV.75; Vv 510 (= pūjita VvA
39); 3511 (cp. VvA 164); Miln 21.
Apaciti (f.) [Vedic apaciti in diff. meaning, viz. expiation] honour, respect, esteem, reverence Th 1, 589; J I.220; II.435;
III.82; IV.308; VI.88; Miln 180, 234 (°ŋ karoti), 377 (pūjana +); SnA 332 (°karaṇa). Cp. apacāyana.
Apacināti [apa + cināti] 1. [in meaning of Sk. apacīyate cp. P. upaciyyati Pass. of upacināti] to get rid of, do away with,
(cp. apacaya), diminish, make less S III.89 (opp. ācināti); Th 1, 807; J IV.172 (apacinethɔ eva kāmāni = viddhaŋseyyatha C.). Here belong prob. aor. 3rd pl. apaciyiŋsu (to be read for upacciŋsu) at J VI. 187 (akkhīni a. "the eyes gave out") and Pot. pres. apace ThA 72 (on v.40). -- 2. [= apacayati] to honour, esteem; observe, guard Vin I.264 (apacinayamāna cīvaraŋ (?) v. l apacitiyamāna; trsl. guarding his claim is, Vin Texts); M I.324 (see detail under apaviṇāti) Th 1, 186 (grd. apacineyya to be honoured); J V.339 (anapacinanto for T. anupacinanto, v. l. anapavinati). -- pp. apacita (q.v.).
Apacca [Vedic apatya nt.; der. fr. apa] offspring, child D I.90 (bandhupāda° cp. muṇd̤aka), 103 (id.); S I.69 (an°) Sn 991; DA I.254.
Apaccakkha (adj.) [a + paṭi + akkha] unseen; in instr. f. apaccakkhāya as adv. without being seen, not by direct evidence Miln 46 sq.
Apacchapurima (adj.) [a + paccha + purima] "neither after nor before", i. e. at the same time, simultaneous J III.295. Apajaha (adj.) [a + pajaha] not giving up, greedy, miserly A III.76 (v. l. apānuta; C. expls. (a)vad̤d̤hinissita
Apajita (nt.) [pp. of apa + ji] defeat Dh. 105.
Apajjhāyati [apa + jhāyati1; cp. Sk. abhi--dhyāyati] to muse, meditate, ponder, consider M I.334 (nijjhāyati +); III.14 (id.).
Apaññaka (adj.) = apañña, ignorant Dpvs VI.29.
Apaṭṭhapeti [Caus. fr. apa--tiṭṭhati, cp. Sk. apa + sthā to stand aloof] to put aside, leave out, neglect J IV.308; V.236.

Apaṇṇaka (adj.) [a + paṇṇaka; see paṇṇaka; Weber Ind. Str. III.150 & Kuhn, Beitr. p. 53 take it as *a--praśna--ka] certain, true, absolute M I.401, 411; A V.85, 294, 296; J I.104 (where expld as ekaŋsika aviruddha niyyānika).
Apanṇṇakatā (f.) [abstr. of apaṇṇaka] certainty, absoluteness S IV.351 sq.
Apatacchika only in khārāpatācch° only in khārāpatācch° (q. v.) a kind of torture.
Apattha1 (adj.) [Sk. apāsta, pp. of apa + as2] thrown away Dh 149 (= chad̤d̤ita DhA III.112). Apattha2
Apattha2 2nd pl. pret. of pāpunāti (q. v.).
Apatthaṭa = avatthaṭa covered Th 1, 759.
Apatthita & Apatthiya see pattheti.
Apadāna (nt.) 1. [= Sk. apadāna] removing, breaking off, D III.88. -- 2. [= Sk. avadāna cp. ovāda] advice, admonition, instruction, morals Vin II.4 (an° not taking advice), 7 (id.) M I.96; A V.337 sq. (saddhā°) Th 1, 47. -- 3. legend, life history. In the title Mahāpadāna suttanta it refers to the 7 Buddhas. In the title Apadānaŋ, that is ʻthe storiesʼ, it refers almost exclusively to Arahants. The other, (older), connotation seems to have afterwards died out. See Dialogues II.3. -- Cp. also pariyāpadāna.
Apadisa [fr apa + diś] reference, testimony, witness DhA II.39.
Apadisati [apa + disati] to call to witness, to refer to, to quote Vin III.159; J I.215; III.234; IV.203; Miln 270; DhA II.39;
Nett 93.
Apadesa [cp. Sk. apadeśa] 1. reason, cause, argument M I.287 (an°). -- 2. statement, designation PvA 8. -- 3. pretext J III.60; IV.13; PvA 154. Thus also apadesaka J VI.179.
Apadhāreti [Caus. of apa + dhṛ, cp. Sk. ava--dhārayati, but also BSk. apadhārayati Divy 231] to observe, request, ask ThA 16.
Apanata [pp. of apanamati] "bent away", drawn aside, in ster. combn. abhinata + apanata ("strained forth & strained aside" Mrs Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 39) M I.386; S I.28.
Apanamati [semantically doubtful] to go away Sn 1102 (apanamissati, v. l. apalām° & apagam°; expld at Nd2 60 by vajissati pakkhamissati etc. -- pp. apanata (q. v.) <-> Caus. apanāmeti.
Apanāmeti [Caus. fr. apanamati] 1. to take away, remove M I.96 = A I.198 (kathaŋ bahiddhā a. carry outside); Kh
VIII.4 (= aññaŋ ṭhānaŋ gameti KhA 220). -- 2. [= Sk. ava--namati] to bend down, lower, put down Vin II.208 (chattaŋ); S I.226 (id.); J II.287 (id., v. l. apanetvā); D I.126 (hatthaŋ, for salute).
[apa + ni + dhā, cp. Vedic apadhā hiding--place; Sk. apadadhāti = Gr. a)poti(qhmi = Lat. abdo "do away"] to hide, conceal Vin IV.123 (°dheti, °dheyya, °dhessati); PvA 215 (°dhāya ger.). -- pp. apanihita. -- Caus. apanidhāpeti to induce somebody to conceal Vin IV.123.
Apanihita [pp. of apanidahati] concealed, in abstr. °ttaŋ (nt.) hiding, concealing, theft PvA 216.

Apanīta [Sk. apanīta, pp. of apa + nī, see apaneti & cp. also onīta = apanīta] taken away or off. removed, dispelled PvA .39
Apanudati & Apanudeti [apa + nud, cp. Vedic apanudati & Caus. Sk. apanodayati] to push or drive away,
remove, dispel; pres. apanudeti Miln 38. aor. apānudi Pv I.86 (= apanesi PvA 41); II.314 (= avahari aggahesi PvA 86); Dāvs I.8. ger. apanujja D II.223. See also der. apanudana.
Apanudana & Apanūdana (nt.) [Sk. apanodana, fr. apanudati] taking or driving away, removal Vin II.148 = J I.94 (dukkha°); Sn 252 (id.); PvA 114 (id.).
Apanuditar [n. ag. fr. apanudati, Sk. apanoditṛ] remover, dispeller D III.148.
Apaneti [apa + nī] to lead away, take or put away, remove J I.62, 138; II.4, 155 (aor. apānayi) III.26; Miln 188, 259, 413;
PvA 41, 74, 198 (= harati) Sdhp 63. Pass. apanīyati S I.176. -- pp. apanīta (q. v.). Apapibati [apa + pibati] to drink from something J II.126 (aor. apāpāsi).
Apabbūhati & Apabyūhati [apa + vi + ūh] to push off, remove, scrape away A III.187 (apaviyūhitvā, vv. ll. °bbūhitvā); J I.265 (paŋsuŋ). -- Caus. °byūhāpeti to make remove or brush J IV.349 (paŋsuŋ).
Apabyāma see apavyāma.
Apamāra [Sk. apasmāra] epilepsy Vin I.93. Cp. apasmāra.
Apamārika (adj.) [cp. Sk. apasmārin] epileptic Vin IV.8, 10, 11.
Apayāti [Sk. apayāti, apa + yā] to go away J VI.183 (apāyāti metri causa; expld. by C. as apagacchati palāyati). -- Caus. apayāpeti [Sk. apayāpayati] to make go, drive away, dismiss M III.176; S II.119.
Apayāna (nt.) [Sk. apayāna, fr. apayāti] going away, retreat D I.9 (opp. upa°); DA I.95.
Apara (adj.) [Vedic apara, der. fr. apa with compar. suffix --ra = Idg. *aporos "further away, second"; cp. Gr. a)pwte/rw farther, Lat. aprilis the second month (after March, i. e. April). Goth. afar = after] another, i. e. additional, following, next, second (with pron. inflexion, i. e. nom. pl. apare) D III.190 (°pajā another, i. e. future generation); Sn 791, 1089 (nɔ); J I.59 (aparaŋ divasaŋ on some day following); III.51 (apare tayo sahāyā "other friends three", i. e. three friends, cp. similarly Fr. nous autres Francנּais); IV.3 (dīpa); PvA 81 (°divase on another day), 226; with other part. like aparo pi D III 128. -- nt. aparaŋ
what follows i. e. future state, consequence; future Vin I.35 (nâparaŋ nothing more); Sn 1092 (much the same as punabbhava, cp. Nd2 61). Cases adverbially; aparaŋ (acc.) further, besides, also J I.256; III.278; often with other part. like athâparaŋ & further, moreover Sn 974; and puna cɔ aparaŋ It 100; Miln 418 (so read for puna ca paraŋ) and passim; aparam pi Vism 9.
-- aparena in future D III.201. -- Repeated (reduplicative formation) aparâparaŋ (local) to & fro J I.265, 278; PvA 198; (temporal) again and again, off & on J II.377; Miln 132 VvA 271; PvA 176 (= punappunaŋ).
--anta (aparanta) = aparaŋ, with anta in same function as in cpds. vananta (see anta1 5): (a.) further away, westward J v.471; Miln 292 (janapada). (b.) future D I.30 (°kappika, cp. DA I.118); M II.228 (°ânudiṭṭhi -- thought of the future); S III.46 (id.). --âpariya (fr. aparâpara) ever--following, successive, continuous, everlasting; used with ref. to kamma J V.106; Miln 108. --bhāga the future, lit. a later part of time, only in loc. aparabhāge at a future date, later on J I.34, 262; IV.1; VvA 66.
Aparajju (adv.) [Sk. apare--dyus] on the foll. day Vin II.167; S I.186; Miln 48.
Aparajjhati [Sk. aparādhyate, apa + rādh] to sin or offend against (c. loc.) Vin II.78 = III.161; J V.68; VI.367; Miln 189;
PvA 263. -- pp. aparaddha & aparādhita (q. v.).
Aparaṇṇa (nt.) [apara + aṇṇa = anna] "the other kind of cereal", prepared or cooked cereals, pulse etc. Opp. to
pubbaṇṇa the unprepared or raw corn (= āmakadhañña Vin IV.265; Vin III.151 (pubb° +); IV.265, 267; A IV. 108, 112 (tila--mugga--māsā°; opp. sāli--yavaka etc.); Nd2 314 (aparaṇṇaŋ nāma sūpeyyaŋ); J V.406 (°jā = hareṇukā, pea); Miln 106 (pubbaṇṇa°). See also dhañña & harita.
Aparaddha [pp. of aparajjhati] missed (c. acc.), gone wrong, failed, sinned (against = loc.) D I.91, 103, 180; S I.103 (suddhimaggaŋ); Th 1, 78; Sn 891 (suddhiŋ = viraddha khalita Nd1 300); PvA 195.
Aparapaccaya (adj.) [a + para + paccaya] not dependent or relying on others Vin I.12 (vesārajja--ppatta +); D I.110 (id.); M II 41; M I.491; S III.83; DA I.278 (= nâssa paro paccayo).
Aparājita (adj.) [Vedic aparājita; a + parājita] unconquered Sn 269; J I.71, 165.
Aparādha [fr. apa + rādh] sin, fault, offence, guilt J I.264 (nir°); III.394; IV.495; VvA 69; PvA 87, 116.
Aparādhika (adj.) [fr. aparādha, cp. Sk. aparādhin] guilty, offending, criminal J II.117 (vāja°); Miln 149 (issara°), 189 (aparādhikatā).
Aparādhita [pp. of aparādheti, Caus. of apa + rādh; cp. aparaddha] transgressed, sinned, failing J V.26 (so read for aparadhɔ ito).
Aparāyin (adj.) [a + parāyin, cp. parāyana] having no support J III.386 (f. °ī; C. appatiṭṭhā appaṭisaraṇā). Apalāpin see apalāsin see apalāsin [Sk. apalāpin "denying, concealing" different].
Apalāḷeti [apa + lāḷeti] to draw over to Vin I.85.
Apalāyin (adj.) [a + palāyin] not running away, steadfast, brave, fearless Nd2 13 (abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin as expln. of acchambhin and vīra); J IV.296; V.4 (where C. gives variant "apalāpinī ti pi pāṭho", which latter has v. l. apalāsinī & is expld. by C. as palāpa--rahite anavajjasarīre p. 5). See also apalāsin.
Apalāsin (adj.) [apaḷāsin; but spelling altogether uncertain. There seems to exist a confusion between the forms
apalāyin, apalāpin & apalāsin, owing to freq. miswriting of s, y, p in MSS. (cp. Nd2 introd. p. XIX.). We should be inclined to give apalāsin, as the lectio difficilior, the preference. The expln. at Pug 22 as "yassa puggalassa ayaŋ paḷāso pahīno ayaŋ vuccati puggalo apaḷāsī" does not help us to clear up the etym. nor the vv. ll.] either "not neglectful, pure, clean" (= apalāpin fr. palāsa chaff, cp. apalāyin at J V.4), or "not selfish, not hard, generous" (as inferred from combn. with amakkhin & amaccharin), or "brave, fearless, energetic" (= apalāyin) D III.47, cp. Pug 22. See palāsin.
Apalibuddha & Apalibodha [a + palibuddha, pp. of pari + bṛh, see palibujjhati] unobstructed, unhindered, free J III. 381 (°bodha); Miln 388; DhA III.198.
Apalekhana (nt.) [apa + lekhana from likh in meaning of lih, corresponding to Sk. ava--lehana] licking off, in cpd. hatthâpalekhana "hand--licking" (i. e. licking one's hand after a meal, the practice of certain ascetics) M 177 (with v. l. hatthâvalekhana M I.535; Trenckner compares BSk. hastapralehaka Lal. Vist. 312 & hastâvalehaka ibid. 323), 412; Pug 55 (expld. at Pug A 231 as hatthe piṇd̤amhe niṭṭhite jivhāya hatthaŋ apalekhati).
Apalekhati [apa + lekhati in meaning of Sk. avalihati] to lick off Pug A 231 (hatthaŋ).

Apalepa in "so ɔpalepa patito jarāgharo" at Th 2, 270 is to be read as "so palepa°". Morris's interpret. J.P.T.S. 1886, 126 therefore superfluous.
Apalokana (nt.) [fr. apaloketi] permission, leave, in °kamma proposal of a resolution, obtaining leave (see kamma I.3) Vin II.89; IV.152.
Apalokita [pp. of apaloketi; Sk. avalokita] 1. asked permission, consulted S III.5. -- 2. (nt.) permission, consent, M I.337 (Nāgâpalokitaŋ apalokesi). -- 3. (nt.) an Ep. of Nibbāna S IV.370.
Apalokin (adj.) [Sk. avalokin] "looking before oneself", looking at, cautious Miln 398.
Apaloketi [BSk. ava--lokayati] 1. to look ahead, to look before, to be cautious, to look after M I.557 (v. l. for apaciṇāti, where J V.339 C. has avaloketi); Miln 398. <-> 2. to look up to, to obtain permission from (acc.), to get leave, to give notice of Vin III.10, 11; IV.226 (anapaloketvā = anāpucchā), 267 (+ āpucchitvā); M I.337; S III.95 (bhikkhusanghaŋ anapaloketvā without informing the Sangha); J VI.298 (vājānaŋ); DhA I.67. -- pp. apalokita (q. v.). See also apalokana & °lokin.
Apavagga [Sk. apavarga] completion, end, final delivery, Nibbāna; in phrase saggâpavagga Dāvs II.62; III.75. Apavattati [apa + vṛt, cp. Lat. āverto] to turn away or aside, to go away J IV.347 (v. l. apasakkati).
Apavadati [apa + vadati] to reproach, reprove, reject, despise D I.122 (= paṭikkhipati DA I.290); S V.118 (+ paṭikkosati).
Apavahati [apa + vahati] to carry or drive away; Caus. apavāheti to remove, give up Miln 324 (kaddamaŋ). Apaviṭṭha at Pv III 82 is to be read apaviddha at Pv III 82 is to be read apaviddha (q. v.).
Apaviṇāti is probably misreading for apaciṇāti is probably misreading for apaciṇāti (see apac° 2). As v. l. at J V.339 (anapavinanto) for T. anupacinanto (expld. by avaloketi C.). Other vv. ll. are anuvi° & apavī°; meaning "not paying attention". The positive form we find as apavīṇati "to take care of, to pay attention to" (c. acc.) at M I.324, where Trenckner unwarrantedly assumes a special root veṇ (see Notes p. 781), but the vv. ll. to this passage (see M. I.557) with apavīṇāti and apacinati confirm the reading apaciṇāti, as does the gloss apaloketi.
Apaviddha [pp. of apavijjhati, Vedic apa + vyadh] thrown away, rejected, discarded, removed S I.202; III.143; Sn 200 (susānasmiŋ = chad̤d̤ita SnA 250); Th 1, 635 = Dh 292 (= chad̤d̤ita DhA III.452); Pv III.82 (susānasmiŋ; so read for T. apaviṭṭha); J I.255; III.426; YI.90 (= chad̤d̤ita C.). Sdhp 366.
Apaviyūhati see appabbūhati.
Apavīṇati see apaviṇāti see apaviṇāti (= apaciṇāti).
Apavyāma [apa + vyāma] disrespect, neglect, in phrase apayvāmato (apaby°) karoti to treat disrespectfully, to insult,
defile S I.226 (v. l. abyāmato; C. expls. apabyāmato karitvā abyāmato katvā); Kvu 472 (vv. ll. asabyākato, abyāto, apabyāto; Kvu trsl. 270 n. 1 remarks: "B. trsl.: abyāsakato. The Burmese scholar U. Pandi, suggests we should read apabyākato, by which he understands blasphemously"; it is here combd. with niṭṭhubhati, as at DhA II.36); DhA II.36 ("want of forbearance" Ed.; doubtful reading; vv. ll. appabyāyakamma & apasāma). For further detail see apasavya.
Apasakkati [apa + sakkati] to go away, to go aside J IV.347 (v. l. for apavattati); VvA 101; PvA 265 (aor. °sakki = apakkami).

Apasavya (adj.) [apa + savya] right (i. e. not left), contrary Ud 50 (T. has niṭṭhubhitvā abyāmato karitvā; vv. ll. are apabhyāmāto, abhyāmato & C. apasabyāmato), where C. expls. apasabyāmato karitvā by apasabyaŋ katvā, "which latter corresponds in form but not in meaning to Sk. apasavyaŋ karoti to go on the right side" (Morris J P T S. 1886, 127). -- See apavyāma.
Apasāda [fr. apa + sad] putting down, blame, disparagement M III.230. Apasādita [pp. of apasādeti] blamed, reproached, disparaged S II.219; SnA 541.
Apasādeti [Caus. of apa + sad] 1. to refuse, decline Vin IV.213, 263; J V.417 (= uyyojeti). -- 2. to depreciate, blame, disparage Vin III.101; M III.230 (opp. ussādeti); DA I.160. -- pp. apasādita (q. v.).
Apasmāra [Sk. apasmāra, lit. want of memory, apa + smṛ] epilepsy, convulsion, fit J IV.84. Cp. apamāra. Apassanto etc. see passati.
Apassaya [cp. Sk. apāśraya, fr. apasseti] 1. support, rest ThA 258. -- 2. bed, bolster, mattress, in kaṇṭak° a mattress of thorns, a bolster filled with thorns (as cushion for asceties) M I.78; J I 493; III.235. --sâppassaya with a head rest J IV.299.
--pīṭhaka a chair with a head--rest J III.235.
Apassayika (adj.) [fr. apassaya; cp. Sk. apāśrayin --°] reclining on, in kaṇṭaka° one who lies on a bed of thorns (see
kaṇṭaka) M I.78; J IV.299 (v. l, kaṇd̤ikesayika); Pug 55.
Apassita [pp. of apasseti] 1. leaning against J II.69 (tālamūlaŋ = nissāya ṭhita C.). -- 2. depending on, trusting in (c. acc. or
loc.) Vv 101 (parâgāraŋ = nissita VvA 101); J IV.25 (balamhi = balanissita). See also avassita.
Apasseti [Sk. apāśrayati, apa + ā + sri] to lean against, have a support in (acc.), to depend on. -- 1. (lit.) lean against Vin II.175 (bhitti apassetabbo the wall to be used as a head--rest). -- 2. (fig.) mostly in ger. apassāya dependent upon, depending on, trusting in (loc. or acc. or --°) Vin III.38; J I.214; PvA 189. -- pp. apassita (q. v.). -- See also avasseti.
Apassena (nt.) [fr. apasseti] a rest, support, dependence M III.127 (°ka); D III.224 (cattāri apassenāni); as adj. caturâpassena one who has the fourfold support viz. sankhāyɔ ekaŋ paṭisevati, adhivāseti, parivajjeti, vinodeti A V.30.
--phalaka (cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 71) a bolsterslab, head--rest Vin I.48; II.175, 209.
Apahattar [n. ag. to apaharati] one who takes away or removes, destroyer M I 447 = Kvu 528.
Apahara [Sk. apahāra, fr. apaharati] taking away, stealing, robbing J II.34.
Apaharaṇa (nt.) = apahara Miln 195.
Apaharati [apa + hṛ] to take away, remove, captivate, rob J III.315 (aor. apahārayiŋ); Miln 413; DA I.38. Apākaṭatā (f.) [a + pākaṭa + tā] unfitness Miln 232 (v. l. apākatatta perhaps better).
Apākatika (adj.) [a + pākata + ika] not in proper or natural shape, out of order, disturbed DhA II.7. Cp. appakāra.
Apācīna (adj.) [Vedic apācīna; cp. apācaḥ & apāka, western; to Lat. opācus, orig. turned away (from the east or the sun) i.
e. opposite, dark] westerly, backward, below S III.84; It 120 (apācīnaŋ used as adv. and taking here the place of adho in combn. with uddhaŋ tiriyaŋ; the reading is a conjecture of Windisch's, the vv. ll. are apācinaŋ; apācini, apāci & apāminaŋ, C. expls. by heṭṭhā).

Apāṭuka (adj.) [a + pātu + ka (?), acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 7 der. fr. apaṭu not sharp, blunt, uncouth. This is hardly correct. See pātur] not open, sly, insidious Th 1, 940 (as v. l. for T. avāṭuka, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "unscrupulous", by Neumann as "ohne Redlichkeit"). Context suggests a meaning similar to the preceding nekatika, i. e. fraudulent. See also next.
Apāṭubha (adj.) [a + pātu + bha (?), at the only passage changed by Morris J. P. T. S. 1893, 7 to apāṭuka but
without reason] = apāṭuka, i. e. sly, fraudulent J IV.184 (in context with nekatika; C. expls. apāṭubhāva dhanuppāda--virahita, in which latter virahita does not fit in; the pass. seems corrupt).
Apāda (?) [apa + ā + dā] giving away in marriage J IV. 179 (in expln. of anāpāda unmarried; reading should prob. be āpāda = pariggaha).
Apādaka (adj.) [a + pāda + ka] not having feet, footless, creeping, Ep. of snakes & fishes Vin II.110 = J II.146 (where see expln.). Spelt apada(ka) at It 87 (v. l. apāda).
Apāna (nt.) breathing out, respiration (so Ch.; no ref. in P. Cauon?) On Prāṇa & Apāna see G. W. Brown in J. Am. Or. Soc. 39, 1919 pp. 104--112. See ānāpāna.
Apānakatta (nt.) [a + pānaka + ttaŋ] "waterless state", living without drinking water J V.243. Apāpaka (adj.) [a + pāpaka] guiltless, innocent f. °ikā Vv 314; 326.
Apāpata (adj.) [apa + ā + pata] falling down into (c. acc.) J IV.234 (aggiŋ).
Apāpurana (nt.) [fr. apāpurati] a key (to a door) Vin I.80; III.119; M III.127. See also avāpuraṇa.
Apāpurati & Apāpuṇati [Sk. apāvṛṇoti, apa + ā + vṛ, but Vedic only apa--vṛṇoti corresponding to Lat. aperio = *apa--ṷerio. On form see Trenckner, Notes 63] to open (a door) Vin I.5 (apāpurɔ etaŋ Amatassa dvāraŋ: imper.; where id. p. S I.137 has avāpur°, T., but v. l. apāpur°); Vv 6427 (apāpuranto Amatassa dvāraŋ, expld. at VvA 284 by vivaranto); It 80 (apāvuṇanti A. dv. as T. conj., with v. l. apānuṃanti, apāpurenti & apāpuranti). -- pp. apāruta (q. v.). -- Pass. apāpurīyati
[cp. BSk. apāvurīyati M Vastu II.158] to be opened M III.184 (v. l. avā°); J I.63 (avā°); Th 2, 494 (apāpuṇitvā). See also avāpurati.
Apābhata [pp. of apa + ā + bhṛ cp. Vedic apa--bharati, but Lat. aufero to ava°] taken away, stolen J III.54.
Apāya [Sk. apāya, fr. apa + i, cp. apeti] "going away" viz. -- 1. separation, loss Dh 211 (piya° = viyoga DhA III.276). -- 2.
loss (of property) D III.181, 182; A II. 166; IV.283; J III.387 (atth°). -- 3. leakage, out flow (of water) D I.74; A II.166; IV.287. -- 4. lapse, falling away (in conduct) D I.100. -- 5. a transient state of loss and woe after death. Four such states are specified purgatory (niraya), rebirth as an animal, or as a ghost, or as a Titan (Asura). Analogous expressions are vinipāta & duggati.
All combined at D I.82; III.111; A I.55; It 12, 73; Nd2 under kāya; & freq. elsewhere. -- apāyaduggativinipāta as attr. of saŋsāra S II.92, 232; IV.158, 313; V.342; opp. to khīṇâpāya--duggati--vinipāta of an Arahant A IV.405; V.182 sq. -- See also foll. pass.: M III.25 (anapāya); Sn 231; Th 2, 63; J IV.299; Pug 51; VvA 118 (opp. sugati); PvA 103; Sdhp 43, 75 & cp. niraya, duggati, vinipāta.
--gāmin going to ruin or leading to a state of suffering DhA III.175; cp. °gamanīya id. Ps. I.94, °gamanīyatā J IV.499. --mukha "facing ruin", leading to destruction (= vināsa--mukha DA I.268), usually as nt. "cause of ruin" D I.101 (cattāri apāya mukhāni); III.181, 182 (cha bhogānaŋ a° --mukhāni, i. e. causes of the loss of one's possessions); A II.166; IV.283, 287. --samudda the ocean of distress DhA III 432. --sahāya a spendthrift companion D III.185.
Apāyika (adj.) [also as āpāyika (q. v.); fr. apāya] belonging to the apāyas or states of misery D I.103; III.6, 9, 12; It 42; PvA 60 (dukkha).

Apāyin (adj.) [fr. apāya] going away J I.163 (ad̤d̤harattāvɔapāyin = ad̤d̤haratte apāyin C.). --an° not going away, i. e. constantly following (chāyā anapāyinī, the shadow) Dh 2; Th 1, 1041; Miln 72.
Apāra (nt.) [a + pāra] 1. the near bank of a river J III.230 (+ atiṇṇaŋ, C. paratīraŋ atiṇṇaŋ). -- 2. (fig.) not the further shore (of life), the world here, i.e. (opp. pāraŋ = Nibbāna) Sn 1129, 1130; Nd2 62; Dh 385 (expld. as bāhirāni cha āyatanāni DhA IV.141). See pāra & cp. avara.
Apāraṇeyya (adj.) [grd. of paraneti + a°] that which cannot be achieved, unattainable J VI.36 (= apāpetabba). Apāruta [Sk. apāvṛta, pp. of apāpurati] open (of a door) Vin I.7 = M I.169 (apārutā tesaŋ Amatassa dvārā); D I.136 (=
vivaṭa--dvāra DA I.297); J I.264 (°dvāra).
Apālamba ["a Vedic term for the hinder part of a carriage" Morris J P T S. 1886, 128; the "Vedic" unidentified] a
mechanism to stop a chariot, a safe guard "to prevent warriors from falling out" (C.) S I.33 (Mrs Rh. D. trsl. "leaning board"); J VI.252 (v. l. upā°; Kern trsl. "remhout", i. e. brake).
Apāhata [pp. of apa + hṛ] driven off or back, refuted, refused Sn 826 (°smiŋ = apasādite vade SnA 541).
Api (indecl.) [Sk. api & pi; Idg. *epi *pi *opi; cp. Gr. e)/pi on to, o)/pi (o)/piqen behind, o)pi/ssa back = close at one's heels); Lat. ob. in certain functions; Goth. iftuma. <-> The assimil. form before vowels is app° (= Sk. apy°). See further details under pi.] both prep. & conj., orig. meaning "close by", then as prep. "towards, to, on to, on" and as adv. "later, and, moreover". -- 1 (prep. & pref.) (a) prep. c. loc.: api ratte later on in the night (q. v.) -- (b) pref.: apidhāna putting on to; apiḷahati bind
on to, apihita (= Gr. e)piqeto/s, epithet) put on to, (q. v.). -- 2. (conj. & part.). (a) in affirmative sentences meaning primarily "moreover, further, and then, even": -- (a) (single) prothetic: api dibbesu kāmesu even in heavenly joys Dh 187; ko disvā na pasīdeyya api kaṇhâbhijātiko even an unfortunate--born Sn 563 api yojanāni gacchāma, even for leagues we go Pv IV.107 (= anekāni yojanāni pi g. PvA 270. Epithetic (more freq. in the form pi): muhuttam api even a little while Dh 106, 107; aham api daṭṭhukāmo I also wish to see Sn 685. Out of prothetic use (= even = even if) develops the conditional meaning of "if", as in api sakkuṇemu (and then we may = if we may) J V.24 (c. = api nāma sakkuṇeyyāma; see further under b appɔeva nāma). -- api--api in correlation corresponds to Lat. et--et Sk ca--ca, meaning both . . . and, and . . . as well as, & is esp. freq. in combn. app'ekacce . . . app'ekacce (and) some . . . and others, i. e. some . . . others [not with Kern Toev. s. v. to appa!], e. g. at D
I.118; Th 2, 216; VvA 208, etc. --app'ekadā "morever once" = sometimes Vin IV.178; S I.162; IV.111; J I.67; DhA III.303,
etc. -- (b) (in combn with other emphatic or executive particles) api ca further, and also, moreover D I.96; Miln 25, 47. --api
ca kho moreover, and yet, still, all the same It 89 (+ pana v. l.); Miln 20, 239. --api ca kho pana all the same, never mind, nevertheless J I.253. --api ssu so much so Vin II.76. --app'eva nāma (with pot.) (either) surely, indeed, yes, I reckon, (or) I presume, it is likely that, perhaps Vin I.16 (surely); II.85 (id.); cp. pi D I.205 (sve pi upasaŋkameyyāma tomorrow I shall surely come along), 226 (siyā thus shall it be); M I.460 = It 89 (moreover, indeed); J I.168 (surely) Vin II.262 (perhaps) J V.421 (id., piyavācaŋ labheyyāma). -- (b) in interrog.--dubit. sentences as part. of interrog. (w. indic. or pot.) corresponding to Lat. nonne, i e. awaiting an affirmative answer ("not, not then"): api Yasaŋ kulaputtaŋ passeyya do you not see . . . Vin I.16; api samaṇa balivadde addasā have you not then seen . . . S I.115; api kiñci labhāmase shall we then not get anything? J III.26; api me pitaraŋ passatha do you then not see my father? PvA 38. -- Also combd. with other interr. part. e. g. api nu J. II.415.
Apitika (adj.) [a + pitika] fatherless J V.251.
Apithīyati [for apidhīyati; api + dhā] Pass. of apidahati to be obstructed, covered, barred, obscured J II.158. See also
Apidahati [api + dhā, cp. Gr. e)piti(qhmi] to put on (see api 1 b), to cover up, obstruct, J V.60 (inf. apidhetuŋ). pp. apihita, Pass. apithīyati, Der. apidhāna (q. v.).

Apidhāna (nt.) [Vedic apidhāna in same meaning] cover, lid Vin I.203, 204; II.122. See apidahati. Apiratte [read api ratte, see api 1 a] later in the night J VI.560.
Apilāpana (nt.) [fr. api + lap] counting up, repetition [Kern, Toev, s.v. gives der. fr. a + plāvana] Nett 15, 28, 54; Miln 37.
Apilāpanatā (f.) in the pass. at Dhs 14 = Nd2 628 is evidently meant to be taken as a + pilāpana + tā (fr. pilavati, plu),
but whether the der. & interpret. of Dhs A is correct, we are unable to say. On general principles it looks like popular etym. Mrs. Rh. D. translates (p. 16) "opposite of superficiality" (lit "not floating"); see her detailed note Dhs trsl. 16.
Apilāpeti [api + lap] "to talk close by", i. e. to count up, recite, or: talk idly, boast of Miln 37 (sāpatheyyaŋ). Apiḷandha (adj.) at Vv 361 should be read as apiḷaddha (= Sk. apinaddha) pp. of apiḷandhati (apiḷandhati) "adorned
with", or (with v. l. SS) as apiḷandhana; VvA 167 expls. by analankata, mistaking the a of api for a negation.
Apiḷandhana (nt.) [fr. apiḷandhati, also in shorter (& more usual) form piḷandhana, q. v.] that which is tied on, i.e.
band, ornament, apparel, parure Vv 6410, 6418 (expld. inacurately at VvA 279 by; a--kāro nipātamattaŋ, pilandhanaŋ = ābhāraṇaŋ); J VI.472 (c. pilandhituŋ pi ayuttaŋ?).
Apiḷahati & Apiḷandhati [Sk. apinahyati, on n: ḷ see note on gala, & cp. guṇa: guḷa, veṇu: veḷu etc. On ndh for yh
see avanandhati] to tie on, fasten, bind together; to adorn oneself with (acc.) J V.400 (ger. apiḷayha = piḷandhitvā C.) -- Cp. apiḷandhana & pp apiladdha.
Apiha (adj.) [apihālu? a + piha, uncertain origin, see next. Morris J.P.I.S. 1886 takes it as a + spṛha] "unhankering" (Mrs Rh. D.) S I 181 (+ akankha; v. l. BB asita).
Apihālu (adj.) [a + pihālu, analysed by Fausböll Sn. Gloss. p. 229 as a--spṛhayālu, but Bdhgh evidently different (see below)] not hankering, free from craving, not greedy S I.187 = Th 1, 1218 (akuhako nipako apihālu); Sn 852 (+ amaccharin, expld. at SnA 549 as apihana--sīlo, patthanātanhāya rahito ti vuttaŋ hoti, thus perhaps taking it as a + pi (= api) + hana (fr. dhā, cp. pidahati & pihita); cp. also Nd2 227).
Apihita [pp. of apidahati] covered J IV.4.
Apuccaṇd̤atā (f.) [a + pūti + aṇd̤a + tā] "not being a rotten egg," i. e. normal state, healthy birth, soundness M I.357. Apuccha (adj.) [a + pucchā] "not a question", i. e. not to be asked Miln 316.
Apekkha (adj.) [= apekkhā] waiting for, looking for S I.122 (otāra°).
Apekkhati 1. [Sk. apīkṣate, apa + īkṣ] to desire, long for, look for, expect Sn 435 (kāme nɔâpekkhate cittaŋ), 773 (ppr. apekkhamāna); J IV.226 (id.); Dhs A 365. anapekkhamāna paying no attention to (acc.) Sn 59; J V.359. <-> 2. [Sk. avīkṣate, ava + īkṣ; see avekkḥati] to consider, refer to, look at, ger. apekkhitvā (cp. Sk. avīkṣya) with reference to VvA 13. -- pp. apekkhita (q. v.).
Apekkhavant (adj.) [fr. apekkhā] full of longing or desire, longing, craving Vin IV.214; S III.16; Th 1, 558; J V.453 (= sataṇha); Sn A 76.
Apekkhā & Apekhā (f.) [Sk. apekṣā, fr. apa + īkṣ. The spelling is either kkh or kh, they are both used
promiscuously, a tendency towards kh prevailing, as in upekhā, sekha] attention, regard, affection for (loc.); desire, longing for

(c. loc.) S I.77; III.132; V.409 (mātā--pitusu); Vin IV.214; Sn 38 (= vuccati taṇhā etc. Nd2 65; = taṇhā sineha SnA 76); J I.9, 141; Th 1, 558; Dh 345 (puttesu dāresu ca = taṇhā DhA IV.56); Dhs 1059, 1136 (= ālayakaraṇa--vasena apekkhatī ti apekkhā Dhs A 365, cp. Dhs trsl. 279). Freq. as adj. (--°or in combn. with sa° and an°), viz. Vin III.90 (visuddha°); S I.122 (otara°); sa° A III.258, 433; IV.60 sq.; an° without consideration, regardless, indifferent S V.164; A III.252, 347, 434; Sn 200 (anapekkhā honti ñātayo); J I.9. Cp. anapekkhin & apekkhavant; also B.Sk. avekṣatā.
Apekkhita [pp. of apekkhati] taken care of, looked after, considered J VI.142, 149 (= olokita C.).
Apekkhin (adj.) [Sk. apekṣin, but B.Sk. avekṣin, e.g. Jtm 215; fr. apa + īkṣ] considering, regarding, expecting, looking
for; usually neg. an° indifferent (against) = loc.) S I.16, 77; II.281; III.19, 87; Sn 166 (kāmesu), 823 (id.), 857; Dh 346. Cp. apekkhavant.
Apeta (adj.) [pp. of apeti] gone away; (med.) freed of, rid of, deprived of (instr., abl. or °--) Dh 9 (damasaccena); PvA 35 (dukkhato); usually °-- in sense of "without, --less", e. g. apeta--kaddama free from mud, stainless Dh 95; °vattha without dress J V.16; °viññāṇa without feeling, senseless Dh 41; Th 2, 468; °viññāṇattaŋ senselessness, lack of feeling PvA 63.
Apetatta (nt.) [abstr. to apeta] absence (of) PvA 92.
Apeti [apa + i, cp. Gr. a)/peimi, Lat. abeo, Goth. af--iddja] to go away, to disappear D I.180 (upeti pi apeti pi); J I.292; Sn
1143 (= nɔ apagacchanti na vijahanti Nd2 66). -- pp. apeta (q. v.).
Apetteyyatā (f.) [a + petteyyatā, abstr. fr. *paitṛya fatherly] in combn. with amatteyyatā irreverence against father and
mother D III.70 (cp. Dh 332 & DhA IV.34).
Apeyya (adj.) [a + peyya, grd. of pā] not to be drunk, not drinkable J VI.205 (sāgara).
Apesiya (nt.) [? of uncertain origin] a means of barring a door Vin II.154 (Bdhgh. explns on p. 321: apesī ti dīghadārumhi khāṇuke pavesetvā kaṇd̤aka--sākhāhi vinandhitvā kataŋ dvāra--tthakanakaŋ).
Apesiyamāna (adj.) [ppr. fr. a + peseti (q. v.)] not being in service Vin II.177. in appɔ ekacce etc. see api.
Appa (adj.) [Vedic alpa, cp. Gr. a)lapa/zw (lapa/zw) to empty (to make little), a)lapadno/s weak; Lith. alpnas weak, alpstù to faint] small, little, insignificant, often in the sense of "very little = (next to) nothing" (so in most cpds.); thus expld. at VvA 334 as equivalent to a negative part. (see appodaka) D I.61 (opp. mahant, DA I.170 = parittaka); Sn 713, 775, 805, 896 (= appaka, omaka, thoka, lamaka, jatukka, parittaka Nd1 306); Dh 174; J I.262; Pug 39. -- nt. appaŋ a little, a small portion, a trifle; pl. appāni small things, trifles A II.26 = It 102; A II.138; Dh 20 (= thokaŋ eka--vagga--dvi--vagga--mattam pi DhA I.158), 224 (°smiŋ yācito asked for little), 259.
--aggha of little value (opp. mahaggha priceless) J I.9; Pug 33; DhA IV.184. --assāda [BSk. alpâsvāda, cp. Divy 224 = Dh
186; alpa + ā + svād] of little taste or enjoyment, affording little pleasure (always used of kāmā) Vin II.25 = M I.130 = A
III.97 = Nd2 71; Sn 61; Dh 186 (= supina--sadisatāya paritta--sukha DhA III 240); Th 2, 358 (= ThA 244); J II.313; Vism 124. -- ātanka little (or no)
illness, freedom from illness, good health (= appābādha with which often combd.) [BSk. alpātanka & alpātankatā] D I.204 (+ appābādha); III.166; A III.65, 103; Miln 14. --ābādha same as appātanka (q. v.) D I.204; III.166, 237; M II.125; A I.25; II.88; III.30, 65 sq., 103, 153; Pv IV.144; °ābādhatā id. [cp. BSk. alpābādhatā good health] A I.38. --āyuka short lived D I.18; PvA
103, also as °āyukin Vv 416. --āhāra taking little or no food, fasting M II.5; Sn 165 (= ekāsana--bhojitāya ca
parimita--bhojitāya ca SnA 207), also as °āhāratā M I.245; II.5. --odaka having little or no water, dry Sn 777 (macche va appodake khīṇasote = parittodake Nd1 50); Vv 843 (+ appabhakkha; expld. at VvA 334 as "appa--saddo hɔ ettha abhāvattho appiccho appanigghoso ti ādisu viya"); J I.70; DhA IV.12. --kasira in instr. °kasirena with little or no difficulty D I.251; S V.51;

Th 1, 16. --kicca having few duties, free from obligations, free from care Sn 144 (= appaŋ kiccaŋ assā ti KhA 241). --gandha not smelling or having a bad smell Miln 252 (opp. sugandha). --ṭṭha "standing in little"; i. e. connected with little trouble D I.143; A I.169. --thāmaka having little or no strength, weak S IV.206. --dassa having little knowledge or wisdom Sn 1134 (see Nd2 69; expld. by paritta--pañña SnA 605). --nigghosa with little sound, quiet, still, soundless (cp. VvA 334, as quoted above under °odaka) A V.15 (+ appasadda); Sn 338; Nd1 377; Miln 371. --pañña, of little wisdom J II.166; III.223, 263. --puñña of little merit M II.5. --puññatā having little merit, unworthiness Pv IV.107. --phalatā bringing little fruit PvA 139. --bhakkha having little or nothing to eat Vv 843. --bhoga having little wealth, i. e. poor, indigent Sn 114 (= sannicitānaŋ ca bhogānaŋ āyamukhassa ca abhāvato SnA 173). --maññati to consider as small, to underrate: see separately. --matta little, slight, mean, (usually as °ka; not to be confounded with appamatta2) A III.275; J I.242; also meaning "contented with little" (of the bhikkhu) It 103 = A II.27; f. °ā trifle, smallness, însignificance D I.91; DA I.55. --mattaka small, insignificant, trifling, nt. a trifle (cp. °matta) Vin 1, 213; II.177 (°vissajjaka the distributor of little things, cp. A III.275 & Vin IV.38, 155); D I.3 (= appamattā etassā ti appamattakaŋ DA I.55); J I.167; III.12 (= aṇu); PvA 262. --middha "little slothful", i. e. diligent, alert Miln 412. --rajakkha having little or no obtuseness D II.37; M I.169; Sdhp 519. --ssaka having little of one's own, possessing little A
I.261; II.203. --sattha having few or no companious, lonely, alone Dh 123. --sadda free from noise, quiet M II.2, 23, 30; A V.15; Sn 925 (= appanigghosa Nd1 377); Pug 35; Miln 371. --siddhika bringing little success or welfare, dangerous J IV.4 (= mandasiddhi vināsabahula C.); VI.34 (samuddo a. bahu--antarāyiko). --ssuta possessing small knowledge, ignorant, uneducated D I.93 (opp. bahussuta); III.252, 282; S IV.242; It 59; Dh 152; Pug 20, 62; Dhs 1327. --harita having little or no grass S I.169; Sn p. 15 (= paritta--harita--tiṇa SnA 154).
Appaka (adj.) [appa + ka] little, small, trifling; pl. few. nt. °ŋ adv. a little D II.4; A V.232 sq., 253 sq.; Sn 909 (opp. bahu); Dh 85 (appakā = thokā na bahū DhA II. 160); Pv I.102 (= paritta PvA 48); II.939; Pug 62; PvA 6, 60 (= paritta). f. appikā J I.228. -- instr. appakena by little, i. e. easily DA I.256. --anappaka not little, i. e. much, considerable, great; pl. many S IV.46; Dh 144; Pv I.117 (= bahū PvA 58); PvA 24, 25 (read anappake pi for T. °appakeci; so also KhA 208).
Appakāra (adj.) [a + pakāra] not of natural form, of bad appearance, ugly, deformed J V.69 (= sarīrappakāra--rahita dussaṇṭhāna C.). Cp. apākatika.
Appakiṇṇa [appa + kiṇṇa, although in formation also = a + pakiṇṇa] little or not crowded, not overheaped A V.15 (C. anākiṇṇa).
Appagabbha (adj.) [a + pagabbha] unobtrusive, free from boldness, modest S II.198 = Miln 389, Sn 144, 852 (cp. Nd1 228 & KhA 232); Dh 245.
Appaccaya [a + paccaya] 1. (n.) discontent, dissatisfaction, dejection, sulkiness D I.3 (= appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassitā ti appacayo; domanassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ DA I.52); III.159; M I.442; A I.79, 124, 187; II.203; III.181 sq.; IV.168, 193; J II.277; Sn p. 92 (kapa + dosa + appacaya); Vv 8331 (= domanassaŋ VvA 343); SnA 423 (= appatītaŋ domanassaŋ). -- 2. (adj.) unconditioned Dhs 1084, 1437.
Appaṭi° [a + paṭi°] see in general under paṭi°.
Appaṭikārika (adj.) [a + paṭikārika] "not providing against", i. e. not making good, not making amends for, destructive
J V.418 (spelling here & in C. appati°).
Appaṭikopeti [a + paṭikopeti] not to disturb, shake or break (fig.) J V.173 (uposathaŋ). Appaṭikkhippa (adj.) [a + paṭikkhippa, grd. of paṭikkhipati] not to be refused J II.370.
Appaṭigandhika & °iya (adj.) [a + paṭi + gandha + ika] not smelling disagreeable, i. e. with beautiful smell, scented, odorous J V.405 (°ika, but C. °iya; expld. by sugandhena udakena samannāgata); VI.518; Pv II.120; III.226.

Appaṭigha (adj.) [a + paṭigha] (a) not forming an obstacle, not injuring, unobstructive Sn 42 (see expld. at Nd2 239; SnA 88 expls. "katthaci satte vā sankhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatī ti a."). -- (b) psychol. t. t. appld. to rūpa: not reacting or impinging (opp. sappaṭigha) D III.217; Dhs 660, 756, 1090, 1443.
Appaṭicchavi (adj.) at Pv II.113 is faulty reading for sampatitacchavi (v. l.).
Appaṭibhāga (adj) [a + paṭibhāga] not having a counterpart, unequalled, incomparable DhA I.423 (= anuttara).
Appaṭibhāṇa (adj.) [a + paṭibhāṇa] not answering back, bewildered, cowed down Vin III.162; A III.57; °ŋ karoti to intimidate, bewilder J V.238, 369.
Appaṭima (adj.) [a + paṭima fr. prep. paṭi but cp. Vedic apratimāna fr. prati + mā] matchless, incomparable, invaluable Th 1, 614; Miln 239.
Appaṭivattiya (adj.) [a + paṭi + vattiya = vṛtya, grd. or vṛt] (a) not to be rolled back Sn 554 (of dhammacakka, may however be taken in meaning of b.). -- (b) irresistable J II.245 (sīhanada). Note. The spelling with ṭ is only found as v. l. at J II.245; otherwise as t.
Appaṭivāṇa (nt.) [a + paṭivāṇa, for °vrāṇa, the guṇa--form of vṛ, cp. Sk. prativāraṇa] non--obstruction, not hindering, not opposing or contradicting A I.50; III.41; V.93 sq.; adj. J I.326.
Appaṭivāṇitā (f.) [abstr. from (ap)paṭivāṇa] not being hindered, non--obstruction, free effort; only in phrase "asantuṭṭhitā ca kusalesu dhammesu appaṭivāṇitā ca padhānasmiŋ" (discontent with good states and the not shrinking back in the struggle Dhs trsl. 358) A I.50, 95 = D III.214 = Dhs 1367.
Appaṭivāṇī (f.) [almost identical w. appaṭivāṇitā, only used in diff. phrase] non--hindrance, non--restriction, free action, impulsive effort; only in stock phrase chando vāyāmo ussāho ussoḷhī appaṭivāṇī S II.132; V.440; A II.93, 195; III.307 sq.; IV.320; Nd2 under chanda C. [cp. similarly Divy 654].
Appaṭivāṇīya (adj.) [grd. of a + paṭi + vṛ; cp. BSk. aprativāṇiḥ Divy 655; M Vastu III.343] not to be obstructed,
irresistible S I.212 (appld. to Nibbāna; Mrs. Rh. D. Kindred S. p. 274 trsls. "that source from whence there is no turning back"), Th 2, 55.
Appaṭividdha (adj.) [a + paṭi + viddha] "not shot through" i. e. unhurt J VI.446.
Appaṭivibhatta (°bhogin) (adj.) [a + paṭi + vibhatta] (not eating) without sharing with others (with omission of
another negative: see Trenckner, Miln p. 429, where also Bdhgh's expln.) A III289; Miln 373; cp. Miln trsl. II.292. Appaṭivekkhiya [ger. of a + paṭi + avekkhati] not observing or noticing J IV.4 (= apaccavekkhitvā anavekkhitvā C.). Appaṭisankhā (f.) [a + paṭisankhā] want of judgment Pug 21 = Dhs 1346.
Appaṭisandhika (and °iya) (adj.) [a + paṭisandhi + ka (ya)] 1. what cannot be put together again, unmendable, irreparable (°iya) Pv I.129 (= puna pākatiko na hoti PvA 66) = J III.167 (= paṭipākatiko kātuŋ na sakkā C.). <-> 2. incapable of reunion, not subject to reunion, i. e. to rebirth J V.100 (°bhāva).
Appaṭisama (adj.) [a + paṭi = sama; cp. BSk. apratisama M Vastu I.104] not having it's equal, incomparable J I.94 (Baddha--sirī).
Appaṭissavatā (f.) [a + paṭissavatā] want of deference Pug 20 = Dhs 1325.

Appaṇihita (adj.) [a + paṇihita] aimless, not bent on anything, free from desire, usually as nt. aimlessness, combd. w. animittaŋ Vin III.92, 93 = IV.25; Dhs 351, 508, 556. See on term Cpd. 67; Dhs trsl. 93, 143 & cp. paṇihita.
Appatiṭṭha (adj.) [a + patiṭṭha] 1. not standing still S I.1. -- 2. without a footing or ground to stand on, bottomless Sn 173. Appatissa (& appaṭissa) (adj.) [a + paṭi + śru] not docile, rebellious, always in combn. with agārava A II.20; III.7 sq., 14
sq., 247, 439. Appatissa--vāsa an unruly state, anarchy J II.352. See also paṭissā.
Appatīta (adj.) [a + patīta, of prati + i, Sk. pratīta] dissatisfied, displeased, disappointed (cp. appaccaya) J V.103 (at this passage preferably to be read with v. l. as appatika = without husband, C. expls. assāmika), 155 (cp. C. on p. 156); DA I.52; SnA 423.
Appaduṭṭha (adj.) [a + paduṭṭha] not corrupt, faultless, of good behaviour Sn 662 (= padosâbhāvena a. SnA 478); Dh 137 (= niraparādha DhA III.70).
Appadhaŋsa (adj.) [= appadhaŋsiya, Sk. apradhvaŋsya] not to be destroyed J IV.344 (v. l. duppadhaŋsa).
(adj.) [grd. of a + padhaŋseti] not to be violated or destroyed, inconquerable, indestructible D III.175 (°ika, v. l. °iya); J III.159
(°iya); VvA 208 (°iya); PvA 117 (°iya). Cp. appadhaŋsa.
Appadhaŋsita (adj.) [pp. of a + padhaŋseti] not violated, unhurt, not offended Vin IV.229.
Appanā (f.) [cp. Sk. arpaṇa, abstr. fr. appeti = arpayati from of ṛ, to fix, turn, direct one's mind; see appeti] application (of mind), ecstasy,fixing of thought on an object, conception (as psychol. t. t.) J II.61 (°patta); Miln 62 (of vitakka); Dhs 7, 21, 298; Vism 144 (°samādhi); DhsA 55, 142 (def. by Bdhg. as "ekaggaŋ cittaŋ ārammaṇe appeti"), 214 (°jhāna). See on term Cpd. pp. 56 sq., 68, 129, 215; Dhs trsl. XXVIII, 10, 53, 82, 347.
see pahoti.
Appamaññati [appa + maññati] to think little of, to underrate, despise Dh 121 (= avajānāti DhA III.16; v. l.
Appamaññā (f.) [a + pamaññā, abstr. fr. pamāṇa = Sk. *pramānya] boundlessness, infinitude, as psych. t. t. appld. in
later books to the four varieties of philanthropy, viz. mettā karuŋā muditā upekkhā i. e. love, pity, sympathy, desinterestedness, and as such enumd. at D III.223 (q. v. for detailed ref. as to var. passages); Ps I.84; Vbh 272 sq.; DhsA 195. By itself at Sn 507 (= mettajjhānasankhātā a. SnA 417). See for further expln. Dhs trsl. p. 66 and mettā.
Appamatta1 (adj.) [appa + matta] see appa.
Appamatta2 (adj.) [a + pamatta, pp. of pamadati] not negligent, i. e. diligent, careful, heedful, vigilant, alert, zealous M I.391--92; S I.4; Sn 223 (cp. KhA 169), 507, 779 (cp. Nd1 59); Dh 22 (cp. DhA I.229); Th 2, 338 = upaṭṭhitasati Th A 239).
Appamāda [a + pamāda] thoughtfulness, carefulness, conscientiousness, watchfulness, vigilance, earnestness, zeal D
I.13 (: a. vuccati satiyā avippavāso DA I.104); III.30, 104 sq., 112, 244, 248, 272; M I.477 (°phala); S I.25, 86, 158, 214; II.29, 132; IV.78 (°vihārin), 97, 125, 252 sq.; V.30 sq. (°sampadā), 41 sq., 91, 135, 240, 250, 308, 350; A I.16, 50. (°adhigata);

III.330, 364, 449; IV.28 (°gāravatā) 120 (°ŋ garu--karoti); V.21, 126 (kusalesu dhammesu); Sn 184, 264, 334 (= sati--avippavāsa--sankhāta a. SnA 339); It 16 (°ŋ pasaŋsanti puññakiriyāsu paṇd̤itā), 74 (°vihārin); Dh 57 (°vihārin, cp. DhA I.434); 327 (°rata = satiyā avippavāse abhirata DhA IV.26); Dāvs II. 35; KhA 142.
Appamāṇa (freq. spelled appamāna) (adj.) [a + pamāṇa] 1. "without measure", immeasurable, endless, boundless, unlimited, unrestricted all--permeating S IV.186 (°cetaso); A II.73; V.63; Sn 507 (mettaŋ cittaŋ bhāvayaŋ appāmāṇaŋ = anavasesa--pharaṇena SnA 417; cp. appamaññā); It 21 (mettā), 78; J II.61; Ps II.126 sq.; Vbh 16, 24, 49, 62, 326 sq.; Dhs 182, 1021, 1024, 1405; DhsA 45, 196 (°gocara, cp. anantagocara). See also on term Dhs trsl. 60. -- 2. "without difference", irrelevant, in general (in commentary style) J I.165; II.323.
Appameyya (adj.) [a + pameyya = Sk. aprameya, grd. of a + pra + mā] immeasurable, infinite, boundless M I.386; S V.400; A I.266; Th 1, 1089 (an°); Pug 35; Miln 331; Sdhp 338.
Appavattā (f.) [a + pavattā] the state of not going on, the stop (to all that), the non--continuance (of all that) Th 1, 767; Miln 326.
Appasāda see pasāda.
Appassāda see appa.
Appahīna (adj.) [a + pahīna, pp. of pahāyati] not given up, not renounced M I.386; It 56, 57; Nd2 70 D1; Pug 12, 18.
Appāṇaka (adj.) [a + pāṇa + ka] breathless, i. e. (1) holding one's breath in a form of ecstatic meditation (jhāna) M
I.243; J I.67 [cp. BSk. āsphānaka Lal. V.314, 324; M Vastu II.124; should the Pāli form be taken as *a + prāṇaka?]. (2) not holding anything breathing, i. e. inanimate, lifeless, not containing life Sn p. 15 (of water).
Appikā (f.) of appaka.
Appiccha (adj.) [appa + iccha from iṣ, cp. icchā] desiring little or nothing, easily satisfied, unassuming, contented,
unpretentious S I.63, 65; A III.432; IV.2, 218 sq., 229; V.124 sq., 130, 154, 167; Sn 628, 707; Dh 404; Pv IV.73; Pug 70.
Appicchatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] contentment, being satisfied with little, unostentatiousness Vin III.21; D III.115; M I.13; S II 202, 208 sq.; A I.12, 16 sq.; III.219 sq., 448; IV.218, 280 (opp. mahicchatā); Miln 242; SnA 494 (catubbidhā, viz. paccaya--dhutanga--pariyatti--adhigama--vasena); PvA 73. As one of the 5 dhutanga--dhammā at Vism 81.
Appita (adj.) [pp. of appeti, cp. BSk. arpita, e. g. prītyarpitaŋ cakṣuḥ Jtm 3169] 1. fixed, applied, concentrated (mind) Miln 415 (mānasa) Sdhp 233 (citta). -- 2. brought to, put to, fixed on J VI.78 (maraṇamukhe); visappita (an arrow to which) poison (is) applied, so read for visap(p)īta at J V.36 & Vism 303.
Appiya & Appiyatā see piya see piya etc. Appekadā (adv.) see api 2 ax.
Appeti [Vedic arpayati, Caus. of ṛ, ṛṇoti & ṛcchati (cp. icchati2), Idg. *ar (to insert or put together, cp. also *er under aṇṇava) to which belong Sk. ara spoke of a wheel; Gr. a)rari/skw to put together, a(/rma chariot, a)/rqron limb, a)reth/ virtue; Lat. arma = E. arms (i. e. weapon), artus fixed, tight, also limb, ars = art. For further connections see aṇṇava] 1. (*er) to move forward, rush on, run into (of river) Vin II.238; Miln 70. -- 2. (*ar) to fit in, fix, apply, insert, put on to (lit. & fig.) Vin II.136, 137; J III.34 (nimba--sūlasmiŋ to impale, C. āvuṇāti); VI.17 (T. sūlasmiŋ acceti, vv. ll. abbeti = appeti & upeti, C. āvuṇati); Miln 62 (dāruŋ sandhismiŋ); VvA 110 (saññāṇaŋ). Cp. Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19, who defends reading abbeti at T. passages.

Appesakkha (adj.) [acc. to Childers = Sk. *alpa + īśa + ākhya, the latter fr. ā + khyā "being called lord of little";
Trenckner on Miln 65 (see p. 422) says: "appesakkha & mahesakkha are traditionally expld. appaparivāra & mahāparivāra, the former, I suppose, from appe & sakkha (Sk. sākhya), the latter an imitation of it". Thus the etym. would be "having little association or friendship" and resemble the term appasattha. The BSk. forms are alpeśākhya & maheśākhya, e. g. at Av. Ś II. 153; Divy 243] of little power, weak, impotent S II.229; Miln 65; Sdhp 89.
Appoti [the contracted form of āpnoti, usually pāpuṇāti, fr. āp] to attain, reach, get Vism 350 (in etym. of āpo). Appodaka see appa.
Appossukka (adj.) [appa + ussuka, Sk. alpotsuka, e. g. Lal. V. 509; Divy 41, 57, 86, 159. It is not necessary to assume a hypothetic form of *autsukya as der. fr. ussuka] unconcerned, living at ease, careless, "not bothering", keeping still, inactive Vin II.188; M III.175, 176; S I 202 (in stock phrase appossukka tuṇhībhūta sankasāya "living at ease, given to silence, resigned" Mrs. Rh. D. Dhs trsl. 258, see also J.P.T.S. 1909, 22); II. 177 (id.); IV.178 (id.); Th 2, 457 (= nirussukka ThA 282); Sn 43 (= abyāvaṭa anapekkha Nd2 72); Dh 330 (= nirālaya DhA IV.31); J I.197; IV.71; Miln 371 (a. tiṭṭhati to keep still); DA I.264.
Appossukkatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] inaction, reluctance, carelessness, indifference Vin I.5; D II.36; Miln 232; DhA II.15.
[Sk. *ā--sphṛta for a--sphārita pp. of sphar, cp. phurati; phuṭa & also phusati] untouched, unpervaded, not penetrated. D I.74 = M I.276 (pītisukhena).
Apphoṭā (f.) [fr. appoṭeti to blossom] N. of a kind of Jasmine J VI.336.
Apphoṭita [pp. of apphoṭeti] having snapped one's fingers or clapped one's hands J II.311 (°kāle).
Apphoṭeti [ā + phoṭeti, sphuṭ] to snap the fingers or clap the hands (as sign of pleasure) Miln 13, 20. pp. apphoṭita.
Aphusa [Sk. *aspṛśya, a + grd. of phusati to touch] not to be touched Miln 157 (trsl. unchangeable by other circumstances; Tr. on p. 425 remarks "aphusāni kiriyāni seems wrong, at any rate it is unintelligible to me").
Aphegguka (adj.) [a + pheggu + ka] not weak, i. e strong J III.318.
Abaddha [a + baddha] not tied, unbound, unfettered Sn 39 (v. l. and Nd2 abandha; expld-- by rajju--bandhanɔ ādisu yena kenaci abaddha SnA 83).
Abandha (n.--adj.) [a + bandha] not tied to, not a follower or victim of It 56 (mārassa; v. l. abaddha).
Abandhana (adj.) [a + bandhana] without fetters or bonds, unfettered, untrammelled Sn 948, cp. Nd1 433.
Ababa [of uncertain origin, prob. onomatopoetic]. N. of a cert. Purgatory, enumd. with many other similar names at A V.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. aṭaṭa, abbuda & also Av. Ś I.4, 10 & see for further expln. of term SnA 476 sq.
Abala (adj.) [a + bala] not strong, weak, feeble Sn 1120 (= dubbala, appabala, appathāma Nd2 73); Dh 29 (°assa a weak horse = dubbalassa DhA I.262; opp. sīghassa a quick horse).
Abbaje T. reading at A II.39, evidently interpreted by ed. as ā + vraje, pot. of ā + vraj to go to, come to (cp. pabbajati), but is preferably with v. l. SS to be read aṇd̤aje (corresponding with vihangama in prec. line).

Abbaṇa (adj.) [a + vaṇa, Sk. avraṇa] without wounds Dh 124.
Abbata (n.--adj.) [a + vata, Sk. avrata] (a) (nt.) that which is not "vata" i. e. moral obligation, breaking of the moral obligation Sn 839 (asīlata +); Nd1 188 (v. l. SS abhabbata; expld. again as a--vatta). SnA 545 (= dhutangavataŋ vinā. -- (b) (adj.) one who offends against the moral obligation, lawless Dh 264 (= sīlavatena ca dhutavatena ca virahita DhA III.391; vv. ll. k. adhūta & abhūta; B. abbhuta, C. abbuta).
Abbaya in uday° at Miln 393 stands for avyaya.
[the first more freq. for pres., the second often in aor. forms; Sk. ābṛhati, ā + bṛh1, pp. bṛd̤ha (see abbūḷha)] to draw off, pull out (a sting or dart); imper. pres. abbaha Th 1, 404; J II.95 (v. l. BB appuha = abbuha; C. expls. by uddharatha). -- aor. abbahi J V.198 (v. l. BB abbuhi), abbahī (metri causa) J III.390 (v. l. BB dhabbuḷi = abbuḷhi) = Pv I.86 (which reads T. abbūḷha, but PvA 41 expls. nīhari) = DhA I.30 (vv. ll. sabbahi, sabbamhi; gloss K. B abbūḷhaŋ) = Vv 839 (T. abbuḷhi; v. l. BB abbuḷhaŋ, SS avyahi; VvA 327 expls. as uddhari), & abbuhi A III.55 (v. l. abbahi, C. abbahī ti nīhari), see also vv. ll. under abbahi. -- ger. abbuyha Sn 939 (= abbuhitvā uddharitvā Nd1 419; v.l. SS abbuyhitvā; SnA 567 reads avyuyha & expls. by uddharitvā); S I.121 (taṇhaŋ); III.26 (id.; but spelt abbhuyha). -- pp. abbuḷha (q. v.). -- Caus. abbāheti [Sk. ābarhayati] to pull out, drag out J IV.364 (satthaŋ abbāhayanti; v. l. abbhā°); DhA II.249 (asiŋ). ger. abbāhitvā (= °hetvā) Vin II 201 (bhisa--muḷālaŋ) with v. l. BB aggahetvā, SS abbūhitvā, cp. Vin I.214 (vv. ll. aggahitvā & abbāhitvā). pp. abbūḷhita (q. v.).
Abbāhana (nt.) [abstr. fr. abbahati] pulling out (of a sting) DhA III.404 (sic. T.; v. l. abbūhana; Fausböll ad̤ahana; glosses C. aṭṭhangata & aṭṭhangika, K. nibbāpana). See also abbuḷhana and abbhāhana.
Abbuda (nt.) [etym. unknown, orig. meaning "swelling", the Sk. form arbuda seems to be a trsl. of P. abbuda] 1. the foetus
in the 1st & 2nd months after conception, the 2nd of the five prenatal stages of development, viz. kalala, abbuda, pesi,
ghana, pasākha Nd1 120; Miln 40; Vism 236. -- 2. a tumour, canker, sore Vin III.294, 307 (only in Samantapāsādikā; both times as sāsanassa a). -- 3. a very high numeral, appld. exclusively to the denotation of a vast period of suffering in Purgatory; in this sense used as adj. of Niraya (abbudo nirayo the "vast--period" hell, cp. nirabbuda). S I.149 = A II.3 (chattiŋsati pañca ca abbudāni); S I.152 = A V.173 = Sn p. 126 (cp. SnA 476: abbudo
nāma koci pacceka--nirayo nɔ atthi, Avīcimhi yeva abbuda--gaṇanāya paccanokāso pana abbudo nirayo ti vutto; see also Kindred Sayings p. 190); J III.360 (sataŋ ninnahuta--sahassānaŋ ekaŋ abbudaŋ). -- 4. a term used for "hell" in the riddle S I.43 (kiŋsu lokasmiŋ abhudaŋ "who are they who make a hell on earth" Mrs. Rh. D. The answer is "thieves"; so we can scarcely take it in meaning of 2 or 3. The C. has vināsa--karaṇaŋ.
see abbahati.
Abbuḷhana (nt.) [fr. abbahati = abbuhati (abbuḷhati)] the pulling out (of a sting), in phrase taṇhā--sallassa
abbuḷhanaŋ as one of the 12 achievements of a Mahesi Nd1 343 = Nd2 503 (eds. of Nd1 have abbūhana, v. l. SS abbussāna; ed. of Nd2 abbuḷhana, v. l. SS abbahana, BB abbuhana). Cp. abbāhana.
Abbūḷha (adj.) [Sk. ābṛd̤ha, pp. of a + bṛh1, see abbahati] drawn out, pulled (of a sting or dart), fig. removed, destroyed. Most freq. in combn. °salla with the sting removed, having the sting (of craving thirst, taṇhā) pulled out D II.283 (v. l. SS asammūḷha); Sn 593, 779 (= abbūḷhita--salla Nd1 59; rāgâdi--sallānaŋ abbūḷhattā a. SnA 518); J III.390 = Vv 8310 = Pv I.87 = DhA I.30. -- In other connection: M I.139 = A III.84 (°esika = taṇhā pahīnā; see esikā); Th 1, 321; KhA 153 (°soka).
Abbūḷhatta (nt.) [abstr. of abbūḷha] pulling out, removal, destroying SnA 518.
at J III.541) [pp. of abbāheti Caus. of abbāhati] pulled out, removed, destroyed Nd1 59 (abbūḷhita--sallo + uddhaṭa° etc. for abbūḷha); J III.541 (uncertain reading; v. l. BB appahita, SS abyūhita; C. expls. pupphakaŋ ṭhapitaŋ appaggharakaŋ kataŋ; should we explain as ā + vi + ūh and read abyūhita?).

Abbeti [Trenckner, Notes 64 n. 19] at J III.34 & VI.17 is probably a mistake in MSS for appeti.
abhi + ava + kiṇṇa, cp. abhikiṇṇa] 1.filled M I.387 (paripuṇṇa +); DhA IV.182 (pañca jātisatāni a.). -- 2. [seems to be misunderstood for abbocchinna, a + vi + ava + chinna] uninterrupted, constant, as °ŋ adv. in combn. with satataŋ samitaŋ
A IV.13 = 145; Kvu 401 (v. l. abbhokiṇṇa), cp. also Kvu trsl. 231 n. 1 (abbokiṇṇa undiluted?); Vbh 320. -- 3. doubtful spelling at Vin III.271 (Bdhgh on Pārāj. III.1, 3).
Abbocchinna see abbokiṇṇa see abbokiṇṇa 2 and abbhochinna.
Abbohārika (adj.) [a + vi + ava + hārika of voharati] not of legal or conventional status, i. e. -- (a) negligible, not to be decided Vin III.91, 112 (see also Kvu trsl. 361 n. 4). -- (b) uncommon, extraordinary J III.309 (v. l. BB abbho°); V.271, 286 (Kern: ineffective).
Abbha (nt.) [Vedic abhra nt. & later Sk. abhra m. "dark cloud"; Idg. *m̊bhro, cp. Gr. a)fro\s scum, froth, Lat. imber rain; also Sk. ambha water, Gr. o)/mbros rain, Oir ambu water]. A (dense & dark) cloud, a cloudy mass A II.53 = Vin II.295 = Miln 273 in list of to things that obscure moon-- & sunshine, viz. abbhaŋ mahikā (mahiyā A) dhūmarajo (megho Miln), Rāhu. This list is referred to at SnA 487 & VvA 134. S I.101 (°sama pabbata a mountain like a thunder--cloud); J VI.581 (abbhaŋ rajo acchādesi); Pv IV.39 (nīl° = nīla--megha PvA 251). As f. abbhā at Dhs 617 & DhsA 317 (used in sense of adj. "dull"; DhsA expls. by valāhaka); perhaps also in abbhāmatta.
--kūṭa the point or summit of a storm--cloud Th 1, 1064; J VI.249, 250; Vv 11 (= valāhaka--sikhara VvA 12). --ghana a mass of clouds, a thick cloud It 64; Sn 348 (cp. SnA 348). --paṭala a mass of clouds DhsA 239. --mutta free from clouds Sn 687 (also as abbhāmutta Dh 382). --saŋvilāpa thundering S IV.289.
Abbhakkhāti [abhi + ā + khyā, cp. Sk. ākhyāti] to speak against to accuse, slander D I.161 = A I.161 (an--abbhakkhātu--kāma); IV.182 (id.); J IV.377. Cp. Intens. abbhācikkhati.
Abbhakkhāna (nt.) [fr. abbhakkhāti] accusation, slander, calumny D III.248, 250; M I.130; III.207; A III.290 sq.; Dh 139 (cp. DhA III.70).
Abbhacchādita [pp. of abhi + ā + chādeti] covered (with) Th 1, 1068.
Abbhañjati [abhi + añj] to anoint; to oil, to lubricate M I.343 (sappi--telena); S IV.177; Pug 56; DhA III.311 = VvA 68 (sata--pāka--telena). Caus. abbhañjeti same J I.438 (telena °etvā); V.376 (sata--pāka--telena °ayiŋsu); Caus. II. abbhanjāpeti to cause to anoint J III.372.
Abbhañjana (nt.) [fr. abbhañjati] anointing, lubricating, oiling; unction, unguent Vin I.205; III.79; Miln 367 (akkhassa a.); Vism 264; VvA 295.
Abbhatika (adj.) [ā + bhata + ika, bhṛ] brought (to), procured, got, J VI.291.
Abbhatikkanta [pp. of abhi + ati + kram, cp. atikkanta] one who has thoroughly, left behind J V.376.
Abbhatīta [pp. of abhi + ati + i, cp. atīta & atikkanta] emphatic of atīta in all meanings, viz. 1 passed, gone by S II.183
(+ atikkanta); nt. °ŋ what is gone or over, the past J III.169. -- 2. passed away, dead M I.465; S IV.398; Th 1, 242, 1035. -- 3. transgressed, overstepped, neglected J III.541 (saŋyama).
Abbhattha (nt.) [abhi + attha2 in acc. abhi + atthaŋ, abhi in function of "towards" = homeward, as under abhi I.1 a; cp. Vedic abhi sadhasthaŋ to the seat R. V. IX. 21. 3] = attha2, only in phrase abbhatthaŋ gacchati "to go towards home", i. e. setting; fig. to disappear, vanish, M I.115, 119; III.25; A IV.32; Miln 305; pp. abhhattangata "set", gone, disappeared Dhs

1038 (atthangata +); Kvu 576.
Abbhatthatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abbhatta] "going towards setting", disappearance, death J V.469.
Abbhanumodati [abhi + anu + modati] to be much pleased at to show great appreciation of Vin I.196; D I.143, 190; S IV.224; Miln 29, 210; DhA IV.102 (v. l. °ānu°).
Abbhanumodana (nt.) (& °ā f.) [fr. abbhanumodati] being pleased, satisfaction, thanksgiving DA I.227; VvA 52 (°ānu°); Sdhp 218.
Abbhantara (adj.) [abhi + antara; abhi here in directive function = towards the inside, in there, with--in, cp. abhi I.1 a]
= antara, i. e. internal, inner, being within or between; nt. °ŋ the inner part, interior, interval (also as °--) Vin I.111 (satt° with interval of seven); A IV.16 (opp. bāhira); Dh 394 (id.); Th 1, 757 (°âpassaya lying inside); J III.395 (°amba the inside of the Mango); Miln 30 (°e vāyo jivo), 262, 281 (bāhir--abbhantara dhana); DhA II.74 (adj. c. gen. being among; v. l. abbhantare). <-> Cases used adverbially: instr. abbhantarena in the meantime, in between DhA II.59. loc. abbhantare in the midst of, inside of, within (c. gen. or --°) J I.262 (rañño), 280 (tuyhaŋ); DhA II.64 (v. l. antare), 92 (sattavass°); PvA 48 (= anto).
Abbhantarika (adj.--n.) [fr. abbhantara, cp. Sk. abhyantara in same meaning] intimate friend, confidant, "chum" J I.86 (+ ativissāsika), 337 ("insider", opp. bāhiraka).
Abbhantarima (adj.) [superl. formation fr. abbhantara in contrasting function] internal, inner (opp. bāhirima) Vin III.149; J V.38.
Abbhākuṭika (adj.) [a + bhākuṭi + ka; Sk. bhrakuṭi frown] not frowning, genial Vin III.181 (but here spelt bhākuṭikabhākuṭika); D I.116, cp. DA I.287; DhA IV.8 (as v. l.; T. has abbhokuṭika).
Abbhāgata [abhi + ā + gata] having arrived or come; (m.) a guest, stranger Vv 15 (= abhi--āgata, āgantuka VvA 24).
Abbhāgamana (nt.) [abhi + ā + gamana; cp. Sk. abhyāgama] coming arrival, approach Vin IV.221.
Abbhāghāta [abhi + āghāta] slaughtering--place Vin III.151 (+ āghāta).
Abbhācikkhati [Intens. of abbhākkhāti] to accuse, slander, calumniate D I.161; III.248, 250; M I.130, 368, 482; III.207; A I.161.
Abbhāna (nt.) [abhi + āyana of ā + yā (i)] coming back, rehabilitation of a bhikkhu who has undergone a penance for an expiable offence Vin I.49 (°âraha), 53 (id.), 143, 327; II.33, 40, 162; A I.99. -- Cp. abbheti.
Abbhāmatta (adj.) [abbhā + matta (?) according to the Pāli Com.; but more likely = Vedic abhva huge, enormous, monstrous, with ā metri causa. On abhva (a + bhū what is contradictory to anything that is) cp. abbhuta & abbhuŋ, and see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under dubius] monstrous, dreadful, enormous, "of the size of a large cloud" (thus C. on S I.205 & J III.309) S I.205 = Th 1, 652 (v. l. abbha° & abbhāmutta) = J III.309 (v. l. °mutta).
Abbhāhata [abhi + ā + hata, pp. of han] struck, attacked, afflicted S I.40 (maccunā); Th 1, 448; Sn 581; J VI.26, 440; Vism 31, 232; DA I.140, 147; DhA IV.25.
Abbhāhana (nt.) [either = abbāhana or āvāhana] in udaka° the pulling up or drawing up of water Vin II.318 (Bdhgh. on Cullavagga V.16, 2, corresponding to udaka--vāhana on p. 122).
Abbhita [pp. of abbheti] 1. come back, rehabilitated, reinstated Vin III.186 = IV.242 (an°). -- 2. uncertain reading at Pv

I.123 in sense of "called" (an° uncalled), where id. p. at J III.165 reads anavhāta & at Th 2, 129 ayācita.
Abbhu [a + bhū most likely = Vedic abhva and P. abbhuŋ, see also abbhāmatta] unprofitableness, idleness, nonsense J
V.295 (= abhūti avad̤d̤hi C.).
Abbhuŋ (interj.) [Vedic abhvaŋ, nt. of abhva, see expld. under abbhamatta. Not quite correct Morris J P T S. 1889, 201: abbhuŋ = ā + bhuk; cp also abbhuta] alas! terrible, dreadful, awful (excl. of fright & shock) Vin II. 115 (Bdhgh. expls. as "utrāsa--vacanam--etaŋ"); M I.448. <-> See also abbhu & abbhuta.
Abbhukkiraṇa (nt.) [abhi + ud + kṛ] drawing out, pulling, in daṇd̤a--sattha° drawing a stick or sword Nd2 5764 (cp. abbhokkiraṇa). Or is it abbhuttīraṇa (cp. uttiṇṇa outlet).
Abbhukkirati [abhi + ud + kirati] to sprinkle over, to rinse (with water) D II.172 (cakkaratanaŋ; neither with Morris J P T S. 1886, 131 "give up", nor with trsl. of J II.311 "roll along"); J V.390; PvA 75. Cp. abbhokkirati.
Abbhuggacchati [abhi + ud + gacchati] to go forth, go out, rise into D I.112, 127; A III.252 (kitti--saddo a.); Pug 36. ger. °gantvā J I 88 (ākāsaŋ), 202; DhA IV.198. aor. °gañchi M I.126 (kittisaddo); J I.93. -- pp. abbhuggata.
Abbhuggata [pp. of abbhuggacchati] gone forth, gone out, risen D I.88 (kitti--saddo a., cp. DhA I.146: sadevakaŋ lokaŋ ajjhottharitvā uggato), 107 (saddo); Sn p. 103 (kittisaddo).
Abbhuggamana (nt.--adj.) [fr. abbhuggacchati] going out over, rising over (c. acc.) PvA 65 (candaŋ nabhaŋ abbhuggamanaŋ; so read for T. abbhuggamānaŋ).
Abbhujjalana (nt.) [abhi + ud + jalana, from jval] breathing out fire, i. e. carrying fire in one's month (by means of a charm) D I.11 (= mantena mukhato aggi--jala--nīharaṇaŋ DA I.97).
Abbhuṭṭhāti (°ṭṭhahati) [abhi + ud + sthā] to get up to, proceed to, D I.105 (cankamaŋ).
Abbhuṇṇata [pp. of abbhunnamati] standing up, held up, erect J V.156 (in abbhuṇṇatatā state of being erect.
stiffness), 197 (°unnata; v. l. abbhantara, is reading correct?).
Abbhuṇha (adj.) [ahhi + uṇha] (a) very hot DhA II.87 (v. l. accuṇha). (b) quite hot, still warm (of milk) DhA II.67. Abbhuta1
Abbhuta1 (adj. nt.) [*Sk. adbhuta which appears to be constructed from the Pāli & offers like its companion *āścarya (acchariya abbhuta see below) serious difficulties as to etym. The most probable solution is that P. abbhuta is a secondary adj.--formation from abbhuŋ which in itself is nt. of abbha = Vedic abhva (see etym. under abbhāmatta and cp. abbhu, abbhuŋ & J.P.T.S. 1889, 201). In meaning abbhuta is identical with Vedic abhva contrary to what usually happens, i. e. striking, abnormal, gruesome, horrible etc.; & that its significance as a + bhū ("unreal?") is felt in the background is also evident from the traditional etym. of the Pāli Commentators (see below). See also acchariya] terrifying, astonishing; strange, exceptional, puzzling, extraordinary, marvellous, supernormal. Described as a term of surprise & consternation (vimhayɔ āvahassɔ adhivacanaŋ DA I.43 & VvA 329) & expld. as "something that is not" or "has not been before", viz. abhūtaŋ ThA 233; abhūta--pubbatāya abbhutaŋ VvA 191, 329; abhūta--pubbaŋ DA I.43. -- 1. (adj.) wonderful, marvellous etc. Sn 681 (kiŋ °ŋ, combd. with lomahaŋsana); J IV.355 (id.); Th 2, 316 (abbhutaŋ vata vācaŋ bhāsasi = acchariyaŋ ThA 233); Vv 449 (°dassaneyya); Sdhp 345, 496. -- 2. (nt.) the wonderful, a wonder, marvel S IV.371, also in °dhamma (see Cpd.). Very freq. in combn. with acchariyaŋ and a part. of exclamation, viz, acchariyaŋ bho abbhutaŋ bho wonderful indeed & beyond comprehension, strange & stupefying D I.206; acch. vata bho abbh. vata bho D I.60; acch. bhante abbh. A II.50; aho acch. aho abbh. J I.88; acch. vata abbh. vata Vv 8316. -- Thus also in phrase acchariyā abbhutā dhammā wonderful & extraordinary

signs or things M III.118, 125; A II.130; IV.198; Miln 8; and in acchariya--abbhutacitta--jāta dumbfounded & surprised J I.88; DhA IV.52; PvA 6, 50.
--dhamma mysterious phenomenon, something wonderful, supernormal; designation of one of the nine angas or divisions of the Buddhist Scriptures (see nava B 2) Vin III.8; M I.133; A II.103; III.86, 177; Pug 43; Miln 344; PvA 2, etc.
Abbhuta2 (nt.) [= abbhuta1 in the sense of invoking strange powers in gambling, thus being under direct spell of the "unknown"] a bet, a wager, only in phrase abbhutaŋ karoti (sahassena) to make a bet or to bet (a thousand, i. e. kahāpaṇa's or pieces of money) Vin III.138; IV.5; J I.191; V.427; VI.192; PvA 151; & in phrase pañcahi sahassehi abbhutaŋ hotu J VI.193.
Abbhudāharati [abhi + ud + ā + harati] to bring towards, to fetch, to begin or introduce (a conversation) M II.132. Abbhudīreti [abhi + ud + īreti] to raise the voice, to utter Th 2, 402; DA I.61; Sdhp 514.
Abbhudeti [abhi + ud + eti] to go out over, to rise A II.50, 51 (opp. atthaŋ eti, of the sun). -- ppr. abbhuddayaŋ Vv 6417 (= abhi--uggacchanto VvA 280; abbhusayaŋ ti pi pāṭho).
Abbhuddhunāti [abhi + ud + dhunāti] to shake very much Vv 649 (= adhikaŋ uddhunāti VvA 278). Abbhunnadita [pp. of abhi + ud + nadati] resounding, resonant Th 1, 1065).
Abbhunnamati [abhi, + ud + namati] to, spring up, burst forth D II.164. -- pp. abbhuṇṇata (& °unnata), q. v. <-> Caus. abbhunnāmeti to stiffen, straighten out, hold up, erect D I.120 (kāyaŋ one's body); A II.245 (id.); D I.126 (patodalaṭṭhiŋ; opp. apanāmeti to bend down).
Abbhuyyāta [pp. of abbhuyyāti] marched against, attacked Vin I.342; M II.124.
Abbhuyyāti [abhi + up + yāti of yā] to go against, to go against, to march (an army) against, to attack S I.82 (aor
°uyyāsi). -- pp. abbhuyyāta (q. v.).
Abbhusūyaka (adj.) [abhi + usūyā + ka] zealous, showing zeal, endeavouring in (--°) Pgdp 101.
Abbhussakati & °usukkati [abhi + ud + ṣvaṣk, see sakkati] to go out over, rise above (acc.), ascend, freq. in
phrase ādicco nabhaŋ abbhussakkamāno M I.317 = S III.156 = It 20. -- See also S I.65; V.44; A I.242 (same simile); V.22 (id.).
Abbhussahanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhi + *utsahana, cp. ussāha] instigation, incitement Vin II.88.
Abbhusseti [abhi + ud + seti of śī] to rise; v. l. at Vv 6417 according to VvA 280: abbhuddayaŋ (see abbhudeti)
abbhussayan ti pi pāṭho.
Abbheti [abhi + ā + i] to rehabilitate a bhikkhu who has been suspended for breach of rules Vin II.7 (abbhento), 33
(abbheyya); III.112 (abbheti), 186 = IV.242 (abbhetabba) -- pp. abbhita (q. v.). See also abbhāna.
Abbhokāsa [abhi + avakāsa] the open air, an open & unsheltered space D I.63 (= alagganatthena a. viya DA I.180), 71 (=acchanna DA I.210), 89; M III.132; A II.210; III.92; IV.437, V.65; Sn p. 139 (°e nissinna sitting in the open) J I.29, 215; Pug 57.
Abbhokāsika (adj.) [fr. abbhokāsa] belonging to the open air, one who lives in the open, the practice of certain ascetics.

D I.167; M I.282; A III.220; Vin V.131, 193; J IV.8 (+ nesajjika); Pug 69; Miln 20, 342. (One of the 13 Dhutaŋgas). See also Nd1 188; Nd2 587.
--anga the practice or system of the "campers--out" Nd1 558 (so read for abbhokāsi--kankhā, cp. Nd1 188). Abbhokiṇṇa [pp. of abbhokirati] see abbokiṇṇa.
Abbhokirati [abhi + ava + kirati] to sprinkle over, to cover, bedeck Vv 59 (= abhi--okirati abhippakirati), 3511 (v. l. abbhuk°). Cp. abbhukkirati & abbhokkiraṇa <-> pp. abbhokiṇṇa see under abbokiṇṇa.
Abbhokuṭika spelling at DhA IV.8 for abbhākuṭika.
Abbhokkiraṇa (nt.) [fr. abbhokirati] in naṭānaŋ a. "turnings of dancers" DA I.84 in explQ of sobha--nagarakaŋ of D I.6.
Abbhocchinna (besides abbocch°, q.v. under abbokiṇṇa2) [a + vi + ava + chinna] not cut off, uninterrupted, continuous J I.470 (v. l. abbo°); VI.254, 373; Cp. I.63; Miln 72; Vism 362 (bb), 391 (bb).
Abbhohārika see abbo°. Aby° see avy°.
Abhabba (adj.) [a + bhavya. The Sk. abhavya has a different meaning] impossible, not likely, unable D III.13 sq., 19, 26 sq., 133; It 106, 117; Sn 231 (see KhA 189); Dh 32; J I 116; Pug 13.
--ṭṭhāna a (moral) impossibility of which there are 9 enumd. among things that are not likely to be found in an Arahant's character: see D III.133 & 235 (where the five first only are given as a set).
Abhabbatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhabba] an impossibility, unlikelihood Sn 232, cp. KhA 191.
Abhaya (adj.) [a + bhaya] free from fear or danger, fearless, safe Dh 258. -- nt. abhayaŋ confidence, safety Dh 317, cp.
DhA III.491. For further refs. see bhaya.
Abhi-- [prefix, Vedic abhi, which represents both Idg *m̊bhi, as in Gr. a)mfi/ around, Lat. ambi, amb round about, Oir. imb, Gall. ambi, Ohg. umbi, Ags. ymb, cp. also Vedic (Pāli) abhitaḥ on both sides; and Idg. *obhi, as in Lat. ob towards, against (cp. obsess, obstruct), Goth. bi, Ohg. Ags. bī = E. be--.
I. Meaning. -- 1. The primary meaning of abhi is that of taking possession and mastering, as contained in E. coming by and over--coming, thus literally having the function of (a) facing and aggressing = towards, against, on to, at (see II. 1, a); and (b) mastering = over, along over, out over, on top of (see II. 1, b). 2. Out of this is developed the fig. meaning of increasing, i. e., an intensifying of the action implied in the verb (see III. 1). Next to saŋ-- it is the most frequent modification preflx in the meaning of "very much, greatly" as the first part of a double--prefix cpd. (see III. 2), and therefore often seemingly superfluous, i. e., weakened in meaning, where the second part already denotes intensity as in abhi--vi--ji (side by side with vi--ji), abhi--ā--kkhā (side by side with ā--kkhā), abhi--anu--mud (side by side with anu--mud). In these latter cases abhi shows a purely deictic character corresponding to Ger. her--bei--kommen (for bei--kommen), E. fill up (for fill); e. g., abbhatikkanta (= ati ° C.), abbhatīta ("vorbei gegangen"), abbhantara ("with--in", b--innen or "in here"), abbhudāharati, abhipūreti ("fill up"), etc. (see also II. 1, c).
II. Lit. Meaning. -- 1. As single pref.: (a) against, to, on to, at--, viz., abbhatthangata gone towards home, abhighāta striking at, °jjhā think at, °mana thinking on, °mukha facing, turned towards, °yāti at--tack, °rūhati ascend, °lāsa long for, °vadati ad--dress, °sapati ac--curse, °hata hit at. (b) out, over, all around: abbhudeti go out over, °kamati exceed, °jāti off--spring, °jānāti know all over, °bhavati overcome, °vad̤d̤hati increase, °vuṭṭha poured out or over, °sandeti make over--flow, °siñcati sprinkle over. (c) abhi has the function of transitivising intrs. verbs after the manner of E. be-- (con--) and Ger. er--, thus resembling in meaning a simple Caus. formation, like the foll.: abhigajjati thunder on, °jānāti "er--kennen" °jāyati be--get, °tthaneti = °gajjati, °nadati "er tönen", °nandati approve of (cp. anerkennen), °passati con--template, °ramati indulge in, °ropeti

honour, °vud̤d̤ha increased, °saddahati believe in. -- 2. As base in compn. (2nd part of cpd.) abhi occurs only in combn. sam--abhi (which is, however, of late occurrence and a peeuliarity of later texts, and is still more freq. in BSk.: see under sam--).
III. Fig. Meaning (intensifying). -- 1. A single pref.: abhikiṇṇa strewn all over, °jalati shine forth, °jighacchati be very hungry, °tatta much exhausted, °tāpa very hot, °toseti pleuse greatly, °nava quite fresh, °nipuṇa very clever, °nīla of a deep black, °manāpa very pleasant, °mangaly very lucky, °yobbana full youth, °rati great liking, °ratta deep red, °ruci intense satisfaction, °rūpa very handsome (= adhika--rūpa C.), °sambuddha wide and fully--awake, cp. abbhuddhunāti to shake greatly (= adhikaŋuddh° C.). -- As 1st part of a prep.--cpd. (as modification--pref.) in foll. combinations: abhi--ud (abbhud--) °ati, °anu, °ava, °ā, °ni, °ppa, °vi, °saŋ. See all these s. v. and note that the contraction (assimilation before vowel) form of abhi is abbh°. -- On its relation to pari, see pari°, to ava see ava°.
IV. Dialectical Variation. -- There are dial. variations in the use and meanings of abhi. Vedic abhi besides corresponding to abhi in P. is represented also by ati°, adhi° and anu°, since all are similar in meaning, and psychologically easily fused and confused (cp. meanings: abhi = on to, towards; ati = up to and beyond; adhi = up to, towards, over; anu = along towards). For all the
foll. verbs we find in Pāli one or other of these three prefixes. So ati in °jāti, °pīḷita, °brūheti, °vassati, °vāyati, °veṭheti; also as vv. ll. with abhi--kīrati, °pavassati, °roceti, cp. atikkanta--abhi° (Sk. abhikrānta); adhi in °patthita, °pāteti, °ppāya, °ppeta, °bādheti, °bhū, °vāha (vice versa P. abhi--ropeti compared with Sk. adhiropayati); anu in °gijjhati, °brūheti, °sandahati.
Abhikankhati [abhi + kankhati] to desire after, long for, wish for S I.140, 198 (Nibbānaŋ); J II.428; IV.10, 241; VvA 38, 283; ThA 244. -- pp. abhikankhita. Cp. BSk. abhikānkṣati, e. g. Jtm. p. 221.
Abhikankhanatā (f.) [abhi + kankhana + tā] wishing, longing, desire DA I.242. Abhikankhita [pp. of abhikankhati] desired, wished, longed for VvA 201 (= abhijjhita). Abhikankhin (adj.) cp. wishing for, desirous (of --°) Th 2, 360 (sītibhāva°).
Abhikiṇṇa [pp. of abhikirati] 1. strewn over with (--°), adorned, covered filled Pv II.112 (puppha°). -- 2. overwhelmed, overcome, crushed by (--°) It 89 (dukkh°; vv. ll. dukkhâtiṇṇa & otiṇṇa) = A I.147 (which reads dukkhotiṇṇa). See also avatiṇṇa.
Abhikirati -- 1. [Sk. abhikirati] to sprinkle or cover over: see abhikiṇṇa 1. -- 2. [Sk. avakirati, cp. apakiritūna] to overwhelm, destroy, put out, throw away, crush S I.54; Th 1, 598; 2, 447 (ger. °kiritūna, reading of C. for T. apa°, expld. by chad̤d̤etvā); Dh 25 (°kīrati metri causa; dīpaŋ abhikīrati = viddhaŋseti vikirati DhA I.255; v. l. atikirati); J IV.121 (°kīrati; dīpaŋ = viddhaŋseti C.); VI.541 (nandiyo m° abhikīrare = abhikiranti abhikkamanti C.); DhA I.255 (inf. °kirituŋ). -- pp. abhikiṇṇa see abhikiṇṇa 2.
Abhikīḷati [abhi + kìḷati] to play (a game), to sport Miln 359 (kīḷaŋ).
Abhikūjita [abhi + kūjita, pp. of kūj] resounding (with the song of birds) Pv II.123 (cakkavāka°; so read for kujita). Cp.
Abhikkanta (adj.--n.) [pp. of abhikkamati, in sense of Sk. and also P. atikkanta] (a) (adj.) lit. gone forward, gone out,
gone beyond. According to the traditional expln. preserved by Bdhgh. & Dhp (see e. g. DA I.227 = KhA 114 = VvA 52) it is used in 4 applications: abhikkantasaddo khaya (+ pabbaniya KhA) sundarɔ--âbhirūpa--abbhanumodanesu dissati. These are: 1. (lit.) gone away, passed, gone out, departed (+ nikkhanta, meaning khaya "wane"), in phrase abhikkantāya rattiyā at the waning of the night Vin I.26; D II.220; M I.142. 2. excellent, supreme (= sundara) Sn 1118 (°dassāvin having the most exellent knowledge = aggadassāvin etc. Nd2 76); usually in compar °tara (+ paṇītatara) D I.62, 74, 216; A II.101; III.350 sq.; V.140, 207 sq.; DA I.171 (= atimanāpatara). 3. pleasing, superb, extremely wonderful, as exclamation °ŋ repeated with bho (bhante), showing appreciation (= abbhânumodana) D I.85, 110, 234; Sn p. 15, 24, etc. freq. 4. surpassing, beautiful (always with

°vaṇṇa = abhirūpa) Vin I.26; D II.220; M I.142; Pv II.110 = Vv 91 (= atimanāpa abhirūpa PvA 71); KhA 115 (= abhirūpachavin). -- (b) (nt.) abhikkantaŋ (combd. with and opp. to paṭikkantaŋ) going forward (and backward), approach (and receding) D I.70 (= gamaṇa + nivattana DA I.183); Vin III.181; A II.104, 106 sq.; VvA 6.
Abhikkama going forward, approach, going out Pv IV.12 (opp. paṭikkama going back); DhA III.124 (°paṭikkama).
Abhikkamati [Vedic abhikramati, abhi + kamati] to go forward, to proceed, approach D I.50 (=abhimukho kamati, gacchati, pavisati DA I.151); II.147, 256 (abhikkā<-> muŋ aor.); DhA III.124 (evaŋ °itabbaŋ evaŋ paṭikkamitabbaŋ thus to approach & thus to withdraw). -- pp. abhikkanta (q. v.).
Abhikkhaṇa1 (nt.) [fr. abhikkhanati] digging up of the ground M I.143.
Abhikkhaṇa2 (nt.) [abhi + *ikkhaṇa from īkṣ, cp. Sk. abhīkṣṇa of which the eontracted form is P. abhiṇha] only as acc. adv. °ŋ constantly, repeated, often Vv 2412 (= abhiṇhaŋ VvA 116); Pv II.84 (= abhiṇhaŋ bahuso PvA 107); Pug 31; DhA II.91.
Abhikkhaṇati [abhi + khaṇati] to dig up M I.142.
Abhikkhipati [abhi + khipati] to throw Dāvs III.60; cp. abhinikkhipati ibid. 12.
Abhigajjati [abhi + gajjati from garj, sound--root, cp. P. gaggara] (a) to roar, shout, thunder, to shout or roar at (c. acc.) Sn 831 (shouting or railing = gajjanto uggajjanto Nd1 172); ger. abhigajjiya thundering Cp. III.108. <-> (b) hum, chatter, twitter (of birds); see abhigajjin.
Abhigajjin (adj.) [fr. abhigajjati] warbling, singing, chattering Th 1, 1108, 1136. Abhigamanīya (adj.) [grd. of abhigacchati] to be approached, accessible PvA 9.
Abhigijjhati [abhi + gijjhati] 1. to be greedy for, to crave for, show delight in (c. loc.) Sn 1039 (kāmesu, cp. Nd2 77). -- 2. to envy (acc.) S I.15 (aññam--aññaŋ).
Abhigīta [pp. of abhigāyati, cp. gīta] 1. sung for. Only in one phrase, gāthābhigītaŋ, that which is gained by singing or chanting verses (Ger. "ersungen") S I.173 = Sn 81 = Miln 228. See SnA 151. -- 2. resounding with, filled with song (of birds) J VI.272 (= abhiruda).
Abhighāta [Sk. abhighāta, abhi + ghāta] (a) striking, slaying, killing PvA 58 (daṇd̤a°), 283 (sakkhara°). <-> (b) impact, contact DhsA 312 (rūpa° etc.).
Abhicetasika (adj.) [abhi + ceto + ika] dependent on the clearest consciousness. On the spelling see ābhic° (of jhāna) M I.33, 356; III.11; S II.278; A II.23; V.132. (Spelt. ābhi° at M I.33; A III.114; Vin V.136). See Dial. III.108.
Abhiceteti [abhi + ceteti] to intend, devise, have in mind J IV.310 (manasā pāpaŋ).
Abhicchanna (adj.) [abhi + channa] covered with, bedecked or adorned with (--°) J II.48 (hema--jāla°, v. l.
abhisañchanna), 370 (id.); Sn 772 (= ucchanna āvuṭa etc. Nd1 24, cp. Nd2 365).
Abhicchita (adj.) [abhi + icchita, cp. Sk. abhīpsita] desired J VI.445 (so read for abhijjhita).

Abhijacca (adj.) [Sk. ābhijātya; abhi + jacca] of noble birth J V.120. Abhijaneti occasional spelling for abhijāneti.
Abhijappati [abhi + jappati] to wish for, strive after, pray for S I.143 (read asmâbhijappanti & cp. Kindred Sayings p.
180) = J III.359 (= namati pattheti piheti C.); Ṣn 923, 1046 (+ āsiŋsati thometi; Nd2 79 = jappati & same under icchati). Cp. in meaning abhigijjhati.
Abhijappana (nt.) [doubtful whether to jappati or to japati to mumble, to which belongs jappana in kaṇŋa° DA I.97] in hattha° casting a spell to make the victim throw up or wring his hands D I.11; DA I.97.
Abhijappā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijappati, cp. jappā] praying for, wishing, desire, longing Dhs 1059 = Nd2 taṇhā II.; Dhs 1136.
Abhijappin (adj.) [fr. abhijappati] praying for, desiring A III.353 (kāma--lābha°).
Abhijalati [abhi + jalati] to shine forth, ppr. °anto resplendent PvA 189.
Abhijavati [abhi + javati] to be eager, active Sn 668.
Abhijāta (adj.) [abi + jāta] of noble birth, well--born, S I.69; Vv 293; Miln 359 (°kulakulīna belonging to a family of high or noble birth).
Abhijāti (f.) [abhi + jāti] 1. Species. Only as t. t. in use by certain non--Buddhist teachers. They divided mankind into six species, each named after a colour D I.53, 54; A III.383 ff. (quoted DA I.162) gives details of each species. Two of them, the black and the white, are interpreted in a Buddhist sense at D III.250, M II.222, and Netti 158. This interpretation (but not the theory of the six species) has been widely adopted by subsequent Hindu writers. -- 2. Rebirth, descent, Miln 226.
Abhijātika (adj.) [fr. abhijāti] belonging to ones birth or race, born of, being by birth; only in cpd. kaṇhâbhijātika of dark birth, that is, low in the social scale D III.251 = A III.348; Sn 563 = Th 1, 833; cp. J P T S. 1893, 11; in sense of "evil disposed or of bad character" at J V.87 (= kāḷaka--sabhāva C.).
Abhijātitā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhijāti] the fact of being born, descendency VvA 216.
Abhijāna (nt. or m?) [Sk. abhijñāna] recognition, remembrance, recollection Miln 78. See also abhiññā.
Abhijānāti [abhi + jñā, cp. jānāti & abhiññā] to know by experience, to know fully or thoroughly, to recognise, know of
(c. acc.), to be conscious or aware of D I.143; S II.58, 105, 219, 278; III.59, 91; IV.50, 324, 399; V.52, 176, 282, 299; Sn 11 17 (diṭṭhiŋ Gotamassa na a.); J IV.142; Pv II.710 = II.103 (nɔābhijānāmi bhuttaŋ vā pītaŋ); Sdhp 550; etc. -- Pot. abhijāneyya Nd2 78a, & abhijaññā Sn 917, 1059 (= jāneyyāsi SnA 592); aor. abhaññāsi Sn p. 16. -- ppr. abhijānaŋ S IV.19, 89; Sn 788
(= °jānanto C.), 1114 (= °jānanto Nd2 78b) abhijānitva DhA IV.233; abhiññāya S IV.16; V.392; Sn 534 (sabbadhammaŋ), 743 (jātikkhayaŋ), 1115, 1148; It 91 (dhammaŋ); Dh 166 (atta--d--atthaŋ); freq. in phrase sayaŋ abhiññāya from personal knowledge or self--experience It 97 (v.l. abhiññā); Dh 353; and abhiññā [short form, like ādā for ādāya, cp. upādā] in phrase sayaŋ abhiññā D I.31 (+ sacchikatvā); S II.217; It 97 (v.l. for °abhiññāya), in abhiññā--vosita perfected by highest knowledge S I.167 = 175 = Dh 423 ("master of supernormal lore" Mrs Rh. D. in kindred S. p. 208; cp. also DhA IV.233); It 47 = 61 = 81, and perhaps also in phrase sabbaŋ abhiññapariññeyya S IV.29. -- grd. abhiññeyya S IV.29; Sn 558 (°ŋ abhiññātaŋ known is the knowable); Nd2 s.v.; DhA IV.233. -- pp. abhiññāta (q. v.).

Abhijāyati [abhi + jāyati, Pass. of jan, but in sense of a Caus. = janeti] to beget, produce, effect, attain, in phrase
akaṇhaŋ asukkaŋ Nibbānaŋ a. D III.251; A III.384 sq. At Sn 214 abhijāyati means "to behave, to be", cp. SnA 265 (abhijāyati = bhavati).
Abhijigiŋsati [abhi + jigiŋsati] to wish to overcome, to covet J VI.193 (= jinituŋ icchati C). Burmese scribes spell °jigīsati; Th 1, 743 ("cheat"? Mrs Rh. D.; "vernichten" Neumann). See also abhijeti, and nijigiŋsanatā.
Abhijighacchati [abhi + jighacchati] to be very hungry PvA 271.
Abhijīvanika (adj.) [abhi + jīvana + ika] belonging to one's livehood, forming one's living Vin I.187 (sippa).
Abhijīhanā (f.) [abhi + jīhanā of jeh to open ones mouth] strenuousness, exertion, strong endeavour J VI.373 (viriyakaraṇa C.).
Abhijeti [abhi + jayati] to win, acquire, conquer J VI.273 (ābhi° metri causā). Abhijoteti [abhi + joteti] to make clear, explain, illuminate J V.339.
Abhijjanaka (adj.) [a + bhijjana + ka, from bhijja, grd. of bhid] not to be broken, not to be moved or changed, uninfluenced J II.170; DhA III.189.
Abhijjamāna (adj.) [ppr. passive of a + bhid, see bhindati] that which is not being broken up or divided. In the stock descrīption of the varieties of the lower Iddhi the phrase udake pi abhijjamāne gacchati is doubtful. The principal passages are D I.78, 212; III.112, 281; M I.34, 494; II.18; A I.170, 255; III.17; V.199; S II 121; V.264. In about half of these passages the reading is abhijjamāno. The various rcadings show that the MSS also are equally divided on this point. Bdgh. (Vism 396) reads °māne, and explains it, relying on Ps II.208, as that sort of water in which a man does not sink. Pv III.11 has the same idiom. Dhammapāla's note on that (PvA 169) is corrupt. At D I.78 the Colombo ed. 1904, reads abhejjamāne and tr. ʻnot dividing (the water)ʼ; at D I.212 it reads abhijjamāno and tr. ʻnot sinking (in the water)ʼ.
Abhijjhā (f.) [fr. abhi + dhyā (jhāyati1), cp. Sk. abhidhyāna], covetousness, in meaning almost identical with lobha (cp.
Dhs. trsl. 22) D I.70, 71 (°āya cittaŋ parisodheti he cleanses his heart from coveting; abhijjhāya = abl.; cp. DA I.211 = abhijjhāto); M I.347 (id.); D III.49, 71 sq., 172, 230, 269; S IV.73, 104, 188, 322 (adj. vigatɔâbhijjha), 343 (°āyavipāka); A I.280; III.92; V.251 sq.; It 118; Nd1 98 (as one of the 4 kāya--ganthā, q. v.); Nd2 taṇhā II.1; Pug 20, 59; Dhs 1136 (°kāyagantha); Vbh 195, 244 (vigatɔâbhijjha), 362, 364, 391; Nett 13; DhA I.23; PvA 103, 282; Sdhp 56, 69. -- Often combd with °domanassa covetousness & discontent, e. g. at D III.58, 77, 141, 221, 276; M I.340; III.2; A I.39, 296; II.16, 152; IV.300 sq., 457 sq.; V.348, 351; Vbh 105, 193 sq. --anabhijjhā absence of covetousness Dhs 35, 62. -- See also anupassin, gantha, domanassa, sīla.
Abhijjhātar see abhijjhitar.
Abhijjhāti [cp. abhidyāti, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāyati] to wish for (acc.), long for, covet S V.74 (so read for
abhijjhati); ger. abhijjhāya J VI.174 (= patthetvā C.). -- pp. abhijjhita.
Abhijjhāyati [Sk. abhidhyāyati, abhi + jhāyati1; see also abhijjhāti] to wish for, covet (c. acc.). Sn 301 (aor.
abhijjhāyiŋsu = abhipatthayamāna jhāyiŋsu Sn A 320).
(adj.) [cp. jhāyin from jhāyati1; abhijjhālu with °ālu for °āgu which in its turn is for āyin. The B.Sk. form is abhidyālu, e. g. Divy 301, a curious reconstruction] covetous D I.139; III.82; Ṣ II.168; III.93; A I.298; II.30, 59, 220 (an° + avyapannacitto sammādiṭṭhiko at conclusion of sīla); V.92 sq., 163, 286 sq.; It 90, 91; Pug 39, 40.

Abhijjhiṭṭa v. l. at DhA IV.101 for ajjhiṭṭha.
Abhijjhita [pp. of abhijjhāti] coveted, J. VI.445; usually neg. an° not coveted, Vin I.287; Sn 40 (= anabhipatthita Sn A 85;
cp. Nd2 38); Vv 474 (= na abhikankhita VvA 201).
Abhijjhitar [n. ag. fr. abhijjhita in med. function] one who covets M I.287 (T. abhijjhātar, v. l. °itar) = A V.265 (T. °itar,
v. l. °ātar).
Abhiñña (adj.) (usually --°) [Sk. abhijña] knowing, possessed of knowledge, esp. higher or supernormal knowledge
(abhiññā), intelligent; thus in chalabhiñña one who possesses the 6 abhiññās Vin III.88; dandh° of sluggish intellect D III.106; A II.149; V.63 (opp. khipp°); mah° of great
insight S II.139. -- Compar. abhiññatara S V.159 (read bhiyyo °bhiññataro).
Abhiññatā (f.) [fr. abhiññā] in cpd. mahā° state or condition of great intelligence or supernormal knowledge S IV.263; V.175, 298 sq.
Abhiññā1 (f.) [fr. abhi + jñā, see jānāti]. Rare in the older texts. It appears in two contexts. Firstly, certain conditions are said to conduce (inter alia) to serenity, to special knowledge (abhiññā), to special wisdom, and to Nibbāna. These conditions precedent are the Path (S V.421 = Vin I.10 = S IV.331), the Path + best knowledge and full emancipation (A V.238), the Four Applications of Mindfulness (S V.179) and the Four Steps to Iddhi (S. V.255). The contrary is three times stated; wrong--doing, priestly superstitions, and vain speculation do not conduce to abhiññā and the rest (D III.131; A III.325 sq. and V.216). Secondly, we find a list of what might now be called psychic powers. It gives us 1, Iddhi (cp. levitation); 2, the Heavenly Ear (cp. clairaudience); 3, knowing others' thoughts (cp. thought--reading); 4, recollecting one's previous births; 5, knowing other people's rebirths; 6, certainty of emancipation already attained (cp. final assurance). This list occurs only at D III.281 as a list of abhiññās. It stands there in a sort of index of principal subjects appended at the end of the Dīgha, and belongs therefore to the very close of the Nikāya period. But it is based on older material. Descriptions of each of the six, not called abhiññā's, and interspersed by expository sentences or paragraphs, are found at D I.89 sq. (trsl. Dial. I.89 sq.); M I.34 (see Buddh. Suttas, 210 sq.); A I.255, 258 = III.17, 280 = IV.421. At S I.191; Vin II.16; Pug 14, we have the adj. chaḷabhiññā ("endowed with the
6 Apperceptions"). At S II.216 we have five, and at S V.282, 290 six abhiññā's mentioned in glosses to the text. And at S II.217, 222 a bhikkhu claims the 6 powers. See also M II.11; III.96. It is from these passages that the list at D III. has been made up, and called abhiññā's.
Afterwards the use of the word becomes stereotyped. In the Old Commentaries (in the Canon), in the later ones (of the 5th cent. A.D.), and in medieval and modern Pāli, abhiññā, nine times out ten, means just the powers given in this list. Here and there we find glimpses of the older, wider meaning of special, supernormal power of apperception and knowledge to be acquired by long training in life aud thought. See Nd1 108, 328 (expln. of ñāṇa); Nd2 s. v. and N0. 466; Ps I.35; II.156, 189; Vbh 228, 334; Pug 14; Nett 19, 20; Miln 342; Vism 373; Mhvs XIX.20; DA I.175; DhA II.49; IV.30; Sdhp 228, 470, 482. See also the discussion in the Cpd. 60 sp., 224 sq. For the phrase sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā and abhiññā--vosita see abhijānāti. The late phrase yathɔ abhiññaṃ means ʻas you please, according to liking, as you likeʼ, J V.365 (= yathādhippāyaṃ yathāruciṃ C.). For abhiññā in the use of an adj. (°abhiñña) see abhiñña.
Abhiññā2 ger. of abhijānāti.
Abhiññāta [pp. of abhijānāti] 1. known, recognised Sn 588 (abhiññeyyaŋ °ŋ). -- 2. (well)--known, distinguished D I.89 (°kolañña = pākaṭa--kulaja DA I.252), 235; Sn p. 115.
Abhiññeyya grd. of abhijānāti.

Abhiṭhāna (nt.) [abhi + ṭhāna, cp. abhitiṭṭhati; lit. that which stands out above others] a great or deadly crime. Only at Sn 231 = Kh VI.10 (quoted Kvu 109). Six are there mentioned, & are explained (KhA 189) as "matricide, parricide, killing an Arahant, causing schisms, wounding a Buddha, following other teachers". For other relations & suggestions see Dhs trsl. 267. -- See also ānantarika.
Abhiṇhaŋ (adv.) [contracted form of abhikkhaṇaŋ] repeatedly, continuous, often M I.442 (°āpattika a habitual offender), 446 (°kāraṇa continuous practice); Sn 335 (°saŋvāsa continuous living together); J I.190; Pug 32; DhA II.239; VvA 116 (= abhikkhaṇa), 207, 332; PvA 107 (= abhikkhaṇaŋ). Cp. abhiṇhaso.
Abhiṇhaso (adv.) [adv. case fr. abhiṇha; cp. bahuso = Sk. bahuśaḥ] always, ever S I.194; Th 1, 25; Sn 559, 560, 998. Abhitakketi [abhi + takketi] to search for Dāvs V.4.
Abhitatta [pp. of abhi +tapati] scorched (by heat), dried up, exhausted, in phrases uṇha° Vin II.220; Miln 97, and ghamma° S II.110, 118; Sn 1014; J II.223; VvA 40; PvA 114.
Abhitāpa [abhi + tāpa] extreme heat, glow; adj. very hot Vin III.83 (sīsa° sunstroke); M I.507 (mahā° very hot); Miln 67 (mahābhitāpatara much hotter); Pv IV.18 (mahā°, of niraya).
Abhitāḷita [abhi + tāḷita fr. tāḷeti] hammered to pieces, beaten, struck Vism 231 (muggara°).
Abhitiṭṭhati [abhi + tiṭṭhati] to stand out supreme, to excel, surpass D II.261; J VI.474 (abhiṭṭhāya = abhibhavitvā C.).
[not as Morris, J.P.T.S. 1886, 135, suggested fr. abhi + tud, but acc. to Kern, Toev. p. 4 fr. abhi + tūrv. (Cp. turati & tarati2 and Ved. turvati). Thus the correct spelling is °tuṇṇa = Sk. abhitūrṇa. The latter occurs as v. l. under the disguise of (sok--)âhituṇd̤a for °abhituṇṇa at M. Vastu III.2]. Overwhelmed, overcome, overpowered S II.20; Ps I.129 (dukkha°), 164; J I.407; 509 (°tuṇṇa); II.399, 401; III.23 (soka°); IV.330; V.268; Sdhp 281.
Abhito (indecl.) adv. case fr. prep. abhi etym.]. -- 1. round about, on both sides J VI.535 (= ubhayapassesu C.), 539. -- 2. near, in the presence of Vv 641 (= samīpe VvA 275).
Abhitoseti [abhi + toseti] to please thoroughly, to satisfy, gratify Sn 709 (= atīva toseti Sn A 496). Abhitthaneti [abhi + thaneti] to roar, to thunder J I.330, 332 = Cp. III.107.
Abhittharati [abhi + tarati2, evidently wrong for abhittarati] to make haste Dh 116 (= turitaturitaŋ sīghasīghaŋ karoti DhA III.4).
Abhitthavati [abhi + thavati] to praise J I.89; III.531; Dāvs III.23; DhA I.77; PvA 22; cp. abhitthunati. Abhitthavana (nt.) [fr. prec.] praise Th A 74.
Abhitthunati [abhi + thunati; cp. abhitthavati] to praise J I.17 (aor abhitthuniŋsu); cp. thunati 2. -- pp. °tthuta DhA I.88.
Abhida1 (adj.) as attr. of sun & moon at M II.34, 35 is doubtful in reading & meaning; vv. ll. abhidosa & abhidesa, Neumann trsl. "unbeschränkt". The context seems to require a meaning like "full, powerful" or unbroken, unrestricted (abhijja or abhīta

"fearless"?") or does abhida represent Vedic abhidyu heavenly? Abhida2
Abhida2 Only in the difficult old verse D II.107 (= S V.263 = A IV.312 = Nd 64 = Nett 60 = Divy 203). Aorist 3rd sg. fr. bhindati he broke.
Abhidassana (nt.) [abhi + dassana] sight, appearance, show J VI.193. Abhideyya in sabba° at PvA 78 is with v. l. BB to be read sabbapātheyyaŋ.
Abhidosa (°--) the evening before, last night; °kālakata M I.170 = J I.81; °gata gone last night J VI.386 (= hiyyo paṭhama--yāme C.).
Abhidosika belonging to last night (of gruel) Vin III.15; Miln 291. See ābhi°. Abhiddavati [abhi + dru, cp. dava2] to rush on, to assail Mhvs 6, 5; Dāvs III.47. Abhidhamati [abhi + dhamati, cp. Sk. abhi° & api--dhamati] blow on or at A I.257.
Abhidhamma [abhi + dhamma] the "special Dhamma," i. e., 1. theory of the doctrine, the doctrine classified, the
doctrine pure and simple (without any admixture of literary grace or of personalities, or of anecdotes, or of arguments ad personam), Vin I.64, 68; IV.144; IV.344. Coupled with abhivinaya, D III.267; M I.272. -- 2. (only in the Chronicles and Commentaries) name of the Third Piṭaka, the third group of the canonical books. Dpvs V.37; PvA 140. See the detailed discussion at DA I.15, 18 sq. [As the word abhidhamma standing alone is not found in Sn or S or A, and only once or twice in the Dialogues, it probably came into use only towards the end of the period in which the 4 great Nikāyas grew up.]
--kathā discourse on philosophical or psychological matters, M I.214, 218; A III.106, 392. See dhammakathā. Abhidhammika see ābhidhammika.
Abhidhara (adj.) [abhi + dhara] firm, bold, in °māna firmminded Dh p. 81 (acc. to Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 135; not verified).
Abhidhāyin (adj.) [abhi + dhāyin fr. dhā]" putting on", designing, calling, meaning Pgdp 98. Abhidhāreti [abhi + dhāreti] to hold aloft J I.34 = Bu IV.1.
Abhidhāvati [abhi + dhāvati] to run towards, to rush about, rush on, hasten Vin II.195; S I.209; J II.217; III.83; DhA IV.23.
Abhidhāvin (adj.) fr. abhidhāvati] "pouring in", rushing on, running J VI.559.
Abhinata [pp. of abhi + namati] bent, (strained, fig. bent on pleasure M I.386 (+ apanata); S I.28 (id.; Mrs. Rh. D.
"strained forth", cp. Kindred S I.39). See also apanata.
Abhinadati [abhi + nadati] to resound, to be full of noise J VI.531. Cp. abhinādita.
Abhinandati [abhi + nandati] to rejoice at, find pleasure in (acc.), approve of, be pleased or delighted with (acc.) D I.46 (bhāsitaŋ), 55 (id.), 158, 223; M I.109, 458; S I.32 (annaŋ), 57, 14, (cakkhuŋ, rūpe etc.); A IV.411; Th 1, 606; Dh 75, 219; Sn 1054, 1057, 1111; Nd2 82; Miln 25; DA I.160; DhA III.194 (aor. abhinandi, opp. paṭikkosi) VvA 65 (vacanaŋ). -- pp.

abhinandita (q. v.). <-> Often in combn. with abhivadati (q. v.).
Abhinandana (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandanā], pleasure, delight, enjoyment D I.244; M I.498; J IV.397. Abhinandita [pp. of abhinandati] only in an° not enjoyed, not (being) an object of pleasure S IV.213 = It 38; S V. 319.
Abhinandin (adj.) [fr. abhinandati, cp. nandin] rejoicing at, finding pleasure in (loc. or --°), enjoying A II.54 (piyarūpa);
esp. freq. in phrase (taṇhā) tatratatrɔâbhinandinī finding its pleasure in this or that [cp. B.Sk. tṛṣṇā tatra--tatrɔâbhinandinī M Vastu III.332] Vin I.10; S V.421; Ps II.147; Nett 72, etc.
Abhinamati [abhi + namati] to bend. -- pp. abhinata (q.v.). Abhinaya [abhi + naya] a dramatic representation VvA 209 (sākhā°).
Abhinava (adj.) [abhi + nava] quite young, new or fresh Vin III.337; J II.143 (devaputta), 435 (so read for accuṇha in
expln of paccaggha; v.v. ll. abbhuṇha & abhiṇha); ThA 201 (°yobbana = abhiyobbana); PvA 40 (°saṇṭhāna), 87 (= paccaggha) 155.
Abhinādita [pp. of abhinādeti, Caus. of abhi + nad; see nadati] resounding with (--°), filled with the noise (or song) of (birds) J VI.530 (= abhinadanto C.); PvA 157 (= abhiruda).
Abhinikūjita (adj.) [abhi + nikūjita] resounding with, full of the noise of (birds) J V.232 (of the barking of a dog), 304 (of the cuckoo); so read for °kuñjita T.). Cp. abhikūjita.
Abhinikkhamati [abhi + nikkhamati] to go forth from (abl.), go out, issue Dhs A 91; esp. fig. to leave the household life, to retire from the world Sn 64 (= gehā abhinikkhamitvā kāsāya--vattho hutvā Sn A 117).
Abhinikkhamana (nt.) [abhi + nikkhamana] departure, going away, esp. the going out into monastic life, retirement, renunciation. Usually as mahā° the great renunciation J I.61; PvA 19.
Abhinikkhipati [abhi + nikkhipati] to lay down, put down Davs III.12, 60. Abhiniggaṇhanā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhiniggaṇhāti] holding back Vin III.121 (+ abhinippīḷanā).
Abhiniggaṇhāti [abhi + niggaṇhāti] to hold back, restrain, prevent, prohibit; always in combn. with abhinippīḷeti M I.120; A V.230. -- Cp. abhiniggaṇhanā.
Abhinindriya [vv. ll. at all passages for ahīnindriya] doubtful meaning. The other is expld by Bdhgh at DA I.120 as
paripuṇṇ°; and at 222 as avikal--indriya not defective, perfect sense--organ. He must have read ahīn°. Abhi--n--indriya could only be expld as "with supersenseorgans", i. e. with organs of supernormal thought or perception, thus coming near in meaning to *abhiññindriya; We should read ahīn° throughout D I.34, 77, 186, 195. II.13; M II.18; III.121; Nd2 under pucchā6 (only ahīn°).
Abhininnāmeti [abhi + ninnāmeti cp. BSk. abhinirṇāmayati Lal. V. 439] to bend towards, to turn or direct to D I.76 (cittaŋ ñāṇa--dassanāya); M I.234; S I.123; IV.178; Pug 60.
Abhinipajjati [abhi + nipajjati] to lie down on Vin IV.273 (+ abhinisīdati); A IV.188 (in = acc. + abhinisīdati); Pug 67 (id.).
Abhinipatati [abhi + nipatati] to rush on (to) J II.8.

Abhinipāta (--matta) destroying, hurting (?) at Vbh 321 is expld. by āpātha--matta [cp. Divy 125 śastrâbhinipāta splitting open or cutting with a knife].
Abhinipātana (nt.) [fr. abhi--ni--pāteti in daṇd̤a--sattha° attacking with stick or knife Nd2 5. Q4.
Abhinipātin (adj.) [abhi + nipātin] falling on io (--°) J II.7.
Abhinipuṇa (adj.) [abhi + nipuṇa] very thorough, very clever D III.167.
Abhinippajjati [abhi + nippajjati] to be produced, accrue, get, come (to) M I.86 (bhogā abhinipphajjanti: sic) = Nd2 99 (has n'âbhinippajjanti). -- Cp. abhinipphādeti.
Abhinippata at J VI.36 is to be read abhinippanna (so v. l. BB.). Abhinippatta at Dhs 1035, 1036 is to be read abhinibbatta.
Abhinippanna (& °nipphanna) [abhi + nippanna, pp. of °nippajjati] produced, effected, accomplished D II.223 (siloka); J VI.36 (so read for abhinippata); Miln 8 (pph.).
Abhinippīḷanā (f.) [abstr. to abhinippīḷeti, cp. nippīḷana] pressing, squeezing, taking hold of Vin III.121 (+ abhiniggaṇhanā).
Abhinippīḷeti [abhi + nippīḷeti] to squeeze, crush, subdue Vism 399; often in combn. with abhiniggaṇhāti M I. 120; A V.230.
Abhinipphatti (f.) [abhi + nipphatti] production, effecting D II.283 (v. l. °nibbatti).
Abhinipphādeti [abhi + nipphādeti] to bring into existence, produce, effect, work, perform D I.78 (bhājana--vikatiŋ);
Vin II.183 (iddhiŋ); S V.156, 255; Miln 39.
Abhinibbatta [abhi + nibbatta, pp. of abhinibbattati] reproduced, reborn A IV.40, 401; Nd2 256 (nibbatta abhi°
pātubhūta); Dhs 1035, 1036 (so read for° nippatta); VvA 9 (puññɔânubhāva° by the power of merit). Abhinibbattati [abhi + nibbattati] to become, to be reproduced, to result Pug 51. -- pp. abhinibbatta. -- Cp. B.Sk.
wrongly abhinivartate].
Abhinibbatti (f.) [abhi + nibbatti] becoming, birth, rebirth, D I.229; II.283 (v. l. for abhinipphatti) S II.65
(punabbhava°), 101 (id.); IV.14, 215; A V.121; PvA 35.
Abhinibbatteti [abhi + nibbatteti, caus. of °nibbattati] to produce, cause, cause to become S III.152; A V.47; Nd2
under jāneti.
Abhinibbijjati [either Med. fr. nibbindati of vid for *nirvidyate (see nibbindati B), or secondary formation fr. ger.
nibbijja. Reading however not beyond all doubt] to be disgusted with, to avoid, shun, turn away from Sn 281 (T. abhinibbijjayātha, v. l. BB° nibbijjiyātha & °nibbajjiyātha, SnA expls. by vivajjeyyātha mā bhajeyyātha; v. l. BB. abhinippajjiyā) = A IV.172 (T. abhinibbajjayātha, vv. ll. °nibbajjeyyātha & °nibbijjayātha); ger. abhinibbijja Th 2, 84.
Abhinibbijjhati [abhi + nibbijjhati] to break quite through (of the chick coming through the shell of the egg) Vin III.3; M I.104 = S III.153 (read° nibbijjheyyun for nibbijjeyyun -- Cp. Buddh. Suttas 233, 234.

Abhinibbidā (f.) [abhi + nibbidā; confused with abhinibbhidā] disgust with the world, taedium Nett 61 (taken as abhinibbhidā, according to expln. as "padālanā--paññatti avijj°aṇd̤a--kosānaŋ"), 98 (so MSS, but C. abhinibbidhā).
Abhinibbuta (adj.) [abhi + nibbuta] perfectly cooled, calmed, serene, esp. in two phrases, viz. diṭṭha dhamm'âbhinibbuta A I.142 = M III.187; Sn 1087; Nd2 83, and abhinibbutatta of cooled mind Sn 343 (= aparid̤ayhamāna--citta SnA 347), 456, 469, 783. Also at Sdhp. 35.
Abhinibbhidā (f.) [this the better, although not correct spelling; there exists a confusion with abhinibbidā, therefore spelling also abhinibbidhā (Vin III.4, C. on Nett 98). To abhinibbijjhati, cp. B.Sk. abhinirbheda M Vastu I.272, which is wrongly referred to bhid instead of vyadh.] the successful breaking through (like the chick through the shell of the egg), coming into (proper) life Vin III.4; M I.104; 357; Nett 98 (C. reading). See also abhinibbidā.
Abhinimantanatā (f.) [abstr. to abhinimanteti] speaking to, adressing, invitation M I.331.
Abhinimanteti [abhi + nimanteti] to invite to (c. instr.), to offer to D I.61 (āsanena).
Abhinimmadana (nt.) [abhi + nimmadana] crushing, subduing, levelling out M III.132; A IV.189 sq. Abhinimmita [abhi + nimmita, pp. of abhinimmināti] created (by magic) Vv 161 (pañca rathā satā; cp. VvA 79).
Abhinimmināti [abhi + nimmināti, cp. BSk. abhinirmāti Jtm 32; abhinirminoti Divy 251; abhinirmimīte Divy 166] to create (by magic), produce, shape, make S III.152 (rūpaŋ); A I.279 (oḷārikaŋ attabhāvaŋ); Nd2 under pucchā6 (rūpaŋ manomayaŋ); VvA 16 (mahantaŋ hatthi--rāja--vaṇṇaŋ). -- pp. abhinimmita (q. v.).
Abhiniropana (nt.) & ā (f.) [fr. abhiniropeti] fixing one's mind upon, application of the mind Ps I.16, 21, 30, 69, 75, 90; Vbh 87; Dhs 7, 21, 298 (cp. Dhs trsl. II.19). See also abhiropana.
Abhiniropeti [abhi + niropeti] to implant, fix into (one's mind), inculcate Nett 33.
Abhinivajjeti [abhi + nivajjeti] to avoid, get rid of D III. 113; M I.119, 364, 402; S V.119, 295, 318; A III.169 sq.; It 81.
Abhinivassati [abhi + ni + vassati fr. vṛṣ] lit. to pour out in abundance, fig. to produce in plenty. Cp I.103 (kalyāṇe good deeds).
Abhiniviṭṭha (adj.) [abhi + niviṭṭha, pp. of abhi--nivisati] "settled in", attached to, clinging on Nd2 152 (gahita parāmaṭṭha a.); PvA 267 (= ajjhāsita Pv IV.84).
Abhinivisati [abhi + nivisati] to cling to, adhere to, be attached to Nd1 308, 309 (parāmasati +). -- pp. abhiniviṭṭha; cp. also abhinivesa.
Abhinivesa [abhi + nivesa, see nivesa2 & cp. nivesana] "settling in", i. e. wishing for, tendency towards (--°), inclination, adherence; as adj. liking, loving, being given or inclined to D III.230; M I.136, 251; S II.17; III.10, 13, 135, 161, 186 (saŋyojana° IV.50; A III.363 (paṭhavī°, adj.); Nd2 227 (gāha parāmasa +); Pug 22; Vbh 145; Dhs 381, 1003, 1099; Nett 28; PvA 252 (micchā°), 267 (taṇhā°); Sdhp 71. -- Often combd. with adhiṭṭhāna e. g. S II.17; Nd2 176, and in phrase idaŋ--saccɔ
âbhinivesa adherence to one's dogmas, as one of the 4 Ties: see kāyagantha and cp. Cpd. 171 n. 5.
Abhinisīdati [abhi + nisīdati] to sit down by or on (acc.), always combd. with abhinipajjati Vin III.29; IV.273; A V.188; Pug 67.

Abhinissaṭa (pp.) [abhi + nissaṭa] escaped Th 1, 1089. Abhinihata (pp.) [abhi + nihata] oppressed. crushed, slain J IV.4.
Abhinīta (pp.) [pp. of abhi--neti] led to, brought to, obliged by (--°) M I.463 = Miln 32 (rājā & cora°); M I.282; S III.93; Th 1, 350 = 435 (vātaroga° "foredone with cramping pains" Mrs. Rk. D.); Pug 29; Miln 362.
Abhinīla (adj.) [abhi + nīla] very black, deep black, only with ref. to the eyes, in phrase °netta with deep--black eyes D II.18; III.144, 167 sq. [cp. Sp. Av. Ś I.367 & 370 abhinīla--padma--netra]; Th 2, 257 (nettā ahesuŋ abbinīla--m--āyatā).
Abhinīhanati [abhi + nis + han, cp. Sk. nirhanti] to drive away, put away, destroy, remove, avoid M I.119 (in phrase āṇiŋ a. abhinīharati abhinivajjeti).
Abhinīharati [abhi + nīharati] 1. to take out, throw out M I.119 (see abhinīhanati). -- 2. to direct to, to apply to (orig. to isolate? Is reading correct?) in phrase ñāṇadassanāya cittaŋ abhinīharati abhininnāmeti D I.76 (= tanninnaŋ tappoṇaŋ karoti DA I.220, 224; v. l. abhini°) Cp. the latter phrase also in BSk. as abhijñâbhinirhāra Av. Ś II.3 (see ref. & note Index p. 221); and the pp. abhinirhṛta (ṛddhiḥ) in Divy 48, 49 to obtain? Ind.), 264 (take to burial), 542.
Abhinīhāra [abhi + nīhāra, to abhinīharati; cp. BSk. sarīrɔ âbhinirhāra taking (the body) out to burial, lit. meaning, see
note on abhinīharati] being bent on ("downward force" Dhs trsl. 242), i. e. taking oneself out to, way of acting, (proper) behaviour, endeavour, resolve, aspiration S III.267 sq. (°kusala); A II.189; III.311; IV.34 (°kusala); J I.14 (Buddhabhāvāya a. resolve to become a Buddha), 15 (Buddhattāya); Ps I.61 sq.; II.121; Nett 26; Miln 216; DhA I.392; II.82 (kata°).
Abhipattika (adj.) [fr. abhipatti] one who has attained, attaining (--°), getting possession of S I.200 (devakañña°). Abhipatthita (pp.) [fr. abhipattheti] hoped, wished, longed for Miln 383; SnA 85.
Abhipattheti [abhi + pattheti] to hope for, long for, wish for Kh VIII.10; SnA 320; DhA I.30. -- pp. abhipatthita (q. v.).
Abhipassati [abhi + passati] to have regard for, look for, strive after A I.147 (Nibbānaŋ); III.75; Sn 896 (khema°), 1070 (rattamahā°) Nd1 308; Nd2 428; J VI.370.
Abhipāteti [abhi + pāteti] to make fall, to bring to fall, to throw J II.91 (kaṇd̤aŋ). Abhipāruta (adj.) [abhi + pāruta, pp. of abhipārupati] dressed Miln 222. Abhipāleti [abhi + pāleti] to protect Vv 8421, cp. VvA 341.
Abhipīḷita (pp.) [fr. abhipiḷeti] crushed, squeezed Sdhp 278, 279.
Abhipīḷeti [abhi + pīḷeti] to crush, squeeze Miln 166. <-> pp. abhipīḷita (q. v.).
Abhipucchati [abhi + pucchati] Sk. abhipṛcchati] to ask J IV.18.
Abhipūreti [abhi + pūreti] to fill (up) Miln 238; Dāvs III. 60 (paŋsūhi).
Abhippakiṇṇa [pp. of abhippakirati] completely strewn (with) J I.62.
Abhippakirati [abhi + pakirati] to strew over, to cover (completely) D II.137 (pupphāni Tathāgatassa sarīraŋ okiranti

ajjhokiranti a.); VvA 38 (for abbhokirati Vv 59). <-> pp. abhippakiṇṇa (q. v.).
Abhippamodati [abhi + pamodati] to rejoice (intrs.); to please, satisfy (trs, c. acc.) M I.425; S V.312, 330; A V.112; J
III 530; Ps I.95, 176, 190.
Abhippalambati [abhi + palambati] to hang down M III. 164 (olambati ajjholambati a.).
Abhippavassati [abhi + pavassati] to shed rain upon, to pour down; intrs. to rain, to pour, fall. Usually in phrase
mahāmegho abhippavassati a great cloud bursts Miln 8, 13, 36, 304; PvA 132 (v. l. ati°); intrs. Miln 18 (pupphāni °iŋsu poured down). -- pp. abhippavuṭṭha.
Abhippavuṭṭha (pp.) [fr. abhippavassati] having rained, poured, fallen; trs. S V.51 (bandhanāni meghena °āni) = A V.127; intrs. M II.117 (mahāmegho °o there has been a cloudburst).
Abhippasanna (adj.) [pp. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasanna] finding one's peace in (c. loc.), trusting in, having
faith in, believing in, devoted to (loc.) Vin III.43; D I.211 (Bhagavati) S I.134; IV.319; V.225, 378; A III. 237, 270, 326 sq.; Sn p. 104 (brāhmaṇesu); PvA 54 (sāsand), 142 (id.). Cp. vippasanna in same meaning.
Abhippasāda [abhi + pasāda, cp. BSk. abhiprasāda Av. Ś 12 (cittasyu°) & vippasāda] faith, belief, reliance, trust Dhs 12 ("sense of assurance" trsl., + saddhā), 25, 96, 288; PvA 223.
Abhippasādeti [Caus. of abhippasīdati, cp. BSk. abhiprasādayati Divy 68, 85, pp. abhiprasādita--manāḥ Jtm 213, 220] to establish one's faith in (loc.), to be reconciled with, to propitiate Th 1, 1173 = Vv 212 (manaŋ arahantamhi = cittaŋ pasādeti VvA 105).
Abhippāsāreti [abhi + pasāreti, cp. BSk. abhiprasārayati Divy 389] to stretch out Vin I.179 (pāde). Abhippasīdati [abhi + pasīdati] to have faith in D I.211 (fut. °issati). -- pp. abhippasanna; Caus. abhippasādeti.
Abhippaharaṇa (nt.) [abhi + paharaṇa] attacking, fighting, as adj. f. °aṇī fighting, Ep. of Mārassa senā, the army of M. Sn 439 (kaṇhassa° the fighting army of k. = samaṇabrāhmaṇānaŋ nippothanī antarāyakārī SnA 390).
Abhibyāpeti [abhi + vyāpeti, cp. Sk. vyāpnoti, vi + āp] to pervade Miln 251. Abhibhakkhayati [abhi + bhakkhayati] to eat (of animals) Vin II.201 (bhinko pankaŋ a.). Abhibhava [fr. abhibhavati] defeat, humiliation SnA 436.
Abhibhavati [abhi + bhavati] to overcome, master, be lord over, vanquish, conquer S I.18, 32, 121 (maraṇaŋ); IV. 71 (rāgadose), 117 (kodhaŋ), 246, 249 (sāmikaŋ); J I.56, 280; PvA 94 (= balīyati, vad̤d̤hati). -- fut. abhihessati see abhihāreti 4. -- ger. abhibhuyya Vin I.294; Dh 328; It 41 (māraŋ sasenaŋ); Sn 45, 72 (°cārin), 1097, Nd2 85 (= abhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā, pariyādiyitvā); and abhibhavitvā PvA 113 (= pasayha), 136. -- grd. abhibhavanīya to be overcome PvA 57. -- Pass. ppr. abhibhūyamāna being overcome (by) PvA 80, 103. -- pp. abhibhūta (q. v.).
Abhibhavana (nt.) [fr. abhibhavati] overcoming, vanquishing, mastering S II.210 (v. l. BB abhipatthana). Abhibhavanīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhibhavanīya, grd. of abhibhavati] as an° invincibility PvA 117.
Abhibhāyatana (nt.) [abhibhū + āyatana] position of a master or lord, station of mastery. The traditional account of these gives 8 stations or stages of mastery over the senses (see Dial. II.118; Exp. I.252), detailed identically at all the foll.

passages, viz. D II.110; III.260 (& 287); M II.13; A I.40; IV.305, 348; V.61. Mentioned only at S IV.77 (6 stations); Ps I.5; Nd2 466 (as an accomplishment of the Bhagavant); Dhs 247.
Abhibhāsana (nt.) [abhi + bhāsana fr. bhās] enlightenment or delight ("light & delight" trsl.) Th 1, 613 (= tosana C.).
Abhibhū (n.--adj.) [Vedic abhibhū, fr. abhi + bhū, cp. abhibhavati] overcoming, conquering, vanquishing, having power over, a Lord or Master of (--°) D III.29; S II. 284; Sn 211 (sabba°), 545 (Māra°, cp. Mārasena--pamaddana 561), 642. -- Often in phrase abhibhū anabhibhūta aññadatthudasa vasavattin, i. e. unvanquished Lord of all D I 18; III.135 = Nd2 276; A II.24; IV.94; It 122; cp. DA I.111 (= abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhakoɔ ham asmīti).
Abhibhūta [pp. of abhibhavati] overpowered, overwhelmed, vanquished D I.121; S I.137 (jāti--jarā°); II.228 (lābhasakkāra--silokena); A I.202 (pāpakehi dhammehi); J I.189; PvA 14, 41 (= pareta), 60 (= upagata), 68, 77, 80 (= pareta). Often neg. an° unconquered, e. g. Sn 934; Nd1 400; & see phrase under abhibhū.
Abhimangala (adj.) [abhi + mangala] (very) fortunate, lucky, anspicious, in °sammatā (of Visākhā) "benedicted", blessed Vin III.187 = DhA I.409. Opp. avamangala.
Abhimaṇd̤ita (pp. --°) [abhi + maṇd̤ita] adorned, embellished, beautified Miln 361; Sdhp 17.
Abhimata (adj.) [BSk. abhimata, e. g. Jtm 211; pp. of abhimanyate] desired, wished for; agreeable, pleasant C. on Th 1,
Abhimatthati (°eti) & °mantheti [abhi + math or manth, cp. nimmatheti] 1. to cleave, cut; to crush, destroy M I.243 (sikharena muddhānaŋ °mantheti); S I.127; Dh 161 (v. l. °nth°); J IV.457 (matthako sikharena °matthiyamāno); DhA III.152 (= kantati viddhaŋseti). -- 2. to rub, to produce by friction (esp. fire, aggiŋ; cp. Vedic agniŋ nirmanthati) M I.240.
Abhimaddati [Sk. abhimardati & °mṛdnāti; abhi + mṛd] to crush S I.102; A I.198; Sdhp 288.
Abhimana (adj.) [abhi + mano, BSk. abhimana, e. g. M Vastu III.259] having one's mind turned on, thinking of or on (c.
acc.) Th 1, 1122; J VI.451.
Abhimanāpa (adj.) [abhi + manāpa] very pleasing VvA 53 (where id. p. at PvA 71 has atimanāpa). Abhimantheti see abhimatthati.
Abhimāra [cp. Sk. abhimara slaughter] a bandit, bravo, robber J II.199; DA I.152.
Abhimukha (adj.) [abhi + mukha] facing, turned towards, approaching J II.3 (°ā ahesuŋ met each other). Usually --° turned to, going to, inclined towards D I.50 (purattha°); J I.203 (devaloka°), 223 (varaṇa--rukkha°); II.3 (nagara°), 416
(Jetavana°); DhA I.170 (tad°); II.89 (nagara°); PvA 3 (kāma°, opp. vimukha), 74 (uyyāna°). -- nt. °ŋ adv. to, towards J I.263 (matta--vāraṇe); PvA 4 (āghātana°, may here be taken as pred. adj.); DhA III.310 (uttara°).
Abhiyācati [abhi + yācati] to ask, beg, entreat Sn 1101, cp. Nd2 86.
Abhiyāti [Vedic abhiyāti in same meaning; abhi _ yā] to go against (in a hostile manner, to attack (c. acc.) S I.216 (aor. abhiyaŋsu, v. l. SS abhijiyiŋsu); DhA III.310 (aor. abhiyāsi as v. l. for T. reading pāyāsi; the id. p. VvA 68 reads pāyāsi with v. l. upāyāsi).
Abhiyujjhati [abhi + yujjhati from yudh] to contend, quarrel with J I.342.

Abhiyuñjati [abhi + yuj] to accuse, charge; intrs. fall to one's share Vin III.50; IV.304.
Abhiyoga [cp. abhiyuñjati] practice, observance Dāvs IV.7.
Abhiyogin (adj.) [fr. abhiyoga] applying oneself to, practised, skilled (an augur, sooth sayer) D III.168.
Abhiyobbana (nt.) [abhi + yobbana] much youthfulness, early or tender youth Th 2, 258 (= abhinavayobbanakāla ThA 211).
Abhirakkhati [abhi + rakkhati] to guard, protect J VI.589 (= pāleti C.). Cp. parirakkhati. Abhirakkhā (f.) [fr. abhirakkhati] protection, guard J I.204 (= ārakkhā 203).
Abhirata (adj.) (--°) [pp. of abhiramati] found of, indulging in, finding delight in A IV.224 (nekkhamma°); V.175 (id.), Sn
86 (nibbāna°), 275 (vihesa°), 276 (kalaha°); J V.382 (dāna°); PvA 54 (puññakamma°), 61 (satibhavana°), 105 (dānâdipuñña°).
Abhiratatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhirata] the fact of being fond of, delighting in (--°) J V.254 (kāma°).
Abhirati (f.) [fr. abhi + ram] delight or pleasure in (loc. or --°) S I.185; IV.260; A V.122; Dh 88. --an° displeasure,
discontent, distaste Vin II.110; D I.17 (+ paritassanā); S I.185; V.132; A III.259; IV.50; V.72 sq., 122; J III.395; DA I.111; PvA 187.
Abhiratta (adj.) [abhi + ratta] very red J V.156; fig. very much excited or affected with (--°) Sn 891 (sandiṭṭhirāgena a.). Abhiraddha (adj.) [pp. of abhi + rādh] propitiated, satisfied A IV.185 (+ attamana).
Abhiraddhi (f.) [fr. abhiraddha] only in neg. an° displeasure, dislike, discontent A I.79; DA I.52 (= kopassɔ etaŋ adhivacanaŋ).
Abhiramati [abhi + ram] to sport, enjoy oneself, find pleasure in or with (c. loc.), to indulge in love Sn 718, 1085; J
I.192; III.189, 393; DhA I.119; PvA 3, 61, 145. -- ppr. act. abhiranto only as nt. °ŋ in adv. phrase yathâbhirantaŋ after one's liking, as much as he pleases, after one's heart's content Vin I.34; M I.170; Sn 53. <-> ppr. med. abhiramamāna J III.188, PvA 162. -- pp. abhirata (q. v.). -- 2nd Caus. abhiramāpeti (q. v.).
Abhiramana (nt.) [fr. abhiramati] sporting, dallying, amusing oneself PvA 16.
Abhiramāpana (nt.) [fr. abhiramāpeti, Caus2 of abhiramati] causing pleasure to (acc.), being a source of pleasure,
making happy M III.132 (gāmante).
Abhiramāpeti [Caus. II. fr. abhiramati] 1. to induce to sport, to cause one to take pleasure J III.393. -- 2. to delight,
amuse, divert J I.61. -- Cp. abhiramāpana.
Abhiravati [abhi + ravati] to shout ont Bu II.90 = J I.18 (V.99)
Abhirādhita [pp. of abhirādheti] having succeeded in, fallen to one's share, attained Th 1, 259.
Abhirādhin (adj.) (--°) [fr. abhirādheti] pleasing, giving pleasure, satisfaction J IV.274 (mitta° = ārādhento tosento C.).
Abhirādheti [abhi + rādheti] to please, satisfy, make happy J I.421; DA I.52. -- aor. (pret.) abhirādhayi Vv 315 (= abhirādhesi VvA 130); Vv 6423 (gloss for abhirocayi VvA 282); J I.421; III.386 (= paritosesi C.). -- pp. abhirādhita.

Abhiruci (f.) [Sk. abhiruci, fr. abhi + ruc] delight, longing, pleasure, satisfaction PvA 168 (= ajjhāsaya). Abhirucita (adj.) [pp. fr. abhi + ruc] pleasing, agreeable, liked J I.402; DhA I.45.
Abhiruda (adj. --°) [Sk. abhiruta] resounding with (the cries of animals, esp. the song of birds), full of the sound of (birds) Th 1, 1062 (kuñjara°), 1113 (mayūra--koñca°); J IV.466 (adāsakunta°); V.304 (mayūra--koñca°); VI.172 (id., = upagīta C.), 272 (sakunta°; = abhigīta C.), 483 (mayūra--koñca°), 539; Pv II.123 (haŋsa--koñca°; = abhinādita PvA 157). -- The form abhiruta occurs at Th 1, 49.
Abhirūpa (adj.) [abhi + rūpa] of perfect form, (very), handsome, beautiful, lovely Sn 410 (= dassaniyaɔ angapaccanga SnA 383); J I.207; Pug 52; DA I.281 (= aññehi manussehi adhikarūpa); VvA 53; PvA 61 (= abhikkanta). Occurs in the idiomatic phrase denoting the characteristics of true beauty abhirūpa dassanīya pāsādika (+ paramāya vaṇṇa--pokkharatāya samannāgata), e. g. Vin I.268; D I.47, 114, 120; S II.279; A II.86, 203; Nd2 659; Pug 66; DhA I.281 (compar.); PvA 46.
Abhirūḷha [pp. of abhirūhati] mounted, gone up to, ascended J V.217; DhA I.103.
Abhirūhati (abhiruhati) [abhi + ruh] to ascend, mount, climb; to go on or in to (c. acc.) Dh 321; Th 1, 271; J I.259; II.388; III.220; IV.138 (navaŋ); VI.272 (peculiar aor. °rucchi with ābhi metri causa; = abhirūhi C.); DA I.253. -- ger. abhiruyha J III.189; PvA 75, 152 (as v. l.; T. has °ruyhitva), 271 (nāvaŋ), & abhirūhitvā J I.50 (pabbataŋ) II.128.
Abhirūhana (nt.) [BSk. °rūhana, e. g. M Vastu II.289] climbing, ascending, climb Miln 356.
Abhiroceti [abhi + roceti, Caus. of ruc] 1. to like, to find delight in (acc.), to desire, long for J III.192; V.222 (= roceti);
Vv 6423 (vataŋ abhirocayi = abhirocesi ruccitvā pūresi ti attho; abhirādhayi ti pi pāṭho; sādhesi nipphādesī ti attho VvA 282). -- 2. to please, satisfy, entertain, gladden Vv 6424 (but VvA 292: abhibhavitvā vijjotati, thus to no. 3). -- 3. v. l. for atiroceti
(to surpass in splendour) at Vv 8112, cp. also no. 2.
Abhiropana (nt.) [fr. abhiropeti] concentration of mind, attention (seems restricted to Ps II. only) Ps II.82 (v. l. abhiniropana), 84, 93, 115 (buddhi°), 142 (°virāga), 145 (°vimutti), 216 (°abhisamaya). See also abhiniropana.
Abhiropeti [abhi + ropeti, cp. Sk. adhiropayati, Caus. of ruh] to fix one's mind on, to pay attention, to show reverence,
to honour Vv 377 (aor. °ropayi = ropesi VvA 169), 3710 (id.; = pūjaŋ kāresi VvA 172), 604 (= pūjesi VvA 253); Dāvs V.19.
Abhilakkhita (adj.) [Sk. abhilakṣita in diff. meaning; pp. of abhi + lakṣ] fixed, designed, inaugurated, marked by auspices J IV.1; DA I.18.
Abhilakkhitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhilakkhita] having signs or marks, being characterised, characteristics DhsA 62.
Abhilanghati [abhi + langhati] to ascend, rise, travel or pass over (of the moon traversing the sky) J III.364; VI.221.
Abhilambati [abhi + lambati] to hang down over (c. acc.) M III.164 = Nett 179 (+ ajjholambati); J V.70 (papātaŋ), 269 (Vetaraṇiŋ). -- pp. abhilambita (q. v.).
Abhilambita (adj.) [pp. of abhilambati] hanging down J V.407 (nīladuma°).
Abhilāpa [fr. abhi + lap] talk, phrasing, expression Sn 49 (vācâbhilāpa making phrases, talking, idle or objectionable
speech = tiracchanakathā Nd2 561); It 89 (? reading abhilāpāyaŋ uncertain, vv. ll. abhipāyaŋ abhipāpāyaŋ, abhisāpāyaŋ, abhisapāyaŋ, atisappāyaŋ. The corresp. passage S III.93 reads abhisapayaŋ: curse, and C. on It 89 expls. abhilāpo ti akkoso, see

Brethren 376 n. 1); Dhs 1306 = Nd2 34 (as exegesis or paraphrase of adhivacana, combd. with vyañjana & trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "a distinctive mark of discourse"); DA I.20, 23, 281; DhsA 51.
Abhilāsa [Sk. abhilāṣa, abhi + laṣ] desire, wish, longing PvA 154.
Abhilekheti [Caus. of abhi + likh] to cause to be inscribed Dāvs V.67 (cāritta--lekhaŋ °lekhayi).
Abhilepana (nt.) [abhi + lepana] "smearing over", stain, pollution Sn 1032, 1033 = Nett 10, 11 (see Nd2 88 = laggana "sticking to", bandhana, upakkilesa).
Abhivagga [abhi + vagga] great mass (?), superior force (?), only in phrase °ena omaddati to crush with sup. force or overpower M I.87 = Nd2 1996.
Abhivañcana (nt.) [abhi + vañc] deceit, fraud Dāvs III.64.
Abhivaṭṭa [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivuṭṭha] rained upon Dh 335 (gloss °vuṭṭha; cp. DhA IV.45); Miln 176, 197,
286. -- Note. Andersen P. R. prefers reading abhivad̤d̤ha at Dh 335 "the abounding Bīraṇa grass").
Abhivad̤d̤hati [Vedic abhivardhati, abhi + vṛdh] 1. to increase (intrs.) D I.113, 195 (opp. hāyati); M II.225; A III.46
(bhogā a.); Dh 24; Miln 374; PvA 8, 133; Sdhp 288, 523. -- 2. to grow over or beyond, to outg ow J III.399 (vanaspatiŋ). -- pp. abhivud̤d̤ha & °vuddha (q.v.).
Abhivad̤d̤hana (adj.--nt.) [fr. abhivad̤d̤hati] increasing (trs.), augmenting; f. °ī Sdhp 68.
Abhivad̤d̤hi (f.) [cp. Sk. abhivṛddhi, fr. abhi + vṛdh] increase, growth Miln 94. -- See also abhivuddhi. Abhivaṇṇita [pp. of abhivanneti] praised Dpvs I.4.
Abhivaṇṇeti [abhi + vanneti] to praise Sdhp 588 (°ayi). <-> pp. abhivaṇṇita.
Abhivadati [abhi + vadati] 1. to speak out, declare, promise J I.83 = Vin I.36; J VI.220. -- 2. to speak (kindly) to, to welcome, salute, greet. In this sense always combd. with abhinandati, e. g. at M I.109, 266, 458; S III.14; IV.36 sq.; Miln 69. -- Caus. abhivādeti.
Abhivandati [abhi + vandati] to salute respectfully, to honour, greet; grd. °vandanīya Miln 227. Abhivassaka (adj.) [fr. abhivassati] raining, fig. shedding, pouring ont, yielding VvA 38 (puppha°).
Abhivassati [abhi + vassati from vṛṣ] to rain, shed rain, pour; fig. rain down, pour out, shed D III.160 (ābhivassaŋ metri causa); A III.34; Th 1, 985; J I.18 (V.100; pupphā a. stream down); cp. III.106; Miln 132, 411. <-> pp. abhivaṭṭa & abhivuṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. abhivassāpeti to cause (the sky to) rain Miln 132.
Abhivassin (adj.) = abhivassaka It 64, 65 (sabbattha°).
Abhivādana (nt.) [fr. abhivādeti] respectful greeting, salutation, giving welcome, showing respect or devotion A II.180;
IV.130, 276; J I.81, 82, 218; Dh 109 (°sīlin of devout character, cp. DhA II.239); VvA 24; Sdhp 549 (°sīla).
Abhivādeti [Caus. of abhivadati] to salute, greet, welcome, honour Vin II.208 sq.; D I.61; A III.223; IV.173; Vv 15 (abhivādayiŋ aor. = abhivādanaŋ kāresiŋ vandiŋ VvA 24); Miln 162. Often in combn with padakkhiṇaŋ karoti in sense of to bid goodbye, to say adieu, farewell, e. g. D I.89, 125, 225; Sn 1010. -- Caus. II. abhivādāpeti to cause some one to salute, to

make welcome Vin II.208 (°etabba).
Abhivāyati [abhi + vāyati; cp. Sk. abhivāti] to blow through, to pervade Miln 385.
Abhivāreti [abhi + vāreti, Caus. of vṛ] to hold back, refuse, deny J V.325 (= nivāreti C.).
Abhivāheti [abhi + vāheti, Caus. of vah] to remove, to put away Bu X.5.
Abhivijayati (& vijināti) [abhi + vijayati] to overpower, to conquer. Of °jayati the ger. °jiya at D I.89, 134; II.16. Of °jināti the pres. 3rd pl. °jinanti at Miln 39; the ger. °jinitvā at M I.253; Pug 66.
Abhiviññāpeti [abhi + viññāpeti] to turn somebody's mind on (c. acc.), to induce somebody (dat.) to (acc.) Vin III.18 (purāṇadutiyikāya methunaŋ dhammaŋ abhiviññāpesi).
Abhivitarati [abhi + vitarati] "to go down to", i. e. give in, to pay heed, observe Vin I.134 and in ster. expln. of sañcicca at Vin II.91; III.73, 112; IV.290.
Abhivinaya [abhi + vinaya] higher discipline, the refinements of discipline or Vinaya; combd. with abhidhamma, e. g. D III.267; M I.472; also with vinaya Vin V.1 sg.
Abhivindati [abhi + vindati] to find, get, obtain Sn 460 (= labhati adhigacchati SnA 405).
Abhivisiṭṭha (adj.) [abhi + visiṭṭha] most excellent, very distinguished DA I.99, 313.
Abhivissajjati [abhi + vissajjati] to send out, send forth, deal out, give D III.160.
Abhivissattha [abhi + vissattha, pp. of abhivissasati, Sk. abhiviśvasta] confided in, taken into confidence M II.52 (v. l. °visaṭṭha).
Abhivuṭṭha [pp. of abhivassati, see also abhivaṭṭa] poured out or over, shed out (of water or rain) Th 1, 1065; Dh 335 (gloss); PvA 29.
Abhivud̤d̤ha [pp. of abhivad̤d̤hati, see also °vuddha] increased, enriched PvA 150.
Abhivuddha [pp. of abhivad̤d̤hati, see also °vud̤d̤ha] grown up Miln 361.
Abhivuddhi (f.) [Sk. abhivṛddhi, see also abhivad̤d̤hi] increase, growth, prosperity Miln 34.
Kern's (Toev. s. v.) proposed reading at J V.452 for ati°, which however does not agree with C. expln. on p. 454.
Abhivedeti [abhi + Caus. of vid] 1. to make known, to communicate Dāvs V.2, 11. -- 2. to know J VI.175 (= jānāti C.).
Abhivihacca [ger. of abhi + vihanati] having destroyed, removed or expelled; only in one simile of the sun driving darkness away at M I.317 = S III.156; V.44 = It 20.
Abhivyāpeti see abhibyāpeti.
Abhisaŋvisati [abhi + saŋvisati]. Only in abhisaŋvisseyyagattaŋ (or--bhastaŋ or--santuŋ) Th 2, 466 a compound of doubtful derivation and meaning. Mrs. Rh. D., following Dhammapāla (p. 283) ʻa bag of skin with carrion filledʼ.

Abhisaŋsati [Vedic abhiśaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs] to execrate, revile, lay a curse on J V.174 (°saŋsittha 3rd sg. pret. med. = paribhāsi C.) -- aor. abhisasi J VI.187, 505, 522 (= akkosi C.), 563 (id.). -- pp. abhisattha. Cp. also abhisiŋsati.
Abhisaŋsanā (f.) [? abhisaŋsati] is doubtful reading at Vv 6410; meaning "neighing" (of horses) VvA 272, 279. Abhisankhata (adj.) [abhi + sankhata, pp. of abhisankharoti] prepared, fixed, made up, arranged, done M I.350; A
II.43; V.343; J I.50; Nd1 186 (kappita +); PvA 7, 8.
Abhisankharoti (& °khāreti in Pot.) [abhi + sankharoti] to prepare, do, perform, work, get up Vin I.16 (iddhɔ âbhisankhāraŋ °khāreyya); D I.184 (id.); S II.40; III.87, 92; IV.132, 290; V.449; A I.201; Sn 984 (ger. °itvā: having got up this
curse, cp. SnA 582); PvA 56 (iddhɔ âbhisaŋkhāraŋ), 172 (id.), 212 (id.). -- pp. abhisankhata (q. v.).
Abhisankhāra [abhi + sankhāra] 1. putting forth, performance, doing, working, practice: only in two combns., viz. (a) gamiya° (or gamika°) a heathenish practice Vin I.233; A IV.180, & (b) iddha° (= iddḥi°) working of supernormal powers Vin I.16; D I.106; S III.92; IV.289; V.270; Sn p. 107; PvA 56, 172, 212. -- 2. preparation, store, accumulation (of kamma, merit or demerit), substratum, state (see for detail sankhāra) S III.58 (an°); Nd1 334, 442; Nd2 s. v.; Vbh 135 (puñña° etc.), 340; DhsA 357 (°viññāna "storing intellect" Dhs trsl. 262).
Abhisankhārika (adj.) [fr. abhisankhāra] what belongs to or is done by the sankhāras; accumulated by or
accumulating merit, having special (meritorious) effect (or specially prepared?) Vin II.77 = III.160; Sdhp 309 (sa °paccaya).
Abhisankhipati [abhi + sankhipati] to throw together, heap together, concentrate Vbh 1 sq., 82 sq., 216 sq., 400; Miln 46.
Abhisanga [fr. abhi + sañj, cp. abhisajjati & Sk. abhisanga] Q sticking to, cleaving to, adherence to J V.6; Nett 110, 112; DhsA 129 (°hetukaŋ dukkhaŋ) 249 (°rasa).
Abhisangin (adj.) [fr. abhisanga] cleaving to (--°) Sdhp 566.
Abhisajjati [abhi + sañj; cp. abhisanga] to be in ill temper, to be angry, to curse, imprecate (in meaning of abhisanga 2)
D I.91 (= kodha--vasena laggati DA I.257); III.159; J III.120 (+ kuppati); IV.22 (abhisajji kuppi vyāpajji, cp. BSk. abhiṣajyate kupyati vyāpadyate. Av. Ś I.286); V.175 (= kopeti C.); Dh 408 (abhisaje Pot. = kujjhāpana--vasena laggapeyya DhA IV.182); Pug 30, 36. <-> See also abhisajjana & abhisajjanā.
Abhisajjana (nt.--adj.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati in meaning of abhisanga 2] only as adv. f. °nī Ep. of vācā scolding, abusing, cursing A V.265 (para°). Cp. next.
Abhisajjanā (f.) [abstr. fr. abhisajjati, cp. abhisajjana] at Sn 49 evidently means "scolding, cursing, being in bad temper"
(cp. abhisajjati), as its combn. with vācɔ âbhilāpa indicates, but is expld. both by Nd2 & Bdhgh. as "sticking to, cleaving, craving, desire" (= taṇhā), after the meaning of abhisanga. See Nd2 89 & 107; SnA 98 (sineha--vasena), cp. also the compromise--expln by Bdhgh. of abhisajjati as kodha--vasena laggati (DA I.257).
[abhi + sañcināti] to accumulate, collect (merit) Vv 476 (Pot. °sañceyyaŋ = °sañcineyyaŋ VvA 202). Abhisañcetayita [pp. of abhisañceteti] raised into consciousness, thought out, intended, planned M I.350; S II. 65;
IV.132; A V.343.
Abhisañceteti [abhi + sañceteti or °cinteti] to bring to consciousness, think out, devise, plan S II.82. -- pp. abhisañcetayita (q. v.).

Abhisaññā (f.). Only in the compound abhi--saññā--nirodha D I.179, 184. The prefix abhi qualifies, not saññā, but the whole compound, which means ʻtranceʼ. It is an expression used, not by Buddhists, but by certain wanderers. See saññā--vedayita--nirodha.
Abhisaññūhati [abhi + saññūhati, i. e. saŋ--ni--ūhati] to heap up, concentrate Vbh 1, 2, 82 sq.; 216 sq., 400; Miln 46. Cp. abhisankhipati.
Abhisaṭa [pp. of abhisarati, abhi + sṛ to flow] 1. (med.) streamed forth, come together J VI.56 (= sannipatita C.). <-> 2. (pass.) approached, visited Vin I.268.
Abhisatta [pp. of abhisapati, cp. Sk. abhiśapta, fr. abhi + śap] cursed, accursed, railed at, reviled J III.460; V.71; SnA 364 (= akkuṭṭha); VvA 335.
Abhisattha [pp. of abhisaŋsati] cursed, accursed Th 1, 118 "old age falls on her as if it had been cursed upon her" (that is,
laid upon her by a curse). Morris J P T S. 1886, 145 gives the commentator's equivalents, "commanded, worked by a charm". This is a curious idiom. Any European would say that the woman herself, not the old age, was accursed. But the whole verse is a riddle and Kern's translation (Toev. s. v.) ʻhurried upʼ seems to us impossible.
Abhisaddahati [abhi + saddahati, cp. Sk. abhiśraddadhāti, e. g. Divy 17, 337] to have faith in, believe in (c. acc.), believe S V.226; Th 1, 785; Pv IV.113, 125 (°saddaheyya = paṭiñeyya PvA 226); Nett 11; Miln 258; PvA 26; Dāvs III.58.
Abhisantāpeti [ahhi + santāpeti, Caus. of santapati] to burn out, scorch, destroy M I.121.
Abhisanda [abhi + sanda of syad, cp. BSk. abhisyanda, e. g. M Vastu II.276] outflow, overflow, yield, issue, result; only in foll. phrases: cattāro puññɔ âbhisandā kusalɔ âbhisandā (yields in merit) S V.391 sq.; A II.54 sq.; III.51, 337; VI.245, & kammɔ âbhisanda result of kamma Miln 276. -- Cp. abhisandana.
Abhisandana (nt.) [= abhisanda] result, outcome, consequence Ps I.17 (sukhassa).
Abhisandahati [abhi + sandahati of saŋ + dhā] to put together, to make ready Th 1, 151; ger. abhisandhāya in sense
of a prep. = on account of, because of J II.386 (= paṭicca C.).
Abhisandeti [abhi + sandeti, Caus. of syad] to make overflow, to make full, fill, pervade D I.73, 74.
Abhisanna (adj.) [pp. of abhisandati = abhi + syand, cp. Sk. abhisanna] overflowing, filled with (--°), full Vin I. 279 (°kāya a body full of humours, cp. II.119 & Miln 134); J I.17 (V.88; pītiyā); Miln 112 (duggandha°).
Abhisapati [abhi + sapati, of śap] to execrate, curse, accurse Vin IV.276; J IV.389; V.87; DhA I.42. -- pp. abhisatta. Abhisapana (nt.) [fr. abhisapati] cursing, curse PvA 144 (so read for abhisampanna).
Abhisamaya [abhi + samaya, from sam + i, cp. abhisameti & sameti; BSk. abhisamaya, e. g. Divy 200, 654] "coming by completely", insight into, comprehension, realization, clear understanding, grasp, penetration. See on term Kvu trsl. 381 sq. -- Esp. in full phrases: attha° grasp of what is proficient S I.87 = A III.49 = It 17, cp. A II.46; ariyasaccānaŋ a. full understanding of the 4 noble truths S V.415, 440, 441 [cp. Divy 654: anabhisamitānāŋ caturnāŋ āryasatyānāŋ a.]; Sn 758 (sacca° = saccɔ âvabodha SnA 509); Miln 214 (catusacc°); Sdhp 467 (catusacc°), 525 (saccānaŋ); dhammɔ âbhisamaya full grasp of the Dhamma, quasi conversion [cp. dharmɔ âbhisamaya Divy 200] S II.134; Miln 20, 350; VvA 219; PvA 9 etc. frequent; sammā--mānɔ âbhisamaya full understanding of false pride in ster. phrase" acchecchi (for acchejji) taṇhaŋ, vivattayi saññojanaŋ sammāmānâbhisamayā antam akāsi dukkhassa" at S IV.205, 207, 399; A III.246, 444; It 47; cp. māna° S I.188 = Th 2, 20 (tato mānâbhisamayā upasanto carissasi, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. 239 "hath the mind mastered vain imaginings,

then mayst thou go thy ways calm and serene"); Sn 342 (expld. by mānassa abhisamayo khayo vayo pahānaŋ SnA 344). Also in foll. passages: S II.5 (paññāya), 104 (id.), 133 sq. (Abhisamaya Saŋyutta); Sn 737 (phassa°, expld. ad sensum but not at verbum by phassa--nirodha SnA 509); Ps II.215; Pug 41; Vv 1610 (= saccapaṭivedha VvA 85); DA I.32; DhA I.109; VvA 73 (bhāvana°), 84 (sacchikiriya°); Dpvs I.31. --anabhisamaya not grasping correctly, insufficient understanding, taken up
wrongly S III.260; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162 (Mrs. Rh. D. trsls. "lack of coordination").
Abhisamāgacchati [abhi + sam + āgacchati, cp. in meaning adhigacchati] to come to (understand) completely, to grasp fully, to master KhA 236 (for abhisamecca Sn 143).
Abhisamācārika (adj.) [abhi + samācārika, to samācāra] belonging to the practice of the lesser ethics; to be practiced; belonging to or what is the least to be expected of good conduct, proper. Of sikkhā Vin V.181; A II.243 sq.; of dhamma M I.469; A III.14 sq.; 422.
Abhisamikkhati (& °ekkhati), [abhi + sam + īks, cp. samikkhati] to behold, see, regard, notice J. IV.19 (2nd sg. med. °samekkhase = olokesi C.). -- ger. °samikkha & °samekkha [B.Sk. °samīkṣya, e.g. Jtm. p. 28, 30 etc.] J V.340 (°samikkha, v. l. sañcikkha = passitvā C.); 393, 394 (= disvā C.).
Abhisameta [pp. of abhisameti, fr. abhi + sam + i, taken as caus. formation, against the regular form Sk.P. samita &
B.Sk. abhisamita] completely grasped or realised, understood, mastered S V.128 (dhamma a.), 440 (anabhisametāni cattāri ariyasaccāni, cp. Divy 654 anabhisamitāni c.a.); A IV.384 (appattaŋ asacchikataŋ +).
Abhisametāvin (adj.) [possess. adj. --formation, equalling a n. ag. form., pp. abhisameta] commanding full understanding or penetration, possessing complete insight (of the truth) Vin III.189; S II.133; V.458 sq.
Abhisameti [abhi + sameti, sam + i; in inflexion base is taken partly as ordinary & partly as causative, e. g. aor.
°samiŋsu & °samesuŋ, pp. sameta: Sk. samita. Cp. B.Sk. abhisamayati, either caus. or denom. formation, Divy 617: caturāryasatyāni a.] to come by, to attain, to realise, grasp, understand (cp. adhigacchati) Miln 214 (catusaccâbhisamayaŋ abhisameti). Freg. in combn. abhisambujjhati, abhisameti; abhisambujjhitvā abhisametvā, e. g. S II.25; III.139; Kvu
321. -- fut. °samessati S V.441. -- aor. °samiŋsu Miln 350; °samesuŋ S V.415. -- ger. °samecca (for °icca under influence of °sametvā as caus. form.; Trenckner's expln. Notes 564 is unnecessary & hardly justifiable) S V.438 (an° by not thoroughly understanding); A V.50 (sammɔattha° through complete realisation of what is proficient); Sn 143 (= abhisamāgantvā KhA 236); and °sametvā S II.25; III.139. -- pp. abhisameta (q.v.).
Abhisampanna at PvA 144 is wrong reading for v. l. abhisapana (curse).
Abhisamparāya [abhi + samparāya] future lot, fate, state after death, future condition of rebirth; usually in foll.
phrases: kā gati ko abhisamparāyo (as hendiadys) ʻwhat fate in the world--to--comeʼ, D II.91; Vin I.293; S IV.59, 63; V.346, 356, 369; DhA I.221. -- evaŋ--gatika evanabhisamparāya (adj.) "leading to such & such a revirn, such & such a future
state" D I.16, 24, 32, 33 etc. (= evaŋ--vidhā paralokā ti DA I.108). --abhisamparāyaŋ (acc. as adv.) in future, after death A I.48; II.197; III.347; IV.104; Pv III.510 (= punabbhave PvA 200). -- diṭṭhe cɔeva dhamme abhisamparāyañ ca "in this
world and in the world to come" A II.61; Pug 38; Miln 162; PvA 195 etc. (see also diṭṭha). -- Used absolutely at PvA 122 (= fate).
Abhisambujjhati [abhi + sambujjhati] to become wideawake, to awake to the highest knowledge, to gain the highest wisdom (sammāsambodhiŋ) D III.135; It 121. aor. °sambujjhi S V.433; PvA 19. In combn. abhisambujjhati abhisameti, e. g. S. II.25; III.139. -- ppr. med. °sambudhāna; pp. °sambuddha -- Caus. °sambodheti to make awake, to awaken, to enlighten; pp. °bodhita.
Abhisambujjhana (nt.) = abhisambodhi J I.59.

Abhisambuddha [pp. of abhisambujjhati] (a) (pass.) realised, perfectly understood D III.273; S IV.331; It 121. an°
not understood M I.71, 92, 114, 163, 240. -- (b) (med.) one who has come to the realisation of the highest wisdom, fully--awakened, attained Buddhahood, realising, enlightened (in or as to = acc.) Vin I.1; D II.4; M I.6 (sammāsambodhiŋ); S I.68, 138, 139 & passim PvA 94, 99.
Abhisambuddhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. abhisambuddha] thorough realisation, perfect understanding S V.433. Abhisambudhāna (adj.) [formation of a ppr. med. fr. pp. abhsam + budh instead of abhisam + bujjh°] awaking,
realising, knowing, understanding Dh 46 (= bujjhanto jānanto ti attho DhA I.337).
Abhisambodhi (f.) [abhi + sambodhi] the highest enlightenment J I.14 (parama°). Cp. abhisambujjhana and
(sammā--) sambodhi.
Abhisambodhita (adj.) [pp. of abhisambodheti, Caus. of abhi + sambujjhati] awakened to the highest wisdom PvA
137 (Bhagavā).
Abhisambhava [fr. abhisambhavati] only in dur° hard to overcome or get over, hard to obtain or reach, troublesome S
V.454; A V.202; Sn 429, 701; J V.269, VI.139, 439.
[abhi + sambhavati] "to come up to", i. e. to be able to (get or stand or overcome); to attain, reach, to bear A IV.241; Th 1,
436; Nd1 471, 485; J III.140; V.150, 417; VI.292, 293, 507 (fut. med. °sambhossaŋ = sahissāmi adhivāsessāmi C.); Ps II.193. <-> ger. °bhutvā Th 1, 1057 & °bhavitvā Sn 52 (cp. Nd2 85). -- aor. °bhosi D II.232. -- grd. °bhavanīya D II.210; Ps II.193. -- See
also abhisambhuṇāti.
Abhisambhuṇāti [considered to be a bastard form of abhisambhavati, but probably of diff. origin & etym.; also in Bh.
Sk. freq.] to be able (to get or reach); only in neg. ppr. anabhisambhuṇanto unable D I.101 (= asampāpuṇanto avisahamāno vā DA I.268); Nd1 77, 312.
Abhisambhū (adj.) [fr. abhi + sam + bhū] getting, attaining (?) D II.255 (lomahaŋsa°). Abhisambhūta [pp. of abhisambhavati] attained, got Sdhp 556.
Abhisammati [abhi + śam, Sk. abhiśamyati] to cease, stop; trs. (Caus.) to allay, pacify, still J VI.420 (pp. abhisammanto for °śammento? Reading uncertain).
Abhisara [fr. abhi + sarati, of sṛ to go] retinue J V.373.
Abhisallekhika (adj) [abhi + sallekha + ika] austere, stern, only in f. °ā (scil. kathā) A III.117 sq.; IV.352, 357; V.67.
Abhisavati (better °ssavati?) [abhi + savati, of sru] to flow towards or into J VI.359 (najjo Gangaŋ a.).
Abhisasi aor. of abhisaŋsati (q. v.).
Abhisādheti [abhi + sādheti] to carry out, arrange; to get; procure, attain J VI.180; Miln 264.
Abhisāpa [abhisapati] a curse, anathema S III.93 = It 89 (which latter reads abhilāpa and It A expls. by akkosa: see vv. ll. under abhilāpa & cp. Brethren 376 n. 1.); Th 1,1118.
Abhisāriyā (f.) [Sk. abhisārikā, fr. abhi + sṛ] a woman who goes to meet her lover J III.139.

Abhisāreti [abhi + sāreti, Caus. of abhisarati] to approach, to persecute J VI.377.
Abhisiŋsati [= abhisaŋsati, abhi + śaŋs. As to Sk. śaŋs > P. siŋs cp. āsiŋsati, as to meaning cp. nature of prayer as a solemn rite to the "infernals", cp. im--precare], to utter a solemn wish, Vv 8118 (aor. °sīsi. v. l. °sisi. VvA 316 expls. by icchi sampaṭicchi).
Abhisiñcati [abhi + siñQ--ati fr. sic to sprinkle; see also āsiñcati & ava°, Vedic only ā°] to sprinkle over, fig. to anoint (King), to consecrate A I.107 (Khattiyɔ âbhisekena) J I.399 (fig. °itvā ger. II.409 (id.); VI.161 (id.); Nd1 298; Miln 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā); PvA 144 (read abhisiñci cimillikañ ca . . .) -- Pass. abhisiñcati Miln 359. -- pp. abhisitta. -- Caus. abhiseceti.
Abhisitta [pp. of abhisiñcati, Sk. °sikta] 1. sprinkled over, anointed Sn 889 (manasā, cp. N1 298); Miln 336 (amatena
lokaŋ Q.).-- 2. consecrated (King), inaugurated (more freq. in this conn. is avasitta), Vin III.44; A I.107 (Khattiyo Khattiyehi Khattiyɔ âbhisekena a.); II.87 (v.l. for avasitta, also an°).
Abhiseka [fr. abhi + sic, cp. Sk. abhiṣeka] anointing, consecration, inauguration (as king) A I.107 (cp. abhisitta); II.87 read abhisekɔ --anabhisitto; J II.104, 352; DhA I.350; PvA 74. Cp. ābhisekika.
Abhisecana (nt.) = abhiseka, viz. (a) ablution, washing off Th 2, 239 & 245 (udaka°). -- (b) consecration J II.353.
Abhiseceti [caus. of abhisiñcati] to cause to be sprinkled or inaugurated J V.26. (imper. abhisecayassu).
Abhisevanā (f.) [abhi + sevana fr. sev] pursuit, indulgence in (--°) Sdhp 210 (pāpakamma°).
Abhissara (adj.) [abhi + issara] only neg. an° in formula atāṇo loko anabhissaro "without a Lord or protector" M II.68 (v.l. °abhisaro); Ps I.126 (v.l. id.).
Abhihaŋsati [abhi + haŋsati fr. hṛṣ] 1. (trs.) to gladden, please, satisfy S IV.190 (abhihaṭṭhuŋ); A V.350 (id.). <-> 2.
(intr.) to find delight in (c. acc.), to enjoy S V.74 (rūpaŋ manāpaŋ); A IV.419 sq. (T. reads °hiŋsamāna jhānaŋ v.l. °hisamāna).
Abhihaṭa [pp. of abhiharati] brought, offered, presented, fetched D I.166 = Pug 55 (= puretaraŋ gahetvā āhaṭaŋ bhikkhaŋ Pug A 231); DhA II.79.
Abhihaṭṭhuŋ [ger. of abhiharati]. Only in praise abhihaṭṭhuŋ pavāreti, to offer having fetched up. M. I.224; A V.350, 352; S IV.190, V.53, 300. See note in Vinaya Texts II.440.
Abhihata [pp. of abhihanati] hit, struck PvA 55.
Abhihanati (& °hanti) [abhi + han] 1. to strike, hit PvA 258. -- 2. to overpower, kill, destroy J V.174 (inf. °hantu for T.
hantuŋ). -- pp. abhihata (q. v.).
Abhiharati [abhi + harati, cp. Sk. abhyāharati & Vedic āharati & ābharati] -- 1. to bring (to), to offer, fetch D III.170; J
I.54, 157; III.537; IV.421; DA I.272. -- 2. to curse, revile, abuse [cp. Sk. anuvyāharati & abhivyā°] A I.198. -- Pass. abhihariyati VvA 172 (for abhiharati of Vv 3710; corresp. with ābhata VvA 172). -- pp. abhihaṭa (q.v.). -- Caus. abhihāreti
1. to cause to be brought, to gain, to acquire D II.188 = 192 = 195 Th 1, 637; J IV.421 (abhihārayaŋ with gloss abhibhārayiŋ). -- 2. to betake oneself to, to visit, take to, go to Sn 414 (Paṇd̤avaŋ °hāresi = āruhi Sn A 383), 708 (vanantaŋ abhihāraye = vanaŋ gaccheyya SnA 495); Th 2, 146 (aor. °hārayiŋ; uyyānaŋ = upanesi ThA 138). -- 3. to put on (mail), only in fut. abhihessati J IV.92 (kavacaŋ; C. expls. wrongly by °hanissati bhindissati so evidently taking it as abhibhavissati). -- 4. At J VI.27 kiŋ yobbanena ciṇṇena yaŋ jarā abhihessati the latter is fut. of abhibhavati (for °bhavissati) as indicated by gloss abhibhuyyati.

Abhihāra [fr. abhiharati] bringing, offering, gift S I.82; Sn 710; J I.81 (āsanâ). Abhihiŋsati spurious reading at A IV.419 for °haŋsati (q.v.).
Abhihiŋsanā (& °ŋ) [for abhihesanā cp. P. hesā = Sk. hreṣā, & hesitaŋ] neighing Vv 6410 = VvA 279 (gloss abhihesana). See in detail under abhisaŋsanā.
Abhihīta S I.50. Read abhigīta with SS. So also for abhihita on p. 51. ʻSo enchanted was I by the Buddha's runeʼ. The godlet ascribes a magic potency to the couplet.
Abhihesana see abhihiŋsanā.
Abhihessati see abhihāreti see abhihāreti 3 & 4.
Abhīta (adj.) [a + bhīta] fearless J VI.193. See also abhida 1.
Abhīruka (adj.) [a + bhīru + ka] fearless DA I.250.
Abhumma (adj.) [a + bhumma] groundless, unfounded, unsubstantial, J V.178; VI.495.
Abhūta (adj.) [a + bhūta] not real, false, not true, usually as nt. °ŋ falsehood, lie, deceit Sn 387; It 37; instr. abhūtena falsely D I.161.
--vādin one who speaks falsely or tells lies Sn 661 = Dh 306 = It 42; expld. as "ariyɔ ûpavāda--vasena alika --vādin" SnA 478; as "tucchena paraŋ abhācikkhanto" DhA III.477.
Abhejja (adj.) [grd. of a + bhid, cp. Sk. abhedya] not to be split or divided, not to be drawn away or caused to be
dissented, inalienable Sn 255 (mitto abhejjo parehi); J I.263 (varasūra . . .) III.318 (°rūpa of strong character = abhijja--hadaya); Pug 30 (= acchejja Pug A 212); Miln 160 (°parisā); Sdhp 312 (+ appadusiya); Pgdp 97 (°parivāra).
Amacca [Vedic amātya (only in meaning "companion"), adj. formation fr. amā an adverbial loc.--gen. of pron. 1st person,
Sk. ahaŋ = Idg. *emo (cp. Sk. m--ama), meaning "(those) of me or with me", i. e. those who are in my house] 1. friend, companion, fellow--worker, helper, esp. one who gives his advice, a bosom--friend It 73; J VI. 512 (sahajātā amaccā); Pv II.620 (a °-- paricārikā welladvising friends as company or around him). Freq. in combn. with mitta as mittɔ âmaccā, friends & colleagues D III.189--90; S 190 = A II.67; PvA 29; or with ñātī (ñāti--sālohitā intimate friends & near--relations), mittâmaccā ñātisālohitā Vin II.126; Sn p. 104 (= mittā ca kammakarā ca SnA 447); mittā vā amaccā vā ñātī vā sālohitā vā A I.222; PvA
28; amaccā ñāti--sanghā ca A I.152. <-> 2. Especially a king's intimate friend, king's favourite, confidant J I.262; PvA 73 (°kula), 74 (amaccā ca purohito ca), 81 (sabba--kammika amacca), 93; and his special adviser or privy councillor, as such distinguished from the official ministers (purohita, mahāmatta, pārisajja); usually combd. with pārisajjā (pl.) viz. D I.136 (= piya--sahāyaka DA I.297, but cp. the foll. expln. of pārisajjā as "sesā āṇatti--karā"); Vin I.348; D III.64 (amaccā pārisajjā gaṇakamahāmattā); A I.142 (catunnaŋ mahārājānaŋ a. pārisajjā). See on the question of ministers in general Fick, Sociale Gliederung p. 93, 164 & Banerjea, Public Administration in Ancient India pp. 106--120.
Amajja [etym.?] a bud J V.416 (= makula C.).
Amajjapāyaka [a + majja + pāyaka, cp. Sk. amadyapa] one who abstains from intoxicants, a teetotaler J II.192.
Amata1 (nt.) [a + mata = mṛta pp. of mṛ, Vedic amṛta = Gr. a)--m(b)rot--o & a)mbrosi/a = Lat. im--mort--a(lis] 1. The

drink of the gods, ambrosia, water of immortality, (cp. BSk. amṛta--varṣa "rain of Ambrosia" Jtm 221). -- 2. A general conception of a state of durability & non--change, a state of security i. e. where there is not any more rebirth or re--death. So Bdhgh at KhA 180 (on Sn 225) "na jāyati na jīyati na mīyati ti amatan ti vuccati", or at DhA I.228 "ajātattā na jiyyati na miyyati tasmā amatan ti vuccati". -- Vin I.7 = M I.169 (apārutā tesaŋ amatassa dvārā); Vin I.39; D II.39, 217, 241; S I.32 (= rāgadosamoha--khayo), 193; III.2 (°ena abhisitta "sprinkled with A."); IV.94 (°assa dātā), 370; V.402 (°assa patti); A I.45 sq.; III.451; IV.455; V.226 sq., 256 sq. (°assa dātā); J I.4 (V.25); IV.378, 386; V.456 (°mahā--nibbāna); Sn 204, 225, 228 (= nibbāna KhA 185); Th 1, 310 (= agada antidote); It 46 = 62 (as dhātu), 80 (°assa dvāra); Dh 114, 374 (= amata--mahā--nibbāna
DhA IV.110); Miln 258 (°dhura savanûpaga), 319 (agado amataŋ & nibbānaŋ amataŋ), 336 (amatena lokaŋ abhisiñci Bhagavā), 346 (dhammɔ âmataŋ); DA I.217 (°nibbāna); DhA I.87 (°ŋ pāyeti); Dāvs II.34; V.31; Sdhp 1, 209, 530, 571.
--ogadha diving into the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S V. 41, 54, 181, 220, 232; A III.79, 304; IV.46 sq., 317, 387; V.105 sq.; Sn 635; Th 1, 179, 748; Dh 411 (= amataŋ nibbānaŋ ogahetvā DhA IV.186); Vv 5020. --osadha the medicine of Ambrosia, ambrosial medicine Miln 247. --gāmin going or leading to the ambrosia (of Nibbāna) S I.123; IV.370; V.8; A III.329; Th 2, 222. --dasa one who sees Amata or Nibbāna Th 1, 336. --dundubhi the drum of the Immortal (Nibbāna) M I.171 = Vin I.8 (has °dudrabhi). --dvāra the door to Nibbāna M I.353; S I. 137 = Vin I.5; S II.43, 45, 58, 80; A V.346. --dhātu the element of Ambrosia or Nibbāna A III.356. --patta having attained to Ambrosia A IV.455. --pada the region or place of Ambrosia S I.212 ("Bourne Ambrosial" trsln. p. 274); II.280; Dh 21 (= amatassa adhigama--vupāyo vuttaŋ hoti DhA I.228). --phala ambrosial fruit S I.173 = Sn 80. --magga the path to Ambrosia DhA I.94.
Amata2 (adj.) [see amata1] belonging to Amṛta = ambrosial Sn 452 = S I.189 (amatā vācā = amata--sadisā sādubhāvena SnA 399: "ambrosial"), 960 (gacchato amataŋ disaŋ = nibbānaŋ, taŋ hi amatan ti tathā niddisitabbato disā cā ti SnA 572). Perhaps also at It 46 = 62 (amataŋ dhātuŋ = ambrosial state or Amṛta as dhātu).
Amatabbāka (?) at VvA 111, acc. to Hardy (Index) "a precious stone of dark blue colour".
Amattaññu (adj.) [a + matta + °ñu = Sk. amātrajña] not knowing any bounds (in the taking of food), intemperate,
immoderate It 23 (bhojanamhi); Dh 7 (id.); Pug 21.
Amattaññutā (f.) [abstr. to prec.] immoderation (in food) D III.213; It 23 (bhojane); Pug 21; Dhs 1346 (bhojane); DhsA 402.
Amatteyyatā (f.) [from matteyyatā] irreverence towards one's mother D III.70, 71.
Amanussa [a + manussa] a being which is not human, a fairy demon, ghost, god, spirit, yakkha Vin I.277; D I. 116; S
I.91, J I.99; Dhs 617; Miln 207; DhsA 319; DhA I.13 (°pariggahīta haunted); PvA 216. -- Cp. amānusa. Amanussika (adj.) [fr. amanussa] belonging to or caused by a spirit Vin I.202, 203 (°âbādha being possessed by a
Amama (adj.) [a + mama, gen. of ahaŋ, pron. 1st person, lit. "not (saying: this is) of me"] not egotistical, unselfish Sn 220
(+ subbata), 777; J IV.372 (+ nirāsaya); VI.259 (= mamāyana--taṇhā--rahita C.); Pv IV.134 (= mamaŋkāravirahita PvA 230); Mhvs 1, 66, combd. with nirāsa (free from longing), at Sn 469 = 494; Ud 32; J IV.303; VI.259.
Amara (adj.) [a + mara from mṛ] not mortal, not subject to death Th 1, 276; Sn 249 (= amara--bhāva--patthanatāya pavatta--kāya--kilesa SnA 291); J V.80 (= amaraṇa--sabhāva), 218; Dāvs V.62.
Amaratta (nt.) [abstr. fr. amara] immortality J V.223 (= devatta C.).
Amarā (?) a kind of slippery fish, an eel (?) Only in expression amarā--vikkhepika eel--wobbler, one who practices

eel--wriggling, fr. °vikkhepa "oscillation like the a. fish". In English idiom "a man who sits on the fence" D I.24; M I.521; Ps I.155. The expln. given by Bdhgh at DA I.115 is "amarā nāma maccha--jāti, sā ummujjana--nimmujjan--ādi vasena . . gahetuŋ na sakkoti" etc. This meaning is not beyond doubt, but Kern's expln. Toev. 71 does not help to clear it up.
Amala (adj.) [a + mala] without stain or fault J V.4; Sdhp 246, 591, 596. Amassuka (adj.) [a + massu + ka] beardless J II.185.
Amājāta (adj.) [amā + jāta; amā adv. "at home", Vedic amā, see under amacca] born in the house, of a slave J I.226 (dāsa, so read for āmajāta, an old mistake, expld. by C. forcibly as "āma ahaŋ vo dāsī ti"!). See also āmāya.
Amātika (adj.) [a + mātika from mātā] without a mother, motherless J V.251.
Amānusa (adj.) [Vedic amānuṣa, usually of demons, but also of gods; a + mānusa, cp. amanussa] non-- or superhuman, unhuman, demonic, peculiar to a non--human (Peta or Yakkha) Pv II.1220 (kāma); IV.157 (as n.); IV.36 (gandha, of Petas). -- f. °ī Dh 373 (rati = dibbā rati DhA IV.110); Pv III.79 (ratti, love).
Amāmaka (adj.) [a + mama + ka, cp. amama] "not of me" i. e. not belonging to my party, not siding with me DhA I.66. Amāya (adj.) [a + māyā] not deceiving, open, honest Sn 941 (see Nd1 422: māyā vuccati vañcanikā cariyā). Cp. next.
Amāyāvin (adj.) [a + māyāvin, cp. amāya] without guile, not deceiving, honest D III.47 (asaṭha +), 55 (id.), 237; DhA I.69 (asaṭhena a.).
Amitābha (adj.) [a + mita (pp. of mā) + ā + bhā] of boundless or immeasurable splendour Sdhp 255.
Amitta [Vedic amitra; a + mitta] one who is not friend, an enemy D III.185; It 83; Sn 561 (= paccatthika SnA 455); Dh
66, 207; J VI.274 (°tāpana harassing the enemies).
Amilātatā (f.) [a + milāta + tā] the condition of not being withered J V.156.
Amu° base of demonstr. pron. "that", see asu.
Amucchita (adj.) [a + mucchita] not infatuated (lit. not stupified or bewildered), not greedy; only in phrase agathita amucchita anajjhāpanna (or anajjhopanna) D III.46; M I.369; S II.194. See ajjhopanna.
Amutta (adj.) [a + mutta] not released, not free from (c. abl.) It 93 (mārabandhanā).
Amutra (adv.) [pron. base amu + tra] in that place, there; in another state of existence D I.4, 14, 184; It 99.
Amūḷha--vinaya "acquittal on the ground of restored sanity" (Childers) Vin I.325 (IX.6, 2); II.81 (IV.5), 99 (IV.14, 27); IV.207, 351; M II.248.
Amoha (adj.) [a + moha, cp. Sk. amogha] not dull. As n. absence of stupidity or delusion D III.214; Pug 25. <-> The form amogha occurs at J VI.26 in the meaning of "efficacious, auspicious" (said of ratyā nights).
Amba [Derivation unknown. Not found in pre--Buddhist literature. The Sk. is āmra. Probably non--Aryan], the Mango tree, Mangifera Indica D I.46, 53, 235; J II.105, 160; Vv 7910; Pug 45; Miln 46; PvA 153, 187.
--aṭṭhi the kernel or stone of the m. fruit DhA III.207, 208. --ārāma a garden of mangoes, mango grove Vv 795; VvA 305. --kañjika mango gruel Vv 3337 (= ambilakañjika VvA 147). --pakka a (ripe) mango fruit J II.104, 394; DhA III.207.

--panta a border of mango trees VvA 198. --pānaka a drink made from mangoes DhA III.207. --piṇd̤i a bunch of mangoes J III.53; DhA III.207. --pesikā the peel, rind, of the m. fruit Vin II.109. --potaka a mango sprout DhA III.206 sq. --phala a m. fruit PvA 273, 274. --rukkha a m. tree DhA III.207; VvA 198. --vana a m. grove or wood D II.126; J I.139; VvA 305. --siñcaka one who waters the mangoes, a tender or keeper of mangoes Vv 797.
Ambaka1 (adj.) [= ambakā?] "womanish" (?), inferior, silly, stupid, of narrow intellect. Occurs only with reference to a woman, in combn. with bālā A III.349 (v. l. amma°) = V.139 (where spelt ambhaka with v. l. appaka° and gloss andhaka); V.150 (spelt ambhaka perhaps in diff. meaning).
--maddarī see next.
Ambaka2 [demin. of amba] a little mango, only in °maddarī a kiṇd of bird [etym. uncertain] A I.188.
Ambakā (f.) [Sk. ambikā demin. of ambī mother, wife, see P. amma & cp. also Sk. ambālikā f.] mother, good wife, used
as a general endearing term for a woman Vin I.232 = D II.97 (here in play of words with Ambapālī expld. by Bdhgh at Vin I.385 as ambakā ti itthiyikā).
Ambara1 (nt.) [Vedic ambara circumference, horizon] the sky, Dāvs I.38; IV.51; V.32. -- Note. At J V.390 we have to read
muraja--ālambara, and not mura--jāla--ambara. Ambara2
Ambara2 (m.--nt.) [etym. = ambara1 (?) or more likely a distortion of kambala; for the latter speaks the combn. rattambara = ratta--kambala. -- The word would thus be due to an erroneous syllable division rattak--ambala (= ambara) instead of ratta--kambala] some sort of cloth and an (upper) garment made of it (cp. kambala) Vv 537 (ratt° = uttariya VvA 236).
Ambala at J II.246 (°koṭṭhaka--āsana--sālā) for ambara1 (?) or for ambaka2 (?), or should we read kambala°?. Ambāṭaka the hog--plum, Spondias Mangifera (a kind of mango) Vin II.17 (°vana); DA I.271 (°rukkha).
Ambila (adj.) [Sk. amla = Lat. amarus] sour, acid; one of the 6 rasas or tastes, viz. a., lavaṇa, tittaka, kaṭuka, kasāya, madhura (see under rasa): thus at Miln 56. Another enumeration at Nd2 540 & Dhs 629. -- J I.242 (°anambila), 505 (loṇ°); II.394 (loṇ°); DA I.270 (°yāgu sour gruel); DhA II.85 (ati--ambila, with accuṇha & atisīta).
Ambu (nt.) [Vedic ambu & ambhas = Gr. o)/mbros, Lat. imber rain; cp. also Sk. abhra rain--cloud & Gr. a)fro/s scum: see P. abbha] water J V.6; Nd1 202 (a. vuccati udakaŋ); Dāvs II.16. -- Cp. ambha.
--cārin "living in the water", a fish Sn 62 (= maccha Nd2 91). --sevāla a water--plant Th 1, 113.
Ambuja (m. & nt.) [ambu + ja of jan] "water--born", i. e. 1. (m.) a fish S I.52. -- 2. (nt.) a lotus Sn 845 (= paduma Nd1
202); Dāvs V.46; Sdhp 360.
Ambuda [ambu + da fr. dā] "water--giver", a cloud Dāvs V.32; Sdhp 270, 275. Ambha & Ambho (nt.) [see ambu] water, sea Dāvs IV.54.

Ambhaka see ambaka.
Ambho (indecl.) [fr. haŋ + bho, see bho, orig. "hallo you there"] part. of exclamation, employed: 1. to draw attention =
look here, hey! hallo! Vin III.73 (= ālapanɔ âdhivacana); J II.3; PvA 62. -- 2. to mark reproach & anger = you silly, you rascal D I.194; It 114; J I.174 (v. l. amho), 254; Miln 48.
Amma (indecl.) [voc. of ammā] endearing term, used (1) by children in addressing their mother = mammy, mother dear D I.93; J II.133; IV.1, 281 (amma tāta uṭṭhetha daddy, mammy, get up!); DhA II.87; PvA 73, 74. <-> (2) in general when addressing a woman familiarly = good woman, my (good) lady, dear, thus to a woman J I.292; PvA 63; DhA II.44; to a girl PvA 6; to a daughter DhA II.48; III.172. -- Cp. ambakā.
Ammaṇa (nt.) [of uncertain etym.; Sk. armaṇa is Sanskritised Pāli. See on form & meaning Childers s. v. and Kern, Toev.
p. 72] 1. a trough J V.297; VI.381 (bhatt°). <-> 2. a certain measure of capacity J I.62; II.436 (taṇd̤ul°). <-> As °ka at J II.117 (v. l. ampaṇaka); DA I.84.
Ammā (f.) [onomat. from child language; Sk. ambā, cp. Gr. a)mma/s mother, Oisl. amma "granny", Ohg. amma "mammy", nurse; also Lat. amita father's sister & amāre to love] mother J III.392 (gen. ammāya). -- Voc. amma (see sep.).
Amha & Amhan (nt.) [Sk. aśman, see also asama2] a stone Sn 443 (instr. amhanā, but SnA 392 reads asmanā = pāsāṇena).
--maya made of stone, hard Dh 161 (= pāsāṇa° DhA III.151).
see atthi.
Amhā (f.) [etym. uncertain; Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 201 too vague] a cow (?) A I.229. The C. says nothing.
see ahaŋ.
J I.174 (v. l.).
Aya1 see ayo.
Aya2 (fr. i, go) 1. income, in aya--potthaka receipt book J I.2. -- 2. inlet (for water, aya--mukha) D I.74; A II. 166, IV.287.
Ayaŋ (pron.) [Sk. ayaŋ etc., pron. base Idg. *i (cp. Sk. iha), f. *ī. Cp. Gr. i)n, min; Lat. is (f. ea, nt. id); Goth is, nt. ita; Ohg. er (= he), nt. ez (= it); Lith. jìs (he), f. jì (she).] demonstr. pron. "this, he"; f. ayaŋ; nt. idaŋ & imaŋ "this, it" etc. This pron. combines in its inflection two stems, viz. as° (ayaŋ in nom. m. & f.) & im° (id° in nom. nt.).
I. Forms. A. (sg.) nom. m. ayaŋ Sn 235; J I.168, 279; f. ayaŋ [Sk. iyaŋ] Kh VII.12; J II.128, 133; nt. idaŋ Sn 224; J III.53; & imaŋ Miln 46. acc. m. imaŋ J II.160; f. imaŋ [Sk. īmāŋ] Sn 545, 1002; J I.280. gen. dat. m. imassa J I.222, 279 & assa Sn 234, 1100; Kh VII.12 (dat.); J II.158; f. imissā J I.179 & assā [Sk. asyāḥ] J I.290; DhA III.172. instr. m. nt. iminā J I.279; PvA 80 & (peculiarly or perhaps for amunā) aminā Sn 137; f. imāya [Sk. anayā] J I.267. The instr. anena [Sk. anena] is not proved in Pāli. abl. asmā Sn 185; Dh 220; & imasmā (not proved). loc. m. nt. imasmiŋ Kh III.; J II. 159 & asmiŋ Sn 634; Dh 242; f. imissā
PvA 79 (or imissaŋ?) & imāyaŋ (no ref.). -- B. (pl.) nom. m. ime J I.221; Pv I.83; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 897 & imāyo Sn 1122;
nt. imāni [= Sk.] Vin I.84. acc. m. ime [Sk. imān] J I.266; II.416; f. imā [Sk. imāḥ] Sn 429; J II.160. gen. imesaŋ J II.160 & esaŋ [Sk. eṣāŋ] M II.86, & esānaŋ M II.154; III.259; f. also āsaŋ J I.302 (= etāsaŋ C.) & imāsaŋ. instr. m. nt imehi J VI.364; f. imāhi. loc. m. nt. imesu [Sk. eṣu] J I.307.

II. Meanings (1) ayaŋ refers to what is immediately in front of the speaker (the subject in question) or before his eyes or in his present time & situation, thus often to be trsld. by "before our eyes", "the present", "this here", "just this" (& not the other) (opp. para), viz. atthi imasmiŋ kāye "in this our visible body" Kh III.; yathɔ âyaŋ padīpo "like this lamp here" Sn 235; ayaŋ dakkhiṇā dinnā "the gift which is just given before our eyes" Kh VII.12; ime pādā imaŋ sīsaŋ ayaŋ kāyo Pv I.83; asmiŋ loke paramhi ca "in this world & the other" Sn 634, asmā lokā paraŋ lokaŋ kathaŋ pecca na socati Sn 185; cp. also Dh 220, 410; J I.168; III.53. --
(2) It refers to what immediately precedes the present of the speaker, or to what has just been mentioned in the sentence; viz. yaŋ kiñci vittaŋ . . . idam pi Buddhe ratanaŋ "whatever . . . that" Sn 224; ime divase these days (just gone) J II.416; cp. also Vin I.84; Sn 429; J II.128, 160. -- (3) It refers to what immediately follows either in time or in thought or in connection: dve ime antā "these are the two extremes, viz." Vin I.10; ayaŋ eva ariyo maggo "this then is the way" ibid.; cp. J I.280. <-> (4) With a touch of (often sarcastic) characterisation it establishes a closer personal relation between the speaker & the object in question & is to be trsld. by "like that, such (like), that there, yonder, yon", e. g. imassa vānarindassa "of that fellow, the monkey" J I.279; cp. J I. 222, 307; II 160 (imesaŋ sattānaŋ "creatures like us"). So also repeated as ayañ ca ayañ ca "this and this", "so and so" J II.3; idañ cɔ idañ ca "such & such a thing" J II.5. -- (5) In combn with a pron. rel. it expresses either a generalisation (whoever, whatever) or a specialisation (= that is to say, what there is of, i. e. Ger. und zwar), e. g. yâyaŋ taṇhā Vin I.10; yo ca ayaŋ . . . yo ca ayaŋ "I mean this . . . and I mean" ibid.; ye kecɔ ime Sn 381; yadidaŋ "i. e." Miln 25; yatha--y--idaŋ "in order that" (w. pot.) Sn 1092. See also seyyathīdaŋ. -- (6) The gen. of all genders functions in general as a possessive pron. of the 3rd = his, her, its (lit. of him etc.) and thus resembles the use of tassa, e. g. āsavaɔ ssa na vijjanti "his are no intoxications" Sn 1100; sīlaŋ assā bhindāpessāmi "I shall cause her character to be defamed" J I.290; assa bhariyā "his wife" J II.158 etc. freq.
Ayana (nt.) [Vedic ayana, fr. i] (a) "going", road. -- (b) going to, goal S V.167 (ekāyano maggo leading to one goal, a direct way), 185 (id.); DA I.313; Dāvs IV.40. <-> See also eka°.
Ayasa (nt.) [a + yasa, cp. Sk. ayaśaḥ] ill repute, disgrace Miln 139, 272; Dāvs I.8.
(n.--adj.) [Vedic ārya, Metathesis for ariya as diaeretic form of ārya, of which the contracted (assimilation) form is ayya. See also ariya] (n.) ariyan, nobleman, gentleman (opp. servant); (adj.) arīyan, wellborn, belonging to the ruling race, noble, aristocratic, gentlemanly J V.257; Vv 396. -- f. ayirā lady, mistress (of a servant) J II.349 (v. l. oyyakā); voc. ayire my lady J V.138 (= ayye C.).
Ayiraka = ayira; cp. ariyaka & ayyaka; D III.190 (v. l. BB yy); J II.313.
Ayo & Aya (nt.) [Sk. ayaḥ nt. iron & ore, Idg. *ajes--, cp. Av. ayah, Lat. aes, Goth. aiz, Ohg. ēr (= Ger. Erz.), Ags. ār
(= E. ore).] iron. The nom. ayo found only in set of 5 metals forming an alloy of gold (jātarūpa), viz. ayo, loha (copper), tipu (tin), sīsa (lead), sajjha (silver) A III.16 = S V.92; of obl. cases only the instr. ayasā occurs Dh 240 (= ayato DhA III.344); Pv I.1013 (paṭikujjita, of Niraya). -- Iron is the material used kat)e)coxh/n in the outfit & construction of Purgatory or Niraya (see niraya & Avīci & cp. Vism 56 sq.). -- In compn. both ayo° & aya° occur as bases.
I. ayo°: --kapāla an iron pot A IV.70 (v. l. °guhala); Nd2 304 III. D 2 (of Niraya). --kūṭa an iron hammer PvA 284. --khīla an iron stake S V.444; M III.183 = Nd2 304 III. C; SnA 479. --guḷa an iron ball S V.283; Dh 308; It 43 = 90; Th 2, 489; DA I.84. --ghana an iron club Ud 93; VvA 20. --ghara an iron house J IV.492. --paṭala an iron roof or ceiling (of Niraya) PvA 52. --pākāra an iron fence Pv I.1013 = Nd2 304 III. D 1. --maya made of iron Sn 669 (kūṭa); J IV.492 (nāvā); Pv I.1014 (bhūmi of N.); PvA 43, 52. --muggara an iron club PvA 55. --sanku an iron spike S IV.168; Sn 667.
II. aya°: --kapāla = ayo° DhA I.148 (v. l. ayo°). -kāra a worker in iron Miln 331. --kūṭa = ayo° J I.108; DhA II.69 (v. l.). --nangala an iron plough DhA I.223; III.67. --paṭṭaka an iron plate or sheet (cp. loha°) J V.359. --paṭhavi an iron floor (of Avīci) DhA I.148. --sanghāṭaka an iron (door) post DhA IV.104. --sūla an iron stake Sn 667; DhA I.148.
Ayojjha (adj.) [Sk. ayodhya] not to be conquered or subdued M II.24.
Ayya (n.--adj.) [contracted form for the diaeretic ariya (q. v. for etym.). See also ayira] (a) (n.) gentleman, sire, lord, master
J III.167 = PvA 65; DhA I.8 (ayyā pl. the worthy gentlemen, the worthies), 13 (amhākaŋ ayyo our worthy Sir); II.95. -- (b) (adj.) worthy, gentlemanly, honourable Vin II.191; DhA II.94 sq. -- The voc. is used as a polite form of address (cp. Ger. "Sie"

and E. address "Esq.") like E. Sir, milord or simply "you" with the implication of a pluralis majestatis; thus voc. proper ayya J I.221, 279, 308; pl. nom. as voc. ayyā in addressing several J II.128, 415; nom. sg. as voc. (for all genders & numbers) ayyo Vin II.215; J III.126, 127. -- f. ayyā lady, mistress M II.96 (= mother of a prince); DhA I.398; voc. ayye my lady J V.138.
--putta lit. son of an Ariyan, i. e. an aristocratic (young) man gentleman (cp. in meaning kulaputta); thus (a) son of my master (lit.) said by a servant J III.167; (b) lord, master, "governor" J I.62 (by a servant); DA I.257 (= sāmi, opp. dāsi--putta); PvA 145 (by a wife to her husband); DhA II.110; (c) prince (see W.Z.K.M. XII., 1898, 75 sq. & Epigraphia Indica III.137 sq.) J VI.146.
Ayyaka [demin. of ayya] grandfather, (so also BSk., e. g. M Vastu II.426; III.264) J III.155; IV.146; VI.196; Pv I.84; Miln
284. ayyaka--payyakā grandfather & great grandfather,
forefathers, ancestors J I.2; PvA 107 (= pitāmahā). -- f. ayyakā grandmother, granny Vin II.169; S I.97; J II.349 (here used for "lady", as v. l. BB); & ayyikā Th 2, 159; Vism 379.
Ara [Vedic ara fr. ṛ, ṛṇoti; see etym. under appeti & cp. more esp. Lat. artus limb, Gr. a(/rma chariot, also P. aṇṇava] the spoke of a wheel D II.17 (sahassɔ âra adj. with thousand spokes), cp. Miln 285; J IV.209; VI.261; Miln 238; DhA II.142; VvA 106 (in allegorical etym. of arahant = saŋsāra--cakkassa arānaŋ hatattā "breaker of the spokes of the wheel of transmigration") = PvA 7 (has saŋsāra--vaṭṭassa); VvA 277.
Arakkhiya (adj.) [a + rakkhiya, grd. of rakkhati] not to be guarded, viz. (1) impossible to watch (said of women folk) J II.326 (a. nāma itthiyo); III.90 (mātugāmo nāma a.). -- (2) unnecessary to be guarded Vin II.194 (Tathāgatā).
Arakkheyya (adj.) [in form = arakkhiya] only in nt. "that which does not need to be guarded against", what one does not
need to heed, superfluous to beware of A IV.82 (cattāri Tathāgatassa a° āni). -- 3 arakkheyyāni are enumd. at D III.217 (but as ārakkh°, which is also given by Childers).
Araghaṭṭa [Sk. araghaṭṭaka (so Halāyudha, see Aufrecht p. 138), dialect.] a wheel for raising water from a well Bdgh. on cakkavaṭṭaka at CV V.16, 2 (Vin II.318). So read for T. arahatta--ghaṭi--yanta acc to Morris, J.P.T.S. 1885, 30; cp. also Vin. Texts III.112. -- The 2rd part of the cpd. is doubtful; Morris & Aufrecht compare the modern Hindī form arhaṭ or rahaṭ "a well--wheel".
Araja (adj.) [a + raja] free from dust or impurity S IV.218 (of the wind); Vv 536 (= apagata--raja VvA 236).
Arañña (nt.) [Vedic araṇya; from araṇa, remote, + ya. In the Rig V. araṇya still means remoteness (opp. to amā, at
home). In the Ath V. it has come to mean wilderness or forest. Connected with ārād and āre, remote, far from]. forest D I.71; M I.16; III.104; S I.4, 7, 29, 181, 203 (mahā); A I.60 (°vanapatthāni); II.252; III.135, 138; Sn 39, 53, 119; Dh 99, 329, 330; It 90; Vv 567; Ps I.176. [The commentators, give a wider meaning to the word. Thus the O. C. (Vin III.46, quoted Vism 72 & SnA 83) says every place, except a village and the approach thereto, is arañña. See also Vin III.51; DA I.209; PvA 73; VvA 249; J I.149, 215; II.138; V.70].
--āyatana a forest haunt Vin II.201; S II.269; J I.173; VvA 301; PvA 54, 78, 141. --kuṭikā a hut in the forest, a forest lodge S I.61; III.116; IV.116, 380; DhA IV.31 (as v. l.; T. has °kuṭi). --gata gone into the forest (as loneliness) M I.323; A III.353; V.109 sq., 207, 323 sq. --ṭhāna a place in the forest J I.253. --vāsa a dwelling in the forest, a hermitage J I.90. --vihāra living in (the) loneliness (of the forest) A III.343 sq.
(adj.) [arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or to the forest, living in the forest, fond of solitude, living as hermits (bhikkhū) M I.214 (ā°), 469; III.89; S II.187, 202 (v. l. ā°), 208 sq.; 281; A III.343, 391; IV.291, 344, 435; V.10. See also āraññaka.
Araññakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. araññaka] the habit of one who lives in the forest, indulgence in solitude & sequestration, a hermit's practice, seclusion S II.202, 208 sq. See also āraññakatta.

Araṇa1 (adj.--n.) [Vedic araṇa fr. *ara √ṛ, which as abl. ārā is used as adv. far from, cp. P. ārakā. Orig. meaning "removed from, remote, far". See also arañña]. (adj.) living in solitude, far from the madding crowd M III.237 (°vibhanga--sutta); S I.44, 45; J I.340 (tittha°?).
Araṇa2 (nt.) [a + raṇa] quietude, peace Nett 55 (+ tāṇa), 176 (or as adj. = peaceful) ThA 134 (+ saraṇa); Vbh 19 sq. (opp. saraṇa). See saraṇa2.
--vihārin (or araṇā--vihārin) [to be most likely taken as araṇā°, abl. of araṇa in function of ārakā, i. e. adv. far from, away; the spelling araṇa would refer it to araṇa2. As regards meaning the P. Commentators expln. it as opp. of raṇa fight, battle, i. e. peacefullness, friendliness & see in it a syn. of metta. Thus Dhammapāla at PvA 230 expls. it as "mettā--vihārin", & in this meaning it is found freq. in BSk. e. g. Divy 401; Av. Ś II.131 (q. v. for further ref. under note 3); M Vastu I.165; II.292. Cp. also the epithet of the Buddhas raṇañjaha] one who lives in seclusion, an anchoret, hermit; hence a harmless, peaceful person A I.24; Th 2, 358, 360; Pv IV.133 (= PvA 230); ThA 244. Cp. Dhs trsl. 336.
Araṇi & °ī (f.) [Vedic araṇī & araṇi fr. ṛ] wood for kindling fire by attrition, only in foll. cpds.: °potaka small firewood,
all that is needed for producing fire, chiefly drill sticks Miln 53; °sahita (nt.) same Vin II.217; J I. 212 (ī); V.46 (ī); DhA II.246; °mathana rubbing of firewood J VI.209. -- Note. The reading at PvA 211 araṇiyehi devehi sadisa--vaṇṇa is surely a
misreading (v. l. BB ariyehi).
Arati (f.) [a + rati] dislike, discontent, aversion Sn 270, 436, 642, 938; Dh 418 (= ukkaṇṭhitattaŋ DhA IV.225); Th 2, 339 (= ukkaṇṭhi ThA 239); Sdhp 476.
Aravinda [ara + vinda (?) Halāyudha gives as Sk. aravinda nt.] a lotus, Nymphaea Nelumbo Dāvs V.62.
Araha (adj.) (--°) [Vedic arha of arh] 1. worthy of, deserving, entitled to, worth Dh 195 (pūjā°); Pv II.86 (dakkhiṇā°); VvA
23 (daṇd̤a° deserving punishment). Freq. in cpd. mahâraha [Sk. mahârgha] worth much, of great value, costly, dear J I.50, 58; III.83, etc. (see mahant). -- 2. fit for, apt for, suitable PvA 26 (paribhoga° fit for eating).
Arahati [Vedic arhati, etym. uncertain but cp. agghati] to be worthy of, to deserve, to merit (= Lat. debeo) Sn 431, 552 (rājā arahasi bhavituŋ); J I.262; Dh 9, 10, 230; Pv III.66. -- ppr. arahant (q. v.). Cp. also adj. araha.
Arahatta1 (nt.) [abstr. formation fr. arahat°, 2nd base of arahant in compn.: see arahant IV.2] the state or condition of an Arahant, i. e. perfection in the Buddhist sense = Nibbāna (S IV.151) final & absolute emancipation, Arahantship, the attainment of the last & highest stage of the Path (see magga & anāgāmin). This is not restricted by age or sex or calling. There is one instance in the Canon of a child having attained Arahantship at the age of 7. One or two others occur in the Comy ThA 64 (Selā); PvA 53 (Sankicca). Many women Arahants are mentioned by name in the oldest texts. About 400 men Arahants
are known. Most of them were bhikkhus, but A III.451 gives the names of more than a score lay Arahants (cp. D II.93 = S V.360, and the references in Dial. III.5 n4). <-> Arahattaŋ is defined at S IV.252 as rāga--kkhaya, dosa°, moha°. Descriptions of this state are to be found in the formulae expressing the feelings of an Arahant (see arahant II.). Vin II.254; D III.10, 11, 255; A III.34, 421, 430; V.209; Pug 73; Nett 15, 82; DA I.180, 188, 191; DhA II 95; IV.193; PvA 14. -- Phrases: arahattaŋ sacchikaroti to experience Arahantship Vin II.74; D I.229; arahattaŋ pāpuṇāti to attain or reach Arahantship (usually in
aor. pāpuṇi) J II.229 ThA 64; DhA II.49 (saha paṭisambhidāhi) 93 (id.); PvA 53, 54, 61, 233 & freq. elsewhere; cp. arahattāya paṭipanna D III.255; A I.120; IV.292 sq., 372 sq.
--gahaṇa attainment of Arahantship DhA I.8. --patta (& patti) one who has attained Ar. S I.196; V.273; A II.157; III.376; IV.235. --phala the fruit of Ar. Vin I.39, 41, 293; III.93; D III.227, 277; S III.168; V.44; A I.23, 45; III.272; IV.276; Dhs 1017; Vbh 326. --magga the Path of Ar. S I.78; A III.391; DA I.224. --vimokkha the emancipation of Ar. Nd2 19.

Arahatta2 in °ghaṭi
Arahatta2 in °ghaṭi see araghaṭṭa.
Arahant (adj.--n.) [Vedic arhant, ppr. of arhati (see arahati), meaning deserving, worthy]. Before Buddhism used as honorific title of high officials like the English ʻHis Worshipʼ; at the rise of Buddhism applied popularly to all ascetics (Dial. III.3--6). Adopted by the Buddhisṭs as t. t. for one who has attained the Summum Bonum of religious aspiration (Nibbāna).
I. Cases nom. sg. arahaŋ Vin I.9; D I.49; M I.245, 280; S I.169; see also formula C. under II., & arahā Vin I.8, 25, 26; II.110, 161; D III.255; It 95; Kh IV.; gen. arahato S IV.175; Sn 590; instr. arahatā S III.168; DA I.43; acc. arahantaŋ D III.10; Dh 420; Sn 644; Loc. arahantamhi Vv 212. -- nom. pl. arahanto Vin I.19; IV.112; S I.78, 235; II.220; IV.123; gen. arahataŋ Vin III.1; S I.214; Sn 186; It 112; Pv I.1112. Other cases are of rare occurrence.
II. Formulae. Arahantship finds its expression in freq. occurring formulae, of which the standard ones are the foll.: A. khīṇā jāti vusitaŋ brahmacariyaŋ kataŋ karaṇīyaŋ nâparaŋ itthattāya "destroyed is (re--) birth, lived is a chaste life, (of a
student) done is what had to be done, after this present life there is no beyond". Vin I.14, 35, 183; D I.84, 177, 203; M I.139; II.39; S I. 140; II.51, 82, 95, 120, 245; III.21, 45, 55, 68, 71, 90, 94, 195, 223; IV.2, 20, 35, 45, 86, 107, 151, 383; V.72, 90, 144, 222; A I.165; II.211; III.93; IV.88, 179, 302; V.155, 162; Sn p. 16; Pug 61, etc. -- B. eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī
pahitatto ʻalone, secluded, earnest, zealous, master of himselfʼ D I.177; II.153 & continued with A: S I.140, 161; II.21; III.36, 74; IV.64; V.144, 166; A I.282; II.249; III.70, 217, 301, 376; IV. 235. -- C. arahaŋ khīṇāsavo vusitavā katakaraṇīyo ohitabhāro anupatta--sadattho parikkhīṇa--bhava--saññojano sammad--aññā vimutto: D III.83, 97; M I.4, 235; S
I.71; III.161, 193; IV.125; V.145, 205, 273, 302; A I.144; III.359, 376; IV.362, 369, 371 sq., It 38. <-> D. ñāṇañ ca pana me dassanaŋ udapādi akuppā me ceto--vimutti ayaŋ antimā jāti natthi dāni punabbhavo "there arose in me insight, the emancipation of my heart became unshake able, this is my last birth, there is now no rebirth for me: S II.171; III.28; IV.8; V.204; A I.259; IV.56, 305, 448.
III. Other passages (selected) Vin I.8 (arahā sītibhūto nibbuto), 9 (arahaŋ Tathāgato Sammāsambuddho), 19 (ekādasa loke arahanto), 20 (ekasaṭṭhi id.). 25 sq.; II. 110, 161; III.1; IV.112 (te arahanto udake kīḷanti); D I.49 (Bhagavā arahaŋ), 144; III.10, 255: M I.245 (Gotamo na pi kālaŋ karoti: arahaŋ samaṇo Gotamo), 280; S I.9, 26, 50 (Tathāgato), 78, 140, 161, 169, 175,
178 (+ sītibhūta), 208, 214, 235 (khīnāsavā arahanto); III. 160 (arahā tissa?), 168; IV.123, 175, 260, 393; V.159 sq., 164, 200 sq.; A I.22 (Sammāsambuddho), 27, 109, 266; Iī.134; III.376, 391, 439; IV.364, 394; V.120; Sn 186, 590, 644, 1003; It 95 (+ khīṇāsava), 112; Kh IV. (dasahi angehi samannāgato arahā ti vuccati: see KhA 88); Vv 212; I.217; Dh 164, 420 (khīṇāsava +); Ps II.3, 19, 194, 203 sq.; Pug 37, 73; Vbh 324, 336, 422; Pv I.11 (khettûpamā arahanto), 1112; IV.132.
IV. In compn. & der. we find two bases, viz. (1) arahanta° in °ghāta the killing or murder of an Arahant (considered as one of the six deadly crimes): see abhiṭhāna; °ghātaka the murderer of the A.: Vin I.89, 136, 168, 320; °magga (arahatta°?) the path of an A.: D II 144. -- (2) arahat° in (arahad--)dhaja the flag or banner of an A.: J I.65.
V. See further details & passages under anāgāmin, khīṇa, buddha. On the relationship of Buddha and Arahant see Dial. II.1--3; III.6. For riddles or word--play on the form arahant see M I.280; A IV.145; DA I.146 = VvA 105, 6 = PvA 7; DhA IV.228; DhsA 349.
Arāti [a + rāti, cp. Sk. arāti] an enemy Dāvs IV.1.
Ari [Ved. ari; fr. ṛ] an enemy. -- The word is used in exegesis & word expln, thus in etym. of arahant (see ref. under arahant
v.); of bhūri Ps II.197. -- Otherwise in late language only, e. g. Sdhp 493 (°bhūta). See also arindama & aribhāseti. Ariñcamāna [ppr. med. of P. riñcati for ricyati] not leaving behind, not giving up, i. e. pursuing earnestly Sn 69 (jhānaŋ
= ajȧhamana SnA 123, cp. Nd2 94).
Ariṭṭha1 (adj.) [a + riṭṭha = Vedic ariṣṭa, pp of a + riṣ to hurt or be hurt] unhurt Sdhp 279.

Ariṭṭha2 [Sk. ariṣṭa, N. of a tree] a kind of spirituous liquor Vin IV.110.
Ariṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. ariṭṭha] (a) unhurt; perfect DA 1,94 (°ŋ ñāṇaŋ). -- (b) [fr. ariṭṭha in meaning of "soap--berry plant"?]
in phrase mahā ariṭṭhako maṇi S I.104 "a great mass of soap stone" (cp. Rh. D. in J. R. A. S. 1895, 893 sq.), "a shaped block of steatite" (Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S 130).
Aritta (nt.) [Vedic aritra, Idg. *ere to row (Sk. ṛ to move); cf. Gr. e)re/ssw to row, e)retmo/s rudder, Lat. remus, Ohg.
ruodar = rudder; Ags. rōwan = E. row] a rudder. Usually in combn. with piya (phiya) oar, as piyârittaŋ (phiy°) oar & rudder, thus at S I.103 (T. piya°, v. l. phiya°); A II.201 (piya°); J IV.164 (T. piya°, v.l. phiya°); Sn 321 (piya +; SnA 330 phiya = dabbi--padara, aritta = veḷudaṇd̤a). DhsA 149.
Arindama [Sk. arindama, ariŋ + dama of dam] a tamer of enemies, victor, conqueror Pv IV.315 (= arīnaŋ damanasīla PvA 251); Sdhp 276.
Aribhāseti [= ariŋ bhāseti] to denounce, lit. to call an enemy J IV.285. Correct to Pari° according to Fausböll (J V. corr.)
Ariya (adj.--n.) [Vedic ārya, of uncertain etym. The other Pāli forms are ayira & ayya] 1. (racial) Aryan D II.87. <-> 2. (social) noble, distinguished, of high birth. -- 3. (ethical) in accord with the customs and ideals of the Aryan clans, held in esteem by Aryans, generally approved. Hence: right, good, ideal. [The early Buddhists had no such ideas as we cover with the words Buddhist and Indian. Ariya does not exactly mean either. But it often comes very near to what they would have considered the best in each]. -- (adj.): D I.70 = (°ena sīlakkhan&dcb;hena samannāgata fitted out with our standard morality); III.64 (cakkavatti--vatta), 246 (diṭṭhi); M I.139 (pannaddhaja); II.103 (ariyāya jātiyā jāto, become of the Aryan lineage); S II.273 (tuṇhībhāva); IV.250 (vaddhi), 287 (dhamma); V.82 (bojjhangā), 166 (satipaṭṭhānā), 222 (vimutti), 228 (ñāṇa), 255 (iddhipādā), 421 (maggo), 435 (saccāni), 467 (paññā--cakkhu); A I.71 (parisā); II.36 (ñāya); III.451 (ñāṇa); IV.153 (tuṇhībhāva); V.206 (sīlakkhandha); It 35 (paññā), 47 (bhikkhu sammaddaso); Sn 177 (patha = aṭṭhangiko maggo SnA 216); Dh 236 (bhūmi), 270; Ps II.212 (iddhi). --alamariya fully or thoroughly good D I.163 = III.82 = A IV.363; nâlamariya not at all good, object, ignoble ibid. -- (m.) Vin I.197 (na ramati pāpe); D I.37 = (yaŋ taŋ ariyā ācikkhanti upekkhako satimā etc.: see 3rd. jhāna), 245; III.111 (°ānaŋ anupavādaka one who defames the noble); M I.17, 280 (sottiyo ariyo arahaŋ); S I.225 (°ānaŋ upavādaka); II.123 (id.); IV.53 (°assa vinayo), 95 (id.); A I.256 (°ānaŋ upavādaka); III.19, 252 (id.); IV.145 (dele! see arīhatatta); V.68, 145 sq., 200, 317; It 21, 108; Dh 22, 164, 207; J III.354 = Miln 230; M I.7, Q35 (ariyānaŋ adassāvin: "not recognising the Noble Ones") PvA 26, 146; DhA II.99; Sdhp 444 (°ānaŋ vaŋsa). <-> anariya (adj. & n.) not Ariyan, ignoble, undignified, low, common, uncultured A I.81; Sn 664 (= asappurisa SnA 479; DhsA 353); J II.281 (= dussīla pāpadhamma C.); V.48 (°rūpa shameless), 87; DhA IV.3. -- See also ñāṇa, magga, sacca, sāvaka.
--âvakāsa appearing noble J V.87. -- uposatha the ideal feast day (as one of 3) A I.205 sq., 212. -- kanta loved by the Best D III.227. -- gaṇā (pl.) troops of worthies
J VI.50 (= brāhmaṇa--gaṇā, te kira tāda ariyâcārā ahesuŋ, tena te evam āha C.). -- garahin casting blame on the righteous Sn 660. -- citta a noble heart. -- traja a true descendant of the Noble ones Dpvs V.92. -- dasa having the ideal (or best) belief It
93 = 94. -- dhana sublime treasure; always as sattavidha° sevenfold, viz. saddhā°, sīla°, hiri°, ottappa°, suta°, cāga°, paññā° "faith, a moral life, modesty, fear of evil, learning, self--denial, wisdom" ThA 240; VvA 113; DA II.34. -- dhamma the
national customs of the Aryans (= ariyānaŋ eso dhammo Nd1 71, 72) M I.1, 7, 135; A II.69; V.145 sq., 241, 274; Sn 783; Dhs 1003. -- puggala an (ethically) model person, Ps I.167; Vin V.117; ThA 206. -- magga the Aryan Path. -- vaŋsa the
(fourfold) noble family, i. e. of recluses content with the 4 requisites D III.224 = A II.27 = Ps I.84 = Nd2 141; cp. A III.146. -- vattin leading a noble life, of good conduct J III.443. -- vatā at Th 1, 334 should be read °vattā (nom. sg. of vattar, vac) "speaking noble words": -- vāsa the most excellent state of mind, habitual disposition, constant practice. Ten such at D III.269, 291 = A V.29 (Passage recommended to all Buddhists by Asoka in the Bhabra Edict). -- vihāra the best practice S V.326. -- vohāra noble or honorable practice. There are four, abstinence from lying, from slander, from harsh language, from frivolous talk. They are otherwise known as the 4 vacī--kammantā & represent sīla nos. 4--7. See D III.232; A II.246; Vin V.125. -- sangha the communion of the Nobles ones PvA 1. -- sacca, a standard truth, an established fact, D I.189, II.90, 304 sq.; III

277; M I.62, 184; III.248; S V.415 sq. = Vin I.10, 230. It 17; Sn 229, 230, 267; Dh 190; DhA III.246; KhA 81, 151, 185, 187; ThA 178, 282, 291; VvA 73. -- sāvaka a disciple of the noble ones (= ariyānaŋ santike sutattā a. SnA 166). M I.8, 46, 91, 181, 323; II.262; III.134, 228, 272; It 75; Sn 90; Miln 339; DhA I.5, (opp. putthujjana). -- sīlin of unblemished conduct, practising virtue D I.115 (= sīlaŋ ariyaŋ uttamaŋ parisuddhaŋ DA I.286); M II.167.
When the commentators, many centuries afterwards, began to write Pali in S. India & Ceylon, far from the ancient seat of the Aryan clans, the racial sense of the word ariya was scarcely, if at all, present to their minds. Dhammapāla especially was probably a non--Aryan, and certainly lived in a Dravidian environment. The then current similar popular etmologies of ariya and arahant (cp. next article) also assisted the confusion in their minds. They sometimes therefore erroneously identify the two words and explain Aryans as meaning Arahants (DhA I.230; SnA 537; PvA 60). In other ways also they misrepresented the old texts by ignoring the racial force of the word. Thus at J V.48 the text, speaking of a hunter belonging to one of the aboriginal tribes, calls him anariya--rūpa. The C. explains this as "shameless", but what the text has, is simply that he looked like a non--Aryan. (cp ʻfrankʼ in English).
Arīhatatta in phrase "arīhatta ariyo hoti" at A IV.145 is wrong reading for arīnaŋ hatattā. The whole phrase is inserted by mistake from a gloss explaining arahā in the foll. sentence "ārakattā kilesānaŋ arīnaŋ hatattā . . . arahā hoti", and is to be deleted (omitted also by SS).
Aru (nt.) [Vedic aruḥ, unknown etym.] a wound, a sore, only in cpds.: °kāya a heap of sores M II.64 = Dh 147 = Th 1, 769 (= navannaŋ vaṇamukhānaŋ vasena arubhūta kāya DhA III.109 = VvA 77); °gatta (adj.) with wounds in the body M I.506 (+ pakka--gatta); Miln 357 (id); °pakka decaying with sores S IV.198 (°āni gattāni); °bhūta consisting of wounds, a mass of wounds VvA 77 = DhA III.109.
Aruka = aru; only in cpd. °ûpamacitto (adj.) having a heart like a sore (of a man in anger) A I.124 = Pug 30 (expld at Pug A 212 as purāṇa--vaṇa--sadisa--citto "an old wound" i. e. continually breaking open).
Aruṇa [Vedic aruṇa (adj.) of the colour of fire, i. e. ruddy, nt. the dawn; of Idg. *ereu as in Sk. aruṣa reddish, Av. auruša white, also Sk ravi sun; an enlarged from of Idg. *reu as in Sk. rudhira, rohita red (bloody; see etym. under rohita), Gr. e)rudro/s, Lat. ruber.] the sun Vin II.68; IV.245; J II.154; V.403; VI.330; Dpvs I.56; DA I.30. <-> a. uggacchati the sun rises J I.108; VvA 75, & see cpds.
--ugga sunrise Vin IV.272; S V.29, 78, 101, 442 (at all Saŋyutta pass. the v.l. SS is aruṇagga); Vism 49. --uggamana sunrise (opp. oggamanna). Vin III.196, 204, 264; IV.86, 166, 230, 244; DhA I.165; II.6; PvA 109. --utu the occasion of the sun (--rise) DhA I.165. --vaṇṇa of the colour of the sun, reddish, yellowish, golden Vism 123; DhA I 1.3 = PvA 216. --sadisa (vaṇṇa)
like the sun (in colour) PvA 211 (gloss for suriyavaṇṇa).
Arubheda the Rigveda ThA 206.
Arūpa (adj.) [a + rūpa] without form or body, incorporeal, D I.195 sq.; III.240; Sn 755; It 62; Sdhp 228, 463, 480. See details under rūpa.
--âvacara the realm or world of Formlessness, Dhs 1281--1285; Ps I.83 sq., 101. --kāyika belonging to the group of formless beings Miln 317 (devā). --ṭhāyin standing in or being founded on the Formless It 62. --taṇhā "thirst" for the Formless D III.216. --dhātu the element or sphere of the Incoporeal (as one of the 3 dhātus rūpa°, arūpa°, nirodha°; see dhātu) D III.215, 275; It 45. --bhava formless existence D III.216. --loka the world of the Formless, Sdhp 494. --saññin not having the idea of form D II.110; III.260; Exp. I.252.
Arūpin (adj.) [a + rūpin] = arūpa; D I.31 (arūpī attā hoti: see DA I.119), 195; III.111, 139; It 87 (rūpino va arūpino va sattā).
Are (indecl.) [onomat. Cp. Sk. lalallā, Gr. lale/w, Lat. lallo = E. lull, Ger. lallen & without redupl. Ags. holā, Ger. halloh, E. lo. An abbrev. form of are is re. Cf. also alālā] exclam. of astonishment & excitement: he! hallo! I say!, implying an imprecation: Away with you (with voc.) J I.225 (dāsiputta--ceṭaka); IV.391 (duṭṭha--caṇd̤āla); DA I.265 (= re); VvA 68

(dubbinī), 217 ("how in the world"). Ala1
Ala1 freq. spelling for aḷa.
Ala2 (adj.) [alaŋ adv. as adj.] enough, only in neg. anala insufficient, impossible M I.455; J II.326 = IV.471.
Alaŋ (indecl.) [Vedic araŋ. In meaning 1. alaŋ is the expanded continuation of Vedic araŋ, an adv. acc. of ara (adj.)
suitable; fitly, aptly rightly fr. ṛ Cp. aṇṇava, appeti, ara. In meaning 2. alaŋ is the same as are] emphatic particle 1. in
affirmative sentences: part. of assurance & emphasis = for sure, very much (so), indeed, truly. Note. In connection with a
dat. or an infin. the latter only apparently depend upon alaŋ, in reality they belong to the syntax of the whole sentence (as dat.
or inf. absolute). It is customary however (since the practice of the Pāli grammarians) to regard them as interdependent and interpret the construction as "fit for, proper" (= yuttaŋ Pāli Com.), which meaning easily arises out of the connotation of alaŋ, e.g. alam eva kātuŋ to be sure, this is to be done = this is proper to be done. In this sense (c. dat.) it may also be compd. with Vedic araŋ c. dat. -- (a) (abs.) only in combn. with dat. or inf. (see c. & Note above). -- (b.) (°--) see cpds. -- (c.) with dat. or
infin.: alaŋ antarāyāya for certain an obstacle M I.130 (opp. nâlaŋ not at all); alaŋ te vippaṭisārāya you ought to feel sorry for it Vin II.250; alaŋ vacanāya one says rightly S II.18; alaŋ hitāya untold happiness DhA II.41. -- ito ce pi so bhavaŋ Gotamo yojana sate viharati alam eva . . . . . upasankamituŋ even if he were 100 miles from here, (surely) even so (i. e. it is fit or proper even then) one must go to him D I.117 (expld. at DA I.288 by yuttam eva = it is proper); alam eva kātuŋ kalyāṇaŋ indeed one must do good = it is appropriate to do good Pv II.923 (= yuttaŋ PvA 122); alaŋ puññāni kātave "come, let us do meritorious
works" Vv 4415 (= yuttaŋ VvA 191). <-> 2. in negative or prohibitive sentences: part. of disapprobation reproach & warning; enough! have done with! fie! stop! alas! (etc. see are). -- (a) (abs.) enough: nâlaŋ thutuŋ it is not enough to praise Sn 217; te pi na honti me alaŋ they are not enough for me Pv I.63. -- (b) with voc.: alaŋ Devadatta mā te rucci sanghabhedo "look out D. or take care D. that you do not split up the community" Vin II.198; alaŋ Vakkali kin te iminā pūtikāyena diṭṭhena . . . S III.120. -- (c) enough of (with instr.): alaŋ ettakena enough of this, so much of that Miln 18; alam me Buddhena enough for me of the Buddha = I am tired of the B. DhA II.34.
--attha (adj.) "quite the thing", truly good, very profitable, useful D II.231; M II.69 (so read for alamatta); A II.180; Th 1, 252; J I.401 (so read for °atta). --ariya truly genuine, right noble, honourable indeed, only in °ñāṇa--dassana [cp. BSk. alamārya--jñāna--darśana Lal V.309, 509] Vin I.9; A III.64, 430; V.88; J I.389 (cp. ariya). --kammaniya (quite or thoroughly) suitable Vin III.187. --pateyya: see the latter. --vacanīyā (f.) a woman who has to be addressed with "alaŋ" (i. e. "fie"), which means that she ceases to be the wife of a man & returus into her parental home Vin III.144, cp. 274 (Bdhgh's. expln.). --samakkhātar one who makes sufficiently clear It 107. --sājīva one who is thoroughly fit to associate with his fellow A
III.81. --sāṭaka "curse--coat", one who curses his waist--coat (alaŋ sāṭaka!) because of his having eaten too much it will not fit; an over--eater; one of the 5 kinds of gluttons or improper eaters as enumd. at DhA IV.16 = DhsA 404.
Alakkhika (& īka) (adj.) [a + lakkhika] unfortunate unhappy, of bad luck Vin III.23; J III.259. Alakkhī (f.) [a + lakkhi] bad luck, misfortune Th 1, 1123.
Alagadda [Der. unknown. In late Sk. alagarda is a watersnake] a kind of snake M I.133 = DA I.21; DhA IV. 132 (°camma, so read for T. alla--camma, vv. ll. alanda° & alandu°).
Alagga (adj.) [pp. of laggati] not stuck or attached Nd2 107 (also alaggita); alaggamāna (ppr.) id. DhA III.298. Alaggana (nt.) [a + laggana] not hanging on anything, not being suspended DA I.180.
Alaŋkata [pp. of alankaroti] 1. "made too much", made much of, done up, adorned, fitted out Dh 142 (=

vatthâbharaṇa--paṭimaṇd̤ita DhA III.83); Pv II.36; Vv 11; J III.392; IV.60. -- 2. "done enough" (see alaŋ, use with instr.), only neg. analankata in meaning "insatiate" S I.15 (kāmesu).
Alaŋkaraṇa (nt.) [alaŋ + karaṇa, fr. alankaroti] doing up, fitting out, ornamentation J I.60. Alaŋkaraṇaka (adj.) [fr. alankaraṇa] adorning, embellishing, decorating DhA I.410.
Alaŋkaroti [alaŋ + karoti, Vedic araṅkaroti] to make much of i. e. to adorn, embellish, decorate J I.60; III.189; VI. 368. ger. °karitvā DhA I.410; PvA 74. -- pp. alankata. -- Caus. alankārāpeti to cause to be adorned J I.52.
Alaŋkāra [fr. alankaroti, cp. Vedic araṅkṛti] "getting up" i. e. fitting ont, ornament, decoration; esp. trinkets, oQnaments D III.190; A III.239; 263 sq.; J VI.368; PvA 23, 46, 70 (--° adj. adorned with), 74; Sdhp 249.
Alattaka [Sk. alaktaka] lac, a red animal dye J IV.114 (°pāṭala); DhA II.174; IV.197. Alanda & Alandu see alagadda.
Alamba (adj.) [a + lamba] not hanging down, not drooping, short J V.302; VI.3 (°tthaniyo not flabby: of a woman's breasts cp. alambɔ ordhva--stanī Suśruta I.371).
Alasa (adj.) [a + lasa] idle, lazy, slack, slothful, languid S I.44, 217; Sn 96 (= jāti--alaso SnA 170); J IV.30; Dh 280 (= mahā--alaso DhA III.410). Opp. analasa vigorous, energetic S I.44; D III.190 (dakkha +); Vin IV.211; Nd2 141 (id.).
Alasatā (f.) [abstr. fr. alasa] sloth, laziness; only in neg. analasatā zeal, industry VvA 229. Alassa (nt.) at S I.43 is spurious spelling for ālassa idleness, sloth; v. l. BB ālasya.
Alāta (nt.) [Sk. alāta, related to Lat. altāre altar, adoleo to burn] a firebrand A II.95 (chava° a burning corpse, see chava); J I.68; Pug 36; DhA III.442.
Alāpu (nt.) [= alābu, with p for b: so Trenckner Notes 6216] a gourd, pumpkin Dh 149 (= DhA III.112; vv. ll. alābu & alābbu).
Alābu [Sk. alābū f.] a long white gourd, Cucurbita Lagenaris M I.80 (tittaka°), 315 (id.); PvA 47 (id.); DhsA 405. -- See also alāpu.
Alābhaka [a + labhaka] not getting, loss, detriment Vin III.77.
Alālā (indecl.) [a + lālā interjection fr. sound root *lal, see etym. under are] "not saying lā lā" i. e. not babbling, not dumb,
in °mukha not (deaf &) dumb SnA 124 (= aneḷamūga of Sn 70).
Alika (adj.) [Sk. alīka] contrary, false, untrue S I.189; J III.198; VI.361; Miln 26, 99. -- nt. °ŋ a lie, falsehood Dh 264.
--vādin one who tells a lie, a liar Dh 223 = VvA 69 (has alīka°); J II.4; SnA 478 (for abhūta--vādin Sn 661). Alīnatā (f.) [abstr. of alīna] open mindedness, prudence, sincerity J I.366.
Aluḷita (adj.) [a + luḷita, pp. of lul] umoved, undisturbed Miln 383.
Aloṇika (adj.) [a + loṇika] not salted J III.409; VvA 184.

Aloma (adj.) [a + loma] not hairy (upon the body) J VI.457.
Alola (adj.) [a + lola] undisturbed, not distracted (by desires), not wavering: of firm resolution, concentrated Sn 65 (=
nillolupa Nd2 98; = rasavisesesu anākula SnA 118).
Alla (adj.) (only °--) [Vedic ārdra, to Gr. a)/rdw moisten, a)/rda dirt] -- 1. moist, wet M III.94 (°mattikā--puñja a heap of moist clay; may be taken in meaning 2). -- 2. fresh (opp. stale), new; freshly plucked, gathered or caught, viz.°âvalepana see adda3; °kusamuṭṭhi freshly plucked grass A V.234 = 249; °gomaya fresh dung A V.234; DhA I.377; °camma living skin
Vism 195; °tiṇa fresh grass DA I.77; PvA 40; °dārūni green sticks J I.318; °madhu fresh honey DhA II.197; °maŋsa--sarīra
a body of living flesh DhA II.51 = IV.166; °rasa fresh--tasting DhA II.155; °rohita--maccha fresh fish J III.333. <-> 3. wet = with connotation of clean (through being washed), freshly washed, °kesa with clean hair PvA 82 (sīsaŋ nahātvā allakesa); usually combd. with allavattha with clean clothes (in an ablution; often as a sign of mourning) Ud 14, 91; DhA IV.220; or with odāta vattha (id.) J III.425. °pāṇi with clean hand Pv II.99 (= dhotapāṇi PvA 116). [For analla--gatta at S I.183 better read, with ibid 169, an--allīna--gatta. For allacamma at DhA IV.132 alagadda--camma, with the v.l., is preferable].
Allāpa [Sk. ālāpa; ā + lāpa] conversation, talk; only in cpd. °sallāpa conversation (lit. talking to & fro or together) J I.189; Miln 15; VvA 96; PvA 86.
Allika (?) [either from alla = allikaŋ nt. in meaning defilement, getting soiled by (--°), or from allīyati = alliyakaŋ, a der. fr. ger. alliya clinging to, sticking to. The whole word is doubtful.] only in cpd. (kāma--) sukhɔ allikɔânuyoga given to the attachment to sensual joys Vin I.10; D III.113, 130; S IV.330; V.421; Nett 110.
Allīna [pp. of allīyati; Sk. ālīna] (a) sticking to, adhering or adhered to, clinging M I.80; A V.187; Nd2 under nissita (in form asita allīna upagata). -- (b.) soiled by (--°), dirtied A II.201. --anallīna "to which nothing sticks", i. e. pure, undefiled, clean S I.169 (id. p. on p. 183 reads analla: see alla). Cp. ālaya.
Allīyati [ā + līyati, lī, līyate, layate] to cling to, stick to, adhere to (in both senses, good or bad); to covet. -- (a) lit. kesā
sīsaŋ allīyiŋsu the hair stuck to the head J I.64; khaggo lomesu allīyi the sword stuck in the hair J I.273. -- (b) fig. to covet, desire etc.: in idiomatic phrase allīyati (S III.190 v. l.; T. ālayati) kelāyati vanāyati (S III.190 v.l.; T. manāyati; M I.260 T.
dhanāyati, but v.l. p. 552 vanāyati) mamāyati "to caress dearly & be extremely jealous of" (c. acc.) at M I.260 & S III.190. <->
J IV.5; V.154 (allīyituŋ, v.l. illīyituŋ); DhsA 364 (vanati bhajati a); pp. allīna -- Caus. alliyāpeti [cp. Sk. ālāpayati, but B.Sk. allīpeti M Vastu III.144; pp. allīpita ibid. I.311; III.408; pass. allīpīyate III.127.] to make stick, to to bring near to (c. acc. or loc.) J II.325 (hatthiŋ mahābhittiyan alliyāpetvā); IV.392 (sīsena sīsaŋ alliyāpetvā).
Aḷa [etym. unknown] 1. the claw of a crab M I.234; S I.123; J I.223, 505 (°chinno kakkaṭako; T. spells ala°); II.342; III.295; -- 2. the nails (of finger or toe) (?) in °chinna one whose nails are cut off Vin I.91.
Aḷāra (adj.) [Is it the same as uḷāra?] only used with ref. to the eyelashes, & usually expld. by visāla, i.e. extended, wide, but also by bahala, i.e. thick. The meaning & etym. is as yet uncertain. Kern, (Toev. s.v.) transls. by "bent, crooked, arched". °akkhin with wide eyes (eyelashes?) J I.306 (= visāla--netta C.); °pamha with thick eye--lashes Vv 357 (= bahala--saŋyata--pakhuma C.; v.l. °pamukha); °bhamuka having thick eyebrows or °lashes J VI.503 (so read for °pamukha; C. expls by visāl--akkhigaṇd̤a). Cp. āḷāra.
Aḷhaka in udakɔ aḷhaka in udakɔ aḷhaka VvA 155 read āḷhaka.
Ava° (prefix) I. Relation between ava & o. Phonetically the difference between ava & o is this, that ava is the older form, whereas o represents a later development. Historically the case is often reversed -- that is, the form in o was in use first & the form in ava was built up, sometimes quite independently, long afterwards. Okad̤d̤hati, okappati, okappanā, okassati,
okāra, okantati, okkamati, ogacchati, odāta and others may be used as examples. The difference in many cases has given
rise to a differentiation of meaning, like E. ripe: rife, quash: squash; Ger. Knabe: Knappe etc. (see below B 2). -- A. The old

Pāli form of the prefix is o. In same cases however a Vedic form in ava has been preserved by virtue of its archaic character. In words forming the 2nd part of a cpd. we have ava, while the absolute form of the same word has o. See e.g. avakāsa (--°) > okāsa (°--); avacara > ocaraka; avatata; avadāta; avabhāsa; avasāna. -- B. 1. the proportion in the words before us (early and later) is that o alone is found in 65% of all cases, ava alone in 24%, and ava as well as o in 11%. The proportion of forms in ava increases as the books or passages become later. Restricted to the older literature (the 4 Nikāyas) are the foll. forms with o: okiri, okkanti, okkamati, okkhipati, ogacchati, ossajati. -- (1) The Pāli form (o°) shows a differentiation in meaning against the later Sanskrit forms (ava°). See the foll.:
avakappanā harnessing: okappanā confidence; avakkanti (not Sk.): okkanti appearance; avakkhitta thrown down: okkhitta subdued; avacara sphere of motion: ocaraka spy;
avatiṇṇa descended: otiṇṇa affected with love; avaharati to move down, put off: oharati to steal.
(2) In certain secondary verb--formations, arisen on Pāli grounds, the form o° is used almost exclusively pointing thus to a clearly marked dialectical development of Pali. Among these formations are Deminutives in °ka usually; the Gerund & the Infinitive usually; the Causatives throughout.
II. Ava as prefix. [P. ava = Vedic ava & occasionally o; Av. ava; Lat. au-- (aufero = avabharati, aufugio etc.); Obg. u--; Oir. ō, ua. See further relations in Walde, Lat. Wtb. under au]. -- Meaning. (Rest:) lower, low (opp. ut°, see e. g. uccâvaca high & low, and below III. c), expld. as heṭṭhā (DhA IV.54 under avaŋ) or adho (ibid. 153; SnA 290). -- (Motion:) down, downward, away (down), off; e. g. avasūra sun--down; adv. avaŋ (q. v., opp. uddhaŋ). -- (a) lit. away from, off: ava--kantati to cut off; °gaṇa away from the crowd; °chindati cut off; °yīyati fall off; °bhāsati shine out, effulge; °muñcati take off; °siṭṭha left over. -- down, out, over: °kirati pour down or out over; °khitta thrown down; °gacchati go down; °gāheti dip down; °tarati descend; °patita fallen down; °sajjati emit; °siñcati pour out over; °sīdati sink down. -- (b) fig. down in connection with verbs of emotion (cp. Lat. de-- in despico to despise, lit. look down on), see ava--jānāti, °bhūta, °mānita, °vajja, °hasati. away from, i. e. the opposite of, as equivalent to a negation and often taking the place of the neg. prefix a° (an°), e. g. in avajaya (= ajaya), °jāta, °mangala (= a°), °pakkhin, °patta.
Affinities of ava. -- (a) apa. There exists an exceedingly frequent interchange of forms with apa° and ava°, the historical relation of which has not yet been thoroughly investigated. For a comparison of the two the BSk. forms are indispensable, and often afford a clue as to the nature of the word in question. See on this apa 2 and cp. the foll. words under ava: avakata, °karoti, °khalita, °anga, ottappa, avattha, °nīta, °dāna, °pivati, °rundhati, °lekhati, °vadati, °varaka, °sakkati, avassaya, avasseti, °hita, avāpurīyati, avekkhati. -- (b) abhi. The similarity between abhi & ava is seen from a comparison of meaning abhi II. b
and ava II. a. The two prefixes are practically synonymous in the foll. words: °kankhati, °kamati, °kiṇṇa, °khipati, °maddati, °rata, °lambati, °lekheti, °lepana, °siñcati. -- (c) The contrary of ava is ut (cp. above II.2). Among the freq. contrast--pairs showing the two, like E. up & down, are the foll. ukkaŋsâvakaŋsa, uggaman--oggamana, uccâvaca, ullangheti--olangheti, ullittâvalitta; ogilituŋuggilituŋ, onaman--unnamana. Two other combns. founded on the same principle (of intensifying contrast) are chiddâvacchidda and ava° in contrast with vi° in olambavilamba, olugga--vilugga.
Avaŋ (adv.) [Vedic avāk & avāŋ] the prep. ava in adv. use, down, downward; in C. often expld. by adho. Rarely absolute, the only passage found so far being Sn 685 (avaŋ sari he went down, v. l. avasari, expld. by otari SnA 486). Opp. uddhaŋ (above, up high). Freq. in cpd. avaŋsira (adj.) head downward (+ uddhaŋpāda feet up), a position characteristic of beings in Niraya (Purgatory), e. g. S I.48; Sn 248 (patanti sattā nirayaŋ avaŋsirā = adhogata--sīsā SnA 290); Vv 5225 (of Revatī, + uddhaŋpāda); Pv IV.146; J I.233 (+ uddhapāda); IV.103 (nirayaŋ vajanti yathā adhammo patito avaŋsiro); Nd1 404 (uddhaŋpāda +); DhA IV.153 (gloss adhosira). -- On avaŋ° cp. further avakkāra, avākaroti, avekkhipati.
Avakaŋsa [fr. ava--karṣati; on ŋs: *rṣ cp. haŋsati: harṣati] dragging down, detraction, abasement, in cpd. ukkaŋsâvak° lifting up & pulling down, raising and lowering, rise & fall D I.54.
Avakankhati (--°) [ava + kankhati; cp. Sk. anu--kānkṣati] to wish for, strive after S IV.57 (n'); J IV.371 (n'); V 340 (n'), 348 (n'= na pattheti C).

Avakad̤d̤hati [ava + kad̤d̤hati, cp. avakassati & apakassati] Nett 4 (avakad̤d̤hayitvā). Pass. avakad̤d̤hati J IV.415 (hadayaŋ me a. my hcart is weighed down = sokena avakad̤d̤hīyati C; v.l. avakassati). -- pp. avakad̤d̤hita.
Avakad̤d̤hita [pp. of avakad̤d̤hati] pulled down, dragged away DhA III.195.
Avakata = apakata, v.l. at It 89.
Avakanta [for *avakatta, Sk. avakṛtta; pp. of avakantati, see kanta2] cut, cut open, cut off J IV.251 (galakɔ âvakantaŋ).
Avakantati & okantati (okk°) [cp. Sk. avakṛntati, ava + kantati, cp. also apakantati] to cut off, cut out, cut away, carve -- (ava:) J IV.155. -- pp. avakanta & avakantita.
Avakantita [pp. of avakantati] cut out PvA 213.
Avakappanā & okappanā (f.) [ava + kappanā] preparation, fixing up, esp. harnessing J VI.408.
Avakaroti [Sk. apakaroti, cp. P. apa°] "to put down", to despise, throw away; only in der, avakāra & avakārin. <-> pp. avakata (q. v.). -- See also avākaroti & cp. avakirati 2.
Avakassati & okassati [cp. Sk. avakarṣati, ava + kṛṣ; see also apakassati & avakad̤d̤hati] to drag down, to draw or pull away, distract, remove. -- A V.74 = Vin II.204 (+ vavakassati).
Avakārakaŋ (adv.) [fr. avakāra] throwing away, scattering about Vin II.214. Avakārin (adj.) (--°) [fr. avakāra] despising, degrading, neglecting Vbh 393 sq. (an°).
Avakāsa & okāsa [ava + kāś to shine, cp. Sk. avakāśa] 1. "appearance": akkhuddâvakāso dassanāya not little (or
inferior) to behold (of appearance) D I.114; ariyāvakāsa appearing noble or having the app. of an Aryan J V.87; katâvakāsa put into appearance Vv 229. -- 2. "opportunity": kata° given leave D I.276 Sn 1030; anavakāsakārin not giving occasion Miln 383. -- anavakāsa not having a chance or opportunity (to happen), impossible; always in ster. phrase aṭṭhānaŋ etaŋ anavakāso Vin II.199; A I.26; V.169; Pug 11, 12; PvA 28.
Avakirati & okirati [ava + kirati] 1. to pour down on, to pour out over; aor. avakiri PvA 86; ger. °kiritvā J V.144. --
2. to cast out, reject, throw out; aor. avākiri Vv 305 = 485 (v.l. °kari; VvA 126 expls by chad̤d̤esi vināsesi). -- Pass. avakirīyati Pv III.110 (= chad̤d̤īyati PvA 174); grd. °kiriya (see sep.). See also apakiritūna. pp. okiṇṇa.
Avakiriya [grd of avakirati] to be cast out or thrown away; rejectable, low, contemptible J V.143 (taken by C. as ger. = avakiritvā).
Avakujja (adj.) [ava + kujja, cp. B.Sk. avakubja M Vastu I.29, avakubjaka ibid. 213; II.412] face downward, head first, prone, bent over (opp. ukkujja & uttāna) J I.13 = Bu II.52; J V.295; VI.40; Pv IV.108; PvA 178.
--pañña (adj.) one whose reason is turned upside down (like an upturned pot, i.e. empty) A I.130; Pug 31 (= adhomukha--pañña Pug A 214).
Avakkanta (--°) [pp. ofnext] entered by, beset with, overwhelmed by (instr.) S III.69 (dukkha°, sukha° and an°).
Avakkanti (f.) [fr. avakkamati] entry, appearance, coming down into, opportunity for rebirth S II.66 (nāmarūpassa); III.46 (pañcannaŋ indriyānaŋ); Pug 13 (= okkanti nibbatti pātubhāvo PugA 184); Kvu 142 (nāmarūpassa); Miln 123 (gabbhassa).

Avakkama [fr. avakkamati] entering, appearance J V.330 (gabbhassa).
Avakkamati & okkamati [ava + kamati fr. kram] to approach. to enter, go into or near to, to fall into, appear in,
only in ger. (poetically) avakamma J III.480 (v.l. apa°).
Avakkāra [Sk. avaskara faeces, fr. avaŋ + karoti] throwing away, refuse, sweepings; only in cpd. °pātī a bowl for refuse,
slop basin, ash--bin Vin I.157, 352; II.216; M I.207; DhA I.305.
Avakkhalita [pp. of avakkhaleti, Caus. of kṣal] washed off, taken away from, detracted DA I.66 (v.l. apa°).
Avakkhitta & okkhitta [pp. of avakkhipati] 1. [= Sk. avakṣipta] thrown down, flung down, cast down, dropped;
thrown out, rejected. (ava:) M I.296 (ujjhita +); DA I.281 (an°), 289 (pind̤a); PvA 174 (piṇd̤a). 2. [= Sk. utkṣipta?] thrown off, gained, produced, got (cp. uppādita), in phrase sedɔ âvakkhitta gained by sweat A II.67; III.45.
Avakkhipati & okkhipati [ava + khipati; cp. Sk. avakṣipati] to throw down or out, cast down, drop; fig. usually
appld to the eyes = to cast down, hence transferred to the other senses and used in meaning of "to keep under, to restrain, to have control over" (cp. also avakkhāyati), aor. °khipi DA I.268 (bhusaŋ, v. l. avakkhasi).
Avakkhipana (nt.) [fr. avakkhipati] throwing down, putting down J I.163.
Avagacchati [ava + gacchati] to come to, approach, visit (cp. Vedic avagacchati) PvA 87.
(adj.) [ava + gaṇd̤a°] "making a swelling", i. e. puffing out the cheeks, stuffing the cheeks, full (when eating); only nt. °ŋ as adv. after the manner or in the way of stuffing etc. Vin II.214; IV.196.
Avagata [pp. of avagacchati] at PvA 222 is uncertain reading; the meaning is "known, understood" (aññāta Pv IV.111); perhaps we should read āvikata or adhigata (so v.l. BB).
Avagāhati & ogāhati [ava + gāhati] to plunge or enter into, to be absorbed in (acc. & loc.) Vism 678 (vipassanāvīthiŋ); Sdhp 370, 383.
Avaguṇṭhana (adj.) (--°) [fr. oguṇṭheti] covering Sdhp 314.
Avaggaha [Sk. avagraha] hindrance, impediment, used at DA I.95 as syn. for drought (dubuṭṭhikā).
Avanga see apanga.
Avaca (adj.) [der. fr. ava after the analogy of ucca > ut] low, only in combn. uccâvacā (pl.) high and low, see ucca. KvuA 38.
Avacana (nt.) [a + vacana] "non--word", i. e. the wrong word or expression J I.410.
Avacara (--°) (n.--adj.) [ava + car, also BSk. avacara in same sense, e.g. antaḥpurâvacarā the inmates of the harem Jtm
210] (a) (adj.) living in or with, moving in D I.206 (santika° one who stays near, a companion); fig. dealing or familiar with, at home in A II.189 (atakka°); IV.314 (parisā°); J I.60 (tāḷa° one conversant with music, a musician, see tāḷa1); II.95 (sangāma°); Miln 44 (id. and yoga°). -- (b) (n.) sphere (of moving or activity), realm, plane (of temporal existence); only as t.t in kāmâvacara rupâvacara arūpâvacara or the 3 realms of sense--desires, form and non--form: kāma° D I.34 (°deva); Dhs
431 (as adj.); rūpa° Pug 37; arūpa° Pug 38; Ps I.83, 84, 101; Dhs A 387; PvA 138, 163; to be omitted in Dhs 1268, 1278.
Avacaraka & ocaraka (adj.--n.) [fr. avacara] 1. only in cpd. kāmâvacarika as adj. to kāmâvacara, belonging to the

sphere of sense experiences, Sdhp. 254. -- 2. Late form of ocaraka, spy, only in C. on Th 1, 315 ff. quoted in Brethren 189, n 3. Occurs in BSk (Divy 127).
Avacaraṇa (nt.) [fr. avacarati 1] being familiar with, dealing with, occupation J II.95.
Avacuttha 2nd pret. of vac, in prohib form mā evaŋ avacuttha do not speak thus J VI.72; DhA IV.228.
Avacchidda (--°) (adj.) [ava + chidda] perforated, only in redupl. (intensive) cpd. chiddâvacchidda perforated all over, nothing but holes J III.491; DhA I.122. 284, 319. Cp. chidda--vicchidda.
Avacchedaka (--°) (adj) [ava + cheda + ka] cutting off, as nt. °ŋ adv. in phrase kabaḷâvacchedakaŋ after the manner of cutting off mouthfuls (of food) Vin II.214; IV.196; cp. āsāvacchedika whose hope or longing has been cut off or destroyed Vin I. 259.
Avajaya [ava + jaya, cp. apajita] defeat DhA II.228 (v.l. for T. ajaya).
Avajāta (adj.) [ava + jāta; cp. B.Sk. avajāta in meaning misborn, miscarriage] low--born, of low or base birth, fig. of low
character (opp. abhijāta) Sn 664 (= buddhassa avajātaputta SnA 479); It 63; Miln 359.
Avajānāti [ava + jñā] 1. to deny Vin II.85; A III.164 = Pug 65. -- 2. (later) to despise DhA III.16; PvA 175 (grd. °jānitabba) -- Of short stem--form ñā are found the foll: grd. avaññeyya PvA 175, and with o°: grd. oñātabba PvA 195; pp. avañāta, besides avaññāta.
Avajīyati [ava + jīyati; Sk. avajiryate] to be diminished, to be lost, be undone J I.313 (jitaŋ a; v.l. avajījy°); Dh 179 (jitaŋ a = dujjitaŋ hoti DhA III.197).
Avajja (adj.) [Sk. avadya, seemigly a + vadya, but in reality a der. fr. ava. According to Childers = Sk. avarjya from vraj,
thus meaning "not to be shunned, not forbidden". This interpretn is justified by context of Dh 318, 319. The P. commentator refers it to ava + vad (for *ava--vadya) in sense of to blame, cp. apavadati] low, inferior, blamable, bad, deprecable Dh 318, 319; Dhs 1160. More fig. in neg. form anavajja blameless, faultless D I.70 (= anindita DA I.183); A II.26 = It 102; Sn 47 (°bhojin carrying on a blameless mode of livelihood, see Nd2 39), 263 (= anindita agarahita KhA 140): Ps II.116, 170; Pug 30, 41, 58; Sdhp 436. Opp. sāvajja.
Avajjatā (f.) [abstr. to prec.), only neg. an° blamelessness, faultlessness Pug 25, 41; Dhs 1349.
Avajjha (adj.) [grd of a + vadhati, Sk. vadhya, vadh] not to be killed or destroyed, inviolable Sn 288; J V.69; VI.132.
Avañcana (adj.) [a + vañcana from vañc] not (even) tottering, i.e. unfit for any motion (esp. walking), said of crippled feet J I.214 = Cp III.910.
Avañña (adj.) [to avaññā] despised, despicable Pv III.113 (= avaññeyya avajānitabba PvA 175).
Avaññatti (f.) [ava + ñatti = Sk. *avajñapti, fr. ava + jñā] only as neg. an° the fact of not being despised, inferior or surpassed, egotism, pride, arrogance It 72; Vbh 350, 356; °kāma (adj.) wishing not to be surpassed, unvilling to be second, wanting to be praised A II.240; IV.1 sq.
Avaññā (f.) [Sk. avajñā, fr. ava + jñā] contempt, disregard, disrespect J I.257 (°ya).
Avaññāta (adj.) [pp. of avajānāti] despised, treated with contempt PvA 135 (an°); Sdhp 88, 90.

Avaṭaŋsaka (= vaṭ°) see Vin Texts II.347.
Avaṭṭhāna (nt.) [Sk. avasthāna] position, standing place J I.508; PvA 286.
Avaṭṭhita (ad.) [Sk. avasthita, ava + thita] "standing down" = standing up, firm, fixed, settled, lasting Th 1, 1140. Usually neg. an° unsettled, unsteady; not lasting, changeable Dh 38 (°citta; cp. DhA I.308 cittaŋ thāvaraŋ natthi); PvA 87 (= na sassata not lasting for ever).
Avaṭṭhitatā (f.) [abstr. fr. prec.] steadiness, only as neg. an° unsteadiness, fickleness ThA 259. Avaṭṭhiti (f.) [Sk. avasthiti] (firm) position, posture, steadfastness S V.228; Dhs 11, 570. Avad̤d̤hi (f.) [a + vad̤d̤hi] "non--growth", decay DhA III.335; C on A III.76 (cp. apajaha). Avaṇṭa (adj.) [a + vaṇṭa] without a stalk J V.155.
Avaṇṇa [a + vaṇṇa] blame, reproach, fault D I.1 (= dosā nindā DA I.37); It 67; Pug 48, 59.
Avaṇṇanīya (adj.) [grd. of a + vaṇṇeti] indescribable J V.282.
Avataŋsa see vataŋsaka.
Avatata & otata [ava + tata, pp. of tan] stretched over, covered, spread over with Vv 643 (--°); VvA 276 (= chādita).
Avatiṭṭhati [ava + tiṭṭhati] to abide, linger, stand still. D I.251 = S IV.322 = A V.299 (tatra°); S I.25 (v.l. otiṭṭhati); Th. 1, 21; J II.62; IV.208 (aor. avaṭṭhāsi). <-> pp. avaṭṭhita (q. v.).
Avatiṇṇa & otiṇṇa [pp. of otarati] fallen into, affected with (--°), as ava° rare late or poetical form of o°, e. g. J V.98 (issâ°). See otiṇṇa.
Avattha1 [der. uncertain] aimless (of cārikā, a bhikkhu's wandering, going on tour) A III.171 (C. avavatthika).
Avattha2 [Sk. apāsta, apa + āsta, pp. of as2] thrown away J V.302 (= chad̤d̤ita C.).
Avattharaṇa (nt.) [fr. avattharati] setting in array, deploying (of an army) J II.104 (of a robber--band), 336.
Avattharati [ava + tharati, stṛ] to strew, cover over or up J I.74 (°amāna ppr.), 255 (°itvā ger.); IV.84; Dāvs I.38. -- pp. otthaṭa Cp. pariy°.
Avatthāraṇa (nt.) = avattharaṇa DA I.274.
(adj.) [a + vatthu] groundless, unfounded (fig) Vin II.241; J I.440 (°kaŋ vacanaŋ). For lit meaning see vatthu. Avadāta (= odāta) Dāvs III.14 (metri causa).
Avadāna see apadāna.

Avadāniya (adj.) [fr. avadāna cutting off; ava + dā2 to cut] stingy, niggardly Sn 774 (= Nd1 36 which expls. as follows: avaŋ gacchanti ti pi avadāniyā; maccharino pi vuccanti avadāniyā; buddhānaŋ vacanaŋ nɔâdiyantī ti avadāniyā. Sn A 516 condenses this expln. into the foll.: avangamanatāya maccharitāya buddhâdīnaŋ vacanaŋ anādiyanatāya ca avadāniyā).
Avadāpana (cleansing): see vodāpana. Avadāpeti (to deal out) only BSk pary° Divy 202.
Avadāyati [denom. fr. avadā in same meaning as anuddā, to dā1: see dayati2] to have pity on, to feel sorry for J IV.178 (bhūtānaŋ nâvadāyissaŋ, gloss nɔânukampiyaŋ).
Avadīyati [Sk. avadīryati, ava + d̤r1, d̤rṇāti, see etym. under darī] to burst, split open J VI.183 (= bhijjati C.) see also uddīyati,
Avadehaka (--°) (adj.) [ava + deha + ka but more likely direct fr. ava + dih] in the idiom udarāvadehakaŋ bhuñjati, to eat one's fill M I.102; Th 1, 935. Vism 33 has udarāvadehaka--bhojana, a heavy meal.
Avadhāraṇa (nt.) [Cp. Sk. avadhāraṇa, fr. ava + dhṛ] calling attention to, affirmation, emphasis; as t.t. used by C's in explanation of evaŋ at DA I.27; and of kho at PvA 11, 18.
Avadhi 3 sg. aor. of vadhati. -- At DhA II.73 avadhi = odhi.
Avanata see oṇata.
Avanati (--°) (f.) [fr. avanamati] stooping, bending, bowing down, humiliation Miln 387 (unnatɔâvanati). Avani (f.) [Vedic avani] bed or course of a river; earth, ground Dāvs IV.5.
Avapakāsati [ava + pa + kāsati = kassati, fr. kṛṣ] is a doubtful compd. of kassati, the combd. ava + pa occurring only in this word. In all likelihood it is a distortion of vavakassati (vi + ava + kassati), supplementing the ordinary apakassati. See meaning & further discussion under apakāsati -- Vin II.204 (apakāsati +; v.l. avapakassati; Bdhgh. in expln. on p. 325 has apapakāsati which seems, to imply (a)vavakassati); A III.145 sq. (avapakāsituŋ).
Avapatta see opatta.
Avapāyin (--°) (adj.) [cp. avapivati] coming for a drink, drinking J I.163.
Avapivati [ava + pā, cp. apapibati] to drink from J I.163.
Avabujjhati (--°) [Cp. BSk. avabudhyate] to understand A IV.96 = It 83 (nɔavabujjhati); A IV.98 (id.) J I.378 = III.387 (interchanging with anubujjhati at the latter pass.).
Avabodha [ava + bodha] perception, understanding, full knowledge Sn A 509 (sacca°). -- Neg. an° not awakened to the truth Vv 826 (= ananubodha VvA 319).
Avabodhati (--°) [cp. Sk. avabodhati] to realise, perceive, pay attention to J III.151 nâva°).
Avabhāsa [later form of obhāsa] Only in cpd. gambhīrāvabhāso D II.55, looking deep. Same cpd. at A II.105 = Pug 46 has obhāsa.

Avabhāsaka (--°) (adj.) [fr. avabhāsa] shining, shedding light on, illuminating Sdhp 14.
Avabhāsita (--°) [late form of obhāsita] shining with, resplendent Sdhp 590.
Avabhuñjati [ava + bhuñjati] to eat, to eat up J III.272 (inf. °bhottuŋ), 273.
Avabhūta (adj.) [ava + bhūta, pp. of ava + bhū] "come down", despised, low, unworthy M II.210.
Avamangala (adj.) [ava + mangala, ava here in privative function] of bad omen, unlucky, infaustus (opp. abhimangala); nt. bad luck, ill omen J I.372, 402; II.197; VI.10, 424; DhA III.123; PvA 261. Cf. next.
Avamaññati [Sk. avamanyate] to slight, to disregard, despise DhA I.170; PvA 37, 175; Sdhp 271. -- pp. Caus. avamānita.
Avamangalla (adj.) [fr. avamangala] of bad omen, nt. anything importune, unlucky J I.446.
Avamāna & omāna [fr. ava + man, think] disregard, disrespect, contempt J II.386; III.423; V.384. Cp. next. Avamānana (nt.) [fr. avamāna] = avamāna J I.22.
Avamāneti [Caus. of avamaññati] to despise J V.246. <-> pp. avamānita PvA 36.
Avaya only in neg. anavaya.
Avayava [Dern uncertain. Cp. mediaeval Sk. avayava] limb, member, constituent, part VvA 53 (sarīra° = gattā). 168,
201, 276; PvA 211 (sarīra° = gattā), 251 (mūl° the fibres of the root). As t. t. g. at SnA 397. In the commentaries avayava is often used where aŋga would have been used in the older texts.
Avarajjhati (--°) [ava + rajjhati of rādh, cp. Sk. avarādhyate] to neglect, fail, spurn Th 1, 167; J IV.428 (v.l. °rujjh°). Avaruddha [fr. avarundhati] 1. Doubtful reading at Vin IV.181, apparently meaning ʻin revolt, out of handʼ (of slaves) --
2. [late form of oruddha] restrained Sdhp. 592.
Avaruddhaka [avruddha + ka] subdued, expelled, banished J VI.575; Dpvs I.21 (Np).
Avaruddhati [Sk. aparundhati; ava + ruddhati of rudh] to expel, remove, banish J VI.505 (= nīharati C.), 515. See also avarundhati.
Avarundhati [ava + rundhati. Only referred to by Dhp. in his Cy (ThA 271) on oruddha] to put under restraint, to put into one's harem as subsidiary wife.
. Only in late verse. To hang down. Pv II.118; 102. Ger. avalamba (for °bya) Pv III.35; cp. olubbha.
Avalitta (--°) [Sk. avalipta, pp. of ava--limpati] besmeared; in cpd. ullittâvalitta "smeared up & down" i. e. plastered
inside & outside A I.101.
Avalekhati [ava + lekhati, likh, Sk. avalikhati] to scrape off Vin II.221 (v. l. apa°). Avalekhana1

Avalekhana1 (nt.) [fr. avalekhati] (a) scraping, scraping off Vin II.141 (°pidhara), 221 (°kaṭṭha). (b) scratching in, writing down J IV.402, (°sattha a chisel for engraving letters).
Avalekhana2 (nt.) v. l. for apalekhana.
Avalepana (--°) (nt.) [fr. ava + lip] smearing, daubing, plastering M I.385 (pīta°); Sn 194 (kāyo taca--maŋsɔ âvalepano the body plastered with skin & flesh).
Avasa (adj.) [a + vasa] powerless Sdhp 290.
Avasaṭa & Osaṭa [Sk. apasṛta, cp. also samavasṛta, pp. of ava + sṛ] withdrawn, gone away; one who has left a
community & gone over to another sect, a renegade Vin IV.216, 217 (= titthāyatanaŋ saŋkata). Avasarati [ava + sṛ] to go down, to go away (to) Sn 685 (v. l. BB. T. avaŋsari).
Avasāna (--°) [for osāna] (nt.) stopping ceasing; end, finish, conclusion J I.87 (bhattakicc--âvasāne at the end of the meal); PvA 76 (id.).
Avasāya [fr. avaseti] stopping, end, finish Th 2, 12 (= avasānaŋ niṭṭhānaŋ ThA 19). But the id. p. at Dhp 218 has anakkhāte.
Avasiñcanaka (--°) (adj.) [fr. osiñcati] pouring over (act. & med.), overflowing J I.400 (an°).
Avasiṭṭha (sic & not osiṭṭha) [pp. of avasissati, Sk. avaśiṣṭa] left, remaining, over S II.133; J I.138; V.339; VvA 66, pl.
avasiṭṭhā all who are left, the others PvA 165 (janā). Avasiṭṭhaka (adj.) [fr. avasiṭṭha] remaining, left J III.311.
Avasitta (--°) [pp. of osiñcati] besprinkled, anointed, consecrated, only in phrase rājā khattiyo muddhâvasitto of a
properly consecrated king (see also khattiya) D I. 69; II.227; III.64; Pug 56; DA I.182 (T. muddhâvassita, v. l. °abhisitta); etc. -- See also abhisitta.
Avasin (adj.--n.) [a + vasin fr. vaś] not having control over oneself, D II.275.
Avasissati [Sk. avaśiṣyate; Pass. of ava + śis; but expld. by Kern, Toev. s. v. as fut of avasīdati] to be left over, to remain,
in phrase yaŋ pamāṇa--kataŋ kammaŋ na taŋ tatrâvasissati D I.251; A V.299 = S IV.322; J II.61 (see expln. on p. 62). Also in the phrases taco ca nahārū ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu sarīre upasussatu maŋsa--lohitaŋ M I.481; A I.50; S II.28, and
sarīrāni avasissanti S II. 83. With the latter phrases cp. avasussati.
Avasī metri causa for avasi, a + vasi, aor. of vas4 to stop, stay, rest J V.66 (mā avasī).
Avasussati [Sk. *ava--suṣyati of śuṣ] to dry up, to wither; in later quotations of the old kāmaŋ taco ca nahāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasussatu (upasussatu sarīre maŋsalohitaŋ) J I.71, 110; Sdhp 46. It is a later spelling for the older avasissatu see Trenckner (M I.569). -- fut. avasucchati (= Sk. *°śokṣyati, fut. of Intens.) J VI.550 (v. l. BB °sussati; C. avasucchissati).
Avasūra [ava + sūra; ava here in function of *avaŋs see ava II] sundown, sunset, acc. °ŋ as adv. at or with sundown J V 56 (anāvasūraŋ metrically).

Avasesa1 [Sk. avaśeṣa, fr. ava + śiṣ, cp. avasissati] remainder, remaining part; only in cpds. an° (adj.) without any remainder, i. e. fully, completely M I.220 = A V.347 (°dohin); A I.20 sq., 88; Sn 146; Pug 17; Dhs 363, 553; SnA 417 (°pharaṇa); PvA 71 (°ato, adv. altogether, not leaving anything out); & sâvasesa leaving something over, having something left A I.20 sq., 88; Pv III.55 (jīvita° having still a little life left).
Avasesa2 (adj.) [see prec.] remaining, left Sn 694 (āyu avaseso); J III.19; Vbh 107 (taṇhā ca avasesā ca kilesā); PvA 19 (avasesā ca ñātakā the rest of the relatives), 21 (avasesā parisā), 201 (aṭṭhi--tacamattɔ âvasesa--sarīra with a body on which nothing but skin & bones were left), 206 (aṭṭhi--sanghātamattɔ âvasesa--sarīra). -- nt. (as pred.) °ŋ what is left PvA 52 (appɔ avasesaŋ); KhA 245 (nɔ atthi tesaŋ avasesaŋ).
Avasesaka (adj.) [fr. avasesa2] being left, overflowing, additional, more J I.400 (an°); Dpvs IV.45.
Avassa (adj.) [a + vaś] against one's will, inevitable J I. 19 (°bhāvin); V.319 (°gāmitā). Usually as nt. °ŋ adv. inevitably (cp.
BSk. avaśyaŋ Divy 347; Av. Ś I.209 etc.) J III.271; DA I.263; Sdhp 293. Avassakaŋ (adv.) [see avassa] inevitably Dpvs IX.13.
Avassajati & ossajati [ava + sṛj, perhaps ud + sṛj = Sk. utsṛjati, although the usual Vedic form is avasṛjati. The
form ossajati puzzled the BSk. writers in their sanskritisation apotsṛjati = apa + ut + sṛj Divy 203] to let loose, let go, send off, give up, dismiss, release (ava): J IV.425; V.487 (aor. avassaji read for avissaji).
Avassana (nt.) [a + vassana, Sk. vāsana of vāś to bleat] not bleating J IV.251.
Avassaya [Sk. *avāśraya for the usual apāśraya, see P. apassaya1] support, help, protection, refuge J I.211; II. 197; IV.167;
Miln 160; DhA II.267; IV.198; PvA 5, 113.
Avassava [ava + sava, Sk. °srava fr. sru to flow] outflow, effect, only neg. anassava no further effect Vin II.89; M I.93; II.246; A III.334 sp.
Avasseti [ava + ā + śri, for the usual *apāśrayati; see apasseti] to lean against, to depend on, find shelter in (loc.) J II.80 (aor. avassayiŋ = vāsaŋ kappesiŋ C.). <-> pp. avassita.
Avassāvana (nt.) [fr. ava + Caus. of sru to flow] straining, filtering (?) J II.288. Avassita [for apassita, Sk. apaśrita] depending on, dealing with J V.375. See apassita.
Avassuta (adj.) [Sk. *avasruta, pp. of ava + sru, cp. avassava] 1. (lit.) flowing out or down, oozing, leaking J IV. 20. -- 2. (fig.) (cp. anvāssava & āsava) filled with desire, lustful (opp. anavassuta, q. v.) Vin II.236; S IV.70, 184 (an°); A I.261, 262 (an°); II.240; IV.128, 201; Sn 63 (an°); Pug 27, 36; Dpvs II.5 (T. reads avassita). <-> Neg. anavassuta: 1. not leaking, without a leak J IV.20 (nāvā = udaka--pavesanɔ âbhāvena a. C.). -- 2. free from leakage, i. e. from lust or moral intoxication Dh 39 (°citta); Sn 63 (see expld. in detail at Nd2 40); SnA 116 (= kilesa--anvāssava--virahita).
Avahaṭa [pp. of avaharati] taken away, stolen Miln 46.
Avaharaṇa (--°) [fr. avaharati in both meanings] taking away, removal; theft PvA 47 (sāṭaka°), 92 (soka°).

Avaharati & oharati [ava + hṛ] to steal J I.384; PvA 47 (avahari vatthaŋ), 86 (id., = apānudi). -- pp. avahaṭa (q. v.).
Avahasati [ava + has] to laugh at, deride, mock J V.111 (aññamaññaŋ); PvA 178. -- aor. avahasi J IV.413. Avahāra [fr. avaharati] taking, acquiring, acquisition Vin V.129 (pañca avahārā, viz. theyya°, pasayha°, parikappa°,
paṭicchanna°, kusa°).
Avahīyati [for ohīyati] to be left behind, to stay behind J V.340.
Avāgata [ava + ā + gacchati] only in phrase dhammā avāgat--amhā, we are fallen from righteousness, J V.82. (C. explains apāgata).
Avākaroti [either ava + ā + karoti or avaŋ + karoti, the latter more probable. It is not necessary to take it with Kern, Toev. s. v. as Sk. apākṛṇoti, apa + ā + kṛ] 1. to revoke, undo, rescind, not fulfill, spoil, destroy J III.339 (avākayirā = avakareyya chindeyya C.); V.495, 500; VI. 280. -- 2. to give back, restore J VI.577 (= deti C.).
Avākirati wrong by Hardy VvA Index for avakirati wrong by Hardy VvA Index for avakirati (q. v.). Avāṭuka see apāṭuka.
Avāpuraṇa (nt.) [same as apāpuraṇa] a key S III.132; A IV.374.
Avāpurati [same as apāpurati] to open (a door) J I.63; VI.373.
Avāvaṭa (adj.) [a + vāvaṭa] unobstructed, unhindered, free. Of a woman, not married J V.213 (= apetâvaraṇā, which read for °bharaṇā, apariggahitā C.).
Avikampamāna (adj.) [a + vi + kampamāna, ppr. med. of kamp] not hesitating, not wavering, not doubting J IV.310
(= anosakkamāna C.; Kern takes it at this passage as a + vikalpamāna, see Toev. s.v., but unnecessarily); VI.176 (= nirāsanka C.); J VI.273.
Avikampin (adj.) [fr. a + vi + kamp] unmoved, not shaking, steady Vv 5022 (= acala VvA 215).
Avikopin (adj.) [a + vikopin; fr. vi + kup] not agitated, not moving, unshaken, undisturbed J VI.226 (acchejja +). Avikkhepa [a + vikkhepa] calmness, balance, equanimity D III.213; A I.83; Ps I.94; II.228; Dhs 11, 15, 570. Avicāreti [a + vicāreti] not to examine VvA 336.
Aviccaŋ at J V.434 read aviviccaŋ [a + viviccaŋ] i. e. not secretly, openly.
Avijānaŋ [a + vijānaŋ] not knowing, ignorant Ḍh 38, 60; It 103.
Avijjā (f.) [Sk. avidyā; fr. a + vid] ignorance; the main root of evil and of continual rebirth (see paṭicca--samuppāda, cp. S II.6, 9, 12; Sn p. 141 & many other passages). See on term Cpd. 83 n. 3, 187 sq, 262 sq. & for further detail vijjā. avijjā is termed an anusaya (D III.254, 282; S IV.205, 208 sq., 212); it is one of the āsavā (Vin III.4; D I.84; III.216; It 49; Dhs 1100, 1109), of the oghā (D III.230, 276; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162), of the nīvaraṇāni (S II.23; A I.223; It 8; Dhs 1162, 1486), of the saŋyojanāni (D III.254; Dhs 1131, 1460). See for various characterisatons the foll. passages: Vin I.1; III.3; D III.212, 230,

234, 274; M I.54, 67, 144; S II.4, 26, 263; III.47, 162; IV.256; V.52; A I.8, 285; II.132, 158, 247; III.84 sq., 414; IV.228; I t 34 (yā kācɔ imā duggatiyo asmiŋ loke paramhi ca avijjāmūlakā sabbā icchā--lobha--sammussayā), 57, 81; Sn 199, 277, 729 (jāti--maraṇa--saŋsāraŋ ye vajanti punappunaŋ . . . avijjāyɔeva sā gati), 730, 1026, 1033 (avijjāya nivuto loko); Dh 243; Nd2 99; Pug 21; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162; DhA III.350; IV.161 (°paligha).
Aviññāṇaka (adj.) [a + viññāṇa + ka] senscless, without feeling or consciousness, unfeeling DhA I.6 (saviññāṇaka +). Aviññū (adj.) = aviddasu.
Avitakka (adj.) [a + vitakka] free from thought D III.219, 274; Th 2, 75 ("where reasonings cease" trsl.); Dhs 161 ("free from the working of conception" trsl.), 504 etc.
Avidūra (adj.) [a + vidūra] not far, near; usually in loc. °e as adv. near Sn. 147.
Aviddasu (adj.) [a + viddasu] ignorant, foolish Sn 762 (= bāla Sn A 509); Dh 268 = Nd2 514 (= aviññū DhA III.395);
PvA 18 (so read for avindasu).
(adj.) [a + vināsa + ka] not causing destruction A III.38 (°ika); J V.116 (= anāsaka C.).
Avināsana (adj.) [a + vināsana] imperishable Dpvs IV.16.
Avinicchayaññū (adj.) [a + vinicchaya + ñū] not knowing how to decide J V.367.
Avinibbhujaŋ (adj.) [ppr. of a + vinibbhujati] unable to distinguish or to know J v.121 (= atīrento C.).
Avinibbhoga (ad.) [a + vinibbhoga] not to be distinguished, indistinct J III.428 (°sadda).
Avipariṇāma [a + viparināma] absence of change, steadfastness, endurance D I.18; III.31, 33 (°dhamma); DA I.113 (= jarā--vasena vipariṇāmassa abhāvato).
Avippaṭisāra [a + vippaṭisāra] absence of regret or remorse A III.46.
Avippavāsa (adj.--n.) [a + vippavāsa] thoughtfulness, mindfulness, attention; adj. not neglectful, mindful, attentive,
eager Vin V.216; Sn 1142 (cp. Nd2 101: anussatiyā bhāvento); DA I.104 (appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso); DhA IV.26 (appamāda = satiyā avippavāsa).
Aviruddha (adj.) [a + viruddha] not contrary, unobstructed, free, without difficulties Dh 406; Sn 365, 704, 854. Avirūḷhi (f.) [a + virūḷhi] absence or cesssation of growth Sn 235; DhA I.245 (°dhamma).
Avirodha [a + virodha] absence of obstruction, gentleness M II.105 = Th 1, 875.
Avirodhana (nt.) = avirodha J III.320, 412; V.378.
Avivāda [a + vivāda] absence of contesting or disputing, agreement, harmony D III.245; Sn 896 (°bhūma SnA 557 or °bhumma Nd1 308, expld. as Nibbāna).
Avisaŋvādaka (adj.) [a + visaŋvada + ka] not deceiving, not lying D I.4; III.170; Pug 57; DA I.73. Avisaŋvādanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. a + visaŋvāda] honesty, faithfulness, uprightness D III.190.

Avisaŋvādeti [a + visaŋ + Caus. of vad] to keep one's word, to be honest, to be true J V.124.
Avisaggatā (f.) [a + visaggatā, v.l. viy°, thus as a + viyagga, Sk. vyagra = ākula] state of being undisturbed, harmony,
balance J VI.224 (C. avisaggata). Cp. avyagga.
Avisare at J V.117 according to Kern, Toev. s.v. corrupted from avisaye, i. e. towards a wrong or unworthy object [a +
visaya, loc], C. differently: avisare = avisaritvā atikkamitva; v.l. adhisare.
Avisāhaṭa (adj.) [a + visāhaṭa] imperturbed Dhs 15, 24, 287, 570. (°mānasata).
Avissaji at J VI.79 is with Kern, Toev. s. v. better to be read avassaji (see avassajati).
Avissajjiya (adj.) [grd. of a + vissajjati] not to be given away, inalienable (cp. avebhangiya) Vin I.305 (°ika for °iya); II.170 (five such objects in detail); V.216 (+ avebh°); J VI.568.
Avissāsaniya (adj.) [a + visāsana + iya, ika] not to be trusted, untrustworthy J III.474.
Aviha [of uncertain etym.] the world of the Aviha's, i.e. the 12th of the 16 Brahmā--words, cp. Kindred Sayings 48 n. 3;
Cpd. 139. -- S I.35, 60; A I.279; Pug 17.
(f.) [a + vihiŋsā] absence of cruelty, mercy, humanity, friendliness, love D III.213, 215, 240 (avihesā); Sn 292 (=
sakaruṇabhāva SnA 318); It 82 (°vitakka).
Aviheṭhaka (adj.) [a + viheṭhaka] not harassing, not hurting D III.166 (but cp. SnA 318 avihesaka in same context);
Miln 219.
Avī° in general see vī°.
Avīci [B.Sk. avīci a + vīci (?) no intermission, or no pleasure (?), unknown, but very likely popular etym.] 1. avīciniraya, one of the (great) hells (see niraya), described in vivid colours at many passages of the Pāli canon, e.g. at Vin II.203 = It 86; Nd1 18, 347, 405 = Nd2 304 IIID; Ps I.83; Dhs 1281; J I.71, 96; III.182; IV.159; DhA I.148; PvA 52; SnA 290; Sdhp 37, 194; Pgdp 5 sq.; etc etc. -- 2. disintegration, decay Vism 449 (a. jarā nāma).
Avekalla (°--) adj.) [a + vekalla] without deficiency, in °buddhi complete knowledge J VI.297.
Avekkhati [B.Sk. avīkṣate. The regular Pāli form however is apekkhati, to which the BSk. av° corresponds] to look at, to
consider, to see It 33 (v.l. ap°); Dh 28, 50, J IV.6; DhA I.259 (= passati).
Avekkhipati [avaŋ + khipati, avaŋ here in form ave corresp. to avaḥ, cp. pure for puraḥ etc.] to jump, hop, lit. to throw
(a foot) down J IV.251 (= pacchimapāde khipati C.).
Avecca (adv.) [Usually taken as ava + ger. of i (*itya), cp. adhicca & abhisamecca, but by P. grammarians as a + vecca.
The form is not sufficiently clear semantically; B.Sk. avetya, e.g. Jtm. 210, is a Sanskritisation of the P. form] certainly,
definitely, absolutely, perfectly, expld. by Bdhgh. as acala (on D II.217), or as paññāya ajjhogahetvā (on Sn 229); by Dhp. as apara-- paccaya--bhāvena (on Pv IV.125).
-- Usually in phrase Buddhe Dhamme Sanghe avecca--pasādo perfect faith in the B., the Dhamma & the Sangha, e.g. at
M I.47; S II.69; IV.271 sq., 304; V.344, 405; A I.222; II.56; III.212, 332, 451; IV.406; V.183; further at Ps I.161 (°pasanna); Sn
229 (yo ariyasaccāni avecca passati); Pv IV.125.

Avedha (adj.) [a + vedha, grd. of vidh (vyadh) to pierce, Sk. avedhya] not to be hurt or disturbed, inviolable, unshakable, imperturbable Sn 322 (°dhamma = akampanasabhāva SnA 331).
Avebhangika (adj.) [fr. a + vi + bhanga] not to be divided or distributed Vin I.305. Cp. next.
Avebhangiya (nt.) [= avebhangika] that which is not to be divided, an inalienable possession; 5 such objects enumd. at Vin II.171, which are the same as under avissajjiya (q. v.); V.129.
Avera (adj.) [a + vera] peaceable, mild, friendly Sn 150 (= veravirahita KhA 248); Sdhp 338. -- °ŋ (nt.) friendliness, kindness D I.247 (°citta); Dh 5 (= khantimetta DhA I 51).
Averin (adj.--n.) = avera Dh 197, 258.
Avosita [reading uncertain, cp. avyosita] only in neg. an° unfulfilled, undone Th 1, 101.
Avyagga (ad) [a + vyagga, Sc. vyagra] not bewildered, not confused S V.66. Cp. avisaggatā.
Avyattatā (f.) [abstr. fr. avyatta] state or condition of not being manifest or visible, concealment, hiding DhA II.38.
Avyatha (adj.) [a + vyatha, cp. Sk. vyathā misfortune] not miserable, fortunate J III.466 (= akilamāna C.).
Avyaya [a + vyaya | absence of loss or change, safety D. I.72 (instr. °ena safely); Miln 393 (as abbaya T.).
Avyāpajjha1 (abyābajjha) (nt.) [a + vyapajjha or bajjha, a confusion between the roots bādh or pad] (act.) kindness of heart; (pass.) freedom from suffering (Ep. of Nibbāna) Vin I.183 (avyāpajjh°âdhimutQa); It 31 (abyābajjhɔārāma).
Avyāpajjha2 (abyābajjha) adj.) [either a + *vyāpadya or more likely a + *vyābādhya] free from oppression or injury; not
hurting, kind D II.242 (avera +), 276; M I.90; It 16 = 52 (sukhaŋ); Miln 410 (avera +).
Avyāpanna (adj.) [a + vyāpanna] free from desire to injure, free from malice, friendly, benevolent D III.82,83 (°citta); A
II.220 (id.); Pug 68 (id.). -- Same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 105, 302.
Avyāpāda [a + vyāpāda] absence of desire to injure, freedom from malice D III.215, 229, 240; It 82 (all MSS. have aby°); Dhs 33, 36, 277, 313, 1056.
Avyāyata (adj.) [a + vyāyata of yam] at random, without discrimination, careless J I.496 (= avyatta C.). Avyāyika (adj.) [fr. avyaya] not liable to loss or change, imperishable J V.508 (= avigacchanaka C.).
Avyāvaṭa (adj.) [a + vyāvaṭa = Sk vyāpṛta] not occupied, i. e. careless, neglectful, not worrying Vin III.136; Nd2 72 (abyāvaṭa for appossukka Sn 43); J III.65; VI.188. Miln 177 (abyā°).
Avyāseka (adj.) [a + vy + āseka] untouched, unimpaired D I.182 (°sukha = kilesa vyāseka--virahitattā avyāseka DA I.183); Pug 59.
Avyāharati [a + vy + āharati] not to bring or procure J V.80.

Avyosita (adj.) [a + vyosita, Sk. vyavasita] not having reached perfection, imperfect Th 1, 784 (aby°).
Avhaya [fr. avhayati; cp. Sk. āhvaya "betting"] calling, name; adj. (--°) called, having the name of Sn 684 (isi°), 686 (Asit°),
689 (kanhasiri°), 1133 (Sace°, cp. Nd2 624).
Avhayati & Avheti [Sk. āhvayati, ā + hū or hvā] -- 1. to call upon, invoke, appeal to D I.244 (avhayāma imper.);
PvA 164. -- 2. to call, call up, summon M 1.17; J II.10, 252 (= pakkosati); V.220 (avhayesi); VI.18, 192, 273 (avhettha pret.); Vv 331 (avheti). -- 3. to give a name, to call, to address SnA 487 (= āmanteti ālapati). -- pp. avhāta (q. v.).
Avhāta [pp. of avhayati] called, summoned J III.165 = (an° = anāhuta ayāctia) = Pv I.123, cp. PvA 64. The id. p. at Th 2, 129 reads ayācita.
Avhāna (nt.) [fr. avhayati, Sk. āhvāna in diff. meaning] <-> 1. begging, calling, asking Sn 710; Vism 68 (°ânabhinandanā). -- 2. addressing, naming SnA 605 (= nāma).
Avhāyana (nt.) [cp. Sk. āhvayana] calling to, asking, invocation, imploration D I.11 (Sir--avhāyane, v. l. avhayana; expld.
at DA I.97 with reading Sirivhāyana as "ehi Siri mayhaŋ sire patiṭṭhāhī ti evaŋ sire Siriyā avhayanaŋ"), 244, 245 (v. l. avhāna).
Avhāyika (adj.) [fr. avhaya] calling, giving a name; (m.) one who gives a name J I.401 = III.234.
Asa (adj.) [for asaŋ = asanto, a + santo, ppr. of as in meaning "good"] bad J IV.435 = VI.235 (sataŋ vā asaŋ, acc. sg. with v.
l. santaŋ . . ., expld-- by sappurisaŋ vā asappurisaŋ vā C.); V.448 (n. pl. f. asā expld. by asatiyo lāmikā C.; cp. p. 446 V.319). Asaŋvata (adj.) [pp. of + saŋvuṇati, cp. saŋvuta] unrestricted, open J VI.306.
Asaŋvara [a + saŋvāra] absence of closing or restraint, no control Dhs 1345.
Asaŋvāsa (adj.) [a + saŋvāsa] deprived of co--residence, expelled from the community Vin IV.213, 214.
Asaŋvindaŋ [ppr. a + saŋvindati] not finding, not knowing Th 1, 717.
Asaŋvuta (adj.) [pp. of a + saŋvuṇāti, cp. saŋvata] not restrained Dhs 1345, 1347.
Asaŋsaṭṭha (adj.) [a + saŋsaṭṭha] not mixed or mixing, not associating, not given to society M I.21Q; S I.63; Sn 628 = Dh 404 (= dassana--savana--samullāpa paribhogakāya--saŋsaggānaŋ abhāvena SnA 468 = DhA IV.173).
Asaŋhārima (adj.) = asaŋhāriya (?) Vin IV.272.
Asaŋhāriya (adj.) [grd. of a + saŋharati] not to be destroyed or shattered It 77; Th 1, 372; Nd2 110.
Asaŋhīra (adj.) [= asaŋhāriya of saŋ + hṛ] immovable, unconquerable, irrefutable Vin II.96; S I.193; A IV.141; V.71; Sn 1149 (as Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. Nd2 110); J I. 62; IV.283 (°citta unfaltering); Dpvs IV.12.
Asakka (adj.) [a + sakka; Sk. aśakya] impossible J V. 362 (°rūpa).
Asakkuṇeyya (adj.) [grd. of a + sakkoti] impossible, unable to J I.55; KhA 185 and passim.
Asakkhara (adj.) [a + sakkhara] not stony, free from gravel or stones, smooth J V.168; DhA III.401 (opp. sasakkhara).

Asakyadhītā (f.) [a + sakyadhītā] not a true Buddhist nun Vin IV.214.
Asagguṇa [a + sagguṇa] bad quality, vice Sdhp 382 (°bhāvin, the a° belongs to the whole cpd.).
Asankita & °iya (adj.) [a + sankita, pp. of śank] not hesitating, not afraid, not anxious, firm, bold J I.334 (°iya); V.241; Sdhp 435, 541.
Asankuppa (adj.) [a + sankuppa, grd. of kup] not to be shaken; immovable; steady, safe (Ep. of Nibbāna) Sn 1149 (cp. Nd2 106); Th 1, 649.
Asankusaka (adj.) [a + sankusaka, which is distorted from Sk. sankasuka splitting, crumbling, see Kern, Toev. p. 18] not contrary J VI.297 (°vattin, C. appaṭilomavattin, cp. J trsln. VI.143).
Asankheyya (adj.) [a + sankheyya, grd. of saŋ--khyā] incalculable, innumerable, nt. an immense period A II.142; Miln 232 (cattāri a.), 289 DhA I.5, 83, 104.
Asanga (adj.) [a + sanga] not sticking to anything, free from attachment, unattached Th 2, 396 (°mānasa, = anāsattacitta ThA 259); Miln 343. Cp. next.
Asangita (adj.) [fr. asanga, a + sangita, or should we read asangika?] not sticking or stuck, unimpeded, free, quick J V.409.
Asacca (adj.) [a + sacca] not true, false J V.399.
Asajjamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of a + sajjati, sañj] not clinging, not stuck, unattached Sn 38, 71 (cp. Nd2 107); Dh 221
(nāmarūpasmiŋ a. = alaggamana DhA III.298).
Asajjittho 2nd sg. pret. med. of sajjati to stick or cling to, to hesitate J I.376. See sajjati.
Asajjhaya [a + sajjhāya] non--repetition Dh 241 (cp. DhA III.347).
Asañña (adj.) [a + saññā] unconscious, °sattā unconscious beings N. of a class of Devas D I.28 (cp. DA I.118 and BSk. asaŋjñika--sattvāḥ Divy 505).
Asaññata (adj.) [a + saññata, pp. of saŋ + yam] unrestrained, intemperate, lacking self--control It 43 = 90 = Sn 662 = Dh 307.
Asaññin (adj.) [a + saññin] unconscious D I.54 (°gabbhā, cp. DA I.163); III.111, 140, 263; It 87; Sn 874.
Asaṭha (adj.) [a + saṭha] without guile, not fraudulent, honest D III.47, 55, 237; DhA I.69.
Asaŋṭhita (adj.) [a + saṇṭhita] not composed, unsettled, fickle It 62, 94.
[a + sat, ppr. of asti] not being, not being good, i. e. bad, not genuine (cp. asa); freq., e. g. Sn 94, 131, 881, 950; Dh 73, 77, 367; It 69 (asanto nirayaŋ nenti). See also asaddhamma.
q. v.) [Sk. aśnāti, aś to partake of, to eat or drink cp. aŋśa share, part] to eat; imper. asnātu J V 376; fut. asissāmi Th 1, 223; Sn 970. -- ppr. med. asamāna J V.59; Sn 239. ger. asitvā Miln 167; & asitvāna J IV.371 (an°). pp. asita (q. v.). See also the spurious forms asmiye & añhati (añhamāna Sn 240), also āsita1.

Asatiyā (adv.) [instr. of a + sati] heedlessly, unintentionally J III.486.
Asatta (adj.) [pp. of a + sajjati] not clinging or attached, free from attachment Sn 1059; Dh 419; Nd2 107, 108; DhA
Asattha (n. adj.) [a + sattha] absence of a sword or knife, without a knife, usually combd. with adaṇd̤a in var. phrases: see
under daṇd̤a. Also at Th 1, 757 (+ avaṇa).
Asadisa (adj.) [a + sadisa] incomparable, not having its like DhA II.89; III.120 (°dāna).
Asaddha (adj.) [a + saddha] not believing, without faith D III.252, 282.
Asaddhamma [a + sat + dhamma, cp. asat & BSk. asaddharma] evil condition, sin, esp. sexual intercourse; usually mentioned as a set of several sins, viz. as 3 at It 85; as 4 at A II.47; as 7 at D III.252, 282; as 8 at Vin II.202.
Asana1 (nt.) [Vedic aśan(m)] stone, rock J II.91; V.131.
Asana2 (nt.) [cp. Sk. aśana of aś, cp. asati] eating, food; adj. eating J I.472 (ghatâsana Ep. of the fire; V.64 (id.). Usually in neg. form anasana fasting, famine, hunger Sn 311 (= khudā SnA 324); DA I.139. See also nirasana.
Asana3 (nt.) [Sk. asana] the tree Pentaptera Tomentosa J I.40 (as Bodhi--tree of Gotama); II.91; V.420; VI.530. Asana4
Asana4 (nt.) [cp. Sk. asanā, to asyati to hurl, throw] an arrow M I.82 = S I.62. Cp. asani.
Asanāti [see asati] to eat, to consume (food) J I.472; V. 64; VI.14 (Esb. note: read asnāti; C. paribhuñjati).
Asani (f.) [Vedic aśani in same meaning; with Sk. aśri corner, caturaśra four cornered (see assa), to Lat. ācer pointed,
sharp, Gr. a)/kros pointed, Ags. egl sting, Ohg. ekka corner, point. Connected with this is Sk. aśan (see asana1). Cp. also aŋsa & asama2] orig. a sharp stone as hurling--weapon thence in mythol. Indra's thunderbolt, thunder--clap, lightning J I.71, 167; II.154; III.323; Miln 277; VvA 83.
--aggi the fire of thunder, i. e. lightning or fire caused by lightning DhA III.71. --pāta the falling of the thunderbolt, thunderclap, lightning DA I.280 (or should we read asannipāta?); PvA 45. --vicakka same as °pāta (?) S II. 229 (= lābha--sakkāra--silokassa adhivacana); D III.44, 47.
Asantasaŋ & °anto (adj.) [ppr. of a + santasati] fearless, not afraid Sn 71, 74; J IV.101; VI.306; Nd2 109.
Asantāsin (adj.) [a + santāsin, cp. asantāsaŋ] fearless, not trembling, not afraid Sn 850; Dh 351; Nd2 109; DhA IV.70. Asantuṭṭha [pp. of a + santussati] not contented with, greedy, insatiate, unhappy Sn 108. Cp. next.
Asantuṭṭhitā (f.) [abstr. fr. asantuṭṭhita = asantuṭṭha] dissatisfaction, discontentment D III.214 (so read for tutth°) = A I.95.

Asanthava [a + santhava] dissociation, separation from society, seclusion Sn 207.
Asandhitā (f.) [a + sandhi + tā] absence of joints, disconnected state J VI.16.
Asannata (adj.) [a + sannata] not bent or bending Sdhp 417.
Asapatta (adj.--n.) [a + sapatta = Sk. sapatna] (act.) without enmity, friendly (med.) having no enemy or foe, secure, peaceful D II.276; Sn 150 (= vigata--paccatthika, mettavihārin KhA 249); Th 2, 512.
Asapattī (f.) [a + sapattī] without co--wife or rival in marriage S IV.249.
Asappurisa [a + sappurisa, cp. asat] a low, bad or unworthy man M III.37; SnA 479 (= anariya Sn 664). Asabala (adj.) [a + sabala] unspotted D II.80 = III.245.
Asabbha (adj.) [a + sabbha, i. e. *sabhya cp. sabhā & in meaning court: courteous, hof: hoflich etc.] not belonging to the assembly--room, not consistent with good manners,
impolite, vile, low, of base character J III.527 (mātugāma); Dh 77 = J III.367 = Th 1, 994; Miln 221; DhA I.256; ThA 246 (akkhi). Cp. next. -- Note. Both sabbha and sabbhin occur only in the negative form.
J I.494, more freq. in cpds. as asabbhi°, e.g.
--kāraṇa a low or sinful act Miln 280. --rūpa low, common J VI.386 (= asādhu--jātika, lāmaka), 387 (= asabbhijātika), 414
(= apaṇd̤ita--jātika). Cp. prec. [Sk. ṛṣabha] see usabha. Asama1
Asama1 (adj.) [a + sama] unequal, incomparable J I.40 (+ appaṭipuggala); Sdhp 578 (+ atula). Esp. freq. in cpd. °dhura lit. carrying more than an equal burden, of incomparable strength, very steadfast or resolute Sn 694 (= asama--viriya SnA 489); J I.193; VI.259, 330.
Asama2 (nt.) [the diaeretic form of Sk. aśman hurling stone, of whieh the contracted form is amha (q. v.); connected with Lat. ocris "mons confragosus"; Gr. a)/kmwn anvil; Lith. akmů̃ stone, see also asana1 (Sk. aśan stone for throwing) and asani] stone, rock DA I.270, 271 (°muṭṭhika having a hammer of stone; v. l. BB. ayamuṭṭhika); SnA 392 (instr. asmanā).
Asamaggiya (nt.) [abstr. fr. a + samagga] lack of concord, disharmony J VI.516 (so read for asāmaggiya).
Asamaṇa at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa at Pug 27 is to be read assamaṇa (q. v.).
Asamapekkhana (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. a + sam + apekkhati] lack of consideration S III.261; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162. Asamāhita (adj.) [a + samāhita] not composed, uncontrolled, not firm It 113 (opp. susamāhita); Dh 110, 111; Pug 35. Asamijjhanaka (adj.) [a + samijjhana + ka] unsuccessful, without result, fruitless; f. °ikā J III.252.
Asamiddhi (f.) [a + samiddhi] misfortune, lack of success J VI.584.

Asamosaraṇa (nt.) [a + samosaraṇa] not coming together, not meeting, separation J V.233.
Asampakampiya (adj.) [grd. of a + sampakampeti] not to be shaken, not to be moved Sn 229 (= kampetuŋ vā
cāletuŋ vā asakkuṇeyyo KhA 185).
Asampajañña (nt.) [a + sampajañña] lack of intelligence D III.213; Dhs 390, 1061, 1162, 1351.
Asampāyanto [ppr. of a + sampāyati] unable to solve or explain Sn p. 92.
Asambādha (adj.) [a + sambādha] unobstructed Sn 150 (= sambādha--virahita KhA 248); J I.80; ThA 293.
Asammodiya (nt.) [a + sammodiya] disagreement, dissension J VI.517 (= asamaggiya C.).
Asammosa [a + sammosa cp. B.Sk. asammoṣadharman Ep. of the Buddha; Divy 49 etc] absence of confusion D III.221 = Dhs 1366.
Asayaŋvasin (adj.) [a + sayaŋ + vasiŋ] not under one's own control, i. e. dependent D II.262; J I.337.
Asayha (adj.) [a + sayha, grd. of sah = Sk. asahya] impossible, insuperable J VI.337. Usually in cpd. °sāhin conquering
the unconquerable, doing the impossible, acchieving what has not been achieved before Th 1, 536, Pv II.922 (Angīrasa); It 32. Asahana (nt.--adj.) [a + sahana] not enduring, non--endurance, inability J III.20; PvA 17.
Asahāya (adj.) [a + sahāya] one who is without friends; who is dependent on himself Miln 225.
Asā see āsa.
Asāta (adj.) [a + sāta, Sk. aśāta, Kern's interpretation & etymology of asāta at Toev. s.v. p. 90 is improbable] disagreeable Vin I.78 (asātā vedanā, cp. asātā vedanā M Vastu I 5); Sn 867; J I.288, 410; II.105; Dhs 152, 1343.
Asādhāraṇa (adj.) [a + sādhāraṇa cp. asādhāraṇa Divy 561] not general, not shared, uncommon, unique Vin III.35; Kh VIII.9; J I.58, 78; Miln 285; DA I.71; Sdhp 589, 592.
Asāmapāka (adj.) [a + sāma + pāka] one who does not cook (a meal) for himself (a practice of ascetics) DA I.270. Asāra (n. adj.) [a + sāra] that which is not substance, worthlessness; adj. worthless, vain, idle Sn 937 (= asāra nissāra
sārâpagata Nd1 409); Dh 11, 12 (cp. DhA I.114 for interpretation).
Asāraka (adj.) [a + sāraka] unessential, worthless, sapless, rotten Th 1, 260; J II.163 = DhA I.144.
Asāraddha (adj.) [a + sāraddha] not excited, cool A I.148 = It 119 (passaddho kāyo a.; v.l. assāraddha).
Asāhasa (nt.) [a + sāhasa] absence of violence, meekness, peaceableness D III.147 (asāhase rata fond of peace); acc. as
adv. asāhasaŋ without violence, not arbitrarily J III.319; instr. asāhasena id. J VI.280; Dh 257 (= amusāvādena DhA III.382).
Asi [Vedic asi, Av. aŋhū Lat. ensis] a sword, a large knife D I.77 (= DA I.222); M II.99; A I.48 = (asinā sīsaŋ chindante); IV.97 (asinā hanti attānaŋ); J IV.118 (asi sunisito), 184; V.45 (here meaning "sickle"), 475 (asiñ ca me maññasi, probably faulty for either "āsiñ ca me" or "āsiñcam me"); Vism 201 (ñāṇâsi the sword of knowledge); PvA 253 (asinā pahaṭa).
--camma sword & shield Vin II.192; A III.93; J VI.449. --tharu the hilt of a sword DhA IV.66. --nakha having nails like

swords Pgdp 29. --patta having sword--like leaves, with swords (knives) for leaves (of the sword--leaf--wood in Niraya, a late feature in the descriptions of Purgatory in Indian speculative Theology, see e. g. Mārk--aṇd̤eyapurāṇa XII.24 sq.; Mhbhārata XII.321; Manu IV.90; XII. 75; Scherman, Visionsliteratur pp. 23 sq.) J VI.250 (°niraya); PvA 221 (°vana); Sdhp 194. --pāsa having swords for snares (a class of deities) Miln 191. --māla (--kamma) sword--garland (--torture) J III.178 (+sīsaŋ chindāpeti); Dāvs III.35. Preferable to interpretation "sword--dirt", see māla (mālā). --lakkhana "swordsign", i.e. (fortune--telling from) marks or a sword D I.9; J I.455. --loma having swords for hair S II.257, cp. Vin III.106. --sūna
slaughter--house (so also B.Sk. asisūnā Divy 10, 15; see further detail under "kāma" similes) Vin II.26; M I.130, 143; A III.97. --sūla a swordblade Th 2, 488 (expld. at ThA 287 by adhikuṭṭanatthena, i.e. with reference to the executioner's block, cp. also sattisūla).
Asika (adj.) (--°) [asi + ka] having a sword, with a sword in phrase ukkhittɔasika with drawn sword, M I.377; J I.393. Asita1
Asita1 [Sk. aśita, pp. of *asati, Sk. aśnāti] having eaten, eating; (nt.) that which is eaten or enjoyed, food M I.57; A III.30, 32 (°pīta--khāyita etc.); PvA 25 (id.); J VI.555 °(āsana having enjoyed one's food, satisfied). Cp. āsita1.
Asita2 (adj.) [a + sita pp. of *śri, Sk. aśrita] not clinging to, unattached, independent, free (from wrong desires) D II.261 (°âtiga); M I.386; Th 1, 38, 1242 (see Mrs Rh. D. in Brethren 404 note 2); J II.247; It 97; Sn 251, 519, 593, 686 (Asitavhaya, called the Asita i.e. the Unattached; cp. SnA 487), 698 (id.), 717, 957, 1065 (cp. Nd2 111 & nissaya).
Asita3 (adj.) [Sk. asita; Idg. *ās, cp. Lat. āreo to be dry, i. e. burnt up; Gr. a)/zw to dry; orig. meaning burnt, hence of burnt, i. e. black colour (of ashes)] black--blue, black M II.180 (°vyābhangī); A III.5 (id.); Th 2, 480 (= indanīla ThA 286); J III.419 (°âpangin black--eyed); v. 302; Dāvs I.45.
Asita4 (m. nt.) [fr. asi] a sickle J III.129; V 46.
Asīti (num.) [Sk. aśīti] 80 (on symbolical meaning & freq. application see aṭṭha1 B 1 c, where also most of the ref's. In addition we mention the foll.:) J I.233 (°hattha 80 hands, i. e. 80 cubits deep); III.174 (°sahassa--vāraṇa--parivuta); VI.20 (vassasahassāni); Miln 23 (asītiyā bhikkhusahassehi saddhiŋ); Vīsm 46 (satakoṭiyo) DhA I.14, 19 (mahātherā); II.25 (°koṭi--vibhava). Cp. ạ̄sītika.
Asu (pron.) [Sk. asau (m.), adas (nt.); base amu° in oblique cases & derivation, e.g. adv. amutra (q.v.)] pron. dẹmonstr.
"that", that one, usually combd. with yo (yaŋ), e. g. asu yo so puriso M I.366; yaŋ aduŋ khettaŋ S IV.315. <-> nom. sg. m. asu S IV.195; Miln 242; f. asu J V.396 (asū metri causâ); nt. aduŋ M I.364, 483; A I.250. Of oblique cases e. g. amunā (instr.) A I.250. Cp. also next.
Asuka (pron.--adj.) [asn + ka] such a one, this or that, a certain Vin III.87; J I.148; PvA 29, 30, 35, 109, 122 (°ŋ gatiŋ gata). Asuci (adj.) [a + suci] not clean, impure, unclean Sn 75 (°manussā, see Nd2 112); Pug 27, 36; Sdhp 378, 603.
Asucīka (nt.) [abstr. fr. asuci] impurity, unclean living, defilement Sn 243 (°missita = asucibhāva--missita SnA 286. Asubha (adj.) [a + subha] impure, unpleasant, bad, ugly, nasty; nt. °ŋ nastiness, impurity. Cp. on term and the

Asubha--meditation, as well as on the 10 asubhas or offensive objects Dhs. trsl. 70 and Cpd. 121 n. 6. -- S IV.111 (asubhato manasikaroti); V.320; Sn 341; Sdhp 368. --subhâsubha pleasant unpleasant, good & bad Sn 633; J III. 243; Miln 136.
--ânupassin realising or intuiting the corruptness (of the body) It 80, 81; DhA I.76. --kathā talk about impurity Vin III.68. --kammaṭṭhāna reflection on impurity DhA III.425. --nimitta sign of the unclean i. e. idea of impurity Vism 77. --bhāvanā contemplation of the impurity (of the body) Vin III.68. --saññā idea of impurity D III.253, 283, 289, 291. --saññin having an idea of or realising the impurity (of the body) It 93.
Asura [Vedic asura in more comprehensive meaning; connected with Av. ahurō Lord, ahurō mazdā°; perhaps to Av. anhuš
& Lat. erus master] a fallen angel, a Titan; pl. asurā the Titans, a class of mythological beings. Dhpāla at PvA 272 & the C. on J V.186 define them as kāḷakañjaka--bhedā asurā. The are classed with other similar inferior deities, e. g. with garuḷā, nāgā, yakkhā at Miln 117; with supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, yakkhā at DA I.51. <-> The fight between Gods & Titans is also reflected in the oldest books of the Pāli Canon and occurs in identical description at the foll. passages under the title of devâsura--sangāma: D II.285; S I.222 (cp. 216 sq.), IV.201 sq., V.447; M I.253; A IV.432. -- Rebirth as an Asura is
considered as one of the four unhappy rebirths or evil fates after death (apāyā; viz. niraya, tiracchāna--yoni, petā or pettivisaya, asurā), e. g. at It 93; J V.186; Pv IV.111, see also apāya. -- Other passages in general: S I.216 sq. (fight of Devas & Asuras); IV.203; A II.91; IV.198 sq., 206; Sn 681; Nd1 89, 92, 448; DhA I.264 (°kaññā); Sdhp 366, 436.
--inda Chief or king of the Titans. Several Asuras are accredited with the rôle of leaders, most commonly Vepacitti (S I.222; IV.201 sq.) and Rāhu (A II.17, 53; III.243). Besides these we find Pahārāda (gloss Mahābhadda) at A IV.197. --kāya the body or assembly of the asuras A I.143; J V.186; ThA 285. --parivāra a retinue of Asuras A II.91. --rakkhasā Asuras and Rakkhasas (Rakṣasas) Sn 310 (defined by Bdhgh at SnA 323 as pabbata--pāda--nivāsino dānava--yakkha--saññitā).
Asuropa [probably a haplological contraction of asura--ropa. On various suggestions as to etym. & meaning see Morris's discussion at J P T S. 1893, 8 sq. The word is found as āsulopa in the Asoka inscriptions] anger, malice, hatred; abruptness, want of forbearance Pug 18 = Vbh 357; Dhs 418, 1060, 1115, 1341 (an°); DhsA 396.
Asussūsaŋ [ppr. of a + susūsati, Desid. of śru, cp. Sk. śuśrūṣati] not wishing to hear or listen, disobedient J V.121. Asūyaka see anasūyaka.
Asūra (adj.) [a + sura1] -- 1. not brave, not valiant, cowardly Sn 439. -- 2. uncouth, stupid J VI.292 (cp. Kern. Toev. p. 48).
(adj. n.) [a + sekha] not requiring to be trained, adept, perfect, m. one who is no longer a learner, an expert; very often meaning an Arahant (cp. B.Sk. aśaikṣa occurring only in phrase śaikṣâśaikṣāh those in training & the adepts, e.g. Divy 261, 337; Av. Ś I.269, 335; II.144) Vin I.62 sq.; III.24; S I.99; D III.218, 219; It 51 (asekho sīlakkhandho; v. l. asekkha); Pug 14 (= arahant); Dhs 584, 1017, 1401; Kvu 303 sq.
--muni the perfectly Wise DhA III.321. --bala the power of an Arahant, enumd. in a set of 10 at Ps II.173, cp. 176.
Asecanaka (adj.) [a + secana + ka, fr. sic to sprinkle, cp. B.Sk. asecanaka--darśana in same meaning e. g. Divy 23, 226,
334] unmixed, unadulterated, i. e. with full and unimpaired properties, delicious, sublime, lovely M I.114; S I.213 (a. ojava "that elixir that no infusion needs" Mrs Rh. D.) = Th 2, 55 (expld. as anāsittakaŋ pakatiyā ɔva mahārasaŋ at ThA 61) = Th 2, 196 (= anāsittakaŋ ojavantaŋ sabhāva--madhuraŋ ThA 168); S V.321; A III. 237 sq. Miln 405.
Asevanā (f.) [a + sevanā] not practising, abstinence from Sn 259 (= abhajanā apayirupāsanā KhA 124).
Asesa (adj.) [a + sesa] not leaving a remnant, without a remainder, all, entire, complete Sn 2 sq., 351, 355, 500, 1037 (=
sabba Nd2 113). As °-- (adv.) entirely, fully, completely Sn p. 141 (°virāga--nirodha); Miln 212 (°vacana inclusive statement).
Asesita (adj.) [pp. of a + Caus. of śiṣ, see seseti & sissati] leaving nothing over, having nothing left, entire, whole, all J III.153.

Asoka1 (adj.) [a + soka, cp. Sk. aśoka] free from sorrow Sn 268 (= nissoka abbūḷha--soka--salla KhA 153); Dh 412; Th 2, 512.
Asoka2 [Sk. aśoka] the Asoka tree, Jonesia Asoka J V.188; Vv 354, 359 (°rukkha); Vism 625 (°ankura); VvA 173 (°rukkha).
Asoṇd̤a (adj.) [a + soṇd̤a] not being a drunkard, abstaining from drink J V.116. -- f. asoṇd̤ī A III.38.
Asotatā (nt.) [abstr. a + sota + ta, having no ears, being earless J VI.16.
Asnāti [Sk. aśnāti to eat, to take food; the regular Pāli forms are asati (as base) and asanāti] to eat; imper. asnātu J V.376.
Asman (nt.) [Vedic aśman; the usual P. forms are amha and asama2] stone, rock; only in instr. asmanā SnA 362.
Asmasati [spurious form for the usual assasati = Sk. āśvasati] to trust, to rely on J V.56 (Pot. asmase).
Asmi (I am) see atthi.
Asmimāna [asmi + māna] the pride that says "I am", pride of self, egotism (same in B.Sk. e.g. Divy 210, 314) Vin I.3; D III.273; M I.139, 425; A III.85; Ps I.26; Kvu 212; DhA I.237. Cp. ahaŋ asmi.
Asmiye 1 sg. ind. pres. med. of aś to eat, in sense of a fut. "I shall eat" J V.397, 405 (C. bhuñjissāmi). The form is to be expld. as denom. formn. fr. --āśa food, = aŋsiyati and with metathesis asmiyati. See also añhati which would correspond either to *aŋśyati or aśnāti (see asati).
Assa1 [for aŋsa1, q. v. for etym.] shoulder; in cpd. assapuṭa shoulder--bag, knapsack i. e. a bag containing provisions, instr. assupuṭena with provisions. Later exegesis has interpreted this as a bag full of ashes, and vv. ll. as well as Commentators take assa = bhasma ashes (thus also Morris J P T S. 1893, 10 without being able to give an etymology). The word was already misunderstood by Bdhgh. when he explained the Dīgha passage by bhasmapuṭena, sīse chārikaŋ okiritvā ti attho DA I.267. After all it is the same as puṭaŋsa (see under aŋsa1). -- D I.98, cp. A II.242 (v. l. bhasma°); DA I.267 (v.l. bhassa°).
Assa2 [for aŋsa2 = Sk. aśra point, corner, cp. Sk. aśri, Gr. a)/kros & o)cu/s sharp, Lat. acer] corner, point; occurs only in cpd. caturassa four--cornered, quadrangular, regular (of symmetrical form, Vin II.316; J IV.46, 492; Pv II.119. Perhaps also at Th 2, 229 (see under assa3). Occurs also in form caturaŋsa under catur).
Assa3 [Vedic aśva, cp. Av. aspō; Gr. i(/ppos, dial. i(/kkos; Lat. equus; Oir. ech; Gall. epo--; Cymr. ep, Goth. aíhva; Os. ehu; Ags. eoh] a horse; often mentioned alongside of and combd. with hatthi (elephant) Vin III.6 (pañcamattehi assa--satehi), 52 (enumd. under catuppadā, quadrupeds, with hatthi oṭṭha goṇa gadrabha & pasuka); A II.207; V.271; Sn 769 (gavâssa). At Th II.229 the commentary explains caturassa as ʻfour in handʼ; but the context shows that the more usual sense of caturassa (see assa2) was probably what the poet meant; Dh 94, 143, 144 (bhadra, a good horse), 380 (id.); Vv 203 (+ assatarī); VvA 78; DhA I.392 (hatthi--assâdayo); Sdhp 367 (duṭṭh°).

--ājāniya [cp. BSk. aśvājāneya Divy 509, 511] a thoroughbred horse, a blood horse A I.77, 244; II.113 sq., 250 sq.; III.248,
282 sq.; IV.188, 397; V.166, 323; PvA 216. See also ājāniya. --âroha one who climbs on a horse, a rider on horseback, N. of
an occupation "cavalry" D I.51 (+ hatthâroha; expld. at DA I.156 by sabbe pi assācariyaassavejja--assabhaṇd̤ādayo). --kaṇṇa N. of a tree, Vatica Robusta, lit. "horse--ear" (cp. similarly Goth. aíhva--tundi the thornbush, lit. horse--tooth) J II.161; IV.209; VI.528. --khalunka an inferior horse ("shaker"), opp. sadassa. A I.287 = IV.397. --tthara a horse cover, a horse blanket Vin I.192; D I.7 --damma a horse to be tamed, a fierce horse, a stallion A II.112; °sārathi a horse trainer A II. 112, 114; V.323 sq.; DhA IV.4. --potaka the young of a horse, a foal or colt J II.288. --bandha a groom J II. 98; V.449; DhA I.392. --bhaṇd̤a (for °bandha? or should we read °paṇd̤aka?) a groom or horse--trainer, a trader in horses Vin I.85 (see on form of word Kern, Toev. p. 35). --bhaṇd̤aka horse--trappings J II.113. --maṇd̤ala circus Vism 308, cp. M I.446. --maṇd̤alika
exercising--ground Vin III.6. --medha N. of a sacrifice: the horse--sacrifice [Vedic aśvamedha as Np.] S I.76 (v. l. sassa°); It 21 (+ purisamedha); Sn 303. --yuddha a horse--fight D I.7. --rūpaka a figure of a horse, a toy horse DhA II.69 (+
hatthi--rūpaka). --lakkhaṇa (earning fees by judging) the marks on a horse D I.9. --laṇd̤a horse--manure, horsedung DhA IV.156 (hatthi--laṇd̤a +). --vāṇija a horsedealer Vin III.6. --sadassa a noble steed of the horse kind A I.289 = IV.397 (in comparison with purisa°).
Assa4 is gen. dat. sg. of ayaŋ, this.
Assa5 3. sg. Pot. of asmi (see atthi).
Assaka1 (--°) [assa3 + ka] with a horse, having a horse; anɔ without a horse J VI.515 (+ arathaka).
Assaka2 (adj.) [a + saka; Sk. asvaka] not having one's own, poor, destitute M I.450; II.68; A III.352; Ps I.126 (v. l. asaka).
Assatara [Vedic aśvatara, aśva + compar. suffix tara in function of "a kind of", thus lit. a kind of horse, cp. Lat. matertera
a kind of mother. i. e. aunt] a mule Dh 322 = DhA I.213; DhA IV.4 (= vaḷavāya gadrabhena jāta); J IV.464 (kambojake assatare sudante; imported from Cambodia); VI.342. -- f. assatarī a she--mule Vin II.188; S I.154; II.241; A II.73; Miln 166. -- assatarī--ratha a chariot drawn by she--mules Vv 203, 208 (T. assatarī ratā) = 438; Pv I.111 (= assatariyutta ratha PvA 56); J VI.355.
Assattha1 [Vedic aśvattha, expld. in K Z I.467 as aśva--ttha dial. for aśva--stha "standing place for horses, which etym. is problematic; it is likely that the Sk. word is borrowed from a local dialect.] the holy fig--tree, Ficus, Religiosa; the tree under which the Buddha attained enlightenment, i. e. the Bo tree Vin IV.35; D II.4 (sammā--sambuddho assatthassa mūle abhisambuddho); S V.96; J I.16 (V.75, in word--play with assattha2 of V.79).
Assattha2 [pp. of assasati; cp. BSk. āsvasta Av. Ś I.210] encouraged, comforted A IV.184 (v. l. as gloss assāsaka); Ps I.131
(loka an°; v. l. assaka); J I.16 (V.79 cp. assattha1); VI.309 (= laddhassasa C.), 566.
Assaddha (adj.) [a + saddhā] without faith, unbelieving, Sn 663; Pug 13, 20; Dhs 1327; DhA II.187.

Assaddhiya (nt.) [a + saddhiya, in form, but not in meaning a grd. of saddahati, for which usually saddheyya; cp. Sk. aśradheyya incredible] disbelief S I.25; A III.421; V.113 sq., 146, 148 sq., 158, 161; Vbh 371; DA I.235; Sdhp 80.
Assama [ā + śram] a hermitage (of a brahmin ascetic esp. a jaṭila) Vin I.24 = IV.108; I.26, 246; III.147; Sn 979; Sn p. 104, 111; J I.315 (°pada) V.75 (id.) 321. VI.76 (°pada). The word is not found anywhere in the Canon in the technical sense of the later Sanskrit law books, where "the 4 āśramas" is used as a t. t. for the four stages in the life of a brahmin priest (not of a brahmin by birth). See Dial. I.211--217.
Assamaṇa [a + samaṇa] not a true Samaṇa Vin I.96; Sn 282; Pug 27 (so read for asamaṇa); Pug A 207. -- f. assamaṇī V ìn IV.214.
Assaya [ā + sayati, śri] resting place, shelter, refuge, seat DA I.67 (puññ°). Cp. BSk. rājāśraya Jtm 3156; aśraya also in meaning "body": see Av. Ś. I.175 & Index II.223.
Assava (adj.) [ā + sunāti, śru] loyal D I.137; Sn 22, 23, 32; J IV.98; VI.49; Miln 254; an° inattentive, not docile DhA I.7. Assavati [ā + sru] to flow J II.276 (= paggharati C.). Cp. also āsavati.
Assavanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. assavana] not listening to, inattention M I.168.
Assavanīya (adj.) [a + savanīya] not pleasant to hear Sdhp 82.
Assasati [ā + śvas, on semantical inversion of ā & pa see under ā1 3] 1. to breathe, to breathe out, to exhale, J I 163;
VI.305 (gloss assāsento passāsento susu ti saddaŋ karonto); Vism 272. Usually in combn. with passasati to inhale, i. e. to breathe in & out, D II.291 = M I.56, cp. M I.425; J II.53, cp. V.36. -- 2. to breathe freely or quietly, to feel relieved, to be comforted, to have courage S IV.43; J IV.93 assasitvāna ger. = vissamitvā c.); VI.190 (assāsa imper., with mā soci); med. assase J IV.57 (C. for asmase T.; expld. by vissase), 111 (°itvā). -- 3. to enter by the breath, to bewitch, enchant, take possession J IV.495 (= assāsa--vātena upahanati āvisati C.). -- Caus. assāseti. -- pp. assattha2. See also assāsa--passāsa.
Assāda [ā + sādiyati, svad] taste, sweetness, enjoyment, satisfaction D I.22 (vedanānaŋ samudaya atthangama assāda
etc.); M I.85; S II.84 sq. (°ânupassin), 170 sq.; III.27 sq. (ko rūpassa assādo), 62, 102; IV.8 sq., 220; V.193, 203 sq.; A I.50 (°ânupassin), 258, 260; II.10; III.447 (°diṭṭhi) J I.508; IV.113, Sn 448; Ps I.139 sq., (°diṭṭhi), 157; cp. I.1017; Pv IV.62 (kām°); Vbh 368 (°diṭṭhi); Nett 27 sq.; Miln 388; Vism 76 (paviveka--rasɔ); Sdhp 37, 51. See also appassāda under appa.
Assādanā (f.) [cp. assāda] sweetness, taste, enjoyment S I.124; Sn 447 (= sādubhāva SnA 393).
Assādeti [Denom. fr. assāda] to taste S II.227 (lābha--sakkārasilokaŋ); Vism 73 (paviveka--sukha--rasaŋ); DhA I.318.
Assāraddha v. l. at It 111 for asāraddha.
Assāvin (adj.) [ā + sru] only in an° not enjoying or finding pleasure, not intoxicated Sn 853 (sātiyesu a. = sāta--vatthusa kāmaguṇesu taṇhā--santhava--virahita SnA 549). See also āsava.
Assāsa [Sk. āśvāsa, ā + śvas] 1. (lit.) breathing, esp. breathing out (so Vism 272), exhalation, opp. to passāsa inhalation,
with which often combd. or contrasted; thus as cpd. assāsa--passāsa meaning breathing (in & out), sign of life, process of breathing, breath D II.157 = S I.159 = Th 1, 905; D III.266; M I.243; S I.106; IV.293; V.330, 336; A IV.409; V.135; J II.146; VI.82; Miln 31, 85; Vism 116, 197. -- assāsa in contrast with passāsa at Ps I.95, 164 sq., 182 sq. -- 2. (fig.) breathing easily,
freely or quietly, relief, comfort, consolation, confidence M I.64; S II.50 (dhamma--vinaye); IV.254 (param--assāsa--ppatta); A I.192; III.297 sq. (dhamma--vinaye); IV.185; J VI.309 (see assattha2); Miln 354; PvA 104 (°matta only a little breathing space);

Sdhp 299 (param°), 313.
Assāsaka (adj. n.) [fr. assāsa] 1. (cp. assāsa 1) having breath, breathing, in an° not able to draw breath Vin III.84; IV.111.
-- 2. (cp. assāsa2) (m. & nt.) that which gives comfort & relief, confidence, expectancy J I.84; VI. 150. Cp. next.
Assāsika (adj.) [fr. assāsa in meaning of assāsa 2, cp. assāsaka 2] only in neg. an° not able to afford comfort, giving no
comfort or security M I.514; III.30; J II.298 (= aññaŋ assāsetuŋ asamatthaṭāya na assāsika). Cp. BSk. anāśvāsika in ster. phrase anitya adhruva anāśvāsika vipariṇāmadharman Divy 207; Av. Ś. 139, 144; whereas the corresp. Pāli equivalent runs anicca addhuva asassata (= appāyuka) vipariṇāma--dhamma thus inviting the conjecture that BSk. āśvāsika is somehow distorted out of P. asassata.
Assāsin (adj.) [Sk. āśvāsin] reviving, cheering up, consoled, happy S IV.43 (an°).
Assāseti [Caus. of assasati] to console, soothe, calm, comfort, satisfy J VI.190, 512; DhA I.13.
Assita (adj.) [Sk. aśrita, ā + pp. of śri] dependent on, relying, supported by (acc.); abiding, living in or on D II.255 (tad°); Vv 5016 (sīho va guhaŋ a.); Th 1, 149 (janaŋ evɔ assito jano); Sdhp 401.
Assirī (adj.) [a + sirī] without splendour, having lost its brightness, in assirī viya khāyati Nett 62 = Ud 79 (which latter has sassarɔ iva, cp. C. on passage l. c.).
Assu1 (nt.) [Vedic aśru, Av. asrū, Lith aszarà, with etym. not definitely clear: see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under lacrima] a tear Vin I.87 (assūni pavatteti to shed tears); S II.282 (id.); Dh 74; Th 2, 496 (cp. ThA 289); KhA 65; DhA I.12 (°puṇṇa--netta with eyes full of tears); II.98; PvA 125.
--dhārā a shower of tears DhA IV.15 (pavatteti to shed). --mukha (adj.) with tearful face [cp. BSk. aśrumukha e. g. Jtm 3116] D I.115, 141; Dh 67; Pug 56; DA I.284; PvA 39. --mocana shedding of tears PvA 18.
Assu2 is 3rd pl. pot. of atthi. Assu3
Assu3 (indecl.) [Sk. sma] expletive part. also used in emphatic sense of "surely, yes, indeed" Sn 231 (according to Fausböll, but preferably with P. T. S. ed. as tayas su for tayɔ assu, cp. KhA 188); Vv 324 (assa v. l. SS) = VvA 135 (assū ti nipāta--mattaŋ). Perhaps we ought to take this assu3 together with the foll. assu4 as a modification of ssu (see su2). Cp. āsu.
Assu4 part. for Sk. svid (and sma?) see under su2. According to this view Fausbölls reading kenɔ assu at Sn 1032 is to be emended to kena ssu.
Assuka (nt.) [assu1 + ka] a tear Vin II.289; Sn 691; Pv IV.53.
Assutavant (adj.) [a + sutavant] one who has not heard, ignorant M I.1, 8, 135; Dhs 1003, 1217, cp. Dhs trsl. 258. Aha1

Aha1 (indecl.) [cp. Sk. aha & P. aho; Germ. aha; Lat. ehem etc.] exclamation of surprise, consternation, pain etc. "ch! alas! woe!". Perhaps to be seen in cpd. °kāmā miserable pleasures lit. "woe to these pleasures!") gloss at ThA 292 for T. kāmakāmā of Th 2, 506 (expld. by C. as "ahā ti lāmaka--pariyāyo"). See also ahaha.
Aha2 (--°) & Aho (°--) (nt.) [Vedic ahan & ahas] a day. (1) °aha only in foll. cpds. & cases: instr. ekâhena in one day J VI. 366; loc. tadahe on that (same) day PvA 46; acc. katipâhaŋ (for) some or several days J I.152 etc. (kattpâha); sattāhaŋ seven days, a week Vin I.1; D II. 14; J IV.2, and freq.; anvahaŋ daily Dāvs IV.8. -- The initial a of ahaŋ (acc.) is elided after i, which often appears lengthened: kati ɔhaŋ how many days? S I.7; ekâha--dvī ɔhaŋ one or two days J I.292; dvīha--tī ɔhan two or three days J II.103; VvA 45; ekâha--dvī ɔhɔ accayena after the lapse of one or two days J I.253. -- A doublet of aha is anha (through metathesis from ahan), which only occurs in phrases pubbanho & sāyanha (q. v.); an adj. der. fr. aha is °ahika: see
pañcâhika (consisting of 5 days). -- (2) aho° in cpd. ahoratta (m. & nt.) [cp. BSk. ahorātraŋ Av. Ś. I.209] & ahoratti (f.) day
& night, occurring mostly in oblique cases and adverbially in acc. ahorattaŋ: M I.417 (°ânusikkhin); Dh 226 (id.; expld. by divā ca rattiñ ca tisso sikkhā sikkhamāna DhA III. 324); Th 1, 145 (ahorattā accayanti); J IV.108 (°ānaŋ accaye); Pv II.131 (°ŋ); Miln 82 (ena). -- ahorattiŋ Dh 387; J VI.313 (v. l. BB for T. aho va rattiŋ).
Ahaŋ (prom.) [Vedic ahaŋ = Av. azəm; Gr. e)gw/(n); Lat. ego; Goth. ik, Ags. ic, Ohg. ih etc.] pron. of 1st person "I". <-> nom. sg. ahaŋ S III.235; A IV.53; Dh 222, 320; Sn 172, 192, 685, 989, 1054, 1143; J I.61; II.159. -- In pregnant sense (my ego, myself, I as the one & only, i. e. egotistically) in foll. phrases: yaŋ vadanti mama . . na te ahaŋ S I.116, 123; ahaŋ asmi "I am" (cp. ahaŋkāra below) S I.129; III.46, 128 sq.; IV.203; A II.212, 215 sq.; Vism 13; ahaŋ pure ti "I am the first" Vv 8450 (= ahamahaŋkārā ti VvA 351). -- gen. dat. mayhaŋ Sn 431, 479; J I.279; II.160, mama S I.115; Sn 22, 23, 341, 997; J II.159, & mamaŋ S I.116; Sn 253 (= mama C.), 694, 982. -- instr. mayā Sn 135, 336, 557, 982; J I.222, 279. -- acc. maŋ Sn 356, 366, 425, 936; J II. 159; III.26, & mamaŋ J III.55, 394. -- loc. mayi Sn 559; J III 188. The enclitic form in the sg. is me, &
func- tions in diff. cases, as gen. (Sn 983; J II.159), acc. (Sn 982), instr. (J I.138, 222), & abl. -- Pl. nom. mayaŋ (we) Sn 31, 91, 167, 999; J II.159; VI.365, amhe J II. 129, & vayaŋ (q. v.). -- gen. amhākaŋ J I.221; II.159 & asmākaŋ Sn p. 106. -- acc. amhe J I.222; II.415 & asme J III.359. -- instr. amhehi J I.150; II.417 & asmābhi ThA 153 (Ap. 132). -- loc. amhesu J I.222. <-> The enclitic form for the pl. is no (for acc. dat & gen.): see under vayaŋ.
--kāra selfishness, egotism, arrogance (see also mamaŋkāra) M III.18, 32; S II.253; III.80, 136, 169 sq.; IV.41, 197, 202; A I.132 sq.; III.444; Ud 70; Nett 127, and freq. passim.
Ahaha [onomat. after exclamation ahahā: see aha1] 1. exclamation of woe J III.450 (ahahā in metre). -- 2. (nt.) N. of a certain division of Purgatory (Niraya), lit. oh woe! A V.173 = Sn p. 126.
Ahāsa [a + hāsa, cp. Sk. ahāsa & aharṣa] absence of exultancy, modesty J III.466 (= an--ubbillāvitattaŋ C.). Ahāsi 3rd sg. aor. of harati (q. v.).
Ahi [Vedic ahi, with Av. aži perhaps to Lat. anguis etc., see Walde Lat. Wtb. s. v.] a snake Vin II.109; D I.77; S IV.198; A III.306 sq.; IV.320; V.289; Nd1 484; Vism 345 (+ kukkura etc.); VvA 100; PvA 144.
--kuṇapa the carcase of a snake Vin III.68 = M I.73 = A IV.377. --gāha a snake catcher or trainer J VI.192. --guṇṭhika (? reading uncertain, we find as vv. ll. °guṇd̤ika, °guṇṭika & °kuṇd̤ika; the BSk. paraphrase is °tuṇd̤ika Divy 497. In view of this uncertainty we are unable to pronounce a safe etymology; it is in all probability a dialectical; may be Non--Aryan, word. See also under kuṇd̤ika & guṇṭhika & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1886, 153) a snake charmer J I.370 (°guṇd̤°); II.267; III.348 (°guṇd̤°); IV.456 (T. °guṇṭ; v. l. BB °kuṇd̤°) 308 (T. °kuṇd̤°, v. l. SS °guṇṭh°), 456 (T. °guṇṭ°; v. l. BB °kuṇd̤); VI.171 (T. °guṇd̤°; v. l. BB °kuṇd̤°); Miln 23, 305. --chattaka (nt.) "a snake's parasol", a mushroom D III.87; J II.95; Ud 81 (C. on VIII.5, 1). --tuṇd̤ika = °guṇṭhika Vism 304, 500. --peta a Peta in form of a snake DhA II.63. --mekhalā "snake--girdle", i. e. outfit or appearance of
a snake DhA I.139. --vātaka (--roga) N. of a certain disease ("snakewind--sickness") Vin I.78; J II.79; IV.200; DhA I.169, 187, 231; III.437. --vijjā "snake--craft", i. e. fortune--telling or sorcery by means of snakes D I.9 (= sappa--daṭṭhatikicchana--vijjā cɔ eva sappɔ avhāyana--vijjā ea "the art of healing snake bites as well as the invocation of snakes (for magic purposes)" DA I.93).

Ahiŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ahiŋsā] not injuring others, harmless, humane, S I.165; Th 1, 879; Dh 225; J IV.447. Ahiŋsā (f.) [a + hiŋsā] not hurting, humanity, kindness D III.147; A I.151; Dh 261, 270; J IV.71; Miln 402.
Ahita (adj.--n.) [a + hita] not good or friendly, harmful, bad; unkindliness D III.246; Dh 163; Sn 665, 692; Miln 199 (°kāma).
Ahirika & Ahirīka (adj.) [fr. a + hirī] shameless, unscrupulous D III.212, 252, 282; A II.219; Dh 244; Sn 133 (°īka); It 27 (°īka); Pug 19 (also nt. unscrupulousness); Dhs 365; Nett 39, 126; DhA III.352.
Ahīnindriya see discussed under abhinindriya.
Ahuvāsiŋ 1st sg. pret. of hotī (q. v.) I was Vv 826 (= ahosiŋ VvA 321).
Ahuhāliya (nt.) [onomat.] a hoarse & loud laugh J III.223 (= danta--vidaŋsaka--mahā--hasita C.).
Ahe (indecl.) [= aho, cp. aha1] exclamation of surprise or bewilderment: alas! woe etc., perhaps in cpd. ahevana a dense forest (lit. oh! this forest, alas! the forest (i. e. how big it is) J V.63 (uttamāhevanandaho, if reading is correct, which is not beyond doubt. C. on p. 64 expls. as "ahevanaŋ vuccati vanasaṇd̤o").
Aho (indecl.) [Sk. aho, for etym. see aha1] exclamation of surprise, astonishment or consternation: yea, indeed, well; I say! for sure! VvA 103 (aho ti acchariyɔ atthena nipāto); J I.88 (aho acchariyaŋ aho abbhutaŋ), 140. Usually combd. with similar emphatic particles, e. g. aho vata DhA II.85; PvA 131 (= sādhu vata); aho vata re D I. 107; Pv II.94 5. Cp. ahe.
Ahosi--kamma (nt.) an act or thought whose kamma has no longer any potential force: Cpd. 145. At p. 45 ahosikakamma is said to be a kamma inhibited by a more powerful one. See Buddhaghosa in Vism. Chap. XIX.

Ā1 (indecl.) [Vedic ā, prep. with acc., loc., abl., meaning "to, towards", & also "from". Orig. an emphatic--deictic part. (Idg.
*ē) = Gr. h)_ surely, really; Ohg. --ā etc., increment of a (Idg. *e), as in Sk. a--sau; Gr. e\kei_ (cp. a3), see Brugmann, Kurze Vergl. Gr. 464, 465] a frequent prefix, used as well--defined simple base--prefix (with rootderivations), but not as modification (i. e. first part of a double prefix cpd. like sam--ā--dhi) except in one case ā--ni--saŋsa (which is doubtful & of diff. origin, viz. from combn. āsaŋsa--nisaŋsa, see below 3b). It denotes either touch (contact) or a personal (close) relation to the object (ā ti anussaraṇɔ atthe nipāto PvA 165), or the aim of the action expressed in the verb. -- (1.) As prep. c. abl. only in J in meaning "up to, until, about, near" J VI.192 (ā sahassehi = yāva s. C.), prob. a late development. As pref. in meaning "forth, out, to,
towards, at, on" in foll. applications: -- (a) aim in general or touch in particular (lit.), e. g. ākad̤d̤hati pull to, along or up; °kāsa shining forth; °koṭeti knock at; °gacchati go towards; °camati rinse over; °neti bring towards, ad--duce; °bhā shining forth; °bhujati bend in; °masati touch at; °yata stretched out; °rabhati at--tempt; °rohana a--scending; °laya hanging on; °loketi look at; °vattati ad--vert; °vahati bring to; °vāsa dwelling at; °sādeti touch; °sīdati sit by; °hanati strike at. -- (b) in reflexive function: close relation to subject or person actively concerned, e. g. ādāti take on or up (to oneself); °dāsa looking at, mirror; °dhāra support; °nandati rejoice; °nisaŋsa subjective gain; °bādha being affected; °modita pleased; °rakkha guarding; °rādhita satisfied; °rāma (personal) delight in; °lingati embrace (to oneself); °hāra taking to (oneself). -- (c) in transitive function: close relation to the object passively concerned, e. g. āghātana killing; °carati indulge in; °cikkhati point ont, explain; °jīva living on; °ṇāpeti give an order to somebody; °disati point out to some one; °bhindati cut; °manteti ad--dress; °yācati pray to; °roceti speak to; siñcati besprinkle; °sevati indulge in. -- (d) out of meaning (a) develops that of an intensive--frequentative prefix in sense of "all--round, completely, very much", e. g. ākiṇṇa strewn all over, °kula mixed up; °dhuta moved about; °rāva shouting out or

very much; °luḷati move about; °hiṇd̤ati roam about. -- 2. Affinities. Closely related in meaning and often interchanging are the foll. prep. (prefixes): anu (°bhati), abhi (°saŋsati), pa (°tapati), paṭi (°kankhati) in meaning 1 a--c; and vi (°kirati, °ghāta, °cameti, °lepa, °lopa), sam (°tapati, °dassati) in meaning 1 d. See also 3b. -- 3. Combinations: (a) Intensifying combns. of other modifying prefixes with ā as base: anu + ā (anvā--gacchati, °disati, °maddati, °rohati, °visati, °sanna, °hata), paṭi + ā (paccā--janati, °ttharati, °dāti, °savati), pari + ā (pariyā--ñāta, °dāti, °pajjati, °harati), sam + ā (samā--disati, °dāna, °dhi, °pajjati, °rabhati). -- (b) Contrast--combns. with other pref. in a double cpd. of noun, adj. or verb (cp. above 2) in meaning of "up & down, in & out, to & fro"; ā + ni: āvedhika--nibbedhika, āsaŋsa--nisaŋsa (contracted to ānisaŋsa), āsevita--nisevita; ā + pa: assasatipassasati (where both terms are semantically alike; in exegesis however they have been differentiated in a way which looks like a distortion of the original meaning, viz. assasati is taken as "breathing out", passasati as "breathing in": see Vism 271), assāsa--passāsa, āmoditapamodita, āhuna--pāhuna, āhuneyya--pāhuneyya; ā + paccā:
ākoṭita--paccākoṭita; ā + pari: ākad̤d̤hana--parikad̤d̤hana, āsankita--parisankita; ā + vi: ālokita--vilokita, āvāha--vivāha, āveṭhana--viniveṭhana; a + sam: allāpa--sallāpa: ā + samā: āciṇṇa--samāciṇṇa. -- 4. Before double consonants ā is shortened to a and words containing ā in this form are to be found under a°, e. g. akkamaṇa, akkhitta, acchādeti, aññāta, appoṭeti, allāpa, assāda.
Ā°2 guṇa or increment of a° in connection with such suffixes as --ya, --iya, --itta. So in āyasakya fr. ayasaka; āruppa from arūpa;
ārogya fr. aroga; ālasiya fr. alasa; ādhipacca fr. adhipati; ābhidosika fr. abhidosa etc.
Ā°3 of various other origins (guṇa e. g. of ṛ or lengthening of ordinary root a°), rare, as ālinda (for alinda), āsabha (fr. usabha). Ā°4
Ā°4 infix in repetition--cpds. denoting accumulation or variety (by contrast with the opposite, cp. ā1 3b), constitutes a guṇa-- or increment--form of neg. pref. a (see a2), as in foll.: phalâphala all sorts of fruit (lit. what is fruit & not fruit) freq. in Jātakas, e. g. I.416; II.160; III.127; IV.220, 307, 449; V.313; VI.520; kāraṇâkāraṇāni all sorts of duties J VI.333; DhA I.385; khaṇd̤âkhaṇd̤a pêle--mêle J I.114; III.256; gaṇd̤âgaṇd̤a a mass of boils DhA III.297; cirâciraŋ continually Vin IV.261; bhavâbhava all kinds of existences Sn 801, cp. Nd1 109; Nd2 664; Th 1, 784 (°esu = mahant--âmahantesu bh. C., see
Brethren 305); rūpârūpa the whole aggregate ThA 285; etc.
Ākankhati [ā + kānkṣ, cp. kankhati] to wish for, think of, desire; intend, plan, design Vin II.244 (°amāna); D I.78, 176;
S I.46; Sn 569 (°amāna); Sn p. 102 (= icchati SnA 436); DhA I.29; SnA 229; VvA 149; PvA 229. Ākankhā f. [fr. ā + kānkṣ] longing, wish; as adj. at Th 1, 1030.
Ākad̤d̤hati [ā + kad̤d̤hati] to pull along, pull to (oneself), drag or draw out, pull up Vin II.325 (Bdhgh. for apakassati, see under apakāsati); IV.219; J I.172, 192, 417; Miln 102, 135; ThA 117 (°eti); VvA 226; PvA 68. <-> Pass. ākad̤d̤hiyati J
II.122 (°amāna--locana with eyes drawn away or attracted); Miln 102; Vism 163; VvA 207 (°amāna--hadaya with torn heart). -- pp. ākad̤d̤hita.
Ākad̤d̤hana (nt.) [fr. ākad̤d̤hati] drawing away or to, pulling out, distraction VvA 212 (°parikad̤d̤hana pulling about); DhsA 363; Miln 154 (°parikad̤d̤hana), 352. -- As f. Vin III.121.
Ākad̤d̤hita [pp. of akad̤d̤heti] pulled out, dragged along; upset, overthrown J III.256 (= akkhitta2).
Ākantana (?) a possible reading, for the dürakantana of the text at Th 1, 1123, for which we might read durākantana.

Ākappa [cp. Sk. ākalpa ā + kappa] 1. attire, appearance, Vin I.44 (an°) = II.213; J I.505. -- 2. deportment Dhs 713 (ā° gamanādi--ākāro DhsA 321).
--sampanna, suitably attired, well dressed, A III.78; J IV.542; an° sampanna, ill dressed, J I.420. Ākampita [pp. of ākampeti, Caus. of ā + kamp] shaking, trembling Miln 154 (°hadaya).
Ākara [cp. Sk. ākara] a mine, usually in cpd. ratan--ākara a mine of jewels Th 1, 1049; J II.414; VI. 459; Dpvs I.18. -- Cp. also Miln 356; VvA 13.
Ākassati [ā + kassati] to draw along, draw after, plough, cultivate Nd1 428.
Ākāra [a + karoti, kṛ] "the (way of) making", i. e. (1) state, condition J I.237 (avasan° condition of inhabitability); II.154 (patan° state of falling, labile equilibrium), cp. paṇṇ°. -- (2) property, quality, attribute D I.76 (anāvila sabb°--sampanna endowed with all good qualities, of a jewel); II.157 (°varûpeta); J II.352 (sabb° paripuṇṇa altogether perfect in qualities). -- (3) sign, appearance, form, D I.175; J I.266 (chātak° sign of hunger); Miln 24 (°ena by the sign of . .); VvA 27 (therassa ā. form of the Th.); PvA 90, 283 (rañño ā. the king's person); Sdhp 363. -- (4) way, mode, manner, sa--ākāra in all their modes D I.13 = 82 = III.111; J I.266 (āgaman° the mode of his coming). Esp. in instr. sg. & pl. with num. or pron. (in this way, in two ways etc.): chahɔākārehi in a sixfold manner Nd2 680 (cp. kāraṇehi in same sense); Nett 73, 74 (dvādasahɔākārehi); Vism 613 (navahɔākārehi indriyāni tikkhāni bhavanti); PvA 64 (yenɔākārena āgato tenɔākārena gato as he came so he went), 99 (id.). <-> (5) reason, ground, account D I.138, 139; Nett 4, 8 sq., 38; DhA I.14; KhA 100 (in expln. of evaŋ). In this meaning freq. with dass (dasseti, dassana, nidassana etc.) in commentary style "what is meant by", the (statement of) reason why or of, notion, idea PvA 26 (dātabb°dassana), 27 (thoman°--dassana), 75 (kāruññ °ŋ dassesi), 121 (pucchan°--nidassanaŋ what has been asked); SnA 135 (°nidassana).
--parivitakka study of conditions, careful consideration, examination of reasons S II.115; IV.138; A II.191 = Nd2 151. Ākāraka (nt.) [ākāra + ka] appearance; reason, manner (cp. ākāra4) J I.269 (ākārakena = kāraṇena C.).
Ākāravant (adj.) [fr. ākāra] having a reason, reasonable, founded M I.401 (saddhā).
Ākāsa1 [Sk. ākāśa fr. ā + kāś, lit. shining forth, i. e. the illuminated space] air, sky, atmosphere; space. On the concept see Cpd. 5, 16, 226. On a fanciful etym. of ākāsa (fr. ā + kassati of kṛṣ) at DhsA 325 see Dhs trsl. 178. <-> D I.55 (°ŋ indriyāni sankamanti the sense--faculties pass into space); III.224, 253, 262, 265; S III.207; IV.218; V.49, 264; J I.253; II.353; III.52, 188; IV.154; VI.126; Sn 944, 1065; Nd1 428; Pv II.118; SnA 110, 152; PvA 93; Sdhp 42, 464. --ākāsena gacchati to go through the air PvA 75 (āgacch°), 103, 105, 162; °ena carati id. J II.103; °e gacchati id. PvA 65 (cando). -- Formula "ananto ākāso" freq.;
e. g. at D I.183; A II.184; IV. 40, 410 sq.; V.345.
--anta "the end of the sky", the sky, the air (on °anta see anta1 4) J VI.89. --ānañca (or ânañca) the infinity ef space, in cpd. °āyatana the sphere or plane of the infinity of space, the "space--infinity--plane", the sphere of unbounded space. The consciousness of this sphere forms the first one of the 4 (or 6) higher attainments or recognitions of the mind, standing beyond the fourth jhāna, viz. (1) ākās°, (2) viññāṇɔānañc--āyatana (3) ākiñcaññ°, (4) nɔeva saññānâsaññ°, (5) nirodha, (6) phala. -- D I.34, 183; II.70, 112, 156; III.224, 262 sq.; M I.41, 159.; III. 27, 44; S V.119; Ps I.36; Dhs 205, 501, 579, 1418; Nett 26, 39 ;
Vism 326, 340, 453; DA I.120 (see Nd2 under ākāsa; Dhs 265 sq.; Dhs trsl. 71). As classed with jhāna see also Nd2 672 (sādhu--vihārin). --kasiṇa one of the kasiṇɔāyatanas (see under kasiṇa) D III.268; A I.41. --gangā N. of the celestial river J I.95; III.344. --gamana going through the air (as a trick of elephants) Miln 201. --cārika walking through the air J II.103. --cārin = °cārika VvA 6. --ṭṭha living in the sky (of devatā) Bu I.29; Miln 181, 285; KhA 120; SnA 476. --tala upper story, terrace on the top of a palace SnA 87. --dhātu the element of space D III.247; M I.423; III.31; A I.176; III.34; Dhs 638.

Ākāsa2 (nt.?) a game, playing chess ʻin the airʼ (sans voir) Vin II.10 = D I.6 (= aṭṭhapada--dasapadesu viya ākāse yeva kiḷanaŋ DA I.85).
Ākāsaka (adj.) [ākāsa + ka] being in or belonging to the air or sky J VI.124. Ākāsati [fr. ākāsa1] to shine J VI.89.
Ākiñcañña (nt.) [abstr. fr. akiñcana] state of having nothing, absence of (any) possessions; nothingness (the latter as philosophical t. t.; cp. below °āyatana & see Dhs trsl. 74). -- Sn 976, 1070, 1115 (°sambhava, cp. Nd2 116); Th 2, 341 (= akiñcanabhāva ThA 240; trsl. "cherish no wordly wishes whatsoëer"); Nd2 115, see ākāsa; Miln 342.
--āyatana realm or sphere of nothingness (cp. ākāsa°) D I.35, 184; II.156; III.224, 253, 262 sq.; M I.41, 165; II.254, 263; III.28, 44, S IV.217; A I.268; IV.40, 401; Ps I.36; Nett 26, 39; Vism 333. See also jhāna & vimokkha.
Ākiṇṇa [pp. of ākirati] 1. strewn over, beset with, crowded, full of, dense, rich in (°--) Vin III.130 (°loma with dense hair); S I.204 (°kammanta "in motley tasks engaged"); IV.37 (gāmanto ā. bhikkhūhi etc.); A III.104 (°vihāro); IV.4; V.15 (an° C. for appakiṇṇa); Sn 408 (°varalakkhaṇa = vipula--varalakkh° SnA 383); Pv II.124 (nānā--dijagaṇ° = āyutta PvA 157); Pug 31; PvA 32 (= parikiṇṇa); Sdhp 595. -- Freq. in idiomatic phrase describing a flourishing city "iddha phīta bahujana ākiṇṇa--manussa", e. g. D I.211; II.147 (°yakkha for °manussa; full of yakkhas, i. e. under their protection); A III.215; cp. Miln 2 (°jana--manussa). -- 2. (uncertain whether to be taken as above 1 or as equal to avakiṇṇa fr. avakirati 2) dejected, base, vile, ruthless S I.205 = J III.309 = 539 = SnA 383. At K. S. 261, Mrs. Rh. D. translates "ruthless" & quotes C. as implying twofold exegesis of (a) impure, and (b) hard, ruthless. It is interesting to notice that Bdhgh. explains the same verse differently at SnA 383, viz. by vipula°, as above under Sn 408, & takes ākiṇṇaludda as vipulaludda, i. e. beset with cruelty, very or intensely cruel, thus referring it to ākiṇṇa 1.
Ākirati [ā + kirati] to strew over, scatter, sprinkle, disperse, fill, heap Sn 665; Dh 313; Pv II.49 (dānaŋ vipulaŋ ākiri = vippakirati PvA 92); Miln 175, 238, 323 (imper. ākirāhi); Sn 383. -- pp. ākiṇṇa.
Ākiritatta (nt.) [ākirita + tta; abstr. fr. ākirita, pp. of ākirati Caus.] the fact or state of being filled or heaped with Miln 173 (sakataŋ dhaññassa ā).
Ākilāyati v. l. at KhA 66 for āgilāyati.
Ākucca (or °ā?) [etym. unknown, prob. non--Aryan] an iguana J VI.538 (C. godhā; gloss amattɔākuccā).
Ākurati [onomat. to sound--root *kur = *kor as in Lat. cornix, corvus etc. See gala note 2 B and cp. kukkuṭa kokila,
khaṭa etc., all words expressing a rasping noise in the throat. The attempts at etym. by Trenckner (Miln p. 425 as Denom. of ākula) & Morris (J.P.T.S. 1886, 154 as contr. Denom. of ankura "intumescence", thus meaning "to swell") are hardly correct] to be hoarse Miln 152 (kaṇṭho ākurati).
Ākula (adj.) [ā + *kul of which Sk.--P. kula, to Idg *qṷel to turn round, cp. also cakka & carati; lit. meaning "revolving quickly", & so "confused"] entangled, confused, upset, twisted, bewildered J I.123 (salākaggaŋ °ŋ karoti to upset or disturb); Vv 849 (andha°); PvA 287 (an° clear). Often reduplicated as ākulākula thoroughly confused Miln 117, 220; PvA 56;
ākula--pākula Ud 5 (so read for akkula--pakkula); ākula--samākula J VI.270. <-> On phrase tantākula--jātā gulā--guṇṭhika--jātā see guḷā.
Ākulaka (adj.) [fr. ākula] entangled D II.55 (tant° for the usual tantākula, as given under guḷā).
Ākulanīya (adj.) [grd. of ā + *kulāyati, Denom. of kula] in an° not to be confounded or upset PvA 118.
Ākulī (--puppha) at KhA 60 (milāta°) read (according to Index p. 870) as milāta--bakula--puppha. Vism 260 (id. p.)

however reads ākulī--puppha "tangle--flower" (?), cp. Ud 5, gāthā 7 bakkula, which is preferably to be read as pākula. Ākoṭana1
Ākoṭana1 (nt.) [fr. ākoṭeti] beating on, knocking M I.385; Miln 63, 306; DhsA 144.
Ākoṭana2 (adj.) [= ākoṭana1] beating, driving, inciting, urging J VI.253 (f. ākoṭanī of paññā, expld. by "nivāraṇapatoda--laṭṭhi viya paññā koṭinī hoti" p. 254).
Ākoṭita [pp. of ākoṭeti] -- 1. beaten, touched, knocked against J I.303; Miln 62 (of a gong). -- 2. pressed, beaten down (tight), flattened, in phrase ākoṭita--paccākoṭita flattened & pressed all round (of the cīvara) S II. 281; DhA I.37.
Ākoṭeti [a + koṭṭeti, Sk. kuṭṭayati; BSk. ākoṭayati e. g. Divy 117 dvāraŋ trir ā°, Cowell "break" (?); Av. Ś. Index p. 222 s. v.]
-- 1. to beat down, pound, stamp J I.264. <-> 2. to beat, knock, thrash Vin II.217; J II.274; PvA 55 (aññamaññaŋ); Sdhp 159. -- 3. Esp. with ref. to knocking at the door, in phrases aggaḷaŋ ākoṭeti to beat on the bolt D I.89; A IV.359; V.65; DA I.252 (cp. aggaḷa); dvāraŋ ā. J V 217; DhA II.145; or simply ākoṭeti Vv 8117 (ākoṭayitvāna = appoṭetvā VvA 316). -- 4. (intrs.) to knock against anything J I.239. -- pp. ākoṭita (q. v.). Caus. II. ākoṭapeti J III.361.
Ākhu [Vedic ākhu, fr. ā + khan, lit. the digger in, i. e. a mole; but given as rat or mouse by Halāyudha] a mouse or rat Pgdp 10.
Āgacchati [ā + gacchati, gam] to come to or towards, approach, go back, arive etc.
I. Forms (same arrangement as under gacchati): (1) √gacch: pres. āgacchati D I.161; J II.153; Pv IV.151; fut. āgacchissati J
III.53; aor. āgacchi Pv II.133; PvA 64. -- (2) √gam: aor. āgamāsi PvA 81, āgamā D I.108; J III.128, and pl. āgamiŋsu J I.118; fut. āgamissati VvA 3; PvA 122; ger. āgamma (q. v.) & āgantvā J I.151; Miln 14; Caus. āgameti (q. v.). -- (3) √gā: aor. āgā Sn 841; Pv I.123 (= āgacchi PvA 64). -- pp. āgata (q. v.).
II. Mcanings: (1) to come to, approach, arrive D I.108; Pv I.113; II.133; Miln 14; to return, to come back (cp. āgata) PvA 81, 122. -- (2) to come into, to result, deserve (cp. āgama2) D I.161 (gārayhaŋ ṭhānaŋ deserve blame, come to be blamed); Pv IV.151 (get to, be a profit to = upakappati PvA 241). -- (3) to come by, to come out to (be understood as), to refer or be referred to, to be meant or understood (cp. āgata 3 & āgama 3) J I.118 (tīṇi piṭakāni āgamiŋsu); SnA 321; VvA 3. See also āgamma.
Āgata [pp. of āgacchati] (1) come, arrived Miln 18 (°kāraṇa the reason of his coming); VvA 78 (°ṭṭhāna); PvA 81 (kiŋ āgatɔ attha why have you come here) come by, got attained (°--) A II.110 = Pug 48 (°visa); Mhvs XIV. 28 (°phala = anāgānuphala) --āgatɔāgatā (pl.) people coming & going, passers by, all comers PvA 39, 78, 129; VvA 190 (Ep. of sangha). --svɔāgata "wel--come", greeted, hailed; nt. welcome, hail Th 2, 337; Pv IV.315, opp. durāgata not liked, unwelcome, A II.117, 143, 153; III. 163; Th 2, 337. -- (2) come down, handed down (by memory, said of texts) D I.88; DhA II.35; KhA 229; VvA 30; āgatāgamo, one to whom the āgama, or the āgamas, have been handed down, Vin I.127, 337; II 8; IV.158; A II.147; Miln 19, 21. -- (3) anāgata not come yet, i. e. future; usually in combn. with atīta (past) & paccuppanna (present): see atīta and anāgata.
Āgati (f.) [ā + gati] coming, coming back, return S III.53; J II.172. Usually opp. to gati going away. Used in spe<->
cial sense of rebirth and re--death in the course of saŋsāra. Thus in āgati gati cuti upapatti D I.162; A III.54 sq., 60 sq., 74; cp. also S II.67; Pv II.922 (gatiŋ āgatiŋ vā).
Āgada (m.) & Āgadana (nt.) [ā + gad to speak] a word; talk, speech DA I.66 (= vacana).
Āgantar [N. ag. fr. āgacchati] one who is coming or going to come A I.63; II.159; It 4, 95 (nom. āgantā only one MS, all

others āgantvā). an° A I.64; II.160.
Āgantu (adj.) [Sk. āgantu] -- 1. occasional, incidental J VI.358. -- 2. an occasional arrival, a new comer, stranger J VI.529
(= āgantuka--jana C.); ThA 16.
Āgantuka (adj.--n.) [āgantu + ka; cp. BSk. āgantuka in same meaning as P. viz. āgantukā bhikṣavaḥ Av. Ś I.87, 286; Divy
50] -- 1. coming, arriving, new comer, guest, stranger, esp. a newly arrived bhikkhu; a visitor (opp. gamika one who goes away) Vin I.132, 167; II.170; III. 65, 181; IV.24, A I.10; III.41, 366; J VI.333; Ud 25; DhA II.54, 74; VvA 24; PvA 54. -- 2. adventitions, incidental (= āgantu1) Miln 304 (of megha & roga). <-> 3. accessory, superimposed, added Vism 195.
--bhatta food given to a guest, meal for a visitor Vin I.292 (opp. gamika°); II.16.
Āgama [fr. ā + gam] -- 1. coming, approach, result, D I.53 (āgamanaŋ pavattatī ti DA I.160; cp. Sdhp 249 dukkh°). -- 2.
that which one goes by, resource, reference, source of reference, text, Scripture, Canon; thus a designation of(?) the Pātimokkha, Vin II.95 = 249, or of the Four Nikāyas, DA I.1, 2 (dīgh°). A def. at Vism 442 runs "antamaso opamma--vagga--mattassa pi buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇaṇaŋ". See also āgata 2, for phrase āgatɔāgama, handed down in the Canon, Vin loc. cit. Svāgamo, versed in the doctrine, Pv IV.133 (sv° = suṭṭhu āgatɔāgamo, PvA 230); Miln 215. BSk. in same use and meaning, e. g. Divy 17, 333, āgamāni = the Four Nikāyas. -- 3. rule, practice, discipline, obedience, Sn 834 (āgamā parivitakkaŋ), cp. Davs V.22 (takk°, discipline of right thought) Sdhp 224 (āgamato, in obedience to). <-> 4. meaning, understanding, KhA 107 (vaṇṇ°). -- 5. repayment (of a debt) J. VI.245. -- 6. as gram. tt. "augment", a consonant or syllable added or inserted SnA 23 (sa--kārɔāgama).
Āgamana (nt.) [fr. āgacchati, Sk. same] oncoming, arrival, approach A III.172; DA I.160; PvA 4, 81; Sdhp 224, 356. an° not coming or returning J I.203, 264.
Āgameti [caus of agacchati] to cause somebody or something to come to one, i. e. (1) to wait, to stay Vin II. 166, 182, 212;
D I.112, 113; S IV.291; PvA 4, 55. <-> (2) to wait for, to welcome Vin II.128 (ppr. āgamayamāna); M I.161 (id.) J I.69 (id. + kālaŋ).
Āgamma (adv.) [orig. ger. of āgacchati, q. v. under I.2 for form & under II.3 for meaning. BSk. āgamya in meaning after the Pāli form, e. g. Divy 95, 405 (with gen.); Av. Ś I.85, 210 etc.; M Vastu I.243, 313]. With reference to (c. acc.), owing to, relating to; by means of, thanks to. In meaning nearly synonymous with ārabbha, sandhāya & paṭicca (see K. S. 318 s. v.) D I.229; It 71; J I.50; VI.424; Kh VIII.14 (= nissāya KhA 229); PvA 5, 21 etc.
Āgāmitā found only in neg. form anāgāmitā.
Āgāmin (adj. n.) [ā + gāmin] returning, one who returns, esp. one who returns to another form of life in saŋsāra (cp.
āgati), one who is liable to rebirth A I.63; II.159; It 95. See anāgāmin. Āgāra (--°) see agāra.
Āgāraka & °ika (adj.--n.) (--°) [cp. BSk. āgārika Divy 275, & agārika] belonging to the house, viz. (1) having control
over the house, keeping, surveying, in cpds. koṭṭh° possessor or keeper of a storehouse Vin I.209; bandhan° prison--keeper A II.207; bhaṇd̤° keeper of wares, treasurer PvA 2 (see also bhaṇd̤°). -- (2) being in the house, sharing (the house), companion S III.190 (paŋsv° playmate).
Āgāḷha (adj.) (ā + gāḷha 1; cp. Sk. samāgād̤haŋ] strong, hard, harsh, rough (of speech), usually in instr. as adv. āgāḷhena roughly, harshly a I.283, 295; Pug 32 (so to be read for agāḷhena, although Pug A 215 has a°, but expls. by atigāḷhena vacanena); instr. f. āgāḷhāya Vin v. 122 (ceteyya; Bdhgh. on p. 230 reads āgaḷāya and expls. by daḷhabhāvāya). See also Nett 77 (āgāḷhā paṭipadā a rough path), 95 (id.; v. l. agāḷhā).

Āgilāyati [ā + gilāyati; Sk. glāyati, cp. gilāna] to be wearied, exhausted or tired, to ache, to become weak or faint Vin II.200; D III.209; M I.354; S IV.184; KhA 66 (hadavaŋ ā.). Cp. āyamati.
Āgu (nt.) [for Vedic āgas nt.] guilt, offence, S I.123; A III.346; Sn 522 = Nd2 337 (in expln. of nāga as āguŋ na karotī ti nāgo); Nd1 201. Note. A reconstructed āgasa is found at Sdhp 294 in cpd. akatāgasa not having committed sin.
--cārin one who does evil, D II.339; M II.88; III.163; S II.100, 128; A II.240; Miln 110.
Āghāta [Sk. āghāta only in lit. meaning of striking, killing, but cp. BSk. āghāta in meaning "hurtfulness" at M Vastu I.79;
Av. Ś II.129; cp. ghāta & ghāteti] anger, ill--will, hatred, malice D I.3, 31; III.72 sq.; S I.179; J I.113; Dhs 1060, 1231; Vbh 167, 362, 389; Miln 136; Vism 306; DA I.52; VvA 67; PvA 178. --anāghāta freedom from ill will Vin II.249; A V.80.
--paṭivinaya repression of ill--will; the usual enumn. of ā--° paṭivinayā comprises nine, for which see D III.262, 289; Vin V.137; A IV.408; besides this there are sets of five at A III.185 sq.; SnA 10, 11, and one of ten at Vin V.138. --vatthu occasion of ill--will; closely connected with °paṭivinaya & like that enumd. in sets of nine (Vin V.137; A IV.408; Ps I.130; J III.291, 404; V.149; Vbh 389; Nett 23; SnA 12), and of ten (Vin V.138; A V. 150; Ps I.130; Vbh 391).
Āghātana (nt.) [ā + ghāta(na), cp. āghata which has changed its meaning] -- 1. slaying, striking, destroying, killing Th 1, 418, 711; death D I.31 (= maraṇa DA I.119). <-> 2. shambles, slaughter--house Vin I.182 (gav°); A IV.138; J VI.113. -- 3. place of execution Vin III.151; J I.326, 439; III.59; Miln 110; DhA IV.52; PvA 4, 5.
Āghāteti [Denom. fr. āghāta, in form = ā + ghāteti, but diff. in meaning] only in phrase cittaŋ a. (with loc.) to incite one's heart to hatred against, to obdurate one's heart. Sdhp. 126 = S I.151 = A V.172.
Ācamati [ā + cam] to take in water, to resorb, to rinse J III.297; Miln 152, 262 (+ dhamati). -- Caus. I. ācamcti (a) to
purge, rinse one's mouth Vin II.142; M II. 112; A III.337; Pv IV.1Q3 (ācamayitvā = mukhaŋ vikkhāletvā PvA 241); Miln 152 (°ayamāna). -- (b) to wash off, clean oneself after evacuation Vin II.221. -- Caus. II. ācamāpeti to cause somebody to rinse himself J VI.8.
Ācamana (nt.) [ā + camana of cam] rinsing, washing with water, used (a) for the mouth D I.12 (= udakena mukhasiddhi--karaṇa DA I.98); (b) after evacuation J III 486.
--kumbhī water--pitcher used for rinsing Vin I.49, 52; II.142, 210, 222. --pādukā slippers worn when rinsing Vin I.190; II.142, 222. --sarāvaka a saucer for rinsing Vin II.142, 221.
Ācamā (f.) [fr. ā + cam] absorption, resorption Nd1 429 (on Sn 945, which both in T. and in SnA reads ājava; expld. by taṇhā in Nidd.). Note. Index to SnA (Pj III) has ācāma.
Ācaya [ā + caya] heaping up, accumulation, collection, mass (opp. apacaya). See on term Dhs trsl. 195 & Cpd. 251, 252.
-- S II.94 (kāyassa ācayo pi apacayo pi); A IV.280 = Vin II.259 (opp. apacaya); Dhs 642, 685; Vbh 319, 326, 330; Vism 449; DhA II.25.
--gāmin making for piling up (of rebirth) A V.243, 276; Dhs 584, 1013, 1397; Kvu 357.
Ācarati [ā + aarati] -- 1. to practice, perform, indulge in Vin I.56; II.118; Sn 327 (ācare dhamma--sandosa--vādaŋ), 401; Miln 171, 257 (pāpaŋ). Cp. pp. ācarita in BSk. e. g. Av. S I.124, 153, 213 in same meaning. -- pp. āciṇṇa. -- 2. to step upon, pass through J V.153.
Ācarin (adj.--n.) [fr. ā + car] treaching, f. ācarinī a female teacher Vin IV.227 (in contrast to gaṇa & in same sense as ācariya m. at Vin IV.130), 317 (id.).
Ācariya [fr. ā + car] a teacher (almost syn. with upajjhāya) Vin I.60, 61, 119 (°upajjhāya); II.231; IV.130 (gaṇo vā ācariyo
a meeting of the bhikkhus or a single teacher, cp. f. ācarinī); D I.103, 116 (gaṇ°) 238 (sattamâcariyamahāyuga seventh age of

great teachers); III.189 sq.; M III.115; S I.68 (gaṇ°), 177; IV.176 (yogg°); A I.132 (pubb°); Sn 595; Nd1 350 (upajjhāya vā āc°); J II.100, 411; IV.91; V.501; Pv IV.323, 351 (= ācāra--samācāra--sikkhāpaka PvA 252); Miln 201, 262 (master goldsmith?); Vism 99 sq.; KhA 12, 155; SnA 422; VvA 138. <-> For contracted form of ācariya see ācera.
--kula the clan of the teacher A II.112. --dhana a teacher's fee S I.177; A V.347. --pācariya teacher upon teacher, lit. "teacher & teacher's teacher" (see ā1 3b) D I.94, 114, 115, 238; S IV.306, 308; DA I.286; SnA 452 (= ācariyo cɔeva ācariya--ācariyo ca). --bhariyā the teacher's fee J V.457; VI.178; DhA I.253. --muṭṭhi "the teacher's fist" i. e. close--fistedness in teaching, keeping things back, D II.100; S V.153; J II.221, 250; Miln 144; SnA 180, 368. --vaŋsa the line of the teachers Miln 148. --vatta serving the teacher, service to the t. DhA I.92. --vāda traditional teaching; later as heterodox teaching, sectarian teaching (opp. theravāda orthodox doctrine) Miln 148; Dpvs V.30; Mhbv 96.
Ācariyaka [ācariya + ka, diff. from Sk. ācariyaka nt. art of teaching] a teacher Vin I.249; III.25, 41; D I.88, 119, 187; II.112; M I.514; II.32; S V.261; A II.170; IV. 310. See also sācariyaka.
Ācāma [Sk. ācāma] the scum or foam of boiling rice D I.166; M I.78; A I.295; J II.289; Pug 55; VvA 99 sq.; DhA III.325 (°kuṇd̤aka).
Ācāmeti [for ācameti? cp. Sk. ācāmayati, Caus. of ā + cam] at M II.112 in imper. ācāmehi be pleased or be thanked(?); perhaps the reading is incorrect.
Ācāra [ā + car] way of behaving, conduct, practice, esp. right conduct, good manners; adj. (--°) practising, indulging in, or
of such & such a conduct. -- Sn 280 (pāpa°); J I.106 (vipassana°); II.280 (°ariya); VI.52 (ariya°); SnA 157; PvA 12 (sīla°), 36, 67, 252; Sdhp 441. --an° bad behaviour Vin II.118 (°ŋ ācarati indulge in bad habits); DhA II.201 (°kiriyā). Cp. sam°.
--kusala versed in good manners Dh 376 (cp. DhA IV.111). --gocara pasturing in good conduct; i. e. practice of right behaviour D I.63 = It 118; M I.33; S V.187; A I.63 sq.; II.14, 39; III.113, 155, 262; IV.140, 172, 352; V.71 sq., 89, 133, 198; Vbh 244, 246 (cp. Miln 368, 370, quot. Vin III.185); Vism I.8. --vipatti failure of morality, a slip in good conduct Vin I.171.
Ācārin (adj. n.) [fr. ācāra] of good conduct, one who behaves well A I.211 (anācārī viratā l. 4 fr. bottom is better read as ācārī virato, in accordance with v. l.).
Ācikkhaka (adj. n.) [ā + cikkha + ka of cikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA I.71.
Ācikkhati [Freq. of ā + khyā, i. e. akkhāti] to tell, relate, show, describe, explain D I.110; A II 189 (atthaŋ ā to
interpret); Pug 59; DhA I.14; SnA 155; PvA 121, 164 (describe). -- imper. pres. ācikkha Sn 1097 (= brūhi Nd2 119 & 455); Pv I.109; II.81; and ācikkhāhi DhA II.27. <-> aor. ācikkhi PvA 6, 58, 61, 83. -- ācikkhati often occurs in stock phrase ācikkhati deseti paññāpeti paṭṭhapeti vivarati etc., e. g. Nd1 271; Nd2 465; Vism 163. -- attānaŋ ā. to disclose one's identity PvA 89, 100. -- pp. ācikkhita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. ācikkhāpeti to cause some body to tell DhA II.27.
Ācikkhana (adj.--nt.) [ā + cikkhana of cikkhati] telling, announcing J III.444; PvA 121.
Ācikkhita [pp. of acikkhati] shown, described, told PvA 154 (°magga), 203 (an° = anakkhāta).
Ācikkhitar [n. ag. fr. ācikkhati] one who tells or shows DhA II.107 (for pavattar).
Āciṇa [pp. of ācināti? or is it distorted from āciṇṇa?] accumulated; practised, performed Dh 121 (pāpaŋ = pāpaŋ āciṇanto karonto DhA III.16). It may also be spelt ācina.
Āciṇṇa [ā + ciṇṇa, pp. of ācarati] practiced, performed, (habitually) indulged in M I.372 (kamma, cp. Miln 226 and the expln. of āciṇṇaka kamma as "chronic karma" at Cpd. 144); S IV.419; A V.74 sq.; J I.81; DA I.91 (for aviciṇṇa at D I.8), 275; Vism 269; DhA I.37 (°samāciṇṇa thoroughly fulfilled); VvA 108; PvA 54; Sdhp 90.
--kappa ordinance or rule of right conduct or customary practice (?) Vin I.79; II.301; Dpvs IV.47; cp. V.18.

Ācita [pp. of ācināti] accumulated, collected, covered, furnished or endowed with J VI.250 (= nicita); Vv 411; DhsA 310. See also āciṇa.
Ācināti [ā + cināti] to heap up, accumulate S III.89 (v. l. ācinati); IV.73 (ppr. ācinato dukkhaŋ); DhsA 44. -- pp. ācita & āciṇa (ācina). -- Pass. ācīyati (q. v.).
[Pass. of ācināti, cp. cīyati] to be heaped up, to increase, to grow; ppr. āceyyamāna J V.6 (= ācīyanto vad̤d̤hanto C.).
Ācera is the contracted form of ācariya; is the contracted form of ācariya; only found in the Jātakas, e. g. J IV.248; VI.563.
Ācela in kañcanācela--bhūsita "adorned with golden clothes" Pv II.127 stands for cela°.
Ājañña is the contracted form of ājāniya.
Ājava see ācamā.
Ājāna (adj.) [ā + jāna from jñā] understandable, only in cpd. durājāna hard to understand S IV.127; Sn 762; J I.295, 300.
Ājānana (nt.) [ā + jānana, cp. Sk. ajñāna] learning, knowing, understanding; knowledge J I.181 (°sabhāva of the character of knowing, fit to learn); PvA 225.
Ājānāti [ā + jānāti] to understand, to know, to learn D I.189; Sn 1064 (°amāna = vijānamāna Nd2 120). As aññāti at Vism 200. -- pp. aññāta. Cp. also āṇāpeti.
(adj. n.) [cp. BSk. ājāneya & Sk. ājāti birth, good birth. Instead of its correct derivation from ā + jan (to be born, i. e.
well--born) it is by Bdhgh. connected with ā + jñā (to learn, i. e. to be trained). See for these popular etym. e. g. J I.181:
sārathissa cittarucitaŋ kāraṇaŋ ājānana--sabhāvo ājañño, and DhA IV.4: yaŋ assadamma--sārathi kāraṇaŋ kāreti tassa khippaŋ jānana<-> samatthā ājāniyā. -- The contracted form of the word is ājañña] of good race or breed; almost exclusively used to denote a thoroughbred horse (cp. assājāniya under assa3). (a) ājāniya (the more common & younger Pāli form): Sn 462, 528, 532; J
I.178, 194; Dpvs IV.26; DhA I.402; III.49; IV.4; VvA 78; PvA 216. -- (b) ājānīya: M I.445; A V.323; Dh 322 = Nd2 475. -- (c)
ǡjañña = (mostly in poetry): Sn 300 = 304; J I.181; Pv IV.154; purisājañña "a steed of man", i. e. a man of noble race) S III.91
= Th 1, 1084 = Sn 544 = VvA 9; A V.325. --anājāniya of inferior birth M I.367.
--susu the young of a noble horse, a noble foal M I. 445 (°ûpamo dhamma--pariyāyo). Ājānīyatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ājāniya] good breed PvA 214.
Ājira [= ajira with lengthened initial a] a courtyard Mhvs 35, 3.
Ājīva [ā + jīva; Sk. ājīva] livelihood, mode of living, living, subsistence, D I.54; A III.124 (parisuddha°); Sn 407 (°ŋ = parisodhayi = micchājīvaŋ hitvā sammājīvaŋ eva pavattayī SnA 382), 617; Pug 51; Vbh 107, 235; Miln 229 (bhinna°); Vism 306 (id.); DhsA 390; Sdhp 342, 375, 392. Esp. freq. in the contrast pair sammā--ājīva & micchā--ā° right mode & wrong mode of gaining a living, e. g. at S II.168 sq.; III.239; V.9; A I.271; II 53, 240, 270; IV.82; Vbh 105, 246. See also magga (ariyaṭṭhangika).
--pārisuddhi purity or propriety of livelihood Miln 336; Vism 22 sq., 44; DhA IV.111. --vipatti failure in method of gaining a living A I.270. --sampadā perfection of (right) livelihood A I.271; DA I.235.
[ājīva + ka, orig. "one finding his living" (scil. in a peculiar way); cp. BSk. ājīvika Divy 393, 427] an ascetic, one of the numerous sects of non--buddhist ascetics. On their austerities, practice & way of living see esp. DhA II.55 sq. and on the whole question A. L. Basham, Hist. & Doctrines of the Ājīvikas, 1951. -- (a) ājīvaka: Vin I.291; II.284; IV.74, 91; M I.31, 483: S

I.217; A III.276, 384; J I.81, 257, 390. -- (b) ājīvika: Vin I.8; Sn 381 (v. l. BB. °aka). --sāvaka a hearer or lay disciple of the ājīvaka ascetics Vin II 130, 165; A I.217.
Ājīvika (nt.) (or ājīvikā f.?) [fr. ājīva] sustenance of life, livelihood, living Vbh 379 (°bhaya) Miln 196 (id.); PvA 274, and in phrase ājīvikɔâpakata being deprived of a livelihood, without a living M I.463 = S III.93 (T. reads jīvikā pakatā) = It 89 (reads ājīvikā pakatā) = Miln 279.
Ājīvin (adj.--n.) [fr. ājīva] having one's livelihood, finding one's subsistence, living, leading a life of (--°) D III.64; A V.190 (lūkha°)
Āṭa [etym.? Cp. Sk. āṭi Turdus Ginginianus, see Aufrecht, Halāyudha p. 148] a kind of bird J VI.539 (= dabbimukha C.). Āṭaviya is to be read for aṭaviyo is to be read for aṭaviyo (q. v.) at J VI.55 [= Sk. āṭavika].
Āṭhapanā (f.) at Pug 18 & v. l. at Vbh 357 is to be read aṭṭhapanā (so T. at Vbh 357).
Āṇañja see ānejja.
Āṇaṇya see ānaṇya.
Āṇatti (f.) [ā + ñatti (cp. āṇāpeti), Caus. of jñā] order, command, ordinance, injunction Vin I.62; KhA 29; PvA 260; Sdhp
59, 354.
Āṇattika (adj.) [āṇatti + ka] belonging to an ordinance or command, of the nature of an injunction KhA 29.
Āṇā (f.) [Sk. ājñā, ā + jñā] order, command, authority Miln 253; DA I.289; KhA 179, 180, 194; PvA 217; Sdhp 347, 576. rājɔāṇā the king's command or authority J I.433; III.351; PvA 242. āṇaŋ deti to give an order J I.398; °ŋ pavatteti to issue an order Miln 189, cp. āṇāpavatti J III.504; IV.145.
Āṇāpaka (adj. n.) [fr. āṇāpeti] 1. (adj.) giving an order Vism 303. -- 2. (n.) one who gives or calls out orders, a town--crier, an announcer of the orders (of an authority) Miln 147.
Āṇāpana (nt.) [abstr. fr. āṇāpeti] ordering or being, ordered, command, order PvA 135.
Āṇāpeti [ā + ñāpeti, Caus. of ā + jānāti fr. jñā, cp. Sk. ājñāpayati] to give an order, to enjoin, command (with acc. of
person) J III.351; Miln 147; DhA II.82; VvA 68 (dāsiyo), 69; PvA 4, 39, 81.
Āṇi (Vedic āṇi to aṇu fine, thin, flexible, in formation an n--enlargement of Idg. *olenā, cp. Ohg. lun, Ger. lünse, Ags. lynes
= E. linch, further related to Lat. ulna elbow, Gr. w)le/nh, Ohg. elina, Ags. eln = E. el--bow. See Walde, Lāt. Wtb. under ulna & lacertus]. -- 1. the pin of a wheel--axle, a linch--pin M I.119; S II.266, 267; A II.32; Sn 654; J VI.253, 432; SnA 243; KhA 45, 50. -- 2. a peg, pin, bolt, stop (at a door) M I.119; S. II 266 (drum stick); J IV.30; VI.432, 460; Th 1, 744; Dh I.39. <-> 3. (fig.) (°--) peg--like (or secured by a peg, of a door), small, little in °colaka a small (piece of) rag Vin II.271, cp. I.205 (vaṇabandhana--colaka); °dvāra Th 1, 355; C. khuddaka--dvāra, quoted at Brethren 200, trsl. by Mrs. Rh. D. as "the towngate's sallyport" by Neumann as "Gestöck" (fastening, enclosure) āṇi--gaṇṭhikɔāhato ayopatto at Vism 108; DA I.199 is apparently a sort of brush made of four or five small pieces of flexible wood.
Ātanka [etym. uncertain; Sk. ātanka] illness, sickness, disease M I.437; S III.1; Sn 966 (°phassa, cp. Nd1 486). Freq. in cpd. appātanka freedom from illness, health (cp. appābādha) D I.204; III.166; A III.65, 103; Miln 14. -- f. abstr. appātankatā M I.124.

Ātankin (adj.) [fr. ātanka] sick, ill J V.84 (= gilāna C.).
Ātata [fr. ā + tan, pp. tata; lit. stretched, covered over] generic name for drums covered with leather on one side Dpvs
XIV.14; VvA 37 (q. v. for enumn. of musical instruments), 96.
Ātatta [ā + tatta1, pp. of ā--tapati] heated, burnt. scorched, dry J V.69 (°rūpa = sukkha--sarīra C.).
Ātapa [ā + tapa] -- 1. sun--heat Sn 52; J I.336; Dhs 617; Dpvs I.57; VvA 54; PvA 58. -- 2. glow, heat (in general) Pv I.74;
Sdhp 396. -- 3. (fig.) (cp. tapa2) ardour, zeal, exertion PvA 98 (viriyā--tapa; perhaps better to be read °ātāpa q. v.). Cp. ātappa.
--vāraṇa "warding off the sun--heat", i. e. a parasol, sun--shade Dāvs I.28; V.35. Ātapatā (f.) [abstr. of ātapa] glowing or burning state, heat Sdhp 122.
Ātapati [ā + tap] to burn J III.447.
Ātappa (nt.) [Sk. *ātāpya, fr. ātāpa] ardour, zeal, exertion D I.13; III.30 sq., 104 sq., 238 sq.; M III.210; S II.132, 196 sq.; A I.153; III.249; IV.460 sq.; V.17 sq.; Sn 1062 (= ussāha ussoḷhi thāma etc. Nd2 122); J III.447; Nd1 378; Vbh 194 (= vāyāma); DA I.104.
Ātāpa [ā + tāpa fr. tap; cp. tāpeti] glow, heat; fig. ardour, keen endeavour, or perhaps better "torturing, mortifica<-> tion" Miln 313 (cittassa ātāpo paritāpo); PvA 98 (viriya°). Cp. ātappa & ātāpana.
Ātāpana (nt.) [ā + tāpana] tormenting, torture, mortification M I.78; A I.296 (°paritāpana); II.207 (id.); Pug 55 (id.); Vism 3 (id.).
Ātāpin (adj.) [fr. ātāpa, cp. BSk. ātāpin Av. Ś I.233; II. 194 = Divy 37; 618] ardént, zealous, strenuous, active D III.58, 76 sq., 141 (+ sampajāna), 221, 276; M I.22, 56, 116, 207, 349; II.11; III.89, 128, 156; S 113, 117 sq., 140, 165; II.21, 136 sq.; III.73 sq.; IV.37, 48, 54, 218; V.165, 187, 213; A II.13 sq.; III 38, 100 sq.; IV. 29, 177 sq., 266 sq., 300, 457 sq.; V.343 sq.; Sn 926; Nd1 378; It 41, 42; Vbh 193 sq.; Miln 34, 366; Vism 3 (= viriyavā); DhA I.120; SnA 157, 503. -- Freq. in the formula of Arahantship "eko vūpakaṭṭho appamatto ātāpī pahitatto": see arahant II. B. See also satipaṭṭhāna. <-> Opp. anātāpin S II.195 sq.; A II.13; It 27 (+ anottappin).
Ātāpeti [ā + tāpeti] to burn, scorch; fig. to torment, inflict pain, torture M I.341 (+ paritāpeti); S IV.337; Miln 314, 315. Ātitheyya (nt.) [fr. ati + theyya] great theft (?) A I.93; IV. 63 sq. (v. l. ati° which is perhaps to be prcferred).
Ātu [dialectical] father M I.449 (cp. Trenckner's note on p. 567: the text no doubt purports to make the woman speak a sort of patois).
Ātuman [Vedic ātman, diaeretic form for the usual contracted attan; only found in poetry. Cp. also the shortened form tuman] self. nom. sg. ātumo Pv IV.52 (= sabhāvo PvA 259), ātumā Nd1 69 (ātumā vuccati attā), 296 (id.), & ātumāno Nd1 351; acc. ātumānaŋ Sn 782 (= attānaŋ SnA 521), 888, 918; loc. ātume Pv II.1311 (= attani C.).
Ātura (adj.) [Sk. ātura, cp. BSk. ātura, e. g. Jtm 3170] ill, sick, diseased; miserable, affected S III.1 (°kāya); A I. 250; Sn 331; Vv 8314 (°rūpa = abhitunna--kāya VvA 328); J I.197 (°anna "food of the miserable", i. e. last meal of one going to be killed; C. expls. as maraṇabhojana), 211 (°citta); II.420 (°anna, as above); III.201; V.90, 433; VI.248; Miln 139, 168; DhA I.31 (°rūpa); PvA 160, 161; VvA 77; Sdhp 507. Used by Commentators as syn. of aṭṭo, e. g. at J IV.293; SnA 489. --anātura healthy, well,
in good condition S III.1; Dh 198.
Āthabbaṇa (nt.) [= athabbaṇa, q. v.] the Atharva Veda as a code of magic working formulas, witchcraft, sorcery Sn 927

(v. l. ath°, see interpreted at Nd1 381; expld. as āthabbaṇika--manta--ppayoga at SnA 564).
Āthabbaṇika (adj. n.) [fr. athabbana] one conversant with magic, wonder--worker, medicine--man Nd1 381; SnA 564. Ādapeti [Caus. of ādāti] to cause one to take, to accept, agree to M II.104; S I.132.
Ādara [Sk. ādara, prob. ā + dara, cp. semantically Ger. ehrfurcht awe] consideration of, esteem, regard, respect,
reverence, honour J V.493; SnA 290; DA I.30; DhsA 61; VvA 36, 61, 101, 321; PvA 121, 123, 135, 278; Sdhp 2, 21, 207,
560. --anādara lack of reverence, disregard, disrespect; (adj.) disrespectful S I.96; Vin IV.218; Sn 247 (= ādara--virahita SnA 290; DA I.284; VvA 219; PvA 3, 5, 54, 67, 257.
Ādaratā (f.) [abstr. fr. ādara] = ādara, in neg. an° want of consideration J IV.229; Dhs 1325 = Vbh 359 (in expln. of dovacassatā).
Ādariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādara] showing respect of honour; neg. an° disregard, disrespect Vin II.220; A V.146, 148; Pug 20; Vbh 371; miln 266.
Ādava [ā + dava2?] is gloss at VvA 216 for maddava Vv 5123; meaning: excitement, adj. exciting. The passage in VvA is somewhat corrupt, & therefore unclear.
Ādahati1 [ā + dahati1] to put down, put on, settle, fix Vism 289 (samaŋ ā.=samādahati). Cp. sam° and ādhiyati.
Ādahati2 [ā + dahati2] to set fire to, to burn J VI.201, 203.
Ādā [ger. of ādāti from reduced base *da of dadāti 1b] taking up, taking to oneself Vin IV.120 (= anādiyitvā C.; cp. the usual form ādāya).
[ā + dadāti of dadāti base 1 dā] to take up, accept, appropriate, grasp, seize; grd. ādātabba Vin I.50; inf. ādātuŋ D III.133 (adinnaŋ theyyasankhātaŋ ā.). <-> ger. ādā & ādāya (see sep.); grd. ādeyya, Caus. ādapeti (q. v.). -- See also ādiyati & ādeti.
Ādāna (nt.) [ād + āna, or directly from ā + dā, base 1 of dadāti] taking up, getting, grasping, seizing; fig. appropriating, clinging to the world, seizing on (worldly objects). (1) (lit.) taking (food), pasturing M III.133; J V.371 (& °esana). -- (2) getting, acquiring, taking, seizing S II.94; A IV.400 (daṇd̤°); PvA 27 (phal°); esp. freq. in adinn° seizing what is not given, i. e. theft: see under adinna. -- (3) (fig.) attachment, clinging A V.233, 253 (°paṭinissagga); Dh 89 (id.; cp. DhA II.163); Sn 1103 (°taṇhā), 1104 (°satta); Nd1 98 (°gantha); Nd2 123, 124. --an° free from attachment S I.236 (sādānesu anādāno "not laying hold mong them that grip" trsl.); A II.10; It 109; J IV.354; Miln 342; DhA IV.70 (= khandhādisu niggahaṇo). Cp. upa°, pari°.
Ādāya [ger. of ādāti, either from base 1 of dadāti (dā) or base 2 (dāy). See also ādiya] having received or taken, taking up, seizing on, receiving; freq. used in the sense of a prep. "with" (c. acc.) Sn 120, 247, 452; J V.13; Vbh 245; DhA II.74; SnA 139; PvA 10, 13, 38, 61 etc. -- At Vin I.70 the form ādāya is used as a noun f. ādāyā in meaning of "a casually taken up belief" (tassa ādāyassa vaṇṇe bhaṇati). Cp. upa°, pari°.
Ādāyīn (adj.--n.) [fr. ā + dadāti base 2, cp. ādāya] taking up, grasping, receiving; one who takes, seīzes or appropriates D I.4 (dinn°); A III.80; V.137 (sār°); DA I.72.

Ādāsa [Sk. ādarśa, ā + dṛś, P. dass, of dassati1 2] a mirror Vin II.107; D I.7, 11 (°pañha mirror--questioning, cp. DA I.97: "ādāse devataŋ otaretvā pañha--pucchanaŋ"), 80; II.93 (dhamnaɔ--ādāsaŋ nāma dhamma--pariyāyaŋ desessāmi); S V.357 (id.); A V.92, 97 sq., 103; J I.504; Dhs 617 (°maṇd̤ala); Vism 591 (in simile); KhA 50 (°daṇd̤a) 237; DhA I.226.
--tala the surface of the mirror, in similes at Vism 450, 456, 489.
Ādāsaka = ādāsa Th 2, 411.
Ādi [Sk. ādi, etym. uncertain] -- 1. (m.) starting--point, beginning Sn 358 (acc. ādiŋ = kāraṇaŋ SnA 351); Dh 375 (nom.
ādi); Miln 10 (ādimhi); J VI.567 (abl. ādito from the beginning). For use as nt. see below 2 b. -- 2. (adj. & adv.) (a) (°--)
beginning, initially, first, principal, chief: see cpds. -- (b) (°--) beginning with, being the first (of a series which either is supposed
to be familiar in its constituents to the reader or hearer or is immediately intelligible from the context), i. e. and so on, so forth
(cp. adhika); e. g. rukkha--gumb--ādayo (acc. pl.) trees, jungle etc. J I.150; amba--panasɔ ādīhi rukkehi sampanno (and similar
kinds of fruit) J I.278; amba--labujɔādīnaŋ phalānaŋ anto J II.159; asi--satti--dhami--ādīni āvudhāni (weapous, such as sword,
knife, bow & the like) J I.150; kasi--gorakkhɔ ādīni karonte manusse J II.128; . . . ti ādinā nayena in this and similar ways J I.81;
PvA 30. Absolute as nt. pl. ādinī with ti (evaŋ) (ādīni), closing a quotation, meaning "this and such like", e. g. at J II.128, 416 (ti ādīni viravitvā). -- In phrase ādiŋ katvā meaning "putting (him, her, it) first", i. e. heginning with, from . . . on, from . . .
down (c. acc.) e. g. DhA I.393 (rājānaŋ ādiŋ K. from the king down); PvA 20 (vihāraŋ ādikatvā), 21 (pañcavaggiye ādiŋ K.).
--kammika [cp. BSk. ādikarmaka Divy 544] a beginner Vin III.146; IV.100; Miln 59; Vism 241; DhsA 187. --kalyāṇa in
phrase ādikalyāṇa majjhe--kalyāṇa pariyosāna--kalyāṇa of the Dhamma, "beautiful in the beginning, the middle & the end" see references under dhamma C. 3 and cp. DA I.175 (= ādimhi kalyāṇa etc.); SnA 444; abstr. °kalyāṇatā Vism 4.
--pubbangama original Dpvs IV.26. --brahmacariyaka belonging to the principles or fundaments of moral life D I.189;
III.284; M I.431; II.125, 211; III. 192; S II.75, 223; IV.91; V.417, 438; f. °ikā Vin I.64, 68; A I.231 sq. --majjhapariyosāna beginning, middle & end Miln 10; cp. above ādikalyāṇa.
Ādika (adj.) [ādi + ka] from the beginning, initial (see adhika); instr. ādikena in the beginning, at once, at the same time M I.395, 479; II.213; S II.224; J VI.567. Cp. ādiya3.
Ādicca [Vedic āditya] the sun S I.15, 47; II.284; III.156; V.44, 101; A I.242; V.22, 263, 266 sq.; It 85; Sn 550, 569, 1097 ("ādicco vuccati suriyo" Nd2 125); DhA IV. 143; Sdhp 14, 17, 40.
--upaṭṭhānā sun--worship D I.11 (= jīvikatthāya ādiccaparicariyā DA I.97); J II.72 (°jātaka; ādiccaŋ upatiṭṭhati p. 73 = suriyaŋ namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.). --patha the path of the sun, i. e. the sky, the heavens Dh 175 (= ākāsa DhA III.177). --bandhu "kinsman of the sun", Ep. of the Buddha Vin II.296; S I.186, 192; A II.54; Sn 54, 915, 1128; Nd1 341; Nd2 125b; Vv 425, 7810; VvA 116.
Ādiṇṇa [Sk. ādīrṇa, pp. of ā + dṛ, see ādiyati2] broken, split open S IV.193 (= sipātikā with burst pod); cp. M I.306. Ādiṇṇata (nt.) [abstr. fr. ādiṇṇa] state of being broken or split Ps I.49.
Āditta [ā + ditta1, Sk. ādīpta, pp. of ā + dīp] set on fire, blazing, burning Vin I.34; Kv 209 (sabbaŋ ādittaŋ); S III.71; IV.19, 108; A IV.320 (°cela); Sn 591; J IV.391; Pv I.85 (= paditta jalita PvA 41); Kvu 209; DA I.264; PvA 149; Sdhp 599.
--pariyāya the discourse or sermon on the fire (lit. being in fllames) S IV.168 sq.; Vin I.34; DhA I.88.
Ādina only at D I.115 (T. reading ādīna, but v. l. S id. ādina, B p. abhinna) in phrase ādina--khattiya--kula primordial. See
note in Dial. I.148.
Ādiya1 (adj.) grd. of admi, ad, Sk. ādya] edible, eatable A III.45 (bhojanāni). Ādiya2 in °mukha

Ādiya2 in °mukha is uncertain reading at A III.164 sq. (vv. ll. ādeyya° & ādheyya), meaning perhaps "graspmouth", i. e.
gossip; thus equal to ger. of ādiyati1. Perhaps to be taken to ādiyati2. The same phrase occurs at Pug 65 (T. ādheyya°, C. has v. l. ādheyya°) where Pug A 248 explns. "ādito dheyyamukho, paṭhama--vacanasmiŋ yeva ṭhapita--mukho ti attho" (sticking to one's word?). See ādheyya.
Ādiya3 = ādika, instr. ādiyena in the beginning J VI.567 (= ādikena C.). Ādiya4
Ādiya4 ger. of ādiyati.
Ādiyati1 [ā + diyati, med. pass. base of dadāti4, viz. di° & dī°; see also ādāti & ādeti] to take up; take to oneself, seize on, grasp, appropriate, fig. take notice of, take to heart, heed. -- pres. ādiyati A IIJ.46; Sn 119, 156, 633, 785, Nd1 67; Nd2 123, 124; J III.296: V.367. -- pot. ādiye Sn 400; imper. ādiya M III.133 (so read for ādissa?). -- aor. ādiyi D III.65; A III.209, ādiyāsi Pv IV.148 (sayaŋ daṇd̤aŋ ā. = acchinditvā gaṇhasi PvA 241), & ādapayi (Caus. formation fr. ādāti?) to take heed S I.132 (v. l. ādiyi, trsl. "put this into thy mind"). -- ger. ādiyitvā Vin IV.120 (= ādā); J II.224 (C. for ādiya T.); III.104; IV.352 (an° not heeding; v. l. anāditvā, cp. anādiyanto not attending J III.196); DhA III.32 (id.); PvA 13 (T. anādayitva not heeding), 212 (vacanaŋ anādiyitvā not paying attention to his word), ādiya S III.26 (v. l. an° for anādīya); J II.223 (= ādiyitvā C.); see also ādiya2, & ādīya S III.26 (an°). See also upādiyati & pariyādiyati.
Ādiyati2 [ā + diyati, Sk. ādīryate, Pass. of dṛ to split: see etym. under darī] to split, go asunder, break Ps I.49. <-> pp.
ādiṇṇa. See also avadīyati. Cp. also upādiṇṇa.
Ādiyanatā (f.) [abstr. formation ādiyana (fr. ādiya ger. of ādiyati) + ta] in an° the fact of not taking up or heeding SnA
Ādisati [ā + disati] (a) to announce, tell, point out, refer to. -- (b) to dedicate (a gift, dakkhiṇaŋ or dānaŋ). <-> pres. ind. ādisati D I.213 = A I.170 (tell or read one's character); Sn 1112 (atītaŋ); Nd1 382 (nakkhattaŋ set the horoscope); Miln 294 (dānaŋ); pot. ādiseyya Th 2, 307 (dakkhiṇaŋ); Pv IV.130 (id. = uddiseyya PvA 228), & ādise Vin I.229 = D II.88 (dakkhiṇaŋ); imper. ādisa PvA 49. -- fut. ādissati Th 2, 308 (dakkhiṇaŋ) PvA 88 (id.). -- aor. ādisi Pv II.28; PvA 46 (dakkhiṇaŋ); pl. ādisiŋsu ibid. 53 (id.) & ādisuŋ Pv I.106 (id.). -- ger. ādissa Vin III.127; Sn 1018; Pv II.16 (dānaŋ), & ādisitvāna Th 2, 311. -- grd. ādissa (adj.) to be told or shown M I.12.
Ādiso (adv.) [orig. abl. of ādi, Qormed with °saḥ] from the beginning, i. e. thoroughly, absolutely D I.180; M III.208. Ādissa at M III.133 is an imper. pres. meaning "take", & should probably better be read ādiya (in corresponsion with
ādāna). It is not grd. of ādisati, which its form might suggest.
Ādissa2 (adj.) blameworthy M I.12; MA =garāyha.
Ādīna at D I.115 & S V.74 (vv. ll. ādina, & abhinna) see ādina. See diṇṇa.

Ādīnava [ā + dīna + va (nt.), a substantivised adj., orig. meaning "full of wretchedness", cp. BSk. ādīnava M Vastu III.297 (misery); Divy 329] disadvantage, danger (in or through = loc.) D I.38 (vedanānaŋ assādañ ca ādīnavañ ca etc.), 213 (iddhi--pāṭihāriye M I.318; S I.9 (ettha bhīyo); II.170 sq. (dhātūnaŋ); III.27, 62, 102 (rūpassa etc.); IV.7, 168; A I.57 (akaraṇīye kayiramāne) 258 (ko loke assādo); III.250 sq.; 267 sq. (duccarite), 270 (puggala--ppasāde); IV.439 sq.; V.81; J I.146; IV.2; It 9 = A II.10 = Nd2 172a; Sn 36, 50 (cp. Nd2 127), 69, 424, 732; Th 2, 17 (kāye ā. = dosa ThA 23), 485 (kāmesu ā. = dosa ThA 287); Pv III.107 (= dosa PvA 214); IV.67 (= dosa PvA 263); Ps I.192 sq.; II.9, 10; PvA 12, 208. -- There are several sets of sources of evil or danger, viz. five dussīlassa sīla--vipattiyā ā. at D II.85 = III.235 = A III.252; five akkhantiyā ā. at Vbh
378; six of six each at D III.182 sq. -- In phrase kāmānaŋ ā. okāro sankileso D I.110, 148; M I.115; Nett 42; DhA 16. --ânupassin realising the danger or evil of S II.85 (upā dāniyesu dhammesu) abstr. °ânupassanā Vism 647 sq., 695.
--dassāvin same as °ânupassin D I.245 (an°); A V.178 (id.); D III.46; S II.194, 269; A III.146; V.181 sq.; Nd2 141. --pariyesanā search for danger in (--°) S II.171; III.29; IV.8 sq. --saññā consciousness of danger D I.7); III.253, 283; A III.79.
Ādīpanīya (adj.) [grd. of ā + dīpeti] to be explained Miln 270.
Ādīpita [pp. of ādīpeti, ā + caus. of dīp, cp. dīpeti] ablaze, in flames S I.31 (loka; v. l. ādittaka) 108; J V.366; DhA III.32
(v. l. āditta).
Ādu (indecl.) [see also adu] emphatic (adversative) part. (1) of affirmation & emphasis: but, indeed, rather J III. 499 = VI.443; V.180; VI.552. -- (2) as 2nd component of a disjunctive question, mostly in corresponsion udāhu . . . ādu (= kiŋ .
. . udāhu SnA 350), viz. is it so . . . or" Th 1, 1274 = Sn 354; Pv IV.317 = DhA I.31; J V.384; VI.382; without udāhu at J V.460 (adu). The close connection with udāhu suggests an expln. of ādu as a somehow distorted abbreviation of udāhu.
Ādeti [a + deti, base2 of dadāti (day° & de°), cp. also ādiyati] to take, receive, get Sn 121 (= gaṇhāti SnA 179), 954 (= upādiyati gaṇhāti Nd1 444); cp. I.43; J III. 103, 296; V.366 (= gaṇhāti C.; cp. ādiyati on p. 367); Miln 336.
Ādeyya (adj.) [grd. of ādāti (q. v.)] to be taken up, acceptable, pleasant, welcome, only in phrase °vacana welcome or acceptable speech, glad words Vin II.158; J VI.243; Miln 110; ThA 42.
[ā + div. devati] lamenting, deploring, crying etc. in ster. phrase (explaining parideva or pariddava) ādevo paridevo ādevanā pari° ādevitattaŋ pari° Nd1 370 = Nd2 416 = Ps I.38.
Ādesa [fr. ādisati, cp. Sk. ādeśa] information, pointing out; as tt. g. characteristic, determination, substitute, e. g. kutonidānā is at SnA 303 said to equal kiŋ--nidānā, the to of kuto (abl.) equalling or being substituted for the acc. case: paccatta--vacanassa to--ādeso veditabbo.
Ādesanā (f.) [ā + desanā] pointing out, guessing, prophesy; only in phrase °pāṭihāriya trick or marvellous ability of mind--reading or guessing other peoples character Vin II. 200; D I.212, 213; III.220; A I.170, 292; V.327; Ps II. 227. For pāṭihāriya is subsiituted °vidhā (lit. variety of, i. e. act or performance etc.) at D III.103.
Ādhāna (nt.) [ā + dhāna] -- 1. putting up, putting down, placing, laying A IV.41 (aggissa ādhānaŋ, v. l. of 6 MSS ādānaŋ). -- 2. receptacle M I.414 (udak°), cp. ādheyya. <-> 3. enclosure, hedge Miln 220 (kaṇṭak° thorny brake, see under kaṇṭaka). --gāhin holding one's own place, i. e. obstinate (?), reading uncertain & interchanging with ādāna, only in one ster. phrase,
viz. sandiṭṭhi--parāmāsin ādhāna--gāhin duppaṭinissaggin Vin II.89; M I.43, 96; A III.335 (v. l. ādāna°, C. expls by daḷhagāhin); D III.247 (adhāna°).
Ādhāra [ā + dhāra] -- 1. a container, receptacle, basin, lit. holder A III.27; J VI.257. -- 2. "holding up", i. e. support, basis,
prop. esp. a (round) stool or stand for the alms--bowl (patta) Vin II.113 (an° patto); M III.95; S V.21; J V.202. -- fig. S V.20 (an° without a support, cittaŋ); Vism 8, 444. -- 3. (tt. g.) name for the loc. case ("resting on") Sn 211.

Ādhāraka (m. & nt.) [ā + dhāraka, or simply ādhāra + ka] -- 1. a stool or stand (as ādhāra2) (always m., except at J I.33 where °āni pl. nt.) J I.33; DhA III.290 = VvA 220; DhA III.120 = 186 (one of the four priceless things of a Tathāgata, viz.: setacchattaŋ, nisīdanapallanko, ādhārako pādapīṭhaŋ). -- 2. a reading desk, pulpit J III.235; IV.299.
Ādhāraṇatā (f.) [ā + dhāraṇatā] concentration, attention, mindfulness SnA 290 (+ daḷhīkaraṇa), 398 (id.). Ādhārita [pp. of ā + dhāreti, cp. dhāreti1] supported, held up Miln 68.
Ādhāvati [ā + dhavati1] to run towards a goal, to run after M I.265 (where id. p. S II.26 has upadh°); DA I. 39. Freq. in combn. ādhāvati paridhāvaQi to run about, e. g. J I.127, 134, 158; II.68.
Ādhāvana (nt.) [fr. ādhāvati] onrush, violent motion Miln 135.
(nt.) [fr. adhi + pati + ya "being over--lord"; see also adhipateyya] supreme rule, lordship, sovereignty, power S V.342 (issariy°); A I.62 (id.), 147, 212; II.205 (id.); III.33, 76; IV.252 sg.; Pv II.959 (one of the ṭhānas, cp. ṭhāna II.2b; see also D III. 146, where spelt ādhipateyya; expld. by issariya at PvA 137); J I.57; Dāvs V.17; VvA 126 (gehe ā = issariya). The three (att°, lok°, dhamm°) at Vism 14.
Ādhuta [ā + dhuta1] shaken, moved (by the wind, i. e. fanned Vv 394 (v. l. adhuta which is perhaps to be preferred, i. e. not shaken, cp. vātadhutaŋ Dāvs V.49; VvA 178 expls. by saṇikaŋ vidhūpayamāna, i. e. gently fanned).
Ādheyya (adj.) [grd. of ā + dadhāti cp. ādhāna2] to be deposited (in one's head & heart Pug A), to be heeded, to be appropriated [in latter meaning easily mixed with ādheyya, cp. vv. ll. under ādiya2]; nt. depository (= ādhātabbatā ṭhapetabbatā Pug A 217) Pug 34 (°ŋ gacchati is deposited); Miln 359 (sabbe tassɔ ādheyya2 honti they all become deposited in him, i. e. his deposits or his property).
--mukha see ādiya2.
Ānaka [Sk. ānaka, cp. Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 10] a kind of kettledrum, beaten only at one end S II.266; J II. 344; Dpvs
Ānañca see ākāsa° see ākāsa° and viññāṇa°.
Ānañja see ānejja.
Ānaṇya (nt.) [Sk. ānṛṇya, so also BSk. e. g. Jtm 3118; from a + ṛṇa, P. iṇa but also aṇa in composition, thus an--aṇa as base of ānaṇya] freedom from debt D I.73; A III.354 (Ep. of Nibbāna, cp. anaṇa); Nd1 160; Vism 44; DA I.3.
Ānadati [ā + nadati] to trumpet (of elephants) J IV.233.
Ānana (nt.) [Vedic āna, later Sk. ānana from an to breathe] the mouth; adj. (--°) having a mouth Sdhp 103; Pgdp 63
[fr. an + antara + ika] without an interval, immediately following, successive Vin I.321; II. 212; Pug 13; Dhs 1291.
--kamma "conduct that finds retribution without delay" (Kvu trsl. 275 n. 2) Vin II.193; J I.45; Kvu 480; Miln 25 (cp. Dhs trsl.
267); Vism 177 (as prohibiting practice of kammaṭṭhāna).
Ānanda [Vedic ānanda, fr. ā + nand, cp. BSk. ānandī joy Divy 37] joy, pleasure, bliss, delight D I.3; Sn 679, 687; J I.207
(°maccha Leviathan); VI.589 (°bheri festive drum); DA I 53 (= pītiyā etaŋ adhivacanaŋ).
Ānandati [ā + nandati] to be pleased or delighted J VI. 589 (aor. ānandi in T. reading ānandi vittā, expld. by C. as

nandittha was pleased; we should however read ānandi--cittā with gladdened heart). See also ānandiya.
Ānandin (adj.) [fr. ā + nand] joyful, friendly Th 1, 555; J IV.226.
Ānandiya (adj.--.) [grd. of ānandati] enjoyable, nt. joy, feast J VI.589 (°ŋ acarati to celebrate the feast = ānandachaṇa C.).
Ānandī (f.) [ā + nandī, cp. ānanda] joy, happiness in cpd. ānandi--citta J VI.589 (so read probably for ānandi vitta: see ānandati).
Ānaya (adj.) [ā + naya] to be brought, in suvānaya easy to bring S I.124 = J I.80. Ānayati see āneti.
Ānāpāna (nt.) [āna + apāna, cpds. of an to breathe] in haled & exhaled breath, inspiration & respiration S V.132,
311 sq.; J I.58; Ps I.162 (°kathā); usually in cpd. °sati concentration by in--breathing & out--breathing (cp. Man. of Mystic 70) M I.425 (cp. D II.291); III.82; Vin III.70; A I.30; It 80; Ps I.166, 172, 185 (°samādhi); Nd2 466 B (id.); Miln 332; Vism 111, 197, 266 sq.; SnA 165. See detail under sati.
Ānāpeti see āneti.
Ānāmeti [ā + nāmeti, Caus. of namati, which is usually spelt nameti] to make bend, to bend, to bring toward or under J
V.154 (doubtful reading fut ānāmayissasi, v. l. ānayissati, C. ānessasi = lead to).
Ānisaŋsa [ā + ni + saŋsa, BSk. distorted to anuśaŋsa] praise i. e. that which is commendable, profit, merit, advantage,
good result, blessing in or from (c. loc.). <-> There are five ānisaŋsā sīlavato sīla--sampadāya or blessings which accrue to the virtuous enumd. at D II.86, viz. bhogakkhandha great wealth, kittisadda good report, visārada self--confidence,
asammūlho kālaŋ karoti an untroubled death, saggaŋ lokaŋ uppajjati a happy state after death. -- D I.110, 143; III.132
(four), 236 (five); M I.204; S I.46, 52; III.8, 93 (mahā°); V.69 (seven), 73, 129, 133, 237 (seven), 267, 276; A I.58 (karaṇīye kariyamāne); II.26, 185, 239, 243 (sikkhā°); III.41 (dāne), 248 (dhammasavane), 250 (yāguyā), 251 (upaṭṭhita--satissa), 253
sq. (sīlavato sīlasampadāya etc., as above), 267 (sucarite), 441; IV.150 (mettāya ceto--vimuttiyā), 361 (dhammasavane), 439 sq. (nekkhamme avitakke nippītike), 442, 443 sq. (ākāsɔānañcāyatane); V.I, 106 (mahā°), 311; It 28, 29, 40 (sikkhā°); Sn 256 (phala°), 784, 952; J I.9, 94; V.491 (v. l. anu°); Nd1 73, 104, 441; Kvu 400; Miln 198; VvA 6, 113; PvA 9 (dāna°) 12, 64 (= phala), 208, 221 (= guṇa); Sdhp 263. -- Eleven ānisaŋsas of mettā (cp. Ps II.130) are given in detail at Vism 311<-> 314; on another eight see pp. 644 sq.
Ānisada (nt.) [a + sad] "sit down", bottom, behind M I. 80 = 245; J III.435 (gloss asata) Vism 251 = KhA 45 (°ttaca), 252 (°maŋsa).
Ānuttariya (nt.) [see also anuttariya which as --° probably represents ānutt°] incomparableness, excellency, supreme ideal D III.102 sq.; A V.37.
Ānīta [pp. of ānetī] fetched, brought (here), brought back adduced J I.291; III.127; IV.1.
Ānupuṭṭha metri causa for anupuṭṭha metri causa for anupuṭṭha (q. v.).
Ānupubba (nt.) [abstr. fr. anupubba] rule, regularity, order Th 1, 727 (cp. M Vastu II.224 ānupubbā).
Ānupubbatā (f.) (or °ta nt.?) [fr. last] succession; only in tt. g. padânu--pubbatā word sequence, in expln. of iti Nd1 140; Nd2 137 (v. l. °ka).

Ānupubbikathā [for anupubbi° representing its isolated composition form, cp. ānubhāva & see also anupubbi°] regulated exposition, graduated sermon D I.110; II.41 sq.; M I.379; J I.8; Miln 228; DA I.277, 308; DhA IV.199.
Ānubhāva [the dissociated composition form of anubhāva, q. v. for details. Only in later language] greatness, magnificence, majesty, splendour J I.69 (mahanto); II.102 (of a jewel) V.491; DhA II.58.
Ānejja and Ānañja and Ānañja [abstr. fr. an + *añja or *ejja = *ijja. The Sanskritised equivalent would be *iñjya or
*iñgya of ing to stir, move, with a peculiar substitution of *ang in Pāli, referring it to a base with ṛ (probably Sk. ṛj, ṛñjati) in analogy to a form like Sk. ṛṇa = Pāli aṇa & iṇa, both a & i representing Sk. ṛ. The form añja would thus correspond to a Sk. *añjya (*añgya). The third P. form ān--eñja is a direct (later, and probably re--instituted) formation from Sk. iñjya, which in
an interesting way became in BSk. re--sanskritised to āñijya (which on the other hand may represent āñejja & thus give the latter the feature of a later, but more specifically Pāli form). The editions of P. Texts show a great variance of spelling, based on MSS. vacillation, in part also due to confusion of derivation] immovability, imperturbability, impassibility. The word is n. but occurs as adj. at Vin III. 109 (ānañja samādhi, with which cp. BSk. ānijyā śāntiḥ at Av. Ś I.199. -- The term usually occurs in cpd. ānejja--ppatta (adj.) immovable lit. having attained impassibility, expld. by Bdhgh. at Vin III.267 (on Pār. I.1, 6) as acala, niccala, i. e. motionless. This cpd. is indicated below by (p.) after the reference. -- The various spellings of the word are as follows: -- 1. ānejja D I.76 (v. l. ānañja--p.) A II.184 (p.); III.93 (p.), 100 (p.), 377 sq. (p.); Nd2 471 (v. l. aneja, ānañja) = Vbh 137 (āneñja); Nd2 569a (v. l. ānañja), 601 (v. l. anejja & aneñja); Pug 60 (p.); DA I.219 (v. l. BB āneñja). -- 2. ānañja Vin III.4 (p.) (v. l. ānañca°, anañja°, ānañja°; Bdhgh. ānejja° p. 267), 109; Ud 27 (samādhi, adj. v. l. ānañca); DhA IV.46. See also below cpd. °kāraṇa. -- A peculiarity of Trenckner a spelling is āṇañja at M II.229 (v. l. aṇañja, aneñja, āneñja), 253, 254. -- 3. āneñja
S II.82. (v. l. āṇañje, or is it āṇeñja?); D III.217 (°âbhisankhāra of imperturbable character, remaining static, cp. Kvu trsl. 358); Nd1 90 (id.), 206, 442; Ps II.206; Vbh 135, 340; Vism 377 (p.), 386 (sixteen° fold), 571; Nett 87, 99. <-> See also iñjati.
--kāraṇa trick of immovability, i. e. pretending to be dead (done by an elephant, but see differently Morris J P T S. 1886, 154) J I.415; II.325 (v. l. āṇañja, āneñca, ānañca); IV.308; V.273, 310.
Āneñjatā (f.) [fr. āneñja] steadfastness Vism 330, 386.
Āneti [ā + neti] to bring, to bring towards, to fetch, procure, convey, bring back Sn 110; PvA 54, 92. pot. 1st pl. ānema (or imper. 2nd pl ānetha M I.371. fut. ānayissati S I.124; Pv II.65; J III.173; V.154 (v. l.), & ānessati J V.154. inf. ānayituŋ Pv II 610, ger. ānetvā PvA 42, 74. aor. ānesi PvA 3, & ānayi Pv I.77 (sapatiŋ). -- pp. ānīta (q. v.). -- Med. pass. ānīyati &
āniyyati D II.245 (āniyyataŋ imper. shall be brought); M I. 371 (ppr. ānīyamāna). -- Caus. II. ānāpeti to cause to be fetched J III.391; V.225.
Āpa & Āpo (nt.) [Vedic ap & āp, f. sg. apā, pl. āpaḥ, later Sk. also āpaḥ nt. -- Idg. *ap & *ab, primarily to Lith. ùpé
water, Old Prussian ape river, Gr. *)lpi/a N. of the Peloponnesus; further (as *ab) to Lat. amnis river, Sk. abda cloud, & perhaps ambu water] water; philosophically t. t. for cohesion, representative of one of the 4 great elements (cp. mahābhūta), viz. paṭhavī, āpo, tejo, vāyo: see Cpd. 268 & Dhs trsl. 201, also below °dhātu. <-> D II.259; M I.327; S II.103; III.54, 207;
A IV.312, 375; Sn 307, 391 (°ŋ), 392 (loc. āpe), 437 (id.); J IV.8 (paṭhavi--āpa--teja°); Dhs 652; Miln 363 (gen. āpassa, with paṭhavī etc.); Sdhp 100.
--kasiṇa the water--device, i. e. meditation by (the element of) water (cp. Mystic 75 n.) D III.268; J I.313; Dhs 203; Vism 170; DhA I 312; III.214. --dhātu the fluid element, the essential element in water, i. e element of cohesion (see Cpd. 155 n. 2; Mystic 9 n. 2; Dhs trsl. 201, 242) D III.228, 247; M I.187, 422: Dhs 652; Nett 74. See also dhātu. --rasa the taste of water A I.32; SnA 6. --sama resembling water M I.423.
Āpakā (f.) [= āpagā] river J V.452; VI.518.
Āpagā (f.) [āpa + ga of gam] a river Th 1, 309; Sn 319; J V.454; Dāvs I.32; VvA 41.
Āpajjati [Sk. āpadyate, ā + pad] to get into, to meet with (acc.); to undergo; to make, produce, exhibit Vin II.126 (saŋvaraŋ); D I.222 (pariyeṭṭhiŋ); It 113 (vuddhiŋ); J I.73; Pug 20, 33 (diṭṭhɔânugatiŋ); PvA 29 (ppr. āpajjanto); DhA II.71 --

pot. āpajjeyya D I.119 (musāvādaŋ). -- aor. āpajji J V.349; PvA 124 (sankocaŋ) &
āpādi S I.37; A II.34; It 85; J II.293; 3rd pl. āpādu D II.273. -- ger. āpajjitva PvA 22 (saŋvegaŋ), 151. <-> pp. āpanna (q. v.). -- Caus. āpādeti (q. v.). -- Note. The reading āpajja in āpajja naŋ It 86 is uncertain (vv. ll. āsajja & ālajja). The id. p. at Vin II.203 (CV. VII.4, 8) has āsajjanaŋ, for which Bdhgh, on p. 325 has āpajjanaŋ. Cp. pariyāpajjati.
Āpaṇa [Sk. āpaṇa, ā + paṇ] a bazaar, shop Vin I.140; J I.55; V.445; Pv II.322; Miln 2, 341; SnA 440; DhA I. 317; II.89; VvA 157; PvA 88, 333 (phal° fruit shop), 215.
Āpaṇika [fr. āpaṇa] a shopkeeper, tradesman J I.124; Miln 344; VvA 157; DhA II.89.
Āpatacchika at J VI.17 is C. reading for apatacchika in khārâpat° (q. v.).
Āpatati [ā + patati] to fall on to, to rush on to J V.349 (= upadhāvati C.); VI.451 (= āgacchati C.); Miln 371.
Āpatti (f.) [Sk. āpatti, fr. ā + pad, cp. apajjati & BSk. āpatti, e. g, Divy 330] an ecclesiastical offence (cp. Kvu trsl. 362 n.
1), Vin I.103 (°khandha), 164 (°ŋ paṭikaroti), 322 (°ŋ passati), 354 (avasesā & anavasesā); II.2 sq. (°ŋ ropeti), 59, 60 (°pariyanta), 88 (°adhikaraṇa), 259 (°ŋ paṭikaroti); IV.344; D III.212 (°kusalatā); A I.84 (id.), 87; II.240 (°bhaya); Dhs 1330 sq. (cp. Dhs trsl. 346). <-> anāpatti Vin III.35.
°vuṭṭhānatā forgiveness of an offence Vin II.250 (put before anāpatti).
Āpattika (adj.) [āpatti + ka, cp. BSk. āpattika Divy 303] guilty of an offence M I.443; Vin IV.224. an° Vin I.127.
Āpatha in micchāpatha, dvedhāpatha as classified in Vbh Ind. p. 441 should be grouped under patha as micchā°, dvedhā°.
Āpathaka in °jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka° in °jjhāyin Nd2 3422 is read āpādaka° at Nd1 226, and āpātaka° at Vism 26.
Āpadā (f.) [Sk. āpad, fr. ā + pad, cp. āpajjati & BSk. āpad, e. g. in āpadgata Jtm 3133] accident, misfortune, distress, D III.190; A II.68 (loc. pl. āpadāsu), 187; III. 45; IV.31; Th 1, 371; J IV.163 (āpadatthā, a difficult form; vv. ll. T. aparattā, āpadatvā, C. aparatthā; expld. by āpadāya); V.340 (loc. āpade), 368; PvA 130 (quot.); Sdhp 312, 554. Note. For the contracted form in loc. pl. āpāsu (= *āpatsu) see *āpā.
Āpanna [pp. of āpajjati] -- 1. entered upon, fallen into, possessed of, having done Vin I.164 (āpattiŋ ā.); III.90; D I.4 (dayāpanna merciful); Nd2 32 (taṇhāya). -- 2. unfortunate, miserable J I.19 (V.124). Cp. pari°.
(f.) [for āpadā, q. v.] misery, misfortune J II.317 (loc. pl. āpāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu); III.12 (BB āvāsu); V.82 (avāgata gone into misery, v. l. apagata, C. apagata parihīna), 445 (loc. āvāsu, v. l. avāsu, C. āpadāsu), 448 (āvāsu kiccesu; v. l. apassu, read āpāsu). Note. Since *āpā only occurs in loc. pl., the form āpāsu is to be regarded as a direct contraction of Sk. āpatsu.
Āpāṇa [ā + pāṇa] life, lit. breathing, only in cpd. °koṭi the end of life Miln 397; Dāvs III.93; adj. --koṭika M II.120; Vism 10.
Āpātha [etym.? Trenckner, Miln p. 428 says: "I suspect ā. to be corrupted from āpāta (cp. āpatati), under an impression
that it is allied to patha; but it is scarcely ever written so"] sphere, range, focus, field (of consciousness or perception; cp. Dhs trsl. 199), appearance A II.67; J I.336; Vbh 321; Miln 298; Vism 21, 548; DA I.228; DhsA 308, 333; VvA 232 (°kāla); DhA IV.85; Sdhp 356. Usually in phrase āpāthaŋ gacchati to come into focus, to become clear, to appear M I.190; S IV.160, or °ŋ āgacchati Vin I.184; A III.377 sq.; IV.404; Vism 125. Cp. °gata below.
--gata come into the sphere of, appearing, visible M I.174 = Nd2 jhāna (an° unapproached); PvA 23 (āpāthaŋ gata). --gatatta abstr. fr. last: appcarance Vism 617.

Āpāthaka (adj.) [fr. āpātha] belonging to the (perceptual) sphere of, visible, in °nisādin lying down visible D III.44, 47. Cp. āpathaka.
Āpādaka (adj.--n.) [fr. ā + pad] -- 1. (adj.) producing, leading to (--°) VvA 4 (abhiññ° catuttha--jjhāna). -- 2. (n.) one who takes care of a child, a protector, guardian A I.62 = 132 = It 110 (+ posaka). -- f. āpādikā a nurse, foster--mother Vin II.289 (+ posikā).
Āpādā (f.) [short for āpādikā] a nursing woman, in an° not nursing, unmarried J IV.178. Āpādi aor. of āpajjati (q. v.).
Āpādeti [Caus. of āpajjati] to produce, make out, bring, bring into M I.78; III.248; S IV.110 (addhānaŋ to live one's life, cp. addhānaŋ āpādi J II.293 = jīvitɔaddhānaŋ āpādi āyuŋ vindi C.); SnA 466. -- Cp. pari°
Āpāna (nt.) [fr. ā + pā] drinking; drinking party, banquet; banqueting--hall, drinking--hall J I.52 (°maṇd̤ala); V.292 (°bhūmi); Vism 399 (id.); DhA I.213 (id., rañño).
Āpānaka (adj.) [āpāna + ka] drinking, one who is in the habit of drinking D I.167.
Āpānīya (adj.) [fr. āpāna, ā + pā] drinkable, fit for drinking or drinking with, in °kaŋsa drinking--bowl, goblet M I. 316; S
Āpāyika (adj.--n.) [fr. apāya] one suffering in an apāya or state of misery after death Vin II.202 = It 85 (v. l. ap°); Vin II.205; D I.103; A I.265; It 42; Vism 16; PvA 60.
Āpiyati [fr. ṛ, cp. appāyati & appeti] to be in motion (in etym. of āpo) Vism 364.
Āpucchati [ā + pucchati] to enquire after, look for, ask, esp. to ask permission or leave; aor. āpucchi J I.140; PvA 110; grd. āpucchitabba DhA I.6; ger. āpucchitvā Vin IV.267 (apaloketvā +); Miln 29; PvA 111; āpucchitūna (cp. Geiger § 211) Th 2, 426; āpuccha Th 2, 416, & āpucchā [= āpṛcchya, cp. Vedic ācyā for ācya], only in neg. form an° without asking Vin II.211, 219; IV.165, 226 (= anapaloketvā); DhA I.81. -- pp. āpucchita Vin IV.272.
Āpūrati [a + pūrati] to be filled, to become full, to increase J III.154 (cando ā. = pūrati C.); IV.26, 99, 100.
Āpeti [Caus. of āp, see appoti & pāpuṇāti] to cause to reach or obtain J VI.46. Cp. vy°.
Āphusati [ā + phusati] to feel, realise, attain to, reach; aor. āphusi Vv 169 (= adhigacchi VvA 84).
Ābaddha [pp. of ābandhati] tied, bound, bound up DA I. 127; fig. bound to, attached to, in love with DhA I.88; PvA 82 (Tissāya °sineha); Sdhp 372 (sineh, °hadaya).
Ābandhaka (adj.) [ā + bandh, cp. Sk. ābandha tie, bond] (being) tied to (loc.) PvA 169 (sīse).
Ābandhati (ā + bandhati, Sk. ābadhnāti, bandh] to bind to, tie, fasten on to, hold fast; fig. to tie to, to attach to, J
IV.132, 289; V.319, 338, 359. -- pp. ābaddha.
Ābandhana (nt.) [fr. ā + bandh] -- 1. tie, bond DA I. 181 = Pug A 236 (°atthena ñāti yeva ñāti--parivaṭṭo). <-> 2.
tying, binding Vism 351 (°lakkhaṇa, of āpodhātu). <-> 3. reins (?) or harness (on a chariot) J V.319 (but cp. C. expln. "hatthi--assa--rathesu ābandhitabbāni bhaṇd̤akāni", thus taking it as ā + bhaṇd̤a + na, i. e. wares, loads etc.). With this cp. Sk. ābandha, according to Halāyudha 2, 420 a thong of leather which fastens the oxen to the yoke of a plough.

Ābādha [ā + bādh to oppress, Vedic ābādha oppression] affliction, illness, disease Vin IV.261; D I.72; II.13; A I.121;
III.94, 143; IV.333, 415 sq., 440; Dh 138; Pug 28; Vism 41 (udara--vāta°) 95; VvA 351 (an° safe & sound); SnA 476; Sdhp 85.
-- A list of ābādhas or illnesses, as classified on grounds of aetiology, runs as follows: pittasamuṭṭhānā, semha°, vāta°, sannipātikā, utu--pariṇāmajā, visama--parihārajā, opakkamikā, kammavipākajā (after Nd2 304I.C., recurring with slight variations at S IV.230; A II.87; III.131; V.110; Nd1 17, 47; Miln 112, cp. 135). <-> Another list of illnesses mentioned in tha Vinaya is given in Index to Vin II., p. 351. -- Five ābādhas at Vin I. 71, viz. kuṭṭhaŋ gaṇd̤o kilāso soso apamāro said to be raging in Magadha cp. p. 93. -- Three ābādhas at D III.75, viz. icchā anasanaŋ jarā, cp. Sn 311. -- See also cpd. appābādha (health) under appa.
Ābādhika (adj.--n.) [fr. ābādha] affected with illness, a sick person A III.189, 238; Nd1 160; Miln 302; DA 212; DhA I.31; PvA 271. -- f. ābādhikinī a sick woman A II.144.
Ābādhita [pp. of ābādheti, Caus. of ā + bādh] afflicted, oppressed, molested Th 1, 185. Ābādheti [ā + Caus. of bādh, cp. ābādha] to oppress, vex, annoy, harass S IV.329. Ābila (adj.) [Sk. āvila; see also P. āvila] turbid, disturbed, soiled J V.90.
Ābhata [pp. of ā + bharati from bhṛ] brought (there or here), carried, conveyed, taken D I.142; S. I.65; A II.71, 83; It 12,
14 with phrase yathābhataŋ as he has been reared (cp. J V.330 evaŋ kicchā bhaṭo); Pv III.5 (ratt° = rattiyaŋ ā. PvA 199); DhA II.57, 81; IV.89; VvA 65. Cp. yathābhata.
Ābhataka (adj.) = ābhata; DA I.205 (v. l. ābhata).
Ābharaṇa (nt.) [Sk. ābharaṇa, ā + bhṛ] that which is taken up or put on, viz. ornament, decoration, trinkets D I. 104; Vv
802; J III.11, 31; DhA III.83; VvA 187.
Ābharati [ā + bhṛ] to bring, to carry; ger. ābhatvā J IV.351.
Ābhassara (adj.--n.) [etym. uncertain; one suggested in Cpd. 138 n. 4 is ā + *bha + *sar, i. e. from whose bodies are emitted rays like lightning, more probably a combn. of ābhā + svar (to shine, be bright), i. e. shining in splendour] shining, brilliant, radiant, N. of a class of gods in the Brahma heavens "the radiant gods", usually referred to as the representatives of supreme love (pīti & mettā); thus at D I.17; Dh 200; It 15; DhA III.258 (°loka). In another context at Vism 414 sq.
Ābhā (f.) [Sk. ābhā, fr. ā + bhā, see ābhāti] shine, splendour, lustre, light D II.12; M III.147 (adj. --°); S II.150 (°dhātu); A II.130, 139; III.34; Mhvs XI.11; VvA 234 (of a Vimāna, v. l. pabhā); DhA IV.191; Sdhp 286.
Ābhāti [ā + bhā] to shine, shine forth, radiate Dh 387 (= virocati DhA IV.144); J V.204. See also ābheti.
Ābhāveti [ā + bhāveti] to cultivate, pursue Pv II.1319 (mettacittaŋ; gloss & v. l. abhāvetvā; expld. as vad̤d̤hetvā brūhetvā
PvA 168).
Ābhāsa [Sk. ābhāsa, fr. ā + bhās] splendour, light, appearance M III.215.
Ābhicetasika (adj.) See abhicetasika. This spelling, with guṇa of the first syllable, is probably more correct; but the short a is the more frequent.
Ābhidosika (adj.) [abhidosa+ika] belonging to the evening before, of last night Vin III.15 (of food; stale); M I.170

(°kālakata died last night); Miln 291.
Ābhidhammika (adj.) [abhidhamma + ika] belonging to the specialised Dhamma, versed in or studying the
Abhidhamma Miln 17, 341; Vism 93. As abhi° atKhA 151; J IV.219.
Ābhindati [ā + bhindati] to split, cut, strike (with an axe) S IV.160 (v. l. a°). Ābhisekika (adj.) [fr. abhiseka] belonging to the consecration (of a king) Vin V.129.
Ābhujati [ā + bhujati, bhuj1] to bend, bend towards or in, contract; usually in phrase pallankaŋ ā° "to bend in the round lap" or "bend in hookwise", to sit crosslegged (as a devotee with straightened back), e. g. at Vin I.24; D I.71; M I.56 (v. l. ābhuñjitvā), 219; A III. 320; Pug 68; Ps I.176; J I.71, 213; Miln 289; DA I. 58, 210. In other connection J I.18 (V.101; of the ocean "to recede"); Miln 253 (kāyaŋ).
Ābhujana (nt.) [fr. ābhujati] crouching, bending, turning in, in phrase pallankɔābhujana sitting cross--legged J I 17 (V.91); PvA 219.
Ābhujī (f.) [lit. the one that bends, prob. a poetic metaphor] N. of a tree, the Bhūrja or Bhojpatr J V.195 (= bhūjapatta--vana C.), 405 (= bhūjapatta C.).
Ābhūñjati [ā + bhuj2, Sk. bhunakti] to enjoy, partake of, take in, feel, experience J IV.456 (bhoge; Rh. D. "hold in its hood"?); DhsA 333.
Ābhuñjana (nt.) [fr. ābhuñjati] partaking of, enjoying, experiencing DhsA 333.
Ābheti [*ābhayati = ābhāti, q. v.] to shine Pv II.126 (ppr. °entī); Vv 82 (°antī, v. l. °entī; = obhāsentī VvA 50).
Ābhoga [fr. ābhuñjati, bhuj2 to enjoy etc. The translators of Kvu derive it from bhuj1 to bend etc. (Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4)
which however is hardly correct, cp. the similar meaning of gocara "pasturing", fig. perception etc.] ideation, idea, thought D I.37 (= manasikāro samannāhāro DA I.122; cp. semantically āhāra = ābhoga, food); Vbh 320; Miln 97; Vism 164, 325, 354; Dāvs 62; KhA 42 (°paccavekkhana), 43 (id.) 68.
Āma1 (indecl.) [a specific Pāli formation representing either amma (q. v.) or a gradation of pron. base amu° "that" (see asu), thus deictic--emphatic exclamn. Cp. also BSk. āma e. g. Av. Ś I.36] affirmative part. "yes, indeed, certainly" D I.192 sq. (as v. l. BB.; T. has āmo); J I.115, 226 (in C. expln. of T. amā--jāta which is to be read for āmajāta); II.92; V.448; Miln 11, 19, 253; DhA I.10, 34; II.39, 44; VvA 69; PvA 12, 22, 56, 61, 75, 93 etc.
Āma2 (adj.) [Vedic āma = Gr. w)mo/s, connected with Lat. amārus. The more common P. form is āmaka (q. v.)] raw, viz.
(a) unbaked (of an earthen vessel), unfinished Sn 443; (b) uncooked (of flesh), nt. raw flesh, only in foll. cpds.: °gandha "smell of raw flesh", verminous odour, a smell attributed in particular to rotting corpses (cp. similarly BSk. āmagandha M Vastu III.214) D II.242 sq.; A I.280; Sn 241, 242 (= vissagandha kuṇapagandha SnA 286), 248, 251; Dhs 625; and °giddha greedy after flesh (used as bait) J VI.416 (= āmasankhāta āmisa C.).
Āmaka (adj.) [= āma2] raw, uncooked D I.5 = Pug 58 (°maŋsa raw flesh); M I.80 (titta--kalābu āmaka--cchinno). --dhañña "raw" grain, corn in its natural, unprepared state D I.5 = Pug 58 (see DA I.78 for definition); Vin IV.264; V.135.
--sāka raw vegetables Vism 70. --susāna "cemetery of raw flesh" charnelgrove (cp. āmagandha under ama2), i. e. fetid

smelling cremation ground J I.264, 489; IV.45 sq.; VI.10; DhA I.176; VvA 76; PvA 196.
Āmaṭṭha [Sk. āmṛṣṭa, pp. of āmasati; cp. āmasita] touched, handled J I.98 (an°); DA I.107 (= parāmaṭṭha); Sdhp 333.
Āmaṇd̤aliya [ā + maṇd̤ala + iya] a formation resembling a circle, in phrase °ŋ karoti to form a ring (of people) or a circle, to stand closely together M I 225 (cp. Sk. āmaṇd̤alikaroti).
Āmata in anāmata at J II.56 is métric for amata.
Āmattikā (f.) [ā + mattikā] earthenware, crockery; in °āpaṇa a crockery shop, chandler's shop Vin IV.243.
Āmaddana (nt.) [ā + maddana of mṛd] crushing VvA 311.
Āmanta (adj.--adv.) [either ger. of āmanteti (q. v.) or root der. fr. ā + mant, cp. āmantaṇā] asking or asked, invited, only as an° without being asked, unasked, uninvited Vin I.254 (°cāra); A III.259 (id.).
Āmantana (nt.) & °nā (f., also °ṇā) [from āmanteti] addressing, calling; invitation, greeting Sn 40 (ep. Nd2 128); °vacana the address--form of speech i. e. the vocative case (cp. Sk. āmantritaŋ id.) SnA 435; KhA 167.
Āmantanaka (adj.--n.) [fr. āmantana] addressing, speaking to, conversing; f. °ikā interlocutor, companion, favourite queen Vv 188 (= allāpa--sallāpa--yoggā kīḷanakāle vā tena (i. e. Sakkena) āmantetabbā VvA 96).
Āmantaṇīya (adj.) [grd. of āmanteti] to be addressed J IV.371.
Āmantita [pp. of āmanteti] addressed, called, invited Pv II.313 (= nimantita PvA 86).
Āmanteti [denom. of ā + *mantra] to call, address, speak to, invite, consult J VI.265; DA I.297; SnA 487 (= ālapati & avhayati); PvA 75, 80, 127. -- aor. āmantesi D II.16; Sn p. 78 (= ālapi SnA 394) & in poetry āmantayi Sn 997; Pv II.27; 37 (perhaps better with v. l. SS samantayi). -- ger. āmanta (= Sk. *āmantrya) J III.209, 315 (= āmantayitvāˊ C.), 329; IV.111; V.233; VI.511. <-> pp. āmantita (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āmantāpeti to invite to come, to cause to be called, to send for D I.134 (v. l. āmanteti); Miln 149.
Āmaya [etym.? cp. Sk. āmaya] affliction, illness, misery; only as an° (adj.) not afflicted, not decaying, healthy, well (cp. BSk. nirāmaya Aśvaghoṣa II.9) Vin I.294; Vv 1510 (= aroga VvA 74); 177; 368; J III.260, 528; IV. 427; VI.23. Positive only very late, e. g. Sdhp 397.
Āmalaka [cp. Sk. āmalaka] emblic myrobalan, Phyllanthus Emblica Vin I.201, 278; II.149 (°vaṇṭika pīthu); S I.150; A V.170; Sn p. 125 (°matti); J IV.363; V.380 (as v. l. for T. āmala); Miln 11; DhA I.319; VvA 7.
Āmalakī (f.) āmalaka Vin I.30; M I.456 (°vana).
Āmasati [ā + masati fr. mṛś] to touch (upon), to handle, to lay hold on Vin II.221; III.48 (kumbhiŋ); J III.319 (id.); A V.263, 266; J IV.67; Ps II.209; Miln 306; SnA 400; DhsA 302; VvA 17. -- aor. āmasi J II.360; ger. āmasitvā Vin III.140 (udakapattaŋ) J II.330; grd. āmassa J II.360 (an°) and āmasitabba id. (C.). -- pp. āmaṭṭha & āmasita (q. v.).
Āmasana (nt.) [fr. āmasati] touching, handling; touch Vin IV.214. Cp. III.118; Miln 127, 306; DA I.78.
Āmasita [pp. of āmasati] touched, taken hold of, occupied VvA 113 (an° khetta virgin land).
Āmāya (adj.) [to be considered either a der. from amā (see amājāta in same meaning) or to be spelt amāya which metri

causa may be written ā°] "born in the house" (cp. semantically Gr. i)qagenh/s > indigenous), inborn, being by birth, in cpd. °dāsa (dāsī) a born slave, a slave by birth J VI.117 (= gehadāsiyā kucchismiŋ jātadasī C.), 285 (= dāsassa dāsiyā kucchimhi jātadāsā).
Āmāsaya [āma2 + āsaya, cp. Sk. āmāśaya & āmāśraya] receptacle of undigested food, i. e. the stomach Vism 260; KhA 59. Opp. pakkāsaya.
Āmilāka (nt.?) [etym.?] a woollen cover into which a floral pattern is woven DA I.87.
Āmisa (nt.) [der. fr. āma raw, q. v. for etym. -- Vedic āmis (m.); later Sk. āmiṣa (nt.), both in lit. & fig. meaning] <-> 1. originally raw meat; hence prevailing notion of "raw, unprepared, uncultivated"; thus °khāra raw lye Vin I. 206. -- 2. "fleshy, of the flesh" (as opposed to mind or spirit), hence material, physical; generally in opposition to dhamma (see dhamma B 1. a. and also next no.), thus at M I.12 (°dāyāda); It 101 (id.); A I.91 = It 98 (°dāna material gifts opp. to spiritual ones); Dhs 1344 (°paṭisanthāra hospitality towards bodily needs, cp. Dhs trsl. 350). -- 3. food, esp. palatable food (cp. E. sweetmeat); food for enjoyment, dainties Vin II.269 sq.; J II.6; Miln 413 (lok°); DA I.83 (°sannidhi), -- 4. bait S I.67; IV.158; J IV.57, 219; VI.416; DA I.270. -- 5. gain, reward, money, douceur, gratuity, "tip" PvA 36, 46; esp. in phrase °kiñcikkha--hetu for the sake of some (little) gain S II.234; A I.128; V.265, 283 sq., 293 sq.; Pug 29; Pv II.83 (= kiñci āmisaŋ patthento PvA 107); Miln 93; VvA 241 (= bhogahetu). -- 6. enjoyment Pv II.82 (= kāmāmise--laggacitto PvA 107). -- 7. greed, desire, lust Vin I.303 (°antara out of greed, selfish, opp. mettacitto); A III.144 (id.), 184 (id.); I.73 (°garū parisā); J V.91 (°cakkhu); Ps II.238 (mār°). See also cpds. with nir° and sa°.
Āmuñcati [ā + mtic] to put on, take up; to be attached to, cling to DhsA 305. -- pp. āmutta (q. v.).
Āmutta [Sk. āmukta, pp. of ā + muc, cp. also BSk. āmukta jewel Divy 2, 3 etc., a meaning which might also be seen in the later Pāli passages, e. g. at PvA 134. Semantically cp. ābharaṇa] having put on, clothed in, dressed with, adorned with (always °--) D I.104 (°mālābharaṇa); Vin II.156 = Vv 208 (°maṇi--kuṇd̤ala); S I.211; J IV.460; V. 155; VI.492; Vv 721 (= paṭimukka); 802 (°hatthābharaṇa); Pv II.951 (°maṇikuṇd̤ala);J IV.183; VvA 182.
Āmeṇd̤ita (or Āmed̤ita) [Sk. āmred̤ita fram ā + mred̤, dialectical] -- (nt.) sympathy in °ŋ karoti to show sympathy (? so Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 106) DA I.228 = SnA 155 (v. l. at DA āmed̤ita).
Āmo = āma D I.192, 3.
Āmoda [Sk. āmoda, fr. ā + mud] that which pleases; fragrance, perfume Dāvs V.51.
Āmodanā (f.) [fr. ā + mud] rejoicing Dhs 86, 285.
Āmodamāna (adj.) [ppr. med. of āmodeti] rejoicing, glad S I.100 (v. l. anu°) = It 66; Vv 648 (= pamodamāna VvA 278); J V.45.
Āmodita [pp. fr. āmodeti] pleased, satisfied, glad J I.17 (V.80); V.45 (°pamodita highly pleased); Miln 346.
Āmodeti [Sk. āmodayati, Caus. of ā + mud] to please, gladden, satisfy Th 1, 649 (cittaŋ); J V.34. -- pp. āmodita (q. v.).
Āya [Sk. āya; ā + i] 1. coming in, entrance M III.93. <-> 2. tax J V.113. -- 3. income, earning, profit, gain (opp. vaya loss) A IV.282 = 323; Sn 978; J I.228; KhA 38 (in expln. of kāya), 82 (in etym. of āyatana); PvA 130. <-> 4. (āyā f.?) a lucky dice ("the incomer") J VI.281.
--kammika a treasurer DhA I.184. --kusala clever in earnings Nett 20. --kosalla proficiency in money making D III.220 (one of the three kosallas); Vbh 325. --pariccāga expediture of one's income PvA 8. --mukha (lit.) entrance, inflow, going in D I.74 (= āgamana--magga DA 1.78); M II.15; A II.166; (fig.) revenue income, money SnA 173.

Āyata [Sk. āyata, pp. of ā + yam, cp. āyamati] -- 1. (adj.) outstretched, extended, long, in length (with numeral) D III.73 (ñātikkhaya, prolonged or heavy?); M I.178 (dīghato ā°; tiriyañ ca vitthata); J I.77, 273 (tettiŋsɔ--angulɔāyato khaggo); III.438; Vv 8415 (°aŋsa; cp. expln. at VvA 339); SnA 447; DhsA 48; PvA 152 (dāṭhā fangs; lomā hair), 185 (°vaṭṭa); Sdhp 257. -- 2.
(n.) a bow J III.438.
--agga having its point (end) stretched forward, i. e. in the future (see āyati) It 15, 52. --paṇhin having long eye--lashes (one of the signs of a Mahāpurisa) D II.17 = III.143. --pamha a long eye--lash Th 2, 384 (= dīghapakhuma ThA 250).
Āyataka (adj.) [= āyata] -- 1. long. extended, prolonged, kept up, lasting Vin II.108 (gītassara); A III.251 (id.); J I.362. -- 2. sudden, abrupt, instr. °ena abruptly Vin II.237.
Āyatana (nt.) [Sk. āyatana, not found in the Vedas; but freq. in BSk. From ā + yam, cp. āyata. The pl. is āyatanā at S
IV.70. -- For full definition of term as seen by the Pāli Commentators see Bdhgh's expln at DA I. 124, 125, with which cp. the popular etym. at KhA 82: "āyassa vā tananato āyatassa vā saŋsāradukkhassa nayanato āyatanāni" and at Vism 527 "āye tanoti āyatañ ca nayatī ti ā."] -- 1. stretch, extent, reach, compass, region; sphere, locus, place, spot; position, occasion (corresponding to Bdhgh's definition at DA I.124 as "samosaraṇa") D III.241, 279 (vimutti°); S II.41, 269; IV.217; V.119 sq., 318. sq.; A III.141 (ariya°); V.61 (abhibh°, q. v.) Sn 406 (rajass° "haunt of passion" = rāgādi--rajassa uppatti--deso SnA 381); J I.80 (raj°). Freq. in phrase araññ° a lonely spot, a spot in the forest J I.173; VvA 301; PvA 42, 54. -- 2. exertion, doing, working, practice, performance (comprising Bdhgh's definition at DA I.124 as paññatti), usually --°, viz. kamm° Nd1 505; Vbh 324, 353; kasiṇ°
A V.46 sq., 60; Ps I.28; titth° A I.173, 175; Vbh 145, 367; sipp° (art, craft) D I.51; Nd2 505; Vbh 324, 353; cp. an°
non--exertion, indolence, sluggishness J V.121. -- 3. sphere of perception or sense in general, object of thought, sense--organ & object; relation, order. -- Cpd. p. 183 says rightly: "āyatana cannot be rendered by a single English word to cover both sense--organs (the mind being regarded as 6th sense) and sense objects". -- These āyatanāni (relations, functions, reciprocalities) are thus divided into two groups, inner (ajjhattikāni) and outer (bāhirāni), and comprise the foll.: (a) ajjhatt°: 1. cakkhu eye, 2. sota ear, 3. ghāna nose, 4. jivhā tongue, 5. kāya body, 6. mano mind; (b) bāh°: 1. rūpa visible object, 2.
sadda sound, 3. gandha odour, 4. rasa taste, 5. phoṭṭhabba tangible object, 6. dhamma cognizable object. -- For details as regards connotation & application see Dhs trsl. introduction li sq. Cpd. 90 n. 2; 254 sq. -- Approximately covering this meaning (3) is Bdhgh's definition of āyatana at DA I.124 as sañjāti and as kāraṇa (origin & cause, i. e. mutually occasioning & conditioning relations or adaptations). See also Nd2 under rūpa for further classifications. -- For the above mentioned 12 āyatanāni see the foll. passages: D II.302 sq.; III.102, 243; A III.400; V.52; Sn 373 (cp. SnA 366); Ps I.7, 22, 101, 137; II. 181, 225, 230; Dhs 1335; Vbh 401 sq.; Nett 57, 82; Vism 481; ThA 49, 285. Of these 6 are mentioned at S I.113, II.3; IV.100, 174 sq.; It 114; Vbh 135 sq., 294; Nett 13, 28, 30; Vism 565 sq. Other sets of 10 at Nett 69; of 4 at D II.112, 156; of 2 at D II.69. -- Here also belongs ākāsɔ ānañcɔ āyatana, ākiñcaññ° etc. (see under ākāsa etc. and s. v.), e. g. at D I.34 sq., 183; A IV.451 sq.; Vbh 172, 189, 262 sq.; Vism 324 sq. -- Unclassified passages: M I.61; II.233; III.32, 216, 273; S I.196; II.6, 8, 24, 72 sq.;
III.228; IV.98; V.426; A I.113, 163, 225; III.17, 27, 82, 426; IV.146, 426; V.30, 321, 351, 359; Nd1 109, 133, 171, 340; J I.38 1 (paripuṇṇa°); Vbh 412 sq. (id.).
--uppāda birth of the āyatanas (see above 3) Vin I.185. --kusala skilled in the ā. M III.63. --kusalatā skill in the spheres (of sense) D III.212; Dhs 1335. --ṭṭha founded in the sense--organs Ps I.132; II.121.
Āyatanika (adj.) [fr. āyatana] belonging to the sphere of (some special sense, see āyatana 3) S IV.126 (phass° niraya & sagga).
Āyati (f.) [fr. ā + yam, cp. Sk. āyati] "stretching forth", extension, length (of time), future. Only (?) in acc. āyatiŋ (adv.) in future Vin II.89, 185; III.3; Sn 49; It 115 (T. reads āyati but cp. p. 94 where T. āyatiŋ, v. l. āyati); J I.89; V.431; DA I 236.
Āyatika (adj.) [fr. last] future S I.142.
Āyatikā (f.) [of āyataka] a tube, waterpipe Vin II.123.
Āyatta [Sk. āyatta, pp. of ā + yat]. -- 1. striving, active, ready, exerted J V.395 (°mana = ussukkamana C.). <-> 2. striven

after, pursued J I.341. -- 3. dependent on Vism 310 (assāsa--passāsa°); Nett 194; Sdhp 477, 605.
Āyanā (f.) [?] at DhsA 259 and Vism 26 is a grammarian's construction, abstracted from f. abstr. words ending in °āyanā,
e. g. kankhā > kankhāyanā, of which the correct expln. is a derivation fr. caus.--formation kankhāyati > kankhāy + a + nā. What the idea of Bdhgh. was in propounding his expln. is hard to say, perhaps he related it to i and understood it to be the same as āyāna.
Āyamati [ā + yam] to stretch, extend, stretch out, draw out Miln 176, usually in ster. phrase piṭṭhi me āgilāyati tam
ahaŋ āyamissāmi "my back feels weak, I will stretch it" Vin II.200; D III.209; M I.354; S IV.184; J I.491. <-> Besides this in commentaries e. g. J III.489 (mukhaŋ āyamituŋ).
Āyasa (adj.) [Sk. āyasa, of ayas iron] made of iron S II. 182; A III.58; Dh 345; J IV.416; V.81; Vv 845 (an°? cp. the rather strange expln. at VvA 335).
Āyasakya (nt.) dishonour, disgrace, bad repute A IV.96; J V.17; VvA 110; usually in phrase °ŋ pāpuṇāti to fall into
disgrace Th 1, 292; J II.33 = 271; III.514. [Bdhgh. on A IV.96 explains it as ayasaka + ya with guṇa of the initial, cp. ārogya].
Āyasmant (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant, the P. form showing assimilation of u to a] lit. old, i. e. venerable; used, either as adj. or absolute as a respectful appellation of a bhikkhu of some standing (cp. the semantically identical thera). It occurs usually in nom. āyasmā and is expld. in Nd by typical formula "piya--vacanaŋ garu°, sagārava--sappaṭissâdhivacanaŋ", e. g. Nd1 140, 445; Nd2 130 on var. Sn loci (e. g. 814, 1032, 1040, 1061, 1096). -- Freq. in all texts, of later passages see SnA 158; PvA 53, 54, 63, 78. -- See also āvuso.
Āyāga [ā + yāga of yaj] sacrificial fee, gift; (m.) recipient of a sacrifice or gift (deyyadhamma) Sn 486 (= deyyadhammānaŋ adhiṭṭhāna--bhūta SnA 412); Th 1, 566; J VI. 205 (°vatthu worthy objact of sacrificial fees).
Āyācaka (adj.--n.) [fr. ā + yāc] one who begs or prays, petitioner Miln 129.
Āyācati [ā + yāc, cp. Buddh. Sk. āyācate Divy 1.] -- 1. to request, beg, implore, pray to (acc.) Vin III.127; D I.240; PvA
160. -- 2. to make a vow, to vow, promise A I. 88; J I.169 = V.472; I.260; II.117. -- pp. āyācita (q. v.).
Āyācana (nt.) [fr. āyācati] -- 1. asking, adhortation, addressing (t. t. g. in expln. of imperative) SnA 43, 176, 412. -- 2. a
vow, prayer A I.88; III.47; J I.169 = V.472.
Āyācita [pp. of āyācati] vowed, promised J I.169 (°bhattajātaka N.).
Āyāta [pp. of āyāt.; cp. BSk. āyāta in same meaning at Jtm 210] gone to, undertaken Sdhp 407.
Āyāti [ā + yāti of yā] to come on or here, to come near, approach, get into S I.240; Sn 669; Sn p. 116 (= gacchati SnA 463); J IV.410; pv II.1212 (= āgacchati PvA 158); DhA I.93 (imper. āyāma let us go). -- pp. āyāta.
Āyāna (nt.) [fr. ā + yā to go] coming, arrival: see āyanā.
Āyāma [fr. ā + yam, see āyamati] -- 1. (lit.) stretching, stretching out, extension Vin I.349 = J III.488 (mukh°). <-> 2. (appl.) usually as linear measure: extension, length (often combd. with and contrasted to vitthāra breadth or width & ubbedha height), as n. (esp. in abl. āyāmato & instr. āyāmena in length) or as adj. (--°): J I.7, 49 (°ato tīṇi yojanasatāni, vitthārato ad̤d̤hatiyāni); III.389; Miln 17 (ratanaŋ soḷasahatthaŋ āyāmena aṭṭhahatthaŋ vitthārena), 282 (ratanaŋ catuhatthɔ āyāmaŋ); Vism 205 (+ vitth°); Khb 133 (+ vitthāra & parikkhepa); VvA 188 (soḷasayojan°), 199 (°vitthārehi), 221 (°ato + vitth°); PvA 77 (+ vitth°), 113 (id. + ubbedha); DhA I.17 (saṭṭhi--yojan°).

Āyāsa [cp. Sk. āyāsa, etym.?] trouble, sorrow, only neg. an° (adj.) peaceful, free from trouble A IV.98; Th 1, 1008.
Āyu (nt.) [Vedic āyus; Av. āyu, gradation form of same root as Gr. ai)w/n "aeon", ai)e/n always; Lat. aevum, Goth. aiws.
Ohg. ēwa, io always; Ger. ewig eternal; Ags. āē eternity, ā always (cp. ever and aye)] life, vitality, duration of life, longevity D III.68, 69, 73, 77; S III.143 (usmā ca); IV.294; A I.155; II.63, 66 (addh°); III.47; IV.76, 139; Sn 694, 1019; It 89; J I.197 (dīgh°); Vv 555 (cp. VvA 247 with its definition of divine life as comprising 30 600 000 years); Vism 229 (length of man's āyu = 100 years); Dhs 19, 82, 295, 644, 716; Sdhp 234, 239, 258. -- Long or divine life, dibbaŋ āyu is one of the 10 attributes of ādhipateyya or majesty (see ṭhāna), thus at Vin I.294; D III.146; S IV.275 sq.; A I.115; III. 33; IV.242, 396; Pv II.959 (= jīvitaŋ PvA 136).
--ūhā see āyūhā. --kappa duration of life Miln 141; DhA I.250. --khaya decay of life (cp. jīvita--kkhaya) D I.17 (cp. DA I.110); III.29. --pamāṇa span or measure of life time D II.3; A I.213, 267; II.126 sq.; IV.138, 252 sq., 261; V.172; Pug 16; Vbh 422 sq.; SnA 476. --pariyanta end of life It 99; Vism 422. --sankhaya exhaustion of life or lifetime Dpvs V.102. --sankhāra (usually pl. °ā) constituent of life, conditions or properties resulting in life, vital principle D II.106; M I.295 sq.; S II.266; A IV.311 sq.; Ud 64; J IV.215; Miln 285; Vism 292; DhA I.129; PvA 210. Cp. BSk. āyuḥ--saŋskāra Divy 203.
Āyuka (--°) (adj.) [fr. āyu] -- being of life; having a life or age A IV.396 (niyat°); VvA 196 (yāvatāyukā dibbasampatti divine bliss lasting for a lifetime). Esp. freq. in combn. with dīgha (long) and appa (short) as dīghāyuka A IV.240; PvA 27; appāyuka A IV.247; PvA 103; both at Vism 422. In phrase vīsati--vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu at the time when men lived 20 000 years D II.5--12 (see Table at Dial. II.6); DhA II.9; PvA 135; dasa--vassasahassɔāyukesu manussesu (10 000 years) PvA 73; cattāḷīsa° DhA I.103; catusaṭṭhi--kappɔāyukā subhakiṇhā Vism 422.
Āyukin (adj.) [fr. āyu] = āyuka; in appāyukin short lived Vv 416.
Āyuta (adj.) [Sk. ayuta, pp. of ā + yu, yuvati] -- 1. connected with, endowed, furnished with Th 1, 753 (dve pannarasɔāyuta due to twice fifteen); Sn 301 (nārī--varagaṇ° = °saŋyutta SnA 320); Pv II.124 (nānā--saragaṇ° = °yutta PvA 157). -- 2. seized, conquered, in dur° hard to conquer, invincible J VI.271 (= paccatthikehi durāsada C.).
Āyutta [Sk. āyukta; pp. of ā + yuj] -- 1. yoked, to connected with, full of Pv I.1014 (tejasɔāyuta T., but PvA 52 reads °āyutta and explns. as samāyutta); PvA 157 (= ākiṇṇa of Pv II.124). -- 2. intent upon, devoted to S I.67.
Āyuttaka (adj.--n.) [āyutta + ka] one who is devoted to or entrusted with, a trustee, agent, superintendent, overseer J I.230 (°vesa); IV.492; DhA I.101, 103, 180.
Āyudha is the Vedic form of the common Pāli form āvudha weapon, and occurs only spuriously at D I.9 (v. l. āvudha). Āyuvant (adj.) [fr. āyu] advanced in years, old, of age Th 1, 234.
Āyusmant (adj.) [Sk. āyuṣmant; see also the regular P. form āyasmant] having life or vitality PvA 63 (āyusmāviññāṇa feeling or sense of vitality; is reading correct?).
Āyussa (adj.) [Sk. *āyuṣya] connected with life, bringing (long) life A III.145 dhamma).
Āyūhaka (adj.) [fr. āyūhati] keen, eager, active Miln 207 (+ viriyavā).
Āyūhati [ā + y + ūhati with euphonic y, fr. Vedic ūhati, ūh1, a gradation of vah (see etym. under vahati). Kern's etym. on Toev. 99 = āyodhati is to be doubted, more acceptable is Morris'expln. at J.P.T.S. 1885, 58 sq., although contradictory in part.] lit. to push on or forward, aim at, go for, i. e. (1) to endeavour, strain, exert oneself S I.1 (ppr. anāyūhaŋ unstriving), 48; J VI.35 (= viriyaŋ karoti C.), 283 (= vāyamati C.). -- (2) to be keen on (w. acc.), to cultivate, pursue, do Sn 210 (= karoti SnA 258); Miln 108 (kammaŋ ūyūhitvā), 214 (kammaŋ āyūhi), 326 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āyūhita (q. v.).

Āyūhana (adj.--nt.) [fr. āyūhati] -- 1. endeavouring, striving, Ps I.10 sq., 32, 52; II.218; Vism 103, 212, 462, 579. f. āyūhanī Dhs 1059 ("she who toils" trsl.) = Vbh 361 = Nd2 taṇhā 1. (has āyūhanā). -- 2. furtherance, pursuit DA I.64
Āyūhā f. [āyu + ūhā] life, lifetime, only in °pariyosāna at the end of (his) life PvA 136, 162; VvA 319. Āyūhāpeti [Caus. II. fr. āyūhati] to cause somebody to toil or strive after DhsA 364.
Āyūhita [*Sk. ā + ūhita, pp. of ūh] busy, eager, active Miln 181.
Āyoga [Sk. āyoga, of ā + yuj; cp. āyutta] -- 1. binding, bandage Vin II.135; Vv 3341; VvA 142 (°paṭṭa). -- 2. yoke Dhs 1061 (avijj°), 1162. -- 3. ornament, decoration Nd1 226; J III.447 (°vatta, for v. l. °vanta?). -- 4. occupation, devotion to, pursuit, exertion D I.187; Dh 185 (= payoga--karaṇa DhA III.238). -- 5. (t. t.) obligation, guarantee(?) SnA 179. -- Cp. sam°.
Ārakatta (nt.) [*ārakāt + tvaŋ] warding off, keeping away, holding aloof, being far from (c. gen.); occurring only in pop. etym. of arahant at A IV.145; DhA IV.228; DA I.146 = VvA 105, 106 = PvA 7; cp. DhsA 349.
Ārakā (adv.) [Sk. ārāt & ārakāt, abl. form. fr. *āraka, see ārā2] far off, far from, away from, also used as prep. c. abl. and as adj. pl. keeping away from, removed, far Vin II.239 = A IV.202 (sanghamhā); D I.99, 102 (adj.) 167; M I.280 (adj.) S II.99; IV.43 sq.; A I.281; It 91; J I.272; III.525; V.451; Miln 243; VvA 72, 73 (adj. + viratā).
Ārakkha [ā + rakkha] watch, guard, protection, care D II.59; III.289; S IV.97, 175, 195; A II.120; III.38; IV. 266, 270, 281 (°sampadā), 322 (id.), 400; V.29 sq.; J I.203; II.326; IV.29 (°purisa); V.212 (°ṭṭhāna, i. e. harem), 374 (°parivāra); Pug 21 (an°), 24; Miln 154; Vism 19
(°gocara preventive behaviour, cautiousness); SnA 476 (°devatā); KhA 120 (id.), 169; DhA II.146; PvA 195; Sdhp 357, 365.
Ārakkhlka [fr. ārakkha] a guard, watchman J IV.29. Ārakkheyya see arakkheyya.
Āragga (nt.) [ārā + agga; Sk. ārāgra of ārā an awl, a prick] the point of an awl, the head of certain arrows, having the shape of an awl, or an arrow of that kind (see Halayudha p. 151) A I.65; Sn 625, 631; Dh 401, 407; Vism 306; DhA II 51; IV.181.
Āracayāracayā [ā + racayā a ger. or abl. form. fr. ā + *rac, in usual Sk. meaning "to produce", but here as a
sound--root for slashing noise, in reduplication for sake of intensification. Altogether problematic] by means of hammering, slashing or beating (like beating a hide) Sn 673 (gloss ārajayārajayā fr. ā + *rañj or *raj). -- SnA 481 explns. the passage as follows: ārajayārajayā; i. e. yathā manussā allacammaŋ bhūmiyaŋ pattharitvā khīlehi ākoṭenti, evaŋ ākoṭetvā pharasūhi phāḷetvā ekam ekaŋ koṭiŋ chinditvā vihananti, chinnachinnakoṭi punappuna samuṭṭhāti; āracayāracayā ti pi pāṭho, āviñjitvā (v. l. BB. āvijjhitvā) āviñjitvā ti attho. -- Cp. ārañjita.
Āraññaka (adj.) [fr. arañña + ka] belonging to solitude or the forest, sequestered; living in the forest, fond of seclusion, living as hermits (bhikkhū). Freq. spelt araññaka (q. v.). -- Vin I.92 (bhikkhū); II.32, 197, 217 (bh.), 265 (bh.); M I.214; A III.100 sq., 219; IV.21; V.66; J III.174 (v. l. BB. a°); Miln 342; DhA II.94 (vihāra).
Āraññakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āraññaka, see also araññakatta] the habit of sequestration or living in solitude M I.214; III.40; A I.38.
Āraññika (adj.) = āraññaka Vin III.15; A I.24; Pug 69; Vism 61, 71 (where defined); Miln 341.
Ārañjita [in form = Sk. *ārañjita, ā + pp. of rañjayati, Caus. of rañj or raj, but in meaning different. Perhaps to rac (as

*racita) to furnish with, prepare, or better still to be regarded as an idiomatic Pāli form of soundroot *rac (see āracayā°) mixed with rañj, of which we find another example in the double spelling of āracayā (& ārajayā) q. v.] furrowed, cut open, dug up, slashed, torn (perhaps also "beaten") M I.178 (hatthipadaŋ dantehi ārañjitaŋ an elephant--track bearing the marks of tusks, i. e. occasional slashes or furrows).
Ārata [Sk. ārata, pp. of ā + ram, cp. ārati] leaving off, keeping away from, abstaining J IV.372 (= virata); Nd2 591 (+ virata paṭivirata).
Ārati (f.) [Sk. ārati, ā + ram] leaving off, abstinence Vv 639 (= paṭivirati VvA 263); in exegetical style occurring in typ. combn. with virati paṭivirati veramaṇī, e. g. at Nd2 462; Dhs 299.
Āratta (nt.?) [Sk. cp. ārakta, pp. of ā + raj] time, period (orig. affected, tinted with), only in cpd. vassāratta the rainy season, lent J IV.444; Dāvs II.74.
Āraddha (adj.) [pp. of ā + rabh] begun, started, bent on, undertaking, holding on to, resolved, firm A I.148 (āraddhaŋ me viriyaŋ It 30; PvA 73 (ṭhapetuŋ began to place), 212 (gantuŋ). Cp. ārādhaka 1.
--citta concentrated of mind, decided, settled D I.176; M I.414; S II.21; Sn p. 102; SnA 436. Cp. ārādheti 1. --viriya (adj.) strenuous, energetic, resolute Vin I.182; D III.252, 268, 282, 285; A I.24; Sn 68, 344; It 71 (opp. hīna--viriya); Nd2 131; Ps I.171; ThA 95. Cp. viriyārambha; f. abstr. °viriyatā M I.19.
Ārabbha (indecl.) [ger. of ārabhati2 in abs. function; cp. Sk. ārabhya meaning since, from] -- 1. beginning, under<->
taking etc., in cpd. °vatthu occasion for making an effort, concern, duty, obligation D III.256 = A IV.334 (eight such occasions enumd). -- 2. (prep. with acc.) lit. beginning with, taking (into consideration), referring to, concerning, with reference to, about D I.180; A II.27 = It 103 (senāsanaŋ ā.); Sn 972 (upekhaŋ; v. l. ārambha; C. uppādetvā); Pv I.41 (pubbe pete ā.); DhA I.3; II.37; PvA 3 (seṭṭhiputta--petaŋ ā.), 16, and passim.
Ārabhati1 [not with Morris J.P.T.S. 1889, 202 fr. rabh and identical with ārabhati2, but with Kern, Toev. s. v. identical with Sk. ālabhate, ā + labh meaning to seize the sacrificial animal in order to kill it; cp. nirārambha] to kill, destroy M I.371 (pāṇaŋ).
Ārabhati2 & Ārabbhati
Ārabhati2 & Ārabbhati [ā + rabhati, Sk. ārabhati & ārambhati, ā + rabh] to begin, start, undertake, attempt S I.156 (ārabbhatha "bestir yourselves") = Miln 245 = Th 1, 256 (bh.); Pug 64 (bh.); viriyaŋ ārabhati to make an effort, to exert oneself (cp. ārambha) A IV.334. <-> aor. ārabhi DhA II.38 & ārabbhi PvA 35. -- ger. ārabbha, see sep. -- pp. āraddha (q. v.).
Ārambha [Sk. ārambha in meaning "beginning", fr ā + rabh (rambh) cp. ārabhati] -- 1. attempt, effort, inception of
energy (cp. Dhs trsl. 15 & K. S. p. 318 giving C. def. as kicca, karaṇīya, attha, i. e. 1. undertaking & duty, 2. object) S I.76 (mah°); V.66, 104 sq. (°dhātu); III.338 (id.), 166 (°ja; T. arabbhaja, v. l. ārambhaja to be preferred) = Pug 64; Miln 244; Net 41; DhsA 145. --viriyārambha (cp. āraddha--viriya) zeal, resolution, energy Vin II.197; S IV.175; A I.12, 16. -- 2. support, ground, object, thing Nett 70 sq., 107; an° unsupported, independent Sn 743 (= nibbāna SnA 507). Cp. also nirambha, upārambha, sārambha.
Ārammaṇa (nt.) [cp. Sk. ālambana, lamb, but in meaning confounded with rambh (see rabhati)] primary meaning "foundation", from this applied in the foll. senses: (1) support, help, footing, expedient, anything to be depended upon as a means of achieving what is desired, i. e. basis of operation, chance Sn 1069 (= ālambana, nissaya, upanissaya Nd2 132); Pv I.41 (yaŋ kiñcɔ ārammaṇaŋ katvā); ārammaṇaŋ labhati (+ otāraŋ labhati) to get the chance S II.268; IV.185. -- (2) condition,

ground, cause, means, esp. a cause of desire or clinging to life, pl. °ā causes of rebirth (interpreted by taṇhā at Nd1 429), lust Sn 474 (= paccayā SnA 410), 945 (= Nd1 429); KhA 23; DhA I.288 (sappāy°); PvA 279. -- (3) a basis for the working of the
mind & intellect; i. e. sense--object, object of thought or consciousness, the outward constituent in the relation of subject & object, object in general. In this meaning of "relation" it is closely connected with āyatana (see āyatana3), so that it sometimes takes its place, it is also similar to visaya. Cpd. 3 distinguishes a 5 fold object, viz. citta, cetasika, pasāda-- & sukhuma--rūpa, paññatti, nibbāna. See on term especially Cpd. 3, 14; Dhs trsl. XLI. & 209. -- A 1. sq.; IV.385; Sn 506; Ps I.57 sq., 84 (four ā.); II.97, 118, 143; Dhs 1 (dhamm° object of ideation), 180, 584, 1186 et passim; Vbh 12, 79, 92, 319, 332 (four); Nett 191 (six); Vism 87 sq., 375 (°sankantika), 430 sq. (in var. sets with ref. to var. objects), 533; DhsA 48, 127; VvA 11, 38. -- rūpārammaṇa lit. dependence on form, i. e. object of sight, visible form, especially striking appearance, visibility, sight D III.228; S III.53; A I.82; J I.304; II.439, 442; PvA 265. <-> ārammaṇaŋ karoti to make it an object (of intellection or intention), to make it one's concern (cp. Pv I.41, above 1). -- ārammaṇa--kusala clever in the objects (of meditation) S III.266; ā°--paccayatā relation of presentation (i. e. of subj. & obj.) Nett 80. -- (4) (--°) (adj.) being supported by, depending on, centred in, concentrated upon PvA 8 (nissay°), 98 (ek°); VvA 119 (buddh° pīti rapture centred in the Buddha).
Āraha (adj.) metri causa for araha deserving J VI.164.
Ārā1 (f.) [Sk. ārâ; *ēl "pointed", as in Ohg. āla = Ger. ahle, Ags. āēl = E awl; Oicel. alr] an awl; see cp. āragga. Perhaps a
der. of ārā is āḷakā (q. v.). Ārā2
Ārā2 (indecl.) [Vedic ārād, abl. as adv.; orig. a root der. fr. *ara remoteness, as in Sk. araṇa foreign & araṇya solitude q. v. under araṇa1 and arañña] far from, remote (from) (adv. as well as prep. with abl.) Sn 156 (pamādamhā), 736; Dh 253 (āsavakkhayā; DhA III.377 expls. by dūragata); J II.449 (jhānabhūmiyā; = dūre ṭhita C.); V.78 (saŋyame; = dūrato C.). See also ārakā.
--cāra [in this combn. by Kern, Toev. s. v. unecessarily expld. as ārā = ārya; cp. similar phrases under ārakā] a life remote (from evil) A IV.389. --cārin living far from evil leading a virtuous life D I.4; M I.179; III.33; A III. 216, 348; IV.249; V.138, 205; DA I.72 (= abrahmacariyato dūra--cārin).
Ārādhaka (adj.--n.) [fr. ā + rādh] 1. [perhaps for *āraddhaka because of analogy to āraddha of ā + rabh] successful, accomplishing or accomplished, undertaking, eager Vin I.70 (an° one who fails); M I.491; II.197 = A I.69 = Miln 243; S V.19; A V.329 (in correlation with āraddhaviriya). -- 2. pleasing, propitiating Miln 227; VvA 220 (°ikā f.).
Ārādhana (nt.) & °ā (f.) (either fr. ā + rādh or ā + rabh, cp. ārādhaka] satisfying, accomplishing; satisfaction, accomplishment D II.287 (opp. virādhanā failure); M I.479; II.199; A V.211 sq.; J IV.427.
Ārādhanīya (adj.) [grd. fr. ārādheti] to be attained, to be won; successful Vin I.70 (an°); J II.233 (dur°). Ārādhita [pp. of ārādheti; Sk. ārādhita, but BSk. ārāgita, e. g. Divy 131, 233] pleased Sdhp 510.
Ārādheti [Caus. of ā + rādh, in meaning 2 confused with ārabhati. In BSk. strangely distorted to ārāgayati; freq. in Divy
as well as Av. Ś] -- 1. to please, win favour, propitiate, convince J I.337 (dārake), 421, 452; II.72 (manusse); IV.274 (for ābhirādheti T.); Vism 73 (ārādhayanto Nāthassa vana--vāsena mānasaŋ); DhA II.71; Dāvs III.93 (ārādhayi sabbajanaŋ); Miln 352. In older literature only in phrase cittaŋ ārādheti to please one's heart, to gladden, win over, propitiate D I.118 sq., 175 (but cp. āraddha--citta to ārabhati); M I85, 341; S II.107; V.109; J II.372; Miln 25. -- 2. to attain, accomplish, fulfill, succeed S V.23 (maggaŋ), 82, 180, 294; It III. (v. l. ārām°); Sn 488 = 509. Cp. ārādhaka 1. -- pp. ārādhita (q. v.). -- See also parābhetvā.

Ārāma [Sk. ārāma, ā + ram] -- 1. pleasure, fondness of (--°), delight, always as adj. (--°) delighting in, enjoying, finding pleasure in (usually combd. with rata, e. g. dhammārāma dhammarata finding delight in the Dh.) S I.235; IV.389 sq. (bhav°, upādān°); A I.35, 37, 130; II.28 (bhāvan°); It 82 (dhamm°); Sn 327 (id.; expld. by SnA 333 as rati and "dhamme ārāmo assā ti"); Pug 53 (samagg°); Vbh 351. -- 2. a pleasure--ground, park, garden (lit. sport, sporting); classified at Vin III.49 as pupph° and phal° a park with flowers or with fruit (i. e. orchard), def. at DhA III.246 as Veḷuvana--Jīvakɔ ambavanɔ ādayo, i. e. the park of Veḷuvana, or the park belonging to Jīvaka or mango--groves in general. Therefore: (a) (in general) a park, resort for pastime etc. Vin II.109; D I. 106; Dh 188; Vv 795 (amb° garden of mangoes); VvA 305 (id.); Pv II.78 (pl. ārāmāni = ārāmɔ ûpavanāni PvA 102). -- (b) (in special) a private park, given to the Buddha or the Sangha for the benefit of the bhikkhus, where they meet & hold discussions about sacred & secular matters; a place of recreation and meditation, a meeting place for religious gatherings. Amongst the many ārāmas given to the bhikkhus the most renowned is that of Anāthapiṇd̤ika (Jetavana; see J I.92--94) D I.178; Vin IV.69; others more frequently mentioned are e. g. the park of Ambapālī (Vin I.233); of Mallikā (D I.178), etc. -- Vin I.39, 140, 283, 291; II.170; III.6, 45, 162; IV.85; A II.176; Dpvs V.18.
--pāla keeper of a park or orchard, gardener Vin II. 109; VvA 288. --ropa, --ropana planter, planting of pleasuregroves S I.33; PvA 151. --vatthu the site of an Ārāma Vin I.140; II. 170; III.50, 90.
Ārāmakinī (f.) see ārāmika.
Ārāmatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ārāma 1] pleasure, satisfaction A II.28; III.116; Vbh 381; Miln 233.
Ārāmika (adj.) [fr. ārāma] 1. (to ārāma 1) finding delight in, fond of (c. gen.) (or servant in general?) Miln 6 (sanghassa
trsl. at the service of the order). -- 2. (to ārāma 2) belonging to an Ārāma, one who shares the congregation, an attendant of the Ārāma Vin I.207 sq.; II.177 (& °pesaka), 211; III.24; IV.40; V.204; A II.78 (°samaṇuddesa); III.109 (id.), 275 (°pesaka); J I.38 (°kicca) Vism 74 (°samaṇuddesa). -- f. ārāmakiṇī a female attendant or visitor of an Ārāma Vin I.208.
Ārāva [cp. Sk. ārāva, fr. ā + ru] cry, sound, noise Dāvs IV.46.
Āraha (nt.) only in pl. gihīnaŋ ārahāni, things proper to laymen, D III.163. Āriya in anāriya at Sn 815 is metric for anariya (q. v.).
Āruṇṇa (nt.) [orig. pp of ā + rud] weeping, crying, lamenting Miln 357.
Āruppa (adj.) [fr. arūpa as ā (= a2) -- *rūpya] formless, incorporeal; nt. formless existence D III.275; M I.410, cp. 472; III.163; S I.131 (°ṭṭhāyin); II.123; A IV.316; It 61; Sn 754; J I.406; Dhs 1385 (cp. trsl. 57); Vism 338; DA I.224; SnA 488, 508; Sdhp 5, 10; the four: Vism III, 326 sq.
Āruhati [ā + ruh] to climb, ascend, go up or on to Sn 1014 (aor. āruhaŋ); Sdhp 188; ger. āruhitvā Sn 321 & āruyha J VI.452; Sn 139 (v. l. abhiruyha); It 71. <-> Caus. āropeti (q. v.).
Ārūgya see ārogya.
Ārūḷha [pp. of āruhati] -- 1. ascended, mounted, gone up, gone on to IV.137; J VI.452 (T. āruḷha); Vism 135 (nekkhamma--paṭipadaŋ an°); VvA 64 (magga°); PvA 47 (°nāva), 56 (hatthi°). -- 2. come about, effected, made, done PvA 2, 144 (cp. BSk. pratijñām ārūd̤ha having taken a vow Divy 26). -- 3. (of an ornament) put on (to), arrayed J VI.153, 488.
Ārūha see āroha.
Ārogatā (f.) [abstr. fr. a + roga + tā] freedom from illness, health Miln 341.
Ārogya (nt.) [abstr. fr. aroga, i. e. ā (= a2) + roga + ya] absence of illness, health D I.11; III.220 (°mada), 235 (°sampadā);

M I.451 (T. ārūgya, v. l. ārogya), 508, 509; S II.109; A I.146 (°mada); II.143; III.72; V.135 sq.; Sn 749, 257 = Dh 204 = J III.196; Nd1 160; Vism 77 (°mada pride of health); PvA 129, 198; Sdhp 234.
Ārocāpana (nt.) [fr. ārocāpeti, Caus. of āroceti] announcement DhA II.167.
Ārocāpeti (Caus. II. of āroceti] to make some one announce, to let somebody know, usually in phrase kālaŋ ā. Sn p.
111; J I.115, 125; DhA II.89; PvA 141.
Ārocita [pp. of āroceti] announced, called Vin II.213 (kāla).
Āroceti [ā + roceti, Caus. of ruc; cp. BSk. ārocayati Sp. Av. Ś I.9 etc.] to relate, to tell, announce, speak to, address D
I.109, 224; Pv II.89 (aor, ārocayi); PvA 4, 13 (aññamaññaŋ anārocetvā not speaking to each other), 81, 274 & freq. passim. -- pp. ārocita; Caus. II. ārocāpeti (q. v.).
Ārodana (nt.) [fr. ā + rud, cp. āruṇṇa] crying, lamenting A III.268 sq.; J I.34; DhA I.184; II.100. Āropana (nt.) [fr. āropeti] "putting on to", impaling Miln 197 (sūl°), 290 (id.).
Āropita [pp. of āropeti] -- 1. produced, come forward, set up PvA 2. -- 2. effected, made S III.12; PvA 92, 257. -- 3. put on (to a stake), impaled PvA 220 (= āvuta).
Āropeti [Caus. of āruhati]. -- 1. to make ascend, to lead up to (w. acc.) PvA 76 (pāsādaŋ), 160 (id.) -- 2. to put on, take up
to (w. acc. or loc.) Pv II.92 (yakkhaŋ yānaŋ āropayitvāna); PvA 62 (sarīraŋ citakaŋ ā.), 100 (bhaṇd̤aŋ sakaṭesu ā.). -- 3. to put on, commit to the care of, entrust, give over to (w. loc.) J I.227; PvA 154 (rajjaŋ amaccesu ā.). -- 4. to bring about, get ready, make PvA 73, 257 (sangahaŋ ā. make a collection); SnA 51, 142. <-> 5. to exhibit, tell, show, give S I.160 (ovādaŋ); Miln
176 (dosaŋ); DhA II.75 (id.) -- 6. vādaŋ āropeti to refute a person, to get the better of (gen.) Vin I.60; M II.122; S I.160. -- pp. āropita (q. v.).
Āroha (--°) [fr. ā + ruh] -- 1. climbing up, growth, increase, extent, in cpd. °pariṇāha length & circumference S II.206; A I.288; II.250; IV.397; V.19; J III.192; V. 299; VI.20; Vbh 345 (°māna + pariṇāha--māna); SnA 382. -- 2. one who has climbed up, mounted on, a rider, usually in cpd. ass° & hatth° horse--rider & elephantrider S IV.310; A II.166 = III.162 (T. ārūha); IV.107; DhsA 305. -- 3. outfit, possession (or increase, as 1?) Sn 420 (vaṇṇ°).
Ārohaṇa (nt.) [fr. ā + ruh] climbing, ascending; ascent J I.70; VI.488; Miln 352; Vism 244; PvA 74.
Ālaka--manda [ālaya°?] at Vin II.152 is of uncertain reading and meaning ("open to view"? or "not having pegs" =
āḷaka?) vv. ll. āḷakamanta & ālakamandāra; Bdhgh on p. 321 explns. āḷakamandā ti ekangaṇā manussâbhikiṇṇā, i. e. full of a crowd of people, Ch. quotes ālakamandā as "the city of Kuvera" (cp. Sk. alakā).
Ālaggeti [ā + Caus. of lag] to (make) hang on to (loc.), to stick on, fasten to Vin II.110 (pattaŋ veḷagge ālaggetvā). Ālapati [ā + lapati] to address S I.177, 212; J V.201; SnA 42, 347, 383, 394 (= āmantayi of Sn 997), 487 (<-> avhayati);
PvA 11, 13, 33, 69.
Ālapana (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. ā + lap] talking to, addressing, conversation Vin III.73 (with ref. to exclam. "ambho"); J V.253
(°ā); Vism 23 (°ā); SnA 396; PvA 131 (re ti ā.).
Ālapanatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ālapana] speaking to, conversing with, conversation M I.331) (an°).
Ālamba [Sk. ālamba, ā + lamb] anything to hang on, support S I.53 (an° without support); Sn 173 (id. + appatiṭṭha); J

III.396; Miln 343; Sdhp 245, 463.
Ālambati [ā + lamb] to hang on to or up, to take hold of, to fasten to Vin I.28, J I.57; VI.192; Vv 8448; ThA 34. --
ālambeti id. VvA 32.
Ālambana (adj.--nt.) [fr. ā + lamb, cp. ālamba] (adj.) hanging down from, hanging up J III.396; IV.457; SnA 214. -- (nt.)
support, balustrade (or screen?) Vin II.117, 152 (°bāha) Miln 126.
Ālambara & Āḷambara (nt.) [Sk. ād̤ambara] a drum Vin I.15 (l); J II.344 (ḷ); V.390 (l); Vv 5418 (ḷ).
Ālaya (m. & nt.) [cp. Sk. ālaya, ā + lī, līyate, cp. allīna & allīyati, also nirālaya] -- 1. orig. roosting place, perch, i. e. abode settling place, house J I.10 (geh°); Miln 213; DhA II.162 (an° = anoka), 170 (= oka). -- 2. "hanging on", attachment, desire, clinging, lust S I.136 = Vin I.4 (°rāma "devoted to the things to which it clings" K. S.); Vin III.20, 111; S IV.372 (an°); V.421 sq. (id.); A II. 34, 131 (°rāma); III.35; It 88; Sn 177 (kām° = kāmesu taṇhā--diṭṭhi--vasena duvidho ālayo SnA 216), 535 (+ āsavāni), 635; Nett 121, 123 (°samugghāta); Vism 293 (id.), 497; Miln 203 (Buddh °ŋ akāsi?); DhA I.121; IV.186 (= taṇhā); SnA 468 (= anoka of Sn 366). -- 3. pretence, pretext, feint [cp. BSk. ālaya M Vastu III.314] J I.157 (gilān°), 438; III.533 (mat°); IV.37 (gabbhinī); VI 20, 262 (gilān°).
Ālayati see allīyati.
Ālassa (nt.) [Der. fr. alasa] sloth, idleness, laziness S I.43; D III.182; A IV.59; V.136; Sdhp 567. Spelling also ālasya S I.43
(v. l. BB); Vbh 352; Miln 289, and ālasiya J I.427; DA I.310; DhA I.299; VvA 43.
Ālāna & Āḷāna (nt.) [for ānāhana with substitution of l for n (cp. apilandhana for apinandh° and contraction of °āhana
to °āna originally meaning "tying to" then the thing to which anything is tied] a peg, stake, post, esp. one to which an elephant is tied J I.415; IV.308; DhA I.126 (ḷ) where all MSS. have āḷāhana, perhaps correctly.
Āli1 (m. or f.? [Sk. āḷi] a certain kind of fish J V.405.
Āli2 & Āḷi
Āli2 & Āḷi (f.) [Sk. ālī] a dike, embankment Vin II.256; M III.96; A II.166 (°pabbheda); III.28; J I.336; III.533, 334.
Ālika in saccālika at S IV.306 is sacc°alika distortion of truth, falsehood S IV.306.
Ālikhati [ā + likhati] to draw, delineate, copy in writing or drawing J I.71; Miln 51.
Ālinga [ā + ling] a small drum J V.156 (suvaṇṇ°--tala).
Ālingati [ā + ling] to embrace, enfold D I.230; III.73; J I.281; IV.21, 316, 438; V.8; Miln 7; DhA I.101: VvA 260.
Ālitta [pp. of ālimpati; Sk. ālipta] besmeared, stained Th 1, 737.
[Sk. alinda] a terrace or verandah before the house--door Vin I.248; II.153; D I.89; M II.119; S IV.290 (ḷ); A V.65 (ḷ); J VI.429; DA I.252; DhA I. 26; IV.196; SnA 55 (°ka--vāsin; v. l. alindaka); Mhvs 35, 3. As ālindaka at J III.283.
Ālippati Pass. of ālimpeti (q. v.).

Ālimpana (nt.) [for āḷimp° = Sk. ādīpana, see ālimpeti2] conflagration, burning, flame Miln 43.
Ālimpita [pp. of ālimpeti2] ignited, lit. A IV.102 (v. l. ālepita).
Ālimpeti1 [Sk. ālimpayati or ālepayati. ā + lip or limp] to smear, anoint Vin II.107; S IV.177 (vaṇaŋ). -- Caus. II. ālimpāpeti Vin IV.316. -- Pass. ālimpīyati Miln 74 & ālippati DhA IV.166 (v. l. for lippati). -- pp. ālitta (q. v.).
Ālimpeti2 [for Sk. ādīpayati, with change of d to l over ḷ and substitution of limp for ḷīp after analogy of roots in °mp, like lup > lump, lip > limp] to kindle, ignite, set fire to Vin II.138 (dāyo ālimpetabbo); III.85; D II.163 (citakaŋ); A I.257; DhA I.177 (āvāsaŋ read āvāpaŋ), 225; PvA 62 (kaṭṭhāni). -- pp. ālimpita (q. v.).
Ālu (nt.) [Sk. ālu & °ka; cognate with Lat. ālum & alium, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under alium] a bulbous plant, Radix Globosa Esculenta or Amorphophallus (Kern), Arum Campanulatum (Hardy) J IV.371 = VI.578; IV.373.
Āluka1 = ālu J IV.46 (C. for ālupa).
Āluka2 (adj.) [etym.?] susceptiblé of, longing for, affected with (--°) Vin I.288 (sīt°); DA I.198 (id.); J II.278 (taṇh° greedy).
Ālupa (nt.) [etym.? Kern, Toev. s. v. suggests ālu--a > āluva > ālupa] = āluka the edible root of Amorphophallus Campanulatus J IV.46 (= āluka--kaṇd̤a C.).
the form āluva occurs at Ap 237.
Ālumpakāra [reading not sure, to ālumpati or ālopa] breaking off, falling off (?) or forming into bits(?) DhA II.55
Ālumpati [ā + lup or lump, cp. ālopa] to pull out, break off M I.324.
Āluḷa (adj. [fr. ā + lul] being in motion, confusion or agitation, disturbed, agitated J VI.431.
Āluḷati [ā + lul; Sk. ālolati, cp. also P. āloḷeti] to move here & there, ppr. med. āluḷamāna agitated, whirling about DhA IV.47 (T. ālūl°; v. l. āḷul°) confuse DhsA 375. Caus. āluḷeti to set in motion, agitate, confound J II.9, 33. -- pp. āluḷita (q. v.).
Āluḷita [pp. of āluḷeti] agitated, confused J II.101; Miln 397 (+ khalita).
Ālepa [cp. Sk. ālepa, of ā + lip] ointment, salve, liniment Vin I.274; Miln 74; DhsA 249. Ālepana (nt.) [fr. ā + lip] anointing, application of salve D I.7 (mukkh°).
Āloka [ā + lok, Sk. āloka] seeing, sight (obj. & subj.), i. e. -- 1. sight, view, look S IV.128 = Sn 763; A III. 236 (āloke
nikkhitta laid before one's eye). anāloka without sight, blind Miln 296 (andha +). -- 2. light A I. 164 (tamo vigato ā. uppanno) = It 100 (vihato); A II. 139 (four lights, i.e. canda°, suriya°, agg°, paññ°, of the moon, sun, fire & wisdom); J II 34; Dhs 617 (opp. andhakāra); VvA 51 (dīp°). -- 3. (clear) sight, power of observation, intuition, in combn. with vijjā knowledge D II.33 =

S II.7 = 105, cp. Ps II.150 sq. (obhāsaṭṭhena, S A. on II.7). -- 4. splendour VvA 53; DvA 71.
--kara making light, bringing light, n. light--bringer It 108. --karaṇa making light, illumining It 108. --da giving light or
insight Th 1, 3. --dassana seeing light, i. e. perceiving Th 1, 422. --pharaṇa diffusing light or diffusion of light Vbh 334; Nett 89. --bahula good in sight, fig. full of foresight A III.432. --bhūta light J VI 459. --saññā consciousness or faculty of sight or perception D III.223; A II.45; III.93 --saññin conscious of sight, i. e. susceptible to sight or insight D III.49; M III.3; A II 211; III.92, 323; IV.437; V.207; Pug 69. --sandhi "break for the light", a slit to look through, an opening, a crack or casement Vin I.48 = II.209 = 218; II.172; III.65; IV.47; J IV.310; PvA 24.
Ālokana (nt.) [fr. ā + lok] looking at, regarding DA I.194.
Ālokita (nt.) [pp. of āloketi] looking before, looking at, looking forward (opp. vilokitaŋ looking behind or backward), always in combn. ālokita--vilokita in ster. phrase at D I.70 = e. g. A II.104, 106, 210; Pug 44, 45, 50; Vism 19; VvA 6; DA I.193 (ālokitaŋ purato pekkhanaŋ vil° anudisā p.).
Āloketar [n. ag. to āloketi] one who looks forward or before, a beholder DA I.194 (opp. viloketar). Āloketi [Sk. ālokayati, ā + lok] to look before, look at, regard, see DA I.193, 194. -- pp. ālokita (q. v.).
Ālopa [ā + lup, cp. ālumpati; BSk. ālopa, e. g. Av. Ś I. 173, 341; Divy 290, 481] a piece (cut off), a bit (of food) morsel,
esp. bits of food gathered by bhikkhus D I.5 = A V.206; III.176; A II 209; III.304; IV.318; Th 1, 1055; It 18; Pv II.17; Pug 58; Miln 231, 406; Vism 106; DA I.80 (= vilopa--karaṇaŋ).
Ālopati [ālopeti? ā + lopeti, Caus. of ālumpati] to break in, plunder, violate Th 1, 743.
Ālopika (adj.) [ālopa + ika] getting or having, or consisting of pieces (of food) A I.295; II.206; Pug 55.
Āloḷa [fr. ā + luḷ, cp. āluḷati & āloḷeti] confusion, uproar, agitation DhA I.38.
Āloḷī (f.) [a + luḷ] that which is stirred up, mud, in cpd. sītāloḷī mud or loam from the furrow adhering to the plough Vin I.206.
Āloḷeti [Caus. of āluḷati, cp. āluḷeti] to confuse, mix, shake together, jumble S I.175; J II.272, 363; IV.333; VI.331; Vism 105.
Āḷaka (or °ā f.) [Dimin of aḷa (?) or of āQ 1 (?). See Morris J.P.T.S. 1886, 158] -- 1. a thorn, sting, dart, spike, used either
as arrow--straightener Miln 418; DhA I.288; or (perhaps also for piece of bone, fishbone) in making up a comb VvA 349 (°sandhāpana = comb; how Hardy got the meaning of "alum" in Ind. to VvA is incomprehensible). -- 2 a peg, spike, stake or post (to tie an elephant to, cp. ālāna). Cp. II.13.
Vv 189 = 5024. See ālambara.
(adj.--n.) [= āṭavika] dwelling in forests, a forest--dweller S II.235. As Np. at Vism 208.
Āḷādvāraka (adj.) at J V.81, 82 is corrupt & should with v. l. perhaps better be read advāraka without doors. Cp. Kern, Toev. 29 (ālāraka?). J V.81 has āḷāraka only.
Āḷāra (adj.) [= aḷāra or uḷāra or = Sk. arāla?] thick, massed, dense or crooked, arched (?), only in cpd. °pamha with thick eyelashes Vv 6411 (= gopakhuma VvA 279); Pv III.35 (= vellita--dīgha--nīla--pamukha). Cp. alāra.
Āḷārika & °iya (adj.--n.) [Sk. ārālika, of uncertain etym.] a cook D I.51 (= bhattakāraka DA I.157); J V.296 (=

bhattakāraka C.); 307; VI.276 (°iya, C. °ika = sūpika); Miln 331.
Āḷāhana (nt.) [fr. ā + d̤ah or dah, see dahati] a place of cremation, cemetery D I.55; J I.287 (here meaning the funereal
fire) 402; III.505; Pv II.122; Vism 76; Miln 350; DA I.166; DhA I.26; III.276; PvA 92, 161, 163 (= sarīrassa dad̤d̤ha--ṭṭhāna). -- Note. For āḷāhana in meaning "peg, stake" see ālāna.
Āḷika at A III.352, 384 (an°) is preferably to be read āḷhika, see āḷhaka.
Āḷha (nt.) = āḷhaka; only at A III.52 (udak°), where perhaps better with v. l. to be read as āḷhaka. The id. p. at A II.55 has
ālhaka only.
Āḷhaka (m. & nt.) [Sk. ād̤haka, fr. *ād̤ha probably meaning "grain"] a certain measure of capacity, originally for grain; in
older texts usually applied to a liquid measure (udaka°). Its size is given by Bdhgh. at SnA 476 as follows: "cattāro patthā
āḷhakāni doṇaŋ etc." -- udakāḷhaka S V.400; A II.55 = III.337; VvA 155. -- In other connections at J I.419 (ad̤d̤h°); III.541
(mitaŋ āḷhakena = dhañña--māpaka--kammaŋ kataŋ C.); Miln 229 (patt°); DhA III.367 (ad̤d̤h°). --thālikā a bowl of the capacity of an āḷhaka Vin I. 240; A III.369; DhA III.370 (v. l. bhatta--thālikā).
(adj.) [fr. *āḷha, Sk. ād̤hya, orig. possessing grain, rich in grain, i. e. wealth; semantically cp. dhañña2] rich, happy, fortunate; only in neg. anāḷhiya poor, unlucky, miserable M I.450; II.178 (+ daḷidda); A III.352 sq. (so read with v. l. BB. °āḷhika for T. °āḷika; combd. with daḷidda; v. l. SS. anaddhika); J V. 96, 97 (+ daḷidda; C. na āḷhika).
Āvajati [ā + vajati, vraj] -- 1. to go into, to or towards J III.434; IV.49, 107. -- 2. to return, come back J V.24, 479.
Āvajjati [not with Senart M Vastu 377 = ava + dhyā, but = Sk. āvṛṇakti ā + vṛj, with pres. act. āvajjeti = Sk. āvarjayati] -- 1. to reflect upon, notice, take in, advert to, catch (a sound), listen J I.81; II.423; V.3; Miln 106. -- 2. to remove, upset (a vessel), pour out Vin I.286 (kumbhiŋ); J II.102 (gloss āsiñcati). -- Caus. āvajjeti (q. v.).
Āvajjana (nt.) [fr. āvajjati, cp. BSk. āvarjana in diff. meaning] turning to, paying attention, apprehending; adverting the mind. -- See discussion of term at Cpd. 85, 227 (the C. derive āvajjana fr. āvaṭṭeti to turn towards, this confusion being due to close resemblance of jj and ṭṭ in writing); also Kvu trsl. 221 n. 4 (on Kvu 380 which has āvaṭṭanā), 282 n. 2 (on Kvu 491 āvaṭṭanā). -- Ps II.5, 120; J II.243; Vbh 320; Miln 102 sq.; Vism 432; DA I.271.
Āvajjita [pp. of āvajjeti cp. BSk. āvarjita, e. g. Divy 171; Itin 221] bent, turned to, inclined; noticed, observed Miln 297; Vism 432 (citta); Sdhp 433.
Āvajjitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvajjita] inclination of mind, observation, paying attention Ps II.27 sq.
Āvajjeti [Caus. of āvajjati] 1. to turn over, incline, bend M III.96; J IV.56 (so read for āvijjhanto); DA I.10 (kāyaŋ). <-> 2. to incline (the mind); observe, reflect, muse, think, heed, listen for. According to Cpd. 227 often paraphrased in C. by pariṇāmeti. -- J I.69, 74, 81, 89, 108, 200; Miln 297; DhA II.96; PvA 181 (= manasikaroti). -- 3. to cause to yield A III.27 (perhaps better āvaṭṭ°). <-> pp. āvajjita (q. v.).
Āvaṭa [Sk. āvṛta, pp. of ā + vṛ] covered, veiled, shut off against, prohibited D I.97, 246; M I.381 (°dvāra); J VI.267. --anāvaṭa uncovered, unveiled, exposed, open D I.137 (°dvāra); III.191 (°dvāratā); S I.55; J V.213; Pv III.64; Miln 283. Cp. āvuta2 & vy°.
Āvaṭṭa (adj.--n.) [Sk. āvarta, ā + vṛt] -- 1. turning round, winding, twisting M I.382; S I.32 (dvi--r--ā° turning twice); J
II.217; SnA 439 (°gangā). -- 2. turned, brought round, changed, enticed M I.381; DhA II.153. -- 3. an eddy, whirlpool, vortex M I.461 = A II.123 (°bhaya); Miln 122, 196, 377. -- 4. circumference J V.337; Dāvs V.24; DhA III 184.

Āvaṭṭati [= āvattati] in phrase ā. vivaṭṭati to turn forward & backward Vism 504.
Āvaṭṭana (nt.) [fr. ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa 2 and āvaṭṭanin] turning, twisting; enticement, snare, temptation J III.494; DhA
Āvaṭṭanā (f.) [most likely for āvajjana. q. v. & see also Kvu trsl. 221, 282] turning to (of the mind), adverting, apprehending Kvu 380, 491.
Āvaṭṭanin (adj.) [fr. āvaṭṭana] turning (away or towards), changing, tempting, enticing M I.375, 381; A II.190; J II.330 = IV.471; DA I.250. -- Cp. etymologically the same, but semantically diff. āvattanin.
Āvaṭṭin (adj.--n.) [fr. āvaṭṭa instead of āvaṭṭana] only at M I.91 in neg. an° not enticed by (loc.), i. e. kāmesu. <-> Cp. āvattin.
Āvaṭṭeti [ā + vatteti, Caus. of vṛt, cp. BSk. āvartayati to employ spells Divy 438] to turn round, entice, change, convert, bring or win over M I.375, 381, 383, 505; A III.27; DA I.272.
Āvatta1 (adj.) [pp. of āvattati] gone away to, fallen back to, in phrase hīnāyɔāvatta (see same phrase under āvattati) M I.460;
S II.50; J I.206. Āvatta2
Āvatta2 (nt.) [Sk. āvarta, of ā + vṛt, cp. āvaṭṭa[ winding, turn, bent J I.70 (in a river); Nett 81 (v. l. āvaṭṭa?), 105 (°hārasampāta).
Āvattaka (adj.) [āvatta + ka] turning, in dakkhiṇ° turning to the right, dextrorsal D II.18; cp. dakkhiṇâvatta at DA I.259.
Āvattati [ā + vattati, of vṛt] to turn round, come to, go back, go away to, turn to; only in phrase hīnāya āvattati to turn to "the low", i. e. to give up orders & return to the world Vin I.17; M I.460; S II.231; IV.191; Sn p. 92 (= osakkati SnA 423); Ud 21; Pug 66; Miln 246. <-> pp. āvatta (q. v.). Cp. āvaṭṭati.
Āvattana (adj.--nt.) [Sk. āvartana] turning; turn, return Nett 113; Miln 251. Āvattanin (adj.) [fr. āvattana] turning round or back Th 1, 16 (cp. āvaṭṭanin).
Āvattin (adj.--n.) [fr. āvatta, cp. āvaṭṭin in diff. meaning] returning, coming back, one who returns, in spec. meaning of one who comes back in transmigration, syn. with āgāmin (an°), only in neg. anāvattin not returning, a non--returner, with °dhamma not liable to return at D I. 156; III.132; S V.346, 357, 376, 406; M I.91; DA I.313.
Āvatthika (adj.) [ā + vatthika] befitting, original, inherent (one of the 4 kinds of nomenclature) Vism 210 = KhA 107. Āvapati [a + vap] to give away, to offer, to deposit as a pledge Miln 279.
Āvapana (nt.) [fr. āvapati] sowing, dispersing, offering,depositing, scattering J I.321.
Āvara (adj.) [fr. ā + vṛ] obstructing, keeping off from J V.325 (so to be read in ariya--magg--âvara).
Āvaraṇa (adj.--n.) [fr. ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati; BSk. āvaraṇa in pañcɔ āvaraṇāni Divy 378] shutting off, barring out,

withstanding; nt. hindrance, obstruction, bar Vin I.84 (°ŋ karoti to prohibit, hinder); II.262 (id.); D I.246 (syn. of pañca nīvaraṇāni); S V.93 sq.; A III.63; J I.78 (an°); V.412 (nadiŋ °ena bandhāpeti to obstruct or dam off the river); Sn 66 (pahāya pañcɔ āvaraṇāni cetaso, cp. Nd2 379), 1005 (an°--dassāviṇ); Ps I.131 sq.; II.158 (an°); Pug 13; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 341, 342; Miln 21 (dur° hard to withstand or oppose). -- dant° "screen of the teeth", lip J IV.188; VI.590.
Āvaraṇatā (f.) [abstr. fr. āvaraṇa] keeping away from, withholding from A III 436.
Āvaraṇīya (adj.) [grd. fr. āvarati], M I.273; an° not to be obstructed, impossible to obstruct M III.3; Miln 157.
Āvarati [ā + vṛ, cp. āvuṇāti] to shut out from (abl.), hold back from, refuse, withhold, obstruct M I.380 (dvāraŋ); Sn 922 (pot. °aye, cp. Nd1 368); DA I.235 (dvāraŋ); Dpvs I.38. -- pp. āvaṭa and āvuta2 (q. v.).
Āvalī (f.) [cp. Sk. āvalī & see valī] a row, range J V.69; DA I.140.
Āvasati [ā + vas] to live at or in, to inhabit, reside, stay M II.72; S I.42; Sn 43, 805, 1134; Nd1 123, 127; Nd2 133; J VI.317.
-- pp. āvuttha (q. v.).
Āvasatha [SkQ āvasatha, fr. ā + vas] dwelling--place, habitation; abode, house, dwelling Vin I 226 (°âgāra restinghouse);
IV.304 (= kavāṭabaddha); S I.94, 229; IV.329; Sn 287, 672; J IV.396; VI.425; Pug 51; Miln 279.
Āvaha (adj.) (--°) [fr. ā + vah] bringing, going, causing Pv II.924 (sukh°); Vv 2211 (id); Dāvs II.37; PvA 86 (upakār°), 116
(anatth°); Sdhp 15, 98, 206.
Āvahati [ā + vahati] to bring, cause, entail, give S I.42 = Sn 181, 182 (āvahāti sukhaŋ metri causā); J III.169; V. 80; Sn
823; Nd1 302; PvA 6. -- Pass. āvuyhati VvA 237 (ppr. °amāna).
Āvahana (adj) (--°) [= āvaha] bringing, causing Th 1, 519; Sn 256.
Āvahanaka (adj.--nt) [= āvahana] one who brings VvA 114 (sukhassa).
Āva (misery, misfortune) see avā.
Āvāṭa [etym.?] a hole dug in the ground, a pit, a well D I.142 (yaññ°); J I.99, 264; II 406; III.286; IV 46 (caturassa); VI.10; DhA I.223; VvA 63; PvA 225.
Āvāpa [if correct, fr. ā + vā2 to blow with caus. p. -- Cp. J R A S. 1898, 750 sp.] a potter's furnace DhA I.177 (read for āvāsa?), 178.
Āvāra [Sk. āvāra, fr. ā + vṛ] warding off, protection, guard J VI 432 (yanta--yutta°, does it mean "cover, shield"?). <-> For cpd. khandhɔāvāra see khandha.
Āvāreti [Sk. āvārayati, ā + Caus. of vṛ] to ward off, hold back, bar, S IV 298; Nett 99.
Āvāsa [Sk. āvāsa; ā + vas] sojourn, stay, dwelling, living; dwelling--place, residence Vin I.92; D III.234; S IV.91; A II 68, 168; III.46, 262; Sn 406; Dh 73 (cp. DhA II.77); Nd1 128; J VI.105; Dhs 1122; Pug, 15, 19, 57; KhA 40; DhA I.177 (āvāsaŋ ālimpeti: read āvāpaŋ); PvA 13, 14, 36; VvA 113; Sdhp 247. --anāvāsa (n. & adj.) uninhabited, without a home; an uninhabited place A IV.345; J II.77; Pv II.333; PvA 80 (= anāgāra); VvA 46.
--kappa the practice of (holding Uposatha in different) residence (within the same boundary) Vin II.294, 300, 306; Dpvs IV.47, cp. V.18. --palibodha the obstruction of having a home (in set of 10 Palibodhas) KhA 39; cp. Vism 90 sq. --sappāyatā suitability of residence Vism 127.

Āvāsika (adj.) [āvāsa + ika] living in, residing at home, being in (constant or fixed) residence, usually appld. to bhikkhus (opp. āgantuka) Vin I.128 sq.; II.15, 170; III. 65; V.203 sq.; M I.473; A I.236; III.261 sq., 366; J IV.310; Pv IV.84 (= nibaddha--vasanaka PvA 267).
Āvāha [ā + vah] taking in marriage, lit. carrying away to oneself, marriage D I.99; J VI.363; SnA 273, 448; DhA IV.7. Often in cpd. ā° vivāha(ka) lit. leading to (one's home) & leading away (from the bride's home), wedding feast D III.183 (°ka); J I.452; VvA 109, 157. (v. l. °ka).
Āvāhana (nt.) [ā + vshana, of vah] -- 1. = āvāha, i. e. marriage, taking a wife D I.11 (= āvāha--karaṇa DA I. 96). -- 2. "getting up, bringing together", i. e. a mass, a group or formation, in senā° a contingent of an army J IV.91.
Āvi (adv.) [Sk. āviḥ, to Gr. a)i/w to hear, Lat. audio (fr. *auizdiō) to hear] clear, manifest, evident; openly, before one's eyes, in full view. Only in phrase āvi vā raho openly or secret A V.350, 353; Pv II.716 = DhA IV.21 (āvī v. l.), expld. at PvA 103 by pakāsanaŋ paresaŋ pākaṭavasana. Otherwise in foll. cpds. (with kar & bhū): °kamma making clear, evidence, explanation Vin II.88; III.24; Pug 19, 23; °karoti to make clear, show, explain D III.121; Sn 84, 85, 349; J V.457; Pug 57; VvA 79, 150; °bhavati (°bhoti) to become visible or evident, to be explained, to get clear J I.136; Vism 287 (fnt. āvibhavissati); DhA II.51, 82; bhāva appearance, manifestation D I.78; A III.17; J II.50, 111; Vism 390 sq. (revelation, opp. tirobhāva). Cp. pātur.
[ā + vijjhati of vyadh to pierce; thus recognised by Morris J P T S. 1884, 72, against Trenckner, Notes 59 (to piñj) & Hardy Nett. Ind. = vicchāy] -- 1. to encircle, encompass, comprise, go round, usually in ger. āvijjhitvā (w. acc.) used as prep. round about, near J I.153 (khettaŋ), 170 (pokkharaṇiŋ); DA I.245 (nagaraŋ bahi avijjhitvā round the outer circle of the town). Ordinarily = go round (acc.) at J IV.59 (chārika--puñjaŋ). -- 2. [as in lit. Sk.] to swing round, brandish, twirl, whirl round Vin III.127 (daṇd̤aŋ āviñji); M III.141 (matthena āviñjati to churn); J I.313; V.291 (cakkaŋ, of a potter's wheel); SnA 481 (T. āviñj°, v. l. āvijjh°; see āracaya°); DhA II.277 (āviñchamāna T.; v. l. āsiñciy°, āvajiy°, āgañch°). -- 3. to resort to, go to, approach, incline to S IV.199 (T. āviñch°; v. l. avicch° & āviñj°); Nett 13. -- 4. to arrange, set in order J II.406. <-> 5. to pull (?) A IV.86 (kaṇṇasotani āvijjeyyāsi, v. l. āvijj°, āviñj°, āvicc°, āviñch°; cp. Trenckner, Notes 59 āviñjati "to pull"). -- pp. āviddha (q. v.).
Āvijjhana (so for āviñchana & āviñjana) (adj.--n.) [fr. āvijjhati, lit. piercing through, i. e. revolving axis] -- 1. (= āvijjhati
2) swinging round, hanging loose, spinning in āvijjhana--rajju a loose, rope, esp. in mythology the swinging or whirling rope
by which Sakka holds the world's wheel or axis, in the latter sense at DhA II.143 (T. āviñch° (v. l. āvijj°) = III.97, 98 (where āviñjanaṭṭhāna for °rajju). Otherwise a rope used in connection with the opening & shutting of a door (pulling rope?) Vin II.120, 148; J V.298, 299 (T. āviñj°, v. l. āvicch° & āvij°). -- 2. (cp. āvijjhati 3) going to, approach, contact with DhsA 312 (°rasa, T. āviñj°, v. l. āviñch°; or is it "encompassing"? = āvijjhati 1 ?); Vism 444 (āviñjanarasa). -- 3. (cp. āvijjhati 5) pulling, drawing along Vin III.121 (= ākad̤d̤hanā nāma).
Āvijjhanaka (ntQ) [fr. āvijjhati in meaning 2] whirlirQ round, that which spins round, the whirling--round wheel (or pole) of the world (cp. the potter's wheel), the worldaxis DhA II.146 (T. āviñch°).
Āviddha [pp. of āvijjhati 2, cp. BSk. āviddha in meaning curved, crooked Av. S I.87 Lal. V. 207] whirling or spinning
round, revolving; swung round, set into whirling motion J IV.6 (cakkaŋ = kumbhakāra--cakkam iva bhamati C.); V.291. What does an--āviddha at PvA 135 mean?
Āvila (adj.) [is it a haplological contraction from ā + vi + lul to roll about?] stirred up, agitated, disturbed, stained, soiled, dirty A I.9; III.233; J V.16, 90 (ābila); Nd1 488 (+ luḷita), 489; ThA 251; DA I.226. More frequent as anāvila undisturbed, clean, pure, serene D I.76; S III. 83; IV,118; A I.9; III.236; Sn 160; Dh 82, 413; J III. 157; Miln 35; VvA 29, 30; ThA 251.
Āvilati [fr. āvila or is it a direct contraction of ā + vi + lulati?] to whirl round, to be agitated, to be in motion Miln 259 (+ luḷati).

Āvilatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āvila] confusion, disturbance, agitation Sn 967; Nd1 488.
Āvisati [ā + vīś] to approach, to enter Vin IV.334; Sn 936 (aor. āvisi); J IV.410, 496; Vism 42.
Āvuṇāti [in form = *avṛṇoti, ā + vṛ, cp. āvarati, but in meaning = *āvayati, ā + vā to weave, thus a confusion of the two roots, the latter being merged into the former] to string upon, to fix on to (c. loc.), to impale J I.430; III.35; V.145; VI.105. -- Caus. II. āvuṇāpeti J III.218 (sūle). -- pp. āvuta1 (q. v.), whereas the other pp. āvaṭa is the true derivative of ā + vṛ.
Āvuta [pp. of āvuṇāti in meaning of Sk. āvayati, the corresponding Sk. form being ā + uta = ota] -- 1. strung upon, tied on, fixed on to D I.76 (suttaŋ); II.13 (id.); A I.286 (tantāvutaŋ web); J III.52 (valliyā); VI.346 (suttakena); DA I.94 (°sutta). -- 2. impaled, stuck on (sūle on the pale) J I.430; III.35; V.497; VI.105; PvA 217, 220.
Āvuta2 = Āvaṭa (see āvuṇāti & āvuta1) covered, obstructed, hindered It 8 (mohena); also in phrase āvuta nivuta ophuta etc. Nd1 24 (ṭ) = Nd2 365 = DA I.59.
Āvuttha [pp. of āvasati] inhabited D II.50 (an°); S I.33.
Āvudha (nt.) [Vedic āyudha, fr. ā + yudh to fight] an instrument to fight with, a weapon, stick etc. D III 219; M II.100; A IV.107, 110; Sn 1008; J I.150; II.110; III. 467; IV.160, 283, 437; Nd2 on Sn 72; Miln 8, 339; DhA II.2; IV.207; SnA 225, 466 (°jīvika = issattha). See also āyudha.
Āvuyhamāna ppr. of āvuyhati (Pass. of āvahati), being conveyed or brought VvA 237 (reading uncertain).
Āvuso (voc. pl. m.) [a contracted form of āyusmanto pl. of āyusman, of which the regular Pāli form is āyasmant, with v for y as frequently in Pāli, e. g. āvudha for āyudha] friend, a form of polite address "friend, brother, Sir", usually in conversation between bhikkhus. The grammatical construction is with the pl. of the verb, like bhavaŋ and bhavanto. -- Vin II.302; D I.151, 157; II.8; SnA 227; DhA I.9; II.93; PvA 12, 13, 38, 208.
Āveṭhana (nt.) [ā + veṭhana, veṣṭ] rolling up, winding up or round, fig. explanation Miln 28 (+ nibbeṭhana, lit. rolling up and rolling down, ravelling & unravelling), 231 (°viniveṭhana).
Āveṭhita [pp. of āveṭheti, ā + veṣṭ, cp. āvedhikā] turned round, slung round or over J IV.383 sq. (v. l. āvedhita & āveḷita, C. expls. by parivattita).
Āveṇi (adj) (--°) [according to Trenckner, Notes 75 fr. ā + vinā "Sine quā non", but very doubtful] special, peculiar, separate Vin II.204 (°uposatha etc.); J I.490 (°sangha--kammāni).
Āveṇika (adj.) [fr. āveṇi; cp. BSk. āveṇika Av. Ś I.14, 108; Divy 2, 182, 268, 302] special, extraordinary, exceptional S IV.239; A V.74 sq.; Vism 268; VvA 112 (°bhāva peculiarity, specialty), KhA 23, 35.
Āveṇiya (adj.) = āveṇika Vin I.71; J IV.358; VI.128.
Āvedha [cp. Sk. āviddha, ā + pp. of vyadh] piercing, hole, wound J II.276 (v. l. aveddha; C. = viddha--ṭṭhāne vaṇa).
Āvedhika (adj. f. scil. pannā) [ā + vedhaka of āvedha, vyadh, but confused with āveṭh° of ā + veṣṭ, cp. āveṭhana & nibbedhaka] piercing, penetrating; or ravelling, turning, rolling up or round (cp. āvijjhati which is derived from ā + vyadh, but takes its meaning from āveṭheti), discrimination, thinking over J II.9 (+ nibbedhikā, v. l. for both ṭh).
Āveḷa (adj. & °ā f.) [not with Müller P.Gr. 10, 30, 37 = Sk. āpīd̤a, but fr. ā + veṣṭh to wind or turn round, which in P. is represented by āveṭheti as well as āvijjhati; ḷ then standing for either d̤h (ṭh) or dh (āvedha, q. v.). There may have been an

analogy influence through vell to move to and fro, cp. āveḷita. Müller refers to āveḷā rightly the late dial. (Prk.) āmela] -- 1. turning round, swinging round; diffusion, radiation; protuberance, with reference to the rays of the Buddha at J I.12, 95, 501. <-> 2. (f.) a garland or other ornament slung round & worn over the head Vv 362 (kañcan°; = āveḷa--pilandhana VuA 167). See āveḷin.
Āvelita (ḷ?) [pp. of ā + vell, cp. āveḷa & BSk. āviddha curved, crooked Av. Ś I.87, Lal. V. 207] turned round, wound, curved J VI.354 (°singika with curved horns, v. l. āvellita).
Āveḷin (adj.) [fr. āveḷā] wearing garlands or other headornaments, usually in f. °inī J V.409 (= kaṇṇālankārehi yuttā C.); Vv 302 (voc. āvelinī, but at id. p. 482 āveline), 323; VvA 125 (on Vv 302 expls. as ratana--maya--pupphɔ<-> āveḷavatī).
Āvesana (nt.) [fr. āvisati] entrance; workshop; living--place, house Vin II 117 (°vitthaka, meaning?); M II 53; Pv II.915. Āsa1
Āsa1 contr.--form of aŋsa in cpd. koṭṭhāsa part., portion etc.: see aŋsa1. Can we compare BSk. āsapātrī (see next). Āsa3
Āsa3 [Sk. āśa] food, only in cpd. pātarāsa morning food, breakfast Sn 387 (pāto asitabbo ti pātar--āso piṇd̤apātassɔ etaŋ nāmaŋ SnA 374); DhA IV.211; see further ref. under pātar; and pacchā--āsa aftermath S I.74. Can we compare BSk. āsa--pātrī (vessel) Divy 246? Der. fr. āsa is āsaka with abstr. ending āsakattaŋ "cating", food, in nānā° various food or na + anāsak°) Sn 249. See also nirāsa, which may be taken either as nir + *āśa or nir + *āsā.
Āsa3 the adj. form of āsā (f.), wish, hope. See under āsā.
Āsa4 archaic 3rd sg. perf. of atthi to be, only in cpd. itihāsa = iti ha āsa "thus it has been".
Āsaŋsa (adj.) [of *āśaŋsā, see next] hoping, expecting something, longing for A I.108 = Pug 27 (expld. by Pug A 208 as "so hi arahattaŋ āsaŋsati patthetī ti āsaŋso"); SnA 321, 336. Cp. nir°.
Āsaŋsati [for the usual āsiŋsati, ā + śaŋs] to expect, hope for, wish Pug A 208 (= pattheti). See also āsamāna. Āsaŋsā (f.) [from ā + śaŋs] wish, desire, expectation, hope J IV.92. -- Cp. nirāsaŋsa.
Āsạŋsuka (adj.) [fr. āsaŋsā] full of expectation, longing, hankering after, Th 2, 273 (= āsiŋsanaka ThA 217; trsl. "cadging").
Āsaka (adj.) [of āsa2] belonging to food, having food, only in neg. an° fasting S IV.118; Dh 141 (f. ā fasting = bhatta--paṭikkhepa DhA III.77); J V.17; VI.63.
Āsakatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. āsaka] having food, feeding, in an° fasting Sn 249 (= abhojana SnA 292).
Āsankati [ā + śank] to be doubtful or afraid, to suspect, distrust, J I.151 (pret. āsankittha), 163 (aor. āsanki); II. 203; SnA 298. -- pp. āsankita (q v.),

Āsankā (fQ) [Sk. āśankā fr. ā + śank] fear, apprehension, doubt, suspicion J I.338; II.383; III.533; VI.350, 370; DhA III.485; VvA 110. -- Cp. sāsanka & nirāsanka.
Āsankita (adj.) [pp. of āsankati] suspected, in fear, afraid, apprehensive, doubtful (obj. & subj.) Miln 173, 372 (°parisankita full of apprehension and suspicion); DhA I.223; VvA 110. -- Cp. ussankita & parisankita.
Āsankin (--°) (adj.) [fr. āsankā] fearing, anxious, apprehensive Sn 255 (bhedā°); J III.192 (id.).
Āsanga [ā + sanga fr. sañj to hang on, cp. Sk. āsanga & āsakti] -- 1. adhering, clinging to, attachment, pursuit J IV.11. --
2. that which hangs on (the body), clothing, garment, dress; adj. dressed or clothed in (--°); usually in cpd. uttarāsanga a loose (hanging) outer robe e. g. Vin I.289; S IV.290; PvA 73; VvÁ 33 (suddh°), 51 (id.).
Āsangin (adj.) [fr. āsanga] hanging on, attached to J IV.11.
Āsajja (indecl.) [ger. of āsādeti, Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; Sk. āsādya] -- 1. sitting on, going to, approaching; allocated, belonging to; sometimes merely as prep. acc. "near" (cp. āsanna) Sn 418 (āsajja naŋ upāvisi he came up near to him), 448 (kāko va selaŋ ā. nibbijjāpema Gotamaŋ); J II.95; VI.194; Miln 271. -- 2. put on to (lit. sitting or sticking on), hitting, striking S I.127 (khaṇuŋ va urasā ā. nibbijjapetha Gotamā "ye've thrust as 't were your breast against a stake. Disgusted, come ye hence from Gotama" trsl. p. 159; C. expls. by paharitvā, which comes near the usual paraphrase ghaṭṭetvā) <-> 3. knocking against or "giving one a setting--to", insulting, offending, assailing D I.107 (ā. ā. avocāsi = ghaṭṭetvā DA I.276); A III.373 (tādisaŋ bhikkhuŋ ā.); J V.267 (isiŋ ā. Gotamaŋ; C. p. 272 āsādetvā); Pv IV.710 (isiŋ ā. = āsādetvã PvA 266). -- 4. "sitting on", i. e. attending constantly to, persevering, energetically, with energy or emphasis, willingly, spontaneously M I.250; D III.258 = A IV.236 (dānaŋ deti); Vv 106 (dānaŋ adāsiŋ; cp. VvA 55 samāgantvā). See āsada, āsādeti, āsīdeti, āsajjana.
Āsajjana (nt.) [fr. āsajja in meaning of no. 3] "knocking against", setting on, insult, offence Vin II.203 (°ŋ Tathāgataŋ an
insult to the T.; quoted as such at VvA 55, where two meanings of ā. are given, corresponding to āsajja 1 & 3, viz. samāgama & ghaṭṭana, the latter in this quot.) = It 86 (so to be read with v. l.; T. has āpajja naŋ); S I.114 (apuññaŋ pasavi Māro āsajjanaŋ Tathāgataŋ; trsl. "in seeking the T. to assail"); J V.208.
Āsati [from as] to sit DA I.208; h. sg. āsi S I.130. <-> pp. āsīna (q. v.). Āsatta1
Āsatta1 [pp. of ā + sañj] (a) lit. hanging on, in phrase kaṇṭhe āsatto kuṇapo a corpse hanging round one's neck M I.120; J I.5. -- (b) fig. attached to, clinging to J I. 377 (+ satta lagga); ThA 259 (an°).
Āsatta2 [pp. of ā + śap] accursed, cursed J V.446 (an°).
Āsatti (f.) [ā + sañj] attachment, hanging on (w. loc.), dependence, clinging Vin II.156 = A I.138; S I.212; Sn 777 (bhavesu); Nd1 51, 221; Nett 12, 128. -- Cp. nirāsattin.
Āsada [ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsādeti] -- 1. approach, dealing with, business with (acc.), concern, affair, means of acting or getting Vin II.195 = J V.336 (mā kuñjara nāgam āsado); M I.326 (metaŋ āsado = mā etaŋ āsado do not meddle with this, lit., be not this any affair); J I 414 (cakkaŋ āsado you have to do with the wheel; interpreted as adj. in meaning patto = finding, getting); VI.528 (interpreted as ankusa a hook, i. e. means of getting something). -- 2. (as adj.) in phrase durāsada hard to sit on, i. e. hard to get at, unapproachable, difficult to attack or manage or conquer Sn p. 107 (cp. SnA 451); J VI.272; Vv 5016 (= anupagamanīyato kenaci pi anāsādanīyato ca durāsado VvA 213); Miln 21; Dpvs V.21; VI.38; Sdhp 384.

Āsana (nt.) [from āsati] sitting, sitting down; a seat, throne M I.469; Vin I.272 (= pallankassa okāsa); S I.46 (ek° sitting alone, a solitary seat); A III.389 (an° without a seat); Sn 338, 718, 810, 981; Nd1 131; J IV.435 (āsān' ûdaka--dāyin giving seat
& drink); V.403 (id.); VI.413; DhA II.31 (dhamm° the preacher's seat or throne); SnA 401; PvA 16, 23, 141.
--âbhihara gift or distinction of the seat J I.81. --ûpagata endowed with a seat, sitting down Sn 708 (= nisinna SnA 495).
--paññāpaka one who appoints seats Vin II.305. --paṭikkhitta one who rejects all seats, or objects to sitting down D I.167; A I.296; II.206; Pug 55. --sālā a hall with seating accommodation Vism 69; DhA II. 65; IV.46.
Āsana2 (?) eating Vism 116 (visam°, cp. visam--āsita Miln 302). See, however, māsana.
Āsanaka (nt.) [āsana + ka] a small seat Vv 15.
Āsanika (adj.) [fr. āsana] having a seat; in ek° sitting by oneself Vism 69.
Āsandi (f.) [fr. ā + sad] an extra long chair, a deck--chair Vin I.192; II.142, 163, 169, 170; D I.7 (= pamāṇâtikkant'āsanaŋ DA I.86), 55 = M I.515 = S III.307 (used as a bier) A I.181; J I.108. See note at Dial. I.11.
Āsandikā (f.) fr. āsandi] a small chair or tabouret Vin II. 149; KhA 44.
Āsanna (adj.) [pp. of ā + sad, see āsīdati] near (cp. āsajja1), opp. dūra J II.154; DhA II 91; PvA 42, 243.
Āsappanā (fr.) [fr. + sṛp] lit. "creeping on to", doubt, mistrust, always combd. with parisappanā Nd3 1; Dhs 1004 (trsl. "evasion", cp. Dhs trsl. p 116), 1118, 1235; DA I.69.
Āsabha [the guṇa-- and compn. form of usabha, corresponding to Sk. ārṣabha > ṛṣabha, see usabha] (in compn.) a bull, peculiar to a bull, bull--like, fig. a man of strong & eminent qualities, a hero or great man, a leader, thus in tār° Sn 687; nar° Sn 684, 696; āsabha--camma bull's hide J VI. 453 (v. l. usabha°).
--ṭṭhāna (as āsabhaṇṭhāna) "bull's place", first place, distinguished position, leadership M I.69; S II.27; A II.8 (C. seṭṭha--ṭṭhāna uttama--ṭṭhāna); III.9; V.33 sq.; DA I. 31; KhA 104.
Āsabhin (adjQ) [fr. āsabha] bull--like, becoming to a bull, lordly, majestic, imposing, bold; only in phrase °ŋ vācaŋ bhāsati "speak the lordly word" D II.15, 82; M III.123j J I.53; DA I.91; cp. Dāvs I.28 (nicchārayi vācaŋ āsabhiŋ).
Āsamāna (adj.) [ppr. of āsaŋsati or āsiŋsati, for the usual earlier āsasāna] wishing, desiring, hoping, expecting Vv 846 (kiŋ ā = kiŋ paccāsiŋ santo VvA 336); Pv IV.124 (= āsiŋsamāna patthayamana PvA 226).
Āsaya [ā + śī, cp. in similar meaning & derivation anusaya. The semantically related Sk. āśraya from ā + śri is in P. represented by assaya. Cp. also BSk. āśayataḥ intentionally, in earnest Divy 281; Av. Ś II.161] -- 1. abode, haunt, receptacle; dependence on, refuge, support, condition S I.38; Vin III.151; J II.99; Miln 257; VvA 60; PvA 210; jal° river VvA 47; Pgdp 80; adj. depending on, living in (--°) Miln 317; Nd1 362 (bil°, dak° etc.). See also āmāsaya, pakkāsaya. -- 2. (fig.) inclination, intention, will, hope; often combd. & compared with anusaya (inclination, hankering, disposition), e. g. at Ps I. 133; II.158; Vbh 340; Vism 140 (°posana); PvA 197. <-> SnA 182 (°vipatti), 314 (°suddhi), KhA 103 (°sampatti). Cp. nirāsaya. -- 3. outflow, excretion Pv III.53 (gabbh° = gabbha--mala PvA 198); Vism 344.
Āsayati [ā + śī; lit. "lie on", cp. Ger. anliegen & Sk. āśaya = Ger. Angelegenheit] to wish, desire, hope, intend J IV.291 (grd. āsāyana, gloss esamāna). See āsaya.
Āsava [fr. ā + sru, would corresp. to a Sk. *āsrava, cp. Sk. āsrāva. The BSk. āśrava is a (wrong) sankritisation of the Pāli

āsava, cp. Divy 391 & kṣīnāśrava] that which flows (out or on to) outflow & influx. 1. spirit, the intoxicating extract or secretion of a tree or flower, O. C. in Vin IV.110 (four
kinds); B. on D III.182 (five kinds) DhsA 48; KhA 26; J IV.222; VI.9. -- 2. discharge from a sore, A I.124, 127 = Pug 30. -- 3.
in psychologQ, t.t. for certain specified ideas which intoxicate the mind (bemuddle it, befoozle it, so that it cannot rise to higher things). Freedom from the "Āsavas" constitutes Arahantship, & the fight for the extinction of these āsavas forms one of the
main duties of man. On the difficulty of translating the term see Cpd. 227. See also discussion of term āsava (= āsavantī ti āsavā) at DhsA 48 (cp. Expositor pp. 63 sq). See also Cpd. 227 sq., & especially Dhs trsl. 291 sq. -- The 4 āsavas are kām°, bhav°, diṭṭh°, avijj°, i. e. sensuality, rebirth (lust of life), speculation and ignorance. -- They are mentioned as such at D II.81, 84, 91, 94, 98, 123, 126; A I.165 sq., 196; II.211; III.93, 414; IV.79; Ps I.94, 117; Dhs 1099, 1448; Nd2 134; Nett 31, 114 sq. -- The set of 3, which is probably older (kāma°, bhava°, avijjā°) occurs at M I. 55; A I.165; III.414; S IV.256; V.56, 189; It 49; Vbh 364. For other connections see Vin I.14 (anupādāya āsavehi cittani vimucciŋsu), 17, 20, 182; II.202; III.5 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.); D I.83, 167; III.78, 108, 130, 220, 223, 230, 240, 283; M I.7 sq., 23, 35, 76, 219, 279, 445 (°ṭhāniya); II.22; III.72, 277; S II.187 sq. (°ehi cittaŋ vimucci); III.45 (id.); IV.107 (id.), 20; V.8, 28, 410; A I.85 sq. (vad̤d̤hanti), 98, 165 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.), 187; II.154 (°ehi cittaŋ vimuttaŋ), 196; III.21, 93 (°samudaya, °nirodha etc.), 245, 387 sq., 410, 414; IV.13, 146 (°pariyādāna end of the ā.), 161 (°vighāta--pariḷāha); V.70, 237; Th 2, 4, 99, 101 (pahāsi āsave sabbe); Sn 162, 374, 535 (pl. āsavāni), 546, 749, 915, 1100; Dh 93, 253, 292; Nd1 331 (pubb°); Vbh 42, 64, 426; Pug 11, 13, 27, 30 sq.; Miln 419; DhsA
48; ThA 94, 173; KhA 26; DA I 224; Sdhp 1; Pgdp 65 (piyāsava--surā, meaning?).
Referring specially to the extinction (khaya) of the āsavas & to Arahantship following as a result are the foll. passages: (1)
āsavānaŋ khaya D I.156; S II.29, 214; III 57, 96 sq, 152 sq; IV.105, 175; V.92, 203, 220, 271, 284; A I.107 sq., 123 sq., 232
sq., 273, 291; II.6, 36, 44 sq., 149 sq., 214; III 69, 114, 131, 202, 306, 319 sq.; IV.83 sq., 119, 140 sq., 314 sq.; V.10 sq., 36, 69, 94 sq, 105, 132, 174 sq., 343 sq.; It 49; Pug 27, 62; Vbh 334, 344; Vism 9; DA I.224; cp. °parikkhaya A V 343 sq. See also arahatta formula C. -- (2) khīṇāsava (adj.) one whose Āsavas are destroyed (see khīṇa) S I.13, 48, 53, 146; II 83, 239; III.199, 128, 178; IV.217; A I 77, 109, 241, 266; IV.120, 224, 370 sq.; V 40, 253 sq.; Ps II 173; cp. parikkhīṇā āsavā A IV.418, 434, 451 sq.; āsavakhīṇa Sn 370. -- (3) anāsava (adj.) one who is free from the āsavas, an Arahant Vin II.148 = 164; D III.112; S I 130; II.214, 222; III.83; IV.128; A I.81, 107 sqQ, 123 sq., 273, 291; II.6, 36, 87, 146; III.19, 29, 114, 166; IV.98, 140 sq., 314 sq., 400; A V.10 sqQ, 36, 242, 340; Sn 1105, 1133; Dh 94, 126, 386; Th I.100; It 75; Nd2 44; Pv II.615; Pug 27; Vbh 426; Dhs 1101, 1451; VvA 9Q Cp. nirāsava ThA 148. -- Opp. sāsava S III 47; V.232; A I.81 V.242; Dhs 990; Nett 10; Vism 13, 438.
Āsavati [ā + sru, cp. Sk. āsravati; its doublet is assavati] to flow towards, come to, occur, happen Nett 116.
Āsasāna [either grd. for *āsaŋsāna or contracted form of ppr. med. of āsaŋsati (= āsiŋsati) for *asaŋsamāna] hoping, wishing, desiring, longing for Sn 369 (an°; SnA 365 however reads āsayāna), 1090; Th 1, 528; J IV.18 (= āsiŋsanto C.), 381; V.391 (= āsiŋsanto C.). See anāsasāna, āsaŋsati, āsamāna & āsayāna.
Āsā (f.) [cp. Sk. āśaḥ f.] expectation, hope, wish, longing, desire; adj. āsa (--°) longing for, anticipating, desirous of Vin I.255 (°avacchedika hope--destroying), 259; D II. 206; III.88; M III.138 (āsaŋ karoti); A I.86 (dve āsā), 107 (vigat--āso one whose longings have gone); Sn 474, 634, 794, 864; J I.267, 285; V.401; VI.452 (°chinna = chinnāsa C.); Nd1 99, 261, 213 sq; Vv 3713 (perhaps better to be read with v. l. SS ahaŋ, cp. VvA 172); Pug 27 (vigat° = arahattāsāya vigatattā vigatāso Pug A 208); Dhs 1059 (+ āsiŋsanā etc.), 1136; PvA 22 (chinn° disappointed), 29 (°âbhibhūta), 105; Dāvs V.13; Sdhp 78, 111, 498, 609.
Āsāṭikā (f.) [cp. Mārāṭhi āsād̤ī] a fly's egg, a nit M I.220 sq.; A V.347 sq., 351, 359; Nett 59; J III.176.
Āsādeti [Caus. of āsīdati, ā + sad; cp. āsajja & āsanna] <-> 1. to lay hand on, to touch, strike; fig. to offend, assail, insult M I.371; J I.481; V.197; aor. āsādesi Th 1, 280 (mā ā. Tathāgate); ger. āsādetvā J V.272; Miln 100, 205 (°ayitvā); PvA 266 (isiŋ), āsādiya J V.154 (āsādiya metri causa; isiŋ, cp. āsajja3), & āsajja (q. v.); infin. āsāduŋ J V.154 & āsādituŋ ibid.; grd. āsādanīya Miln 205; VvA 213 (an°). -- 2. to come near to (c. acc.), approach, get J III.206 (khuracakkaŋ).
Āsāḷhā & Āsāḷhī (f.) [Sk. āṣād̤ha] N. of a month (JuneJuly) and of a Nakkhatta; only in compn. as Āsaḷha° & Āsaḷhi°, viz. °nakkhatta J I.50; SnA 208; °puṇṇamā J I.63; DhA I.87; SnA 199; VvA 66; PvA 137; °māsa SnA 378 (= vassûpanāyikāya purimabhāge A.); VvA 307 (= gimhānaŋ pacchimo māso).

Āsāvati (f.) N. of a creeper (growing at the celestial grove Cittalatā) J III.250, 251.
Āsāsati [cp. Sk. āśāsati & āśāsti, ā + śās] to pray for, expect, hope; confounded with śaŋs in āsaŋsati & āsiŋsati (q. v.) &
their derivations. -- pp. āsiṭṭha (q. v.).
Āsi & Āsiŋ 3rd & 1st sg. aor. of atthi (q. v.).
Āsiŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ā + siŋsati, cp. āsaŋsā] wishing, aspiring after, praying for Miln 342.
Āsiŋsati [Sk. āśaŋsati, ā + śaŋs, cp. also śās & āsāsati, further abhisaŋsati, abhisiŋsati & āsaŋsati] to hope for, wish, pray
for (lit. praise for the sake of gain), desire, (w. acc.) S I.34, 62; Sn 779, 1044, 1046 (see Nd2 135); J I.267; III.251; IV.18; V.435; VI.43; Nd1 60; Mhvs 30, 100; VvA 337; PvA 226 (ppr. āsiŋsamāna for āsamāna, q. v.).
Āsiŋsanaka (adj.) [fr. āsiŋsanā] hoping for something, lit. praising somebody for the sake of gain, cadging ThA 217 (for āsaŋsuka Th 2, 273).
Āsiŋsanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ā + śaŋs, cp. āsiŋsati] desire, wish, craving J V.28; Dhs 1059, 1136 (+ āsiŋsitatta). As āsīsanā at Nett 53.
Āsiŋsaniya (adj.) [grd. of āsiŋsati] to be wished for, desirable Miln 2 (°ratana). Āsikkhita [pp. of ā + śikṣ, Sk. āśikṣita] sohooled, instructed PvA 67, 68.
Āsiñcati [ā + sic, cp. abhisiñcati & avasiñcati] to sprinkle, besprinkle Vin I.44; II.208; J IV.376; Vv 796 (= siñcati VvA 307); PvA 41 (udakena), 104, 213 (ger. °itvā). <-> pp. āsitta (q. v.). Cp. vy°.
Āsiṭṭha [pp. of āsāsati, Sk. āśiṣṭa] wished or longed for PvA 104.
*Āsita1 [= asita1?] "having eaten", but probably māsita (pp. of mṛś to touch, cp. Sk. mṛśita, which is ordinarily in massita),
since it only occurs in combns. where m precedes, viz. J II.446 (dumapakkani--m--asita, where C. reading is māsita & expln. khāditvā asita (v. l. āsita) dhāta); Miln 302 (visam--āsita affected with poison = visamāsita). Cp. also the form māsi(n) touching, eating at J VI.354 (tiṇa°, expld. by C. as khādaka). -- āsita at J V.70 is very doubtful, v. l.
āsina & asita; C. expls. by dhāta suhita p. 73.
*Āsita2 [registered as such with meaning "performed" by Hardy in Index] at VvA 276 is better read with v. l. SS bhāsita (--vādana etc.).
Āsitta [pp. of āsiñcati, Sk. āsikta] sprinkled, poured out, anointed J V.87; Pug 31; Miln 286; DhsA 307; DhA I.10; VvA 69. Āsittaka (adj.) [āsitta + ka] mixed, mingled, adulterated Vin II.123 (°ûpadhāna "decorated divan"?); ThA 61, 168 (an° for
asecanaka, q. v.).
Āsītika (adj.) [fr. asīta] 80 years old M II.124; J III.395; SnA 172.
Āsītika (m.) [etym.? Cp. BSk. āsītakī Lal. V. 319] a certain plant M I 80 = 245 (°pabba).
Āsīdati [cp. Sk. āsīdati, ā + sad] -- 1. to come together, lit. to sit by D I.248 (v. l. BB ādisitvā for āsīditvā, to be preferred?).
-- 2. to come or go near, to approach (w. acc.), to get (to) A III.69 (āsīvisaŋ), 373 (na sādhurūpaŋ āsīde, should perhaps be read without the na); J IV.56. -- 3. to knock against, insult, offend attack J V. 267 (Pot. āsīde = pharusa--vacanehe kāyakammena vā

gbaṭṭento upagaccheyya C.). -- pp. āsanna (q. v.). See also āsajja, āsajjana, āsada & Caus. āsādeti.
Āsīna (adj.) [pp. of ās, see āsati] sitting S I.195 = Nd2 136; Sn 1105, 1136; Dh 227, 386; J I.390; III.95; V. 340; VI.297;
Dāvs II.17.
Āsīyati [etym. doubtful; Trenckner Miln p. 422 = ā + śyā to freeze or dry up, but taken by him in meaning to thaw, to
warm oneself; Müller, P. Gr. 40 same with meaning "cool oneself"; Morris'J.P. T. S. 1884, 72 as ā + śrā or śrī to become ripe, come to perfection, evidently at fault because of śrā etc. not found in Sk. More likely as a Pass. formation to be referred to ā + śī as in āsaya, i. e. to abide etc.] to have one's home, one's abode or support in (loc.), to live in, thrive by means of, to depend on Miln 75 (kaddame jāyati udake āsīyati i. e. the lotus is born in the mud and is supported or thrives by means of the water).
Āsīvisa Derivation uncertain. The BSk. āsīviṣa (e. g. Jtm 3161) is a Sanskritisation of the Pali. To suppose this to come
from ahi + visa (snake's poison) would give a wrong meaning, and leave unexplained the change from ahi to āsi] a snake Vin IV.108; S IV.172; A II.110; III. 69; J I.245; II.274; IV.30, 496; V.82, 267; Pug 48; Vism 470 (in comp.); DhA I.139; II.8, 38; SnA 334, 458, 465; VvA 308.
Āsīsanā see āsiŋsanā.
Āsu expletive particle = assu3 J V.241 (v. l. assu; nipātamattaŋ C. p.243).
Āsuŋ 3rd pl. aor. of atthi.
[ā + śumbh to glide] to bring to fall, throw down or round, sling round Vin IV.263, 265; Vv 5011 (°itvāna); J III.435 (aor. āsumhi, gloss khipi).
Āsevati [ā + sev] to frequent, visit; to practise, pursue, indulge, enjoy A I.10; Sn 73 (cp. Nd2 94); Ps II.93 (maggaŋ). -- pp. āsevita.
Āsevana (nt.) & āsevanā (f.) [fr. āsevati] -- 1. practice, pursuit, indulgence in Vin II.117; PvA 45. -- 2. succession, repetition Dhs 1367; Kvu 510 (cp. trsl. 294, 362); Vism 538.
Āsevita [pp. of āsevati] frequented, indulged, practised, enjoyed J I.21 (V.141; āsevita--nisevita); II.60; Sdhp 93, 237.
Āha [Vedic āha, orig. perfect of ah to speak, meaning "he began to speak", thus in meaning of pres. "he says"] a perfect in meaning of pret. & pres. "he says or he said", he spoke, also spoke to somebody (w. acc.), as at J I.197 (cullalohitaŋ āha). Usually in 3rd person, very rarely used of 2nd person, as at Sn 839, 840 (= kathesi bhaṇasi Nd 188, 191). -- 3rd sg. āha Vin II.191; Sn 790 (= bhaṇati Nd1 87), 888; J I.280; III.53 and freq. passim; 3rd pl. āhu Sn 87, 181; Dh 345; J I.59; SnA 377, and āhaŋsu J I.222; III.278 and freq.
Āhacca1 ger. of āhanati. Āhacca2
Āhacca2 (adj.) [grd. of āharati, corresponding to a Sk. *āhṛtya] 1. (cp. āharati1) to be removed, removable, in
°pādaka--pīṭha & °mañca a collapsible bed or chair, i e. whose legs or feet can be put on & taken away at pleasure (by
drawing out a pin) Vin II.149 (cp. Vin Texts III.164 n. 5); IV.40, 46 (def. as "ange vijjhitvā ṭhito hoti" it stands by means of a perforated limb), 168, 169. -- 2. (cp. āharati2) reciting, repeating, or to be quoted, recitation (of the Scriptures); by authority or by tradition M III.139; DhsA 9, & in cpds. °pada a text quoted from Scripture), tradition Miln 148 (°ena by reference to the

text of the Scriptures); °vacana a saying of the Scriptures, a traditional or proverbial saying Nett 21 (in def. of suttaŋ).
Āhaṭa [pp. of āharati] brought, carried, obtained Vin I.121; III.53; D II.180 (spelt āhata); J III.512 (gloss ānīta); Dāvs I.58.
Āhata [pp. of āhanati] struck, beaten, stamped; afflicted, affected with (--°) Vin IV.236 = D III.238 (kupito anattamano āhata--citto); Vin I.75, 76; S I.170 (tilak°, so read for tilakā--hata, affected with freckles, C. kāḷa--setādi vaṇṇehi tilakehi āhatagatta, K. S. p. 318); J III 456; Sdhp 187, 401.
Āhataka [fr. āhata] "one who is beaten", a slave, a worker (of low grade) Vin IV.224 (in def. of kammakāra, as bhaṭaka + ā).
Āhanati [ā + han] to beat, strike, press against, touch ppr. āhananto Miln 21 (dhamma--bheriŋ); Dāvs IV.50. <-> ger. āhacca touching M I.493; J I.330; VI 2, 200; Sn 716 = uppīḷetva SnA 498; Vism 420. -- pp. āhata (q. v.).
1st sg. fut. āhañhi Vin I.8; D II.72, where probably to be read as āhañh' (=āhañhaŋ). See Geiger, P.Gr. § 153, 2. Āhanana (nt.) [fr. ā + han] beating, striking, coming into touch, "impinging" Vism 142 (+ pariyāhanana, in def. of
vitakka) = DhsA 114 (cp. Expos. 151); Vism 515 (id.).
Āharaṇa (adj.--n.) [fr. āharati] to be taken; taking away; only in phrase acorāharaṇo nidhi a treasure not to be taken by thieves Miln 320; Kh VIII.9; KhA 224; Sdhp 589.
Āharaṇaka [āharaṇa + ka] one who has to take or bring, a messenger J II.199; III.328.
Āharati [ā + hṛ] -- 1. to take, take up, take hold of, take out, take away M I.429 (sallaŋ); S I 121; III.123; J I.40 (ger.
āharitvā "with"), 293 (te hattaŋ); Nd2 540c (puttamaŋsaŋ, read āhāreyya?); Pv II.310; DA I.186, 188 <-> 2. to bring, bring down, fetch D II.245; J IV 159 (nāvaŋ; v. l. āhāhitvā); V.466; VvA 63 (bhattaŋ); PvA 75. <-> 3. to get, acquire, bring upon oneself J V.433 (padosaŋ); DhA II.89. -- 4. to bring on to, put into (w. loc.); fig. & intrs. to hold on to, put oneself to, touch, resort to M I.395 (kaṭhalaŋ mukhe ā.; also inf. āhattuŋ); Th 1, 1156 (pāpacitte ā.; Mrs. Rh. D. Brethren ver. 1156, not as "accost" p. 419, n.). -- 5. to assault, strike, offend (for pāhari?) Th 1, 1173. -- 6. (fig.) to take up, fall or go back on
(w. acc.), recite, quote, repeat (usually with desanaŋ & dasseti of an instructive story or sermon or homily) J III.383 (desanaŋ), 401; V.462 (vatthuŋ āharitvā dassesi told a story for example); SnA 376; PvA 38, 39 (atītaŋ), 42, 66, 99 (dhamma--desanaŋ). See also payirudāharati. <-> pp. āhaṭa (q. v.). -- Caus. II. āhārapeti to cause to be brought or fetched; to wish to take, to
call or ask for J III.88, 342; V.466; PvA 215.
Āharima (adj.) [fr. āharati] "fetching", fascinating, captivating, charming Vin IV.299; Th 2, 299; ThA 227; VvA 14, 15, 77.
Āhariya [grd. of āharati] one who is to bring something J III.328. Āhavana & Āhavanīya see under āhuneyya.
Āhāra [fr. ā + hṛ, lit. taking up or on to oneself] feeding, support, food, nutriment (lit & fig.). The term is used comprehensively and the usual enumn. comprises four kinds of nutriment, viz. (1) kabaḷinkāra āhāro (bodily nutriment, either oḷāriko gross, solid, or sukhumo fine), (2) phassāhāro n. of contact, (3) manosañcetanā° n. of volition (= cetanā S. A. on II.11 f.), (4) viññāṇ° of consciousness. Thus at M I.261; D III.228, 276; Dhs 71--73; Vism 341. Another definition of Dhammapāla's refers it to the fourfold tasting as asita (eaten), pīta (drunk), khāyita (chewed), sāyita (tasted) food PvA 25. A synonym with mūla, hetu, etc. for cause, Yamaka, I.3; Yam. A (J.P.T.S., 1910--12) 54. See on term also Dhs trsl. 30. -- Vin I.84; D I.166; S I.172; II.11, 13, 98 sq. (the 4 kinds, in detail); III.54 (sa°); V.64, 391; A III.51 (sukhass°), 79, 142 sq., 192 sq.; IV.49, 108; V.52 (the four), 108, 113 (avijjāya etc.), 116 (bhavataṇhāya), 269 sq. (nerayikānaŋ etc.); Sn 78, 165, 707, 747; Nd1 25; Ps I.22 (the four) 122 (id.), 55, 76 sq; Kvu 508; Pug 21, 55; Vbh 2, 13, 72, 89, 320, 383, 401 sq. (the four); Dhs 58, 121, 358, 646; Nett 31,

114, 124; DhsA 153, 401; DhA I.183 (°ŋ pacchindati to bring up food, to vomit); II.87; VvA 118; PvA 14, 35, 112, 148 (utu° physical nutriment); Sdhp 100, 395, 406; A V.136 gives ten āhāra opposed to ten paripanthā. --an° without food, unfed M I.487 (aggi); S III.126; V.105; Sn 985.
--ûpahāra consumption of food, feeding, eating Vin III. 136. --ṭhitika subsisting or living on food D III.211, 273; A V.50, 55; Ps I.5, 122. --pariggaha taking up or acquirement of food Miln 244 or is it "restraint or abstinence in food"? Same combn. at Miln 313. --maya "food--like", feeding stuff, food J III.523. --lolatā greed after food SnA 35. --samudaya origin of nutriment S III.59.
Āhāratthaŋ [āhāra + tta] the state of being food. In the idiom āhārattaṇ pharati; Vin I.199, of medicine, ʻto penetrate into food--nessʼ, to come under the category of food; Miln 152, of poison, to turn into food. [According to Oldenberg (Vin I.381) his MSS read about equally °attaŋ and °atthaŋ. Trenckner prints °atthaŋ, and records no variant (see p. 425)].
Āhāreti [Denom. fr. āhāra] to take food, eat, feed on S II.13; III.240; IV.104; A I.114, 295; II.40, 145, 206; IV. 167; Nd2 540c (āhāraŋ & puttamaŋsaŋ cp. S II.98).
Āhika (--°) (adj.) [der. fr. aha2] only in pañcāhika every five days (cp. pañcāhaŋ & sattāhaŋ) M III.157.
Āhiṇd̤ati [ā + hiṇd̤, cp. BSk. āhiṇd̤ate Divy 165 etc.] to wander about, to roam, to be on an errand, to be engaged in (w. acc.) Vin I.203 (senāsana--cārikaŋ), 217; II. 132 (na sakkoti vinā daṇd̤ena āhiṇd̤ituŋ); IV.62; J I.48, 108, 239; Nd2 540B; Pv III.229 (= vicarati PvA 185); Vism 38, 284 (aṭaviŋ); VvA 238 (tattha tattha); PvA 143.
Āhita [pp. of ā + dhā] put up, heaped; provided with fuel (of a fire), blazing Sn 18 (gini = ābhato jalito vā SnA 28). See sam°.
Āhu 3rd pl. of āha (q. v.).
Āhuti (f.) [Vedic āhuti, ā + hu] oblation, sacrifice; veneration, adoration M III 167; S I.141; Th 1, 566 (°īnaŋ paṭiggaho recipient of sacrificial gifts); J I.15; V.70 (id.); Vv 6433 (paramâhutiŋ gato deserving the highest adoration); Sn 249, 458; Kvu 530; SnA 175; VvA 285.
Āhuna = āhuti, in āhuna--pāhuna giving oblations and sacrificing VvA 155; by itself at Vism 219.
Āhuneyya (adj.) [a grd. form. fr. ā + hu, cp. āhuti] sacrificial, worthy of offerings or of sacrifice, venerable, adorable, worshipful D III.5, 217 (aggi); A II.56, 70 (sāhuneyyaka), 145 sq. (id.); IV.13, 41 (aggi); It 88 (+ pāhuneyya); Vv 6433 (cp. VvA 285). See def. at Vism 219 where expld. by "āhavanīya" and "āhavanaŋ arahati" deserving of offerings.
Āhundarika (adj.) [doubtful or āhuṇd̤°?] according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 73 "crowded up, blocked up, impassable" Vin I.79; IV.297; Vism 413 (°ŋ andha--tamaŋ).
I in i--kāra in i--kāra the letter or sound i SnA 12 (°lopa), 508 (id.).
Ikka [Sk. ṛkṣa, of which the regular representation is P. accha2] a bear J VI.538 [= accha C.).
Ikkāsa (?) [uncertain as regard meaning & etym.] at Vin II.151 (+ kasāva) is trsl. by "slime of trees", according to Bdhgh's
expln. on p. 321 (to C. V. VI.3, 1), who however reads nikkāsa. Ikkhaṇa (nt.) [fr. īkṣ] seeing Vism 16.

Ikkhaṇika [fr. īkṣ to look or see, cp. akkhi] a fortuneteller Vin III.107; S II.260; J I.456, 457; VI.504. Ikkhati [fr. īkṣ] to look J V.153; ThA 147; DhsA 172.
Ingita (nt.) [pp. of ingati = iñjati] movement, gesture, sign J II.195, 408; VI.368, 459.
Ingha (indecl.) [Sk. anga prob. after P. ingha (or añja, q. v.); fr. iñjati, cp. J.P.T.S. 1883, 84] part. of exhortation, lit. "get a move on", come on, go on, look here, Sn 83, 189, 862, 875 = 1052; J V.148; Pv IV.57; Vv 539 (= codan'atthe nipāto VvA 237); VvA 47; DhA IV.62.
Inghāḷa [according to Morris J.P. T.S. 1884, 74 = angāra, cp. Marāthī ingala live coal] coal, embers, in inghāḷakhu Th 2, 386 a pit of glowing embers (= angāra--kāsu ThA 256). The whole cpd. is doubtful.
see iti.
Iccha (--°) (adj.) [the adj. form of icchā] wishing, longing, having desires, only in pāp° having evil desires S I.50; II.156; an°
without desires S I.61, 204; Sn 707; app° id. Sn 628, 707.
Icchaka (--°) (adj.) [fr. iccha] wishing, desirous, only in nt. adv. yad--icchikaŋ (and yen°) after one's wish or liking M
III.97; A III.28.
Icchati1 [Sk. icchati, iṣ, cp. Av. isaiti, Obulg. iskati, Ohg. eiscōn, Ags. āscian = E. ask; all of same meaning "seek, wish"] to wish, desire, ask for (c. acc.), expect S I.210 (dhammaŋ sotuŋ i.); Sn 127, 345, 512, 813, 836; Dh 162, 291; Nd1 3, 138, 164; Nd2 s. v.; Pv II.63; Pug 19; Miln 269, 327; SnA 16, 23, 321; KhA 17; PvA 20, 71, 74; Pot. icche Dh 84; Sn 835 Pv II.66 & iccheyya D II.2, 10; Sn 35; Dh 73, 88; ppr. icchaŋ Sn 826, 831, 937; Dh 334 (phalaŋ) aor. icchi PvA 31. -- grd. icchitabba
PvA 8. -- pp. iṭṭha & icchita (q. v.). <-> Note. In prep.--cpds. the root iṣ2 (icchati) is confused with root iṣ1 (iṣati, eṣati)
with pp. both °iṭṭha and °iṣita. Thus ajjhesati, pp. ajjhiṭṭha & ajjhesita; anvesati (Sk. anvicehati); pariyesati (Sk. parīcchati), pp. pariyiṭṭha & pariyesita.
Icchati2 [Sk. rcchati of ṛ, concerning which see appeti] see aticchati & cp. icchatā.
Icchatā (--°) (f.) [abstr. fr. icchā] wishfulness, wishing: only in aticchatā too great wish for, covetousness, greed Vbh 350 (cp. aticchati, which is probably the primary basis of the word); mah° & pāp° Vbh 351, 370.
Icchana (nt.) [fr. iṣ2, cp. Sk. īpsana] desiring, wish J IV. 5; VI.244.
Icchā (f.) [fr. icchati, iṣ2] wish, longing, desire D II.243; III.75; S I.40 (°dhūpāyito loko), 44 (naraŋ parikassati); A II.143; IV.293 sq.; 325 sq.; V.40, 42 sq.; Sn 773, 872; Dh 74, 264 (°lobha--samāpanna); Nd1 29, 30; Pug 19; Dhs 1059, 1136; Vbh 101, 357, 361, 370; Nett 18, 23, 24; Asl. 363; DhsA 250 (read icchā for issā? See Dhs trsl. 100); SnA 108; PvA 65, 155; Sdhp 242, 320.
--âvacara moving in desires M I.27 (pāpaka); Nett 27. --âvatiṇṇa affected with desire, overcome by covetousness Sn 306. --pakata same Vin I.97; A III.119, 191, 219 sq.; Pug 69; Miln 357; Vism 24 (where Bdhgh however takes it as "icchāya apakata" and puts apakata = upadduta). --vinaya discipline of one's wishes D III.252, A IV.15; V.165 sq.
Icchita [pp. of icchati] wished, desired, longed for J I.208; DhsA 364; PvA 3, 53, 64 (read anicchita for anijjhiṭṭha, which may be a contamination of icchita & iṭṭha), 113, 127 (twice).

Ijjhati [Vedic ṛdhyate & ṛdhnoti; Gr. a)/lqomai to thrive, Lat. alo to nourish, also Vedic id̤ā refreshment & P. iddhi power] to have a good result, turn out a blessing. succeed, prosper, be successful S I.175 ("work effectively" trsl.; = samijjhati mahapphalaŋ hoti C.); IV.303; Sn 461, 485; J V.393; Pv II.111; II.913 (= samijjhati PvA 120); Pot. ijjhe Sn 458, 459; pret. ijjhittha (= Sk. ṛdhyiṣṭha) Vv 206 (= nippajjittha mahapphalo ahuvattha VvA 103). <-> pp. iddha. See also ad̤d̤ha2 & ad̤d̤haka. Cp. sam°.
Ijjhana (nt.) & °ā (f.) [fr. ijjhati] success, carrying out successfully Ps I.17 sq., 74, 181; II.125, 143 sq., 161, 174; Vbh 217 sq.; Vism 266, 383 (°aṭṭhena iddhi); DhsA 91, 118, 237.
Iñjati [Vedic ṛñjati (cp. P. ajjati). Also found as ingati (so Veda), and as ang in Sk. anga = P. añja & ingha & Vedic pali--angati to turn about. See also ānejja & añjati1] to shake, move, turn about, stir D I.56; S I.107, 132, 181 (aniñjamāna ppr. med. "impassive"); III.211; Th 1, 42; 2, 231; Nd2 s. v. (+ calati vedhati); Vism 377; DA I.167. -- pp. iñjita (q. v.).
Iñjanā (f.) & °aŋ (nt.) [fr. iñj, see iñjati] shaking, movement, motion Sn 193 (= calanā phandanā SnA 245); Nett 88 (= phandanā C.). an° immobility, steadfastness Ps I.15; II.118.
Iñjita [pp. of iñjati] shaken, moved Th 1, 386 (an°). Usually as nt. iñjitaŋ shaking, turning about, movement, vacillation M I.454; S I.109; IV.202; A II.45; Sn 750, 1040 (pl. iñjitā), 1048 (see Nd2 140); Dh 255; Vbh 390. <-> On the 7 iñjitas see J.P . T.S. 1884, 58.
Iñjitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. iñjita nt.] state of vacillation, wavering, motion S V.315 (kāyassa).
Iṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of icchati] pleasing, welcome, agreeable, pleasant, often in the idiomatic group iṭṭha kanta manāpa (of objects pleasing to the senses) D I.245; II.192; M I.85; S IV.60, 158, 235 sq.; V.22, 60, 147; A II.66 sq.; V.135 (dasa, dhammā etc., ten objects affording pleasure); Sn 759; It. 15; Vbh 2, 100, 337. -- Alone as nt. meaning welfare, good state, pleasure, happiness at Sn 154 (+ aniṭṭha); Nett 28 (+ aniṭṭha); Vism 167 (id.); PvA 116 (= bhadraŋ), 140. --aniṭṭha unpleasant, disagreeable PvA 32, 52, 60, 116. -- See also pariy°, in which iṭṭha stands for eṭṭha.
(f.) [BSk. iṣṭakā, e. g. Divy 221; from the Idg. root *idh > *aidh to burn, cp. Sk. idhma firewood, inddhe to kindle (idh or indh), edhaḥ fuel; Gr. a)i/qw burn, ai(_qos fire--brand; Lat. aedes, aestas & aestus; more especially Av. ištya tile, brick] -- 1. a burnt brick, a tile Vin II 121 (°pākara a brick wall, distinguished fr. silāpakāra & dāru°); J III.435, 446 (pākār iṭṭhikā read °aṭṭhakā); V.213 (rattiṭṭhikā); Vism 355 (°dārugomaya); PvA 4 (°cuṇṇa--makkhita--sīsa the head rubbed with brickpowder, i. e. plaster; a ceremony performed on one to be executed, cp. Mṛcchakaṭika X.5 piṣṭa--cūṛnɔâvakīrṇaśca puruṣo ɔhaŋ paśūkṛtaḥ with striking equation iṣṭaka > piṣṭa). <-> 2. pl. (as suvaṇṇa°) gold or gilt tiles used for covering a cetiya or tope DhA III.29, 61; VvA 157.
Iṭṭhi° in °khagga--dhāra at J VI.223 should be read iddha.
Iṇa (nt.) [Sk. ṛṇa, see also P. an--aṇa] debt D I.71, 73; A III.352; V.324 (enumd. with baddha, jāni & kali); Sn 120; J I.307; II.388, 423; III.66; IV.184 (iṇagga for nagga?); 256; V.253 (where enumd. as one of the 4 paribhogas, viz. theyya°, iṇa°, dāya°, sāmi°); VI.69, 193; Miln 375; PvA 273, 276, iṇaŋ gaṇhāti to borrow money or take up a loan Vism 556; SnA 289; PvA 3. -- iṇaŋ muñcati to discharge a debt J IV.280; V.238; °ŋ sodheti same PvA 276; labhati same PvA 3.
--apagama absence of debt ThA 245. --gāhaka a borrower Miln 364. --ghāta stricken by debt Sn 246 (= iṇaŋ gahetva tassa appadānena iṇaghāta). --ṭṭha (with iṇaṭṭa as v. l. at all passages, see aṭṭa) fallen into or being in debt M I.463 = S III.93 = It 89 = Miln 279. --paṇṇa promissory note J I.230; IV.256. --mokkha release from debt J IV.280; V.239. --sādhaka negotiator of
a loan Miln 365.
Iṇāyika [fr. iṇa] one connected with a debt, viz. (1) a creditor S I.170; J IV.159, 256; VI.178; ThA 271 see also dhanika); PvA 3. -- (2) a debtor Vin I.76; Nd1 160.

Ita [pp. of eti, i] gone, only in cpd. dur--ita gone badly, as nt. evil, wrong Davs I.61; otherwise in compn. with prep., as peta, vīta etc.
Itara1 (adj.) [Ved. itara = Lat. iterum a second time; compar. of pron. base *i, as in ayaŋ, etaŋ, iti etc.] other, second, next; different Dh 85, 104, 222; J II.3; III.26; IV.4; PvA 13, 14, 42, 83, 117. In repetition cpd. itarîtara one or the other, whatsoever, any Sn 42; J V.425; Nd2 141; Miln 395; KhA 145, 147; acc. itarîtaraŋ & instr. itarîtarena used as adv. of one kind or another, in every way, anyhow [cp. BSk. itaretara M Vastu III. 348 and see Wackernagel Altind. Gram. II. Ś 121 c.] J VI 448 (°ŋ); Dh 331 (°ena); Vv 841 (text reads itritarena, v. l. itaritarena, expld. by itaritaraŋ VvA 333).
Itara2 (adj.) freq. spelling for ittara (q. v.).
(indecl.) [Vedic iti, of pron. base *i, cp. Sk. itthaŋ thus, itthā here, there; Av. ipa so; Lat. ita & item thus. Cp. also P. ettha; lit. "here, there (now), then"] emphatic<-> deictic particle "thus". Occurs in both forms iti & ti, the former in higher style (poetry), the latter more familiar in
conversational prose. The function of "iti" is expld. by the old Pāli C. in a conventional phrase, looking upon it more as a "filling" particle than trying to define its meaning viz. --itī ti padasandhi padasaŋsaggo padapāripurī akkharasamavāyo etc." Nd1 123 =
Nd2 137. The same expln. also for iti'haŋ (see below IV.) -- I. As deictic adv. "thus, in this way" (Vism 423 iti = evaŋ) pointing
to something either just mentioned or about to be mentioned: (a) referring to what precedes Sn 253 (n'eso maman ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 805; It 123 (ito devā. . . taŋ namassanti); Dh 74 (iti bālassa sankappo thus think the --foolish), 286 (iti bālo vicinteti);
Vv 7910 (= evaŋ VvA 307); VvA 5. -- (b) referring to what follows D I.63 (iti paṭisañcikkhati); A I.205 (id.) -- II. As emphatic
part. pointing out or marking off a statement either as not one's own (reported) or as the definite contents of (one's own or
other's) thoughts. On the whole untranslatable (unless written as quotation marks), often only setting off a statement as
emphatic, where we would either underline the word or phrase in question, or print it in italics, or put it in quot. marks (e. g.
bālo ti vuccati Dh 63 = bālo vuccati). -- 1. in direct speech (as given by writer or narrator), e. g. sādhu bhante Kassapa lābhataŋ
esā janatā dassanāyā ti. Tena hi Sīha tvaŋ yeva Bhagavato ārocehī ti. Evaŋ bhante ti kho Sīho . . . . D I.151. -- 2. in indirect
speech: (a) as statement of a fact "so it is that" (cp. E. "viz.", Ger. "und zwar"), mostly untranslated Kh IV. (arahā ti pavuccati); J I.253 (tasmā pesanaka--corā t'eva vuccanti); III.51 (tayo sahāyā ahesuŋ makkato sigālo uddo ti); PvA 112 (ankuro pañca--sakaṭasatehi . . . aññataro pi brāhmaṇo pañca--sakaṭasatehī ti dve janā sakata--sahassehi . . . patipannā). -- (b) as
statement of a thought "like this", "I think", so, thus Sn 61 ("sango eso" iti ñatvā knowing "this is defilement"), 253 ("neso
maman" ti iti naŋ vijaññā), 783 ("iti'han" ti), 1094 (etaŋ dīpaŋ anāparaŋ Nibbānaŋ iti naŋ brūmi I call this N.), 1130 (aparā
pāraŋ gaccheyya tasmā "Parāyanaŋ" iti). -- III. Peculiarities of spelling. (1) in combn. with other part. iti is elided & contracted
as follows: icc'eva, t'eva, etc. -- (2) final a, i, u preceding ti are lengthened to ā, ī, ū, e. g. mā evaŋ akatthā ti DhA I.7; kati
dhurānī ti ibid; dve yeva dhurāni bhikkhū ti ibid. <-> IV. Combinations with other emphatic particles: + eva thus indeed, in
truth, really; as icc'eva Pv I.119 (= evam eva PvA 59); t'eva J I.253; Miin 114; tv'eva J I.203; II.2. --iti kira thus now, perhaps,
I should say D I.228, 229, 240. --iti kho thus, therefore D I.98, 103; III.135. iti vā and so on (?), thus and such (similar cases)
Nd1 13 = Nd2 420 A1. --iti ha thus surely, indeed Sn 934, 1084 (see below under ītihītihaŋ; cp. SnA Index 669: itiha? and
itikirā); It 76; DA I.247, as iti haŋ at Sn 783 (same expln. at Nd1 71 as for iti). --kin ti how J II.159.
--kirā (f.) [a substantivised iti kira] hearsay, lit. "so I guess" or "I have heard" A I.189 = II.191 sq. = Nd2 151. Cp. itiha. --bhava becoming so & so (opp. abhava not becoming) Vin II.184 (°abhava); D I.8 (ip = iti bhavo iti abhavo DA I.91); A II.248; It 109 (id.); syn. with itthabhava (q. v.). --vāda "speaking so & so", talk, gossip M I.133; S V.73; A II.26; It III.35. --vuttaka (nt.) [a noun formation fr. iti vuttaŋ] "so it has been said", (book of) quotations, "Logia", N. of the fourth book of the Khuddaka--nikāya, named thus because every sutta begins with vuttaŋ h'etaŋ Bhagavatā "thus has the Buddha said" (see khuddaka and navanga) Vin III.8; M I.133; A II.7, 103; III.86, 177, 361 sq.; Pug 43, 62; KhA 12. Kern, Toev. s. v. compares the interesting BSk. distortion itivṛttaŋ. --hāsa [= iti ha āsa, preserving the Vedic form āsa, 3rd sg. perf. of atthi] "thus indeed it has been", legendary lore, oral tradition, history; usually mentioned as a branch of brahmanic learning, in phrase

itihāsa--pañca--mānaŋ padako veyyākaraṇo etc. D I.88 = (see DA I.247); A I.163; III.223; Sn 447, 1020. Cp. also M Vastu I.556. --hītiha [itiha + itiha] "so & so" talk, gossip, oral tradition, belief by hearsay etc. (cp. itikirā & anītiha. Nd2 spells ītihītiha) M I.520; S I.154; Sn 1084; Nd2 151.
Ito (indecl.) [Vedic itaḥ, abl.--adv. formation fr. pron. base *i, cp. iti, ayaŋ etc.] adv. of succession or motion in space & time "from here". "from now". (1) with ref. to space: (a) from here, from this, often implying the present existence (in opp. to the "other" world) It 77; Sn 271 (°ja. °nidāna caused or founded in or by this existence = attabhāvaŋ sandhāy'āha SnA 303), 774 (cutāse), 870 (°nidāna), 1062 (from this source, i. e. from me), 1101; Pv I.57 (ito dinnaŋ what is given in this world); I.62 (i. e. manussalokato PvA 33); I.123 (= idhalokato PvA 64); Nett 93 (ito bahiddhā); PvA 46 (ito dukkhato mutti). -- (b) here (with implication of movement), in phrases ito c'ito here and there PvA 4, 6; and ito vā etto vā here & there DhA II.80. -- (2) with ref. to time: from here, from now, hence (in chronological records with num. ord. or card., with ref. either to past or future). (a) referring to the past, since D II.2 (ito so ekanavuto kappo 91 kappas ago); Sn 570 (ito aṭṭhame, scil. divase 8 days ago SnA 457; T. reads atthami); VvA 319 (ito kira tiŋsa--kappa--sahasse); PvA 19 (dvā navuti kappe 92 kappas ago), 21 (id.), 78 (pañcamāya jātiyā in the fifth previous re--birth). -- (b) referring to the future, i. e. henceforth, in future, from now e. g. ito sattame divase in a week VvA 138; ito paraŋ further, after this SnA 160, 178, 412, 549; PvA 83; ito paṭthāya from now on, henceforward J I.63 (ito dāni p.); PvA 41.
Ittara (sometimes spelt itara) (adj.) [Vedic itvara in meaning "going", going along, hence developed meaning "passing"; fr.
i] -- 1. passing, changeable, short, temporary, brief, unstable M I.318 (opp. dīgharattaŋ); A II.187; J I.393; III.83 (°dassana = khaṇika° C.), IV.112 (°vāsa temporary abode); Pv I.1111 (= na cira--kāla--ṭṭhāyin anicca vipariṇāma--dhamma PvA 60); DA I.195; PvA 60 (= paritta khaṇika). -- 2. small, inferior, poor, unreliable, mean M II.47 (°jacca of inferior birth); A II.34; Sn 757 (= paritta paccupaṭṭhāna SnA 509); Miln 93, 114 (°pañña of small wisdom). This meaning (2) also in BSk. itvaṛa, e. g. Divy 317 (dāna).
Ittaratā (f.) [fr. ittara] changeableness Miln 93 (of a woman).
Ittha (indecl.) [the regular representative of Vedic ittha here, there, but preserved only in cpds. while the Pāli form is ettha] here, in this world (or "thus, in such a way"), only in cpd. °bhāv'aññathā--bhāva such an (i. e. earthly) existence and one of another kind, or existence here (in this life) and in another form" (cp. itibhāva & itthatta) Sn 729, 740 = 752; It 9 (v. l. itthi° for iti°) = A II.10 = Nd2 172a; It 94 (v. l. ittha°). There is likely to have been a confusion between ittha = Sk. itthā & itthaŋ = Sk. itthaŋ (see next).
Itthaŋ (indecl.) [adv. fr. pron. base °i, as also iti in same meaning] thus, in this way D I.53, 213; Dāvs IV.35; V.18.
--nāma (itthan°) having such as name, called thus, socalled Vin I.56; IV.136; J I.297; Miln 115; DhA II.98. --bhūta being
thus, of this kind, modal, only in cpd. °lakkhaṇa or °ākhyāna the sign or case of modality, i. e. the ablative case SnA 441; VvA 162, 174; PvA 150.
Itthatta1 (nt.) [ittha + *tvaŋ, abstr. fr. ittha. The curious BSk. distortion of this word is icchatta M Vastu 417] being here (in this world), in the present state of becoming, this (earthly) state (not "thusness" or "life as we conceive it", as Mrs. Rh. D. in K. S. I.177; although a confusion between ittha & itthaŋ seems to exist, see ittha); "life in these conditions" K. S. II.17; expld. by itthabhāva C. on S I.140 (see K. S. 318). -- See also freq. formula A of arahatta. -- D I.18, 84; A I.63; II.82, 159, 203; Sn 158; Dhs 633; Pug 70, 71; DA I.112.
Itthatta2 (nt.) [itthi + *tvaŋ abstr. fr. itthi] state or condition of femininity, womanhood, muliebrity Dhs 633 (= itthi--sabhāva DhsA 321).

Itthi & Itthī (f.) [Vedic stri, Av. strī woman, perhaps with Sk. sātuḥ uterus fr. Idg. °sī to sow or produce, Lat. sero, Goth.
saian, Ohg. sāen, Ags. sāwan etc., cp. also Cymr. hīl progeny, Oir. sīl seed; see J. Schmidt, K. Z. XXV.29. The regular representative of Vedic strī is P. thī, which only occurs rarely (in poetry & compn.) see thī] woman, female; also (usually as --°) wife. Opp. purisa man (see e. g. for contrast of itthi and purisa J V.72, 398; Nett 93; DhA I.390; PvA 153). -- S I.33 (nibbānass'eva santike), 42, 125 (majjhim°, mah°), 185; A I.28, 138; II.115, 209; III.68, 90, 156; IV.196 (purisaŋ bandhati); Sn 112, 769 (nom. pl. thiyo = itthi--saññikā thiyo SnA 513); J I.286 (itthi doso), 300 (gen. pl. itthinaŋ); II.415 (nom. pl. thiyo); V.397 (thi--ghātaka), 398 (gen. dat. itthiyā), V.425 (nom pl. itthiyo); Vbh 336, 337; DA I.147; PvA 5, 44, 46, 67, 154
(amanuss° of petīs); Sdhp 64, 79. -- anitthi a woman lacking the characteristics of womanhood, an unfaithful wife J II.126 (= ucchiṭṭh° C.); kul'--itthi a wife of good descent Vin II.10; A III.76; IV.16, 19; dahar° a young wife J I.291; dur° a poor woman J IV.38. <-> Some general characterisations of womanhood: 10 kinds of women enumd. at Vin III.139 = A V.264 = VvA 72, viz. mātu--rakkhitā, pitu°, mātāpitu° bhātu°, bhaginī°, ñāti°, gotta°, dhamma°, sarakkhā, saparidaṇd̤ā; see Vin III.139 for expln. -- S I.38 (malaŋ brahmacariyassa), 43 (id.); J I.287 (itthiyo nāma āsa lāmikā pacchimikā); IV. 222 (itthiyo papāto akkhāto; pamattaŋ pamathenti); V. 425 (sīho yathā . . . tath'itthiyo); women as goods for sale S I.43 (bhaṇd̤ānaŋ uttamaŋ); DhA I.390 (itthiyo vikkiṇiya bhaṇd̤aŋ).
--agāra (--āgāra) as itthā̆gāra women's apartment, seraglio Vin I.72; IV.158; S I.58, 89; J I.90; also coll. for womenfolk, women (cp. Ger. frauenzimmer) D II.249; J V.188. --indriya the female principle or sex, femininity (opp. puris' indriya) S V.204; A IV.57 sq.; Vism 447, 492; Dhs 585, 633, 653 et passim. --kathā talk about women D I.7 (cp. DA I.90). --kāma the craving for a woman S IV.343. --kutta a woman's behaviour, woman's wiles, charming behaviour, coquetry A IV.57 = Dhs 633; J I.296, 433; II.127, 329; IV.219, 472; DhA IV.197. --ghātaka a woman--killer J V. 398. --dhana wife's treasure, dowry Vin III.16. --dhutta a rogue in the matter of women, one who indulges in women Sn 106; J III.260; PvA 5. --nimitta characteristic of a woman Dhs 633, 713, 836. --pariggaha a woman's company, a woman Nd1 11. --bhāva existence as woman, womanhood S I.129; Th 2, 216 (referring to a yakkhinī, cp. ThA 178; Dhs 633; PvA 168. --rūpa womanly beauty A I.1; III.68; Th 2, 294. --lakkhaṇa fortune--telling regarding a woman D I.9 (cp. DhA I.94, + purisa°); J VI. 135. --linga "sign of a woman", feminine quality, female sex Vism 184; Dhs 633, 713, 836; DhsA 321 sq. --sadda the sound (or word) "woman" DhA I.15. --soṇd̤ī a woman addicted to drink Sn 112.
Itthikā (f.) [fr. itthi] a woman Vin III.16; D II.14; J I. 336; Vv 187; Sdhp 79. As adj. itthika in bahutthika having many women, plentiful in women Vin II.256 (kulāni bahuttikāni appapurisakāni rich in women & lacking in men); S II.264 (id. and appitthikāni).
Ida & Idaŋ (indecl.) [nt. of ayaŋ (idaŋ) in function of a deictic part.] emphatic demonstr. adv. in local, temporal & modal function, as (1) in this, here: idappaccayatā having its foundation in this, i. e. causally connected, by way of cause Vin I.5 = S I.136; D I.185; Dhs 1004, 1061; Vbh 340, 362, 365; Vism 518; etc. -- (2) now, then which idha is more freq.) D II.267, 270,
almost syn. (for with kira. -- (3) just (this), even so, only: idam--atthika just sufficient, proper, right Th 1, 984 (cīvara); Pug 69 (read so for °maṭṭhika, see Pug A 250); as idam--atthitā "being satisfied with what is sufficient" at Vism 81: expld. as atthika--bhāva at Pug A 250. idaŋsaccâbhinivesa inclination to say: only this is the truth, i. e. inclination to dogmatise, one of the four kāya--ganthā, viz. abhijjhā, byāpāda, sīlabbata--parāmāsa, idaŋ° (see Dhs 1135 & Dhs trsl. 304); D III.230; S V.59; Nd1 98; Nett 115 sq.
Idāni (indecl.) [Vedic idānīŋ] now Dh 235, 237; KhA 247. Iddha1
Iddha1 [pp. of iddhe to idh or indh, cp. indhana & idhuma] in flames, burning, flaming bright, clear J VI.223 (°khaggadharā balī; so read for T. iṭṭhi--khagga°); Dpvs VI.42.
Iddha2 [pp. of ijjhati; cp. Sk. ṛddha] (a) prosperous, opulent, wealthy D I.211 (in idiomatic phrase iddha phīta bahujana, of a prosperous town); A III.215 (id.); J VI.227, 361 (= issara C.), 517; Dāvs I.11. -- (b) successful, satisfactory, sufficient Vin I.212

(bhattaŋ); IV.313 (ovādo).
Iddhi [Vedic ṛddhi from ardh, to prosper; Pali ijjhati]. There is no single word in English for Iddhi, as the idea is unknown
in Europe. The main sense seems to be ʻpotencyʼ. -- 1. Pre--Buddhistic; the Iddhi of a layman. The four Iddhis of a king are personal beauty, long life, good health, and popularity (D II.177; M III.176, cp. J III.454 for a later set). The Iddhi of a rich young noble is 1. The use of a beautiful garden, 2. of soft and pleasant clothing, 3. of different houses for the different seasons, 4. of good food, A I.145. At M I.152 the Iddhi of a hunter, is the craft and skill with which he captures game; but at p. 155 other game have an Iddhi of their own by which they outwit the hunter. The Iddhi, the power of a confederation of clans, is referred to at D II.72. It is by the Iddhi they possess that birds are able to fly (Dhp 175). -- 2. Psychic powers. including most of those claimed for modern mediums (see under Abhiññā). Ten such are given in a stock paragraph. They are the power to project mind--made images of oneself; to become invisible; to pass through solid things, such as a wall; to penetrate solid ground as if it were water; to walk on water; to fly through the air; to touch sun and moon; to ascend into the highest heavens (D I.77, 212; II.87, 213; III.112, 281; S II.121; V.264, 303; A I.170, 255; III.17, 28, 82, 425; V.199; Ps I.111; II.207; Vism 378 sq., 384; DA I.122). For other such powers see S I.144; IV.290; V.263; A III.340. -- 3. The Buddhist theory of Iddhi. At D I.213 the Buddha is represented as saying: ʻIt is because I see danger in the practice of these mystic wonders that I loathe and abhor and am ashamed thereofʼ. The mystic wonder that he himself believed in and advocated (p. 214) was the wonder of education. What education was meant in the case of Iddhi, we learn from M I.34; A III.425, and from the four bases of Iddhi, the Iddhipādā. They are the making determination in respect of concentration on purpose, on will, on thoughts & on
investigation (D II.213; M I.103; A I.39, 297; II.256; III. 82; Ps I.111; II 154, 164, 205; Vbh 216). It was ar offence against the regulations of the Sangha for a Bhikkhv to display before the laity these psychic powers beyond the capacity of ordinary men (Vin II.112). And falsely to claim the possession of such powers involved expulsion from the Order (Vin III.91). The psychic powers of Iddhi were looked upon as inferior (as the Iddhi of an unconverted man seeking his own profit), compared to the higher Iddhi, the Ariyan Iddhi (D III.112; A I.93; Vin II.183). There is no valid evidence that any one of the ten Iddhis in the above list actually took place. A few instances are given, but all are in texts more than a century later than the recorded wonder. And now for nearly two thousand years we have no further instances. Various points on Iddhi discussed at Dial. I.272, 3; Cpd. 60 ff.; Expositor 121. Also at Kvu 55; Ps II.150; Vism XII; DhA I.91; J I.47, 360.
--ânubhāva (iddhånu°) power or majesty of thaumaturgy Vin 31, 209, 240; III.67; S I 147; IV.290; PvA 53. --âbhisankhāra (iddhåbhi°) exercise of any of the psychic powers Vin I.16, 17, 25; D I.106; S III.92; IV.289; V.270;
Sn p. 107; PvA 57, 172 212. --pāṭihāriya a wonder of psychic power Vin I.25, 28, 180, 209; II.76, 112, 200; D I.211, 212;
III.3, 4, 9, 12 sq., 27; S IV.290; A I.170, 292; Ps II.227. --pāda constituent or basis of psychic power Vin II.240; D II.103, 115 sq., 120; III.77, 102, 127, 221; M II.11; III.296; S I.116, 132; III.96, 153; IV.360; V.254, 255, 259 sq., 264 sq., 269 sq., 275, 285; A IV.128 sq., 203, 463; V.175; Nd1 14, 45 (°dhīra), 340 (°pucchā); Nd1 s. v.; Ps I.17, 21, 84; II.56, 85 sq., 120, 166, 174; Ud 62; Dhs 358, 528, 552; Nett 16, 31, 83; DhsA 237; DhA III.177; IV.32. --bala the power of working wonders VvA 4; PvA
171. --yāna the carriage (fig.) of psychic faculties Miln 276. --vikubbanā the practice of psychic powers Vism 373 sq. --vidhā kinds of iddhi D I.77, 212; II.213; III.112, 281; S II.121; v.264 sq., 303; A I.170 sq., 255; III.17, 28, 82 sq., 425 sq.; V.199; Ps I.111; II.207; Vism 384; DA I.222. --visaya range or extent of psychic power Vin III.67; Nett 23.
Iddhika1 (--°) (adj.) the compn. form of addhika in cpd. kapaṇ--iddhika tramps & wayfarers (see kapaṇa), e. g. at J I.6; IV.15; PvA 78.
Iddhika2 (--°) (adj.) [iddhi + ka] possessed of power, only in cpd. mah--iddhika of great power, always combd. with
mah--ânubhāva, e. g. at Vin I.31; II.193; III.101; S II. 155; M I.34; Th 1, 429. As mahiddhiya at J V.149. See mahiddhika.
Iddhimant (adj.) [fr. iddhi] -- 1. (lit.) successful, proficient, only in neg. an° unfortunate, miserable, poor J VI.361. <-> 2. (fig.) possessing psychic powers Vin III.67; IV.108; A I.23, 25; II.185; III.340; IV.312; Sn 179; Nett 23; Sdhp 32, 472.

Idha (indecl.) [Sk. iha, adv. of space fr. pron. base *i (cp. ayaŋ, iti etc.), cp. Lat. ihi, Gr. i)qa--genh/s, Av. ida] here, in this place, in this connection, now; esp. in this world or present existence Sn 1038, 1056, 1065; It 99 (idh' ûpapanna reborn in this existence); Dh 5, 15, 267, 343, 392; Nd1 40, 109, 156; Nd2 145, 146; SnA 147; PvA 45, 60, 71. --idhaloka this world, the
world of men Sn 1043 (= manussaloka Nd2 552c); PvA 64; in this religion, Vbh 245. On diff. meanings of idha see DhsA 348.
Idhuma [Sk. idhma, see etym. under iṭṭhakā] fire--wood <-> Tela--kaṭāha--gāthā, p. 53, J.P.T.S. 1884.
Inda [Vedic indra, most likely to same root as indu moon, viz. *Idg. *eid to shine, cp. Lat. īdūs middle of month (after the
full moon), Oir. ēsce moon. Jacobi in K. Z. XXXI.316 sq. connects Indra with Lat. neriosus strong & Nero). -- 1. The Vedic god Indra D I.244; II.261, 274; Sn 310, 316, 679, 1024; Nd1 177. -- 2. lord, chief, king. Sakko devānaŋ indo D I.216, 217;
II.221, 275; S I.219. Vepɔcitti asurindo S I.221 ff. manussinda, S I.69, manujinda, Sn 553, narinda, Sn 863, all of the Buddha, ʻchief of menʼ; cp. Vism 491. [Europeans have found a strange difficulty in understanding the real relation of Sakka to Indra. The few references to Indra in the Nikāyas should be classed with the other fragments of Vedic mythology to be found in them. Sakka belongs only to the Buddhist mythology then being built up. He is not only quite different from Indra, but is the direct contrary of that blustering, drunken, god of war. See the passages collected in Dial. II.294<-> 298. The idiom sa--Indā devā, D II.261, 274; A V.325, means ʻthe gods about Indra, Indra's retinueʼ, this being a Vedic story. But Devā Tāvatiŋsā
sahindakā means the T. gods together with their leader (D II.208--212; S III.90; cp. Vv 301) this being a Buddhist story].
--aggi (ind'aggi) Indra's fire, i. e. lightning PvA 56. --gajjita (nt.) Indra's thunder Miln 22. --jāla deception DA I.85. --jālika a juggler, conjurer Miln 331. --dhanu the rainbow DA I.40. --bhavana the realm of Indra Nd1 448 (cp. Tāvatiŋsa--bhavana). --linga the characteristic of Indra Vism 491. --sāla N. of tree J IV.92.
Indaka [dimin. fr. inda] -- 1. Np. (see Dict. of names), e. g. at Pv II.9Q; PvA 136 sq. -- 2. (--°) see inda 2.
Indakhīla [inda + khīla, cp. BSk. indrakīla Divy 250, 365, 544; Av. Ś I.109, 223]. "Indra's post"; the post, stake or column
of Indra, at or before the city gate; also a large slab of stone let into the ground at the entrance of a house D II.254 (°ŋ ūhacca, cp. DhA II.181); Vin IV.160 (expld. ibid. as sayani--gharassa ummāro, i. e. threshold); S V.444 (ayokhīlo +); Dh 95 (°ûpama, cp. DhA II.181); Th 1, 663; J I.89; Miln 364; Vism 72, 466; SnA 201; DA I.209 (nikkhamitvā bahi °ā); DhA II.180 (°sadisaŋ Sāriputtassa cittaŋ), 181 (nagara--dvāre nikhataŋ °ŋ).
Indagū see hindagū.
Indagopaka [inda + gopaka, cp. Vedic indragopā having Indra as protector] a sort of insect ("cochineal, a red beetle",
Böhtlingk), observed to come out of the ground after rain Th 1, 13; Vin III.42; J IV.258; V.168; DhA I.20; Brethren p. 18, n.
Indanīla [inda + nīla "Indra's blue"] a sapphire J I.80; Miln 118; VvA 111 (+ mahānīla).
Indavāruṇī (f.) [inda + vāruṇa] the Coloquintida plant J IV.8 (°ka--rukkha).
Indīvara (nt.) [etym.?] the blue water lily, Nymphaea Stellata or Cassia Fistula J V.92 (°ī--samā ratti); VI.536; Vv 451 (= uddālaka--puppha VvA 197).
Indriya (nt.) [Vedic indriya adj. only in meaning "belonging to Indra"; nt. strength, might (cp. inda), but in specific pāli
sense "belonging to the ruler", i. e. governing, ruling nt. governing, ruling or controlling principle] A. On term: Indriya is one of the most comprehensive & important categories of Buddhist psychological philosophy & ethics, meaning "controlling principle, directive force, élan, du/namis", in the foll. applications: (a) with reference to sense--perceptibility "faculty, function", often wrongly interpreted as "organ"; (b) w. ref. to objective aspects of form and matter "kind, characteristic, determinating principle, sign, mark" (cp. woman--hood, hood = Goth. haidus "kind, form"); (c) w. ref. to moods of sensation and (d) to moral powers or motives controlling action, "principle, controlling" force; (e) w. ref. to cognition & insight "category". <-> Definitions of indriya among others at DhsA 119; cp. Expositor 157; Dhs trsl. LVII; Cpd. 228, 229.
B. Classifications and groups of indriyāni. An exhaustive list comprises the indriyāni enumd under A a--e, thus establishing a

canonical scheme of 22 Controlling Powers (bāvīsati indriyāni), running thus at Vbh 122 sq. (see trsl. at Cpd. 175, 176); and discussed in detail at Vism 491 sq. (a. sensorial) (1) cakkh--undriya ("the eye which is a power", Cpd. 228) the eye or (personal potentiality of) vision, (2) sot--indriya the ear or hearing, (3) ghān° nose or smell, (4) jivh° tongue or taste, (5) kāy° body--sensibility, (6) man°) mind; (b. material) (7) itth° female sex or femininity, (8) puris° male sex or masculinity, (9)
jīvit° life or vitality; (c. sensational) (10) sukh° pleasure, (11) dukkh° pain, (12) somanasa° joy, (13) domanass° grief, (14) upekh° hedonic indifference (d. moral) (15) saddh° faith, (16) viriy° energy, (17) sat° mindfulness, (18) samādh° concentration, (19) paññ° reason; (e. cognitional) (20) anaññāta--ñassāmīt° the thought "I shall come to know the
unknown", (21) aññ° (= aññā) gnosis, (22) aññātā--v° one who knows. -- Jīvitindriya (no. 9) is in some redactions placed before itth° (no. 7), e. g. at Ps I.7, 137. -- From this list are detached several groups, mentioned frequently and in various connections, no. 6 manas (mano, man--indriya) wavering in its function, being either included under (a) or (more frequently) omitted, so that the first set (a) is marked off as pañc'indriyāni, the 6th being silently included (see below). This uncertainty regarding manas deserves to be noted. The foll. groups may be mentioned here viz 19 (nos. 1--19) at Ps I.137; 10 (pañca rūpīni &
pañca arūpīni) at Nett 69; three groups of five (nos. 1--5, 10--14, 15--19) at D III.239, cp. 278; four (group d without paññā, i. e. nos. 15--18) at A II.141; three (saddh°, samādh°, paññ°, i. e. nos. 15, 18, 19) at A I. 118 sq. Under aṭṭhavidhaŋ
indriya--rūpaŋ (Cpd. 159) or rūpaŋ as indriyaŋ "form which is faculty" Dhs 661 (cp. trsl. p. 204) are understood the 5 sensitives (nos. 1--5), the 2 séx--states (nos. 7, 8) and the vital force (no. 9), i. e. groups a & b of enumn.; discussed & defined in detail at Dhs 709--717, 971--973. -- It is often to be guessed from the context only, which of the sets of 5 indriyāni (usually either group a or d) is meant. These detached groups are classed as below under C. f. -- Note. This system of 22 indriyāni reflects a revised & more elaborate form of the 25 (or 23) categories of the Sānkhya philosophy, with its 10 elements, 10 indri, īni & the isolated position of manas.
C. Material in detail (grouped according to A a--e) (a) sensorial: (mentioned or referred to as set of 5 viz B. nos. 1--5): M I.295: S III.46 (pañcannaŋ °ānaŋ avak kanti), 225; IV.168; A II.151 (as set of 6, viz. B. nos. 1--6): M I.9; S IV.176; V.74, 205, 230; A I.113; II.16, 39, 152; III.99, 163, 387 sq.; V.348. Specially referring to restraint & control of the senses in foll. phrases: in driyāni saŋvutāni S II.231, 271; IV.112; pañcasu °esu saŋvuto Sn 340 (= lakkhaṇato pana chaṭṭhaŋ pi vuttaŋ yeva hoti, i. e. the 6th as manas included, SnA 343); °esu susaŋvuta Th 2, 196 (= mana--chaṭṭhesu i° suṭṭhu saŋvutā ThA 168) indriyesu guttadvāra & guttadvāratā D III.107; S II.218; IV.103, 112, 175; A I.25, 94, 113; II.39; III.70, 138, 173, 199, 449 sq.; IV.25,
166; V.134; It 23, 24; Nd1 14; Vbh 248, 360; DA I.182 (= manachaṭṭesu indriyesu pihita--dvāro hoti), i. vippasannāni S II.
275; III.2, 235; IV.294; V.301; A I.181; III.380. °ānaŋ samatā (v. l. samatha) A III.375 sq. (see also f. below) °āni bhāvitāni Sn 516 (= cakkh'ādīni cha i. SnA 426); Nd2 475 B8. -- Various: S I.26 (rakkhati), 48 (°ûpasame rato); IV.40, 140 (°sampanna); V.216, 217 sq. (independent in function, mano as referee); Ps. I.190 (man°); Vbh 13 (rūpa), 341 (mud° & tikkh°) 384 (ahīn°).
-- (b) physical: (above B 7--9) all three: S V.204; Vism 447; itthi° & purisa° A IV.57; Vbh 122, 415 sq.; puris° A III.404; jīvit° Vbh 123, 137; Vism 230 (°upaccheda = maraṇa). See also under itthi, jīvita & purisa. -- (c) sensational (above B 10--14): S V.207 sq. (see Cpd. 111 & cp. p. 15), 211 sq.; Vbh 15, 71; Nett 88. -- (d) moral (above B 15<-> 19): S III.96, 153; IV.36, 365 sq.; V.193 sq., 202, 219 (corresponding to pañcabalāni), 220 sq. (and amata), 223 sq. (their culture brings assurance of no rebirth), 227 sq. (paññā the chief one), 235, 237 (sevenfold fruit of), A IV.125 sq., 203, 225; V.56, 175; Ps II.49, 51 sq., 86;
Nd1 14; Nd2 628 (sat° + satibala); Kvu 589; Vbh 341; Nett 15, 28, 47, 54. Often in standard combn. with satipaṭṭhāna, sammappadhāna. iddhipāda, indriya, bala, bojjhanga, magga (see Nd2 s. v. p. 263) D II.120; Vin III. 93, Ps II.166 & passim.
As set of 4 indriyāni (nos. 16<-> 19) at Nett 83. -- (e) cognitional (above B 20--22) D III.219 = S v.204 (as peculiar to Arahantship); It 53; Ps I.115; II.30. -- (f) collectively, either two or more of groups a--e, also var. peculiar uses: personal; esp. physical faculties. S I.61 (pākat°), 204 (id.); III.207 (ākāsaŋ °āni sankamanti); IV.294 (vipari--bhinnāni); A III.441 (°ānaŋ avekallatā). magic power A IV.264 sq. (okkhipati °āni). indriyānaŋ paripāko (moral or physical) over--ripeness of faculties S II.2, 42; A V.203; Nd2 252 (in def. of jarā); Vbh 137. moral forces Vin I.183 (°ānaŋ samatā, + viriyānaŋ s. as sign of Arahant); II.240 (pañc°). principle of life ekindriyaŋ jīvaŋ Vin III.156; Miln 259. heart or seat of feeling in phrase °āni paricāreti to satisfy one's heart PvA 16, 58, 77. obligation, duty, vow in phrase °āni bhinditvā breaking one's vow J II.274; IV.190.
D. Unclassified material D I 77 (ahīn°); III 239 (domanass° & somanass°) M I.437 (vemattatā), 453 (id.); II. 11, 106; III.296; S III.225; V.209 (dukkh°, domanass°); A I.39, 42 sq., 297; II.38 (sant°), 149 sq.; III.277, 282; Ps I.16, 21, 88, 180; II.1 sq, 13, 84, 119, 132, 143, 145, 110, 223; Nd1 45 (°dhīra), 171 (°kusala), 341 (pucchā); Dhs 58, 121, 528, 556 (dukkh°), 560, 644. 736; Nett 18 (sotāpannassa), 28 (°vavaṭṭhāna), 162 (lok'uttara); Vism 350 (°vekallatā); Sdhp 280, 342, 364, 371, 449, 473.

E. As adj. (--°) having one's senses, mind or heart as such & such S I.138 (tikkh° & mud°); III.93 (pākat°); V.269 (id.); A I.70 (id) & passim (id.); A I.70 (saŋvut°) 266 (id.), 236 (gutt°); II.6 (samāhit°); 8n 214 (susamāhit° his senses well--composed); PvA 70 (pīṇit° joyful or gladdened of heart).
F. Some compounds: --gutta one who restrains & watches his senses S I.154; Dh 375. --gutti keeping watch over the senses, self--restraint DhA IV.111. a paropariya, b paropariyatta & c paropariyatti (°ñāṇa) (knowledge of) what goes on in the
senses and intentions of others a J I.78; b A V.34, 38; b Ps I.121 sq., 133 sq.; II.158, 175; b Vbh 340, 342; c S V.205; c Nett 101. See remark under paropariya. --bhāvanā cultivation of the (five, see above Cd) moral qualities Vin I.294 (+ balabhāvanā); M III.298. --saŋvara restraint or subjugation of the senses D II.281; M I.269, 346; S I.54; A III.360; IV.99; V.113 sq., 136, 206; Nd1 483; Nett 27, 121 sq; Vism 20 sq.
Indhana (nt.) [Vedic indhana, of idh or indh to kindle, cp. iddha1] firewood, fuel J IV.27 (adj. an° without fuel, aggi); V.447; ThA 256; VvA 335; Sdhp 608. Cp. idhuma.
Ibbha (adj.) [Ved. ibhya belonging to the servants] menial; a retainer, in the phrase muṇd̤akā samaṇakā ibbhā kaṇhā (kiṇhā) bandhupādâpaccā D I.90 (v. l. SS imbha; T. kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā), 91, 103; M I.334 (kiṇhā, v. l. kaṇhā). Also at J VI.214. Expld. by Bdhgh. as gahapatika at DA I.254, (also at J VI.215).
Iriṇa (nt.) [Vedic iriṇa, on etym. see Walde, Lat. Wtb. under rarus] barren soil, desert J VI.560 (= niroja C.). Cp. īriṇa.
Iriyati [fr. īr to set in motion, to stir, Sk. īrte, but pres. formation influenced by iriyā & also by Sk. iyarti of ṛ (see acchati & icchati2); cp. Caus. īrayati (= P. īreti), pp. īrṇa & īrita. See also issā] to move, to wander about, stir; fig. to move, behave, show a certain way of deportment M I.74, 75; S I.53 (dukkhaŋ aticca iriyati); IV.71; A III.451; V.41; Sn 947, 1063, 1097; Th 1,276; J III.498 (= viharati); Nd1 431; Nd2 147 (= carati etc.); Vism 16; DA I.70.
Iriyanā (f.) [fr. iriyati] way of moving on, progress, Dhs 19, 82, 295, 380, 441, 716.
Iriyā (f.) [cp. from iriyati, BSk. īryā Divy 485] movement, posture, deportment M I.81; Sn 1038 (= cariyā vatti vihāro Nd2 148); It 31; Vism 145 (+ vutti pālana yapana).
--patha way of deportment; mode of movement; good behaviour. There are 4 iriyāpathas or postures, viz. walking, standing, sitting, lying down (see Ps II.225 & DA I.183). Cp. BSk. īryāpatha Divy 37. -- Vin I.39; II.146 (°sampanna); Vin I.91 (chinn° a cripple); S V.78 (cattāro i.); Sn 385; Nd1 225, 226; Nd2 s. v.; J I.22 (of a lion), 66, 506; Miln 17; Vism 104, 128, 290, 396; DhA I.9; IV.17; VvA 6; PvA 141; Sdhp 604.
Irubbeda the Rig--veda Dpvs V.62 (iruveda); Miln 178; DA I.247; SnA 447.
Illiyā (f.) [fr. illī, cp. Sk. *īlikā] = illī J V.259; VI.50.
Illī (f.) [cp. Vedic ilībiśa Np. of a demon] a sort of weapon, a short one--edged sword J V.259.
Illīyituŋ v. l. for allīyituŋ at J V.154.
Iva (indecl.) [Vedic iva & va] part. of comparison: like, as Dh 1, 2, 7, 8, 287, 334; J I.295; SnA 12 (= opamma--vacanaŋ). Elided to 'va, diaeretic--metathetic form viya (q. v.).
Isi [Vedic ṛṣi fr. ṛṣ. -- Voc. ise Sn 1025; pl. npm. isayo, gen. isinaŋ S II.280 & isīnaŋ S I.192; etc. inst. isibhi Th 1, 1065] -- 1. a holy man, one gifted with special powers of insight & inspiration, an anchoret, a Seer, Sage, Saint, "Master" D I.96 (kaṇho isi ahosi); S I.33, 35, 65, 128, 191, 192, 226 sq., 236 (ācāro isīnaŋ); II.280 (dhammo isinaŋ dhajo); A II.24, 51; Vin IV.15 = 22 (°bhāsito dhammo); It 123; Sn 284, 458, 979, 689, 691, 1008, 1025, 1043, 1044, 1116 (dev° divine Seer), 1126, Nd2 149 (isi--nāmakā ye keci isi--pabbajjaŋ pabbajitā ājīvikā nigaṇṭhā jaṭilā tāpasā); Dh 281; J I.17 (v.90: isayo n'atthi me samā of Buddha); J V.140 (°gaṇa), 266, 267 (isi Gotamo); Pv II.614 (= yama--niyam'ādīnaŋ esanatthena isayo PvA 98); II.133 (=

jhān'ādīnaŋ guṇānaŋ esanatthena isi PvA 163); IV.73 (= asekkhānaŋ sīlakkhandh'ādīnaŋ esanatthena isiŋ PvA 265); Miln 19 (°vāta) 248 (°bhattika); DA I.266 (gen. isino); Sdhp 200, 384. See also mahesi. -- 2. (in brahmanic tradition) the ten (divinely) inspired singers or composers of the Vedic hymns (brāhmaṇānaŋ pubbakā isayo mantānaŋ kattāro pavattāro), whose names are given at Vin I. 245; D I.104, 238; A III.224, IV.61 as follows: Aṭṭhaka, Vāmaka, Vāmadeva, Vessāmitta, Yamataggi (Yamadaggi), Angirasa, Bhāradvāja, Vāseṭṭha, Kassapa, Bhagu.
--nisabha the first (lit. "bull") among Saints, Ep. of the Buddha Sn 698; Vv 167 (cp. VvA 82). --pabbajjā the (holy) life of an anchoret Vism 123; DhA I.105; IV.55; PvA 162. --vāta the wind of a Saint Miln 19; Vism 18. --sattama the 7th of the great Sages (i. e. Gotama Buddha, as 7th in the sequence of Vipassin, Sikhin, Vessabhu, Kakusandha, Koṇāgamana & Kassapa Buddhas) M I.386; S I.192; Sn 356; Th 1, 1240 (= Bhagavā isi ca sattamo ca uttamaṭṭhena SnA 351); Vv 211 (= buddha--isinaŋ Vipassi--ādīnaŋ sattamo VvA 105).
(f.) [Sk. iṣīkā] a reed D I.77, cp. DA I.222; J VI.67 (isikā).
Isitta (nt.) [abstr. fr. isi] rishi--ship D I.104 (= isi--bhāva DA I.274).
Issati [denom. fr. issā. Av. areṣyeiti to be jealous, Gr. e)/ratai to desire; connected also with Sk. arṣati fr. ṛṣ to flow, Lat.
erro; & Sk. irasyati to be angry = Gr. *)/arhs God of war, a)rh\; Ags. eorsian to be angry] to bear illwill, to be angry, to envy J III.7; ppr. med. issamānaka Sdhp 89, f. °ikā A II.203. -- pp. issita (q. v.).
Issattha (nt. m.) [cp. Sk. iṣvastra nt. bow, fr. iṣu (= P. usu) an arrow + as to throw. Cp. P. issāsa. -- Bdhgh. in a strange
way dissects it as "usuñ ca satthañ cā ti vuttaŋ hoti" (i. e. usu arrow + sattha sword, knife) SnA 466] -- 1. (nt.) archery (as
means of livelihood & occupation) M I.85; III.1; S I.100 (so read with v. l.; T. has issatta, C. explns. by usu--sippaŋ K. S. p. 318); Sn 617 (°ŋ upajīvati = āvudha jīvikaŋ SnA 466); J VI.81; Sdhp 390. -- 2. (m.) an archer Miln 250, 305, 352, 418.
Issatthaka [issattha + ka] an archer Miln 419.
Issara [Vedic īśvara, from īś to have power, cp. also P. īsa] lord, ruler, master, chief A IV.90; Sn 552; J I.89 (°jana), 100,
283 (°bheri); IV.132 (°jana); Pv IV.67 (°mada); Miln 253 (an° without a ruler); DhsA 141; DA I.111; PvA 31 (gehassa issarā); Sdhp 348, 431. -- 2. creative deity, Brahmā, D III.28; M II.222 = A I.173; Vism 598.
Issariya [fr. issara] rulership, mastership, supremacy, dominion (Syn. ādhipacca) D III.190; S I.43, 100 (°mada); V.342 (issariy--âdhipacca); A I.62 (°ādhipacca); II.205, 249; III.38; IV.263; Sn 112; Dh 73; Ud 18; Ps II.171, 176; J I.156; V.443; DhA II.73; VvA 126 (for ādhipacca) PvA 42, 117, 137 (for ādhipacca); Sdhp 418, 583.
Issariyatā (f.) [fr. issariya] mastership, lordship Sdhp 422.
Issā1 (f.) [Sk. īrṣyā to Sk. irin forceful, irasyati to be angry, Lat. īra anger, Gr. *)/arhs God of war; Ags. eorsian to be angry. See also issati] jealousy, anger, envy, ill--will D II.277 (°macchariya); III.44 (id.); M I.15; S II.260; A I.95, 105 (°mala), 299; II.203; IV.8 (°saññojana), 148, 349, 465; V.42 sq., 156, 310; Sn 110; J V.90 (°âvatiṇṇa); Pv II.37; Vv 155; Pug 19, 23; Vbh 380, 391; Dhs 1121, 1131, 1460; Vism 470 (def.); PvA 24, 46, 87; DhA II.76; Miln 155; Sdhp 313, 510.
--pakata overcome by envy, of an envious nature S II.260; Miln 155; PvA 31. See remarks under apakata & pakata. Issā2
Issā2 (f.) [cp. Sk. ṛśya--mṛga] in issammiga (= issāmiga) J V.410, & issāmiga J V.431, a species of antelope, cp. J V.425 issāsinga the antlers of this antelope.
[abstr. formations fr. issā] = issā Pug 19, 23; Dhs 1121; Vism 470.

Issāsa [Sk. iṣvāsa, see issattha] an archer Vin IV.124; M III.1; A IV.423 (issāso vā issās'antevāsī vā); J II.87; IV.494; Miln 232; DA I.156.
Issāsin [Sk. iṣvāsa in meaning "bow" + in] an archer, lit. one having a bow J IV.494 (= issāsa C.). Issita [pp. of īrṣ (see issati); Sk. īrṣita] being envied or scolded, giving offence or causing anger J V.44.
Issukin (adj.) [fr. issā, Sk. īrṣyu + ka + in] envious, jealous Vin II.89 (+ maccharin); D III.45, 246; M I.43, 96; S IV.241; A III.140, 335; IV.2; Dh 262; J III.259; Pv. II.34; Pug 19, 23; DhA III.389; PvA 174. See also an°.
Iha (indecl.) [Sk. iha; form iha is rare in Pāli, the usual form is idha (q. v.)] adv. of place "here" Sn 460. Ī.
Īgha (?) [doubtful as to origin & etym. since only found in cpd. anīgha & abs. only in exegetical literature. If genuine, it should belong to ṛgh Sk. ṛghāyati to tremble, rage etc. See discussed under nigha1] confusion, rage, badness SnA 590 (in expln of anigha). Usually as an° (or anigha), e. g. J III.343 (= niddukkha C.); V.343.
Īti & Ītī (f.) [Sk. īti, of doubtful origin] ill, calamity, plague, distress, often combb. with & substituted for upaddava, cp. BSk. ītay'opadrava (attack of plague) Divy 119. <-> Sn 51; J I.27 (V.189); V.401 = upaddava; Nd1 381; Nd2 48, 636 (+ upaddava = santāpa); Miln 152, 274, 418. --anīti sound condition, health, safety A IV.238; Miln 323.
Ītika (adj.) [fr. īti] connected or affected with ill or harm, only in neg. an°.
Ītiha a doublet of itiha, only found in neg. an°.
Īdisa (adj.) [Sk. īdṛs, ī + dṛś, lit. so--looking] such like, such DhsA 400 (f. °ī); PvA 50, (id.) 51.
Īriṇa (nt.) [= iriṇa, q. v. & cp. Sk. īriṇa] barren soil, desert D I.248; A V.156 sq.; J V.70 (= sukkha--kantāra C.); VI.560; VvA 334.
Īrita [pp. of īreti, Caus. of īr, see iriyati] -- 1. set in motion, stirred, moved, shaken Vv 394 (vāt'erita moved by the wind); J I.32 (id.); Vv 6420 (haday'erita); Pv II.123 (malut'erita); PvA 156 (has erita for ī°); VvA 177 (= calita). -- 2.
uttered, proclaimed, said Dāvs V.12.
Īsa [fr. iś to have power, perf. īśe = Goth. aih; cp. Sk. īśvara = P. issara, & BSk. īśa, e. g. Jtm 3181] lord, owner, ruler J IV.209 (of a black lion = kāḷa--sīha C.); VvA 168. f. īsī see mahesī a chief queen. Cp. also mahesakkha.
Īsaka [dimin. of īsā] a pole J II.152; VI.456 (°agga the top of a pole).
Īsakaŋ (adv.) [nt. of īsaka] a little, slightly, easily M I. 450; J I.77; VI.456; DA I.252, 310; VvA 36; Vism 136, 137, 231,
īsakam pi even a little Vism 106; Sdhp 586.
Īsā (f.) [Vedic īṣā] the pole of a plough or of a carriage S I.104 (nangal'īsā read with v. l. for nangala--sīsā T.), 172, 224 (°mukha): A IV.191 (rath°); Sn 77; J I.203 (°mukha); IV.209; Ud 42; Miln 27; SnA 146; VvA 269 (°mūlaŋ = rathassa uro).
--danta having teeth (tusks) as long as a plough--pole (of an elephant) Vin I.352; M I.414; Vv 209 = 439 (= ratha--īsā--sadisa--danto); J VI.490 = 515.
Īsāka (adj.) [fr. īsā] having a pole (said of a carriage) J VI.252.

Īhati [Vedic īh, cp. Av. īžā ardour, eagerness, āziš greed] to endeavour, attempt, strive after Vin III.268 (Bdhgh.) J VI.518 (cp. Kern, Toev. p. 112); DA I.139; VvA 35.
Īhā (f.) [fr. īh] exertion, endeavour, activity, only in adj. nir--īha void of activity Miln 413. U.
U the sound or syllable u, expld. by Bdhgh at Vism 495 as expressing origin (= ud).
Ukkaŋsa [fr. ud + kṛṣ see ukkassati] exaltation, excellence, superiority (opp. avakkaŋsa) D I.54 (ukkaŋs--âvakkaŋsa = h āyana--vad̤d̤hana DA I.165); M I.518; Vism 563 (id.); VvA 146 (°gata excellent), 335 (instr. ukkaŋsena par excellence, exceedingly); PvA 228 (°vasena, with ref. to devatās; v. l. SS okk°).
Ukkaŋsaka (adj.) [fr. ukkaŋsa] raising, exalting (oneself), extolling M I.19 (att°; opp. para--vambhin); J II.152. Cp. sāmukkaŋsika.
Ukkaŋsati [ud + kṛṣ, karṣati, lit. draw or up, raise] to exalt, praise M I.498; J IV.108. -- pp. ukkaṭṭha. -- ukkaŋseti in same meaning M I.402 sq. (attānaŋ u. paraŋ vambheti); A II.27; Nd2 141.
Ukkaŋsanā (f.) [abstr. of ukkaŋsati] raising, extolling, exaltation, in att° self--exaltation, self--praise M I.402 (opp. para--vambhanā); Nd2 505 (id.).
Ukkaṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of ukkaŋsati] -- 1. exalted, high, prominent, glorious, excellent, most freq. opp. to hīna, in phrase hīna--m--ukkaṭṭha--majjhime Vin IV.7; J I.20 (v.129), 22 (v.143); III.218 (= uttama C.). In other combn. at Vism 64 (u. majjhima mudu referring to the 3 grades of the Dhutangas); SnA 160 (dvipadā sabbasattānaŋ ukkaṭṭhā); VvA 105 (superl. ukkaṭṭhatama with ref. to Gotama as the most exalted of the 7 Rishis); Sdhp 506 (opp. lāmaka). -- 2. large, comprehensive, great, in ukkaṭṭho patto a bowl of great capacity (as diff. from majjhima & omaka p.) Vin III.243 (= uk. nāma patto ad̤d̤hālhak'odanaŋ gaṇhāti catu--bhāgaŋ khādanaŋ vā tadūpiyaŋ vā byañjanaŋ). -- 3. detailed, exhaustive, specialised Vism 37 (ati--ukkaṭṭha--desanā); also in phrase °vasena in detail SnA 181. -- 4. arrogant, insolent J V. 16. -- 5. used as nom at J I.387 in meaning "battle, conflict". -- an° Vism 64 (°cīvara).
--niddesa exhaustive exposition, special designation, term par excellence DhsA 70; VvA 231; PvA 7. --pariccheda comprehensive connotation SnA 229, 231, 376.
Ukkaṭṭhatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṭṭha] superiority, eminence, exalted state J IV.303 (opp. hīnatā).
Ukkaṭṭhita [for ukkaṭhita, ud + pp. of kvath, see kaṭhati & kuthati] boiled up, boiling, seething A III.231 & 234
(udapatto agginā santatto ukkaṭṭhito, v. l. ukkuṭṭhito); J IV.118 (v. l. pakkudhita = pakkuṭhita, as gloss).
Ukkaṇṭhati [fr. ud + kaṇṭh in secondary meaning of kaṇṭha neck, lit. to stretch one's neck for anything; i. e. long for, be
hungry after, etc.] to long for, to be dissatisfied, to fret J I.386 (°māna); III.143 (°itvā); IV.3, 160; V.10 (anukkhaṇṭhanto); DhsA 407; PvA 162 (mā ukkaṇṭhi, v. l. ukkaṇhi, so read for T. mā khuṇd̤ali). -- pp. ukkaṇṭhita (q. v.). Cp. pari°.
Ukkaṇṭhanā (f.) [fr. ukkaṇṭhati] emotion, commotion D II.239.
Ukkaṇṭhā (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ°] longing, desire; distress, regret Nett 88; PvA 55 (spelt kkh), 60, 145, 152. Ukkaṇṭhi (f.) [fr. ukkanṭḥ°] longing, dissatisfaction ThA 239 (= arati).
Ukkaṇṭhikā (f.) [abstr. fr. ukkaṇṭhita] = ukkaṇṭhi, i. e. longing, state of distress, pain J III.643.

Ukkaṇṭhita [pp. of ukkaṇṭhati] dissatisfied, regretting, longing, fretting J I.196; II.92, 115; III.185; Miln 281; DhA IV.66, 225; PvA 13 (an°), 55, 187.
Ukkaṇṇa (adj.) [ud + kaṇṇa] having the ears erect (?) J VI.559.
Ukkaṇṇaka (ad.) [ut + kaṇṇa + ka lit. "with ears out" or is it ukkandaka?] a certain disease (? mange) of jackals, S
II.230, 271; S. A. ʻthe fur falls off from the whole bodyʼ.
Ukkantati [ud + kantati] to cut out, tear out, skin Vin I.217 (°itva); J I.164; IV.210 (v. l. for okk°); V.10 (ger. ukkacca); Pv
III.94 (ukkantvā, v. l. BB ukkacca); PvA 210 (v. l. SS ni°), 211 (= chinditvā).
Ukkapiṇd̤aka [etymology unknown] only in pl.; vermin, Vin I.211 = 239. See comment at Vin. Texts II.70. Ukkantikaŋ (nt. adv.), in jhān° & kasiṇ°, after the method of stepping away from or skipping Vism 374.
Ukkamati (or okk° which is v. l. at all passages quoted) [ud + kamati from kram] to step aside, step out from (w. abl.), depart from A III.301 (maggā); J III.531; IV. 101 (maggā); Ud 13 (id.); DA I.185 (id.). Caus. ukkāmeti; Caus. II. ukkamāpeti J II.3.
Ukkamana (nt.) [fr. ukkamati] stepping away from Vism 374.
Ukkala in phrase ukkala--vassa--bhañña S III.73 = A II.31 = Kvu 141 is trsld. as "the folk of Ukkala, Lenten speakers of
old" (see Kvu trsl. 95 with n. 2). Another interpretation is ukkalāvassa°, i. e. ukkalā + avassa° [*avaśya°], one who speaks of, or like, a porter (ukkala = Sk utkala porter, one who carries a load) and bondsman M III.78 reads Okkalā (v. l. Ukkalā)--Vassa--Bhaññā, all as N. pr.
Ukkalāpa see uklāpa.
Ukkalissati [= ukkilissati? ud + kilissati] to become depraved, to revoke(?) Miln 143.
Ukkā (f.) [Vedic ulkā & ulkuṣī, cp. Gr. a)/flac (= lamprw_s torch Hesychius), velxa/nos (= Volcanus); Lat. Volcanus, Oir. Olcān, Idg. *ṷI̊q to be fiery] 1. firebrand, glow of fire, torch D I.49, 108; S II.264; Th 2, 488 (°ûpama); J I.34 (dhamm--okkā); II.401; IV.291; V.322; Vism 428; ThA 287; DA I.148; DhA I.42, 205; PvA 154. Esp. as tiṇ° firebrand of dry grass M I.128, 365; Nd2 40Ie; DhA I.126; Sdhp 573. -- 2. a furnace or forge of a smith A I.210, 257; J VI.437; see also below °mukha. <-> 3. a meteor: see below °pāta.
--dhāra a torch--bearer Sn 335; It 108; Miln 1. --pāta "falling of a firebrand", a meteor D I.10 (= ākāsato ukkānaŋ patanaŋ DA I.95); J I.374; VI.476; Miln 178. --mukha the opening or receiver of a furnace, a goldsmith's smelting pot A I.257; J VI.217 (= kammārɔuddhana C.), 574; Sn 686; DhA II.250.
Ukkācanā (f.) [fr. ukkāceti, ud + *kāc, see ukkācita] enlightening, clearing up, instruction Vbh 352 (in def. of lapanā, v. l. °kāpanā). Note Kern, Toev. s. v. compares Vism p. 115 & Sk. uddīpana in same sense. Def. at Vism 27 (= uddīpanā).
Ukkācita [pp. either to *kāc to shine or to kāceti denom. fr. kāca1] enlightened, made bright (fig.) or cleaned, cleared up A I.72, 286 (°vinīta parisā enlightened & trained).
Ukkāceti [according to Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 112 a denom. fr. kāca2 a carrying pole, although the idea of a bucket is somewhat removed from that of a pole] to bale out water, to empty by means of buckets J II.70 (v. l. ussiñcati).
Ukkāmeti [Caus. of ukkamati] to cause to step aside J VI.11.

Ukkāra [fr. ud + kṛ "do out"] dung, excrement J IV.485, otherwise only in cpd. ukkāra--bhūmi dung--hill J I.5, 146 (so read for ukkar°), II.40; III.16, 75, 377; IV.72, 305; Vism 196 (°ûpama kuṇapa); DhA III.208. Cp. uccāra.
Ukkāsati [ud + kāsati of kas to cough] to "ahem"! to cough, to clear one's throat Vin II.222; IV.16; M II.4; A V.65; aor. ukkāsi J I.161, 217. -- pp. ukkāsita.
Ukkāsikā (f.?) [doubtful] at Vin II.106 is not clear. Vin Texts III.68 leave it untranslated. Bdhgh's expln. is vattavaṭṭi
(patta°? a leaf? Cp. S III.141), prob. = vaṭṭi (Sk. varti a kind of pad). See details given by Morris J.P.T.S. 1887, 113, who trsls. "rubber, a kind of pad or roll of cotton with which the delicate bather could rub himself without too much friction".
Ukkāsita [pp. of ukkāsati] coughed, clearing one's throat, coughed out, hawking D I.89; Bu I.52 (+ khipita) <-> °sadda the noise of clearing the throat D I.50; J I.119; DhA I.250 (+ khipita°).
Ukkiṇṇa [pp. of ud + kṛ dig2] dug up or out D I.105; J IV.106; Miln 330; DA I.274 (= khāta).
Ukkiledeti [Caus. of ud + klid, see kilijjati] to take the dirt out, to clean out DA I.255 (dosaŋ); SnA 274 (rāgaŋ; v. l. BB.
Ukkujja (adj.) [ud + kujja] set up, upright, opp. either nikkujja or avakujja A I.131; S V.89 (ukkujjQâvakujja); Pug 32 (=
uparimukho ṭhapito C. 214).
Ukkujjati (°eti) [Denom. fr. ukkujja] to bend up, turn up, set upright Vin I.181; II.126 (pattaŋ), 269 (bhikkhuŋ); mostly in phrase nikkujjitaŋ ukkujjeyya "(like) one might raise up one who has fallen" D I.85, 110; II.132, 152; Sn p. 15 (= uparimukhaŋ karoti DA I.228 = SnA 155).
Ukkujjana (nt.) [fr. ukkujjati] raising up, setting up again Vin II.126 (patt°).
Ukkuṭika [fr. ud + *kuṭ = *kuñc, as in kuṭila & kuñcita; lit. "bending up". The BSk. form is ukkuṭuka, e. g. Av. S I.315]
a special manner of squatting. The soles of the feet are firmly on the ground, the man sinks down, the heels slightly rising as he does so, until the thighs rest on the calves, and the hams are about six inches or more from the ground. Then with elbows on knees he balances himself. Few Europeans can adopt this posture, & none (save miners) can maintain it with comfort, as the calf muscles upset the balance. Indians find it easy, & when the palms of the hands are also held together upwards, it indicates submission. See Dial. I.231 n. 4. -- Vin I.45 (°ŋ nisīdati); III.228; A I.296; II.206; Pug 55; Vism 62, 104, 105 (quot. fr. Papañca Sūdanī) 426; DhA I.201, 217; II.61 (as posture of humility); III.195; IV.223.
--padhāna [in BSk. distorted to utkuṭuka--prahāṇa Divy 339 = Dh 141] exertion when squatting (an ascetic habit) D I.167; M I.78, 515; A I.296; II.206; J I.493; III.235; IV.299; Dh 141 (= ukkuṭika--bhāvena āraddha--viriyo DhA III.78).
Ukkuṭṭhi (f.) [fr. ud + kruś, cp. *kruñc as in P. kuñca & Sk. krośati] shouting out, acclamation J II.367; VI.41; Bu I.35; Miln 21; Vism 245; DhA II.43; VvA 132 (°sadda).
Ukkusa [see ukkuṭṭhi & cp. BSk. utkrośa watchman (?) Divy 453] an osprey J IV.291 (°rāja), 392. Ukkūla (adj.) [ud + kūla] sloping up, steep, high (opp. vikkūla) A I.35 sq.; Vism 153 (nadi); SnA 42. Cp.
utkūlanikūla--sama Lal. V. 340.
Ukkoṭana (nt.) [fr. ud + *kuṭ to be crooked or to deceive, cp. kujja & kuṭila crooked] crookedness, perverting justice,
taking bribes to get people into unlawful possessions (Bdhgh.) D I.5; III.176; S V.473; A II.209, V.206; DA I.79 = Pug A 240 ("assāmike sāmike kātuŋ lañcagahaṇaŋ").

Ukkoṭanaka (adj.) [fr. ukkoṭana] belonging to the perversion of justice Vin II.94.
Ukkoṭeti [denom. fr. *ukkoṭ--ana] to disturb what is settled, to open up again a legal question that has been adjudged, Vin
II.94, 303; IV.126; J II.387; DA I.5.
Ukkhali (°lī) (f.) [der. fr. Vedic ukha & ukhā pot, boiler; related to Lat. aulla (fr. *auxla); Goth. auhns oven] a pot in which to boil rice (& other food) J I.68, 235; V. 389, 471; Pug 33; Vism 346 (°mukhavaṭṭi), 356 (°kapāla, in comp.); DhA I.136; II.5; III.371; IV.130; Pug A 231; VvA 100. Cp. next.
Ukkhalikā (f.) = ukkhali. Th 2, 23 (= bhatta--pacanabhājanaŋ ThA 29); DhA IV.98 (Qkāla); DhsA 376.
Ukkhā (?) [can it be compared with Vedic ukṣan?] in ukkhasataŋ dānaŋ, given at various times of the day (meaning = e(kato/mbh?) S II.264 (v. l. ukkā). Or is it to be read ukhāsataŋ d. i. e. consisting of 100 pots (of rice = mahā danaŋ?). S A: paṇītabhojana--bharitānaŋ mahā--ukkhalinaŋ sataŋ dānaŋ. Cp. ukhā cooking vessel ThA 71 (Ap. V.38). Kern, Toev. under ukkhā trsl. "zeker muntstuck", i. e. kind of gift.
Ukkhita [pp. of ukṣ sprinkle] besmeared, besprinkled J IV.331 (ruhir°, so read for °rakkhita). Cp. okkhita.
Ukkhitta [pp. of ukkhipati] taken up, lifted up, t.t. of the canon law "suspended" Vin IV.218; J III.487.
--°āsika with drawn sword M I.377; S IV.173; J I.393; DhsA 329; Vism 230 (vadhaka), 479. --paligha having the obstacles
removed M I.139; A III.84; Dh 398 = Sn 622 (= avijjā--palighassa ukkhittatāya u. SnA 467 = DhA IV.161). --sira with uplifted head Vism 162.
Ukkhittaka (adj.--n.) [fr. ukkhitta] a bhikkbu who has been suspended Vin I.97, 121; II.61, 173, 213.
Ukkhipati [ut + khipati, kṣip]. To hold up, to take up J I.213; IV.391: VI.350; Vism 4 (satthaŋ); PvA 265. A
t. t. of canon law, to suspend (a bhikkhu for breach of rules) Vin IV.309; Pug 33. --ukkhipiyati to be suspended Vin II.61. Caus. II. ukkhipāpeti to cause to be supported J I.52; II.15, 38; III.285, 436. -- pp. ukkhitta, ger. ukkhipitvā as adv. "upright" Vism 126.
Ukkhipana (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] 1. pushing upwards J I.163. -- 2. throwing up, sneering Vism 29 (vācāya). Ukkheṭita [pp. of ud + kheṭ or *khel, see kheḷa] spit out, thrown off, in phrase moho (rāgo etc) catto vanto mutto
pahino paṭinissaṭṭho u. Vin III.97 = IV.27.
Ukkhepa (adj.--n.) [fr. ud + kṣip] (adj.) throwing away DhA IV.59 (°dāya a throw--away donation, tip). -- (m.) lifting up
raising J I.394 (cel°); VI.508; DA I.273; dur° hard to lift or raise Sdhp 347.
Ukkhepaka (adj.) [fr. ukkhepa] throwing (up); °ŋ (acc.) in the manner of throwing Vin II.214 = IV.195 (piṇd̤°).
Ukkhepana (nt.) [fr. ud + kṣip] suspension J III.487.
Ukkhepanā (f.) [= last] throwing up, provocation, sneering Vbh 352 = Vism 23, expld. at p. 29.
Ukkhepaniya (adj.) [ukkhepana + iya, cp. BSk. utkṣepanīyaŋ karma Divy 329] referring to the suspension (of a bhikkhu), °kamma act or resolution of suspension Vin I.49, 53, 98, 143, 168; II.27, 226, 230, 298: A I.99.
(adj.) [cp. Sk. ut--kalāpayati to let go] <-> 1. deserted J II.275 (ukkalāpa T.; vv. ll. uklāpa & ullāpa). -- 2. dirtied, soiled Vin II.154, 208, 222; Vism 128; DhA III.168 (ukkalāpa).

Ugga1 (adj.) [Vedic ugra, from ukṣati, weak base of vakṣ as in vakṣana, vakṣayati = Gr. a)ve/cw, Goth. wahsjan "to wax", also Lat. augeo & P. oja] mighty, huge, strong, fierce, grave, m. a mighty or great person, noble lord D I.103; S I.51 = VvA 116 (uggateja "the fiery heat"); J IV.496; V.452 (°teja); VI.490 (+ rājaputtā, expld. with etymologising effort as uggatā paññātā by C.); Miln 331; DhA II.57 (°tapa); Sdhp 286 (°daṇd̤a), 304 (id.). <-> Cp. sam°. As Np. at Vism 233 & J I.94.
--putta a nobleman, mighty lord S I.185 ("high born warrior" trsl.); J VI.353 (= amacca--putta C.); Th 1, 1210.
Ugga2 = uggamana, in aruṇ--ugga sunrise Vin IV.272.
Uggacchati [ud + gam] to rise, get up out of (lit. & fig.) Th 1, 181; aruṇe uggacchante at sunrise VvA 75; Pv IV.8; Vism 43, ger. uggañchitvāna Miln 376. -- pp. uggata (q. v.).
Uggajjati [ud + gajjati] to shout out Nd1 172.
Uggaṇhāti [ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] to take up, acquire, learn [cp. BSk. udgṛhṇāti in same sense, e. g. Divy 18, 77 etc.] Sn
912 (uggahaṇanta = uggahaṇanti = uggaṇhanti SnA 561); imper. uggaṇha J II.30 (sippaŋ) & uggaṇhāhi Miln 10 (mantāni); ger. uggayha Sn 832, 845; Nd1 173. -- Caus. uggaheti in same meaning Sdhp 520; aor. uggahesi Pv III.54 (nakkhatta--yogaŋ = akari PvA 198); ger. uggahetvā J V.282, VvA 98 (vipassanākammaṭṭhānaŋ); infin. uggahetuŋ VvA 138 (sippaŋ to study a craft). -- Caus. II. uggaṇhāpeti to instruct J V. 217; VI.353. -- pp. uggahita (q. v.). See also uggahāyati. -- A peculiar ppr. med. is uggāhamāna going or wanting to learn DA I 32 (cp. uggāhaka).
Uggata [pp. of uggacchati] come out, risen; high, lofty, exalted J IV.213 (suriya), 296 (°atta), 490; V.244; Pv IV.14 (°atta one who has risen = uggata--sabhāva samiddha PvA 220); VvA 217 (°mānasa); DA I.248; PvA 68 (°phāsuka with ribs come out or showing, i. e. emaciated, for upphāsulika). Cp. acc°.
Uggatta in all Pv. readings is to be read uttatta°, thus at Pv III.32; PvA 10, 188.
Uggatthana at J VI.590 means a kind of ornament or trinket, it should prob. be read ugghaṭṭana [fr. ghaṭṭeti] lit.
"tinkling", i. e. a bangle.
Uggama [fr. ud + gam; Sk. udgama] rising up Sdhp 594.
Uggamana (°na) (nt.) [fr. ud + gam] going up, rising; rise (of sun & stars) D I.10, 240; S II.268 (suriy°); J IV.321 (an°),
388; Pv II.941 (suriy°); DA I.95 (= udayana); DhA I.165 (aruṇ°); II.6 (id.); VvA 326 (oggaman°); PvA 109 (aruṇ°). Cp. ugga2 & uggama.
Uggaha (adj) (--°) [fr. ud + gṛh, see gaṇhāti] -- 1. taking up, acquiring, learning Vism 96 (ācariy°), 99 (°paripucchā), 277 (kananaṭṭhānassa). -- 2. noticing, taking notice, perception (as opp. to manasikāra) Vism 125, 241 sq. neg. an° Sn 912 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 330). Cp. dhanuggaha.
Uggahaṇa (nt.) [fr. uggaṇhāti] learning, taking up, studying PvA 3 (sipp°). As uggaṇhana at Vism 277.
Uggahāyati [poetic form of uggaheti (see uggaṇhati), but according to Kern, Toev. s. v. representing Ved. udgṛbhāyati]
to take hold of, to take up Sn 791 (= gaṇhāti Nd1 91). -- ger. uggahāya Sn 837.
Uggahita [pp. of uggaṇhāti] taken up, taken, acquired Vin I.212; J III.168 (°sippa, adj.), 325; IV.220; VI 76; Vism 241. The metric form is uggahīta at Sn 795, 833, 1098; Nd1 175 = Nd2 152 (= gahita parāmaṭṭha).

Uggahetar [n. ag. to ugganhāti, Caus. uggaheti] one who takes up, acquires or learns A IV.196.
Uggāra [ud + gṛ or *gI̊ to swallow, see gala & gilati; lit. to swallow up] spitting out, vomiting, ejection Vism 54; DA I.41;
KhA 61.
Uggāhaka (adj.--n.) [fr. ud + gṛh, see uggaṇhāti] one who is eager to learn J V.148 [cp. M Vastu III.373 ogrāhaka in same context].
Uggāhamāna see uggaṇhāti. Uggirati1
Uggirati1 [Sk. udgirati, ud + gṛ2; but BSk. udgirati in meaning to sing, chant, utter, formation fr. gṛ2 instead of gṛ1, pres. gṛṇāti; in giraŋ udgirati Jtm 3126. -- The by--form uggirati is uggilati with interchange of I̊ and ṛ, roots *gr̥ & *gI̊, see gala & gilati] to vomit up ("swallow up") to spit out Ud 14 (uggiritvāna); DA I.41 (uggāraŋ uggiranto). Cp. BSk. prodgīrṇa cast out Divy 589.
Uggirati2 [cp. Sk. udgurate, ud + gur] to lift up, carry Vin IV.147 = DhA III.50 (talasattikaŋ expld. by uccāreti); J I.150
(āvudhāni); VI.460, 472. Cp. sam°.
Uggilati = uggirati1, i. e. to spit out (opp. ogilati) M I.393; S IV.323; J III.529; Miln 5; PvA 283.
Uggīva (nt.) [ud + gīva] a neckband to hold a basket hanging down J VI.562 (uggīvañ cɔâpi aŋsato = aŋsakūṭe pacchi--lagganakaŋ C.).
Ugghaŋseti [ud + ghṛṣ, see ghaŋsati1] to rub Vin II.106. <-> pp. ugghaṭṭha (q. v.).
Ugghaṭita (adj.) [pp. of ud + ghaṭati; cp. BSk. udghaṭaka skilled Divy 3, 26 and phrase at M Vastu III.260 udghaṭitajña]
striving, exerting oneself; keen, eager in cpd. °ññū of quick understanding A II.135; Pug 41; Nett 7--9, 125; DA I.291. Ugghaṭeti [ud + ghaṭati] to open, reveal (? so Hardy in Index to Nett) Nett 9; ugghaṭiyati & ugghaṭanā ibid.
[should be pp. of ugghaŋsati = Sk. udghṛṣṭa, see ghaŋsati1, but taken by Bdhgh. either as pp. of or an adj. der. fr. ghaṭṭ, see ghaṭṭeti] knocked, crushed, rubbed against, only in phrase ughaṭṭa--pāda foot--sore Sn 980 (= maggakkamaṇena ghaṭṭa--pādatala etc. SnA 582); J IV.20 (ṭṭh; expld. by uṇha--vālukāya ghaṭṭapāda);
V.69 (= raj okiṇṇa--pāda C. not to the point).
Uggharati [ud + kṣar] to ooze Th 1, 394 = DhA III.117.
Ugghāṭana (nt.?) [fr. ugghāṭeti] that which can be removed, in °kiṭikā a curtain to be drawn aside Vin II.153 (cp. Vin
Texts III.174, 176). Ch s. v. gives "rope & bucket of a well" as meaning (kavāṭaŋ anugghāṭeti). Cp. ugghaṭanā. Ugghāṭita [pp. of ugghāṭeti] opened Miln 55; DhA I.134.
Ugghāṭeti [for ugghaṭṭeti, ud + ghaṭṭ but BSk. udghāṭayati Divy 130] to remove, take away, unfasten, abolish, put an end to Vin II.148 (tālāni), 208 (ghaṭikaŋ); IV.37; J II.31; VI.68; Miln 140 (bhava--paṭisandhiŋ), 371; Vism 374. -- Caus. II. ugghāṭāpeti to have opened J V.381.

Ugghāta [ud + ghāta] shaking, jolting; jolt, jerk Vin II. 276 (yān°); J VI.253 (an°); DhA III.283 (yān°).
Ugghāti (f.) [fr. ud + ghāta] -- 1. shaking, shock VvA 36. -- 2. striking, conquering; victory, combd. with nighāti Sn 828;
Nd1 167; SnA 541; Nett 110 (T. reads ugghāta°).
Ugghātita [pp. of ugghāteti, denom. fr. udghāta] struck, killed A III.68.
Ugghosanā (f.) [abstr. fr. ugghoseti, cp. ghosanā] proclamation DA I.310.
Ugghoseti [ud + ghoseti] to shout out, announce, proclaim J I.75; DhA II.94; PvA 127.
Ucca (adj.) [For udya, adj. formation from prep. ud above, up] high (opp. avaca low) D I.194; M II.213; A V.82 (°ṭhāniyaŋ nīce ṭhāne ṭhapeti puts on a low place which ought to be placed high); Pv IV.74 (uccaŋ paggayha lifting high up = uccataraŋ katvā PvA 265); Pug 52, 58; DA I.135; PvA 176.
--âvaca high and low, various, manifold Vin I.70, 203; J IV.115, 363 (= mahaggha--samaggha C. p. 366); Sn 703, 714, 792, 959; Dh 83; Nd1 93, 467; Vv 121 (= vividha VvA 60); 311. --kulīnatā high birth A III.48 (cp. uccā°).
Uccaka (adj.) [fr. ucca] high Vin II.149 (āsandikā a kind of high chair). Uccatta (nt.) [fr. ucca = Sk. uccatvaŋ] height J III.318.
Uccaya [fr. ud + ci, see cināti; Sk. uccaya] heaping up, heap, pile, accumulation Dh 115, 191, 192; Vv 4711; 827 (= cetiya VvA 321); DhA III.5, 9; DhsA 41 (pāpassa). --siluccaya a mountain Th 1, 692; J I.29 (V.209); VI.272, 278; Dāvs V.63.
Uccā (°--) (adv.) [cp. Sk. uccā, instr. sg. of uccaŋ, cp. paścā behind, as well as uccaiḥ instr. pl. -- In BSk. we find ucca° (uccakulīna Av. Ś III.117) as well as uccaŋ (uccaŋgama Divy 476). It is in all cases restricted to cpds.] high (lit. & fig.), raised, in foll. cpds.
--kaṇerukā a tall female elephant M I.178. --kāḷārikā id. M I.178 (v. l. °kaḷārikā to be preferred). --kula a high, noble
family Pv III.116 (= uccā khattiya--kul--âdino PvA 176). --kulīnatā birth in a high--class family, high rank M III.37; VvA 32. --sadda a loud noise D I.143, 178; A III.30. --sayana a high bed (+ mahāsayana) Vin I. 192; D I.5, 7; cp. DA I.78.
Uccāra [Ud + car] discharge, excrement, faeces Vin III.36 (°ŋ gacchati to go to stool); IV.265, 266 (uccāro nāma gūtho vuccati); DhA II.56 (°karaṇa defecation); uccārapassāva faeces & urine D I.70; M I.83; J I.5; II.19.
Uccāranā (f.) [fr. uccāreti] lifting up, raising Vin III.121.
Uccārita [pp. of uccāreti] -- 1. uttered, let out PvA 280 (akkharāni). -- 2. lifted, raised ThA 255.
Uccāreti [ud + cāreti, Caus. of car] to lift up, raise aloft Vin III.81; IV.147 = DhA III.50; M I.135. -- pp. uccārita (q. v.).
Uccālinga [etym.?] a maw--worm Vin III.38, 112; J II.146.
Uccināti [ud + cināti] to select, choose, search, gather, pick out or up Vin I.73; II.285 (aor. uccini); J IV.9; Pv III.2 4 (nantake = gavesana--vasena gahetvāna PvA 185); Dpvs IV.2.
Ucchanga [Sk. utsanga, ts > cch like Sk. utsahate > BSk. ucchahate see ussahati] the hip, the lap Vin I.225; M I. 366; A I.130 (°pañña); J I.5, 308; II.412; III.22; IV.38, 151; Pug 31; Vism 279; DhA II.72.
Ucchādana (nt.) [ut + sād, Caus. of sad, sīdati, cp. ussada] rubbing the limbs, anointing the body with perfumes

shampooing D I.7, 76; at the latter passage in combn. anicc°--dhamma, of the body, meaning "erosion, decay", and combd. with parimaddana abrasion (see about detail of meaning Dial. I.87); thus in same formula at M I. 500; S IV.83; J I.146 & passim; A I.62; II.70 (+ nahāpana); IV.54, 386; It 111; Th 2, 89 (nahāpan°); Miln 241 (°parimaddana) 315 (+ nahāpana); DA I.88.
Ucchādeti [fr. ut + sād, see ucchādana] to rub the body with perfumes J VI.298; Miln 241 (+ parimaddati nahāpeti); DA I.88.
Ucchiṭṭha [pp. of ud + śiṣ] left, left over, rejected, thrown out; impure, vile Vin II.115 (°odakaŋ); IV.266 (id.); J II.83 (bhattaŋ ucchiṭṭhaŋ akatvā), 126 (°nadī impure; also itthi outcast), 363; IV.386 (°ŋ piṇd̤aŋ), 388; VI.508; Miln 315; DhA I.52; II.85; III.208; PvA 80 (= chad̤d̤ita), 173 (°bhattaŋ). At J IV.433 read ucch° for ucciṭṭha. --an° not touched or thrown away (of food) J III.257; DhA II.3. -- See also uttiṭṭha & ucchepaka.
Ucchiṭṭhaka (fr. ucchiṭṭha) = ucchiṭṭha J IV.386; VI.63, 509.
Ucchindati [ud + chid, see chindati] to break up, destroy, annihilate S V.432 (bhavataṇhaŋ), A IV.17 (fut. ucchecchāmi
to be read with v. l. for T. ucchejjissāmi); Sn 2 (pret. udacchida), 208 (ger. ucchijja); J V.383; Dh 285. <-> Pass. ucchijjati to be destroyed or annihilated, to cease to exist S IV.309; J V.242, 467; Miln 192; PvA 63, 130 (= na pavattati), 253 (= natthi). -- pp. ucchinna (q. v.).
Ucchinna [pp. of ucchindati] broken up, destroyed S III. 10; A V.32; Sn 746. Cp. sam°.
Ucchu [Sk. cp. Vedic Np. Ikṣvāku fr. ikṣu] sugar--cane Vin IV.35; A III.76; IV.279; Miln 46; DhA IV.199 (°ūnaŋ yanta sugar--cane mill), PvA 257, 260; VvA 124.
--agga (ucch°) top of s. c. Vism 172. --khaṇd̤ikā a bit of sugar--cane Vv 3326. --khādana eating s. c. Vism 70. --khetta sugar--cane field J I.339; VvA 256. --gaṇṭhikā a kind of sugar--cane, Batatas Paniculata J I.339; VI.114 (so read for °ghaṭika). --pāla watchman of s.--c. VvA 256. --pīḷana, cane--pressing, Asl. 274. --puṭa sugar--cane basket J IV.363. --bīja seed of
s.--c. A I.32; V.213. --yantra a sugar--mill J I.339. --rasa s.--c. juice Vin I.246; Vism 489; VvA 180 --vāta, Asl. 274. --sālā,
Asl. 274.
Uccheda [fr. ud + chid, chind, see ucchindati & cp. cheda] breaking up, disintegration, perishing (of the soul) Vin III.2 (either after this life, or after kāmadeva life, or after brahmadeva life) D I.34, 55; S IV.323; Nd1 324; Miln 413; Nett 95, 112, 160; DA I.120.
--diṭṭhi the doctrine of the annihilation (of the soul), as opp. to sassata-- or atta--diṭṭhi (the continuance of the soul after death) S II.20; III.99, 110 sq; Ps I.150, 158; NdQ 248 (opp. sassati°); Dhs 1316; Nett 40, 127; SnA 523 (opp. atta°). --vāda (adj.) one who professes the doctrine of annihilation (ucchedadiṭṭhi) Vin I.235; III.2; D I.34, 55; S II.18; IV.401; A IV.174, 182 sq.; Nd1 282; Pug 38. --vādin = °vāda Nett 111; J V.244.
Ucchedana (adj.) [fr. ud + chid] cutting off, destroying; f. °anī J V.16 (surā). Ucchedin (adj.) an adherent of the ucchedavāda J V.241.
Ucchepaka (nt.) [= ucchiṭṭhaka in sense of ucchiṭṭhabhatta] leavings of food M II.7 (v. l. uccepaka with cc for cch as
ucciṭṭha: ucchiṭṭha). The passage is to be read ucchepake va te ratā. A diff. connotation would be implied by taking ucchepaka = uñchā, as Neumann does (Majjhima trsl.2 II.682).
Uju & Ujju (adj.) [Vedic ṛju, also ṛjyati, irajyate to stretch out: cp. Gr. o)re/gw to stretch; Lat. rego to govern; Goth. ufrakjan to straighten up; Ohg. recchen = Ger. recken = E. reach; Oir. rēn span. See also P. ajjava] straight, direct;
straightforward, honest, upright D III.150 T. ujja), 352 (do.) 422, 550; Vv 187 (= sabba--jimha--vanka--kuṭilabhāvQâpagama--hetutāya u. VvA 96); Pug 59; Vbh 244 (ujuŋ kāyaŋ paṇidhāya); Vism 219 (uju

avanka akuṭila); DA I.210 (id.), KhA 236; DhA I.288 (cittaŋ ujuŋ akuṭilaŋ nibbisevanaŋ karoti); VvA 281 (°koṭi--vanka); PvA 123 (an°).
--angin (ujjangin) having straight limbs, neg. an° not having straight limbs, i. e. pliable, skilful, nimble, graceful J V.40 (= kañcana--sannibha--sarīra C.); VI.500 (T. anuccangin = anindita--agarahitangin C.). --gata walking straight, of upright life M I.46; A III.285 sq. (°citta); V.290 sq.; Sn 350 (ujju°), 477 (id.); Dh 108 (ujju°, see DhA II.234 for interpretation). --gāmin, neg. an° going crooked, a snake J IV.330. --cittatā straightness, unwieldiness of heart Vbh 350. --diṭṭhitā the fact of having a straightforward view or theory (of life) Miln 257. --paṭipanna living uprightly D I.192; S IV.304; V.343; Vism 219. --magga the straight road D I.235; Vin V.149; It 104; J I.344; VI.252; DhA II.192. --bhāva straightness, uprightness SnA 292, 317; PvA 51. --bhūta straight, upright S I.100, 170; II.279Q V.384, 404; A II.57; IV.292; J I.94; V.293 (an°); Vv 3423 (see VvA 155); Pv I.1010 (= citta--jimha--vankaKutīla--bhāva--karānaŋ kilesānaŋ abhāvena ujubhāvappatta PvA 51). --vaŋsa straight lineage, direct descendency J V.251. --vāta a soft wind Miln 283. --vipaccanīka in direct opposition D I.1; M I.402; DA I.38.
Ujuka & Ujjuka (adj.) [uju + ka] straight, direct, upright M I.124; S I.33 (ujuko so maggo, the road to Nibbāna), 260 (citta); IV.298; V.143, 165; J I.163; V.297 (opp. khujja); DhA I.18 (°magga); Sdhp 321. --anujjuka crooked, not straight S IV.299; J III.318.
Ujukatā (f.) [abstr. fr. ujuka] straightness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51 (kāyassa, cittassa); Vism 436 sq. Ujutā (f.) [abstr. of uju] straight(forward)ness, rectitude Dhs 50, 51.
Ujjagghati [ud + jagghati] to laugh at, deride, mock, make fun of Vin III.128; Th 2, 74 (spelt jjh = hasati ThA 78); A III.91 (ujjh°, v. l. ujj°) = Pug 67 (= pāṇiŋ paharitvā mahāhasitaŋ hasati Pug A 249).
Ujjangala [ud + jangala] hard, barren soil; a very sandy and deserted place D II.146 (°nagaraka, trsl. "town in the midst of a jungle", cp. Dial. II.161); J I.391; Vv 855 (= ukkaŋsena jangala i. e. exceedingly dusty or sandy, dry); Pv II.970 (spelt ujjhangala, expld. by ativiya--thaddhabhūmibhāga at PvA 139); Vism 107. Also in BSk. ujjangala, e. g. M Vastu II.207.
Ujjala (adj.) [ud + jval, see jalati] blazing, flashing; bright, beautiful J I.220; Dāvs II.63.
Ujjalati [ud + jalati, jval] to blaze up, shine forth Vin I.31; VvA 161 (+ jotati). -- Caus. ujjāleti to make shine, to kindle
Vin I.31; Miln 259; Vism 428; ThA 69 (Ap. V.14, read dīpāŋ ujjālayiŋ); VvA 51 (padīpaŋ).
Ujjava (adj.) [ud + java] "running up", in cpd. ujjav--ujjava a certain term in the art of spinning or weaving Vin IV. 300,
expld. by "yattakaŋ patthena (patthana?) añcitaŋ hoti tasmi takkamhi vedhite". Ujjavati [ud + javati] to go up--stream Vin II.301.
Ujjavanikāya instr. fem. of ujjavanaka used as adv. [ud + javanaka, q. v.] up--stream, lit "running up" Vin II.290; IV.65 (in expln. of uddhaŋgāmin, opp. ojavanikāya).
Ujjahati [ud + jahati] to give up, let go; imper. ujjaha S I.188; Th 2, 19; Sn 342. Ujju & Ujjuka see uju & ujuka.
Ujjota [ud + *jot of jotati, Sk. uddyotate] light, lustre J I.183 (°kara); Miln 321. Ujjotita [pp. of ujjoteti, ud + joteti] illumined Dāvs V.53.
Ujjhaggati see ujjagghati.

Ujjhaggikā (f.) [fr. ujjagghati, spelling varies] loud laughter Vin II.213, cp. IV.187.
Ujjhati [Sk. ujjhati, ujjh] -- 1. to forsake, leave, give up J VI.138; Dāvs II.86. -- 2. to sweep or brush away J VI.296. -- pp.
ujjhita (q. vQ).
Ujjhatti (f.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1, corresponding to a Sk. *ud--dhyāti] irritation, discontent A IV.223, 467 (v. l. ujj°); cp.
Ujjhāna (nt.) [ud + jhāna1 or jhāna2?] -- 1. taking offence, captiousness Dh 253 (= paresaŋ randha--gavesitāya DhA III.377); Miln 352 (an°--bahula). -- 2. complaining, wailing J IV.287.
--saññin, --saññika irritable S I.23; Th 1, 958; Vin II.214, cp. IV.194; Dpvs II.6; DhA III.376 (°saññitā irritability). Ujjhāpana (nt.) [fr. ud + jhāyati1 or jhāyati2 to burn, to which jhāpeti to bring to ruin etc.? cp. ujjhāna] stirring up,
provoking J V.91 (devat°), 94 (°kamma).
Ujjhāpanaka (adj.) [fr. ujjhāpana] one who stirs up another to discontent Vin IV.38.
Ujjhāpeti [Caus. of ujjhāyati] to harass, vex, irritate M I. 126; S I.209 ("give occasion for offence"); Vin IV.38 (cp. p. 356); J V.286; PvA 266.
Ujjhāyati [ud + jhāyati1 or perhaps more likely jhāyati2 to burn, fig. to be consumed. According to Müller P. G. pp. 12 &
42 = Sk. ava--dhyā, but that is doubtful phonetically as well as semantically] to be irritated, to be annoyed or offended, to get angry, grumble; often in phrase ujjhāyati khīyati vipāceti expressing great annoyance Vin I.53, 62, 73; II.207; IV.226; S I.232 & passim. -- S I.232 (mā ujjhāyittha); J II.15; DhA II.20; aor. ujjhāyi J I.475; DhA II.88; inf. ujjhātuŋ J II.355. <-> Caus. ujjhāpeti (q. v.).
Ujjhita [pp. of ujjhati] destitute, forsaken; thrown out, cast away M I.296 (+ avakkhitta); Th 1, 315 (itthi); 2, 386 (cp. ThA 256 vātakkhitto viya yo koci dahano); Dh 58 (= chad̤d̤ita of sweepings DhA I.445); J III.499; V.302; VI.51.
Uñcha & Uñchā (f.) [Sk. uñcha & uñchana, to uñch. Neumann's etym. uñchā = E. ounce, Ger. unze (Majjhima
trsl.2 II.682) is incorrect, see Walde Lat. Wtb. under uncia] anything gathered for sustenance, gleaning S II. 281; A I.36; III.66 sq., 104; Vin III.87; Sn 977; Th 2, 329, 349; J III.389; IV.23, 28, 434, 471 (°ya, dat. = phalâphalɔatthāya C.); ThA 235, 242.
Cp. samuñchaka.
--cariyā wandering for, or on search for gleaning, J II.272; III.37, 515; V.3; DA I.270; VvA 103; ThA 208. --cārika (adj.) going about after gleanings, one of 8 kinds of tāpasā SnA 295 (cp. DA I.270, 271). --patta the gleaning--bowl, in phrase uñchāpattāgate rato "fond of
that which has come into the gl. b." Th 1, 155 = Pv IV.73 (= uñchena bhikkhācārena laddhe pattagate āhāre rato PvA 265; trsld. in Psalms of Brethren "contented with whatever fills the bowl"). aññāt°, marked off as discarded (goods) S II.281, so S A.
Uñchati [fr. uñch] to gather for sustenance, seek (alms), glean Vism 60 (= gavesati).
Uññā (f.) [= avaññā (?) from ava + jñā, or after uññātabba? ] contempt Vin IV.241; Vbh 353 sq. (att°).
Uññātabba (adj.) [grd. fr. ava + jñā (?)] to be despised, contemptible, only in stock--phrase "daharo na uṇṇātabbo na paribhotabbo" S I.69; Sn p. 93; SnA 424 (= na avajānitabbo, na nīcaŋ katvā jānitabbo ti). In same connection at J V.63 mā naŋ daharo [ti] uññāsi (v. l. maññāsi) apucchitvāna (v. l. ā°).
Uṭṭitvā at Vin II.131 is doubtful reading (see p. 318, v. l. ud̤d̤hetvā), and should perhaps be read ud̤d̤etvā (= od̤d̤etva, see ud̤d̤eti), meaning "putting into a sling, tying or binding up".

Uṭṭepaka one who scares away (or catches?) crows (kāk°) Vin I.79 (vv. ll. uṭṭhe°, ud̤d̤e°, ud̤e°). See remarks on uṭṭepeti.
Uṭṭepeti in phrase kāke u. "to scare crows away" (or to catch them in snares?) at Vin I.79. Reading doubtful & should probably be read ud̤d̤epeti (? Caus. of ud̤d̤eti = od̤d̤eti, or of ud̤d̤eti to make fly away). The vv. ll. given to this passage are uṭṭeceti, upaṭṭhāpeti, ud̤d̤oyeti. See also uṭṭepaka.
Uṭṭhapana see vo°.
Uṭṭhahati & Uṭṭhāti [ud + sthā see tiṭṭhati & uttiṭṭhati] to rise, stand up, get up, to arise, to be produced, to rouse or
exert oneself, to be active, pres. uṭṭhahati Pug 51. -- pot. uṭṭhaheyya S I.217; as imper. uttiṭṭhe Dh 168 (expld. by uttiṭṭhitvā paresaŋ gharadvāre ṭhatvā DhA III.165, cp. Vin Texts I.152). -- imper. 2nd pl. uṭṭhahatha Sn 331; 2nd sg. uṭṭhehi Pv II.61; J IV.433. -- ppr. uṭṭhahanto M I.86; S I.217; J I.476. -- aor. uṭṭhahi J I.117; PvA 75. -- ger. uṭṭhahitvā PvA 4, 43, 55, 152, & uṭṭhāya Sn 401. -- inf. uṭṭhātuŋ J I.187. <-> Note. When uṭṭh° follows a word ending in a vowel, and without a pause in the sense, a v is generally prefixed for euphony, e. g. gabbho vuṭṭhāsi an embryo was produced or arose Vin II.278; āsanā vuṭṭhāya arising from his seat, Vism 126. See also under vuṭṭhahati. -- pp. uṭṭhita; Caus. uṭṭhāpeti. -- Cp. pariyuṭṭhāti.
Uṭṭhahāna [ppr. of uṭṭhahati] exerting oneself, rousing oneself; an° sluggish, lazy Dh 280 (= ayāyāmanto DhA III. 409); cp. anuṭṭhahaŋ S I.217.
Uṭṭhātar [n. ag. of ut + ṣṭhā, see uṭṭhahati] one who gets up or rouses himself, one who shows energy S I.214; A IV.285, 288, 322; Sn 187; J VI.297. --an° one who is without energy S I.217; Sn 96.
Uṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. ut + ṣṭhā] -- 1. rising, rise, getting up, standing (opp. sayana & nisīdana lying or sitting down) D II.134 (sīha--seyyaŋ kappesi uṭṭhāna--saññaŋ manasikaritvā); Dh 280 (°kāla); J I.392 (an°--seyyā a bed from which one cannot get up); Vism 73 (aruṇ--uṭṭhānavelā time of sunrise) DhA I.17. -- 2. rise, origin, occasion or oppertunity for; as adj. (--°) producing J I.47 (kapp°); VI.459; Miln 326 (dhaññ° khettaŋ atthi). -- 3. "rousing", exertion, energy, zeal, activity, manly vigour, industry, often syn. with viriya M I.86; A I.94; II.135 (°phala); III.45 (°viriya), 311; IV.281 (°sampadā); It 66 (°adhigataŋ dhanaŋ earned by industry); Pv IV.324; Pug 51 (°phala); Miln 344, 416; ThA 267 (°viriya); PvA 129 (+ viriya). --an° want of energy, sluggishness A IV.195; Dh 241. <-> Note. The form vuṭṭhāna appears for uṭṭh° after a vowel under the same conditions as vuṭṭhahati for uṭṭhahati (q. v.) gabbha--vuṭṭhānaŋ J I.114. See also vuṭṭh°, and cp. pariy°.
Uṭṭhānaka (--°) (adj.) [fr. uṭṭhāna] -- 1. giving rise to yielding (revenue), producing J I.377, 420 (satasahass°); III. 229 (id.); V.44 (id.). Cp. uṭṭhāyika. -- 2. energetic J VI.246.
Uṭṭhānavant (adj.) [uṭṭhāna + vant] strenuous, active Dh 24.
Uṭṭhāpeti [Caus. II. of utthahati] -- 1. to make rise, only in phrase aruṇaŋ (suriyaŋ) u. to let the sun rise, i. e. wait for
sunrise or to go on till sunrise J I.318; VI.330; Vism 71, 73 (aruṇaŋ). -- 2. to raise J VI.32 (paṭhaviŋ). <-> 3. to fit up J VI.445 (nāvaŋ). -- 4. to exalt, praise DA I.256. -- 5. to turn a person out DhA IV.69. -- See also vuṭṭhāpeti.
Uṭṭhāyaka (adj.) [adj. formation fr. uṭṭhāya, ger. of uṭṭhahati] "getting--up--ish", i. e. ready to get up, quick, alert, active, industrious; f. °ikā Th 2, 413 (= uṭṭhāna--viriyasampannā ThA 267; v. l. uṭṭhāhikā)
Uṭṭhāyika (adj.) [= uṭṭhānaka] yielding, producing J II.403 (satasahass°).
Uṭṭhāyin (adj.) [adj. form. fr. uṭṭhāya, cp. uṭṭhāyaka] getting up D I.60 (pubb° + pacchā--nipātin rising early & lying down
Uṭṭhāhaka (adj.) [for uṭṭhāyaka after analogy of gāhaka etc.] = uṭṭhāyaka J V.448; f. °ikā A III.38 (v. l. °āyikā); IV.266 sq.

Uṭṭhita [pp. of uṭṭhahati] -- 1. risen, got up Pv II.941 (kāl°); Vism 73. -- 2. arisen, produced J I.36; Miln 155. -- 3. striving, exerting oneself, active J II.61; Dh 168; Miln 213. --an° S II.264; Ps I.172. -- Cp. pariy°. <-> Note. The form is vuṭṭhita when following upon a vowel; see vuṭṭhita & uṭṭhahati, e. g. paṭisallāṇā vutthito arisen from the seclusion D II.9; pāto vuṭṭhito risen early PvA 128.
Ud̤d̤ayhana (nt.) [fr. ud̤d̤ayhati, see uddahati] burning up, conflagration Pug 13 (°velā = jhāyana--kālo Pug A 187); KhA 181 (T. ud̤d̤ahanavelā, v. l. preferable ud̤d̤ayh°).
Ud̤d̤ahati [ud + d̤ahati] to burn up (intrs.) KhA 181 (ud̤d̤aheyya with v. l. ud̤d̤ayheyya, the latter preferable). Usually in Pass. ud̤d̤ayhati to be burnt, to burn up (intrs.) S III.149, 150 (v. l. for d̤ayhati); J III.22 (udayhate); V.194. fut. ud̤d̤ayhissati J I.48.
Ud̤d̤ita [pp. of ud̤d̤eti2] ensnared (?), bound, tied up S I.40 (= taṇhāya ullanghita C.; trsld. "the world is all strung up"). Ud̤d̤eti1
Ud̤d̤eti1 [ud + d̤eti to fly. The etym. is doubtful, Müller P. Gr. 99 identifies ud̤d̤eti1 & ud̤d̤eti2 both as causatives to d̤ī. Of ud̤d̤eti2 two forms exist, ud̤d̤° & od̤d̤°, the latter of which may be a variant of the former, but with specialisation of meaning ("lay snares"), it may be a cpd. with ava° instead of ud°. It is extremely doubtful whether ud̤d̤eti2 belongs here, we should rather separate it & refer it to another root, probably lī, layate (as in allīna, nilīyati etc.), to stick to, adhere, fasten etc. The change l > d̤ is a freq. Pāli phenomenon. Another Caus. II. of the same root (d̤ī?) is uṭṭepeti] to fly up M I.364 (kāko maŋsapesiŋ
ādāya ud̤d̤ayeyya; vv. ll. ubbad̤aheyya, uyya, dayeyya); J V.256, 368, 417.
Ud̤d̤eti2 [see discussion under ud̤d̤eti1] (a) to bind up, tie up to, string up Vin II.131 (so read for uṭṭitvā, v. l. ud̤d̤hetvā). -- (b)
to throw away, reject PvA 256 (+ chad̤d̤ayāmi gloss). -- pp. ud̤d̤ita.
Ud̤d̤ha (--°) (num. ord.) [the apocope form of catuttha = uttha, dialectically reduced to ud̤d̤ha under the influence of the preceding ad̤d̤ha] the fourth, only in cpd. ad̤d̤hud̤d̤ha "half of the fourth unit", i. e. three & a half (cp.
diyad̤d̤ha 1 1/2 and ad̤d̤ha--teyya 2 1/2) J V.417 sq. (°āni itthisahassāni); Mhvs XII.53.
Uṇṇa (nt.) & Uṇṇā (f.) [Sk. ūrṇa & ūrṇā; Lat. lāna wool; Goth. wulla; Ohg. wolla = E. wool; Lith. vilna; Cymr. gwlan (=
E. flannel); Gr. lh_nos, also ou_)los = Lat. vellus (fleece) = Ags. wil--mod] -- 1. wool A III.37 = IV.265 (+ kappāsā cotton) J II.147; SnA 263 (patt°). -- 2. hair between the eyebrows Sn 1022, & in stock phrase, describing one of the 32 signs of a Mahāpurisa, bhamukɔantare jātā uṇṇā odātā etc. D II.18 = III.144 = 170 = SnA 285. Also at Vism 552 in jāti--uṇṇāya.
--ja in uṇṇaja mukha J VI.218, meaning "rounded, swelling" (C. expls. by kañcanɔādāso viya paripuṇṇaŋ mukhaŋ). --nābhi (either uṇṇa° or uṇṇā, cp. Vedic ūrṇavābhi, ūrṇa + vābhi from Idg. *ṷebh to weave as in Lat. vespa = wasp, of which shorter root in Sk. vā) a spider, lit. "wool-- i. e. thread--weaver", only in combn. with sarabū & mūsikā at Vin II.110 = A II.73 = J II.147 (= makkaṭaka C).
Uṇṇata (adj.) [pp. of uṇṇamati, Sk. unnata] raised, high, fig. haughty (opp. oṇata) A II.86; Sn 702 (an° care = uddhaccaŋ n ɔāpajjeyya SnA 492); Pug 52 (= ucca uggata Pug A 229). Cp. unnata.
Uṇṇati (f.) [fr. uṇṇamati] haughtiness Sn 830; Nd1 158, 170; Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnati. Uṇṇama [fr. uṇṇamati] loftiness, height, haughtiness Dhs 1116, 1233. Cp. unnama.
Uṇṇamati [ud + nam] to rise up, to be raised, to straighten up, to be haughty or conceited Sn 366, 829, 928; Nd1 169; J VI.346 inf. uṇṇametave Sn 206. Cp. unnamati.

Uṇṇī (f.) [Sk. aurṇī fr. aurṇa woollen, der. of ūrṇa] a woollen dress Vin II.108.
Uṇha (adj.--n.) [Vedic uṣṇā f. to oṣati to burn, pp. uṣṭa burnt, Sk. uṣṇa = Lat. ustus; cp. Gr. eu)/w, Lat. uro to burn, Ags.
ysla glowing cinders, Lith. usnis nettle] hot, as adj. only in phrase uṇhaŋ lohitaŋ chad̤d̤eti to spill hot blood, i. e. to kill
oneself DhA I.95; otherwise in cpds.; abs. only as nt. "heat" & always in contrast to sītaŋ "cold" Vin II.117 (sītena pi uṇhena pi); D II.15 (opp. sīta); M I.85; A I.145 = 170 = J V.417 (sītaŋ vā uṇhaŋ vā tiṇaŋ vā rajo vā ussāvo vā); Sn 52, 966 (acc °); Nd1 486 = Nd2 677 (same as under sita); J I.17 (V.93); Miln 410 (megho uṇhaŋ nibbāpeti); PvA 37 (ati°).
--ākāra appearance of heat, often in phrase (Sakkassa) paṇd̤u--kambala--silɔāsanaŋ uṇhākāraŋ dassesi, of Sakka's throne showing an appearance of heat as a sign of some extraordinary event happening in the world, e. g. J I.330; V.92; DhA I.17, and passim. --odaka hot water VvA 68. --kalla glowing--hot embers or ashes J II.94 (so read for °kalala); IV.389 (°vassa, rain of hot ashes, v. l. °kukkuḷavassa). --kāla hot weather Vin II.209.
Uṇhatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uṇha] hot state, heat Vism 171.
Uṇhīsa [Sk. uṣṇīṣa] a turban D I.7; II.19 = III.145 (°sīsa cp. Dial. II.16); J II.88; Miln 330; DA I.89; DhsA 198. see uddaṇd̤a.
Utu (m. & nt.) [Vedic ṛtu special or proper time, with adj. ṛta straight, right, rite, ṛti manner to Lat. ars "art", Gr. damar(t), further Lat. rītus (rite), Ags. rīm number; of *ar to fit in, adjust etc. q. v. under appeti] -- 1. (lit.) (a) (good or proper) time, season: aruṇa--utu occasion or time of the sun(--rise) DhA I.165; utuŋ gaṇhāti to watch for the right time (in horoscopic practice), to prognosticate ibid. sarīraŋ utuŋ gaṇhāpeti "to cause the body to take season", i. e. to refresh the body by cool, sleep, washing etc. J III.527; DA I.252. -- (b) yearly change, time of the year, season Vism 128. There are usually three seasons men<-> tioned, viz. the hot, rainy and wintry season or gimha, vassa & hemanta A IV.138; SnA 317. Six seasons (in connection with nakkhatta) at J V.330 & VI.524. Often utu is to be understood, as in hemantikena (scil. utunā) in the wintry season S V.51. -- (c) the menses SnA 317; J V.330 (utusinātāya read utusi nhātāya; utusi loc., as expld. by C. pupphe uppanne utumhi nahātāya). -- 2. (applied in a philosophical sense: one of the five fold cosmic order, physical change, physical law of causation (opp. kamma), physical order: see Asl. 272 f.; Dialogues, II, 8, n.; Kvu trsln. 207; cp. Mrs. Rh. D. Buddhism, p. 119 f., Cpd. 161, Dhs trsln. introd. XVII; & cp. cpds. So in connection with kamma at Vism 451, 614; J VI.105 (kamma--paccayena utunā samuṭṭhitā Veraraṇī); perhaps also at Miln 410 (megha ututo samuṭṭhahitvā).
--āhāra physical nutriment (cp. Dhs trsln. 174) PvA 148. --ûpasevanā seasonable activity, pursuit (of activities) according to the seasons, observance of the seasons Sn 249 (= gimhe ātapa--ṭṭhāna--sevanā vasse rukkha--mūla--sevanā hemante jalappavesa--sevanā SnA 291). --kāla seasonable, favourable time (of the year) Vin I.299; II.173. --ja produced by the seasons or by physical change Miln 268 (kamma°, hetu°, utu°); Vism 451. --nibbatta coming to existence through physical causes Miln 268. --pamāṇa measure of the season, i. e. the exact season Vin I.95. --pariṇāma change (adversity) of the season (as cause
of disease) S IV.230; A II.87; III.131; V.110; Miln 112, 304; Vism 31. --parissaya danger or risk of the seasons A III.388. --pubba festival on the eve of each of the (6) seasons J VI.524. --vāra time of the season, °vārena °vārena according to the
turn of the season J I.58. --vikāra change of season Vism 262. --veramanī abstinence during the time of menstruaīion Sn 291 (cp. SnA 317). --saŋvacchara the year or cycle of the seasons, pl. °ā the seasons D III.85 = A II.75; S V.442. The phrase utusaŋvaccharāni at Pv II.955 is by Dhammapāla taken as a bahuvrīhi cpd., viz. cycles of seasons & of years, i. e. vasanta--gimh ādike bahū utū ca citta--saŋvaccharɔadi bahūni saŋvaccharāni ca PvA 135. Similarly at J V.330 (with Cy). --sappāya suitable
to the season, seasonable DhA 327. --samaya time of the menses SnA 317.
Utuka (--°) (adj.) [utu + ka] seasonable, only in cpd. sabbotuka belonging to all seasons, perennial D II.179; Pv IV. 122 (=
pupphupaga--rukkhādīhi sabbesu utūsu sukkhāvaha PvA 275); Sdhp 248.
Utunī (f.) [formed fr. utu like bhikkhunī fr. bhikkhu] a menstruating woman Vin III.18; IV.303; S IV.239; A III. 221, 229; Miln 127. an° A III.221, 226.

Utta [pp. of vac, Sk. ukta; for which the usual form is vutta only as dur° speaking badly or spoken of badly, i. e. of bad repute A II.117, 143; III.163; Kh VIII.2; KhA 218.
Uttaṇd̤āla (adj.) [ud + taṇd̤ula] "grainy", i. e. having too many rice grains (of rice gruel), too thick or solid (opp. atikilinna too thin or liquid) J I.340; III.383 (id.); IV.44 (id.).
Uttatta [ud + tatta1, pp. of ud + tap, Sk. uttapta] heated; of metals: molten, refined; shining, splendid, pure J VI. 574 (hemaŋ uttattaŋ agginā); Vv 8417; Pv III.32 (°rūpa, so read for uggata°, reading correct at PvA 188 °singī); PvA 10 (°kanaka, T. uggatta°); Mhbv 25 (id.).
Uttanta [= utrasta, is reading correct?] frightened, faint Vin III.84. See uttasta & utrasta.
Uttama (adj.) [superl. of ud°, to which compar. is uttara. See etym. under ud°] "ut--most", highest, greatest, best Sn 1054 (dhammaŋ uttamaŋ the highest ideal = Nibbāna, for which seṭṭhan Sn 1064; cp. Nd2 317); Dh 56; Nd1 211; Nd2 502 (in paraphrase of mahā combd. with pavara);
KhA 124; DhA I.430: PvA 1, 50. -- dum--uttama a splendid tree Vv 393; nar° the best of men Sn 1021 (= narāsabha of 996); pur° the most magnificent town Sn 1012; puris° the noblest man Th 1, 629, 1084; nt. uttamaŋ the highest ideal, i. e. Arahantship J I.96.
--anga the best or most important limb or part of the body, viz. (a) the head Vin II.256 = M I.32 = A IV.278 (in phrase uttamange sirasmiŋ); J II.163; also in cpd. °bhūta the hair of the head Th 2, 253 (= kesa--kalāpa ThA 209, 210) & °ruha id. J I.138 = VI.96 (= kesā C.); (b) the eye J IV.403; (c) the penis J V.197. --attha the highest gain or good (i. e. Arahantship SnA 332) Sn 324; Dh 386, 403; DhA IV.142; ThA 160. --adhama most contemptible J V.394, 437. --guṇā (pl.) loftiest virtues J I.96. --purisa It 97 & --porisa the greatest man (= mahāpurisa) Dh 97 (see DhA II.188). --bhāva the highest condition,
state or place DhA II.188 (°ŋ patto = puris'<-> uttamo).
Uttamatā (f.) [abstr. fr. uttama] highest amount, climax, limit DA I.169 (for paramatā). Uttara1
Uttara1 (adj.) compar. of ud°, q. v. for etym.; the superl. is uttama] -- 1. higher, high, superior, upper, only in cpds., J II.420 (musal° with the club on top of him? Cy not clear, perhaps to uttara2); see also below. -- 2. northern (with disā region or point of compass) D I.153; M I.123; S I.224; PvA 75. uttarāmukha (for uttaraŋmukha) turning north, facing north Sn 1010. -- 3. subsequent, following, second (°--) J I.63 (°āsāḷha--nakkhatta). <-> 4. over, beyond (--°): aṭṭhɔutara--sata eight over a hundred, i. e. 108; DhA I.388. -- sa--uttara having something above or higher, having a superior i. e. inferior D I.80 (citta), II.299; M I.59; S V.265; Vbh 324 (paññā); Dhs 1292, 1596; DhsA 50. -- anuttara without a superior, unrivalled, unparalleled D I.40; S I.124; II.278; III.84; Sn 179. See also under anuttara.
--attharaṇa upper cover J VI.253. --âbhimukha facing North D II.15. --āsanga an upper robe Vin I.289; II. 126; S I.81; IV.290; A I.67, 145; II.146; DhA I.218; PvA 73; VvA 33 = 51. --itara something higher, superior D I.45, 156, 174; S I.81; J I.364; DhA II.60; IV.4. --oṭṭha the upper lip (opp. adhar°) J II.420; III.26; IV. 184. --chada a cover, coverlet, awning (sa° a carpet with awnings or canopy above it) D I.7; A I.181; III.50. --chadana = °chada D II.187; DhA I.87. --dvāra the northern gate J VI.364. --dhamma the higher norm of the world (lok°), higher righteousness D II.188 (paṭividdha--lokɔ uttara--dhammatāya uttama--bhāvaŋ patta). --pāsaka the (upper) lintel (of a door) Vin II.120 = 148. --pubba north--eastern J VI.518. --sse (v. l. °suve) on the day after tomorrow A I.240.
Uttara2 (adj.) [fr. uttarati] crossing over, to be crossed, in dur° difficult to cross or to get out of S I.197 (not duruttamo); Miln
158; and in cpd. °setu one who is going to cross a bridge Miln 194 (cp. uttara--setu).
Uttaraṇa (nt.) [fr. uttarati] bringing or moving out, saving, delivery Th 1, 418; J I.195. In BSk. uttaraṇa only in sense of

crossing, overcoming, e. g. Jtm 31 Q (°setu). <-> Cp. uttara.
Uttarati [ud + tarati1] -- 1. to come out of (water) Vin II.221 (opp. otarati); J I.108 (id.). -- 2. to go over, to flow over (of water), to boil over Miln 117, 118, 132, 260, 277. -- 3. to cross over, to go beyond M I.135; aor. udatāri Sn 471 (oghaŋ). -- 4. to go over, to overspread J V.204 (ger. uttariyāna = avattharitvā C.). -- pp. otiṇṇa (q. v.). -- Caus. uttareti (q. v.).
(adv.) [compn. form of uttara, cp. angi--bhūta uttāni--karoti etc.] out, over, beyond; additional, moreover, further, besides. -- (1) uttariŋ: D I.71; M I.83; III.148; S IV.15; Sn 796 (uttariŋ kurute = uttariŋ karoti Nd2 102, i. e. to do more than anything, to do best, to esteem especially); J II.23; III.324; Miln 10 (ito uttariŋ anything beyond this, any more) DhA IV.109 (bhaveti to cultivate especially; see vuttari); VvA 152. -- uttariŋ appaṭivijjhanto not going further in comprehension, i. e. reaching the highest degree of comprehension, Vism 314, referring to Ps II.131, which is quoted at Miln 198, as the last of the 11 blessings of mettā. -- (2) uttari° in foll. cpds.
--karaṇīya an additional duty, higher obligation S II. 99; III.168; A V.157 = 164; It 118. --bhanga an extra portion, tit--bit, dainties, additional or after--meal bits Vin II.214; III.160; IV.259; J II.419; DhA I.214 sa--uttaribhanga together with dainty bits J I.186, cp. 196 (yāgu). --bhangika serving as dainties J I.196. --manussa beyond the power of men, superhuman, in cpd. °dhamma an order which is above man, extraordinary condition, transcendental norm, adj. of a transcendental character, miraculous, overwhelming Vin I.209; II.112; III.105; IV.24; D I.211; III.3, 12, 18; M I.68; II.200; S IV.290, 300, 337; A III.430; V.88; DhA III.480. --sāṭaka a further, i. e. upper or outer garment, cloak, mantle J II.246; DhA IV.200; PvA 48, 49 (= uttarīyaŋ).
Uttarika (adj.) [fr. uttara] transcending, superior, superhuman Nett 50.
Uttariya (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttara; uttara + ya = Sk. *uttarya] -- 1. state of being higher. Cp. III.35; neg. an° state of being
unsurpassed (lit. with nothing higher), preeminence; see anuttariya. -- 2. an answer, rejoinder DhA I.44 (karaṇ°--karaṇa). Uttarīya (nt.) [fr. uttara] an outer garment, cloak PvI.103 (= uparivasanaŋ uparihāraŋ uttarisāṭakaŋ PvA 49); Dāvs III.30;
ThA 253.
Uttasati1 [identical in form with next] only in Caus. uttāseti to impale, q. v. Uttasati2
Uttasati2 [ut + tasati2] -- 1. to frighten J I.47 (v.267). <-> to be alarmed or terrified Vin I.74 (ubbijjati u. palāyati); III.145 (id.); J II.384; VI.79; ppr. uttasaŋ Th 1, 863; & uttasanto Pv II.23. -- See utrasati. Caus. uttāseti (q. v.). <-> pp. uttasta & utrasta (q. v.). Cp. also uttanta.
Uttasana (adj.--nt.) [fr. ud + tras, cp. uttāsana] frightening, fear J I.414 (v. l. for uttasta).
Uttasta [pp. of uttasati2; usual form utrasta (q. v.)] frightened, terrified, faint--hearted J I.414 (°bhikkhu; v. l. uttasana°).
Uttāna (adj.) [fr. ut + tan, see tanoti & tanta] -- 1. streched out (flat), lying on one's back, supine Vin I.271 (mañcake
uttānaŋ nipajjāpetvā making her lie back on the couch); II.215; J I.205; Pv IV.108 (opp. avakujja); PvA 178 (id.), 265. -- 2. clear, manifest, open, evident [cp. BSk. uttāna in same sense at Av. S II.106] D I.116; S II.28 (dhammo uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito); J II.168 (= pākaṭa); V.460; PvA 66, 89, 140, 168. -- anuttāna unclear, not explained J VI.247. -- The cpd. form (°--) of uttāna
in combn. with kṛ & bhū is uttānī° (q. v.). -- 3. superficial, "flat", shallow A I.70 (parisa); Pug 46.
--mukha "clear mouthed", speaking plainly, easily understood D I.116 (see DA I.287); DhA IV.8. --seyyaka "lying on one's back", i. e. an infant M I.432; A III.6; Th 1, 935; Miln 40; Vism 97 (°dāraka).

Uttānaka (adj.) [fr. uttāna] -- 1. (= uttāna1) lying on one's back J VI.38 (°ŋ pātetvā); DhA I.184. -- 2. (= uttāna2) clear, open D II.55; M I.340 = DhA I.173.
Uttānī (°--) [the compn. form of uttāna in cpds. with kṛ & bhū cp. BSk. uttānī--karoti M Vastu III.408; uttānī--kṛta Av. Ś I.287; II.151] open, manifest etc., in °kamma (uttāni°) declaration, exposition, manifestation S V.443; Pug 19; Vbh 259, 358; Nett 5, 8, 9, 38. -- °karaṇa id. SnA 445. -- °karoti to make clear or open, to declare, show up, confess (a sin) Vin I.103; S II.25, 154; III.132, 139; IV.166; V.261; A I.286; III.361 sq.
Uttāpeti [Caus. of uttapati] to heat, to cause pain, torment J VI.161.
Uttāra [fr. ud + tṛ as in uttarati] crossing, passing over, °setu a bridge for crossing (a river) S IV.174 = M I.134; cp.
Uttārita [pp. of uttāreti] pulled out, brought or moved out J I.194.
Uttāritatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uttārita] the fact of having or being brought or moved out J I.195.
Uttāreti [Caus. of uttarati] to make come out, to move or pull out J I.194; SnA 349. -- pp. uttārita (q. v.).
Uttāsa [Sk. uttrāsa, fr. ud + tras] terror, fear, fright D III.148; S V.386; Miln 170; PvA 180.
Uttāsana (nt.) [fr. uttāseti2] impalement J II.444; SnA 61 (sūle).
Uttāsavant (adj.) [uttāsa + vant] showing fear or fright, fearful S III.16 sq.
Uttāsita [pp. of uttāseti2] impaled Pv IV.16 (= āvuta āropita VvA 220); J I.499; IV.29.
Uttāseti1 [Caus of uttasati, ud + tras, of which taŋs is uttāseti2 is a variant] to frighten, terrify J I.230, 385; II.117.
Uttāseti2 [cp. Sk. uttaŋsayati in meaning to adorn with a wreath; ud + taŋs to shake, a variation of tars to shake, tremble] to impale A I.48; J I.230, 326; II.443; III.34; IV.29. -- pp. uttāsita (q. v.). Cp. uttāsana.
Uttiṭṭha [= ucchiṭṭha? Cp. ucchepaka. By Pāli Cys. referred to uṭṭhahati "alms which one stands up for, or expects"] left
over, thrown out Vin I.44 (°patta); Th 1, 1057 (°piṇd̤a); 2, 349 (°piṇd̤a = vivaṭadvāre ghare ghare patiṭṭhitvā labhanaka--piṇd̤a ThA 242); J IV.380 (°piṇd̤a; C. similarly as at ThA; not to the point); 386 (°piṇd̤a = ucchiṭṭhaka piṇd̤a C.); Miln 213, 214.
Uttiṭṭhe see uṭṭhahati.
Uttiṇa (adj.) [ud + tiṇa] in uttiṇaŋ karoti to take the straw off, lit. to make off--straw; to deprive of the roof M II.53. Cp.
Uttiṇṇa [pp. of uttarati] drawn out, pulled out, nt. outlet, passage J II.72 (paṇṇasālāya uttiṇṇāni karoti make entrances in
the hut). Or should it be uttiṇa?
Utrasta [pp. of uttasati, also cp. uttasta] frightened, terrified, alarmed Vin II.184; S I.53, 54 (an°); Sn 986; Miln 23; DhA II.6 (°mānasa); PvA 243 (°citta), 250 (°sabhāva).

Utrāsa [= uttāsa] terror J II.8 (citt°).
Utrāsin (adj.) [fr. *Sk. uttrāsa = P. uttāsa] terrified, frightened, fearful, anxious S I.99, 219. -- Usually neg. an° in phrase abhīru anutrāsin apalāyin without fear, steadfast & not running away S I.99; Th 1, 864; Nd2 13; J IV.296; V.4; Miln 339. See also apalāyin.
Ud-- [Vedic ud--; Goth. ūt = Ohg. ūz = E. out, Oir. ud--; cp. Lat. ūsque "from--unto" & Gr. u(/steros = Sk. uttara] prefix in verbal & nominal combn. One half of all the words beginning with u° are combns. with ud°, which in compn. appears modified according to the rules of assimilation as prevailing in Pāli. -- I. Original meaning "out in an upward direction", out of, forth; like ummujjati to rise up out of (water), ujjalati to blaze up high; udeti to come out of & go up; ukkaṇṭha stretching one's neck out high (cp. Ger. "empor"); uggilati to "swallow up", i. e. spit out. -- The opposites of ud-- are represented by either ava or o° (see under II. & IV. & cp. ucc--âvaca; uddhambhāgiya: orambhāgiya), ni (see below) or vi (as udaya: vi--aya or vaya). -- II. Hence develop 2 clearly defined meanings, viz. (1) out, out of, away from --: °aṇha ("day--out"); °agga ("top--out"); °āgacchati; °ikkhati look out for, expect; °kantati tear out; °khitta thrown off; °khipati pick out; °gacchati come out; °gamaṇa rising (opp. o°);
°gajjati shout out; °gilati (opp. o°); °ghoseti shout out; °cināti pick out; °chiṭṭha thrown out; °jagghati laugh at, cp. Ger. aus--lachen °tatta smelted out; °tāna stretched out; °dāleti tear out; °dhaṭa lifted out, drawn out; °disati point out to; °drīyati pull out; °pajjati to be produced; °patti & °pāda coming out, origin, birth; °paṭipatiyā out of reach; °paḷāseti sound out; °phāsulika "ribs out"; etc. etc. -- (2) up (high) or high up, upwards, on to (cp. ucca high, uttara higher) --: °kujja erect (opp. ava°); °kūla sloping up (opp. vi°); °khipati throw--up, °gaṇhāti take up; °chindati cut up; °javati go up--stream, °javana id. (opp. o°); uñña pride; °thāna "standing up" °ṭhita got up; °tarati come out, go up (opp. o°); °nata raised up, high (opp. o°); °nama e--levation; °nāmin raised (opp. ni°); °patati fly up; etc. etc. -- III. More specialised meanings (from elliptical or figurative use) are: (1) ud° = without, "ex--", e. g. unnangala "outplough" = without a plough; uppabbajita an ex--bhikkhu. <-> (2) ud° = off, i. e. out of the way, wrong, e. g. uppatha a wrong road, ummagga id. -- (3) ud° = out of the ordinary, i. e. exceedingly, e. g. ujjangala extremely dusty; uppanduka very pale; uppoṭheti to beat hard. -- IV. Dialectical variations & combinations. -- (1) Owing to semantic affinity we often find an interchange between ud° and ava° (cp. E. break up = break down, grind up or down, tie up
or down), according to different points of view. This wavering between the two prefixes was favoured by the fact that o always had shown an unstable tendency & had often been substituted for or replaced by ū, which in its place was reduced to u before a double consonant, thus doing away with the diff. between ū & u or o & u. For comparison see the foll.: ukkamati & okk°; uññā: avañña; uddiyati: odd°; ud̤d̤eyya od̤d̤°; uppīḷeti: opīḷ°; etc., & cp. abbhokirati > abbhukkirati. -- (2) the most freq. combns. that ud° enters into are those with the intensifying prefixes abhi° and sam°; see e. g. abhi + ud (= abbhud°) + gacchati, °jalati; °ṭhāti; °namati etc.; sam + ud + eti; °kamati; °chindati; °tejeti; °pajjati etc.
Uda1 (indecl.) [Sk. uta & u, with Lat. aut (or), Gr. au(_ti (again), au)ta/r (but, or), Goth. auk = Ger. auch to pron. base ava° yonder, cp. ava II.] disjunctive part. "or"; either singly, as at Sn 455, 955, 1090; J V.478 (v. l. udāhu); Nd1 445 (expld. as "padasandhi" with same formula as iti, q. v.); Pv II.1216 (kāyena uda cetasā); or combd. with other synonymous particles, as uda vā at Sn 193, 842, 1075; It 82 = 117 (caraŋ vā yadi vā tiṭṭhaŋ nisinno uda vā sayaŋ walking or standing, sitting or lying down); KhA 191. -- See also udāhu.
Uda2 (°--) [Vedic udan (nt.), also later uda (but only °--), commonly udaka, q. v.] water, wave. In cpds. sometimes the older form udan° is preserved (like udañjala, udaññavant), but generally it has been substituted by the later uda° (see under udakaccha, udakanti, udakumbha, udapatta, udapāna, udabindu).
Udaka (nt.) [Vedic udaka, uda + ka (see uda2), of Idg. *ṷed, *ud, fuller form *eṷed (as in Sk. odatī, odman flood, odana gruel, q. v.); cp. Sk. unatti, undati to water, udra = Av. udra = Ags. otor = E. otter ("water--animal"); Gr. u(/dwr water ("hydro"), u(/dra hydra ("water--animal"); Lat. unda wave; Goth. watō = Ohg. wazzar = E. water; Obulg. voda water, vydra

otter] water Vin II.120, 213; D II.15 (°assa dhārā gushes or showers of w.); Dh 80, 145; J I.212; Pv I.57; Pug 31, 32; Miln 318; VvA 20 (udake temanaŋ aggimhe tāpanaŋ); DhA I.289; DhA III. 176, 256; PvA 39, 70. -- Syn. ambu, ela, jala etc. <-> The compn. form (--°) is either ûdaka (āsanûdaka--dāyin
J IV.435) or °odaka (pādodaka water for the feet PvA 78). odaka occurs also in abs. form (q. v.), cp. also oka. Bdgh.'s kaŋ = udakaŋ, tena dāritan: kandaran ti is a false etymology; DA I.209.
--aṇṇava water--flood M I.134. --āyatika a water--pipe Vin II.123. --āḷhaka a certain measure of water, an āḷhaka of w. S V.400; A II.55 = III.337; VvA 155. --ûpama resembling water, like water A IV.11 (puggala). --ogāhana plunging into water J III.235. --ogha a water flood VvA 48. --orohaka descending into water, bathing; N. of a class of ascetics, lit. "bather" M I.281; S IV.312; A V. 263. --orohaṇa plunging into water, taking a bath, bathing D I.167; S I.182; A I.296; II.206; J IV.299; Pug 55. --kalaha the "water dispute" DhA III.256. --kāka a water crow J II.441. --kicca libation of water, lit. water--performance; cleansing, washing D II.15. --kīḷā sporting in the w. J VI.420. --gahaṇasāṭaka bathing--gown J V.477. --ghaṭa a water pitcher PvA 66. --cāṭi a water jar DhA I.52. --ṭṭhāna a stand for water Vin II.120. --tumba a water vessel J II.441; DA I.202; DhA II.193. --telaka an oily preparation mixed with water Vin II.107. --dantapoṇa water for rinsing the mouth & tooth--cleaner Vin III.51; IV.90, 92, 233; J IV.69. --daha a lake (of water) D I.45. --doṇikā a water--tub or trough Vin II.220. --dhārā a shower of water Ps I.125; J IV.351. --niddhamana a water spout or drain Vin II.120, 123; DhA II.37. --nibbāhana an aquaduct Miln 295. --paṭiggaha receiving or accepting water Vin II.213. --patta a waterbowl Vin II. 107; D I.80; S III.105. --puñchanī a towel Vin II.122. --posita fed or nourished by water VvA 173. --phusita a drop of water S II.135. --bindu a
drop of w. It 84 (v. l. for udabindu); PvA 99. --bubbula a w. bubble A IV.137; Vism 109, 479 (in comp.). --bhasta devoid of water ThA 212 (for anodaka Th 2, 265). --maṇika a water--pot Vin I.227; M I.354; A III.27; Miln 28; DhA I.79. --mallaka a cup for w. A I.250. --rakkhasa a water--sprite DhA III.74. --rahada a lake (of w.) D I.74, 84; A I.9; II.105; III.25; Sn 467; Pug 47. --rūha a water plant Vv 35Q. --lekhā writing on w. A I.283 = Pug 32 (in simile °ûpama like writing on w.; cp. Pug A 215). --vāra "waterturn", i. e. fetching water DhA I.49. --vāraka bucket S II.118. --vāha a flow of water, flowing w. J VI.162. --vāhaka rise or swelling (lit. carrying or pulling along (of water), overflowing, flood A I.178. --vāhana pulling up water Vin II.122 (°rajju). --sadda sound of water Dhs 621. --sarāvaka a saucer for w. Vin II.120. --sāṭaka = sāṭikā J II.13. --sāṭikā "water--cloak", a bathing--mantle Vin I. 292; II.272; IV.279 (= yāya nivatthā nhāyati C.); DhA II.61 (T. °sāṭaka). --suddhika ablution with water (after passing urine) Vin IV.262 (= mutta--karaṇassa dhovanā C.).
Udakaccha [uda + kaccha] watery soil, swamp J V.137.
Udakumbha [uda + kumbha] a water jug J I.20; Dh 121, 122; Pv I.129.
Udagga (adj.) [ud + agga, lit. "out--top", cp. Sk. udagra] topmost, high, lofty Th 1, 110; fig. elated, exalted, exultant, joyful, happy D I.110 (°citta); Sn 689 (+ sumana), 1028 (id.); Pv IV.155 (attamana +); IV.58 (haṭṭha +); Miln 248; DhA II.42 (haṭṭha--pahaṭṭha udagg--udagga in high glee & jubilant); Vism 346 (id.); Sdhp 323. See also der. odagya.
Udaggatā (f.) [abstr. fr. udagga] exaltation, jubilation, glee Sdhp 298.
Udaggi° in udaggihuttaŋ [= ud + aggi + hutta, cp. Vedic agnihotra] the fire prepared (for sacrifice) J V.396 (=
uda--aggihuttaŋ C. wrongly), lit. "the sacrifice (being) out"
Udangaṇa (nt.) [ud + angaṇa1; Kern unnecessarily changes it to uttankana "a place for digging for water" see Toev. p.
96] an open place J I.109.
Udacchidā 3rd sg. praet. of ucchindati to break up Sn 2, 3 (°ā metri causa).
Udañcana (nt.) [fr. ud + añc, see añchati] a bucket for drawing water out of a well DhA I.94.
Udañcanin (adj.--n.) [ud + añcanin to añc see añchati] draining, pulling up water f. °ī a bucket or pail J I. 417 (f. °ī). Udañjala [udan + jala see uda2] in °ŋ kīḷati a water--game: playing with drops of water (?) Vin III.118 (Bdhgh.:

udañjalan ti udaka--cikkhallo vuccati p. 274)
Udaññavant (adj.) [udan = uda(ka) + vant] rich in water, well--watered J V.405 (= udaka--sampanna C.).
Udaṇha [ud + aṇha] day--break, dawn, sunrise J V.155.
Udatāri 3rd sg aor. of uttarati to cross over Sn 471 (oghaŋ).
Udatta (adj.) [Sk. udātta] elevated, high, lofty, clever Nett 7, 118, 123 (= uḷārapañña C.).
Udadhi [uda + dhi, lit. water--container] the sea, ocean S I.67; It 86; Sn 720; J V.326; VI.526; ThA 289; VvA 155 ("udakaŋ ettha dhīyatī ti udadhi"); Sdhp 322, 577.
Udapatta1 [ụda for ud, and patta, pp. of pat, for patita? Kern, Toev. s. v. takes it as udak--prāpta, risen, flying up, sprung up J III.484 (= uppatita C.); V.71 (= uṭṭhita C.).
Udapatta2 [uda + patta; Sk. udapātra] a bowl of water, a water--jug, ewer M I.100; S V.121; A III.230 sq., 236; V.92, 94, 97 sq.
Udapādi 3rd sg. aor. of uppajjati to arise, originate, become D I.110, 180, 185; S II.273; It 52, 99; SnA 346, 462.
Udapāna [uda + pāna lit. "(place for) drinking water"; cp. opāna, which in the incorrect opinion of Pāli Commentators represents a contracted udapāna] a well, a cistern Vin I.139; II.122; M I.80; A IV.171; J III.216; Ud 78; Pv II.78; II.925; Miln 411; Vism 244 (in simile); DA I.298; VvA 40; PvA 78.
Udappatta see udapatta.
Udabindu [uda + bindu] a drop of water M I.78; Sn 812; Dh 121, 122, 336; It 84 (v. l. udaka°); Nd1 135; SnA 114; DhA II.51.
Udabbhadhi aor. 3rd sg. of ubbadhati [ud + vadh] to destroy, kill Sn 4 (= ucchindanto vadhati SnA 18).
Udabbahe 3rd sg. Pot. of ubbahati [ud + bṛh1, see also abbahati] to draw out, tear out, remove Th 1, 158; Sn 583 (=
ubbaheyya dhāreyya (?) SnA 460); J II.223 (= udabbaheyya C.); VI.587 (= hareyya C.); aor. udabbahi Vin IV.5.
Udaya [fr. ud + i, cp. udeti] rise, growth; increment, increase; income, revenue, interest A II.199; Ps I.34; Vv 847 (dhanɔ atthika uddayaŋ patthayāna = ānisaŋsaŋ atirekalābhaŋ VvA 336); 8452; DhA II.270; PvA 146 (ulār° vipāka), 273 (°bhūtāni pañca kahāpaṇa--satāni labhitvā, with interest); Sdhp 40, 230, 258. -- See also uddaya.
--attha rise and fall, birth & death (to attha2) M I.356; S V.197 sq., 395; A III.152 sq.; IV.111, 289, 352; V.15, 25. --atthika desirous of increase, interest or wealth (cp. above Vv 847 dhanɔatthika) A II.199. --bbaya (ud--aya + vy--aya) increase & decrease, rise & fall, birth & death, up & down D III.223; S I.46 = 52 (lokassa); III.130; A II.90; III. 32; IV.153; It 120; Vism 287; Ps I.54; ThA 90. --vyaya = °bbaya S IV.140; A II.15 (khandhānaŋ); Dh 113, 374 (khandhānaŋ, see DhA IV.110).
Udayaŋ & Udayanto ppr. of udeti (q. v.). Udayana (nt.) [fr. ud + i] going up, rise DA I.95.

Udara (nt.) [Vedic udara, Av udara belly, Gr. u(/steros = Lat. uterus belly, womb; Lith. védaras stomach, See also Walde, Lat. Wtb. under vensica] -- 1 the belly, stomach D II.266; Sn 78, 604, 609, 716; J I.146, 164, 265; Miln 213; PvA 283; KhA 57, 58; DhA I.47 (pregnant); Sdhp 102. -- 2. cavity, interior, inside Dāvs I.56 (mandir--odare). --ūnûdara with empty belly Th 1, 982; Miln 406, 407; cp. ūna.
--aggi the fire of the belly or stomach (i. e. of digestion) KhA 59; SnA 462; PvA 33; --âvadehakaŋ (adv.) bhunjati to eat to fill the stomach, eat to satiety, to be gluttonous M I.102; A V.18; Th 1, 935; Vism 33. --paṭala the mucous membrane of the stomach Vism 359 (= sarīr°abbhantara 261); SnA 248; KhA 55, 61. --pūra stomachfilling Vism 108. --vaṭṭi "belly--sack", belly Vin III.39, 117; Vism 262 where KhA reads ud. paṭala). --vāta the wind of the belly, stomach--ache 9J I.33, 433; Vism 41 (°ābādha); DhA IV.129.
Udariya (nt.) [fr. udara] the stomach Kh III. (cp. KhA 57); Vism 258, 358. Cp sodariya.
Udassaye 2nd sg. pot. of ud + assayati [ā + śri, cp. assaya] J V.26 (meaning to instal, raise?), expld. by C. as ussayāpesi (?)
Reading may be faulty for udāsase (?).
Udahāraka [uda + hāraka] a water--carrier J II.80.
Udahāriya (adj.) [fr. udahāra fetching of water, uda + hṛ] going for water Vv 509. Udāgacchati [ud + ā + gacchati] to come to completion Da I.288. Cp sam.
Udāna (nt.) [fr. ud + an to breathe] -- 1. "breathing out", exulting cry, i e. an utterance, mostly in metrical form, inspired by
a particularly intense emotion, whether it be joyful or sorrowful (cp. K. S. p. 29 n. 2) D I.50, 92; S I.20, 27, 82, 160; A I.67; J I.76; Pug 43, 62; Nett 174; PvA 67; Sdhp 514. -- The utterance of such an inspired thought is usually introduced with the standing phrase "imaŋ udānaŋ udānesi" i. e. breathed forth this solemn utterance [Cp. BSk. udānaŋ udānayati Divy 99 etc.],
e. g. at Vin I.2 sq., 12, 230, 353; D I.47; II.107 (udāna of triumph); S III.55; Mhvs XIX.29; DA I.140; Ud. 1 passim; SnA 354 ("the familiar quotation about the sakyas"). Occasionally (later) we find other phrases, as e. g. udānaŋ pavatti J I.61; abhāsi Vin IV.54; kathesi J VI. 38. -- 2. one of the angas or categories of the Buddhist Scriptures: see under nava & anga. -- Cp. vodāna.
Udānita [pp. of udāneti] uttered, breathed forth, said DhA IV.55.
Udāneti [denom. f. udāna, cp. BSk. udānayati] to breathe out or forth, usually in phrase udānaŋ udānesi: see under
udāna1. Absolutely only at J III.218.
Udāpatvā at J V.255 is uncertain reading (v. l. udapatvā, C. explns. reading udapatvā by uppatitvā = flying up), perhaps
we should read udapatta flew up, pret. of ud + pat = Sk. *udapaptat (so Kern, Toev. s. v.).
Udāyati at DA I.266 (udāyissati fut.) is hardly correct; D I.96 has here udrīyissati (q. v.), which belongs to darati to break,
tear etc., udāyati could only belong to dāyāti meaning to cut, mow, reap. but not to split etc. DA I.266 explns. udāyissati with bhijjhissati. The difficulty is removed by reading udrīyissati. To v. l. undriyati cp. °undriya for °uddaya (dukkh° for dukkhudraya see udraya). We find udāyati once more at Vism 156 in expln. of ekodi where it is evidently meant for udeti (Caus. = uṭṭhapeti).
Udāra (adj.) [Sk. udāra, of which the usual P. form is ulāra (q. v.). Cp. BSk. audāra & audārika.] raised, sublime, noble, excellent Dāvs III.4 (samussit--odāra--sitātapattaŋ); DA I.50 (°issariya); Sdhp 429, 591.
Udāvatta [pp. of udāvattate, ud + ā vattati] retired, desisting J V.158 (= udāvattitva nivattitva C).
Udāsīna (adj.) [ud + āsīna, pp. of ās to sit; lit. sit apart, be indifferent] indifferent, passive, neutral DhsA 129.

Udāhaṭa [pp of udāharati] uttered, spoken; called, quoted Pug 41.
Udāharaṇa (nt.) [fr. udāharati] example, instance J III.401 (°ŋ āharitvā dassento), 510; Miln 345; SnA 445; VvA 297.
Udāharati [ud + ā + hṛ] to utter, recite. speak. Sn 389; J III.289; DA I.140 (see udāhāra). -- pp udāhaṭa (q. v.). Cp. pariy°.
Udāhāra [fr. udāharati] utterance, speech DA I.140 (°ŋ udāhari = udānaŋ udānesi); Pug A 223,
Udāhu (indecl.) [uta + āho, cp. P. uda & aho and Sk. utāro] disjunctive--adversative particle "or", in direct questions D I 157; II.8; Sn 599, 875, 885; J I.20, 83; VvA 258 (= ādu); PvA 33, 51; Miln 10. -- The first part of the question is often introduced with kiŋ, while udāhu follows in the second (disjunctive) part, e. g. kin nakkhattaŋ kīḷissasi udāhu bhatiŋ karissasi VvA 63; kiŋ amhehi saddhiŋ āgamissasi udāhu pacchā will you come with us or later? DhA II.96: See under kiŋ. -- Often combd with other expletive particles, e. g. udāhu ve Sn 1075, 1077; udāhu no Sn 347; eva . . . no udāhu (so . . . or not) D I.152; (ayaŋ) nu kho -- udāhu (ayaŋ) is it (this) -- (this) Vism 313.
Udi (or udī) is artificial adj. formn. fr. udeti, meaning "rising, excelling", in expln. of ekodi at Vism 156 (udayatī ti udi uṭṭhapetī ti attho).
Udikkhati [ud + īkṣ, Sk. udīkṣate] -- 1. to look at, to survey. to perceive Vin I.25 (udiccare, 3sd. pl. pres. med.); J V.71,
296; Vv 8121 (aor. udikkhisaŋ = ullokesiŋ VvA 316); Dāvs II 109; Sdhp 308. -- 2. to look out for, to expect J I.344; VvA 118. -- 3. to envy Miln 338.
Udikkhitar [n. ag. of udikkhati] one who looks for or after D III 167.
Udicca (adj.) [apparently an adjectivised ger. of udeti but distorted from & in meaning = Sk. udañc, f. udīcī northern, the north] "rising", used in a geographical sense of the N. W. country, i. e. north--westerly, of north--western origin (cp. Brethren 79, Miln trsln. II.45 n. 1) J I.140, 324, 343, 373; Miln 236. -- See also uddiya.
Udiccare 3sd. pl. pres. med. of udikkhati (q. v.).
Udita1 [pp. of ud--i, see udeti] risen, high, elevated Miln 222; (°odita); Dāvs IV.42; Sdhp 14 (of the sun) 442 (°odita).
Udita2 [pp. of vad, see vadati] spoken, proclaimed, uttered Vuttodaya 2 (quoted by Childers in Khuddaka--pātha ed. 1869, p. 22).
Udīraṇa (nt.) [fr. udīreti] utterance, saying J V.237; Dhs 637, 720; Miln 145. Udīrita [pp. of udīreti] uttered J III.339; V.394 = 407.
Udīreti [ud + īreti, cp. in meaning īrita] -- 1. to set in motion, stir up, cause J III.441 (dukkhaŋ udīraye Pot. = udīreyya C.); V.395 (kalahaŋ to begin a quarrel). -- 2. to utter, proclaim, speak, say S I.190; Sn 632 (pot. °raye = bhāseyya SnA 468); Dh 408 (giraŋ udīraye = bhāseyya DhA IV.182); J V.78 (vākyaŋ); Pass. udīyati (uddiyyati = Sk. udīryate) Th 1, 1232 (nigghoso).
Udu (adj.) [= *ṛtu? cp. utu & uju] straight, upright, in °mano straight--minded D III.167, 168 (= uju° in v. l. and expln. by C.).

Udukkhala (m. & nt.) [Sk. ulukhala] a mortar Vin I.202 (+ musala pestle); J I.502; II.428; V.49; II.161, 335; Ud 69 (m;
+ musaḷa); DhA II.131 (°sala); Vism 354 (in comp.). The relation between udukkhala and musala is seen best from the description of eating at Vism 344 and DA I.200, where the lower teeth play the role of ud., the upper teeth act as m., while the tongue takes the part of a hand. On this passage & other connections as well as etym. see Morris J.P.T.S. 1893, 37.
Udukkhalikā (f.) [fr. udukkhala] part of a door (threshold?) Vin II.148 (+ uttara--pasaka lintel of a door). Udumbara [Sk. udumbara] the glomerous fig tree, Ficus Glomerata D II.4; Vin IV.35; A IV.283 (°khādika), 283 (id.),
324 (id.); Sn 5; DhA I.284; SnA 19; KhA 46, 56; VvA 213. Cp. odumbara.
Udeti (ud + eti of i to go] to go out or up, to rise (of the sun), to come out, to increase Asl. 169; Vism 156 (eko udetī ti ekodi); J II.33; III.324; ppr. udayaŋ It 85 (ādicco), & udayanto PvA 154 (udayante suriye = sole surgente). -- pp. udita (see udita1). Cp. udicca & udi.
Udda1 [Vedic udra, to uda2 water, lit. living in water; Cp. Gr. u(/dros "hydra"; Ohg. ottar = Ags. otor = E. otter; Lith. ûdra = Obulg. vydra otter] an aquatic animal, the otter (?) Childers s. v. doubts the identity of this creature with the regular otter, since it lives in the jungle. Is it a beaver -- Vin I.186 (°camma otter--skin, used for sandals); Cp. I.102 (°pota); J III.51 sq., 335. The names of two otters at J III.333 are Gambhīra--cārin and Anutīra--cārin.
Udda2 [for uda2?] water, in passage amakkhito uddena, amakkhito semhena, a. ruhirena i. e. not stained by any kind of (dirty) fluid D II.14; M III.122.
Uddaṇd̤a [ud + daṇd̤a] a kind of building (or hut), in which the sticks stand out (?) Nd1 226 = Nd2 976 (uṭanda) = Vism 25 (v. l. BB uṭṭanda).
Uddaya1 [a (metric?) variant of udaya] gain, advantage, profit Vv 847 (see udaya); J v.39 (satt°--mahāpaduma of profit to beings?).
Uddaya2 in compounds dukkh°
Uddaya2 in compounds dukkh° and sukh°. see udraya.
Uddalomī [= udda + lomin beaver--hair--y ] a woollen coverlet with a fringe at each end D I.7 (= ubhato dasaŋ
uṇṇā--mayɔ attharaṇaŋ; keci ubhato uggata--pupphaŋ ti vadanti DA I.87); A I.181. See however uddha--lomin under uddhaŋ.
Uddasseti [ud + dasseti, Caus. of dassati1] to show, reveal, point out, order, inform, instruct D II.321 sq.; M I.480 (read uddassessāmi for conjectured reading uddisissāmi?); II.60 (v. l. uddiset°) A IV.66.
Uddāna (nt.) [fr. ud + dā, dayati to bind: see under dāma] a group of Suttas, used throughout the Vinaya Piṭaka, with ref.
to each Khandhaka, in the Saŋyutta, the Anguttara and other books (cp. Miln 407) for each group of about ten Suttas (cp. DhsA 27). The Uddāna gives, in a sort of doggerel verse, at the end of each group, the titles of the Suttas in the group. It may then be roughly rendered "summary". If all the Uddānas were collected together, they would form a table of contents to the

whole work. -- Otherwise the word has only been found used of fishes "macchuddāna" (so J II.425; DhA II.132). It then means a group of fish placed apart for for sale in one lot. Perhaps a set or a batch would meet the case.
Uddāpa [*udvāpa] foundation of a wall, in stock phrase daḷh° etc. D III.101; S V.194 = also at J VI.276 (= pākāra--vatthu C.). Kern, Toev. s. v. refers it to Sk. ud--vapati to dig out, and translates "moat, ditch". The meaning "wall" or "mound" however harmonises quite well with the der. fr. "digging", cp. E. dike > Ger. Teich. See also uddāma 2.
Uddāpavant (adj.) [fr. uddāpa] having a wall or embankment S II.106 (v. l. uddhā°); C. expls. as apato uggatattā J IV.536 (so read with v. l. for T. uddhā pavatta; C. expls. as tīra--mariyādā--bandhana).
Uddāma [fr. ud + dā as in uddāna, see dāma] 1. (adj.) "out of bounds", unrestrained, restless Dāvs V.56 (°sāgara). -- 2.
(n.) wall, enclosure (either as "binding in", protecting or as equivalent of uddāpa fr. ud + vam "to throw up" in sense of to throw up earth, to dig a mound = udvapati) in phrase aṭṭāla--uddāma--parikhâdīni watchtowers, enceintes, moats etc. DhA III.488.
Uddāraka [?] some wild animal J V.416 (reading uncertain, expln. ditto). Uddāla = uddālaka, only as Np. J IV.298 sq.
Uddālaka [fr. ud + dal, see dalati] the Uddāla tree, Cassia Fistula (also known as indīvara), or Cordia Myxa, lit.
"uprooter" Vv 67 (= vātaghātako yo rājarukkho ti pi vuccati VvA 43); J IV.301 (°rukkha), 440; V.199 (= vātaghātaka C.), 405; VI.530 (so read for uddh°); VvA 197 (°puppha = indīvara); PvA 169.
Uddālanaka (adj.) [fr. uddālana > ud + dāleti] referring to destruction or vandalism, tearing out Vin IV.169. Uddāleti [ud + dāleti, Caus. of dal, see dalati] to tear out or off Vin IV.170; S IV.178.
Uddiṭṭha [pp. of uddisati] -- 1. pointed out, appointed, set out, put forth, proposed, put down, codified M I.480 (pañha); Sn p. 91 (id. = uddesa--mattenɔ eva vutta, na vibhangena SnA 422); SnA 372. -- 2. appointed, dedicated J V.393 (an °ŋ pupphaŋ = asukassa nāma dassāmī ti); PvA 50; KhA 138.
Uddiya (adj.) [Sk. udīcya?] northern, northwestern (i. e. Nepalese) J IV.352 (°kambala) in expln. of uddiyāna [Sk.
udīcīna?]. See udicca & cp. Morris in J.P.T.S. 1889, 202, and last not least Lüders in K. Z. 1920 (vol. 49), 233 sq. The word is not sufficiently cleared up yet.
Uddisati [ud + disati] -- to propose, point out, appoint, allot Dh 353, cp. DhA IV.72; Miln 94 (satihāraŋ); fut. uddisissati
M I.480 (ex conj., is probably to be changed to uddassessati, q. v.). -- 2. to specify PvA 22 (aor. uddisi), 25 (= nīyādeti, dadāti), 27. -- Pass. uddissati to show oneself, to be seen Pv III.212, and uddissiyati PvA 46. -- pp. uddiṭṭha (q. v.). -- Caus. II. uddisāpeti (q. v.). -- ger. uddissa (q. v.)
Uddisāpeti [Caus. II. of uddisati] -- 1. to make recite Vin I.47 = II.224; IV.290. -- 2. to dedicate PvA 35 (v. l. ādisati).
Uddissa (indecl.) [orig. ger. of uddisati] -- 1. indicating, with signs or indications J III.354 = Miln 230. -- 2. prep w. acc.: (a) (lit.) pointing to, tending towards, towards, to PvA 250 Suraṭṭha--visayaŋ). -- (b) (appld.) with reference to, on account of, for, concerning PvA 8 (pete), 17 (= ārabbha), 49 (ratanattayaŋ), 70 (maŋ), 146.
--kata allotted to, specified as, meant for (cp. odissa & odissaka) Vin I.237 (maŋsa); II.163; D I.166 = A I. 295 = Pug 55 (viz. bhikkhā); M I.77; KhA 222; J II. 262, 263 (bhatta).
Uddissana (nt.) [fr. uddissa] dedication PvA 27, 80.

Uddīpanā (f.) [fr. ud + dīpeti] explanation, reasoning, argument Vism 27 (for ukkācanā). ete. see udrī°.
Uddeka [Sk. udreka, ud + ric] vomit, spouting out, eruption Vism 261 (where id. p. at KhA 61 reads uggāra); °ŋ dadāti to vomit Vin I.277.
Uddekanika (adj.) [uddeka + ana + ika] spouting, ejecting M II.39 (maṇika; perhaps better to be read with v. l. as udañjanika = udañcanika fit for drawing up water).
Uddesa [fr. uddisati] -- 1. pointing out, setting forth, proposition, exposition, indication, programme M III.223 (u.
uddiṭṭha), 239; S IV.299; SnA 422. -- 2. explanation S V.110 sq.; sa--uddesa (adj.) with (the necessary) expln., point by point, in detail, D I.13, 81; III.111; A III.418; It 99; Nd2 6171. -- 3. samaṇuddesa one marked as a Samaṇa, a novice (cp. sāmaṇera) D I.151; M III.128; A IV.343; uddesa--bhatta special or specified food Vin I.58 = 96, cp. II.175, propounding, recitation, repetition Vin I.50 = II.228 (uddesena paripucchāya ovādena by recitation, questioning & advice); II.219 (°ŋ dadāti to hold a recitation + paripucchaŋ d); A IV.114 (+ paripucchā); V.50 sq. (pañho, u. veyyākaraṇaŋ); Nd2 3852 (+ paripucchā); J I.116; Miln 257 (+paripucchā). ek'uddesa a single repetition Vin III.47; A III.67, 180; Miln 10, 18.
Uddesaka (adj.) [fr. uddesa] assigning, defining, determining, in bhatt° one who sorts out the food VvA 92.
Uddesika (adj. nt.) [fr. uddesa] -- 1. indicating, referring to, respecting, defining; (nt.) indication, definition D II. 100 (mam °bhikkhusangho); Miln 159 (id.); KhA 29. <-> Esp. as --° in phrase aṭṭha--vass' uddesika--kāla the time referring to (or indicating) the 8th year, i. e. at the age of 8 PvA 67; soḷasa--vass° M I.88; J I.456; VvA 259. In the same application padesika (q. v.). -- 2. memorial J IV.228 (cetiya).
Uddehaka (adj.) [fr. ud + dih, see deha] "bubbling up", only adv. °ŋ in cpd. pheṇ° (paccamāna) boiling) under production of scum (foam) M III.167; A I.141; J III.46; Miln 357.
Uddosita [Derivation uncertain. Cp. Müller P. Gr. 42] shed, stable (?) Vin I.140; II.278; III.200; IV.223.
Uddha (adj.) [possibly a combn. of ad̤d̤ha2 & uddhaŋ; or should we read ad̤d̤h° or vud̤d̤h°?] in phrase uddhehi vatthehi in
rich, lofty clothes J IV.154 (of a devatā; passage may be corrupt).
(indecl.) [nt. of adj. *uddha = Sk. ūrdhva high; to Idg. *ared(h) as in Lat. arduus steep, or *ured as in Sk. vardhate to raise, Gr. o)rqo/s straight] high up, on top, above (adv. & prep.). -- On uddhaŋ in spatial, temporal, ethical & psychological application see in detail Nd2 155. -- I. (adv.). -- A. (of space) up, aloft, on top, above (opp. adho) Vin III.121; KhA 248 (= upari). -- In contrast with adho (above > below) D I.23, 153, 251; Vism 176 (u. adho tiriyaŋ expld.); DA I.98 (see also adho). -- Esp. with ref. to the points of the compass as "in zenith" (opp. adho "in nadir"), e. g. at D I.222 ("straight up"); It 120; J I.20. <-> B. (of time) in future, ahead, hence Sn 894; Nd1 303 (u. vuccati anāgataŋ). -- II. (prep. with abl. & instr.). <-> A. (of space) in phrase uddhaŋ pādatalā adho kesamatthakā (above the soles & below the scalp) D II. 293, 294; III.104; A III.323; V.109. -- B. (of time) after, hence Pv I.1012 (u. catūhi māsehi after 4 months = catunnaŋ māsānaŋ upari PvA 52); PvA 147 (sattahi vassa satehi u., meaning here 700 years ago, cp. ito in similar application, meaning both past & future), 148 (sattāhato u. after a week; uttari v. l. BB.). -- In cpds. uddha° & uddhaŋ° (see below). The reading udhogalaŋ at PvA 104 is to corrected to adho°. -- III. Note (cp. Trenckner, Notes 60). In certain cases we find ubbhaŋ for uddhaŋ. Notice the foll.: ubbhaŋ yojanaŋ uggato J V.269; ubbhaṭṭhako hoti "standing erect" D I.167; M I.78; ubbhamukhu "mouth (face) upwards", turned upwards S III.238; Miln 122.
(1) uddha° in: --gāmin going upwards S V.370 sq. cchiddaka (--vātapānā) (windows) having openings above DhA I.211. --pāda heels upwards either with adhosira (head down) A IV.133, or avansira Vv 5225 (v. l.); J I. 233. --mukha turned upwards, adv. °ā upwards or backwards (of a river) Miln 295 (Gangā u. sandati; in same context ubbha° Miln 122). --lomin

"having hair on the upper side", a kind of couch or bed (or rug on a couch) Vin I.192 = II.163, 169. So is prob. to be read for uddalomī (q. v.). --virecana action of an emetic (lit. throwing up) (opp. adho--virecana of a purgative) D I.12 (= uddhaŋ dosānaŋ nīharaṇaŋ DA I.98); DhA III.126; SnA 86. --suddha clean on top Vin II.152. -- (2) uddhaŋ° in: --āghātanika an after--deather, a teacher who maintains that the soul exists after death D I.31, cp. DA I.119. --pāda feet up (& head down) Vv 5225 (v. l. uddha°). --bhāgiya belonging to the upper part (opp. oram°): see saŋyojana. --virecana v. l. BB. at SnA 86 for uddha°. --sara(ŋ) (adv.) with raised or lofty voice, lit. "sounding high" Sn 901, see Nd1 315. --sota (adj.) one who is going upwards in the stream of life [cp. BSk. ūrdhvasrotaḥ Mahāvy § 46] D III.237; S V.69, 201, 205, 237, 285, 314, 378; A I.233; II.134; IV.14 sq., 73 sq., 146, 380; V.120; Dh 218; Th II.12; Pug 17; Nett 190; DhA III.289; lit. up--stream at J III.371.
Uddhaŋsati [ud + dhaŋsati, in lit. meaning of dhvaŋs, see dhaŋsati] to fly out or up (of dust) Vv 784 na tatthɔ uddhaŋsati rajo; expld. by uggacchati VvA 304. -- pp. uddhasta (q. v.).
Uddhagga (adj.) [uddha + agga] -- 1. standing on end (lit. with raised point). bristling, of the hair of a Mahāpurisa D II.18 = III.144, 154. -- 2. prominent, conspicuous J IV.345 (°rājin having prominent stripes, of a lion). <-> 3. pointing upwards (of the lower teeth, opp. adhagga point--downwards) J V.156 (= heṭṭhima--danta C.). <-> 4. lofty, beneficial (of gifts) A II.68 (dakkhiṇā); III.46 (id.) see also uddhaggika.
Uddhaggika (adj.) [cp. uddhagga) aiming at or resulting in a lofty end, promoting spiritual welfare, beneficial (of gifts) D I.51 = III.66; S I.90; A III.259; DA I.158.
Uddhacca (nt.) [substantivised ger. of ud--dharati, ud + dhṛ, cp. uddhaṭa & uddhata. The BSk. auddhatya shows a
strange distortion. BSk. uddhava seems to be also a substitute for uddhacca] over--balancing, agitation, excitement, distraction, flurry (see on meaning Dialogues I.82; Dhs trsln. 119; Cpd. 18, 45, 83). A I.256, 282; III.375, 421, 449; IV.87; V.142, 145, 148; D III.234; S V.277 sq.; DhSA 260; SnA 492 (in sense of "haughtiness"? for Sn 702 uṇṇata); Nd1 220, 501; Ps I.81, 83; II.9, 97 sq.; 119, 142, 145, 169, 176; Pug 18, 59; Dhs 427, 429 (cittassa), 1159, 1229, 1426, 1482; Vbh 168, 369, 372, 377; Vism 137, 469 (= uddhata--bhāva); Sdhp 459. Together with kukkucca "flurry or worry" u. is enumd. as the 4th of the 5th nīvaraṇa's and as the 9th of the 10 saŋyojana's (q. v.), e. g. at D I.71, 246; III.49, 234, 269, 278; S I.99; A I.3; III.16; V.30; Nd2 379; Dhs 1486.
Uddhaja (adj.) [uddhaŋ + ja] upright, honest M I.386 (v. l. for pannadhaja).
Uddhaṭa [pp. of uddharati2; see also uddhata, uddhita & uddhacca] -- 1. pulled out J II.26. -- 2. pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, in phrase° dāṭha with its fangs removed (of a snake) J I.505; II.259; VI.6. -- 3. cut off or out Miln 231 (uddhaṭ--uddhaṭe ālope whenever a piece is cut off). -- 4. drawn out, lifted out, raised J I.143; sass°kāle at the time of lifting the corn; V.49 (°paŋsu). Cp. uddhaṭa--bīja castrated J II.237.
Uddhata [pp. of uddharati1; as to its relation to uddhaṭa see remarks under uddhacca]. -- 1. lifted up, raised, risen, high
(of the sun, only in this special phrase u. aruṇo) Vin II.236; Ud 27 (vv. ll. uggata & uddhasta). <->
2. unbalanced, disturbed, agitated, shaken S I.61 (+ unnaḷa "muddled in mind & puffed up" trsl.), 204 (id.) V.112 (līnaŋ cittaŋ uddhataŋ c.), 114 = Vism 133, 269; A II.23; III.391; V.93 sq., 142, 163; It 72; Th 2, 77 (so read with v. l., T. has uddhaṭa; ThA 80 explns. as nānɔ ārammaṇe vikkhitta--citta asamāhita); Nd2 433 (+ avūpasanta--citto); Pug 35 (= uddhaccena samannāgata Pug A 217). --an° well balanced, not shaken, calm, subdued M I.470; A II.211; V.93 sq., 104; Sn 850 (= uddhaccavirahita
SnA 549); Dh 363 (= nibbutacitto DhA IV.93); J V.203; Vv 648. -- See also ubbhata.
Uddhana (nt.) [*ud--dhvana, fr. ud + dhvan instead of dhmā, for uddhamana (*uddhmāna Sk.), see dhamati] an oven J I.33, 68, 71, 346; II.133, 277; III.178, 425; V.385, 471; II.218 (kammār°), 574; Sn p. 105; Miln 118, 259; Vism 171, 254; DhA I.52, 224; II.3; III.219 (°panti); IV.176.
Uddhamma [ud + dhamma] false doctrine Dpvs V.19.

Uddharaṇa (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddharati] -- 1. taking up, lifting, raising Miln 307 (sass°--samaya the time of gathering the
corn; to uddharati 1. but cp. in same meaning uddhaṭa from uddharati 2). DA I.192. -- 2. pulling or drawing out (cp. uddharati 2) Vin III.29. See also ubbahati2.
Uddharati [ud + dharate of dhṛ] -- 1. (in this meaning confused with ubbharati from bṛh, cp. interchange of ddh & bbh
in uddha: ubbha, possibly also with bṛh: see abbahati and cp. ubbahati1). (a) to raise, rise, lift up; hence: to raise too much, overbalance, shake etc.: see pp. uddhata (*udbhṛta) & cp. uddhacca & uddharaṇa. -- (b) to take up, lift, to remove, take away D I.135 (baliŋ uddhareyya raise a tax); M I.306 (hiyaŋ); J I.193 (aor. poet. udaddhari = uddharitvā kad̤d̤hitvā pavaṭṭesi C.); VvA 157. -- Caus. uddharāpeti Vin II.180, 181; J VI.95. -- 2. to pull out, draw out (syn. with abbahati, q. v. for comparison) D I. 77 (ahiŋ karaṇd̤ā uddhareyya, further on ahi k. ubbhato) PvA 115 (= abbahati); imper. uddharatha J II.95 (for abbaha); Dh 327 (attānaŋ duggā); aor. uddhari J III.190 (ankena); cond. uddhare Th 1, 756; ger. uddharitvā D I.234; Nd1 419; SnA 567; DhA IV.26; PvA 139, & (poet.) uddhatvā J IV.406 (cakkhūni, so read for T. laddhatvañ cakkhūni = akkhīni uddharitvā C.). -- pp. uddhaṭa & ubbhata.
Uddharin īn an° īn an° Sn 952 see under niṭṭhurin. Uddhasetā see uddhasta.
Uddhasta [pp. of uddhaŋseti, see dhaŋsati & cp. anuddhaŋ seti] attacked, perhaps "spoilt" (smothered!) in combn. with pariyonaddha (covered) at A I.202 (T. uddhaseta, expld. by upari dhaŋsita C.); II.211 (vv. ll. uddhasotā for °etā & uddhaŋso). -- Registered with an° as anuddhasta in Index vol. to A, should however be read as anuddhasta (q. v.). Cp. also viddhasta.
in Vin.; e. g. II.255, cp. 256 where ubbhata unterchanges with uddhāra) [fr. uddharati1] <-> 1. taking away, withdrawal, suspension, in kaṭhin° (q. v.) Vin I.255 sq.; III.262; IV.287; V.177 sq. -- 2. a tax, levy, debt, in phrase °ŋ sodheti (so read for sādheti loc. cit.) to clear up a debt J II.341; III.106; IV.45, 247. uddhāra--sodhana (v. l. sādh°) the clearance of a debt J II.341. -- 3. synopsis or abstract Dpvs V.37 (atth° of the meaning of the Vin.); SnA 237 (atth° + pad°).
Uddhālaka at J VI.530 is to be read uddālaka.
Uddhita [a by--form of uddhaṭa] pulled out, destroyed, extirpated, removed J VI.237 (°pphala = uddhaṭa--bīja C.).
Uddhunāti [ud + dhunāti] to shake VvA 279.
Uddhumāta (adj.) [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, risen (of flour) A I.140; Sn 200 (of a corpse); SnA 100 sq., 171; DA I.114. Cp. next.
Uddhumātaka (adj.) [prec. + ka] swollen, bloated, puffed up M I.88 (of a corpse; + vinīlaka); Vism 178, 193 (id.); J I.164 (udaraŋ °ŋ katvā), 420 (°nimitta appearance of being blown up); Miln 332; DhA I.307. See also subha & asubha.
--saññā the idea of a bloated corpse A II.17; Dhs 263; Miln 331; cp. Dhs trsln. 69. Uddhumātatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. uddhumāta] swollen condition Vism 178.
Uddhumāyati [ud + dhmā, see dhamati & remarks on uddhacca] to be blown up, to swell up, rise; aor. °āyi J III.26; VvA 76; ger. °ājitvā J II.18; DhA I.126. -- pp. uddhumāta & °āyita (q. v.).
Uddhumāyana (nt.) [fr. uddhumāyati] puffing, blowing or swelling up J IV.37.
Uddhumāyika (adj.) [cp. uddhumāyita] like blowing or swelling up, of blown--up appearance M I.142 sq. Uddhumāyita [pp. of uddhumāyati] swollen, bloated, puffed up VvA 218.

Udrabhati [? doubtful in form & etym.] to eat M I.306 (upacikā bījaŋ na udrabheyyuŋ; vv. ll. on p. 555: udrah°, udah°, udāh°, uddhah°, uṭṭhah°; udraheyyun ti khādeyyuŋ C. (udrabhāsane, Dhātum.)). -- Note. The Dhātupāṭha, 212, and the Dhātu--mañjūsā, 311, explain udrabha by adane, eating.
(--°) [perhaps a bastard form of uddaya = udaya yielding etc. The BSk. usually renders P. dd by dr. If so, then equal to adaya & uddaya1] coming forth, result, consequence. Usually in foll. two phrases: dukkh° (yielding pain) & sukh° (giving pleasure); e. g. as dukkh° at M I 415; J IV.398; V.119 (v. l. °indriya); Pv I.1110 (so read for T. °andriya, cp. undriyati as v. l. for udāyati); Ps II.79 (kammaŋ); as sukh° at J V.389 (v. l. °indriya); DhA II.47 (°uddaya). Both dukkh° & sukh° at Ps I.80. Besides these in foll. combns.: kaṭuk° causing bitterness J V.241; sa° with (good or evil) consequences S II.29; M I.271.
[cp. Sk. ud dīryate, Pass of ud + dṛ, dṛṇōti, and P. darati & dalati; see also avadīyati which may be a Sanskritised oddīyati for uddīyati] to burst, split open, break, fall to pieces Vin I.148 (vihāro udriyati); II 174 (id); IV.254 (i); D I.96 (°īyissati = bhijjhissati DA I 96, so read for udāyati); S I 113, 119.
Udrīyana & Uddīyana (nt.) [fr. udrīyati] breaking or splitting open, bursting J I.72; DhA II.7 (°sadda), 100 (paṭhavī--uddīyana--sadda; vv. ll. uddri°, udri°).
Undura [etym ?] a rat Vin I.209; II.148, 152; III.151; J I.120; Miln 23, 363. Spelt undūra at Vism 62.
Unna [pp. of ud, unatti & undati, see udaka] in phrase pīti--vegenɔunna "bubbling up with the excitement of joy", overflowing with joy Mhvs 19, 29 (expld. by uggatacitta i. e. lofty, exalted C.). -- It may however be better & more in keeping with Pāli word--formation as well as with meaning & interpretation to explain the word as ud + na, taking °na as abs. (base)--form of nam, thus lit. "bent up", i. e. raised, high, in meaning of unnata. Cp. the exactly similar formation, use & meaning of ninna = ninnata. Thus unna / ninna would correspond to unnata / ninnata.
Unnaka [etym.?] a species of perfume J VI 537 (gloss kuṭantaja).
Unnangala (adj.) [ud + nangala, on meaning of ud in this case see ud] in phrase °ŋ karoti, according to Morris, J P T S
1887, 120 "to make an up--ploughing, to turn up etc.", but more aptly with C. on J VI.328 to make
"out--plough" (not "up--plough") in sense of out--of--work, i. e. to make the people put their ploughs (or work in general) away and prepare for a festival; to take a holiday. A typical "Jātaka"--phrase; J I.228; II.296, 367; III. 129, 414; IV.355; VI.328; DhA III.10.
Unnata [pp. of unnamati. Besides this form we find uṇṇata in fig. special meaning, q. v.] raised, high, lofty, in high situation (opp. oṇata) Pv IV.66 (= sāmin PvA 262); J I.71; II369; VI 487; Miln 146, 387; DA I.45 See also unnaḷa.
Unnati (f) [fr. unnamati; cp. uṇṇati] rising, lifting up, elevation Miln 387 (°avanati).
Unnadati [ud + nadati] to resound, shout out, roar J I.110; II 90; III.271, 325; Miln 18; aor. unnadi J I 74; Miln 13. --
Caus. unnādeti (q. v.).
Unnama [fr ud + nam; cp. also uṇṇama in fig. meaning] rising ground, elevation, plateau Kh VII.7 = Pv I.57 (= thala
unnata--padesa PvA 29); Miln 349; DA I.154.
Unnamati [ud + namati, see uṇṇamati in fig. meaning] to rise up, ascend Miln 117 (oṇamati +); Vism 306. -- Caus.
unnāmeti (q. v.). -- pp. unnara & uṇṇata (q. v.).
Unnala & Unnaḷa (adj.) [Bdhgh. has ud + nala; but it is either a dissimilated form for *ullala (n > l change freq., cp.
P. nangala > lāngala; nalāṭa > lalaṭa) from ud + lal to sport, thus meaning "sporting, sporty, wild" etc.; or (still more likely)

with Kern, Toev. s. v. a dial. form of unnata P. uṇṇata, although the P. Commentators never thought of that. Cp. with this the BSk. unnata in same stock phrase uddhata unnata capala M Vastu I.305, and the Marathic Prk. mula = Sk. mṛta, Pischel, Gr. § 244. To these may be added P. celakedu > cetakedu J VI.538] showing off, insolent, arrogant, proud, haughty, in phrase uddhata unnaḷa capala M I.32; S I.61 = 204 (trsld. as "muddled in mind, puffed up, vain", expld. as uggata--nala uddhaṭa--tuccha--māna K. S. 318); A I.70, 266; II.26; III 199, 355, 391; It 113 (+ asamāhita); Dh 292 (+ pamatta; expld. as "māna--naḷaŋ ukkhipitvā caraṇena unnala" DhA III.452); Th 1, 634; Pug 35 (= uggatanaḷo tuccha--mānaŋ ukkhipitvā ti attho PugA 217).
Unnahanā (f.) [ud + nah, see nayhati] flattering, tying or pushing oneself on to somebody, begging Vism 27.
Unnāda [fr. ud + nad] shout, shouting J II 405.
Unnādin (adj.) [fr. ud + nad] shouting out; resounding, noisy, loud, tumultuous Vin III.336; D I.95, 143, 178; J II.216.
Unnādeti [Caus. of unnadati] to make resound J I.408 (paṭhaviŋ), II.34.
Unnāmin (adj) [ud + nam in Caus. form] raising or rising; in combn. with ninnāmin raised & bent, high & low A IV.237 (of cultivated land).
Unnāmeti (unn°) [Caus. of unnamati] to raise DhsA 5; written uṇṇameti (with a for ā before mutes & liquids) at Sn 206 (inf. uŋṇametave).
Upa -- [Vedic upa; Av. upa on, up; Gr. u(po/ under, u(pe/r over; Lat. sub fr. *(e)ks--upo; Goth. uf under & on; Ohg. ūf =
Ags. up = E. up; Oir. fo under. See also upari] prefix denoting nearness or close touch (cp. similarly ā), usually with the idea of approach from below or rest on top, on, upon, up, by. -- In compn. a upa is always contracted to upa, e. g. devūpaṭṭhāna, lokûpaga, puññûpatthambhita. -- Meanings: (1) (Rest): on upon, up --: °kiṇṇa covered over; °jīvati live on (cp. anu°); °tthambhita propped up, sup--ported; °cita heaped up, ac--cumulated; °dhāreti hold or take up; °nata bent on; °nissaya foundation; °nissita depending on etc. -- (2) (Aim): (out) up to (the speaker or hearer); cp. the meanings developed out of this as "higher, above" in upara, upari, upama = Lat. superus, supremus E. g. °kad̤d̤hati drag on to; °kappati come to, accrue; °kappana ad--ministering; °kāra service to; °kkhata administered; °gacchati go to, ap--proach (cp. upâtigacchati); °disati ad--vise; °dhāvati run up to: °nadati to sound out; °nikkhamati come out up to; °nisevita gone on to or after; °neti bring on to; etc. -- (3) (Nearness): close by, close to, near, "ad--"; e. g. °kaṇṇaka close to the ear; °cāra ap--plication; °ṭṭhāna at--tending; ṭṭhita ap--proached; °tiṭṭhati stand by, look after; °dduta urged; °nāmeti place close to; °nibandhati tie close to; °nisīdati sit close to or down by. -- (4) (Intensive use): quite, altogether, "up"; e. g. °antika quite near; °chindati cut up. -- (5) (Diminutive use as in Lat. subabsurdus; Gr. u(po/leukos whitish; Oir. fo--dord; Cymr. go--durdd murmur): nearly, about, somewhat, a little, secondary, by --, miniature, made after the style of, e. g. °ad̤d̤ha about half; °kacchaka like a little hollow; °kaṇd̤akin (= °paṇd̤ukin? whitish); °deva a minor god; °nibha somewhat similar to; °nila bluish; upapurohita minor priest; uparajja viceroyalty; upalohitaka, uparopa; °vana a little forest. etc. Note. The nearest semantie affinity of upa is ā°.
Upaka (--°) [for °upaga] found only in combn. kulûpaka where second k stands for g. through assimilation with first k.
Only with ref. to a bhikkhu = one who frequents a certain family (for the purpose of getting alms), a family friend, associate Vin I.192, 208; III.84; S II.200 sq.; A III.258 sq.; Nd2 3851; Pv III.85; PvA 266. -- f. kulûpikā (bhikkhunī) Vin II.268; IV.66. -- Sporadic in gayhūpaka (for °ûpaga) at J IV.219.
Upakaccha (°--) [upa + kacchā2] only in combn. with °antare lit. "in between the hips or loins or arm--pits", in 3 phrases (cp. Kern, Toev. II.140 s. v.), viz. upakacchantare katvā taking (it) between the legs J I.63, 425, khipitvā throwing (it) into the armpits J V.211 & ṭhapetvā id. J V.46.
Upakacchaka [upa + kacchā + ka, cp. Sk. upakakṣa in diff. meaning] (1) [= upa + kaccha1 + ka] like an enclosure,
adj. in the form of a hollow or a shelter J I.158. (2) [= upa + kacchā2 + ka] like the armpit, a hollow, usually the armpit, but

occasionally it seems to be applied to the hip or waist Vin III.39; IV.260 (pudendum muliebre); Miln 293; J V.437 (= kaccha2).
Upakaṭṭha (adj.) [pp. of upa + karś to draw up or near to] approaehing, near J IV.213 (yāva upakaṭṭha--majjhantikā till nearly noon). Usually in foll. two phrases: upakaṭṭhe kāle when the time was near, i. e. at the approach of meal time Vin IV.175; VvA 6, 294; and upakaṭṭhāya vassûpanāyikāya as Lent was approaching Vin I.253; PvA 42; VvA 44. Cp. vūpakaṭṭha. -- loc. upakaṭṭhe as adv. or prep. "near, in the neighbourhood of" Nd2 639 (= santike); Dāvs V.41 (so read for upakaṇṭhe).
Upakad̤d̤hati [upa + kad̤d̤hati, cp. upakaṭṭha] to drag or pull on to (w. dat.), or down to D I.180 (+ apakad̤d̤hati); III.127 (id.); M I.365; S I.49; II.99; Dh 311 (nirayāya = niraye nibbattapeti DhA III.484).
Upakaṇṭha at Dāvs V.41 is to be corrected to upakaṭṭha. Upakaṇd̤akin (Pv II.113) see under uppaṇd̤ukin.
Upakaṇṇa (°--) [upa + kaṇṇa] lit. (spot) near the ear, only in oblique cases or in der. °ka (q. v.) Th 1, 200 (upakannamhi close to the ear, under the ear).
Upakannaka (adj.) [upa + kaṇṇa + ka) by the ear, being at or on the ear of somebody, only in loc. as adv. upakaṇṇake secretly Vin I.237; II.99; IV.20, 271; S I.86; A III.57; SnA 186; and in cpd. °jappin one who whispers into the ear (of another), spreader of reports A III. 136. Cp. kaṇṇajappaka & kaṇṇajappana.
Upakappati [upa + kappati] intrs.) to be beneficial to (w. dat.), to serve, to accrue S I.85; Pv I.44 (= nippajjati PvA 19); I.57 (petānaŋ); I.104 (= viniyujjati PvA 49); J V.350; PvA 8, 29 (petānaŋ), 27 (id.), 241; Sdhp 501, 504.
Upakappana (nt.) [fr. upakappati] profit PvA 29 (dān°), 49 (an°). Upakappanaka (adj.) [fr. upakappana] profitable J I.398; DhA II.133.
Upakaraṇa (nt.) [fr. upa + kṛ] help, service, support; means of existence, livelihood D II.340; A II.86; J I.7; PvA 60 (commodities), 133 (°manussa, adj. suitable, fit); Sdhp 69. In general any instrument or means of achieving a purpose, viz. apparatus of a ship J IV.165; tunnavaya° a weaver's outfit J II.364; dabb° fit to be used as wood Vism 120; dān° materials for a gift PvA 105 (so read & cp. upakkhaṭa); nahān° bathing requisites VvA 248; vitt° luxuries A V.264 sq., 283, 290 sq.; PvA 71.
Upakaroti [upa + karoti] to do a service, serve, help, support Th 2, 89 (aor. upakāsiŋ = anugaṇhiŋ santappesiŋ ThA 88). -- pp. upakkhaṭa (q. v.).
Upakāra [fr. upa + kṛ, cp. upakaraṇa] service, help, benefit, obligation, favour D III.187 sq.; VvA 68; PvA 8, 18 (°āya
hoti is good for); Sdhp 283, 447, 530. <-> bahûpakāra (adj.) of great help, very serviceable or helpful S IV.295; PvA 114. upakāraŋ karoti to do a favour, to oblige PvA 42, 88, 159 (kata); katûpakāra one to whom a service has been rendered PvA 116.
--āvaha useful, serviceable, doing good PvA 86.
Upakāraka (adj.) [fr. upakāra] serviceable, helping, effective J V.99; Vism 534. -- f. upakārikā 1. benefactress, helper J III.437. -- 2. fortification (strengthening of the defence) on a city wall D I.105, see DA I.274 & cp. parikkhāra; M I.86 (= Nd2 1996). -- 3. (philosophy) = cause (that which is an aid in the persistence or happening of any given thing) Tikapaṭṭhāna I.11
Upakārin (adj.--n.) [fr. upakāra; cp. ASk. upakārin Jtm. 3142] a benefactor J III.11; DA I.187; Sdhp 540, 546.

Upakiṇṇa [pp. of upakirati] strewn over with (--°), covered Vv 351 (rucak°, so read for rājak°; expld by okiṇṇa VvA 160). Upakiriyā (f.) [fr. upa + kr] implement, ornament J V.408.
Upakūjati [upa + kūjati] to sing to (of birds) J IV.296 (kūjantaŋ u. = replies w. song to the singing). -- pp. upakūjita (q. v.).
Upakūjita (--°) [pp. of upakūjati] resounding, filled with the hum or song of (birds) J IV.359; PvA 154.
Upakūla [upa + kūla] embankment, a river's bank, riverside J VI.26 (rukkhɔûpakūlaje the trees sprung up at its bank).
Upakūlita [derivation uncertain] used of the nose in old age Th 2, 258 (jarāya paṭisedhikā viya says the commentary.
Morris J.P.T.S. 1884, 74 trsls. obstructed; Mrs. Rh. D. in "Sisters" takes it for upakūḷita and trsls. seared and shrivelled. So also Ed. Müller J R A S. 1919. 538. This is probably right; but Oldenberg, Pischel and Hardy all read upakūlita.
Upakūḷita [pp. of kūd̤, a variant of kuth, kvathati] singed, boiled, roasted J I.405 ("half--roasted" = ad̤d̤hajjhāmaka C.). See also upakūsita.
Upakūsita at J II.134 is perhaps faulty for °kūḷita, which is suggested by C. expln. "kukkule jhāmo" and also by v. l. °kuṭhita (for kuṭṭhita boiled, sweltering, hot). The variant (gloss) °kūjita may have the same origin, viz. °kūḷita, was however interpreted (v. l. BB.) by °kupita (meaning "shaken, disturbed by fire").
Upakka see uppakka.
Upakkanta [pp. of upakkamati] 1. attacked by (--°) Miln 112. -- 2. attacking, intriguing or plotting against (loc.) DA I.140.
Upakkama [fr. upa + kram] (1) lit. (a) going to, nearing, approach (--°) VvA 72. -- (b) attack Vin II.195; Miln 157; DA
I.69, 71. -- (2) applied (a) in general: doing, acting, undertaking, act S I.152 = Sn p. 126. -- (b) in special: ways, means, i. e. either good of helpful means, expedient, remedy Sn 575; Miln 151, 152; or bad or unfair means, treachery, plotting Th 1, 143; J IV.115 (punishment); Miln 135, 176.
Upakkamati [upa + kamati of kram] to go on to, i e. (1) to attack M I.86 = Ud 71. -- (2) to undertake Vin III.110, 111. -- (3) to begin Vin IV.316; DA I.318.
Upakkamana (nt.) [fr. upa + kram] going near to, attacking J IV.12.
Upakkitaka [fr. upa + krī to buy] a buyer, hawker, dealer combd. with bhataka DhA I.119 = Ud 23 (C. expls. by "yo
kahāpaṇâdīhi kiñci kināti so upakkitako ti vuccati"); Ps II.196 (? T. upakkhittaka).
Upakkiliṭṭha [pp. of upa + klid or kliś, cp. kilesa & next] soiled, stained, depraved, impure S I.179; A I.207 (citta);
Vism 13.
Upakkilesa [fr. upa + kliś] anything that spoils or obstructs, a minor stain, impurity, defilement, depravity, Vin II.295
(cp. SnA 487 & VvA 134 & see abbha); M I.36, 91; D III.42 sq., 49 sq., 201; S V.92 sq. (pañca cittassa upakkilesā), 108, 115;
A I.10 (āgantuka), 207 (cittassa), 253 (oḷārika etc.); II.53 (candima--suriyānaŋ samaṇa--brāhmaṇānaŋ), 67; III.16 (jātarūpassa, cittassa), 386 sq.; IV.177 (vigatā); V.195; Ps I.164 (eighteen); Pug 60; Dhs 1059, 1136; Nett 86 sq., 94, 114 sq.; Sdhp 216, 225 (as upaklesa). Ten stains at Vism 633.

Upakkuṭṭha [pp. of upakkosati] blamed, reproached, censured, faulty D I.113 (an°); Sn p. 115 (id.); J III.523; DA I.211.
Upakkosa [fr. upa + kruś] censure, reproach J VI.489.
Upakkosati [upa + kosati] to scold, reprove, blame D I. 161; J III.436, 523; IV.81, 317, 409.
Upakkhaṭa & °ta [pp. of upakaroti] done as a favour or service, given, prepared, administered D I.127 (= sajjita DA I.294); Pv II.84 (= sajjita PvA 107); J VI.139; Miln 156.
Upakkhalati [upa + khalati] to stumble, trip D II.250; M II.209; A III.101; J III.433.
Upakkhalana (nt.) [fr. prec.] stumbling, tripping Vism 500.
Upakkhittaka at Ps II.196 see upakk°.
Upakhandha [upa + khandha] lit. upper (side of the) trunk, back, shoulder J IV.210 (= khandha C.).
Upaga (always as °ûpaga) (adj.) [upa + ga] -- 1. going to, getting to, reaching, in phrases kāy°, S II.24; ākāsɔānañcɔ āyatan° etc. Ps I.84; kāy° S II.24; brahmalok° Pv II.1319; yathākamm° D I.82. -- 2. coming into, experiencing, having, as vikappan° according to option Vin IV.283; phal° bearing fruit, & pupph° having flowers, in flower PvA 275. <-> 3. attached to, belonging to, being at J I.51 (hatth°); VvA 12 (id. + pādûpaga). -- 4. in phrase gayh° lit. "accessible to the grip", acquisition of property, theft J IV.219 (T. gayhûpaka); Miln 325; DhA II.29; PvA 4.
Upagacchati [upa + gacchati] -- 1. to come to, go to, approach, flow to (of water) D II.12; PvA 12 (vasanaṭṭhānaŋ), 29,
32 (vāsaŋ) 132; ger. °gantvā PvA 70 (attano santikaŋ), & °gamma S II.17, 20. -- 2. to undergo, go (in) to, to begin, undertake Sn 152 (diṭṭhiŋ anupagamma); J I.106 (vassaŋ); PvA 42 (id.); J I.200; niddaŋ upagacchati to drop off into sleep PvA 43 (aor. upagacchi, MSS. °gañchi), 105, 128. -- pp. upagata (q. v.).
Upagaṇhanā (f.) [abstr. of upa + gṛh] taking up, keeping up. meditating Miln 37. Upagaṇhāti [upa + gaṇhāti] to take up (for meditation) Miln 38.
Upagata [pp. of upagacchati] -- 1. gone to, come, approached (intrs.) Sn 708 (āsan° = nisinna SnA 495); PvA 77 (santikaŋ), 78, 79 (petalokaŋ), 123. -- 2. undergoing, coming or come under, overpowered, suffering Nd2 under asita (= ajjhupagata in same conn. at A V.187); Pv I.1110 (khuppipās°); PvA 60 (= abhibhūta).
Upagamana (nt.) [fr. upa + gam] approaching, going or coming to, undergoing, undertaking Vin II.97 (+ ajjhupag°); Nett 27; Vism 600; PvA 42 (vass°).
Upagamanaka (adj.) [fr. upagamana] going to, one who goes to (with acc.) PvA 168 (= °upaga).
Upagaḷita [pp. of upagaḷati] flowing out, spat or slobbered out J V.471 (°khelo; v. l. paggharita).
Upagāmin (adj.) [fr. upa + gam, cp. °upaga] going to, undergoing, experiencing A II.6 (jāti jar°).
Upagūhati [upa + gūhati] to embrace J I.346, 349; II.424; III.437; V.157, 328, 384. -- ger. upaguyha J VI.300. Upagghāta [pp. of next] scented, smelled, kissed J VI.543 (C. sīsamhi upasinghita).
Upagghāyati [upa + ghrā, see ghāyati1] to smell at, in sense of "to kiss" J V.328 (also inf. upagghātuŋ).

Upaghaṭṭita [pp. of upaghaṭṭeti] knocked or knocking against J I.26 (V.179).
Upaghāta [fr. upa + (g)han, cp. ghāta] hurting, injuring, injury M III.237; S II.218; IV.323 sq.; A III.173; Th 1, 583; Miln
274, 307, 347; DA I.273. an° not hurting others, kindness Dh 185. Upaghātana (nt.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting DhA III.237 (an°). Upaghātika (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] injuring, offending Vin II.13. Upaghātin (adj.) [fr. upaghāta] hurting, injuring J III.523.
Upacaya [fr. upa + ci, cp. caya & ācaya] heaping up, gathering, accumulation, heap. As t.t. with ref. to kamma "conservation", with ref. to body & form "integration". (See discussion & defin. at Cpd. 253; Dhs trsl. 195). <-> D I.76 (= odana = kummāsɔûpacayo, see under kāya); Dhs 582, 642 (rūpassa u. = āyatanānaŋ ācayo), 864; Vbh 147, 151 sq.; Kvu 520; Nett 113; Vism 449; DA I.220; PvA 198 (but v. l. paccayassa preferable).
Upacarati [upa + carati] to deal with, handle, use J VI. 180. -- pp. upaciṇṇa & upacarita (q. v.). Upacarita [pp. of upacarati] practised, served, enacted, performed Miln 359, 360.
Upacāra [fr. upa + car] -- 1. approach, access Vin II.120, 152; IV.304; J I.83, 172; DhsA 328 (phal°). -- 2. habit, practice, conduct Vin II.20 (dassan°); SnA 140 (id.); J III.280. -- 3. way, means application, use of (esp. of spells etc.) J III.280 (mantassa); VI.180; Miln 153, 154 (dur° an evil spell); VvA 127 (gram. t.t. kāraṇ°). -- 4. entrance, access, i. e. immediate vicinity or neighbourhood of (--°) J IV.182 (nagar°); usually as gām° Vin I.109; III.46; IV.230; KhA 77; SnA 83, 179. -- 5. attention, attendance Vin IV.272; J VI.180; Miln 154. -- 6. civility, polite behaviour J II.56; VI.102. -- 7. On upacāra as philos, t.t. and its relation to appanā see Dhs trsln. 53, 54; Cpd. 55; Mystic p. XI. Thus used of samādhi (neighbourhood--, or access--concentration, distinguishing it from appanā--samādhi) at Vism 85, 126, 144 and passim.
Upacikā (f.) [connected with Sk. upadīkā, although the relation is not quite clear. Attempts at explns. by Trencker Notes
62 (*utpādikā > upatikā > upacikā) & Kern, Toev. p. 102 (upacikā = Vedic upajīka, this fr. upajihikā for °dihikā, vv. ll. upadehihā & upadīkā). It may however be a direct der. from upa + ci, thus meaning "making heaps, a builder"] the termite or white ant Vin II.113, 148, 152; III.151; M I.306; J III.320; IV.331; Miln 363, 392; Vism 62, DhA II.25; III.15.
Upaciṇṇa [pp. of upacarati] used, frequented, known (as value) J VI.180.
Upacita [pp. of upacināti] -- 1. heaped up, accumulated, collected, produced (usually of puñña merit, & kamma karma)
Sn 697; KhA 132; SnA 492; VvA 7, 271, 342; PvA 30, 150. -- 2. built up, conserved (of the body) Miln 232; DA I.220. Upacitatta (nt.) [abstr. fr. upacita] storing up, accumulation Dhs 431.
Upacināti [upa + ci] -- 1. to collect, heap up, accumulate (puññaŋ or pāpaŋ) VvA 254; PvA 8, 241. -- 2. to concentrate, pay attention Th 1, 199 (C. upacetuŋ for ocetuŋ T.); J V.339 (= oloketi). -- Pass. upaciyyati Th 1, 807. -- pp. upacita (q. v.).
(q. v.) "flying up" (= uppatitvā PvA 103) at Th 2, 248 (= ThA 205, where v. l. and gloss upecca & upacca, expld. by upanetvā), as well as at Pv II.717 (= PvA 103 where read upaccha; & gloss upacca & upecca).
Upaccagā [upa + ati + agā of gam] 3rd sg. pret. of upâtigacchati (q. v.) to escape, pass, go by; to overcome Sn 333 (mā upaccagā = mā atikkami SnA 339) = Th 2, 5 (= mā atikkami ThA 12); Sn 636, 641, 827 (= accagā atikkanta Nd1 167); Dh 315, 412, 417 (= atikkanta DhA IV.225); Bu II.43. -- pl. upaccaguŋ S I.35; A III.311.

Upaccati (?) in phrase "akkhīni upacciŋsu" at J VI.187 is probably faulty for apaciyiŋsu aor. of apaciyyati, Pass. of apacināti (cp. upaciyyati > upacināti) "the eyes failed", lost power, went bad; cp. apacaya falling off, diminution. If not this reading we should suggest upacchijjiŋsu from upacchindati "were destroyed", which however is not quite the sense wanted.
Upacchindati [upa + chindati] to break up or off, to destroy, interrupt, to stop Sn 972 (pot. °chinde); J IV. 127; Nd1 502; ThA 267; PvA 31 (kulavaŋso upacchijji aor. pass.); Vism 164, 676 (bhavangaŋ).
Upacchinna [pp. of upacchindati] cut off, interrupted J I. 477; Miln 306.
Upacchubhati [upa + chubhati from kṣubh or chubh, see chuddha, khobha, nicchubhati, nicchodeti] to throw at M
I.364 (vv. ll. °chumbh°, °cubh°).
Upaccheda [fr. upa + chid] breaking or cutting off, destruction, stoppage, interruption M I.245, 327 (pāṇ° murder); J
I.67; Miln 134 (paveṇ° break of tradition) PvA 82 (kulavaŋs°); DhA I.152 (āhār °ŋ karoti to prevent fr. taking food); DA I.136, 159.
Upacchedaka (adj.--n.) [fr. upaccheda] destroying, breaking off, stopping, interrupting J I.418 (vacan°); IV.357; DA I.69 (jīvitɔ indriy°); VvA 72 (id.).
Upajānāti [upa + jānāti] to learn, acquire or have knowledge of (w. gen. or instr.), to know Vin I.272 (saŋyamassa);
II.181 (gharāvāsɔatthena); A I.50 (dvinnaŋ dhammānaŋ upaññāsin). -- fut. upaññissati (& upaññassati Sn 716) Sn 701, 716 (= upaññayissati kathayissati SnA 498); J V.215. -- pp. upaññāta (q. v.).
Upajīvati [upa + jīvati] to live on (w. acc.), to depend on, to live by somebody, to be supported by (acc.) D I.228; S I.217; Sn 612 sq.; Th 1, 943; J III.309, 338; IV.271 (= anujīvati); Pv II.950 (Ankuraŋ u. ti taŋ nissāya jīvanti PvA 134); Miln 231.
Upajīvika (adj.) [= upajīvin] Sdhp 501 (see next).
Upajīvin (--°) (adj.--n.) [fr. upa + jīv] living on, subsisting by A II.135 (phal°); Sn 217 (para--datt°), J I.227 (vohār°);
IV.380; Pug 51; Miln 160 (Satth°); VvA 141 (sipp°). f. upajīvinī in rūp° (itthi) a woman earning her living by her beauty (i. e. a courtesan) Miln 122; PvA 46; cp. kiliṭṭha--kamm° gaṇikā PvA 195.
Upajūta (nt.) [upa + jūta] stake at game J VI.192. Upajjha see next.
Upajjhāya [Vedic upādhyāya, upa + adhi + i, līt. "one who is gone close up to"] a spiritual teacher or preceptor, master. Often combd. with ācariya e. g. Vin I. 119; Nd1 350; the ācariya being only the deputy or substitute of the upajjhāya. Vin I.45, 53, 62, 120; IV. 130; S I.185; A II.66, 78; III.69; SnA 346; DhA II.93; PvA 55, 60, 230. -- A short form of upajjhāya is upajjha, found in the Vinaya, e. g. at Vin I.94; III.35; with f. upajjhā Vin IV.326.
Upaññāta [pp. of upajānāti] found out, learnt, known Vin I.40; J V.325, 368; A I.61.
Upaṭṭita [upa + aṭṭita, from ard, see aṭṭita] pained, terrified; overcome, overwhelmed J VI.82 (visavegena).
Upaṭṭhapeti & °ṭṭhāpeti [Caus. II. of upaṭṭhahati] 1. to provide, procure, get ready, put forth, give Vin II.210; D
II.19; M I.429; J I.266; IV.2; V.218; Pug 59, 68; Miln 15, 257, 366 (pānīyaŋ paribhojanīyaŋ), 397; DA I.270; Sdhp 356. -- 2. to cause to be present Vin I.45; S I.170; Pv IV.170. -- 3. to cause to be waited on or to be nursed A V.72 (gilānaŋ upaṭṭhātuŋ vā

upaṭṭhāpetuŋ vā). -- 4. to keep (a servant) for hire Vin II.267. <-> 5. to ordain Vin I.62, 83.
Upaṭṭhahati & °ṭṭhāti [upa + sthā, cp. upatiṭṭhati] 1 (trs.) to stand near or at hand (with acc.), to wait on, attend
on, serve, minister, to care for, look after, nurse (in sickness) Vin I.50, 302; IV.326; M III.25; S I.167; A III.94; V.72; Sn 82 = 481 (imper. °ṭṭhahassu); J I.67 (ppr. °ṭṭhahamāna), 262 (ppr. °ṭṭhahanto); IV.131; V.396; Dpvs II.16; PvA 19, 20. -- aor. upaṭṭhahi PvA 14, 42, 82. -- inf. upaṭṭhātuŋ A V.72; PvA 20. -- ger. upaṭṭhahitvā PvA 76. -- grd. upaṭṭhātabba Vin I.302;
PvA 20. -- pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.). -- 2. (intrs.) to stand out or forth, to appear, to arise, occur, to be present M I.104 sq.; A IV.32; J IV.203 (mante anupaṭṭhahante since the spell did not occur to him); V.207; Miln 64; ThA 258. <-> aor. upaṭṭhāsi J I.61; IV.3; PvA 42. -- Caus. I. upaṭṭheti; Caus. II. upaṭṭhapeti & °ṭṭhāpeti (q. v.). -- Pass. upaṭṭhīyati J IV.131 (ppr.
°ṭṭhiyamāna), & upaṭṭhahīyati A III.94 (ppr. °ṭṭhahiyamāna).
Upaṭṭhāka [fr. upa + sthā, cp. BSk. upasthāka M Vastu I.251, and upasthāyaka Divy 426; Av. Ś. I.214; II.85, 112.] a
servitor, personal attendant, servant, "famulus". Ānanda was the last u. of Gotama Buddha (see D I.206; Th 1, 1041 f.; ThA in Brethren loc. cit.; Vin I.179 (Sāgato u.), 194; II.186; III.66; IV.47; D I.150 (Nāgita); S III.113; A I.121; III.31, 189; J I 15, 100 (a merchant's); II.416; Pug 28; DhA II.93; VvA 149; PvA 211. -- agg° main follower, chief attendant D II.6; gilān° an attendant
in sickness, nurse Vin I.303; A I.26; sangh° one who looks after the community of Bhikkhus Vin I.216; A I.26; III.39. -- dupaṭṭhāka & supaṭṭhāka a bad (& good) attendant Vin I.302.
--kula a family entertaining (or ministering to) a thera or a bhikkhu, a family devoted to the service of (gen.) Vin I.83 (Sāriputtassa), 213; III.62, 66, 67; IV.283, 286; VvA 120.
Upaṭṭhāna (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] -- 1. attendance, waiting on, looking after, service, care, ministering A I.151, 225; Sn
138; J I.226, 237, 291; II.101; IV.138; VI.351. Ps I.107; II.7 sq., 28, 230; PvA 104, 145 (paccekabuddhassa), 176; VvA 75 (ther°); Sdhp 560. -- 2. worship, (divine) service D III.188 sq. (°ŋ gacchati); PvA 122. Buddh° attendance on a Buddha PvA 93; ThA 18. <-> 3. a state room J III.257.
--sambhāra means of catering, provisions PvA 20. --sālā hall for attendance, assembly room, chapel [cp. BSk.
upasthāna--śālā Divy 207] Vin I.49, 139; II.153, 208; III. 70 (at Vesālī); IV.15, 42; D II.119 (at Vesālī); S II.280; V.321; A II.51, 197; III.298; DhA I.37, 38; III.413.
Upaṭṭhāpana (nt.) [fr. upa + sthā] attendance, service Vin IV. 291.
Upaṭṭhita [pp. of upaṭṭhahati or upatiṭṭhāti, cp. BSk. upasthita Divy 281, 342] -- 1. furnished provided, served, got ready, honoured with Sn 295 (°asmiŋ yaññasmiŋ); J V.173 (annena pānena); Pv I.52 (= sajjita paṭiyatta PvA 25); II.98 (= payirupāsita PvA 116); PvA 132. <-> 2. come, come about, appeared, arrived; present, existing Sn 130 (bhattakāle upaṭṭhite when mealtime has come), 898; Dh 235; Miln 274; PvA 124 (dānakāle °e). <-> 3. standing up (ready), keeping in readiness M I.77; A II.206; Sn 708 (= ṭhito C.); Pv II.953 (ready for service, serving, waiting upon cp. PvA 135.
--sati with ready attention, one whose attention is fixed, concentrated Vin I.63; D III.252, 282; S IV.186; A III. 251; Pug 25. Upaṭṭheti [Caus. of upaṭṭhahati] to make serve or attend; sakkaccaŋ u. (with acc.) to bestow respect (upon) Vin IV.275.
fut. °essati Vin IV.291. to place, fix (parimukhaŋ satiŋ upaṭṭhapetvā) Vibh. 244. Upad̤ayhati [upa + d̤ayhati] to be burnt up Miln 277.
Upad̤d̤ha (adj.--nt.) [upa + ad̤d̤ha, used abs. whereas ad̤d̤ha only in compn., cp. also BSk. upārdha Divy 86, 144, 514; AvS I.211, 240] half Vin I.281 (°kāsina); II.200 (°āsana); J III.11 (°rajja); Vism 320 (°gāma); DhA I.15, 205 (°uposathakamma); II.85; KhA 239 (°gāthā); SnA 298; VvA 38, 61, 120; PvA 209, 276.
Upatappati [upa + tappati1)] to be vexed or tormented J V.90; DhsA 42. Upatāpa [fr. upa + tap] vexation, trouble Vism 166.

Upatāpana (nt.) [upa + tāpana] vexation, tormenting, torture J IV.13; ThA 243.
Upatāpika (adj.) [fr. upatāpa] causing pain, molesting J II.224.
Upatāpeti [upa + tāpeti] to cause pain, to vex, torment, harass J II.178, 224; IV.11; DhsA 42 (vibādhati +).
Upatiṭṭhati [upa + sthā, cp. upaṭṭhahati, °ṭṭhāti etc.] lit. "to stand by", to look after, to worship Pv III.118; J II.73 (ādiccaŋ = namassamāno tiṭṭhati C.); Miln 231 (ger. °tiṭṭhitvā); J V.173 (°tiṭṭhate). pp. upaṭṭhita (q. v.).
Upatta [upa + akta, pp. of añj] smeared, spread over M I.343; J I.399.
Upatthaddha [upa + thaddha, pp. of upatthambhati] <-> 1. stiff Vin III.37 (angāni). -- 2. supported or held up by, resting on, founded on, relying on Th 1, 1058, 1194; 2, 72 (yobbanena); J I.47 (V. 267: mettābalena); V. 121, 301; Kvu 251
(cakkhu dhamm° "when it is the medium of an idea"); Nett 117; Miln 110 (kāruñña--bal°).
Upatthambha [fr. upa + stambh] -- 1. a support, prop, stay Miln 355, 415, 417; Sdhp 565. -- 2. relief, ease Vin III.112. -- 3. encouragement J V.270; DhA I.279.
Upatthambhaka (adj. nt.) [fr. upatthambha) holding up, supporting, sustaining DhsA 153.
Upatthambhana (nt.) = upatthambha Miln 36; J I.447; DA I.124; ThA 258; Vism 279.
Upatthambhita [pp. of upatthambheti] propped up, supported, sustained J I.107; Miln 36; DA I 234; PvA 117 (puñña--phal°), 148 (utu--āhārehi u.).
Upatthambheti [upa + thambheti, Caus. of thambhati] to make firm, shore up, support, prop up J I.127 [ppr. °ayamāna), 447; DA I.113; DhA III.73 (°ayamāna ppr.). <-> pp. upatthambhita.
Upatthara [fr. upa + stṛ] a (floor) covering, carpet, rug D I.103 (rath°); J II.126 (pabbat°); II.534. Upatheyya [for upadheyya, see Trenckner, Notes 6216] a cushion J VI.490, 513.
Upadaŋsitar [n. ag. fr. upadaŋseti] one who shows Pug 49 (where upadhaŋsita is to be corrected to upad°, as already
pointed out by Morris J P T S. 1887, 126. The word seems to be a crux to commentators, philologists, and translators, like upadaŋseti. Kern, Toev. s. v. keeps to the reading upah°, tries to connect it with Sk. dharṣati & trsls. "one who confirms". The Pug A leaves the word unexplained).
Upadaŋseti [= upadasseti with °aŋs° for °ass° like dhanseti = Sk. dharṣayati, haŋsa = harṣa etc. only in poetical
passages] to cause to appear, to manifest M II.120; S I. 64, 65 (of gods, to become resplendent, to show divers colour--tones); A II.84 = III.139 = 264 = Pug 49 (to show pleasure); Th I.335, to bring forth (a goad, and so incite, urge on); Vin IV.309.
Upadasseti (upa + dasseti, Caus. of drś, cp. also upadaŋseti] to make manifest, to show Miln 276, 316, 347.
Upadahati [upa + dahati1] to put down, supply, furnish, put on; give, cause, make Vin IV.149; D II.135 (vippaṭisāraŋ); A I.203 (dukkhaŋ); Miln 109, 139, 164, 286, 383. grd. pass. °dahātabba to be given or caused Vin II.250 = A III.197 (vippaṭisāra). Cp. upadhi.
Upadāyaka (adj.) (--°) [fr. upa + dā] giving, bestowing Sdhp 319.
Upadiṭṭha [pp. of upadisati] pointed out, put forth, specified Miln 144 (pañha).

Upadisati [upa + disati] to point out, show, advise, specify J V. 457 (sippaŋ); Miln 21 (dhamma--maggaŋ). -- pp. upadiṭṭha (q. v.).
Upadissati [upa + dissati] to be seen (open), to be shown up, to be found out or discovered Sn 140 (pres. upadissare = °nti SnA 192).
Upadeva [upa + deva, on use of upa in this meaning see upa 5] a secondary, lesser, minor god PvA 136.
Upadesa [fr. upadisati] pointing out, indication, instruction, advice PvA 26 (tadupadesena read for tadupād°; KhA 208 differs at id. p.); KhA 100; Sdhp 227.
Upaddava [upa +